The Canadian Handbook For Careers in Psychological Science 1575306945

The Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science
THE CANADIAN HANDBOOK FOR

CAREERS IN PSYCHOLOGICAL SCIENCE
Meghan Norris
The Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science by Meghan Norris is licensed under a Creative Commons
Attribution-NonCommercial 4.0 International License, except where otherwise noted.
Copyright is held by the respective chapter authors. All chapters are licensed under CC BY NC 4.0.
CONTENTS
Foreword vii
Dedication x
1. An Introduction to Careers in the Psychological Sciences 1
2. Introduction to Career Development 22
3. Research Methods in the Psychological Sciences 52
4. The Essence of Ethics for Psychologists and Aspiring Psychologists 82
5. Clinical Psychological Science 130
6. Applications and Careers for Counsellors and Counselling Psychologists 151
7. Social Psychology 174
8. Developmental Psychology 195
9. Neuroscience and Careers 220
10. Industrial/Organizational Psychology 240
11. Psychology and the Law in Canada 258
12. Sport Psychology 282
13. Environmental Psychology 308
14. Applications and careers in community psychology: Practicing in settings, systems, and 330
communities to build well-being and promote social justice
15. Psychology in the Military 354

FOREWORD
When I started university in 2001, I did not intend to major in psychology. My plan was
to start out in a 3-year Bachelor of Arts degree, get my feet on the ground, and then move
into an Honours Bachelor of Science degree in my quest to earn a PhD in kinesiology. Like
many, my career trajectory was not at all what I had expected.
I still love the field of kinesiology, but along my way, I became fascinated with
psychological science. A large part of this was due to phenomenal mentors who helped me
to better understand the questions I was (and still am!) truly passionate about.
This book is written in thanks to those mentors—I’m aware that not everyone meets the
right mentor at the right time to help clarify possible career paths. By compiling chapters
written by experts across Canada, I’m hopeful this book might be the right resource at the
right time for future psychological scientists who are finding their own career paths.
I’m going to give away the ending to this book before we start. What can you do with
training in psychology? I have 2 answers to this question—one more general, and one more
specific.
The general answer is: a lot. As you will learn about in Chapter 1, employers desire
attributes including:
• analytic and quantitative skills
• problem-solving skills
• written and oral communication
• leadership
Evidence-based psychology programs all explicitly include content related to these

attributes. For example,
• Statistics courses teach skills in data collection, analysis, management, and reporting.
• Methods courses teach how to design a study to test a hypothesis while carefully
considering issues related to sample size, replicability, confounds, and generalizability.
• Students in psychology learn to search for, interpret, and apply scholarly research.
• Many students also engage in writing, oral presentations, ethics training, and data
collection as a research assistant.
These experiences all build valuable and marketable skills for careers both in and out of
academia. Thus, one strategy when looking for jobs is to go look at job requirements in a
vii
viii Meghan Norris
posting—you might find that you meet the requirements for more jobs that you initially
expect.
The more specific answer is based on my opinion and experience. I recommend working
backwards when looking for specific career paths. Find examples of what could be your one-
day “dream job.” You might do this by going to the websites of your favourite organizations.
Identify current employees in roles that you one day would like to have. Using tools like
LinkedIn, identify the career trajectory that brought them to those jobs. For example, it’s
not likely that someone begins their career as CEO of Microsoft. What career experiences
helped those professionals to develop the expertise needed for your some-day dream jobs?
Once you’ve identified some of these key career milestones, you can begin identifying
opportunities that are available to you where you are now to help you get there.
Throughout this book you will learn more about career search strategies, career
opportunities related to psychology, and just some of the many ways that psychological
science has been applied to opportunities and challenges facing our society. I want to
highlight that this book is not grounded in “pop-psychology.” Indeed, many harms have
been caused by the misunderstanding and misapplication of psychology. For this reason,
this book emphasizes the rigorous application of scholarly work to maximize benefits and
minimize harm at the front lines.
As with any science, the discipline of psychology continues to evolve. I hope that in the
next 10 years, we know significantly more than we know now and that our methods and
applications will be stronger than they are today. Thank you in advance to the students
reading this who will go on to do great work, building healthier and stronger communities.
I want to thank the contributors to this book: I’m inspired by the many people who
dedicated their time, effort, and expertise towards this open access resource so that this
knowledge can be freely shared. Finally, I want to express sincere thanks to the students who
participated in the development of this book by sharing their feedback and insights–thank
you!
Amy Carpenter
Meghan Costello
Hailley Dias
Kaitlyn Forbes
Diana Ingham
Sally Lee
Su Hyun Lim
Hope Mitchell
Olena Anna Pankiw
Shoshanna Paperny
Prarthana Pathak
Emma Rooney
Shahnawaz Towheed
Talya Wollner
A note on revisions: As with any new book, and any electronic source, there may be a time
when a link is broken, or a typo is found. There may also be ways for us to increase the
accessibility of the book based on the experiences of readers (e.g., editing how AltText was
The Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science ix
used, etc). In instances like these, please email Meghan Norris at [email protected]
and revisions will be made directly into this version.
Substantive content changes will not be made in this “live” version. Any new versions of
this book completed in collaboration with Meghan Norris will be published as a new edition.
This version of the book, though widely applicable, focuses on the Canadian context. It is
hoped that others might also adapt this source for their contexts, providing reference to this
original source. Suggestions for citation format can be found at the end of each chapter.
Please reference this chapter as

Norris, M. E. (2019). Foreward. In M. E. Norris (Ed.), The Canadian Handbook for Careers
in Psychological Science. Kingston, ON: eCampus Ontario. Licensed under CC BY NC 4.0.
Retrieved from https://ecampusontario.pressbooks.pub/psychologycareers/front-matter/
foreword/
DEDICATION
To my friends, colleagues, and mentors: I hope that this book helps to spark in others others
the curiosity that you continue to inspire in me.
Image source: https://binged.it/2rbC44b
x
[1]
AN INTRODUCTION TO CAREERS IN THE

PSYCHOLOGICAL SCIENCES
Meghan E. Norris, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University
Tyson W. Baker, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University
WELCOME TO PSYCHOLOGICAL SCIENCE
Welcome to the world of psychological science–I’m so thrilled to share the world of

psychological science with you. If you are feeling apprehensive about the word “science,”
don’t let it throw you off. Although psychology is a science (more on this below!), I want to
encourage you to think of science like a power tool: you might be a bit apprehensive at first,
but once you learn how to use the tool, things become incredibly exciting. You will get some
information on the tool of science in this chapter, with more to come in the chapters to
follow.
With our science-power-tool in hand, we can systematically explore, evaluate, understand,
and solve questions that we care about. For example, understanding how, when, and why the
brain can re-write itself is a) cool, and b) allows us to use this information in contexts such
as everyday learning, and recovery from trauma. Science allows us to measure and evaluate
efficacy of treatments, including psychotherapy, providing us evidence that a specific
treatment is worthwhile and won’t cause harm. Science allows us to understand basic
behavioural phenomena like bystander apathy (the tendency for bystanders to not intervene
in an emergency), and then it allows us to create interventions based in empirical evidence
that will facilitate bystander engagement. Applying scientific methods allows us to create
better communications so that people will behave in healthier ways, to design playgrounds
to promote active play, to create healthier and more efficient work-places, to develop
prevention and harm-reduction programs that work, and to optimize sport performance
( just to name a few benefits). By using the scientific method to systematically explore
questions like this, we a) can communicate more effectively with our colleagues in other
areas by virtue of a common framework, and b) most importantly, have confidence that we
are making decisions about how to proceed in any context with the support of empirical
evidence.
1
2 An Introduction to Careers in the Psychological Sciences
Notice that there are many contexts in which we can apply psychological science. In this
book, we are only going to cover some of the many contexts where psychological science is
relevant. Notably, I’m hopeful that future editions will cover more in-depth areas including
cognitive psychology, school psychology, the psychology of teaching and learning, and
disability management. For now, I’m hopeful this text will provide a strong foundation that
we can jump from.
With that, let’s dig in.
WHAT IS PSYCHOLOGICAL SCIENCE?
Although the terms psychology and psychological science can be used interchangeably,
it is important at this point to re-state that this book approaches psychology as a science.
Psychology is the scientific study of brain and behaviour. This means that in the quest
to understand brain and behaviour, the scientific method is applied. Thus, those training
in the field of psychological science are developing the skills to notice patterns, develop
hypotheses, systematically test those hypotheses through measurement, draw conclusions,
and use those conclusions to create or refine hypotheses in an ongoing process that
continually gives us a more accurate and precise understanding of brain and behaviour.
To establish clear boundaries, psychology is not using gut intuition to understand people.
Psychology is not making unfounded assumptions. Psychology is not mind reading. Instead,
psychology is doing careful background research. Psychology is carefully collecting
observations in a systematic way. Psychology is ensuring that observations are collected
in an ethical way. Psychology is having strong understanding of research methods and
data analytics so as to have the tools to carefully evaluate quality of evidence. Psychology
is having awareness of validity, reliability, and generalizability of research findings to
appropriately apply research in practice and future research. Psychology is ensuring that
ethical responsibilities are met. In this book, we will highlight the ways in which the scientific
method has been used to understand brain and behaviour, and we will help you to make
important connections between training in the psychological sciences and the many careers
that this training prepares you for.
Highlighting the reason this book was created, surprisingly (to us), despite developing skills
and knowledge in the science that underlies the wide variety of applications of psychological
science, many students do not immediately see the value of their undergraduate degree
in psychology when it comes time to employment (Borden & Rajecki, 2000). One goal of
this book is to overcome this gap: psychology is an incredibly popular major (e.g., Higher
Education Research Institute, 2008), and students who receive training in psychology
develop concrete skills and knowledge that employers want. This book was carefully curated
to highlight the many ways you can apply your training in psychology to a wide variety
of careers. Further, this book was carefully curated to highlight the many ways in which
others have applied their training in psychology to solve important questions related to the
brain and behaviour. As with any science, we are continually developing and learning. If you
are interested in the brain and behaviours, generally speaking, and if you get excited to ask
questions, search for answers, and then to apply what you’ve learned, you are in the right
place. If you are feeling unsure, that’s okay. Hopefully the following chapters shed new light
on the field of psychological science to help you as you develop your long term career goals.
If you decide that psychology is not for you, that’s also a win: it’s important that you find an
The Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science 3
area to work in that meets your personal goals. It’s likely that you will interact with someone
who is working from a psychological science framework during your career, and we hope
this content gives you a common framework from which to work.
WHAT DO EMPLOYERS WANT
According to a survey of employers conducted by the National Association of Colleges and

Employers (2016), the top 10 most highly rated attributes of job candidates were:
1. Leadership
2. Ability to work in a team
3. Communication skills (written)
4. Problem-solving skills
5. Communication skills (verbal)
6. Strong work ethic
7. Initiative
8. Analytical/quantitative skills
9. Flexibility/adaptability
10. Technical skills
Although many students might not see how their psychology degree is relevant for the
workforce (Borden & Rajecki, 2000), undergraduate training in psychology directly and
intentionally addresses at least the first 9 of the top 10 rated attributes desired by employers,
and likely all 10. Indeed, the American Psychological Association specifies 5 goals and related
learning outcomes for undergraduate programs in psychology which have direct overlap
with the above listed attributes that employers seek (American Psychological Association,
2013):
Goal 1: Knowledge Base in Psychology

1.1 Describe key concepts, principles, and overarching themes in psychology
1.2 Develop a working knowledge of psychology’s content domains
1.3 Describe applications of psychology
Goal 2: Scientific Inquiry and Critical Thinking

2.1 Use scientific reasoning to interpret psychological phenomena
2.2 Demonstrate psychology information literacy
2.3 Engage in innovative and integrative thinking and problem solving
2.4 Interpret, design, and conduct basic psychological research
2.5 Incorporate sociocultural factors in scientific inquiry
Goal 3: Ethical and Social Responsibility in a Diverse World

3.1 Apply ethical standards to evaluate psychological science and practice
3.2 Build and enhance interpersonal relationships
3.3 Adopt values that build community at local, national, and global levels
Goal 4: Communication
4.1 Demonstrate effective writing for different purposes
4.2 Exhibit effective presentation skills for different purposes
4.3 Interact effectively with others
Goal 5: Professional Development

5.1 Apply psychological content and skills to career goals
5.2 Exhibit self-efficacy and self-regulation
5.3 Refine project-management skills
5.4 Enhance teamwork capacity
5.5 Develop meaningful professional direction for life after graduation
Thus, there appears to be a gap such that undergraduate students in psychology are failing
to see the strong connections between their developing skills, and the attributes desired by
the job market.
Take a moment, can you see how your training in psychology maps onto employer’s highly rated
attributes? See Appendix 1 at the end of this chapter for a worksheet to help you identify concrete
examples of your skills and knowledge. This can help you as you create cover letters, and build an
elevator pitch.
This book will show you many examples of how you can use your training across a variety
of careers, including those outside of “psychology.” To help demonstrate how training
in psychology can translate to many careers, it is helpful to start from a common
understanding of the foundation of psychological science.
PSYCHOLOGY AND THE SCIENTIFIC METHOD
To belabour the point, psychology is an empirical science. This means that, in addition
to theory and logic, most professionals who work in the psychological sciences rely on the
collection, analysis, and interpretation of data to inform their work. This is important: we
know from research that humans can fall prey to biases including the availability heuristic
(the tendency to assume that what comes to mind easily is likely accurate, e.g., Tversky
& Kahneman, 1973), false consensus effects (the tendency to assume that our behaviours
and opinions are similar with most other people, e.g., Ross, Greene, & House, 1977), and
confirmation bias (the tendency to see information which is confirming rather than
disconfirming, e.g., Nickerson, 1998). Relying on data (especially data verified by other
scientists) to inform our professional opinions helps us to not only limit the effects of these
biases, but it also helps us to gain representative insights into phenomenon of interest that
are more likely to reflect the true nature of the phenomenon of interest.
As we look with an empirical lens at the brain and behaviours, and as you develop
your own professional opinions, you are encouraged to always consider the following 3
concepts when you are considering information presented to you: validity, reliability, and
generalizability.
Validity is the degree to which a measure or design accurately captures the construct or
process of interest. This means that when you are reading about any finding, you should first
ask yourself questions including “are these researchers measuring what they think they are
measuring, or did they make a mistake?” “Is this research actually addressing the concept it’s
claiming to?”
Reliability is the degree to which a finding consistently appears across time and/or
situations. This means that when you are reading about any finding, you should ask yourself
questions including “do I think this effect will appear in a similar context if this is done a year
from now?” “Do I think there are other variables that might influence whether this effect
will appear?” “Do I think there is a better measure of this effect that will more consistently
measure this effect?”
Generalizability is the degree to which similar findings are likely to occur in other contexts.
This means that when you are reading about any finding, you should ask yourself questions
including “do I think that this effect will also appear in other groups of people? If not, why?”
“Why should (or shouldn’t) this effect appear in other groups of people?”
A final consideration you should make when engaging with research is critically
important: the ethics of the research. You should always ask yourself whether the work
you are doing (or learning about) meets the Canadian Psychological Association’s principles
for ensuring Dignity of Persons, Responsible Caring, Integrity in Relationships, and
Responsibility to Society (Canadian Psychological Association, 2017). You can learn more
about this in our chapter on research ethics.
Notice that you have an important role to play here: it is your job as a reader of science
to also use your developing skills to ask tough questions of other researchers. Again, even
scientists are human, and even with careful work, we can all make mistakes. We need to trust
that our colleagues (that now includes you!) will ask tough questions of our studies. From
this point on, it is your professional responsibility as a developing psychological scientist
to ask questions about validity, reliability, and generalizability if they arise, and also to ask
questions about other aspects of research including ethics. You will learn more about asking
questions of research in the coming chapters.
CAREERS IN PSYCHOLOGICAL SCIENCE
An undergraduate degree in psychological science is effective preparation for many types

of careers. For example, as a result of strong training in the scientific method, students in
the psychological sciences are equipped to distinguish causal and non-causal relationships
between variables. This means that students can identify if one variable causes another, or
if two variables are related but one doesn’t necessarily cause the other (i.e., if variables are
correlated). Insights such as these prove valuable in many contexts. For example, when
a client presents claiming that Treatment X cured an ailment, a practitioner trained in
the psychological sciences should immediately consider the validity, reliability, and
generalizability of the claim. Specifically, the treatment may not be valid–perhaps is there
a lurking third variable, such as passage of time which often is associated with a reduction
in symptoms. To put this into context, Treatment X could cure the cold after 7 days, but
most instances of the cold resolve on their own in around 7 days. A student with training
in psychological science would design an experiment to test the effects of Treatment X to

see whether it is indeed an effective treatment. If we want to make accurate causal claims,
then there are proper ways to run the experiments (you will learn more about experimental
design in our chapter on research methods). You may have noticed that this example isn’t
even psychological in nature. This highlights that psychologists are trained in the scientific
method, which can be applied in any area that follows the scientific method.
As overviewed above, students who train in psychological science receive training in both
skills and knowledge that are important to employers. Thus, there are many, many career
options available to a student who has trained in psychology. Indeed, a challenge that many
students in psychology is not “what can I do?,” but rather “how can I choose what to do?
IDENTIFYING POSSIBLE PATHWAYS
You may find yourself asking one of two questions: what do I want to do, and/or what
can I do with training in psychology. Both of these are good questions, and may require
different processes to reach satisfying answers. Below is just a brief summary of two search
strategies that I often use with students as we explore career opportunities: Broad Search
Strategies and Targeted Search Strategies. Broad search strategies best answer the question
“what do I want to do,” whereas targeted search strategies addresses “what can I do?”. Note
that the below methods are not evidence-based in that I (Meghan) don’t have data to support
their use beyond my own personal experience in working with students. Specialists in career
development elaborate on career search and development in Chapter 2.
The Broad Search Strategy
This is a strategy for when you have no idea what you want to do, and you are seeking to
identify careers that meet your personal interest and long-term development goals. This
search strategy uses backwards planning: rather than starting from where you are now and
building out, this strategy looks for an end-point and guides you in planning backwards.
Step 1: The Initial Search: Identify 5-10 jobs across organizations that you think look
interesting, even if they aren’t jobs that you are qualified for (yet!).
Step 2: Identifying Common Requirements: Do you notice any common requirements

among these jobs? If so, this common requirement might be a qualification you consider
working towards.
Step 3: Identify Exemplars: Individuals normally change jobs throughout their lifetime. The
average length of time that an employee had been with an employer across all US sectors
was only 4.2 years (Bureau of Labor and Statistics, 2018). It’s one thing to read a job posting,
but it’s another to see the journey to get there. In this step, identify individuals who have
jobs that are of interest to you, using tools such as LinkedIn. Are there any early career
experiences of desired exemplars that are relevant for you?
Step 4: Planning for the Next Steps: Once you have identified common requirements and
typical pathways among your careers of interest, you are in a position to start planning your
next steps on your similar pathway. If you have learned that a specific graduate program
is required for your careers of interest, it’s time to start searching for graduate programs.
Similar to the broad career search steps, identify graduate programs that are of interest
to you. What are their requirements? Are there common undergraduate courses that you
need for admission? Consider enrolling in those courses now. Are there common volunteer
or research assistantship requirements for admission? If so, consider applying for those
positions now so that you meet that requirement.
If you are unsure about graduate admission requirements, it is always a good idea to
contact your program of interest directly. Requirements and space availability can change
year-to-year. Only that specific program has the most up-to-date information on their
admissions process.
The Targeted Search Strategy
Sometimes career searches can be much more pragmatic. For example, the desired career
might be within a certain geographic location that earns a certain salary.
This Targeted Search Strategy is intended to be a career search strategy, not a job search
strategy. That is, if you are asking the question “what should I do with my life in terms of a
career?” this may be a helpful strategy. If you are looking for a specific job (i.e., you have your
credentials and are actively job searching), you will want to check in with your local career
assistance office for guidance.
The Targeted Search Strategy involves going directly to a source and evaluating careers
on your criteria of interest. Many resources exist that give specific and concrete information
on career specifics. The Government of Canada’s Job Bank (Government of Canada, 2018)
is one such resource. This free, online resource provides information on many occupations,
the typical educational training paths required for a variety of occupations, average salary
by geographic location, and the job availability outlooks associated with many careers. The
website uses the National Occupational Classification system (NOC) in classifying jobs. In
this classification system, each occupation is assigned a nationally recognized 4-digit code.
Similar jobs are typically classified by the same NOC code, although jobs classified together
may vary on important dimensions depending on your search goals. The NOC system is
helpful to know about, as it may help you to streamline your job search by exploring NOC
codes rather than searching for keywords. https://www.jobbank.gc.ca/explorecareers
Although you are encouraged to go to the Government of Canada Job Bank website
directly to search for career information (it is updated often!), we have compiled career
paths related to Psychology from the Government of Canada Job Bank, and have built
an Open Educational Resource with this information. We encourage you to use it as a
starting point if you are feeling overwhelmed: Careers Related to Psychology Sourced
from The Government of Canada’s Job Bank Resource https://github.com/MeghanNorris/
PsychologyCareers
As you look through these careers, we encourage you to think about how the knowledge
and skills you are developing in your education can be applied to the careers included. You
might find that Activity 1 in the Appendix can help you to make connections between a
generic career description and your specific skill and knowledge expertise. For example, as
a student with training in psychology, you likely have developed skills related to team work,
written and oral communication, data management and analysis, and problem solving.
We want to encourage you to use the Government of Canada Job Bank in multiple
ways. For example, not only is the Government of Canada Job Bank a helpful guide for
a career search, but it is also helpful for those who are actively applying for jobs. When
you receive a job offer, especially for professional careers, there may be an opportunity
for negotiations. The Government of Canada Job Bank is an excellent resource for bench-
marking average rates of pay, and for bench-marking your credentials in light of a specific
occupation. Thus, when asked for your expected salary, you might respond with “Based on
data from the Government of Canada, I would like to suggest that my salary would be in the
range of $29-$32/hour.” Notice again this tendency to seek data to inform an opinion: your
psychology professors repeatedly asking you for evidence develops data-driven skills that
will help you in many areas of your life!
In addition to the resources provided above, there are many additional resources available.
One that we would like to direct your attention to is hosted by the American Psychological
Association, and is quite comprehensive in the information it provides:
Data Tools from the Center for Workforce Studies (American Psychological Association):
https://www.apa.org/workforce/data-tools/
COMMON PROFESSIONAL SKILLS, KNOWLEDGE, AND ETIQUETTE BEHAVIOURS
There are a number of common skills and professional behaviours that span career
opportunities and that either I wish I knew as a student, or that I wish students knew. Note
that this section does not highlight professional skills in terms of practicing psychology in a
clinical sense, but rather professional skills at a more general level. Specific skills related to
sub-disciplines in psychology will be addressed in the chapters to come, and in courses that
you choose to pursue.
SEARCHING FOR EVIDENCE
A background in peer-review
In psychological science, our gold standard for evidence is peer-reviewed scholarly

evidence. In the context of empirical research, peer-review is a system where an individual
(or team) conducts a study to answer a research question, writes a manuscript describing
that study, and then submits the manuscript for “peer-review” at a specific journal chosen
by the author(s). The editor of that journal then chooses typically 2-3 experts in the area
(reviewers) to read and critique the submitted manuscript. The reviewers provide feedback
to the authors and editor, and make recommendations as to whether the paper should
be published in that specific journal, revised and resubmitted for further consideration
to that specific journal, or rejected from that journal. The editor then goes through the
reviewer feedback and makes a decision as to whether the manuscript will be published,
and under what conditions if revisions are requested. Very few papers are accepted without
any required revisions. If authors choose not to make the requested revisions, of if their
paper has been rejected, they are able to submit their manuscript to another journal of their
choosing (with or without edits).
The entire research-and-peer-review process can take months, and typically years from
start to finish. The feedback from reviewers is intentionally very critical, with the goal of
ensuring that rigorous and accurate research is published. Research that does not meet
the threshold for rigor and/or accuracy is unlikely to be published in a high calibre peer-
reviewed journal. You may have submitted term papers for classes; this is the early training
that allows students to gain expertise writing scholarly reports. With enough training and
practice, students become experts,and those who choose to can submit manuscripts for
publication, become the peers for the peer-review system, and train students of their own.
Academic journals have differing levels of impact—impact is a rough measure of how much
people read and cite certain journals. Some journals have a higher readership resulting
from a very high calibre of research due to a much higher threshold for publication.
For example, some high-threshold journals might require multiple studies that
comprehensively test many factors related to a research question to be considered for
publication. Other lower-threshold journals might publish research that is interesting but
does not yet have a great deal of empirical support. Thus, not all academic journals are
considered equal. One proxy of journal quality is their impact factor, usually available on
their webpage. Higher impact factors mean greater readership. Note that this is a proxy for
quality: high readership does not mean rigorous research. Many tabloid newspapers have
high readership, but it doesn’t mean the content is accurate. Highly specialized journals may
have fantastic research, but only be read by a handful of specialized researchers because
there are only a few experts in the world. Readers must always be thoughtful while they
read research, and be actively considering the degree to which the research is valid, reliable,
generalizable, and ethical (among other things, but these 4 are a great start!). This is
fundamental to what reviewers and good researchers do.
Where to find peer-reviewed articles
Members of the public typically have to pay to read scholarly research, including peer-
reviewed research (but, see Changes Happening in Peer-Reviewed Research section below). If
you are currently a member of a university community, you likely have access to scholarly
research through your library. Universities pay sometimes millions of dollars to have access
to academic journals (e.g., Bergstrom, Courant, McAfee, & Williams, 2014). You are able
to go into your campus library to access scholarly research, or, if you are accessing the
internet from campus or have access to a proxy-server, you can typically go to a website
like http://www.scholar.google.com and be able to access the journals your institution is
subscribed to. If you type in keywords, similar to a regular Google search, the Google
Scholar search engine will populate with scholarly articles. Again, remember that this
doesn’t mean they are quality search hits, but they will be scholarly in nature. You should
always be asking yourself “to what degree is this research valid, reliable, generalizable, and
ethical?”
If you have a more targeted literature search, you might use a targeted search engine
such as PsycInfo which searches Psychology resources. To determine the best targeted
search engine, you might use a database identification tool through your library. Here
is one example of a database identification tool from Queen’s University:
https://library.queensu.ca/search/databases/browse/all
If you are struggling with finding scholarly research relevant for your question of interest,
librarians are trained in conducting literature searches. Their services are typically free for
you to access, and you can find librarians in libraries both at educational campuses, as well
as in public libraries. When conducing any type of literature search, you would be wise to
consult with a librarian.
Changes Happening in Peer-Reviewed Research
For many good reasons, changes are happening to the process of publishing research in
psychological science. Although this will be reviewed in more detail in the Research Methods
chapter of this book, there are a few important changes happening that you should know
in the context of reading and interpreting psychological research for your professional
development.
The process of peer-review described above continues to mostly hold true. However,
recently pre-registration has been added to the process. Pre-registration is submitting the
research question(s), and basic research design plan before the research is conducted. That is,
the research plan is registered prior to conducting the research itself.
In some cases, this pre-registered plan is peer-reviewed and researchers get feedback
about potential flaws in design before conducting the study. This use of the pre-registration
process has great merit in the facilitation of getting constructive criticism early in the
process at a time when it can be used to tweak research design. Imagine if your professor
gave your term paper feedback before you submitted it. Would that result in a stronger final
paper?
In other cases, the pre-registration details are kept temporarily private, to become public
once the research is complete to ensure that researchers are conducting the research
consistent with their pre-registered intentions. This is intended to minimize researcher bias
(intentional or unintentional) during the research process.
Another change happening in the world of scholarly publications is a trend towards open-
access publishing. Open-access publishing is publishing in such a way that readers do not
need to pay a fee to access the work. As noted above, accessing scholarly research can be
expensive and prohibitive. Some academic journals, and some textbooks (this one, as an
example!), have been written intentionally to be open-access. In addition to pragmatics
regarding how to make the open-access system sustainable (e.g., who pays for server
maintenance, etc), one downside is that typically open-access resources are viewed as having
less prestige than those publications that require payment to access and, as a result, authors
do not often consider them as a primary destination for research publication. It seems that
a shift is now underway, though. Some open-access journals, including PLOS ONE (2019),
employ a peer-review system and have grown in credibility. As scholarly research becomes
more available to the public (which personally, we think is an excellent improvement), it is
critical that the public has the tools to critically read and evaluate this research. Again, always
be asking the degree to which research findings are valid, reliable, generalizable, and ethical
(there are other things to consider, but this is a good first cut!).
BUSINESS ETIQUETTE
As with many professional contexts, there are professional situations that you are likely to
find yourself in while working in a variety of different career trajectories, and there are some
common business etiquette behaviours. These behaviours often are taught from mentors,
are rarely explicitly addressed, and may or may not actually be best practices.
To help ensure that you have awareness of these types of professional etiquette
behaviours, some are addressed below. Please read these with thoughtful caution, however.
Etiquette can change within a professional body (and oftentimes ought to change), and often
varies significantly across professional bodies. To give an example, in some professional

contexts it is perfectly appropriate to wear jeans and sneakers to a job interview. In others,
a full suit is expected. If you are ever in doubt about appropriate professional etiquette, ask
a trusted mentor. If you don’t have a trusted mentor, ask any friendly professor for some
advice. They may be able to steer you in the right direction. If you don’t have any friendly
professors, drop Meghan (editor of this book) an email and I will do my best to connect you
with a helpful resource that is close to you.
Some common business etiquette behaviours within psychological science are highlighted
next that will span many career trajectories, but again recognize that this can vary by
region, institution, and individual. Appropriate etiquette can change over time, and it may
be different within subsets of the population. If you are unsure of business etiquette (or if
you want to work to change it), please connect with a trusted advisor.
Addressing Professors
Many students coming into university from high school will address their professors as
“Mr./Ms. Lastname.” In a higher-education setting, professional titles should be used. In the
context of a North American university, instructors should professionally be referred to as
“Dr. Lastname” if they have a doctorate, or “Prof. Lastname” if they do not. This is not
true in other systems including the UK. In those systems, “Prof. Lastname” is used only
for those professors who have achieved full professorship. Note, female instructors should
never be referred to as “Miss” or “Mrs.,” unless specifically requested. These titles are used to
indicate a woman’s marital status which is irrelevant to her professional status. Relatedly, as
we learn more about the impacts of pro-nouns, gendered titles used to address individuals
may change.
In the event that you are unsure of how to address someone in their preferred way, for
example if you are unsure of whether a gendered title is appropriate, or whether you should
refer to someone by first name, there are appropriate ways to find out. In some cases, an
individual will be explicit in telling you how they preferred to be addressed. In other cases,
you might ask. For example, you might ask for permission to use someone’s first name if you
have a close collegial working relationship with them. An example of how to ask a question
like this is: “Dear Dr. Lastname, I want to ensure that I am addressing you appropriately.
What is your preferred way to be addressed?”
Please note that if a professor, or any professional, prefers to be called by their professional
title, this is perfectly appropriate: they are working in their professional setting and are
requesting to be called by their professional title. Let’s consider this in another context: A
police officer might be called Officer Jeffrey. It would be out of context to call Officer Jeffrey
“Mrs. Jeffrey” if Officer Jeffrey was in uniform. Likewise, it would be up to Officer Jeffrey if
she was willing for someone to call her “Sue” when she was on duty. Officer Jeffrey might
be comfortable with her partner calling her Sue, but not a member of the public that she
is serving. Notice that there is a great deal of context in this example, just as there is in any
interpersonal dynamic. If you are unsure of how to address your instructor, or any colleague,
a friendly email asking for their preferred way to be addressed is appropriate.
In a professional context, for example at a lecture, you should likely default to referring to
any colleague by professional title even if you have permission to use their first name. For
example, I introduce some of my best friends as “Dr. Lastname” in professional contexts.
Writing An Email
We all have questions, and an email is a common way to ask those questions to professors
and other professionals. Before sending an email to anyone, it is helpful to first ask yourself
a couple of questions.
1. What exactly is it that I need help with?

2. What are the best resources for me to get the needed help? For example, if you are
looking for deadline or absence policies, before sending an email you should first
check the syllabus of the course you are in (if in the context of a class), any previous
correspondence (do an email search), and relevant webpages. Some organizations,
including universities, also have discussion boards in their online platforms for
certain types of questions. If you have exhausted your resources and are needing
some extra support from an instructor or a boss, an email may be very appropriate.
It may be tempting to send an email to an employer or instructor similar to the way you
would send a text, especially if you have a quick question. Although this may be appropriate
if you know someone well and are engaged in an email conversation (as we often do
outside of professional contexts), text-style email is not typically an appropriate method for
professional communication. When emailing in a professional context, you want to ensure
the following information is included:
• a proper salutation
• who you are, and the context you are writing about
• a concise statement of your question/comment, overviewing what you’ve already done
to try to solve the problem or answer the question
• your full name and contact information, including your student number if relevant
Two sample email templates are below, although you should edit them prior to use so that
your own professional tone comes through:
Dear [Ms. CEO],
I am a new employee in your marketing department, and am writing to ask for clarification about
[Project X]. Specifically, I’ve [read through the request for proposal and have done research on our
competitors], but am unable to find information on [sales history]. My goal is to [create a thorough
document that has all relevant information to ensure our success]. Could you please direct me towards
more information?
Thanks for your time!
With kind regards,

Full name
Email address/phone number
Dear [Dr. Lastname],

I am a student in your [course name, and section]. I am writing to ask for [clarification on, further
information regarding, etc]. Specifically [give summary of the background research you’ve already done
e.g., consulted the syllabus], and my current understanding is [summary]. I am seeking clarification
about [specification of what is not understood]. Could you please provide me more information to help
me better understand?
Thanks for your time!
With kind regards,
Full Name
Student Number 0123456789
When using electronic communication, please remember that USING ALL CAPLOCKS
IS CONSIDERED YELLING. Excessive use of exclamation points can also be interpreted as
yelling!!! The way in which you type communicates tone. If sending an important email, you
might ask a friend or colleague to first read it over to ensure that the tone you are using is
appropriate for the context. If an email reads more harshly than intended, you might soften
it by adding an emoji (if professionally appropriate—there are boundaries on appropriate
use of emojis), or by acknowledging in text to the reader that the email reads more harshly
than you intend it to.
Leaving a voicemail
Sometimes an uncomfortable task, you will undoubtedly have to leave a voicemail at

some point during your professional career. When leaving a voicemail, we recommend that
you speak slowly, ensure that you give your name and a way to contact you for follow up.
Importantly, give this information twice! Sometimes there is a crack in the phone line and a
digit can’t be heard. Leaving your name and contact information twice helps to ensure that
your recipient gets all of the information they need to follow-up with you.
Asking for letters of reference/experience
Students are sometimes uneasy asking for letters of reference. Please know that each year,
most instructors get dozens of requests for letters of reference. I tell you this a.) to reassure
you that you are engaging in an expected professional behaviour by asking for a letter of
reference and b.) to help you understand what an effective request for a letter of reference
contains.
Instructors often teach dozens, and sometimes hundreds, of students in a given year.
Instructors also often teach multiple courses in a given academic year. As a result, although
you may have a great relationship with your instructor, and they know you well, they may
have forgotten some important details related to your professional interactions that could
be helpful in a letter. Below is the information that I (Meghan) request when students ask for
a letter of recommendation, along with my internal reasoning for asking the question. Your
letter-writers may request different information. Please consider this as a starting place, and
use the format provided by your letter-writer when requested:
General information to help set the context:
1. The nature of the programs you are applying to
A letter of reference for a specific job might be very different than application to graduate
school in psychology, which might be different from an application to another type of
program. Please give a brief overview of the program so that the letter can be framed
appropriately.
2. An overview of the submission process
Graduate school letters of reference are often submitted confidentially through an online
portal. Not all letters go through this process, and job letters can vary significantly in their
submission process. Please give a brief overview of how the process will work, and whether
letters should be directly addressed to a specific recipient (e.g., Dear Graduate Committee,
vs “Dear Ms. CEO”). Because reference letters have to be submitted in very specific ways,
it’s easiest to give these details right away either in an attached file or link to a webpage.
Be sure to include the deadline in your request, and give your referee at least two weeks
before the deadline.
Specific information to help write a strong letter:
1. Full name on record, preferred name and pronouns, and student number
Sometimes students have different preferred names from those on record, and I want to
make sure that those receiving the letter know who I am referring to. Having access to all
names, preferred pronouns, and the student number also helps letter writers to search my
records more effectively so that they can write a comprehensive letter.
2. All courses taken with me as instructor (including the year taken), the components
of those courses, and your overall grades
Sometimes courses change slightly across years, and the components of the course can
also change. Specifying the components in a course may help your letter writer to write
a stronger letter—for example, if there was a teamwork component, they can speak to
this. Remember that there are dozens of students in multiple courses asking for letters: by
providing this information in your request, you are making it much easier for your letter
writer, and you are demonstrating conscientious professional behaviours. Thus, this also
helps your letter writer when they comment on your professional skills!
3. Academic Achievements (e.g., Honours List, any other academic awards, conference
presentations, any publications if relevant)
Instructors often don’t get notice of your individual achievements, and are excited to
hear about them. By letting your letter writer know about these achievements, they can
include information about them in your letter. Even if your letter writer knows about the
achievement, a reminder is helpful.
4. Volunteer and work experience (both academic and non-academic)
In this section, include any volunteer or work experience that might be relevant for the
letter. Even if you volunteer in the lab of your letter writer, please include this. It helps to
know that you’ve provided a comprehensive record.
5. Non-academic Achievements
Have you done something great that isn’t related to your academics? This is important
and matters! Please be sure to tell us a bit about it.
Etiquette at a Conference
Depending on your area, appropriate business behaviours can vary. For example, some
conferences are very formal and require full business suits, whereas others are more
business-casual in nature. If you have the opportunity and resources to attend a conference,
it is appropriate to ask a trusted advisor about the level of formality at the conference,
including dress code. Some conferences have pictures on their website of previous
conferences, so you can see typical conference attire for yourself. If the dress code is
not obvious, you might ask your advisor, or even the organizer of the conference, “Is
there a dress-code at the conference?” Below, additional business etiquette considerations
are overviewed that are fairly common across contexts. We didn’t learn many of these
behaviours until after we graduated with PhDs, and wish we knew some of them earlier!
Nametags
Nametags should be worn on your right side. The logic is when you shake hands (with your
right hand), your colleague’s eyes can follow a relatively straight and natural path from your
shaking hand to your visible nametag while also comfortably make eye contact.
Your left side is where you would wear a pin, if relevant. The pin would thus be “over your
heart.”
The Elevator Pitch
Elevators used to be where all important people met. Okay, that’s not true, but the term
“The Elevator Pitch” refers to a description of your expertise that you can communicate to
someone in a few seconds (the length of an elevator ride). It’s the ultimate tl;dr (too long;
didn’t read) of your expertise.
It is worth your time to develop and practice an elevator pitch of your interests now. This
pitch can and will change with time, but you will be interacting with professors and potential
colleagues throughout your training. An elevator pitch should be maximum 60 seconds in
length and summarize your professional interests and experiences. For example, you might
use the following structure:
“I am a [undergraduate student/research assistant/graduate student] at [institution]

and I am interested in [general summary of area of interest].”
Notice that this is a very general and short professional summary about yourself. If the
person you are speaking with is interested to learn more, they are able to ask follow up
questions. They can also comfortably “get off of the elevator at their floor” (i.e., discontinue
the conversation) if unavailable for further follow-up.
The Dinner Table
So many glasses, plates, and cutlery. Whose is whose, and when should you use what?
Drinking glasses and bread plates: drinking glasses are to your right, and your bread plate
(small plate) is to your left. Here is a handy trick to help you remember:
By using your hands to make the letters “b” and “d,” you can have a handy reminder for what side your bread plate is on (left),
and what side your drink is on (right) when dining in a formal setting.
The “b” is your bread side (left), and the “d” is your drink side (right).
Forks: start farthest away from your plate, and work your way inwards with each course.
Food and Networking
Practice holding food and drink in your left hand during networking events so that your
right hand is free for shaking hands. Passing your food or drink to your left hand just isn’t
as smooth, especially if you have crumbs or condensation on your hand. You don’t want to
give a crummy handshake.
The Handshake
Handshakes can be awkward, especially if you haven’t practiced handshakes. It takes

practice to have a firm-but-not-painful handshake. It also takes practice to kindly decline
a handshake if you are uncomfortable or unable to shake a hand. It also takes practice to
adjust if your handshake is declined (it is not necessarily a social rejection if a handshake
is denied—many invisible conditions prevent handshaking). It also takes practice in shaking
hands with someone who has a visible disability if you are unsure how to proceed. Notice
that “practice” is repeated here. Your first few professional handshakes might be awkward,
and that’s to be expected. If the thought of giving handshakes makes you nervous, it is
worthwhile to reach out to a trusted mentor or career centre for guidance. For more
insights specifically on handshake behaviours with individuals who have a visible disability,
please see (https://styleforsuccess.com/blog/how-to-shake-hands-with-someone-with-a-
disability/). As with all interpersonal interactions, be aware that contexts can vary. Never
touch someone who gives indicators that they do not want to be touched (e.g., the person
steps away from you, and/or has closed body language). If you are unsure, a friendly verbal
greeting is more appropriate than potentially violating someone.
The Art of Thank You
In your career you will encounter many people who will go out of their way to help you
either in small or large ways. Although not expected, it can strengthen an interpersonal
relationship to send a genuine thank you to a person who has helped you in a meaningful
way. You can of course send an email of thanks, but in situations where someone has
significantly made the world a better place for you, sending a simple hand-written thank-
you card is often much appreciated. Indeed, we often underestimate how good receiving a
thank you can feel for our recipients (e.g., Kumar & Eply, 2018).
Are there other areas of professional knowledge and behaviours that you are unsure about?
If so, in addition to following up with a trusted mentor or career development office, please
feel free to send Meghan (the editor of this book) an email. We may include your question
in a future edition of this book!
HOW TO USE THIS BOOK
Building on themes highlighted in this introduction, this book has been created to provide
you with content on applications of psychological science and careers in psychological
science written by experts across Canada. These experts were once where you are: students
in a psyc course. Their chapters will vary somewhat in format to allow each sub-discipline’s
“voice” to come through, but all chapters have an intentional focus on both research and
application of psychological science, in addition to content regarding educational training
paths and career options.
We hope that this book highlights the many careers available to students who train in
the psychological sciences. We hope this book also provides you with new insights into the
many ways in which psychological sciences addresses important questions, and ultimately
influences the world around us in its application. As with anything you read, I encourage you
to always be considering questions related to validity, reliability, generalizability, and ethics
as you read this book. Indeed, this is how new research questions are often generated! In that
spirit, in case no one has done this already, I welcome you as a colleague in the psychological
sciences, and look forward to learning about your future work.
Activity 1: Identifying your skills

Norris & Baker, 2019
Below you will find the top 10 most highly rated attributes on behalf of employers
(National Association of Colleges and Employers, 2016). For each attribute, reflect on your
experiences and see whether you can identify a specific example of how you have displayed
or developed that attribute. For example, if in a course you had a team-based project that
you scored highly on, you should include that in your chart under the “ability to work in a
team” section. Have you taken a course that has required you to use software to analyze or
manage data? That can go under the “technical skills” section.
You likely won’t have an example for every box, and that’s okay! The goal is to identify
some specific examples so that you can rely on these to demonstrate strong attributes.
Volunteer experi- Paid work experi- Awards/honours

Coursework that
ence that demon- ence that demon- that demonstrate
demonstrates my
strates my skills strates my skills my skills and abil-
skills and ability
and ability and ability ity
Leadership
Ability to work
in a team
Communication
skills (written)
Problem-solv-
ing skills
Communication
skills (verbal)
Strong work
ethic
Initiative
Analytical/
quantitative
skills
Flexibility/
adaptability
Technical skills
REFERENCES
American Psychological Association (n.d.). Data Tools from the Center for Workforce Studies.
Retrieved from American Psychological Association website: https://www.apa.org/
workforce/data-tools/
American Psychological Association (2013). APA guidelines for the undergraduate psychology
major version 2.0. Retrieved from American Psychological Association website:
https://www.apa.org/ed/precollege/about/psymajor-guidelines.pdf
Bergstrom, T. C., Courant, P. N., McAfee, R. P., & Williams, M. A. (2014). Evaluating big deal
journal bundles. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 111(26), 9425-9430.
Borden, V. M., & Rajecki, D. W. (2000). First-year employment outcomes of psychology
baccalaureates: Relatedness, preparedness, and prospects. Teaching of Psychology, 27(3),
164-168.
Bureau of Labor and Statistics (2018). Employee tenure summary. Retrieved from Bureau of
Labor and Statistics website: https://www.bls.gov/news.release/tenure.nr0.htm
Canadian Psychological Association (2017). Canadian code of ethics for psychologists (4th ed.).
Retrieved from Canadian Psychological Association website: https://cpa.ca/docs/File/

Ethics/CPA_Code_2017_4thEd.pdf
Fuchs, E., & Flügge, G. (2014) Adult neuroplasticity: More than 40 years of research. Neural
Plasticity, 2014, 1-10. doi:10.1155/2014/541870
Goldstein, N. J., Cialdini, R. B., & Griskevicius, V. (2008). A room with a viewpoint: Using
social norms to motivate environmental conservation in hotels. Journal of Consumer
Research, 35(3), 472-482.
Google LLC (2019) Google Scholar [Search engine]. Retrieved from
https://scholar.google.ca/
Government of Canada (2018). Labour market information. Retrieved from Government of
Canada website: https://www.jobbank.gc.ca/explorecareers
Higher Education Research Institute. (2008). 2008 CIRP freshman survey. Retrieved from
Higher Education Research Institute website: http://www.heri.ucla.edu
Hundley, J., Elliott, K., & Therrien, Z.(2013). The efficacy and effectiveness of psychological
treatments. Ottawa, ON: Canadian Psychological Association. Retrieved from
https://www.cpa.ca/docs/File/Practice/
TheEfficacyAndEffectivenessOfPsychologicalTreatments_web.pdf
Kerr, T., MacPherson, D., & Wood, E. (2008). Establishing North America’s first safer
injection facility: lessons from the Vancouver experience. In A. Stevens (Ed.) Crossing
frontiers: International developments in the treatment of drug dependence. Brighton, UK: Pavilion
Publishing.
Kumar, A., & Epley, N. (2018). Undervaluing gratitude: Expressers misunderstand the
consequences of showing appreciation. Psychological Science, 29(9), 1423-1435.
Linda Fitzpatrick (2018, February 24) How to shake hands with someone with a disability
[Web log post]. Retrieved from https://styleforsuccess.com/blog/how-to-shake-hands-
with-someone-with-a-disability/
Lindsay, R. C., Ross, D. F., Read, J. D., & Toglia, M. (Eds) (2007). Handbook of eyewitness
psychology: Memory for people. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum and Associates.
National Association of Colleges and Employers (2016). Job Outlook 2016. Retrieved from
National Association of Colleges and Employers website: http://www.naceweb.org/career-
development/trends-and-predictions/job-outlook-2016-attributes-employers-want-to-
see-on-new-college-graduates-resumes/
Nickerson, R. S. (1998). Confirmation bias: A ubiquitous phenomenon in many guises. Review
of General Psychology, 2(2), 175.
PLOS ONE (2019). Benefits of open access journals [Webpage]. Retrieved from
https://www.plos.org/open-access
Polanin, J. R., Espelage, D. L., & Pigott, T. D. (2012). A meta-analysis of school-based bullying
prevention programs’ effects on bystander intervention behavior. School Psychology Review,
41(1), 47-65. Retrieved from https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Dorothy_Espelage/
publication/235220413_A_Meta-Analysis_of_School-
Based_Bullying_Prevention_Programs’_Effects_on_Bystander_Intervention_Behavior/
links/00b4952c602de18785000000.pdf
Ross, L., Greene, D., & House, P. (1977). The “false consensus effect”: An egocentric bias in
social perception and attribution processes. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 13(3),
279–301. doi:10.1016/0022-1031(77)90049-X
Shirazipour, C. H., Evans, M. B., Caddick, N., Smith, B., Aiken, A. B., Martin Ginis, K. A.,
& Latimer-Cheung, A. E. (2017). Quality participation experiences in the physical activity

domain: Perspectives of veterans with a physical disability. Psychology of Sport and Exercise,
29, 40-50. doi:10.1016/j.psychsport.2016.11.007
Tversky, A., & Kahneman, D. (1973). Availability: A heuristic for judging frequency and
probability. Cognitive Psychology, 5(2), 207-232.
Please reference this chapter as

Norris, M. E. & Baker, T. W. (2019). An introduction to careers in the psychological sciences.
In M. E. Norris (Ed.), The Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science. Kingston,
ON: eCampus Ontario. Licensed under CC BY NC 4.0. Retrieved from
https://ecampusontario.pressbooks.pub/psychologycareers/chapter/introduction/
[2]
INTRODUCTION TO CAREER DEVELOPMENT
Cathy Keates, Director, Queen’s University, Career Services
Miguel Hahn, Head Career Counsellor, Queen’s University, Career Services
INTRODUCTION
Charting your career path beyond university can be a surprisingly complex experience –
potentially both exciting and daunting at times, it can be all too easy to put off thinking
about your future until some other time. To ease potential stress, and help find your way in
an unknown terrain, it can be helpful to have a map to make more informed choices. In this
chapter we will help you start building your own map of your future as we look at the topic
of careers from a number of different perspectives.
We’ll examine common questions of Psychology students, look at some key labour market
trends and information, and learn about leading career development theories. Then we’ll
boil this all down to look at how you can use it to make the most of your time studying
psychology, learn about yourself, and make good career decisions. From this foundation of
a broad perspective on career development, you will be better positioned to make sense of
the various career paths you will be exploring throughout the remainder of this text.
PSYCHOLOGY DEGREES + CAREER PATHS – WHAT CAN I DO WITH A PSYCH DEGREE?
Before you dive in to the wealth of information in this text about all the exciting career
possibilities that lay ahead, and ideas about how to navigate your career in this chapter, we
want to address a few key questions and concerns that we hear from Psychology students
about career options, grad school, and what you are learning in the classroom.
22
WHAT CAN I DO WITH A PSYCH DEGREE? – COMMON CAREER PATHWAYS
One of the most common questions asked by students in Psychology is “What can I do with a
Psych degree?” A reasonable question, hoping for a clear answer to provide future direction.
The truth is a bit murkier than the predictability you might be expecting.
As a student you may be used to linear relationships between steps in your education –
you complete secondary school and then go to postsecondary, you take Psych 100 to be able
to take Psych 200, etc. It is easy to expect to keep moving on a predictable track to specific
advanced degrees and jobs. The reality is that after graduation, graduates with Psych degrees
head in many directions, some highly related to their undergraduate studies, and some less
obviously so.
This textbook will shed some light on some of the more common pathways for
psychology graduates, as well as a few destinations you might not have anticipated. With a
quick search on LinkedIn you can confirm this for yourself. You’ll see psychology graduates
working as psychologists, psychiatrists, counsellors, educators, and researchers, but also
people working in marketing, human resources, law, non-profit, and a multitude of other
professional fields. What does this mean for you? It means that you have options – you
can continue to move in directions more explicitly related to psychology, but you can also
give yourself permission to explore other destinations. In fact, only roughly half of students
who study any discipline at university end up moving into directly related fields (Council of
Ontario Universities, 2016).
How to search alumni on LinkedIn:
1. Login to Linkedin (create an account if you haven’t yet)

24 Introduction to Career Development
2. In the search bar at the top of the page, search for your school’s name.
3. On your school’s page, click on the “See Alumni” button to access the database of students and
alumni from your school.
4. Keep in mind that if you click on someone’s page they will be notified, so you may either want to
set your privacy settings to anonymous, or make sure you are comfortable with them knowing
you clicked!
Why is this the case? There are a number of factors that influence the steps someone takes
in their career. Although the fact that you have chosen to study psychology might tell us
something about some of your aptitudes and interests, you will still find a wide degree of
variety in the make up of your class. Not all psychology students are the same – each person
in your class has their own life experiences, personality, skills, and values – and these will
strongly influence directions you are inspired to pursue. Beyond the internal factors, there
are a host of external variables that will affect this as well – parental and peer influences,
networking connections, chance opportunities, barriers encountered, labour market forces,
funding, and more will all alter your career trajectory in complex ways. We will get into
a deeper analysis of understanding career development later in this chapter looking at the
labour market and helpful career theories and models that have been refined over the last
century to help us get a grasp on this complex dynamic.
SHOULD I GO TO GRADUATE SCHOOL? – FURTHER EDUCATION & TRAINING
Another very common question psych students ask is “Should I go to graduate school?”
Where do you go from an undergraduate degree? Sometimes, because you are surrounded
with professors and graduate students who have all done advanced degrees, you might get
the impression that your only route to success is to pursue a long academic track towards
a PhD or other advanced credentials. While this can certainly be a rewarding path, it is not
for everyone. In fact, Rajecki and Anderson (2004) state that the majority of psychology
students enter the labour market after graduation, rather than pursue additional training.
And just as there are a variety of career directions, there are just as many routes you can
take to get to those destinations. Once you start exploring, you will come across programs
ranging from short certificates and courses, to post-grad diplomas at colleges, professional
course-based master’s, practicum focused master’s, research-based masters, law school, med
school, and more. It can be very easy to get overwhelmed trying to sort through all of these
possibilities.
How can you make an informed decision? Getting a clearer sense of career direction and
long-term plan can help keep you grounded while considering your next steps. Throughout
this text you will be refining your own sense of direction in terms of what fits you and
your life, and learning about developing the necessary qualifications and experience to be a
competitive candidate in your field of interest.
WHAT AM I LEARNING STUDYING PSYCHOLOGY? THE VALUE OF YOUR DEGREE
Even though you spend so much time in classes and working on academic projects, many
students struggle to articulate what they have actually been learning, especially when it
comes time to apply to jobs or further education. The good news is that your studies in
psychology are providing you with valuable skills that employers want. What exactly are
they looking for?
According to a recent Business Skills Council of Canada Skills Survey, the top 5 skills
employers look for in entry level hires are (Business Council of Canada, 2018):
1. Collaboration and interpersonal skills

2. Communication skills
3. Problem-solving skills
4. Analytical capabilities
5. Resiliency
What are the specific skills and learning outcomes associated with studying psychology at
the undergraduate level? The APA presents detailed information outlining their expectations
(American Psychological Association, 2013):
• Knowledge base in psychology including key concepts, themes, domains, and
applications
• Scientific inquiry and critical thinking including reasoning, information literacy,
problem solving, and research
• Ethical and social responsibility in a diverse world
• Communication including effective writing and presentation skills
• Professional development including applying psychological content to career goals,
self-efficacy, project management, teamwork, and meaningful professional direction
for life after graduation
If you compare the skills you can get from your degree with what employers are looking for,
you can quickly see that you are well positioned with a strong foundation for future success.
For a more specific accounting of what you can expect to learn from your program, you
can consult learning outcomes associated with the program, individual courses, or materials
like the Queen’s University Majors Maps that outline key skills and career options tied to
each program. In the next section we will take our investigations further by looking at labour
market information and how it can help you navigate your career development.
WHERE ARE THE JOBS? – LABOUR MARKET INFORMATION
The future ain’t what it used to be. – Yogi Berra

Previous generations might have experienced periods of relative stability and predictable
career progression, but in our modern society change is the new normal. With significant
technological advancements transforming the ways we work, information technology
transforming our cultures, and political, ecological and cultural changes affecting every
aspect of our lives, it can be hard enough to predict the weather a month from now, let
alone make informed career plans for years into the future. “Chaotic systems display … a
lack of predictability at the micro level, while at the same time appearing to have a degree of
stability at the macro level” (Bright & Prior, 2005). There is no one answer to “Where are the
jobs?” because there is too much change to predict the future to that micro level. However,
there are some broad changes at the macro level that we can explore.
BROAD TRENDS AFFECTING WORLD OF WORK
With the nature of working rapidly changing, understanding the future of the labour market
can prove difficult. Here we will look at key forces that will influence the way work is viewed
in the future; technology, globalization, demography, society, climate change, and energy
resources (Gratton, 2011).
The influence of technology and globalization across the world is perhaps the most
obvious. Technology has consistently driven long-term economic growth, resulting in
continuous productivity gains since the mid-1990s – a narrative that is expected to continue
as the world’s knowledge becomes increasingly digitized.
4 Major Trends Shaping the Future (Gratton, 2011)
1. Technology
2. Globalization
3. Demographic and social shifts
4. Climate change & energy systems
Globalization affects countries in different ways. Increased competition and trade have
allowed certain countries to benefit as it becomes more cost-effective to move both goods
and information. However, this has also resulted in markets that are arguably more unstable
as compared to markets in the 20th century. With the development of global financial
markets, undesirable market effects can spread very quickly on a global scale, such as the
market crash on September 29, 2008 (Bostan, 2009).
With this increasing global connectivity, societal mindsets are shifting as consumers are
exposed to more choices and are faced with an evolving definition of what it means to meet
their needs (Gratton, 2011). This is further influenced by changes in the world’s demographic
and societal structure. Developed countries are facing a rapidly aging population concurrent
with a low birth rate. While increasing longevity means that people are able to contribute to
the labour market for a longer period of time, governments are also faced with restructuring
their policies to better support the population. Additionally, differing attitudes between
generational cohorts will likely also contribute to a restructuring of work. Generation Z, who
will be around 35 years old in 2025, is known primarily for its connectivity. As more of this
generation enters the work force, they will play a larger role in reshaping the workplace to
meet their expectations and needs.
The final restructuring that will inevitably occur concerns the use of energy resources and
their related contribution to climate change. A reorganization appears inescapable in the
future – whether it is a reluctant adaptation of the present energy framework as resources
become increasingly strained, or a construction of a new energy framework that would
integrate networks both locally and globally to create a new system of sustainability. All of
these trends combined will continue to reshape the future of work – how we work, with who,
and where.
WHERE PEOPLE WORK
Shifting from a global perspective to a national perspective, it can be enlightening to see

where people in Canada actually work. A common assumption is that most people work
in large companies, but in fact large companies only employ a small percentage of the
population, with the majority of people working in small companies of less than 100 people
(Government of Canada, 2016), and almost a third working in non-profit (Statistics Canada,
2005) and the public sector (Fraser Institute, 2015).
Small Company (less than 100 employees) 8.2 Million
Medium Company (between 100 and 500 employees) 2.3 Million
Large Company (more than 500 employees) 1.1 Million
OUTLOOK BY OCCUPATION
Fig 2.3
Occupational outlooks can be a valuable source of information in trying to predict future

demand for careers of interest. Using resources like the Canadian Job Bank website, you can
search by occupation to access information projecting demand 10 years into the future, as
well as wage information, skills, job postings, and more. Below is a quick sampling of some
of the kinds of information you may find (Government of Canada, 2018c):
OUTLOOK BY AREA OF STUDY
Government data is also available by degree area and level, and can reveal some interesting
details.
Searching the Canadian Job Bank website for graduates of psychology Bachelor’s Degree
programs (Government of Canada, 2018a):
• Unemployment is 6%
• Median salary is $44,639.00
• 40% work in jobs closely related to field of study, 28% somewhat related, and 32% not
related
• 60% of graduates continue studying after graduation
For graduates of psychology Master’s Degree programs (Government of Canada, 2018b):
• Unemployment is 4%
• Median earnings are $61,537
• 61% work in jobs closely related to their field of study, 25% somewhat related, and 14%
not related
• 40% of graduates continue studying
SO WHAT DOES ALL OF THIS DATA MEAN TO YOU?
Getting information about future trends, salary surveys, and occupational outlooks can give
you a sense of what is going on in the world of work to help you make informed decisions.
Knowing, for example, that roughly half of graduates of psychology end up in work closely
related to their studies might encourage you to consider other possibilities. Seeing the
higher salary and employment rates of Master’s degree holders might lead you to think
that further education could be a good investment. Or you could see the labour market
outlook for psychologists in the Maritime Provinces or the prairies is better than Ontario
and consider moving there for better job prospects (Government of Canada, 2018c).
While potentially quite useful, this information should be used with caution. In the
dynamic modern workplace, changes can happen quite quickly. Much of the information
included in job futures projections may be based on census information or graduate surveys
that could be already a few years old.
Most importantly, the information speaks to general patterns and averages, but not to
individuals. Although there may be broader trends or pathways that others follow, they need
to be considered in the context of your specific life circumstances and particular needs. It
can be tempting to follow the money, or seek out the hot jobs – but this is not a guaranteed
road to success. In the 1990s, students were flocking to studying computers because the job
market was so hot in IT – but when the market contracted suddenly and the dot-com bubble
burst, many computing students struggled to find work (U.S. National Center for Education
Statistics, 2017).
A balanced approach to decision making that considers environmental conditions and
personal factors together is more likely to lead to good decisions than a strategy based on
either aspect alone. To help you form your own grounded perspective way of looking at
careers, we will look at some of the most prominent models and thinkers influencing career
development theory today in the next section.
MODELS & WAYS OF LOOKING AT CAREERS – HOW DO I THINK ABOUT CAREERS?
Much like the other topics you have studied in your degree so far, the topic of “career
development” has had a lot of academic study – with years of theory development and
research looking at how people develop careers.
The central questions of career development theories have been:
• How do individuals make decisions about what career to pursue?; and
• How do career paths develop over time?
This chapter will be useful to you if you are interested in “career development” from an
academic perspective, but you needn’t be. As we review theories of career development, we
will extract information and strategies that you can use as you map out your own future
career path(s). We will review several approaches to career development, focusing on those
theorists and topics that may be most helpful to you as you think about your own career
decisions.
PERSON-ENVIRONMENT FIT
A foundational theory and concept in career development is person-environment fit,

credited to Frank Parsons working from the early 1900s (Neault, 2014). The central idea of
person-environment fit is that the better the match between a person (namely their traits
such as skills, interests, and values) and the environment (such as the needs and demands of
a specific occupation and workplace) the greater likelihood of success and happiness for that
person.
Fig. 2.4
In practical terms, following the person-environment fit model to make a career decision
would lead to activities such as first assessing your skills, interests, and values, then gathering
data about occupations, and then comparing you (the person) and the occupations
(environment) and looking for the “best fit” career choices.
This simple idea of person-environment fit continues to be the foundation of most career
development activity (and in the next section of the chapter we will present some activities
that you can use to learn more about yourself and about potential occupations as you
look for fits). However, while useful as a foundation, this approach is too one dimensional.
Simply looking at fit between an individual person’s needs and an occupation’s needs, is not
representative of the actual complexity of career decisions and career development over
one’s lifespan. In addition it leaves out significant other variables that impact what options
are available to many people.
Constraints on Person-Environment Fit
While person-environment fit is a useful starting point, a key criticism is that it assumes that
all individuals are choosing from all possible environments ( jobs, organizations). Theorists
such as Gottfredson (1996) argue that choosing a career is not just about your psychological
self, but also your social self. Through your career choice, you are “placing [yourself ]
in the broader social order” (p. 181). This draws attention to the impact of social aspects
such as gender and social class. Her theory of Circumscription and Compromise asserts
that your self-concept and your images of occupations are impacted by social
factors. Circumscription is a narrowing of perceived options – “the progressive elimination
of unacceptable alternatives” to those that are considered socially acceptable (p.
187). Compromise is then the process of editing your preferred career options based not just
on what is most compatible with you, but what you perceive as most acceptable. For example,
some might believe that certain careers are only appropriate for certain genders such as
nursing for women.
Are there career options that you think are not “acceptable” for you? Based on your gender
identity? Based on your social class? Based on other social variables? Are any of those careers
options that you feel are compatible with your skills and interest, but you’ve eliminated them as
options because of perceived “unacceptability”?
Gottfredson’s concepts of circumscription and compromise illuminate how there is more

to a career decision than assessing the fit between a person and the environment; there can
be internal reactions to external factors, and these internal reactions change perceptions of
what careers might be possible and acceptable as you plan your career options.
THE DECADE AFTER HIGH SCHOOL
While it is helpful to think about how to plan your career path, planning does not represent
the full experience of how careers actually unfold. Many people think of career development
as a ladder – a series of planned steps leading up to greater and greater things. In reality,
people’s career trajectories are far more disordered. Recent research with youth in Canada
in their decade after graduating from high school provides an interesting illustration of this
(Campbell & Dutton, 2015).
Researchers interviewed 100 young people in four Canadian cities. They found that these
youth used three styles of moving forward:
• navigating – youth who used navigating had a plan and were following it
• exploring – those using exploring did not know exactly where they wanted to end up, but
were actively trying out different things to learn more about themselves and about
career options
• drifting – those who were drifting were “going with the flow” and didn’t have a plan and
were not engaged in trying to learn more or be proactive about how to move forward.
The researchers also found that many people used more than one of these approaches over
time.
It is tempting to expect that navigating, which is the most planful strategy, would be the
most successful. However, the research found that this was not always the case. Sometimes
being too committed to one path without yet knowing that much about it, or having had
a chance to try it on, led to later not being as satisfied. In terms of the second strategy,
exploring, the researchers found that young people sometimes faced criticism for exploring,
but that exploring helped the interviewees understand their own identities and options
better. Even drifting sometimes has positive outcomes when exposed by chance to positive
experiences. The researchers conclude that all three approaches can be helpful and that an
overreliance on believing that you should have an answer and decision can be detrimental.
“I think drifting and exploring for awhile and then navigating is cool. Kind of like getting thrown off a
ship. You drift for awhile and then think this is getting a little boring so maybe I’ll swim this way for a little
bit. Then you’re like, it’s definitely this way and you swim to shore.” Colin, a 26 year old from Halifax
(quote used with permission)
Young people reported that they faced great expectations for being planful. In our own work
at a university career centre, we also hear students telling us that they receive a lot of the
following messages, whether said explicitly, or implied:
• You should know where you want to go – you should make a decision
• It is better to know what you want to do than to not know
• The most successful people set and follow plans
Fig. 2.5
The Decade After High School authors share the following visual (Figure 2.5) to illustrate the
difference between expectations and reality and argue that “the results of this study highlight
the importance of normalizing unpredictability and change in the school-to-work transition
and providing young people with tools to work more effectively with this reality.” (Campbell
& Dutton, 2015, p. 65)
What has your experience been? Do you feel pressure to have an answer and clearly laid out
path? When someone asks you “What are you going to do after graduation? or “What are you going
to do with your degree?” or “What do you want to be when you grow up?” – do you feel pressure to
have an answer?
PLANNED HAPPENSTANCE
When I was in my final year of undergrad, I was in my second floor apartment in downtown Toronto
making lunch. I randomly decided to go over and look out the window and happened to see a friend of
a friend walking on the street. I shouted out to him and we chatted for a few minutes and found out that
he was looking for an apartment, and I was looking for a summer job. He ended up moving in to the
apartment upstairs, and I ended up working at the same camp as he was, getting a foot in the door with
the director by using his name. To this day we are still close, and the friends I made at that camp are still
among my best. All because I looked out the window and said “Hi!”.
– Miguel Hahn, Chapter Co-Author
The themes identified in the Decade After High School research relate well to Planned
Happenstance Theory. Mitchell, Levin, and Krumboltz (1999) argue that unexpected events
play a significant role in most careers, and their Planned Happenstance model, an
intentional oxymoron, is a good way to conceptualize how careers actually unfold.
We have spoken with countless professionals, often alumni of the universities where
we have worked. When we’ve asked “how did you get to be where you are today?” there
is a startling consistency to the answers. The number one response: “luck”. That is the
“happenstance” part. But what about the “planned”? When we ask follow up questions about
the luck, such as “When that lucky situation happened, how did you respond?”, we find that
people actively took advantage of the luck to turn it into a career move. And when we ask
questions like “And what had you done previously that put you in the situation where the
luck was able to happen?” we find that people had had to have been actively engaged in a
network and in exploration, in order to be somewhere where luck found them. Although the
lucky happenstance was a key occurrence, each person had created the conditions for the
luck, and then had acted on the luck rather than ignored it. These alumni stories map well
into the Planned Happenstance framework.
There are two key tenets of planned happenstance theory (Mitchell et al., 1999, p. 118)
“a) exploration generates change opportunities for increasing quality of life; and
b) “skills enable people to seize opportunities.”
The first, that exploration creates opportunities, draws our attention to how we are not
just passive recipients of chance events, but that we can increase the likelihood of positive
happenstances through exploration and engagement. For example, individuals who have
little to no interaction with the larger world are unlikely to experience a lot of exciting
chance events that will bring new career opportunities. However, if we are engaged and
connected, are building a strong network and attending events, speaking with colleagues,
are part of an online community, and so on, then we are more likely to bump into new
opportunities. Our own behaviours can generate greater likelihood for lucky opportunities.
Then, when there is a lucky opportunity, we can choose to ignore it, or we can choose to take
advantage of it. If there is a knock on the door we have to open it to see if it is a visit that
might lead to something exciting.
Mitchell et al. (1999) lay out five skills that they believe help us generate and take advantage
of happenstances, listed in the left hand column below. The interplay of these skills help us
to make it more likely that we will have positive happenstances, and that we will then act on
them in a way that leads to the most positive impact for our own lives.
Think of your own path so far, that has gotten you to today. What role has planning played,
and what role has happenstance played?
Curiosity: exploring new

How has curiosity led you to new opportunities in your past?
learning opportunities
Persistence: exerting What is an example of a time when you persisted and that meant that
effort despite setbacks you were able to move forward despite facing challenges?
Flexibility: changing atti- When in the past have you been flexible and that allowed you to take
tudes and circumstances advantage of an opportunity you might not have had?
Optimism: viewing new

How would you describe your own level of optimism and how much you
opportunities as possible
believe new opportunities will appear and be things you can act on?
and attainable
Risk taking: taking action in How would you describe your risk taking approach? What is an example
the face of uncertain out- of a time in the past when you took a risk on a new opportunity and it
comes led to good things?
(Adapted from Mitchell et al., 1999, p. 118)
THE CHAOS THEORY OF CAREERS
The Chaos Theory of Careers (Bright & Pryor, 2005; Pryor & Bright, 2014) has some
commonality with Planned Happenstance (in particular the role of unexpected events), but
is an attempt at a much broader new conceptualization of career development. The authors
wanted a theory that would not just address how an individual makes a career decision,
but one that also incorporates the complexity of variables, both personal and contextual,
that impact career trajectories. They asked a fundamental, and very big, question: “Why
should the influences on career development be different from those that brought about life
or which shape our cosmos?” (Pryor & Bright, 2014, p. 4). They looked beyond the career
development literature to general science and its attempts to explain the overall function of
the natural world.
Careers, like other parts of nature, are part of a chaotic system: “An individual’s career
development therefore is the interaction of one complex dynamical system (the person)
with a series of more or less generalized other complex dynamical systems including other
individuals, organizations, cultures, legislations and social contexts” (Pryor & Bright, 2014, p.
5).
The Chaos Theory of Careers uses terms from general Chaos Theory (such as complexity,
non-linearity, chance and change), and applies them to career development.
Complexity – there are so many variables, linked in so many ways, that complexity is a
reality of systems, including the systems within which we work and manage our careers.
As covered in the labour market section, many authors are arguing that complexity is
increasing and will continue to.
Non-linearity – Perhaps the most well-known component of general chaos theory is the
butterfly effect, in which a butterfly flaps its wings in one part of the world, and impacts the
weather somewhere on the other side of the globe. This is an example of non-linearity and,
applied to careers as we have covered already, this emphasizes how most people’s careers
do not follow a direct line, and that a small change can cause disproportionately significant
impacts.
Chance – this theory reinforces the importance of recognizing how we cannot focus on
predictability, but should recognize and even embrace the role of chance in our careers.
Change – the authors argue not only that there is constant change in the larger world, but
that people themselves change. A criticism of the person-environment fit model (that we
explored at the beginning of the section) is that it assumes little change in both the person
and the environment. If people themselves are continually changing, how does that impact
how people make career decisions?
The Chaos Theory of Careers draws our attention to the complexity of career
development and to the multiple and often unpredictable influences on our options and
opportunities.
How well do you think chaos describes the natural world? How well do you think a chaos theory
can describe your career so far?
If careers are chaotic, how does that make your feel? Are you excited by the possibilities,
concerned about the lack of predictability, intrigued by the complexity, or a combination of those
feelings and/or others?
CONSTRUCTIVIST APPROACHES
Much recent work on career development uses a constructive approach, emphasizing that
reality, and how we experience it, are individually and socially constructed. There is not one
objective reality, nor one story of who we are and our career path. A subset of constructivist
theories, narrative approaches specifically highlight the role of story and argue that we
narrate our own lives – “we are the stories that we live” (Niles & Harris-Bowlsbey, 2013,
p. 113). As we tell the story of ourselves and our careers, we are designing our own reality.
Although overall the world may be chaotic (should we ascribe to a Chaos Theory
conceptualization), the narrative approach allows a look at how individuals have agency
in impacting the stories they narrate for their own careers. It is “by constructing personal
career narratives, we can come to see our movement through life more clearly and can
understand our specific decisions with a greater life context that has meaning and
coherence” (Niles & Harris-Bowlsbey, 2013, p. 112).
As an illustration of one constructivist approach, Savickas (1997) uses a “career story”
process to help people narrate their own development. He asks clients five key questions
about themselves – asking them to name role models, favorite magazines, favorite book,
mottos and early recollections. Then, working together, the counsellor and client draw
themes out of these reflections, and the client constructs a story of their career – identifying
central themes that have guided them in the past, and that they may choose to use to guide
them into the future. Having these themes then informs decision making about next steps.
Another example of a constructivist approach is the use of metaphor as a way for
individuals to understand their own careers (Amundson, 2010). “People actively seek to
make meaning of life events and this process is on-going” and metaphors are a common
way humans make meaning (Amundson, 2010, p. 7). Using metaphors is helpful because by
“referring to parallel examples where similar dynamics are in play” we are better able to
understand a new experience by relating to the familiar metaphor (Amundson, 2010, p. 2).
Consider the following metaphors that might be used to describe your career:
If you use this metaphor for your career,

• What does it bring to mind?
• What limits does it have – what does it miss in your
experience?
• How might it be helpful to organize your thoughts?
• Does it make you feel more or less optimistic about my
future?
Career as journey, which can

include getting a call, responding
to the call, facing obstacles
Career/life as a book – with chap-

ters, difficult challenges,
Climbing the ladder of success
Following the yellow brick road
Solving a puzzle (or many puzzles)
Undertaking a research project
Metaphors adapted from Amundson (2010)

LIMITATIONS: ETHNOCENTRICISM
We have reviewed a few examples of how career development theory has evolved over
time. During this evolution, there has been a growing conversation about diversity and the
limitations of existing theories in an increasingly diverse community. Ethnocentrism is the
assumption that one’s own “value system is superior and preferable to another” (Niles &
Harris-Bowlsbey, 2013, p. 135). Historically most of the career development literature that is
used in North America has been produced in North America, and primarily by members of
dominant groups (Niles & Harris-Bowlsbey, 2013). It is important to note that these theories
do not reflect a universal value system.
Arthur and Collins (2014) draw attention to several cultural assumptions that have been
made in career development literature reflecting a European-American perspective:
• Individualism and autonomy – assuming that individuals make their own choices that
create their futures
• Affluence – assuming that individuals have access to affluence, or the resources needed
• Structure of opportunity open to all- assuming that all individuals have access to
opportunities
• Centrality of work in people’s live – assuming that work is a central part of lives
• Linearity, progressiveness, and rationality – assuming that individual’s careers progress
in linear and rational ways
These assumptions, based on a “Western” worldview, limit the applicability of the career
theories we have reviewed. Even the term “career” itself may have different meanings for
different people, depending on historical and cultural influences (Arthur & Collins, 2014).
Although the theories we are reviewing in this chapter all have useful ideas to offer, we
should examine them through a lens of diversity and social justice, considering how each
theory may be limited within a particular world view, and consider limits, biases, and gaps .
In addition to limitations within career theories, there are also limitations and structural
barriers that people from marginalized groups may experience in the labour market. Niles
and Harris-Bowlsbey (2013, p. 130) argue that “there is also ample evidence to suggest
that women, people of colour, persons with disabilities, gay men, lesbian women, and
transgender persons continue to encounter tremendous obstacles in their career
development .”
Fortunately, there are increasingly more diverse voices in career development writings.
Examples of recent work includes articles looking through an Indigenous lens (Caverley,
Stewart, & Shepard, 2014), and considering the experiences of immigrants to Canada
(Bylsma & Yohani, 2014) and of refugees to Canada (Sutherland & Ibrahim, 2014).
What messages about “career” have you learned from your family, and what messages are
routed in your family’s history and experiences?
Are there any structural or systemic obstacles you believe you may (or have) experience as you
pursue your career path? What privileges have you benefited from that have made your life easier?
Which, if any, of the assumptions listed above have you made when you think about careers and
opportunities?
FINDING YOUR WAY– MOVING TOWARDS YOUR CAREER GOALS
In the previous section we reviewed the evolution of career development theory. We’re now
going to present some more concrete processes and tools that you can use as you seek to
develop your own career path and a meaningful sense of direction.
THE VALUE OF PURPOSE
Research from Harackiewicz, Barron, Tauer, and Elliot (2002) and Snyder et al. (2002) shows
that students are more successful academically when they are motivated in pursuing career
goals, with a desire to learn and embrace necessary challenges for growth, while students
with undefined goals tend to put in minimal effort. Does this mean you have to have all
the answers right now? Most definitely not – as we have said before, only some of us are
in a position to be navigating directly towards a clear goal. However, taking active steps in
exploring potential directions can give a sense of purpose to your time at university, help
keep you motivated during challenging times, and position you for success during and after
your studies.
This sense of purpose is different than a specific short-term goal – it is longer-term
and broader – a direction we are always working towards that motivates and guides our
decisions, often with a service component. Damon writes that purpose is “a part of one’s
personal search for meaning, but also has an external component, the desire to make a
difference in the world, to contribute to matters larger than the self” (Damon, Menon, &
Bronk, 2003, p. 121).
Living purposefully requires knowing yourself to get clarity about what unique purpose is
suited to you based on your unique personal makeup and identity. Having a sense of your
values and interests is fundamental in terms of making decisions that align with who you
are, but it is also important to factor in your strengths (Smith, 2017). In fact, research shows
that when we use our strengths at work we are more likely to find meaning in our work, and
to perform at a higher level (Dubreuil, Forest, & Courcy, 2014). In this section we will look
at decision making strategies, self assessment strategies, key resources, and activities to help
you get clarity as you think about your future options.
MAKING CAREER DECISIONS
Decision Making Styles
Everyone has their own style of making decisions – and the role of data plays a different role
in each style. Dinklage found 8 decision making styles (1968):
• Planful – systematic process with goals, options, and actions
• Agonizing – Try to be planful, but end up excessively focusing on data and information
to their detriment and struggle to make a perfect decision
• Impulsive – select alternative quickly, minimal use of data
• Intuitive – Use experience and judgment to decide on path with little use for data
• Compliant – highly influenced by other opinions or social norms
• Delaying – Sees a decision to be made but avoids it – lacking motivation or
information
• Fatalistic – Feels their actions don’t matter, that decision is out of their hands
• Paralytic – Sees decision, but is paralyzed by fear of process or outcome
Having a sense of your own decision making style can help you to navigate your own
ongoing career decision.
When have you made big decisions in the past?
Were you successful? Why? Why not?
What do you need to do differently the next time?
Decision Making Processes
Fig. 2.6
The Cognitive Information Processing Approach examines how we make effective career
decisions (Sampson, Peterson, Lenz, & Reardon, 1992). It posits that decisions involve both
cognitive and affective elements, and that career decisions are ongoing, with our knowledge
evolving over time. In their information processing pyramid (Figure 2.6) they describe 3
foundational components: self-knowledge, occupational knowledge, and decision-making
skills, capped by metacognition (awareness of our thoughts and processes). We will work
through these pieces in the coming sections exploring self-assessment, exploring options,
and decision making.
The Cognitive Information Processing Approach also includes the CASVE process (named
after the phases of Communication, Analysis, Synthesis, Valuing, and Execution) featured
below which explains the phases we go through in making a decision. The first two
components from the pyramid are incorporated into the analysis phase, while the
metacognition and decision-making skills apply throughout. The process reflects the
cyclical nature of navigating career decisions, as we incorporate new learning and

experiences into future decisions.
Fig. 2.7
Figure 2.7. CASVE Model

By paying attention to your own thought process you can monitor your progress. Are you
in need of more information or options? Or do you need to move ahead with evaluation and
execution and learning from your experiences? Although not everyone is the same place, it
is very common for university students to benefit from attention to all aspects of this process
– starting with analysis of self and options. In the coming sections we will look at the various
phases of the CASVE model of decision making to help you make informed career decisions.
ANALYSIS PART 1 – SELF-ASSESSMENT
While most students want to start with the question “what can I do with my degree?” – most
career counsellors will try to shift the initial conversation to learning more about you as a
person. Your unique makeup in terms of personality, skills, values, interests, experiences,
connections, and your environment will all greatly influence career directions that you
might choose to pursue. As students of psychology you are well aware there are many ways
to try to measure and assess people – from complex formal assessment tools, to mind-
mapping, journaling, and reflective conversation – and they can all contribute different
pieces to your evolving self-understanding.
Using Assessment Tools
Commonly Used Personality and Career Assessments
Assessment Description Availability
Six Factor Based on Big Five research, measures personality traits of Agreeable- Assessment
Personality ness, Neuroticism, Openness to Experience, Extroversion, and splits professional.
Questionnaire Conscientiousness into Industriousness and Methodicalness.
Read more about psychometric properties at:
https://www.sigmaassessmentsystems.com/assessments/
six-factor-personality-questionnaire/
Strong Inter- Explores work interest areas divided into Holland’s RIASEC categories Assessment
est Inventory of realistic, investigative, social, enterprising, and conventional. professional.
https://www.themyersbriggs.com/en-US/
Support/Validity-of-the-Strong-Interest-Inventory
VIA Character Based on Seligman’s Positive Psychology, focuses on assessing char- Free
Strengths acter strengths.
Access the free test online at:
https://www.viacharacter.org
https://www.viacharacter.org/
researchers/assessments/via-is
Strengths Based on Clifton’s work with Strengths Psychology. Purchase

Finder 2.0 Access the test online (for fee, or with book purchase) at: online or
https://www.gallupstrengthscenter.com/home/en-us/ with book.
strengthsfinder
https://www.researchgate.net/publication/
267694228_THE_CLIFTON_STRENGTHSFINDER
_R_20_TECHNICAL_REPORT
Life Values Helps you clarify your personal values to make more effective deci- Free
Inventory sions.
Access for free at:
http://www.lifevaluesinventory.org/
https://www.lifevaluesinventory.org/
LifeValuesInventory.org
%20-%20Facilitators%20Guide%20Sample.pdf
Assessment by Self-Reflection
A number of popular career books outline reflection activities to help you make sense of
your current career situation, often partly involving looking backwards at past experiences,
or collecting data from current experiences. In our work with students we have found a few
to be particularly useful:
Activity Instructions
Mind-mapping – a creative Start with a large blank piece of paper, and write your name in the mid-
open-ended way of pour- dle. Then, radiating outwards, write our any idea that comes into your
ing out ideas to mine your head as potentially relevant for your future – it could include past jobs,
experience for insights hobbies, mentors, strengths, fears, dreams, etc…
Journaling – to track daily Start paying attention to your daily experiences and record how each
experiences of engage- activity went in terms of your subjective experience – what you enjoyed,
ment did well, or disliked.
Experience reflections – a Write down key career stories from your past where things were going
variety of exercises for well – and reflecting on the meaning in terms of skills, interests, or val-
personal clarification ues for you personally.
For more ideas and reflective activities you may want to consult a career planning book like
some of these popular titles students have enjoyed in the past:
• You Majored in What?, Katharine Brooks, Ed. D.(2010)
• Designing Your Life, Bill Burnett & Dave Evans (2018)
• What Colour is Your Parachute?, Richard Nelson Bolles (2018)
• Business Model You, Tim Clark (Clarke, Osterwalder, & Pigneur, 2012)
Assessment through other’s perspectives and support
Another rich source of information about ourselves can be other people around us. Family,
friends, coworkers, supervisors or teachers could all offer perspectives that can complement
your own internal reflection or results from formal assessments. You can ask important
people (between 5-10) who know you well for their perspective on your key strengths,
weaknesses, or personal qualities.
Finally, you may want to consider getting help with the self-assessment process by talking
to a professional career counsellor. Most university’s have some form of career centre on
campus that provides career advising or counselling to students. Career counsellors are
trained to guide you through the process of reflecting on yourself, exploring possibilities,
and making plans to move towards your goals. Often, having a conversation with an
unbiased person who doesn’t know you personally can help you get clarity and perspective
on your situation to help you feel more confident in knowing what directions are personally
meaningful to you.
Learning about oneself is not a one-time event, but rather an ongoing process that unfolds
over our lifetime. Not only do we come to understand ourselves in deeper ways, but we also
continue to change and evolve from our experiences – meaning that a situation that might
be a good fit for us in our twenties, could not be as good of a fit in our thirties or forties.
ANALYSIS PART 2 – EXPLORING CAREER OPTIONS
This book is an excellent starting point for exploring your career options related to
psychology – it will provide a solid overview of some of the most common pathways you
might want to consider, as well as some new ideas you hadn’t thought of before.
Formal sources of information
To take this research further, and explore possibilities not covered here you may want to
consult other sources of career information such as:
• Job Bank (Government of Canada, 2018d) – to access information on wages, outlooks,
education, skills, and more. https://www.jobbank.gc.ca/explorecareers
• O*NET (U.S. Department of Labor, 2018) – a similar website to Job Bank from the
United States https://www.onetonline.org/
• Career Cruising (2018)– an informative Canadian resource with information on
thousands of careers covering education programs, related careers, interviews with
professionals, and more. May be available through your campus career centre.
• LinkedIn (LinkedIn Corporation, 2018) – similar to Facebook in terms of profiles and
newsfeed, but offers a powerful search tool including the ability to search alumni by
institution to see what others have done with your degree.
• Career books – Your campus career centre may have a resource library featuring books
with occupational information that can help you go more in-depth in areas of interest
• Professional Associations – most occupations have a professional association (for
example NAADAC, The Association for Addiction Professionals, or CAOT, The
Canadian Association for Occupational Therapists, exist for most professions. They can
be a source of valuable information on a career of interest, including links to further
education, job opportunities, conferences, certification, and more.
Informal sources of information
Speaking to professionals working in areas of interest can be a valuable source of insight

(known as information interviewing). They can answer questions about a typical day,
challenges, rewards, required qualifications, strategies for entering the field, and provide
advice for your unique situation. To find people to speak to, ask people in your network if
they know anyone working in the field, seek out alumni from your school, or connect with
professional associations.
Questions you could ask in an information interview:
1. What interests keep you going in your work?

2. What skills are essential in doing your work?
3. What are your work/life fit preferences (values and needs) that are met in this work?
4. If you were going to start again in this field of work today, what would you do to be really ready?
(What training and experience would you need to have? What would be great ways to get it?)
5. What professional associations do you rely on to keep up to date? What publications,
organizations or people do you suggest I contact for more information?
SYNTHESIS AND VALUING
As you collect information on yourself and careers, you will be moving into the next phase
of the CASVE model, of synthesizing options and valuing potential directions based on the
information you found which helps you move into the execution phase of testing out your
ideas.
If your research does not provide an obvious career direction to explore, it may help
to work through more systematic analyses of your findings. This can be as simple as a
chart of pro’s and con’s for each career of interest to help you get a more holistic view
of each option. For a more in-depth analysis, consider using a matrix to rank the options
against a set of important criteria. For example – someone might analyze 3 career paths
of psychologist, marketing professional, and lawyer, and explore them in terms of pay,
satisfaction, creativity, status, and investment required in training.
Alternatively, you might benefit from talking through your various options with family,
friends, or seeking professional help from an impartial career counsellor to help you clarify
your thoughts and feelings.
EXECUTION AND TAKING ACTION
Although collecting and analyzing information is very useful, it is important to balance

research with action and experience. By testing out your career ideas, you can get very
important firsthand experience that can tell you more about your potential career
directions. Planned Happenstance and Chaos Theory tell us of the impossibility of knowing
the future in great detail, and the value of taking action despite this. As you move forward
gaining various experiences from coursework, extra-curricular activities, part-time work,
volunteering, and otherwise – you will likely learn new information about yourself and the
world of work that could inform and maybe alter your career direction.
As you move forward learning from your coursework and other experiences, you will also
be developing marketable experience that will be valuable in future applications to work or
graduate school. While initially pursuing a broad range of experiences can be beneficial, at
a certain point, starting to focus on a few specific directions will likely help you be more
strategic in your involvement. Considering what you have learned in the research stage
about careers of interest can help you prioritize the development of key skills to help you
pursue the well-rounded education needed to be successful in your next step.
THE VALUE OF ONGOING REFLECTION
To get the most of your time at university, it is important to complement your education
and experiences with ongoing reflection. In fact, a recent study showed that employees
who reflected for 15 minutes daily performed 23% better at their work after 10 days than
employees who didn’t participate in the reflection (Di Stefano, Gino, Pisano, & Staats, 2014).
Not only does ongoing reflection reinforce your learning and inform decisions, it will also
help you when it comes time to apply to jobs or school as it will help you to articulate
the value of your experience and skills to potential employers or graduate programs. You
may want to consider some key questions after or during new learning experiences such as
courses, extracurricular activities, or work:
• What was challenging about this experience? How did I overcome it? What results did I
achieve?
• What impact did I have on those around me, on my environment, or on myself?
• How did this change me? What do I do or see differently now?
• What is most significant this experience for me? For a potential employer?
• What areas of growth does it show for me? What skills did I develop?
Likewise, we encourage you to reflect on your learning throughout this course. As you learn
about various possible career paths, connect them back to your personal experiences and
what you are learning about yourself. Are they a good fit? Why or why not? What is this
telling you about what you want or where you want to go?
CHAPTER SUMMARY
In this chapter we’ve covered the following key ideas as you think about how to make sense
of the information of this book and apply it to your own career decision making.
The value of your degree: Your Psychology degree can help to prepare you to head in
many potential career directions. To position yourself for success, be able to articulate the
value of your degree to future employers and grad programs with a clear sense of the skills
and knowledge you have gained, and add to this with experience outside of the classroom.
Making sense of labour market information: Integrating knowledge of opportunities and
labour market trends with an understanding of yourself can help you make more informed
decisions now and in the future.
Consider person-environment fit: but remember it is only part of the equation.
Accept & embrace chance and chaos: chance and unpredictability are normal. In addition
to planning, embrace happenstance – success derives from a combination of planning,
preparedness, and taking advantage of luck. Use the five skills outlined by Krumboltz,
Mitchell, and Levin (1999):
• Curiosity: exploring new learning opportunities
• Persistence: exerting effort despite setbacks
• Flexibility: changing attitudes and circumstances
• Optimism: viewing new opportunities as possible and attainable
• Risk taking: taking action in the face of uncertain outcomes
Actively explore possibilities: Proactively exploring careers of interest can give you a sense
of direction, ease anxiety, and motivate you to do your best academically.
Get to know yourself: Through formal and informal means, developing a sense of you are
in terms of strengths, values, interests, and personality can help you make better decisions
and articulate your value to potential employers or graduate school admission committees.
Access resources: gather information and support with online tools, people in your
network, and resources at your university career centre.
REFERENCES
American Psychological Association. (2013). APA guidelines for the undergraduate psychology
major: Version 2.0. Retrieved from American Psychological Association website:
http://www.apa.org/ed/precollege/undergrad/index.aspx
Amundson, N. E. (2010). Metaphor Making: Your career, your life, your way. Richmond, BC:
Ergon Communications
Arthur, N., & Collins, S. (2014). Diversity and social justice: Guiding concepts for career
development practice. In B. C. Shepard, & P. S. Mani (Eds.),Career development practice
in Canada (pp. 77-104). Toronto, ON: Canadian Education and Research Institute for
Counselling.
Asplund, J., Agrawal, S., Hodges, T., Harter, J., & Lopez, S. J. (2014) The Clifton Strengthsfinder
2.0 technical report. Retrieved from https://www.researchgate.net/publication/
267694228_THE_CLIFTON_STRENGTHSFINDER_R_20_TECHNICAL_REPORT
Bostan, A. (2009). Globalization and instability on financial markets. Economy
Transdisciplinarity Cognition, (1), 167-171. Retrieved from http://www.ugb.ro/etc/
etc2009no1/S0602%20(2).pdf
Bright, J. E., & Pryor, R. G. (2005). The chaos theory of careers: A users guide. The Career
Development Quarterly, 53(4), 291-305. doi:10.1002/j.2161-0045.2005.tb00660.x
Brooks, K (2010) You majored in what? Designing your path from college to career. New York City,
NY: Plume.
Brown, D., & Crace, R. K. (2002). Life values inventory facilitator’s guide. Williamsburg,
Virginia: Applied Psychology Resources, Inc.. Retrieved from
LifeValuesInventory.org%20-%20Facilitators%20Guide%20Sample.pdf
Burnett, B., & Evans, D. (2018) The designing your life workbook: A framework for building a life
you can thrive in. Danvers, MA: Potter/Ten Speed/Harmony/Rodale.
Business Council of Canada (2018). Navigating change. Retrieved from Business Council of
Canada website: https://thebusinesscouncil.ca/wp-content/uploads/2018/04/Navigating-
Change-2018-Skills-Survey-1.pdf
Bylsma, L., & Yohani, S. C. (2014). Immigrants in Canada: Context and issues for
consideration in career development practice in Canada. In B. C. Shepard, & P. S. Mani
(Eds.) Career development practice in Canada: Perspectives, principles, and professionalism (pp.
249-274). Toronto, ON: Canadian Education and Research Institute for Counselling.
Campbell, C., & Dutton, P. (2015). Career crafting the decade after high school: Professional’s guide.
Toronto, ON: Canadian Education and Research Institute for Counselling.
Career Cruising (2018) Career Cruising [Homepage]. Retrieved from
https://public.careercruising.com/en/
Caverley, N., Stewart, S., & Shepard, B. C. (2014). Through an Aboriginal lens: Exploring
career development and planning in Canada. In B. C. Shepard, & P. S. Mani (Eds.) Career
development practice in Canada: Perspectives, principles, and professionalism (pp. 297-330).

Toronto, ON: Canadian Education and Research Institute for Counselling.
Clark, T., Osterwalder, A., & Pigneur, Y. (2012). Business model you. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
Council of Ontario Universities (2016). Grad Survey. Retrieved from Council of Ontario
Universities website: http://cou.on.ca/wp-content/uploads/2016/12/COU-Grad-
Survey-2016.pdf
Damon, W., Menon, J., & Bronk, K. C. (2003). The development of purpose during
adolescence. Applied Developmental Science, 7(3), 119-128. doi:10.1207/s1532480xads0703_2
Di Stefano, G. D., Gino, F., Pisano, G. P., & Staats, B. R. (2014). Learning by thinking: How
reflection aids performance. SSRN Electronic Journal. doi:10.2139/ssrn.2414478
Dinklage, L. B. (1968). Decision strategies of adolescents (Unpublished doctoral dissertation).
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University.
Dubreuil, P. Forest, J., & Courcy, F. (2014). From strengths use to work performance: The
role of harmonious passion, subjective vitality, and concentration. The Journal of Positive
Psychology, 9, 335-349.
Fraser Institute (2015) An analysis of public and private sector employment trends in Canada,
1990-2013. Vancouver, British Columbia: Author. Retrieved from
https://www.fraserinstitute.org/sites/default/files/analysis-of-public-and-private-sector-
employment-trends-in-canada.pdf
Gallup, Inc. (2018). CliftonStrengths [Webpage]. Retrieved from
https://www.gallupstrengthscenter.com/home/en-us/strengthsfinder
Gottfredson, L. S. (1996). Gottfredson’s theory of circumscription and compromise. In D.
Brown & L. Brooks (Eds.), Career choice and development (pp. 179-232). San Francisco, CA:
Jossey Bass
Government of Canada (2016). Key small business statistics. Retrieved from
http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/061.nsf/eng/h_03018.html
Government of Canada (2018a). Career tool report: Psychology, Bachelor’s degree. Retrieved
from: https://www.jobbank.gc.ca/studentdashboard/FOS20708/LOS05
Government of Canada (2018b). Career tool report: Psychology, Master’s degree. Retrieved from
https://www.jobbank.gc.ca/studentdashboard/FOS20708/LOS07
Government of Canada (2018c). Labour market facts and figures: Psychologists in Canada.
Retrieved from https://www.jobbank.gc.ca/marketreport/outlook-occupation/2218/ca
Government of Canada (2018d). Labour market information. Retrieved from
https://www.jobbank.gc.ca/explorecareers
Gratton, L. (2011). The shift: The future of work is already here. London, UK: HarperCollins.
Harackiewicz, J. M., Barron, K. E., Tauer, J. M., & Elliot, A. J. (2002). Predicting success in
college: A longitudinal study of achievement goals and ability measures as predictors of
interest and performance from freshman year through graduation. Journal of Educational
Jackson, D. N, Paunonen, S. V., & Tremblay, P. F. (2000) Six factor personality questionnaire
[Webpage]. Retrieved from https://www.sigmaassessmentsystems.com/assessments/six-
factor-personality-questionnaire/
Life Values Inventory Online. (2018). Life Values Inventory [Homepage]. Retrieved from
LinkedIn Corporation (2018). LinkedIn [Homepage]. Retrieved from
https://ca.linkedin.com/
Mitchell, K. E., Levin, A. S., & Krumboltz, J.D. (1999) Planned happenstance: Constructing
unexpected career opportunities. Journal of Counseling & Development, 77, 115-124.
Neault, R. A. (2014) Theoretical foundations of career development. In B. C. Shepard, & P. S.
Mani (Eds.) Career development practice in Canada: Perspectives, principles, and professionalism
(pp. 129-150). Toronto, ON: Canadian Education and Research Institute for Counselling.
Nelson Bolles, R. (2018) What Colour is Your Parachute? Danvers, MA: Ten Speed Press.
Niles, S. G., & Harris-Bowlsbey, J. (2013) Career development interventions in the 21st Century.
(4th ed.). Boston, MA: Pearson.
Pryor, R. G, & Bright, J. (2003). The Chaos Theory of Careers. Australian Journal of Career
Development, 12(3), 12-20.
Pryor, R. G, & Bright, J. (2014). The Chaos Theory of Careers (CTC): Ten years on and only
just begun. Australian Journal of Career Development, 23(1), 4–12.
Rajecki, D. W., & Anderson, S. L. (2004). Career pathway information in introductory
psychology textbooks. Teaching of Psychology, 31, 116-118.
Sampson, J. P., Jr., Peterson, G. W., Lenz, J. G., & Reardon, R. C. (1992). A cognitive approach
to career services: Translating concepts into practice. Career Development Quarterly, 41,
67-74.
Savickas, M. L. (1997). Career Counseling. Washington, DC.: American Psychological
Association.
Smith, E. E. (2017). The power of meaning: Crafting a life that matters. London, UK: Rider Books.
Snyder, C. R., Shorey, H. S., Cheavens, J., Pulvers, K. M., Addams, V. H., & Wiklund, C. (2002).
Hope and academic success in college. Journal of Educational Psychology, 94, 820-826.
Statistics Canada (2005) Highlights of the national survey of non-profit and voluntary organizations
(Catalogue No. 61-533-XIE). Retrieved from http://publications.gc.ca/collections/
Collection/Statcan/61-533-XIE/61-533-XIE2004001.pdf
Sutherland, S., & Ibrahim, H. (2014) Refugees in Canada: From persecution to preparedness.
In B. C. Shepard,, & P. S. Mani (Eds.) Career development practice in Canada: Perspectives,
principles, and professionalism (pp. 275-296). Toronto, ON: Canadian Education and Research
Institute for Counselling.
The Myers-Brigg’s Company. (2018). Validity of the Strong Interest Inventory® Instrument
[Webpage]. Retrieved from https://www.cpp.com/en-US/Support/Validity-of-the-Strong-
Interest-Inventory
U.S. Department of Labor (2018) One Net Online [Homepage] Retrieved from
https://www.onetonline.org/
U.S. National Center for Education Statistics. (2017). Early millennials: The sophomore class
of 2002 a decade later (NCES 2017-437). Retrieved from https://nces.ed.gov/pubs2017/
2017437.pdf
VIA Institute on Character. (2018). Join the over 7 million people [Homepage]. Retrieved
from https://www.viacharacter.org/www
VIA Institute on Character. (2018). VIA Assessments Psychometrics [Webpage]. Retrieved
from https://www.viacharacter.org/www/VIA-Assessments-Psychometrics#
Please reference this chapter as:

Keates, C., & Hahn M. (2019). Introduction to career development. In M. E. Norris (Ed.),
The Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science. Kingston, ON: eCampus Ontario.
Licensed under CC BY NC 4.0. Retrieved from https://ecampusontario.pressbooks.pub/

psychologycareers/chapter/career-development/
[3]
RESEARCH METHODS IN THE PSYCHOLOGICAL

SCIENCES
Thomas I. Vaughan-Johnston, Queen’s University
Leandre R. Fabrigar, Queen’s University
Katie Lawrence, Queen’s University
INTRODUCTION
The field of psychology is characterized by a diversity of research questions related

to human thought and behaviour. As such, psychology is organized into several distinct
sub-disciplines. Although psychological research spans a wide range of different content
areas, there is quite a bit of similarity underlying how psychologists go about answering
research questions in these different areas. This is not to say that differences do not exist in
the research approaches used within different areas of inquiry. However, these differences
are in large part variations in emphasis and in the specific tactics used to accomplish
research objectives. The broader principles and fundamental empirical strategies guiding
psychologists in different sub-disciplines are for the most part the same.
If you find that you struggle to understand some concepts in this chapter, do not worry:
these are topics that experts throughout psychology continue to study. Indeed,
understanding these concepts takes practice. Recognizing that readers have a varied
background in this area, there is a key-word index at the end of this chapter. Further,
there are many additional resources to learn more about these topics. Open access (free)
supports for statistics basics include Andy Field’s (2019) discoveringstatistics.com, and Daniel
Lakens (2019) has a low-cost course titled Improving Your Statistical Inferences hosted on
Coursera with financial aid options (https://www.coursera.org/learn/statistical-inferences).
These resources are not a substitute for a university course in research methods or statistics,
but they can provide supportive background information if you want to build a stronger
foundation in these key areas.
52
The principles and procedures that guide psychologists’ exploration of research questions
are what we typically refer to as psychological research methods
methods. The goal of this chapter is
to introduce readers to the key principles that nearly all psychologists rely upon when
conducting psychological research. Understanding research methods is obviously essential
for any student whose ultimate goal is to embark on a career as a research psychologist
in either academia or an applied setting. However, it is also important for many non-
research careers; for example, many professions require employees to be “consumers” of
psychological research. These individuals might not conduct research, but often might draw
upon prior research to develop plans of action to help accomplish their objectives (e.g.,
advertising firms developing product campaigns, managers attempting to resolve conflicts
between employees). Indeed, even people making decisions in their personal lives might
find themselves needing to be consumers of psychological research (e.g., a parent of a
child with behavioural problems considering various intervention plans). Regardless of the
setting, it is impossible to be an informed consumer of psychological research without
understanding the key principles that guide how research is conducted.
In discussing psychological research methods, this review is based on a series of key
steps that a researcher must undertake in conducting any program of research. For ease of
presentation, these steps follow a straightforward sequence. This sequence is to some degree
a logical progression and, as will be seen, some steps cannot really be undertaken without
first completing earlier steps. That being said, the order of some steps can be reversed or
even addressed at the same time. To illustrate this design process, a recurring hypothetical
example of a research program will be used: how fear and anger might influence aggression.
KEY STEPS IN THE RESEARCH PROCESS
Formulating Research Questions. The first step to any program of research is formulating
the research question. Ultimately, any study is only as useful as the research question it is
designed to address. Additionally, as will be seen, many of the decisions made in later stages
of the research process are informed by the nature of the question a study intends to answer.
Descriptive versus inferential research questions
questions. When formulating a research question, a first
issue to address is whether the goal of the research will be primarily descriptive versus
inferential in nature. Descriptive research questions largely focus on describing one or more
psychological or behavioural constructs in a given domain of interest. For example, a
researcher studying aggression might be interested in the prevalence of verbal aggression
in the workplace. This researcher might wish to determine the proportion of employees in
Canadian workplaces who have been verbally demeaned or insulted by their co-workers.
Although psychological research is sometimes primarily descriptive in nature, most
psychological research is predominantly inferential in its goals. Inferential research involves
the exploration of relations among psychological and behavioural constructs. For example,
in the context of aggression, a researcher might want to know what characteristics of
workplace employees are associated with them being perpetrators of verbal aggression.
Clearly, both types of research question (descriptive and inferential) are useful and
interesting. However, if we ultimately want to understand why something occurs and/or how
we can influence it, research must move beyond the purely descriptive level and begin to
address inferential questions.
Exploratory versus confirmatory research questions
questions. Assuming an inferential research question,
54 Methods
the next consideration is whether this question will be approached in an exploratory or

confirmatory manner. In exploratory research
research, researchers do not have specific expectations,
but rather more general notions regarding the answer to the question. For example, a
researcher interested in what characteristics are associated with the likelihood of being a
perpetrator of verbal aggression in the workplace might measure a wide range of different
characteristics of employees (e.g., their proclivity to experience different emotions, their
level of seniority in the organization, various personality traits) and then conduct analyses to
see which characteristics are associated with aggression. In contrast, for confirmatory research
research,
the researcher specifies what factors are likely to cause aggression and perhaps even when
and why such factors have their effects. These hypotheses are generally derived from past
research and/or some theory regarding the phenomenon of interest. The researcher then
focuses attention primarily on those factors that have been hypothesized to produce the
outcome of interest.
Both approaches have their advantages and limitations. The strength of exploratory
research is that it encourages researchers to think broadly about the phenomenon of interest
and maximizes the opportunity of stumbling on unexpected discoveries. However, although
exploratory studies often consider a wide range of possibilities, they are rarely optimal tests
of any single explanation. In contrast, confirmatory studies tend to have a narrow focus,
but usually provide more systematic and complete tests of the factors they are designed
to explore. For instance, if a study must cover a wide range of different characteristics of
employees that could predict their proclivity to engage in verbal aggression, it might not be
feasible to extensively measure each factor (e.g., the researcher might only be able to include
a few questions measuring each factor). In contrast, if a researcher has explicitly postulated
that tendency to experience the emotions of fear and anger are major determinants of
aggression, the researcher might be able to include very extensive measures of each
emotion, and perhaps even multiple different types of measures of each emotion. The two
approaches, however, are not mutually exclusive. Indeed, often a program of research will
adopt an exploratory approach in its early phases and then gradually transition to a more
confirmatory approach.
Basic versus applied research questions
questions. A final consideration during the research question
formulation stage is whether the study will be designed to primarily address a basic (i.e.,
theoretical) research question versus an applied research question. Basic research is aimed
at formulating and testing fundamental psychological principles governing a domain of
interest. For instance, a researcher might be interested in developing a theory of the role
of emotions in aggression. The goal of this researcher is to develop principles that explain
which specific emotions either increase or decrease aggression and why these emotions have
the effects they do on aggression. Thus, the goal is to arrive at a fundamental understanding
of the relations among the constructs of emotions and the construct of aggression.
In contrast, applied research questions tend to focus on a specific problem. They typically
emphasize predicting or influencing an outcome rather than in understanding why that
outcome is predicted or influenced by a given factor. Indeed, applied research questions
often focus on the effects of a specific measure or intervention with little concern as to
why that measure or manipulation accomplishes its goal and/or the effects of the broader
construct of interest that measure or intervention is presumed to represent. For example,
an applied researcher might be interested in testing if a specific measure of anger predicts
employee aggression or if a specific anger-management program lowers employee

aggression.
As with other distinctions, the basic versus applied research question distinctions are
not mutually exclusive. Often basic research might have the ultimate goal of developing
principles that can be used to solve applied problems. Likewise, the exploration of applied
questions can often contribute to the understanding of basic questions. Thus, this distinction
is more a matter of emphasis than a fundamental difference in the nature of the research
question being addressed. However, this difference in emphasis does have implications
for the methodological decisions that a researcher might make at subsequent stages of the
research process.
Selecting dependent variables. Once a researcher has formulated a research question and
presuming that question is inferential in nature, the researcher’s next step is to determine
the specific constructs of interest. More precisely, constructs are those elements in a study
thought to vary across people and/or situations. Although the goal of all inferential research
is to determine the relationship between constructs, some of this research involves merely
finding associations between constructs, whereas other studies test hypothesized causal
relationships among the constructs(s) of interest. A researcher cannot assess “fear”,
“aggression”, or other constructs directly, but instead selects specific measures that represent
constructs in an observable way. Measures representing the outcome constructs in
hypothesized relationships are called dependent variables because they are conceptualized to
be dependent on the levels of one or more independent variables
variables, a topic that will be addressed
later in the chapter.
After having determined the constructs that one intends to study, one must more precisely
define them. Some constructs are more easily defined than others. For example, when
measuring psychological constructs such as personality, there are numerous
conceptualizations of personality, including the Big Five and HEXACO frameworks. In
contrast, physical traits such as height and weight often have widely accepted definitions that
are consistently applied across domains of research. Keep in mind that how a researcher
chooses to define the study variables will affect the results of the study, the comparability
of outcomes to other studies that have researched the same constructs, and one’s ability to
operationalize the constructs in a way that will allow for feasible, sensible, and meaningful
measurement.
For example, there are a broad range of ways to characterize aggression (e.g., Archer &
Coyne, 2005). For some research questions, a broad conceptualization that includes indirect,
relational, and social aggression may be very useful. In other cases, a very specific definition
of aggression as “causing physical harm to others” may be preferable. Even within this
seemingly narrowed conceptualization of physical harm, important conceptual questions
require answering: for example, should the mere desire or wish to cause physical harm
count, or only aggressive actions that are actually expressed by a participant?
Operationalization is the formal term for the specific definition of constructs with a specific
measure. For example, if one wishes to measure an individual’s aggression, the experimenter
must decide how, that is what method of instrumentation, should be utilized to obtain
an accurate measurement (e.g., using a self-report scale, observational techniques). Thus,
one possible operationalization of individual aggression could be self-report using the
Aggression Scale (e.g., Orpinas & Frankowski, 2001). Researchers usually hope that they
can make inferences from the measure back to the construct that the measure is trying
56 Methods
to capture. When operationalizing dependent variables, one must aim to select measures
that are sensitive enough that the influence of the independent variable on the dependent
variable can be detected. Measures should strive to accurately capture a construct of interest,
a topic that will be discussed in detail later as construct validity
validity.
Level of measurement
measurement. There are four major categories of measurement level. Nominal scales
involve any measure for which scores are given as categorical labels. For example, in our
fear/anger and aggression study, we might assess participants’ cultural background (e.g.,
German, Chinese) as a nominal variable. Notice that nominal scales like this do not imply
any rank ordering of the categories. That is, cultures like Germany or China are not options
that vary along a single continuum of provided options, but are categories that are selected.
Conversely, ordinal scales provide a rank ordering of the categories. For example, a
measure might ask people to rank-order several aggressive thoughts they are experiencing
from most to least aggressive. Here the response options are ordered from most aggressive
to least aggressive: a single continuum. However, also recognize there is no standard distance
between the rankings: that is, the psychological distance implied by the gap between the
first and second most aggressive thoughts might not be identical to the distance between the
fourth and fifth most aggressive thoughts.
Interval data provides response options that are equally spaced. In psychology it is often
difficult to create truly interval scaling. Imagine a self-reported anger scale ranging from
1 (slight anger) to 2 (moderate anger) to 3 (strong anger). The psychological distance between
response options such as slight to moderate, versus moderate to strong, although intended
to be equal, might not necessarily be equivalent to one another, making it difficult to
form truly interval measurements. However, when multiple items are aggregated together,
pseudo-interval scaling often functions quite similarly to true interval scaling, and such
aggregated ordinal data can often be treated statistically as though it were interval (Harpe,
2015).
Ratio data additionally adds a true zero point. For example, if participants’ punching a
doll is used as a behavioural measurement of aggression, zero punches indicate a complete
absence of this behaviour. This matters, for example, when multiplying using the scale, for
example when comparing between levels on the scale. A 2 on a self-report scale of anger
does not indicate “twice” as much anger as a 1, but a person who punches a doll twice has
actually engaged in twice as much of this type of aggression compared to someone who
punches once.
Methods of measurement
measurement. There are methods of measurement routinely used in psychology.
The most common method of measurement used in psychology is self-report measurementmeasurement.
These measures ask participants to verbally report their standing on the psychological or
behavioural construct of interest, typically using some form of structured rating scale. Self-
report tools are usually considered to be direct measures because participants are directly
asked to assess their own psychological attributes. Examples include the Beck Depression
Inventory (Beck, Steer, & Brown, 1996 ) or the NEO Five-Factor Inventory (Costa & McCrae,
1991). One issue that commonly arises when using self-report measures is that they are
susceptible to socially desirable responding (Paulhus, 1991), meaning that respondents may
distort their responses in order to present themselves favourably. For example, people may
wish to understate how much anger or fear they are feeling, if feeling these emotions
strongly is considered inappropriate. Another issue is that people may not always be able
to provide accurate self-report responses. For example, self-report responses are influenced
by the cognitive accessibility of relevant information (e.g., Strack, Martin, & Schwarz, 1988),
making these responses susceptible to influence based on how questions are framed.
Additionally, people may simply not have perfect introspective self-awareness (Nisbett &
Wilson, 1977), and therefore not be capable of accurately describing all of why they think or
feel certain ways.
Another common method of data collection is the use of indirect measures
measures, which refer
to tools that assess participants without directly asking them to provide self-assessment of
their psychological attributes (De Houwer, 2006; Gawronski & De Houwer, 2014). A very
common form of indirect measure is implicit measurement
measurement, referring to measures that assess
relatively uncontrolled and automatic types of participants’ responses. Examples of implicit
measures include the Name-Letter Task (NLT; LeBel & Gawronski, 2009; Nuttin, 1985),
the Implicit Association Test (IAT; Greenwald, McGhee, & Schwartz, 1998), and the Affect
Misattribution Procedure (AMP; Payne, Cheng, Govorun, & Stewart, 2005). Although these
implicit measures are quite diverse in form, they generally work by assessing reaction time,
or subtle response patterns that would be difficult to deliberately control. For example,
implicit measures often assess how quickly people pair objects together, following the logic
that similar objects or ideas are “congruent” for respondents, and are easily categorized
together. For example, people who pair “good” with “white” quickly, but “good” with “black”
slowly may be viewed as having a preference for white over black people. Other implicit
measures suggest that underlying feelings about an object can be assessed by how
respondents’ feelings spill over onto stimuli presented shortly after. The AMP, for example,
exposes participants very briefly to an image of an attitude object (a prime
prime), and then asks
them to rate their opinion towards a relatively neutral stimulus (e.g., rating how much they
like a meaningless shape). Individuals who rate the neutral stimulus as “bad” after viewing a
particular prime are viewed as having a negative opinion of the prime object (Payne et al.,
2005).
One reason that indirect measures are often championed is that they are thought to be
highly resistant to social desirability concerns (Petty, Fazio, & Briñol, 2012). For example,
when measuring racial attitudes with a self-report scale, psychologists may be concerned
that respondents would have a powerful motivation not to admit racist attitudes. An indirect
measure can subvert these social desirability concerns by measuring extremely subtle
reaction time differences that would be difficult to control. It may be noted that some
research has identified specific conditions whereby respondents can occasionally control
‘implicit’ responses (Klauer & Teige-Mocigemba, 2007), but generally respondents will find
it much more difficult to deliberately control their responses on these tasks. Thus, implicit
measures may not completely immune to social desirability or other motivated control
attempts, but they are highly resistant to such response biases.
One common observation about implicit measures is that they do not always show high
levels of convergence with their explicit counterparts. Although critics have sometimes
framed this low convergence as a problem, low correlations may simply suggest that implicit
measures capture unique variance in constructs that traditional self-report measures fail to
capture. Importantly, this implies that direct and indirect measures may have incremental
validity in predicting behaviors, meaning that using both types of measure to predict
behavior is more powerful than using only using one type of measure. Reviews have shown
that incremental validity of implicit and explicit attitudes can indeed be observed (Friese,
Hofmann, & Schmitt, 2008). Furthermore, each type of measure may be uniquely helpful in
58 Methods
specific contexts. In conditions where people are deliberate and thoughtful, explicit measures
appear to have better predictive power, whereas implicit measures are better used to predict
spontaneous behavior (Asendorpf, Banse, & Mucke, 2002).
Oftentimes in psychology, psychological processes are inferred based on physical changes
that occur to participants’ brains or other bodily regions. Physiological measures record
processes such as voltage fluctuations in brain neurons (i.e., brain activity) captured using
electroencephalography (EEG), metabolic processes using positron emission topography
(PET), and blood flow in the brain using functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI). For
example, some researchers have assessed people’s fear responses by assessing activation of
their amygdala region through techniques including magnetoencephalography (Moses et al.,
2007). Cacioppo and Tassinary (1990) have chronicled some of the impressive advances in
neuropsychology’s ability to noninvasively examine brain activity. Like implicit measures,
physiological measures are often seen as preferable to self-report measurement because
they can obviate participants’ attempts to control their responses. Although these measures
therefore have great value in addressing certain concerns, one general limitation of these
methods is that because of the complicated technology required, their administration
requires highly specialized technicians, and they are therefore costly and time-consuming
to use. More substantively, numerous neuropsychologists have warned readers about the
dangers of over-assuming causal relationships between brain “signals” and participants’
emotions, thoughts, or actions (Cacioppo et al., 2003).
Just as implicit and physiological measures operate by capturing respondents’ relatively
uncontrollable reactions, observational measures allow social scientists to obtain information
from their subjects through evaluating participants’ overt behaviours. Observations can be
made with or without participants’ being aware that such observations are occurring. For
example, aggression has been measured by measuring how much hot sauce participants put
into a glass of water supposedly intended for the next participant to enter the laboratory,
with large amounts of hot sauce indicating an aggressive behaviour (Liebermann, Solomon,
Greenberg, & McGregor, 1999).
Reliability and validity
validity. A comprehensive explanation of the development of new measures
goes beyond the scope of this chapter, but guidelines are available for interested readers
( John & Benet-Martinez, 2014; Simms, 2008). The following section instead focuses
primarily on issues of measurement reliability and validity, two fundamental psychometric
properties.
Although both reliability and validity in measurement are crucial, reliability is required
for a measure to be valid, but validity is not required for a measure to be reliable. In
principle, reliability simply refers to the consistency with which a measure provides the same
information, although it comes in many forms. For example, psychologists may measure
the same construct in the same people across a span of time, using the same measure.
If a measure provides consistent measurements across time, and the construct it assesses
remains stable, people who score low or high at one time point should continue to do
so later; this is called ‘test-retest reliability’. Of course, constructs that are expected to
change across time (e.g., acute experiences of fear) do not typically get measured with high
test-retest reliability, because participants responses change due to the fleeting nature of
emotion. However, many traits are thought to be relatively stable across the lifespan, such
as personality (Costa & McCrae, 1993), and high test-retest reliabilities serve to indicate that
these constructs’ measures are providing consistent information.
Another tool for assessing reliability is the extent to which independent evaluators judge
something in a similar manner: ‘inter-rater
inter-rater reliability
reliability’. For example, if observers were asked
to evaluate aggressive behaviour displayed by participants, inter-rater reliability would be
high if all the judges observed and recorded a similar number of aggressive behaviours.
If judges’ evaluations completely differed from one to the next, this would be evidence
that their observations lack reliability, that is, lack consistency. Similarly, when evaluating
various items that are thought to assess the same underlying construct, ‘internal consistency’
refers to when items correlate highly with one another due to respondents answering in
a consistent way across items (Henson, 2001). For example, a highly fearful individual
should express that they are “terrified”, “frightened”, as well as “scared”. The core principle is
consistency: consistent responses to these items within the same respondents would indicate
that the items are seen as reflecting the same construct, meaning that they have reliability.
After having operationalized your dependent measures it is important that you ensure that
your measure displays validity
validity. A measure is valid insofar as it quantifies accurately what it
purports to measure. Construct validity refers to the degree to which a measure specifically
and sensitively captures its intended construct (Cook & Campbell, 1979; Shadish, Cook, &
Campbell, 2002). Although methodology texts often introduce dozens of unique types of
validity as though each were completely separate, many of these are best viewed as types
of evidence that allow researchers to determine if a measure has construct validity. For
example, ‘criterion
criterion validity
validity’ is the extent to which a measure is associated with other measures
that should logically be related to its construct. This is really evidence of a measure’s
construct validity: if a measure effectively captures its construct, it should be related to
things that its construct relates to. For example, when developing a self-reported fear
measure, this fear measure should be related to avoidance behaviors, because people are
motivated to avoid things that frighten them. If they do correlate, this is consistent with
the notion that the fear measure is accurately or validly measuring fear. Similarly,
methodologists refer to ‘discriminant
discriminant validity
validity’ when a measure shows minimal associations
with irrelevant variables. For example, a fear measure should not be closely associated with
social desirability measures. Indeed, if a fear measure was negatively related to a social
desirability measure, it might indicate that people are denying any fear that they feel due to
social desirability concerns such as not wanting to sound afraid. This would threaten a fear
measure’s construct validity, because the fear measure would no longer only be measuring
fear.
If a measure appears to reflect its construct according to either experts or laypeople,
then it is said to possess ‘faceface validity
validity’: once again, this is evidence of construct validity.
If emotion experts think that the items on a fear measure are not reflective of fear, this
could raise concerns about the measure’s construct validity. Interestingly, sometimes it is
disadvantageous for a measure to possess face validity. For example, if participants are aware
that a scale seeks to measure aggression, then it is likely that participants may disagree with
items to appear non-aggressive to the extent that aggression is socially inappropriate or anti-
normative. To obtain accurate results it is therefore occasionally advantageous to reduce face
validity depending on the construct of interest, in other words increasing a scale’s subtlety
(Holden & Jackson, 1979).
Selecting independent variables. Once the dependent variable has been determined,
a researcher selects one or more independent variables (IVs), which represent variables
conceptualized as predicting or influencing DVs. Many of the same criteria used to evaluate
60 Methods
DVs are also relevant when considering IVs. For example, the reliability and validity of IVs
are as important as they are for DVs, and are often assessed in the same ways. Continuing
with the example of fear or anger inducing aggression, fear/anger would be IVs: the variables
understood to be increasing or decreasing aggression. However, IVs are not precisely like
DVs. For one thing, DVs are always measured whereas IVs may be measured or manipulated.
Both measurement and manipulation have some advantages and disadvantages, and each
opens up several specific questions for the researcher.
Manipulations. Manipulations are changes in constructs induced by deliberately stimulating
or inhibiting those constructs through some process of the study. In the recurring example, a
manipulation would be any action designed to actively change participants’ current levels of
anger or fear. As with DVs, consider the many ways that fear/anger could be operationalized.
One could remind participants of a time when they felt fear/anger in their own lives
(recalled emotion; e.g., Baker & Guttfreund, 1993) or read fictitious narratives which are
intended to make participants experience fear/anger (emotion stimulated by narrative
engagement). One could employ deception to generate anger: for example, Nisbett and
Cohen (1996) had a confederate “accidentally” bump into participants as they walked in a
corridor, which elicited anger in participants. Despite being very different, these are all
manipulations designed to stimulate an IV.
One reason to incorporate a manipulation rather than a measure of one’s IV is that
manipulations have advantages with respect to internal validity
validity, which reflects researchers’
ability to make causal claims about the relationship between study variables. Imagine
measuring fear (our ‘IV’) and then measuring aggression (our ‘DV’) just a few moments
afterwards. Assuming an association existed between these measures, what could a
researcher conclude? It is not clear that fear caused aggression. One other possibility would
be that participants were already feeling aggressive before fear was measured. Those
aggressive intentions caused the participants to feel fear, and were still present when the
aggression measure was collected. Thus, in this case, fear might just as easily have caused
aggression (this risk is sometimes called reverse causation
causation). Perhaps more likely, a third
construct could be responsible for causing the other two constructs to appear associated.
For example, participants may have been experiencing physiological arousal at an earlier
point in the procedure. This arousal caused them to endorse the fear items because their
heart was racing and their palms were sweating, so they inferred that they were feeling fear.
Furthermore, their arousal led them to behave more aggressively. Note that in this case,
arousal was actually responsible for both variables seeming to ‘increase together’ (covarycovary),
and no real causal relationship existed between fear and aggression. This threat to internal
validity is sometimes called the third variable problem
problem.
These are questions of, and perhaps serious threats to, internal validity. Now imagine
randomly assigning half of a group of participants to watch a frightening movie scene that
results in increased fear, and the other half to watch a non-frightening scene that doesn’t
increase fear (thus, fear is manipulated). That is, every participant has an equal likelihood
of being in any of the experimental conditions. Because people are randomly sorted into
these groups, it is unlikely that a third variable caused differences in fear between the two
groups. This is because any idiosyncratic individual differences between participants would
be distributed randomly across conditions. Instead, differences between the groups are most
likely attributable to the manipulation’s effects, helping to establish a causal relationship
wherein the IV causes the DV. Researchers’ ability to make such causal claims are referred to
as internal validity.
A common choice when using manipulations is to incorporate a control group group, representing
the condition in which participants would be if they were not subjected to the part of a
manipulation that is of interest to you. For example, consider all the elements of watching
a five-minute frightening film clip: five minutes of audio and visual stimuli, the feeling
of wearing headphones, sitting in a chair, and (hopefully) feeling fear. A control group
controls for as many of these irrelevant aspects as possible, leaving only the fear variable
to differ across groups. Thus, a control group might watch a five-minute film clip (wearing
headphones; sitting down) of an emotionally ‘neutral’ scene such as a mechanic fixing a
dishwasher. Differences in group behaviors are now hopefully attributable only to fear,
rather than sitting, wearing headphones, or film-watching in general, since even a boring
dishwasher scene contains all of those elements.
This clustering of participants such that some experience one condition, others experience
a different condition, and others experience a control condition is characteristic of a between-
participant design
design, which helps to examine causal relationships by randomly assigning people
to one of two conditions and examining differences emerging between the groups.
Alternatively, in a within-participant design
design, participants would each undergo each condition.
Re-using the video-watching example, a within-participant design might have all
participants watch both clips, measuring aggression after each clip. In this case, no random
assignment is required because the same individuals participate in both conditions.
However, a researcher will often rotate the order of presentation: half of participants watch
the control film before the frightening film, and half watch in the reverse order (this process
is sometimes called counterbalancing the order of conditions). Otherwise, the order of film
presentation might explain any differences between conditions.
Issues of manipulations and measurements
measurements. It is often advisable to consider a similar checklist
of priorities when using measures or manipulations. Consider issues of confounding
variables. One common objection to measuring IVs is that measures are almost always
influenced by constructs other than the one intended. For example, it may be difficult
to measure fear without a measurement being impacted by participants’ neuroticism (a
personality trait in which people experience chronic, negative emotionality). Therefore,
manipulations may seem superior because they do not introduce such confounds. However,
manipulations may also introduce irrelevant confounds if the manipulation influences
constructs other than the one(s) intended (see Fiedler, Kutzner, & Krueger, 2012). For
example, a manipulation designed to increase fear might almost make some participants
sad, angry, or surprised, making it harder to deduce what was ultimately responsible for any
aggression effects. Thus, whether a researcher measures or manipulates an IV, they should
still consider how irrelevant variables may interfere with their study’s validity.
Second, issues of transparency
transparency, the degree to which participants can understand the true
purpose of a study, are relevant to both measured and manipulated IVs. For example, it
is usually important that participants do not know the precise hypothesis of a study, lest
they simply act as they believe they are supposed to (i.e., demand characteristics
characteristics; Orne, 1962).
Suppose a study consists only of measuring fear and anger, before measuring aggression.
Participants may deduce that the researcher wants to know whether fear and/or anger
predict aggression, and act accordingly (acting either to confirm or disconfirm that
hypothesis). One way to avoid this problem is to use one of many measures that are designed
62 Methods
to measure a construct subtly, to avoid being obvious about what the experimenter is
interested in, as discussed above. Another easy solution is to includefiller
filler measures
measures: scales that
researchers do not wish to evaluate, that are included to confuse participants’ understanding
of the study’s purpose. Participants will typically assume that all study measures are relevant
to the experimenter’s research questions, and therefore these bogus measures will throw off
their guessing the true hypothesis.
In some contexts, manipulations may also make the study’s purposes transparent. If
participants understand what a manipulation is meant to do to them, they may act
differently due to their awareness of the experimenter’s research goals. Transparency is a
particular issue for within-participant designs, because these often imply to participants that
the experimenter wants to know how something varies across conditions, each of which
each participant has experienced. In between-participant designs, in contrast, the design
is often well-hidden simply because participants are not aware of what other participants
are experiencing and thus do not know what their responses/actions are being compared
against. One precaution that is often sensible is to include a funnel interview (Page & Scheidt,
1971). In a funnel interview, participants are asked increasingly probing questions about their
experiences in the study and what they thought the study’s purpose was. Participants who
truly understood the study’s purpose will presumably state this when they are asked, and
researchers can consider whether to refine the manipulation, cut the data of the suspicious
individuals, or else simply run statistical tests with and without suspicious participants
included to assess the impact of suspicion.
The concept of construct validity was previously introduced with reference to
measurements, but it has applicability to manipulations as well. Consider the previous
example of bumping into participants to produce anger. In reality, it was primarily
participants who were raised in the Southern, not Northern U.S. states who felt anger at the
staged hallway collision (Nisbett & Cohen, 1996); Northerners quite often felt amused by the
experience. This raises a critical question: for whom is a manipulation likely to activate its
intended construct? The same stimulus that would frighten a child may not produce fear in
adults. The easiest way to determine if a manipulation has construct validity is a manipulation
check performed either during the study, or on a separate pilot sample. A manipulation check
usually asks a participant a question directly related to the construct: for example, after
watching a (hopefully) scary film clip, participants may be asked “how scary was that film?”
or “how scared are you?” If the fear clip is felt to be scarier than the control clip, elevated fear
ratings should be produced.
Context. We next consider elements of research context that a research must consider
when planning a study. In social science, context generally describes the population of
interest (people) and the location and time (setting) in which research takes place. Context is
of great importance to psychologists for at least two reasons. First, context helps to define
how measures and manipulations should be designed to optimally capture a construct (i.e.,
construct validity). Just as some measures are only effective for children (e.g., “I want my
mommy” as an item measuring fear), some stimuli have different psychological meanings
in certain eras. For example, consider how the meaning of the name “John F. Kennedy”
changed from 1962 to 1964 (with his assassination occurring in 1963), or how the words “John
F. Kennedy” might have radically different meanings to a respondent who was alive in the
1960s compared to a respondent who was born in the 21st century. This is very important
in psychology, because it means that measures and manipulations that were developed
originally for one context may or may not work effectively in other contexts. Ultimately,
psychologists are interested in the relationships between constructs, not measures.
Therefore, materials must be found to possess construct validity within a given context
and within a given population before they can reasonably test how constructs interrelate.
There is often a trade-off to consider. Materials that are very customized for a specific
population may be extremely powerful tools for studying that population, but may require a
serious re-evaluation and development process when alternative groups are studied, making
generalization attempts more laborious.
A second reason why context and population matters is because psychologists sometimes
wish to test the external validity or generalizability of findings. Suppose that psychologists
discover that fear does causally produce aggressive responses among children. Of course, it
does not automatically follow that the same relationship would occur among adults, whose
emotional self-regulation abilities may be considerably different. Assuming that a construct-
valid fear manipulation was employed among adults, and assuming that a construct-valid
aggression measure was also used, the fear/aggression association could be examined among
adults as well. Whether the association emerges or not would then test the external validity of
the fear/aggression link, that is, how generalizable the link between variables is.
Participants
Participants. In psychology, the population of interest is typically a very large group of people
about whom the researcher wishes to draw conclusions. Researchers create inclusion criteria
and exclusion criteria to aid in the process of defining the population of interest. The former
refers to characteristics that would render a participant eligible to participate and the latter
would disqualify a subject from partaking in the planned data. For example, if a social
scientist was interested in the aggression levels of criminally convicted juvenile offenders in
Canada, then the inclusion criteria might include age (<18 years). Having no criminal record
would be an exclusion criterion.
Measuring every individual in the population of interest is virtually never feasible
(Banerjee & Chaudhury, 2010), requiring psychology researchers to test their hypotheses
using a subset of the population of interest known as a sample sample. In some cases, researchers
aim to obtain a truly random sample
sample, which ensures that every member of the population
under investigation has an equal probability of being included in the sample. One situation
in which random sampling is important is when descriptive analyses are important to a
researcher. For example, if researchers want to know accurately what the average aggression
level is among Canadian juvenile offenders, non-random sampling will likely undermine the
accuracy of their descriptive estimates.
Truly random samples are often impossible to obtain (Sweetland, 1972) resulting in the
collection of data by means of a convenience samplesample, meaning that a sample is obtained
from a more readily available subgroup of the population. University students are a classic
example of a convenience sample when the population of interest is “all people”, because
students are often easily accessible to researchers, for example participating in research in
exchange for bonus marks in their courses or small cash payments. Naturally, university
students differ from random members of the public in some respects: they are likely to have
elevated intelligence, an increased desire for thinking, and so on. However, a worthwhile
consideration is whether a convenience sample differs from the population on specific
constructs of interest to a researcher. For example, a perceptual psychologist studying
visual perception may consider university students to be quite representative of people
with respect to rods and cones in their retinas. To this researcher, the attributes for which
64 Methods
university students might be expected to differ from the general population probably would
not interfere with testing their key hypotheses.
Other cases may be more ambiguous, and the utility of convenience samples may also
depend on the type of research question being pursued. For example, if university students
have unusually developed cognitive abilities, this is likely to bias descriptive research
questions about cognitive abilities. Inferential research, however, necessitates closer scrutiny
regarding the use of convenience samples. For example, it is unclear whether a convenience
sample of university students may have a different relationship between fear/anger and
aggression, compared to children or older adults. That is, the relationship between emotion
and aggression (an inferential question) may itself differ across a span of age levels. One
possibility, if a researcher is concerned about such age effects, would be to collect a
representative sample. However, it is not clear that this solution is without issues. For
example, suppose that fear relates to increased aggression in young adults, but that children
instead become less aggressive when they are afraid. If a researcher were to engage in equal
sampling of children and young adults, the study might show no effect of fear when in
fact there are two very different effects that are masked because the two patterns run in
opposing directions. Indeed, if researchers have reasonable grounds to suspect that such
differences occur across sample types, they may want to conduct multiple studies, each
collecting a sample from a different population. In this hypothetical case, for instance, Study
1 would identify the positive fear/aggression association among young adults, and Study 2
would identify the negative association in children. An alternative approach would involve
deliberately collecting both groups within a single large study (e.g., half young adults, half
children), and then statistically analysing any differences across the groups.
Another consideration regarding population is sample size size, that is, the number of
participants who will participate in a study. There exist numerous techniques to determine
an appropriate sample size, usually termed power analyses
analyses, but the mathematical basis for
these calculations is too complex to be fully advanced here. In general, larger samples
decrease the chance that a finding will represent a statistical “fluke”. This is because as
our sample becomes bigger, it better approximates the population that we want to make
conclusions about. For example, if 10,000 Canadian women were surveyed about workplace
aggression, the conclusions that could be drawn about experiences of Canadian women
related to workplace aggression are more likely to reflect the population of all Canadian
women than a sample size of 10 Canadian women.
Although some psychologists advocate for always maximizing sample size, there are a few
issues to consider when deciding on an appropriate sample size. Certainly, it is true that
a larger sample size increases statistical power
power, or the ability to detect inferential patterns
between variables where they truly exist. Similarly, descriptive statistics become more
precise with larger samples. However, there are other considerations to take into account
when planning research. For example, researchers may become constrained in terms of
the methodologies that can facilitate such enormous samples. For example, researchers can
collect thousands or even millions of participants through crowd-sourcing techniques or
mass online testing (e.g., www.yourmorals.org; Iyer, 2019), but as we detail in a later section,
online research has both advantages and disadvantages associated with it.
A final issue prompting close attention to population is how stimuli and measures will
be developed for various populations. As previously discussed, scientific research proceeds
by using measures and manipulations to operationalize abstract constructs. Thus, it is
imperative that measures/manipulations have their intended meanings within each specific
population. Consider using the same religious questionnaire for a study in both San Antonio
and Salt Lake City: religious items may not have the same meaning for both populations.
Some methodologists advocate for measurement invariance analysis (Millsap & Meredith,
2007; Widaman & Grimm, 2014), which uses a mathematical procedure to establish whether
items of a measure perform similarly across groups at a psychometric level. Without
establishing, at minimum, the basic levels of measurement invariance, comparisons across
groups become suspect. Using the above example again, it becomes problematic to replicate
a study on Texans with a sample of Utahans if a central measure has a completely different
psychometric structure for these two groups.
Setting
Setting. A major factor in setting is whether a study takes place in a laboratory, in an
online survey, or in a field context. The advantages and disadvantages of these contexts have
stimulated productive research and debate. For example, laboratory research has sometimes
been criticized as lacking mundane realism realism, or being artificial and lacking applicability to
“real-world” situations (Ilgen & Favaro, 1985). However, psychologists rarely attempt to
produce contexts that resemble “the real world” literally, instead focusing on participants’
experiences of a study as psychologically meaningful (Berkowitz & Donnerstein, 1982).
Recall that construct validity, for example, depends upon measures and/or manipulations
being able to capture or produce psychological constructs within participants, such as fear,
anger, or aggression. For example, a social rejection experience may be quite fabricated and
artificial, but if it feels real to participants then causal hypotheses about the effects of feeling
rejected can still be evaluated. Similarly, one might be concerned that participants will know
they are being studied in a laboratory and therefore act unusually due to being observed.
However, this risk can often be managed. Many experiments use deceptive procedures, or
between-participant designs that hide the other conditions from participants, to disguise
the true purpose of the research. For example, studies of bystander apathy examine how
participants respond to emergencies (Latané & Darley, 1970). Although psychologists cannot
ethically place people in real emergencies, they can lead participants to believe that they are
attending a lab for one purpose, and have a simulated emergency occur, such as a person
crying out in pain from an adjacent room. When participants intercede, they believe they
are responding to a real emergency disconnected from the experiment, and so concerns
about participants “feeling studied” can sometimes be controlled.
Practically, the laboratory offers many important advantages to researchers, such as the
ability to control noise variables like time of day, temperature, noise and distractions,
and so on. Although a variable like ‘temperature’ may not immediately seem important
to a psychologist, note for example that room heat has been associated with aggression
(Baron & Bell, 1975). Seemingly irrelevant environmental variables can directly influence
psychological processes. Furthermore, lab equipment such as physiological equipment,
or computers that can assess reaction time, can be made available in a laboratory with
relative ease. However, a disadvantage is that some kinds of experiences are not easily
cultivated in a laboratory. For example, although psychologists may study group formation
in a lab, it is more difficult to study long-term group identity processes within a single-
hour lab study, and impractical to have participants attend a laboratory for the years or
decades required for some processes to unfold. Similarly, topics such as serious romantic
relationships, bereavement, and so on, may be difficult to emulate in a laboratory and may
be better studied in their natural contexts.
66 Methods
Although not overcoming all challenges associated with laboratory studies, one alternative
context to the traditional laboratory is to conduct research in an on-line setting. There are
several advantages to this setting. It is relatively easy to solicit large samples of participants,
particularly when using crowd-sourcing technologies such as Amazon Mechanical Turk or
Crowdflower. Furthermore, very rare (e.g., individuals with low-prevalence conditions) or
distal groups (e.g., when an American researcher wishes to study Japanese populations) are
much easier to obtain using online research. However, critics have suggested that attention
levels may waver online, especially among university participants completing research
online (Hauser & Schwarz, 2016). Others have argued that this “online inattention” problem
may be obviated with attention checks (Goodman, Cryder, & Cheema, 2013; but see Hauser
& Schwarz, 2015). Certainly, online studies tend to involve participants who know that
they are being studied, and so the above-noted concerns about presentation biases may
be a concern here once again. With respect to the control that psychologists have over
respondents’ environments, the answer here is mixed. For example, an online study can
request that participants work in a private, uninterrupted work environment, but can rarely
enforce this behavior within participants. Similarly, numerous random variables will
fluctuate across participants in online samples. Variables such as room temperature, density
of people within the room, and background noise, cannot be directly controlled.
Additionally, online research may constrain researchers in their choice of measures and
manipulations. For example, researchers can have online participants interact socially in
web forums or chat rooms, but many aspects of social interaction (e.g., physical presence,
nonverbal communication) are hard to capture in online studies. Similarly, some measures
(e.g., physiological) may be impossible to obtain in online contexts, again restricting the sort
of research that psychologists can pursue in this format.
Finally, some psychologists have argued for the benefits of field research
research, often protesting
the apparent decrease in field studies in recent psychological science (Cialdini, 2009). Field
studies do offer some advantages, such as making it typically quite easy to disguise a
study’s purpose. For example, field studies in which subtle aspects of an environment are
altered, such as changing the signs present in a neighborhood and observing the results,
will allow participants to be unaware that they are being studied, and therefore permit
an authentic assessment of their reactions. However, a drawback to field research is that,
although external behaviors can be easily detected and studied, internal processes such
as participants’ private attitudes and emotions to stimuli can be difficult to assess in this
setting. Another potential drawback of field research is that many environmental factors that
are easy to control in laboratories (e.g., temperature, wind, the presence of passersby) may
be much more difficult to standardize and regulate in field settings. Planning and careful
attention to such factors can partially mitigate these risks, but the likely increased instability
of noise variables in field research can interfere with inference testing.
Different contexts of data collection (in-lab, online, field, etc.) all carry certain advantages
and disadvantages. One alternative to selecting one method and accepting all of the relevant
drawbacks, is to conduct multiple studies using multiple methods. For example, a researcher
might begin by testing anger’s relation to aggression using a laboratory experiment, using
university students; then perform a similar test using a large sample of online participants
who vary more widely across demographic variables; and then conduct a field study in
which anger’s relation to aggression is monitored covertly (e.g., in a workplace setting).
ANALYSIS
Once a study is completed, the final steps in the research process are the analysis of
the data, the interpretation of the results, and the report of the findings. In psychological
research, the vast majority of studies involve data that are quantitative in nature. Quantitative
data refer to information that is expressed in some numerical form. For example, people’s
responses to a 7-point rating scale indicating the level of anger they are currently feeling
might be represented by whole numbers ranging from 1 to 7. Once the data are collected,
the researcher must formulate a statistical analysis of the data that corresponds to question
of interest.
If the goals of the study are purely descriptive in nature, analysis typically involves the
computation of descriptive statistics for the measures of interest. Descriptive statistics
summarize the overall pattern of responses for a given measure within a sample. The two
most common types of descriptive statistics are indices of central tendency (i.e., indices of
the single response that best characterizes the sample as a whole; e.g., the average of anger
ratings in a sample) and indices of variability (i.e., indices of the extent to which responses
are very similar to versus different from one another in the sample; e.g., the range of ratings
of anger in a sample).
However, as noted earlier, most psychological research involves inferential research
questions (i.e., questions regarding the relationship between two or more psychological
or behavioural constructs). In these cases, a variety of inferential statistics are available
to researchers. The specific type of inferential statistic that will be most appropriate for
addressing a given research question depends on a number of factors. A detailed discussion
of these different types of statistical tests obviously goes well beyond the scope of this
chapter. However, in a broad sense, there are several factors that guide a researcher’s choice
of statistical tests. First, the nature of the relationship being explored is an important
consideration. For example, is the researcher only interested in a relationship between
two variables? Alternatively, is the researcher interested in the relationships of several
independent variables to a single dependent variable, or perhaps the relationships of
multiple independent variables to multiple dependent variables? Second, what is the scale
of measurement for the variables to be analyzed? Are they purely nominal-level variables,
purely interval level, or a mixture? Finally, what are the distributional properties of the
variables? Do scores on the variables reflect a normal distribution? Depending on the
answers to these sorts of questions, some types of analyses will be more appropriate than
others because they make more or less assumptions about these properties of the data.
Although researchers have a vast array of different types of statistical tests from which they
can choose, far and away the most commonly used statistical tests are based on the concept
of Null Hypothesis Significance Testing (NHST)
(NHST). Simply stated, these tests assess the hypothesis
that the relationship of interest does not exist in the population. Tests are considered
to be statistically significant when they produce a probability value equal to or less than
.05. Statistical significance at the .05 level indicates that the data obtained are statistically
different from those expected if the null hypothesis were true, and this difference is less than
5% likely to be due to chance alone. In these cases, the researcher is said to have rejected
the null hypothesis (i.e., rejected the hypothesis that the relationship does not exist in the
population).
Tests are considered “non-significant” when they produce a probability value (p) greater
68 Methods
than .05. That is, a test is considered to have provided insufficient evidence for the existence
of a relationship if there is a greater than 5% probability that the observed relationship could
have emerged simply due to chance. In such cases, the researcher is said to have “failed to
reject the null hypothesis”.
When an analysis of a study has produced an accurate conclusion regarding the existence
of relationship between variables, the study is said to be high in statistical conclusion validity
(see Cook & Campbell, 1979; Shadish et al., 2002). Conceptually, there are two forms of
errors that a researcher can make with a statistical test, thereby leading to low statistical
conclusion validity. A Type I error is when a researcher falsely concludes that a relationship
exists (i.e., incorrectly rejects the null hypothesis). Traditionally, researchers have considered
this form of error to be very serious and set their level of risk for making such an error in
their statistical tests (referred to as the alpha level
level) at .05. Recently, some researchers have
called for even stricter alpha levels as a means of enhancing the statistical conclusion validity
of psychological research (e.g., Benjamin et al., 2017). A Type II error is when a researcher
falsely concludes that there is no evidence for the existence of a relationship (i.e., incorrectly
accepts the null hypothesis). Although traditionally researchers have placed less emphasis
on this form of error, researchers have considered this form of error to be problematic and
have traditionally set their level of risk for making such an error in their statistical tests
(referred to as beta) at .20. This means that researchers try to collect enough data that the
risk of mistakenly concluding that no relationship exists (when a relationship actually does
exist) is no greater than 20%.
Methodologists have identified a number of potential threats to the statistical conclusion
validity of research (e.g., see Cook & Campbell, 1979; Shadish et al., 2002). For example,
the validity of a statistical test can be undermined if the underlying assumptions of the test
are violated. For example, many tests assume that interval or ratio-level measures follow a
normal distribution. Other tests assume that each set of observations comprising the sample
are independent of one another (e.g., that the responses provided by one person in the
sample are not in any way related to the responses provided by another person in the
sample). Researchers may sometimes remedy such problems by selecting a statistical test
with less stringent assumptions.
Other threats to statistical conclusion validity reflect more fundamental and sometimes
perhaps even more intentional errors on the part of researchers. Concerns regarding these
sorts of errors have received a great deal of attention in recent years and have lead some
researchers to call for major changes in the way psychological research is conducted
(Lilienfeld, 2017; Lilienfeld & Waldman, 2017). One issue of concern has been the fact that
many studies conducted in psychology have insufficient statistical power. Statistical power
refers to the probability that a study will correctly reject the null hypothesis. Traditionally,
statistical power has primarily been a concern with respect to Type II error (e.g., Cohen,
1988). However, recently methodologists have noted that in the context of a single study,
because studies with low power tend to be more likely to produce anomalous results, low
power can sometimes also lead to Type I errors (e.g., Button & Munafo, 2017).
Another issue that has generated a great deal of interest is a set of practices known
as QRPs (Questionable
Questionable Research Practices
Practices: see John, Loewenstein, & Prelec, 2012; Simmons,
Nelson, & Simonsohn, 2011). QRPs cover a wide range of data collection, analysis, and
reporting practices, most of which are considered problematic because they can undermine
the statistical conclusion validity of a study. Some of these practices involve incomplete
reporting of results. For example, a researcher might conduct analyses on multiple

dependent variables, but then only report the results for dependent variables that produce
significant effects or conduct multiple different types of analyses on a single dependent
variable and only report the analysis that produces a significant effect. Similarly, a researcher
might conduct a study involving multiple experimental conditions, but then only report the
results for those conditions that produce significant differences. Alternatively, a researcher
might conduct multiple studies and then only report those studies that produce a significant
effect.
Other practices involve changes to the data set itself or the manner in which it is analyzed.
For example, a researcher might decide to drop participants from a data set based on
whether their deletion strengthens the key effects of interest in a study. Alternatively, a
researcher might gradually add data participants to an existing data set and base their
decision to stop adding participants solely on when the addition of participants produces a
significant effect.
As these examples illustrate, many QRPs are practices that are intended to produce a
significant effect, without any clear justification beyond the fact that they produce a desired
outcome for the researchers, who may be motivated to identify a significant effect. As such,
these practices can inflate Type I error rates. Indeed, although each practice can potentially
undermine statistical conclusion validity on its own, the risk is even greater when several of
these practices are performed in conjunction with one another (Simmons et al., 2011).
In short, numerous issues have been raised about how psychologists conduct aspects
of research, and they are often accompanied with guidelines for improving the statistical
validity of research. However, other commentators have suggested that there are problems
inherent in NHST as a scientific tool and that no set of reforms to current practices will
ultimately be successful in addressing these limitations. These commentators have argued
that alternative statistical approaches are required. For instance, some have proposed that
traditional statistical tests be abandoned in favour of reporting effect sizes and their
corresponding confidence intervals (e.g., Cumming, 2014; Schmidt, 1996). Others have
advocated use of Bayesian statistics (e.g., Wagenmakers et al., 2017). Space restrictions
preclude a discussion of these alternatives and to date neither has gained widespread
acceptance in psychology. However, psychologists continue to debate their potential
advantages and disadvantages. This remains an important area of research for experimental
and quantitative psychologists, as well as individuals who interpret and make policy
recommendations based on research that is based fundamentally on statistics-based
inferences. Practitioners in the field should remain familiar with developments in this
evolving area as these decisions have important implications for the application of existing
research.
ETHICS
The previous sections have primarily explained social science methodology with the goal
of maximizing the reliability and validity of research findings. However, psychologists must
balance their interests in obtaining reliable, valid results with several important ethical
guidelines that establish how research should be conducted. Indeed, one can imagine
scientific studies that could be highly reliable and valid, yet ethically egregious. For example,
if a researcher was interested in the effects of socioeconomic status on aggressive behaviour,
70 Methods
it would be methodologically sound to randomly assign children at birth to adopting parents

who are poor or wealthy. However, such a study would obviously be considered ethically
problematic.
Although researchers have debated and discussed many aspects of research ethics for
decades and specific guidelines and procedures vary as a function of locales and disciplines,
three fundamental principles of research ethics tend to be emphasized in nearly all systems.
These three core principles are a mandate to give participants information sufficient to
allow informed choices about participating or not, minimizing harm to participants, and
maintaining the privacy of participants’ responses.
Informed consent is the principle that participants should have a reasonable understanding
of what they will be expected to do in a study, and the likely benefits/harms that may affect
them. For example, participants should know if research may cause them harm (including
physical, emotional, financial/professional, interpersonal, or yet other kinds of harm), and
how much of their time is being requested as participants. Additionally, participants should
be informed in advance about issues including whether their data will be confidential and/or
anonymized (see below), or whether information about them will be obtained from sources
other than themselves (e.g., from their academic transcripts). The point is that participants’
consent to participate in research is only meaningful if they know what they are being asked
to do.
One potential challenge to informed consent is the fact that some psychological questions
are best pursued by partially or fully misleading participants about aspects of the research.
For example, when researchers wish to covertly monitor participants’ aggressive behaviors,
it may undermine the unobtrusive nature of this measurement if participants know they
are being watched. Similarly, some indirect measurements rely on participants not being
aware of what is being measured, and in some cases the measure may be undermined
if participants realize what is being measured. In other cases, participants are given false
information about society, the actions of other participants in the experiment, the purpose
of a study (often provided as a cover story in which researchers create a fictitious purpose of
the research), or about the participant themselves (e.g., falsely informing participants that
they have poor intelligence).
Deception is sometimes considered acceptable provided it is necessary to effectively study
the question of interest when a debriefing document or other method is used to inform
participants at the end of a study. A debrief will often contain several elements, such as
an explanation of what the truth is (e.g., what the real purpose of a study was), and why
deception was considered necessary. Because this new information may alter participants’
willingness to have participated, in some contexts it may be appropriate to give participants
a second opportunity to consent to the research study. For example, returning to the
example of covert monitoring of aggressive behavior, a researcher might reveal this covert
monitoring at the study’s end, and offer to delete the recording if the participant does not
consent to the researcher keeping this data. After all, they originally consented without
knowing that such data was to be collected. The lack of initial disclosure may be necessary
because the monitoring would not be covert if participants were warned about it when they
first consented.
A second principle is the minimization of harmharm. That is, participants’ exposure to loss,
pain, and/or damage should be reduced as much as possible. Some studies may necessitate
some use of harm, such as when participants are given painful shocks to elicit anger (e.g.,
Berkowitz & LePage, 1967). Minimization of harm would here involve careful scaling of the
shock: it must be painful (enough to elicit anger), but no more painful than that (to minimize
participants’ suffering). When possible, researchers should highlight ways in which
participation can serve as a growth opportunity, such as a chance to better understand
themselves, rather than as harmful. In addition to the ethical, this also has a practical benefit:
participants who see research and researchers in more positive terms are presumably more
likely to understand the importance and value of research in psychological science.
Turning back to the recurring example, a researcher who wishes to induce fear in a
participant should aim to have participants experience fear only for as long as is necessary
to test a research question. Fear is usually considered a negative, uncomfortable emotion,
so while researchers can ethically study fear they should also try to respect participants’
needs. For example, researchers may end the study with a positive emotion induction
(Westermann, Spies, Stahl, & Hesse, 1996) to reverse the harm. Also, consider deception in
the context of minimizing harm. We previously highlighted the potential issue of deception
with informed consent, but there is also a risk of deception causing harm: participants
may feel foolish for ‘falling for’ a deceptive manipulation. Thus, it may be advisable to
remind participants that most experiments find only tiny suspicion rates: almost everybody
‘falls for it’, so participants should not feel embarrassed. It is possible that some deception
could introduce other harms, such as leaving participants with inaccurate information about
their having health problems. Sometimes, researchers may provide true information in the
debriefing form, such as providing real statistics about social facts when false facts were
provided in the experiment, or reminding undergraduate participants that the average
undergraduate student has high intelligence when they were falsely told that they lacked
intelligence. The goal is to offset the harm incurred by the false information.
A third important principle is the privacy of participant data. Two aspects of participant
data privacy are anonymity (i.e., the degree to which participants’ identifying information
is disassociated from their study data), and confidentiality (i.e., whether researchers keep
participants’ identifying information to themselves). Where possible, it is usually advisable
to maintain the anonymity of participants’ data by dis-associating participants’ identifying
information (e.g., name, email address) from their response data. This may have several
advantages, such as protecting participants’ privacy rights. It also permits researchers to
share data with others without having to compromise participants’ privacy. In some cases, it
is necessary for data to be non-anonymous at least temporarily, such as when a researcher
tracks a sample of participants across multiple time points and wishes to correlate
participants’ responses across time. In longitudinal research, this could mean that data is
identifiable for decades! However, once data collection has been completed, it is normally
possible to anonymize data afterwards, stripping data of this identifying information.
Typically, even non-anonymous data should be confidential, meaning that a researcher
would not share any identifier-data associations with others, even if the researcher can
personally associate identifiers with data. In summary, the general principle of participant
privacy is that privacy should be maintained as far as logistically possible. Tying this back to
consent, in cases where confidentiality would not be possible to extend to participants, those
participants should at least know what their expectations of privacy should be, preferably
when they initially provide consent.
72 Methods
SUMMARY
Psychological research spans many diverse topics and interests, but the fundamental,
conceptual steps required to create high-quality research are in many ways similar. This
chapter has focused on delineating research questions, selecting dependent and
independent variables, issues involving the setting and population, data analysis, and ethics.
However, entire chapters and articles have been devoted to in-depth explorations of each
of these individual topics (and others); we have provided many references to example
articles and chapters throughout. Importantly, we hope this chapter highlights often under-
recognized skills that are developed through training in psychological science.
Undergraduate programs in psychological science should prepare students to effectively
evaluate research methodological issues including sample size, risks associated with third
variables, whether questionable research practices were likely to have been present, whether
rigorous ethical safeguards were in place, whether appropriate statistical tests were used,
and whether researcher conclusions are consistent with the results from statistical tests
based on the methodology employed, These are all skills that are valued beyond academia:
from evaluating research for policy development to interpreting survey data gathered in
an applied setting, professionals who display thoughtful and critical consideration of the
quality of evidence are highly sought after.
KEY WORDS AND CONCEPTS
Alpha level: The level of risk for making Type I errors within Null Hypothesis Significance
Testing
Anonymity
Anonymity: The degree to which participants’ identifying information is disassociated from
their study data
Applied research: Applied research questions tend to focus on a specific problem. They
typically emphasize predicting or influencing an outcome rather than in understanding why
that outcome is predicted or influenced by a given factor
Basic research: Basic research is aimed at formulating and testing fundamental psychological
principles governing a domain of interest
Between-participant design
design: This research design examines causal relationships by randomly
assigning people to only one of two or more conditions and examining differences emerging
between the groups
Confederate: Someone who appears to be a participant in a research study to other

participants, but who is actually part of the research team playing a role to create desired
research conditions
Confidentiality: Whether researchers keep participants’ identifying information to

themselves
Confirmatory research
research: When the researcher specifies and tests what factors are likely to cause
an effect, and perhaps even when and why such factors have their effects
Constructs: Those elements in a study thought to vary across people and/or situations.
Construct validity: The degree to which a measure specifically and sensitively captures its
intended construct
Context: The population of interest (people) and the location and time (setting) in which
research takes place
Control group: An experimental group that receives a treatment that is not expected to
influence the variables of interest, but that typically simulates other aspects of the
experimental design. Control groups serve as a base-line comparison for the treatment
groups
Convenience sample: A sample that is not randomly selected, but instead is obtained from a
more readily available subgroup of the population
Correlational Research
Research: A research paradigm that lacks random assignment to condition and/
or experimental manipulations of variables. As a result, causal conclusions are less tenable
with this type of methodology
Counterbalancing: An experimental method where the order of treatments within an

experiment is intentionally varied across participants to reduce the risk of treatment order
influencing the results. Thus, counterbalancing reduces a third variable concern of
treatment order
Covary: The extent to which variables increase and/or decrease in similar patterns
Criterion validity: A specific type of construct validity: the extent to which a measure is
associated with other measures that should logically be related to its construct
Debriefing document/debriefing: When participants are fully informed of the research design
and purpose at the conclusion of the research study. This may be done through a document,
or through a discussion with a researcher
Deception: When, in order to ensure participants respond as naturally as possible within a

study, participants are not given a complete understanding of the research. This can occur
through incomplete details being provided, or through participants being actively misled by
the experimenter(s). If deception is approved for use by the reviewing ethics committee, a
debriefing document and post-study consent are typically required
Demand characteristics: When participants act, behave, or report in a certain manner, due to
their perceptions of what is desired of them, or perceived pressures from the experimenter
Dependent variables: Variables that are thought to be influenced by the independent variables
Descriptive research questions

questions: These research questions typically focus on simply describing
one or more psychological or behavioural constructs in a given domain of interest
Descriptive statistics: A numerical summary of the overall pattern of responses for a given
74 Methods
measure within a sample. Typically descriptive statistics include indices of central tendency
and variability
Direct measures: Measures where participants self-report on questions being asked of them.
Participants are aware of the measure, and respond to that measure directly
Discriminant validity: A specific type of construct validity: when a measure shows minimal
associations with irrelevant variables
Exclusion criteria: Characteristics that would render a participant ineligible to participate in a

research study
Explicit measures: Measures that assess relatively controlled and deliberative types of
participants’ responses
External validity
validity: The degree to which study results can be extended to populations other
than the research sample studied
Experiment: A research methodology where participants are randomly assigned to

conditions, and the researcher manipulates at least one independent variable to test the
influence of the specified independent variable(s) on a dependent variable. Cause-and-effect
conclusions are facilitated by using an experimental methodology
Exploratory research
research: Research that is undertaken when researchers do not have specific
expectations, but rather more general notions regarding the relationships among the
constructs of interest
Face validity: A specific type of construct validity: when a measure appears to reflect its
construct according to either experts or laypeople
Field research: Studies in which subtle aspects of an environment are altered and participants
are unaware that they are being studied, therefore permitting an authentic assessment of
participant reactions
Filler measures: Scales that researchers do not wish to evaluate that are included to confuse
participants’ understanding of the study’s purpose
Funnel interview: Participants are asked increasingly probing questions about their
experiences in the study and what they thought the study’s purpose was
Generalizability
Generalizability:: The degree to which study results can be extended to populations other than
the research sample studied
Hypotheses: Researcher expectations regarding patterns of relationships among variables that

are specified in advance, and formally tested in research
Implicit measures: Measures that assess relatively uncontrolled and automatic types of
participants’ responses
Inclusion criteria: Characteristics that a participant must display to eligible to participate in a

research study
Incremental validity: The concept of using two or more types of measures to predict behavior
is more powerful than using only using one type of measure
Independent variables: Variables that are thought to influence the dependent variable(s)
Indirect measures
measures: Measures that assess participants on the construct of interest without
directly asking participants to provide self-assessment of their psychological attributes
Inferential research
research: The exploration of relations among psychological and behavioural
constructs.
Informed consent: The ethical principle that participants should have a reasonable
understanding of what they will be expected to do in a study, and the likely benefits/harms
that may affect them
Inter-rater reliability: The extent to which independent evaluators judge something in a

convergent manner
Internal validity: Researchers’ ability to make causal claims about the relationship between
study variables
Interval data: Data based on scale response options that are equally spaced
Manipulation check: A measure, other than the dependent variable, to assess whether a
manipulation had the desired effect
Manipulations: Variables that are deliberatively chosen and changed so as to influence the dependent
variables of interest
Measurement invariance analysis: A mathematical procedure to establish whether items of a

measure perform similarly across groups at a psychometric level
Minimization of harm: The ethical responsibility of all researchers to reduce participants’

exposure to loss, pain, and/or damage as much as possible
Mundane realism: The degree to which an experiment applies to “real world” situations
Nominal scales: Any measure for which scores are given as categorical labels
Null Hypothesis Significance Testing (NHST) Commonly used statistical tests that test the
hypothesis that the relationship of interest does not exist in the population against a
collected sample of data
Observational measures
measures: These measures allow social scientists to obtain information from
their subjects through evaluating participants’ overt behaviours
Operationalizing: The process of deciding how to go about measuring the defined constructs
with a specific measure
76 Methods
Ordinal scales: Scales that provide a rank ordering of the data
Physiological measures: Measurement of physical body responses including, but not limited to,
heart rate, blood pressure, neuron activity, and galvanic skin response
Population of interest: Typically a very large group of people about whom the researcher
wishes to draw conclusions
Power analyses: mathematical techniques to determine an appropriate sample size based on

the experimental design and desired statistical power
Prime: stimulus used to activate a word or concept in a participant’s mind, either with
(supraliminal
supraliminal) or without (subliminal
subliminal) the participant’s being consciously aware of it
Psychological research methods: The principles and procedures that guide psychologists’
exploration of research questions
Psychometric: Relating to the evaluation of the quality of psychological measurement, such as

through assessment of measures’ structure or validity
Quantitative data: Information that is expressed in some numerical form
Questionable Research Practices (QRPs): QRPs cover a wide range of data collection, analysis,
and reporting practices, most of which are considered problematic because they can
undermine the statistical conclusion validity of a study. These include, but are not limited
to, selective reporting of research findings, and failure to report data manipulations. These
practices can often inflate Type I error rates.
Random Assignment: An experimental feature where every participant has an equal likelihood
of being placed in any of the experimental conditions
Random sample: A subset of the population of interest that is selected to participate in a

research study in such a way that ensures that every member of the population under
investigation has an equal probability of being included in the sample
Ratio data: Data collected based on response options that are equally spaced, and
additionally include a true zero point
Reliability:
Reliability:The consistency with which a measure provides the same information
Reverse causation: The possibility that a variable purported to be the cause of another variable
is actually its consequence.
Sample: A subset of the population of interest that is selected to participate in a research study
Sample size: The number of observations (e.g., participants) collected for a study. The number
of observations in a sample must be large enough to make valid conclusions using the
chosen statistical techniques
Self-report measurement
measurement: Measures where participants are directly asked to report their
standing on the psychological or behavioural construct of interest, typically using some

form of structured rating scale
Socially desirable responding: The tendency for respondents to distort their responses in order
to present themselves favourably
Statistical conclusion validity: The degree to which an analysis of a study has produced an
accurate conclusion regarding the existence of relationship between variables
Statistical power: The ability to detect inferential patterns between variables with statistics
where the patterns truly exist
Test-retest reliability: Consistency of responses across multiple time points, obtained using
the same respondents and same measure
Third variable problem: When establishing causation between variables, the possibility that an
unaccounted-for variable is the true cause of their association
Transparency: The degree to which participants can understand the true purpose of a study
Type I error: When a researcher concludes that there is a statistically significant relationship
between variables of interest based on the null hypothesis significance test, but this statistical
finding is inaccurate because in reality there is no such relationship
Type II error: When a researcher concludes that there is not a statistically significant
relationship between variables of interest based on the null hypothesis significance test, but
this statistical finding is inaccurate because in reality there is such an relationship
Validity: The degree to which a measure accurately quantifies what it intends to measure
Within-participant design: Experimental design in which participants each undergo every

treatment condition
REFERENCES
Archer, J., & Coyne, S. M. (2005). An integrated review of indirect, relational, and social
aggression. Personality and Social Psychology Review, 9(3), 212-230.
Asendorpf, J. B., Banse, R., & Mucke, D. (2002). Double dissociation between explicit and
implicit personality self-concept: The case of shy behavior. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 83(2), 380-393.
Baker, R. C., & Guttfreund, D. O. (1993). The effects of written autobiographical recollection
induction procedures on mood. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 49(4), 563-568.
Banerjee, A. & Chaudhury, S., (2010). Statistics without tears: Populations and samples.
Industrial Psychiatry Journal, 19(1), 60-65.
Baron, R. A., & Bell, P. A. (1975). Aggression and heat: Mediating effects of prior provocation
and exposure to an aggressive model. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 31(5),
825-832.
78 Methods
Beck, A. T., Steer, R. A., Brown, G. K. (1996). Beck Depression Inventory-II. San Antonio.
Benjamin, D. J., Berger, J. O., Johannesson, M., Nosek, B. A., Wagenmakers, E. J., Berk, R., …
& Cesarini, D. (2018). Redefine statistical significance. Nature Human Behaviour, 2(1), 6-10.
Berkowitz, L., & Donnerstein, E. (1982). External validity is more than skin deep: Some
answers to criticisms of laboratory experiments. American Psychologist, 37(3), 245-257.
Berkowitz, L., & LePage, A. (1967). Weapons as aggression-eliciting stimuli. Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 7(2), 202-207.
Button, K. S., & Munafò, M. R. (2017). Powering reproducible research. In S. O. Lilienfeld
and I. D. Waldman (Eds.), Psychological science under scrutiny: Recent challenges and proposed
solutions (pp. 22-33). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Cacioppo, J. T., Berntson, G. G., Lorig, T. S., Norris, C. J., Rickett, E., & Nusbaum, H. (2003).
Just because you’re imaging the brain doesn’t mean you can stop using your head: A
primer and set of first principles. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 85(4), 650-661.
Cacioppo, J. T., & Tassinary, L. G. (1990). Inferring psychological significance from
physiological signals. American Psychologist, 45(1), 16-28.
Cialdini, R. B. (2009). We have to break up. Perspectives on Psychological Science, 4(1), 5-6.
Cohen, J. (1988). Statistical power analysis for the behavioral sciences (2nd ed.). Hillsdale, NJ:
Erlbaum.
Cook, T. D., & Campbell, D. T. (1979). Quasi-experimentation: Design and analysis issues for field
settings. Chicago, IL: Rand McNally College Publishing Company.
Costa, P. T., Jr., & McCrae, R. R. (1991). NEO five-factor inventory (NEO-FFI), Form S (Adult).
Lutz, FL: Psychological Assessment Resources.
Costa, P. T., & McCrae, R. R. (1993). Psychological research in the Baltimore longitudinal
study of aging. Zeitschrift fur Gerontologie, 26(3), 138-141.
Cumming, G. (2014). The new statistics: Why and how. Psychological Science, 25(1), 7-29.
De Houwer, J. (2006). What are implicit measures and why are we using them? In R. W.
Wiers & A. W. Stacy (Eds.), The handbook of implicit cognition and addiction (pp. 11-28).
Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Fiedler, K., Kutzner, F., & Krueger, J. I. (2012). The long way from α-error control to validity
proper: Problems with a short-sighted false-positive debate. Perspectives on Psychological
Science, 7(6), 661-669.
Field, A. (2019) Discovering Statistics [Homepage]. Retrieved from
https://www.discoveringstatistics.com/
Friese, M., Hofmann, W., & Schmitt, M. (2008). When and why do implicit measures predict
behaviour? Empirical evidence for the moderating role of opportunity, motivation, and
process reliance. European Review of Social Psychology, 19(1), 285-338.
Gawronski, B., & De Houwer, J. (2014). Implicit measures in social and personality
psychology. In H. T. Reis & C. M. Judd (Eds.), Handbook of research methods in social and
personality psychology (2nd edition). New York, NY: Cambridge University Press.
Goodman, J. K., Cryder, C. E., & Cheema, A. (2013). Data collection in a flat world: The
strengths and weaknesses of Mechanical Turk samples. Journal of Behavioral Decision
Making, 26(3), 213-224.
Greenwald, A. G., McGhee, D. E., & Schwartz, J. L. (1998). Measuring individual differences
in implicit cognition: the implicit association test. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 74(6), 1464-1480.
Harpe, S. E. (2015). How to analyze Likert and other rating scale data. Currents in Pharmacy
Teaching and Learning, 7(6), 836-850.
Hauser, D. J., & Schwarz, N. (2015). It’s a trap! Instructional manipulation checks prompt
systematic thinking on “tricky” tasks. Sage Open, 5(2), doi:10.1177/2158244015584617.
Hauser, D. J., & Schwarz, N. (2016). Attentive Turkers: MTurk participants perform better on
online attention checks than do subject pool participants. Behavior Research Methods, 48(1),
400-407.
Henson, R. K. (2001). Understanding internal consistency reliability estimates: A conceptual
primer on coefficient alpha. Measurement and Evaluation in Counseling and
Development, 34(3), 177-189.
Holden, R. R., & Jackson, D. N. (1979). Item subtlety and face validity in personality
assessment. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 47(3), 459-468.
Ilgen, D. R., & Favero, J. L. (1985). Limits in generalization from psychological research to
performance appraisal processes. Academy of Management Review, 10(2), 311-321.
Iyer, R. (2019) YourMorals.org [Homepage]. Retrieved from https://www.yourmorals.org/
index.php
John, O. P., & Benet-Martinez, V. (2014). Measurement: Reliability, construct validation, and
scale construction. In H. T. Reis & C. M. Judd (Eds.), Handbook of research methods in social
and personality psychology (2nd ed., pp 339-369). New York, NY: Cambridge University Press.
John, L. K., Loewenstein, G., & Prelec, D. (2012). Measuring the prevalence of questionable
research practices with incentives for truth telling. Psychological Science, 23(5), 524–532.
doi:10.1177/0956797611430953
Klauer, K. C., & Teige-Mocigemba, S. (2007). Controllability and resource dependence in
automatic evaluation. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 43(4), 648-655.
Lakens, D. (2019) Improving your statistical inferences [Online Course]. Retrieved from
https://www.coursera.org/learn/statistical-inferences
Latané, B., & Darley, J. M. (1970). The unresponsive bystander: Why doesn’t he help? Century
Psychology Series. New York, NY: Appleton-Century Crofts.
LeBel, E. P., & Gawronski, B. (2009). How to find what’s in a name: Scrutinizing the
optimality of five scoring algorithms for the name‐letter task. European Journal of
Personality, 23(2), 85-106.
Lieberman, J. D., Solomon, S., Greenberg, J., & McGregor, H. A. (1999). A hot new way to
measure aggression: Hot sauce allocation. Aggressive Behavior, 25(5), 331-348.
Lilienfeld, S. O. (2017). Psychology’s replication crisis and the grant culture: Righting the
ship. Perspectives on Psychological Science, 12(4), 660-664.
Lilienfeld, S. O., & Waldman, I. D. (Eds.). (2017). Psychological science under scrutiny: Recent
challenges and proposed solutions. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Millsap, R. E., & Meredith, W. (2007). Factorial invariance: Historical perspectives and new
problems. In R. Cudeck and R. C. MacCallum (Eds.), Factor analysis at 100: historical
developments and future directions (pp. 131-152). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Moses, S. N., Houck, J. M., Martin, T., Hanlon, F. M., Ryan, J. D., Thoma, R. J., … & Tesche,
C. D. (2007). Dynamic neural activity recorded from human amygdala during fear
conditioning using magnetoencephalography. Brain Research Bulletin, 71(5), 452-460.
Nisbett, R. E. & Cohen, D. (1996). Culture of honor: The psychology of violence in the South.
Boulder, CO: Westview Press.
80 Methods
Nisbett, R. E., & Wilson, T. D. (1977). Telling more than we can know: Verbal reports on
mental processes. Psychological Review, 84(3), 231-259.
Nuttin, M. J., Jr. (1985). Narcissism beyond Gestalt and awareness: The name letter effect.
European Journal of Social Psychology, 15(3), 353-361.
Orne, M. T. (1962). On the social psychology of the psychological experiment: With
particular reference to demand characteristics and their implications. American
Psychologist, 17(11), 776-783.
Orpinas, P., & Frankowski, R. (2001). The Aggression Scale: A self-report measure of
aggressive behavior for young adolescents. The Journal of Early Adolescence, 21(1), 50-67.
Page, M. M., & Scheidt, R. J. (1971). The elusive weapons effect: Demand awareness,
evaluation apprehension, and slightly sophisticated subjects. Journal of Personality and
Social Psychology, 20(3), 304-318.
Paulhus, D. (1991). Measurement and control of response bias. In J. Robinson, P. R. Shaver,
& L. S. Wrightsman (Eds.), Measures of personality and social psychological attitudes, Vol. 1. (pp.
17–59). New York, NY: Academic Press.
Payne, B. K., Cheng, C. M., Govorun, O., & Stewart, B. D. (2005). An inkblot for attitudes:
affect misattribution as implicit measurement. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 89(3), 277-293.
Petty, R. E., Fazio, R. H., & Briñol, P. (2012). Attitudes: Insights from the new implicit measures.
New York, NY: Psychology Press.
Schmidt, F. L. (1996). Statistical significance testing and cumulative knowledge in
psychology: Implications for training of researchers. Psychological Methods, 1(2), 115-129.
Shadish, W.R., Cook, T.D., and Campbell, D.T. (2002) Experimental and auasi-experimental
designs for generalized causal inference. Bellmont, CA: Wadsworth Cengage Learning.
Simmons, J. P., Nelson, L. D., & Simonsohn, U. (2011). False-positive psychology: Undisclosed
flexibility in data collection and analysis allows presenting anything as
significant. Psychological Science, 22(11), 1359-1366.
Simms, L. J. (2008). Classical and modern methods of psychological scale
construction. Social and Personality Psychology Compass, 2(1), 414-433.
Strack, F., Martin, L. L., & Schwarz, N. (1988). Priming and communication: Social
determinants of information use in judgments of life satisfaction. European Journal of Social
Psychology, 18(5), 429–442.
Sweetland, A. (1972). Comparing random with non-random sampling methods. Oxford, England:
Rand Corp.
Wagenmakers, E. J., Verhagen, J., Ly, A., Matzke, D., Steingroever, H., Rouder, J. N., & Morey,
R. D. (2017). The need for Bayesian hypothesis testing in psychological science. In S. O.
Lilienfeld and I. D. Waldman (Eds.), Psychological science under scrutiny: Recent challenges and
proposed solutions (pp. 123-138). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Westermann, R., Spies, K., Stahl, G., & Hesse, F. W. (1996). Relative effectiveness and validity
of mood induction procedures: A meta‐analysis. European Journal of Social Psychology, 26(4),
557-580.
Widaman, K. F., & Grimm, K. J. (2014). Advanced psychometrics: Confirmatory factor
analysis, item response theory, and the study of measurement invariance. In H. T. Reis, &
C. M. Judd (Eds.), Handbook of research methods in social and personality psychology (2nd ed.).
New York, NJ: Cambridge University Press.

Vaughan-Johnston, T. I., Fabrigar, L. R., & Lawrence, K. (2019). Research methods in the
psychological sciences. In M. E. Norris (Ed.), The Canadian Handbook for Careers in
Psychological Science. Kingston, ON: eCampus Ontario. Licensed under CC BY NC 4.0.
Retrieved from https://ecampusontario.pressbooks.pub/psychologycareers/chapter/
researchmethods/
[4]
THE ESSENCE OF ETHICS FOR PSYCHOLOGISTS

AND ASPIRING PSYCHOLOGISTS
Cannie Stark, PhD Professor Emerita of Psychology, University of Regina Honourary Life
Fellow, Canadian Psychological Association
INTRODUCTIONS
INTRODUCING ME
Educated and trained at McGill University, I was the first doctoral student to have her
research proposal vetted by a research ethics committee. I was a graduate student in the
1960s, back when it was a time of hope, a time of questioning absolutely everything, a very
exciting time of creativity and exploration.
Although trained as a clinical psychologist, the way that I chose to practise psychology
was through my teaching, my research, and my service to the discipline, all of which I have
thoroughly enjoyed. I have taught courses in research methodology, abnormal psychology,
social psychology, psychology of women, and, of course, ethics in psychology. I loved
watching students’ awakenings to new world views. I was also the first person in Canada to
teach courses in the psychology of women, way back in the 1970s.
I also loved conducting research, loved the almost paralyzing excitement of coming up
with new ideas, new ways of asking research questions, new ways of analyzing data, and new
interpretations of the results. I was brought up in the quantitative experimental models of
science. As Honours students, we were not even allowed to take courses in developmental
psychology, social psychology, personality, or abnormal psychology because they were “too
soft”. We were also not allowed to take research methods courses in the other social sciences
because “they would ruin us as scientists”. However, the questions that I had a burning desire
to ask were always too complex and interwoven for regular univariate models of inquiry.
That is how it came about that I was the first person at McGill to use the multivariate analyses
newly introduced in the Statistical Package for the Social Sciences. Back then, there were no
personal computers: All large and complex analyses had to be done on the university’s
82
mainframe and data had to be entered on punchcards that you then carried in huge piles
across campus to the Computer Centre, hoping against hope that you didn’t slip on the ice
going downhill. Although descriptive and analytical multivariate statistics fascinate me with
their poetic beauty, I began to realize that the quantitative bias in which I had been trained
lacked the deeper understanding that can come from rigorously applied qualitative research
methods. Sequential and concurrent mixed methods have proven to be the most appropriate
approaches to the research questions that grip my imagination.
My service to the discipline arose from a personal need for contact with and support from
colleagues. Isolated in a large department where I was one of only three women and the
only clinically-trained psychologist, I reached out to the Canadian Psychological Association
(CPA) for validation and support from colleagues living elsewhere. In return, I was elected,
twice, as Chair of the Interest Group on Women and Psychology (now the Section on
Women and Psychology) during which time I organized the first CPA Pre-Convention
Institute on Women and Psychology, developed guidelines for non-sexist research that were
adopted as policy by CPA (Stark-Adamec & Kimball, 1982, 1984), then served on the CPA
Board of Directors (first as Chair of the Applied Division, and then in my own right),
eventually serving the discipline as President of the Association. I have served on the CPA
Committee on Ethics since 1993. Over the years, I have also served the broader social
science communities in various capacities (e.g., as Vice-President, Women’s Issues of the
Social Science Federation of Canada [SSFC] and as Chair of the Psychology Adjudication
Committee for the Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council of Canada
[SSHRC])—all with a view to giving back and paying forward. I have made many lifelong
friends in the process of serving the discipline (and a few enemies).
INTRODUCING THE CHAPTER
Retired now, I maintain my service to the discipline by continuing to serve on CPA’s

Committee on Ethics. Developing this chapter is one of the ways that I am giving back to
the discipline while paying forward to your development as students of psychology.
My aim is to acquaint you with the CPA Code of Ethics for Psychologists, 4th Edition
(hereinafter referred to as the Code) first describing some of the misunderstandings,
misperceptions, and confusions with respect to for whom this Code was developed. Next, I
describe some of the herstory/history of our Code, as well as the structure and moral core.
I have found that one of the most effective ways of coming to a meaningful understanding
of the four core Principles of our Code is to examine ethical dilemmas with respect to the
relevant Standards. The Standards delineate the best ethical practices and thus serve as, in
effect, operational definitions of the core Principles. So I have provided you with real-life
examples of ethical dilemmas in what I’ve called Thought Boxes. I have altered some of
the details in order to preserve the privacy of those involved (e.g., in Thought Box 2, I have
altered the name of the granting agency). Then, I have provided you with Tables in which
I have listed all of the Standards that are relevant to the incident described in the Thought
Box. Do not be put off by the number of Tables or by the length of some of the Tables.
Instead, read them through and think about how they relate to the incidents. As in life, some
84 Ethics
of the incidents are rather complex and have more than one ethical dilemma embedded
within.
The first two dilemmas both deal with research. You may gain the impression that
unethical behaviour is the norm in research. Such is not the case. But to aid you in the
ethical conduct of research, I have provided you with tips on how to conduct your research
ethically. In this section, I cover issues related to objectivity, representativeness, uses and abuses
of statistics, control issues, free and informed consent, contract research, academic freedom (complete
with a Thought Box), authorship issues, and respectful language.
Unable, for space reasons, to go into more issues in depth, in the next section of the
chapter I have nevertheless alerted you to some additional issues that you need to be aware
of. These issues have to do with cultural contexts, supervision and teaching, sexual liaisons, blind
faith in peer review, responsibility to society, and service to the public. Finally, I end the chapter
with five Thought Boxes—four of which you are to work through on your own—and some
parting advice.
It should be noted that I have chosen to use my “undergraduate lecture voice” throughout
this chapter, so the tone is more conversational than the voice that I use in my journal
articles. In part, this is because I miss teaching. But it is also because this chapter represents
a bit of the personal journeys that I have undertaken throughout my career, journeys that
I have learned from that I need to share with you. It is more comfortable for me, when
sharing personal information, to converse with you rather than talking at you.
CONFUSIONS, MISPERCEPTIONS, AND MISUNDERSTANDINGS
There appears to be some confusion or misperception with respect to who needs to

attend to the Principles, Values Statements, and Standards of the Canadian Code of Ethics
for Psychologists (Canadian Psychological Association, 2017). For instance, some psychologists
seem to think that this Code surely does not apply to them because they are not clinical
or counselling psychologists. Nothing could be further from the truth. Some academic
psychologists know that, if they are to conduct research with human participants, they
must submit a proposal to their Research Ethics Board (REB) and their research must abide
by the Tri-Council Policy Statement: Ethical Conduct for Research Involving Humans (2010), so
they figure that they do not even need to read the CPA Code. Again, nothing could be
further from the truth. Some students of psychology appear to think that they can either
ignore the Code (if they have even heard of it) or that they are covered by their supervisor’s
responsibilities. Nothing could be further from the truth. And some psychologists who
conduct research with non-human animals seem to figure that as long as they are adhering to
the Animal Care Council of Canada regulations and have submitted their proposed research
to their university’s Animal Care Committee for approval, then they, too, have no need even
to read the CPA Code. Again, you guessed it: Nothing could be further from the truth.
So what is this truth of which I speak? The key to this truth is that the practice of
psychology encompasses far more than the provision of clinical interventions and the
conduct of research with human participants or non-human animals. Did you know that
it also encompasses all of the other tasks or duties that you might perform in your role
as a psychologist? So, for instance, it applies to your roles as a student of psychology,
whether you are an undergraduate or a graduate student. It applies to one’s roles of a
teacher of psychology, as a supervisor of both undergraduates and graduate students, as
an administrator (e.g., as Department Head or Chair, as Dean of a Faculty, all the way
up to when you become President of a University, and as a manager in a non-academic
setting). It applies to one’s roles as a consultant, as a peer reviewer of grant proposals or of
potential publications, even to your interactions with your peers and colleagues. So how do
we learn what constitutes best practice in all of our roles as psychologists and as students
of psychology? We are very fortunate, in Canada, to have the CPA Code to guide us in our
endeavours.
THE CANADIAN CODE OF ETHICS FOR PSYCHOLOGISTS (FOURTH EDITION, 2017)
First, it is important to stress what our Code is not. It is not a list of rules which, if
broken, have accompanying punishments. We all know that punishment is not an effective
reinforcement modality for enhancing learning—whether you are a police dog in training
or a practising psychologist. Rather, our Code is aspirational. What do I mean by that? Our
Code is organized under four Principles
Principles: I: Respect for the Dignity of Persons and Peoples.
II: Responsible Caring. III: Integrity in Relationships. IV: Responsibility to Society.
A detailed description of the Values underpinning each Principle is provided in the Code.
Perhaps most importantly—in terms both of understanding the PrinciplesPrinciples, Values
Values, and how
these would be reflected in your behaviour—is the provision of the many Standards associated
with each Principle
Principle. It is a delineation of what can be seen to be best ethical practices as they
apply to psychologists and to students of psychology.
In Table 1, I have totalled up the number of Standards associated with each Principle as
well as the number of those Standards that apply to non-clinical situations.
Table 1: Are the ethical Standards in the Canadian Code of Ethics for Psychologists Rel-
evant Mainly to Clinicians?
Number of Ethical Stan-

Number of those Ethical Standards
Ethical Principles dards Associated with the
Related to Non-Clinical Situations
Principle
I: Respect for the Dig-

nity of Persons and 47 45
Peoples
II: Responsible Caring 54 52
III: Integrity in Rela-

37 36
tionships
IV: Responsibility to
30 30
Society
Totals 168 163

86 Ethics
I did not provide you with this tabulation of Standards in order to overwhelm you (GAK!
You mean that I have to remember and adhere to 168 Standards in order to behave ethically?).
Rather, my purpose was to demonstrate to you that, if 163 of the 168 Standards can be seen
to be applicable to the various roles that psychologists engage in other than or in addition
to interventions, one can hardly claim that our Code is to be adhered to only by clinical
psychologists. For example, Standard I.15 is Establish fees that are fair in light of the time, energy,
and knowledge of the psychologist and any associates or employees, and in light of the market value of
the product or service. (CPA, 2017); this clearly does not apply to psychology students preparing
term papers, but would apply to clinical psychologists in private practice. On the other
hand, Standard I.11 is Seek to design research, teaching, supervision, practice, and business activities
in such a way that they contribute to the fair distribution of benefits to individuals and groups (e.g.,
couples, families, organizations, communities, peoples), and that they do not unfairly exclude those who
are vulnerable or might be disadvantaged (CPA, 2017). This can be seen to apply to all activities in
which a psychologist might engage—even to the formulation of the research design for your
Honours thesis. Likewise, Standard I.3 (Strive to use language that conveys respect for the dignity
of persons and people’s as much as possible in all spoken, written, electronic, or printed communication.
[CPA, 2017]) clearly applies to all of the activities in which psychologists and students of
psychology engage. Note: When I say all of the activities engaged in, I don’t mean purely
personal activities like, for instance, washing the dishes (although it would be nice if you
did not “accidentally” break your partner’s favourite coffee mug because you are angry with
them). Our Code “… is intended to guide and regulate only those activities a psychologist engages in
by virtue of being a psychologist. There is no intention to guide or regulate a psychologist’s activities
outside of this context, although an individual psychologist might make a personal decision to be guided
by the Code’s principles and values outside of this context (CPA, 2017).
Before getting into the heart of the Standards, it is important to put our Code into a bit
of an historical context. In 1977, CPA had adopted the American Psychologist Association’s
Code of Ethics—a document that differs significantly from our Code (see Sinclair [1996,
2005] for a detailed analysis and comparison of the two codes.). A particularly helpful
component of our Code is the provision of a 10-step model for ethical decision making.
What few “empirical” studies on the Code have been conducted are reviewed by
Hadjistravropoulos (2011). The major emphasis in these studies, from Hadjistavropoulos’
description of them, appears to be to test the face validity of the hierarchical organization of
our Code (i.e., when principles are in conflict, psychologists should give more weight to the
first Principle over, for example, the third Principle) and the face validity of the Principles
and Values statements; the CPA Code fared very well in these studies. Of particular interest
to me was a study in which the ethical content and functional grammar of the CPA and
Canadian Medical Association’s (CMA) codes of ethics were compared (Malloy,
Hadjistravropoulos, Douaud, & Smythe, 2002, cited in Hadjistravropoulos, 2011). According
to Malloy, et al., our Code, compared to the CMA Code, “has greater educational value, is
less authoritarian, provides a clear rationale for ethical behaviour, and is more empowering to the
decision-maker” (Malloy et al., 2002, p. 152). It is also more likely to allow for increased
consideration of situational factors and provides more flexibility in the resolution of
complex ethical dilemmas (e.g., through the use of terms such as ‘generally’, ‘relatively’).
Our Code has received praise from the national psychology associations of other countries
(Pettifor, 2011) as well as having been adopted by provincial regulatory bodies in our own
country (with the exception of Quebec where special circumstances obtain [Gauthier, 2011;
Richard, 2011]). It has been influential in the development of the Tri-Council Policy Statement
on Research with Human Participants (O’Neill, 2011) that all researchers funded by the Medical
Research Council (MRC) of Canada, SSHRC, and the Natural Sciences and Engineering
Research Council (NSERC) of Canada must abide by. And it served as the model for the
development of the Social Science Federation of Canada (SSFC) policy on ethics within all
the social sciences (Stark[-Adamec] & Pettifor, 1995).
PROBLEMATIC DILEMMAS
In order to gain a better understanding of our Code and, in particular, the Standards
contained therein, it is instructive to examine and analyze some real-life examples of
problematic behaviours that I have either witnessed myself or have been told about by
trusted (and trusting) sources. In doing so, I present the examples in Thought Boxes and
then, since you may not yet have read our Code, I go over the implications of the behaviours
and relate them to the Standards of best practices as delineated in our Code.
SAVING THE WORLD FROM RESEARCH ON NONVERBAL BEHAVIOUR
In Thought Box 1 you will find described an incident that actually occurred and during
which a large number of Standards of our Code were not adhered to. Take a moment to
consider what is wrong with this behaviour.
Thought Box 1
What’s Wrong with This Picture?
A faculty member in a department of psychology was appointed to the Psychology

Adjudication Committee of the Canadian Foundation of Behaviours (FoB) and when s/he
flew back from Ottawa, in the evening after her/his first meeting with the Committee, s/
he rushed into the department lounge and proudly announced to the graduate students
congregated there that s/he had successfully saved the world from any research into
nonverbal behaviour (in other words, the faculty member claimed to have blocked funding
of any nonverbal behaviour research).
How do we go about assessing this situation? Fortunately, our Code provides us with
guidelines on how to think this through.
Who Is Affected? Paraphrasing one of the 10 steps in ethical decision making outlined in
our Code (CPA, 2017, Preamble): Who are the individuals and groups potentially affected by this
this??
Well, obviously, the graduate students who were in the department that night can be seen
to be potentially affected: They may consider, since faculty are perceived as role models,
88 Ethics
that it is acceptable behaviour and may be more likely to utter similar biased statements,
in public, about areas of research that they don’t respect. They may consider that it is
acceptable to carry this behaviour forward into their lectures. Should, in the future, they
be invited to serve on a granting agency adjudication committee or to serve as a peer
reviewer of a manuscript for potential publication, they once again may consider that it
is not inappropriate to quash research and research communications that they don’t like.
Then too, if there was a graduate student in the group who was conducting research on
nonverbal behaviour for their thesis or dissertation, is s/he likely to feel validated by the
faculty member’s behaviour?
But those who are affected extend well beyond the students who witnessed this behaviour.
The psychologists on the Adjudication Committee will also have been affected as a function
of having left unfunded (in that particular year) all research proposed in this legitimate
area of inquiry. The Chair of the Adjudication Committee may have been at fault for not
reining in this Committee member. FoB itself may have made an error in appointing this
faculty member because even a quick examination of her/his curriculum vitae would have
revealed that the areas funded by the FoB were outside her/his areas of expertise. The
faculty member should have declined the invitation to assess grant proposals that were
outside of her/his area of knowledge and expertise. And, most certainly, the faculty member
may be seen as having violated her/his confidentiality agreement with the FoB.
Another major impact is, of course, on the scholars whose nonverbal behaviour research
proposals were rejected. Having received a prejudicial review, from which there is
absolutely no possibility of appeal, their attitude towards the FoB, fuelled by hurt and
justified anger, is unlikely to be positive. There is also a potential impact on the discipline
of psychology. The study of nonverbal behaviour is a legitimate area of research in
psychology; since the unfunded research may not be conducted, potential major
breakthroughs in the field may have gone undetected. The legitimacy of the peer review
process may have suffered a credibility blow as well. In addition, there is a potential impact
on society. Any potential benefits for individuals or groups will have gone undetected and, if
the bias in the research funding decision becomes known by the public, public trust in both
the discipline and the FoB may be broken. (Note: This public perception can have real-
world implications in terms of government funding of the FoB and of the discipline.) So the
ramifications of that short utterance by that faculty member are farther reaching than one
might have expected at first glance.
What Are The Relevant Issues? Again paraphrasing one of the steps in ethical decision
making outlined in our Code: What are the ethically relevant issues and practices involved? (CPA,
2017, Preamble). This is where identification of the Principles and associated Standards
come into play. As it turns out, at least 13 of the 45 relevant Standards associated with
Principle I are involved here. These are delineated for you in Table 2.You will see that they
deal with general respect, non-discrimination, the fair treatment and due process that nonverbal
behaviour researchers were cheated out of, issues surrounding confidentiality, and extended
responsibility (in this case, because s/he made this boast to graduate students).
Table 2
Principle I. Respect for the Dignity of Persons and Peoples
Standards Relevant to Thought Box 1
(Canadian Psychological Association, 2017)
General Respect
I.1 Demonstrate appropriate respect for the knowledge, insight, experience, areas of
expertise, and cultural perspectives and values of others, including those that are different
from their own, limited only by those that seriously contravene the ethical principles of
this Code
Code.
I.2 Not engage publicly (e.g., in public statements, presentations, research reports, with
primary clients or other contacts) in degrading comments about others including demean-
ing jokes based on such characteristics as culture, nationality, ethnicity, colour, race, reli-
gion, sex, gender, or sexual orientation.
I.3 Strive to use language that conveys respect for the dignity of persons and peoples as
much as possible in all spoken, written, electronic, or printed communications.
General rights
I.5 Avoid or refuse to participate in practices disrespectful of the moral rights of per-
sons or peoples, including their human, legal and civil rights.
I.7 Make every reasonable effort to ensure that psychological knowledge is not misin-
terpreted or misused, intentionally or unintentionally, to infringe on moral rights.
Non-discrimination
I.9 Not practise, condone, facilitate, or collaborate with any form of unjust discrimina-
tion.
I.11 Seek to design research, teaching, supervision, practice, and business activities in
such a way that they contribute to the fair distribution of benefits to individuals and
groups … and that they do not unfairly exclude those who are vulnerable or might be dis-
advantaged.
Fair treatment/due process
I.12 Work and act in a spirit of fair treatment to others.
I.13 Help to establish and abide by due process and other natural justice.
Confidentiality
90 Ethics
I.43 Be careful not to relay incidental information about colleagues, team members,
other collaborators, the primary clients or contract examiners of others, research partici-
pants, employees, supervises, students, or trainees gained in the process of their activities
as psychologists, that the psychologist has reason to believe is considered confidential by
those individuals or groups, except as required or justified by law. (Also see Standards
IV.17 and IV.18)
I.45 Share confidential information with others only to the extent reasonably needed for
the purpose of sharing, and only with the informed consent of those involved, or in a man-
ner that the individuals and groups … involved cannot be identified, except as required or
justified by law, or in circumstances of possible imminent serious bodily harm. (Also see
Standards II.42, IV.17, and IV.18)
Extended responsibility
I.46 Encourage others, in a manner consistent with this Code

Code, to respect the dignity of
persons and peoples, and to expect respect for their own dignity.
I.47 Assume overall responsibility for the scientific and professional activities of their
assistants, employees, students, trainees, and supervises, with regard to Respect for the
Dignity of Persons and Peoples, all of whom, however, incur similar obligations.
Responsible Caring. How does this incident fare when the Standards associated with
Principle II Responsible Caring are examined? As can be concluded from Table 3, with
12 of the 54 Standards relevant to non-clinical situations not having been honoured, the
incident also does not fare well in this domain.
One might have conjectured that a Principle labelled Responsible Caring would only be
relevant in cases of clinical interventions. But this is clearly not the case. The issues
addressed here deal primarily with the competence in which the faculty member was lacking.
Particularly telling is the seemingly total absence of the requisite self-reflection (Standard
II.10).
Table 3
Principle II. Responsible Caring
General caring
II.1 Protect and promote the well-being and best interests of primary clients, contract
examinees, research participants, employees, supervisees, students, trainees, colleagues,
team members or other collaborators, and others.
II.2 Avoid doing harm to primary clients, contract examinees, research participants,
employees, supervisees, students, trainees, colleagues, team members or other collabora-
tors, and others.
II.3 Accept responsibility for the consequences of their actions.
II.5 Make every reasonable effort to ensure that psychological knowledge is not misin-
terpreted or misused, intentionally or unintentionally, to harm others.
II.6 Offer or carry out (without supervision) only those activities for which they have
established their competence to carry them out to the benefit of others.
II.8 Take immediate steps to obtain consultation or supervision, or to refer a primary

client (in this case the “client” is FoB) to a colleague or other appropriate professional,
whichever is more likely to result in providing the primary client with competent service, if
it becomes apparent that a primary client’s issues or problems are beyond their compe-
tence.
II. 9 Keep themselves up to date with a broad range of relevant knowledge, research
methods, techniques, and technologies, and their impact on individuals or groups …
through the reading of relevant literature, peer consultation, and continuing education
activities, in order that their practice, teaching, supervision, and research activities will
benefit and not harm others.
II.10 Evaluate how their own experiences, attitudes, culture, beliefs, values, individual
differences, specific training, external pressures, personal needs, and historical, economic,
and political context might influence their interactions with and perceptions of others, and
integrate this awareness into their efforts to benefit and not harm others.
Maximize benefit
92 Ethics
II.25 Facilitate the professional and scientific development of their employees, super-
visees, students, and trainees by ensuring that they understand the values and ethical pre-
scriptions of the discipline, as well as the competencies needed for their areas of activity,
and by providing or arranging for adequate working conditions, and constructive supervi-
sion, consultation, and experience opportunities.
II.55 Encourage others, in a manner consistent with this Code

Code, to care responsibly.
II.56 Assume overall responsibility for the scientific and professional activities of their
assistants, employees, supervisees, students, and trainees with respect to the Principle of
Responsible Caring, all of whom, however, incur similar obligations.
Integrity in Relationships. At least seven of the 36 relevant Standards (Table 4) are not
upheld by the faculty member when it comes to Principle III, Integrity in Relationships
(my favourite Principle). In fact, any decent person should demonstrate integrity in their
relationships.
Table 4
Principle III Integrity in Relationships
Accuracy/honesty
III.2 Accurately represent their own and their colleagues’ qualifications (e.g., credentials,
education, experience, competence, competence, affiliations) in all spoken, written, or
printed communications, being careful not to use descriptions or information that could
be misinterpreted (e.g., citing membership in a voluntary association of psychologists as a
testament of competence.)
III.5 Accurately represent their own and their colleagues’ activities, functions, contribu-
tions and likely or actual outcomes of their activities (including research results) in all spo-
ken, written, electronic, or printed communication.
III.9 Evaluate how their own experiences, attitudes, culture, beliefs, values, individual
and political context might influence their activities and thinking, integrating this aware-
ness into their attempts to be as objective and unbiased as possible in their research, ser-
vice , teaching, supervision, employment, evaluation, adjudication, editorial, and peer
review activities.
Reliance on the discipline
III.34 Familiarize themselves with and take into account their discipline’s guidelines and
best practices for their area(s) of activity, and demonstrate a commitment to maintaining
the standards of their discipline.
III.35 Seek consultation from colleagues and/or appropriate others, including advisory
groups, and give due regard to their advice in arriving at a responsible decision, if faced
with difficult situations.
III.36 Encourage others, in a manner consistent with this Code

Code, to relate with integrity.
III.37 Assume overall responsibility for the scientific and professional activities of their
assistants, employees, supervisees, students, and trainees with regard to the Principle of
Integrity in Relationships, all of whom, however, incur similar obligations.
Responsibility to Society. At least eight of the 36 relevant Standards that were not upheld
by the faculty member were related to the Principle of our responsibility to society (Table
94 Ethics
5). By blocking all new research on nonverbal behaviour s/he has deprived society of any
benefits that may have accrued as a function of new insights into human behaviour and has
interfered with academic freedom–all based on unexamined prejudicial biases. Perhaps if
s/he had been more self-aware, these biases would have been held in check.
Table 5
Principle IV Responsibility to Society
Development of knowledge
IV. 1 Contribute to the discipline of psychology and to society’s understanding of itself

and human beings generally, through free enquiry, innovation, and debate, and through
the acquisition, transmission and expression of knowledge and ideas, unless such activities
conflict with ethical requirements.
IV.2 Not interfere with, or condone interference with, free enquiry, innovation and
debate, and the acquisition, transmission and expression of knowledge and ideas, that do
not conflict with ethical requirements.
Beneficial activities
IV.5 Assist in the development of those who enter the discipline of psychology by helping
them to acquire a full understanding of their ethical responsibilities and the needed com-
petencies of their chosen areas(s), including an understanding of critical analysis and of
the variations, uses, limitations, and possible misinterpretations and misuses of the scien-
tific paradigm.
IV.8 Engage in regular monitoring, assessment, and reporting (e.g., through peer review,
in program reviews, and reports of one’s own research) of their ethical practices and safe-
guards.
IV.10 Uphold the discipline’s responsibility to society by promoting and maintaining the
highest standards of the discipline.
IV.11 Protect the skills, knowledge, and interpretations of psychology from being misinter-
preted, misused, used incompetently, or made useless (e.g., loss of security of assessment
techniques) by others.
IV.29 Encourage others, in a manner consistent with this Code

Code, to exercise responsibility to
society.
IV.30 Assume overall responsibility for the scientific and professional activities of their
Responsibility to Society, all of whom, however, incur similar obligations.
96 Ethics
Summary. It is astounding that one statement uttered by this faculty member to graduate
students could, upon examination, be seen to have had such a broad potential impact on so
many people. Equally astounding is the large and widely ranging number of Standards of
best ethical practices not observed by the faculty member. The faculty member obviously
should have foregone a free trip to Ottawa because s/he was in no way qualified to serve
as a peer reviewer of grant proposals in psychology as a social science. But going back a
step, FoB should have vetted her/his qualifications before even inviting her/him to serve
on the Adjudication Committee, thereby preventing this incident from ever happening;
perhaps the need to have representation from that particular region of Canada trumped the
need to have a qualified assessor? Perhaps the chair of the Adjudication Committee should
have insisted to the FoB officer in charge that this person be sent back home immediately?
Certainly, the other members of the Committee should have overridden the bias of this
particular unqualified gatekeeper. I often wonder about the outcomes in terms of the
graduate students who were subjected to this unacceptable behaviour …
GIVING CREDIT WHERE CREDIT IS DUE
In Thought Box 2
2, you will find another vignette of a case in which there were problems
in honouring Standards of best practices in psychology. At least 23 ethical Standards
can be seen as having relevance. Although fewer than in the first dilemma (Thought
Thought Box
1), the Standards that have been breached are very serious ones that have far-reaching
implications.
Thought Box 2
At a doctoral student’s dissertation defence, the student’s supervisor noticed that no

credit had been given to a colleague who had made substantive contributions to the
student’s thinking and work, to the point even of having sent the student the page proofs
of their new book. This happened despite the supervisor having instructed the student
to give due credit to the colleague in draft after draft after draft of the dissertation.
The supervisor drew this omission to the attention of the examining committee and to
the student, stipulating that the student must acknowledge this contribution and add the
appropriate references. The student did not defend their behaviour and in fact did not even
respond at all. None of the examining committee members backed the supervisor. In the
end, the final version of the dissertation submitted for binding did not contain the requisite
changes.
Interestingly, the following year, the student’s supervisor attended a book display at
the CPA Convention and picked up a book that fell within her/his areas of interest and
expertise. The supervisor was shocked when s/he opened the book to a chapter based on
that dissertation, authored by the former student, and co-authored by another colleague
who had had nothing to do with the dissertation, and who had not even been on the
student’s supervisory committee. There was not even an acknowledgement of the
supervisor’s very substantial contributions to the research. In fact, there was no
acknowledgement section at all, so even the fact that the student had been supported by a
SSHRC doctoral fellowship went unrecognized.
In the Thought Box 22, I provided information regarding the follow-up to illustrate the
effect on subsequent behaviour of the first incident having been mishandled. In the end, the
student got away with the unethical behaviour, and was in fact rewarded for it with her/his
doctorate, so psychology’s learning theories would predict that the behaviour would have
been reinforced and repeated, and voila!
The people involved and affected by this behaviour are, of course, the student, the
supervisor, and the rest of the examining committee. Certainly, given that her/his insistence
that credit be given where credit was due went unaddressed, the dignity of the student’s
supervisor has been compromised both by the student and by the rest of the examining
committee. And let’s not forget about the impact on the supervisor, and even on the
student, of awarding of co-authorship to someone who had not even been involved with
the research. As the dissertation and the subsequent publication would likely be accessed
by the colleague who had shared their work so generously, the supervisor’s reputation and
the reputation of the department are likely to suffer and it would be unlikely that this
colleague would ever again trust the supervisor or be so generous as to share their work with
anyone in that department of psychology again. If any other students learned about these
machinations, it could potentially have an impact on their ethical behaviour down the line
as well. If these behaviours became public, the reputation of the discipline would be called
into question and funding for psychological research could be imperilled.
Although, by my calculation, there are a total of 23 Standards expanding from each of

the four Principles that have relevance, in this instance it is the Principle of Integrity
in Relationships that was most involved in this situation. As mentioned before, this is
my favourite Principle. To my mind, it is the linchpin Principle for, without integrity in
relationships, respect for the dignity (and welfare) of others is impossible, responsible caring
is impossible, and our contract with society could not possibly be honoured. So, for this
dilemma, my focus is on the Standards that are subsumed under Principle III (Table 6).
98 Ethics
Table 6
Principle III Integrity in Relationships
Accuracy/honesty
III.1 Not knowingly participate in, condone, or be associated with dishonesty, fraud, mis-
appropriation, or misrepresentation.
tions, and likely or actual outcomes of their activities (including research results) in all spo-
ken, written, electronic, or printed communication. …
III.6 Ensure that their own and their colleagues’ activities, functions, contributions, and
likely or actual outcomes of their activities (including research results)are not misrepre-
sented by others, and act quickly to correct any such misrepresentation.
III.7 Take credit only for the work and ideas that they have actually done or generated,
and give credit for work done or ideas contributed by others (including students and
trainees), in proportion to their contribution.
Objectivity/lack of bias
vice, teaching, supervision, employment, evaluation, adjudication, editorial, and peer
review activities.
Avoidance of conflict of interest
III.24 Not exploit any relationship established as a psychologist to further personal, politi-
cal, or business interests at the expense of the dignity or well-being of their primary
clients, contract examinees, research participants, students, trainees, employers, or oth-
ers. …
Reliance on the discipline
III.33 Familiarize themselves with their discipline’s rules and regulations, and abide by
them. …
III.34 Familiarize themselves with and take into account their discipline’s guidelines and
best practices for their area(s) of activity, and demonstrate a commitment to maintaining
the standards of their discipline.
III.35 Seek consultation from colleagues and/or appropriate others, including advisory
groups, and give due regard to their advice in arriving at a responsible decision, if faced
with difficult situations.
III.36 Encourage others, in a manner consistent with this Code

Code, to relate with integrity.
III.37 Assume overall responsibility for the scientific and professional activities of their
Integrity in Relationships, all of whom, however, incur similar obligations.
HONESTY IS THE BEST POLICY? OBVIOUSLY NOT ACCORDING TO THIS PSYCHOLOGIST
We have explored the ramifications of not abiding by the Standards in relation to the
incidents described in Thought Box 2 2, but I have to share with you another incident that I
witnessed. It is only indirectly related to the issues implicated by the behaviours described
in Thought Box 2, but it is very directly related to Principle III:
A very famous psychologist was invited to give a colloquium in a psychology department.

S/he was noted especially for a seminal article that turned around people’s thinking on a
particular issue. After the colloquium, this pillar of the psychological community held a
conversation session attended mostly by graduate students. In this session, s/he confessed
that s/had made up the entire article, had never conducted the research in which so many
other psychologists had placed their trust, and that s/he frequently made up data or studies
in order to win an argument.
Of course, s/he might have been lying then too. …
TIPS FOR CONDUCTING RESEARCH ETHICALLY
Since both of our Thought Boxes

Boxes, thus far, have dealt with research, and since research is
one of the most heavily weighted functions of an academic psychologist, it is appropriate,
at this juncture, to expand upon how to conduct your research ethically. One of the bottom
lines that you can use in considering whether the research that you are proposing meets
our ethical Standards (as well as evaluating the research that is already in the literature) is
whether or not you would subject someone you love to your planned manipulations. Are
they going to be bored out of their minds for two hours? Are they going to be in physical
or psychological pain in the service of your curiosity? Are you deceiving them about the
true purpose of your research? If your answer to any of these three questions is yes, you had
better re-think your methodology, as well as your goals (Standards III.23-25). Another rule
of thumb that you can use is to remember that you must return your research participants
100 Ethics
back to the “real world” from which they came in the same condition as, or preferably in
better condition than the one in which they came to you (Standard II.39).
THE MYTH OF OBJECTIVITY: THE WHOLE IS MORE THAN THE SUM OF ITS PARTS
Psychology is almost phobic of the subjective; yet it is virtually impossible to be totally

objective about anything. We are the product of all our experiences and these experiences
are not merely additive. They interact with each other in complex ways. Not only that,
but they affect our perceptions, cognitions, attitudes, emotions, and, ultimately, our biases
and behaviour. How does this affect our research? Your experiences, including all of your
courses and training, affect how you approach research, your theoretical orientation, what
research questions are of interest to you, how you formulate your research questions,
how you evaluate the literature, whether or not you are even-handed in your critiques of
those who agree with your hypotheses versus those who disagree, what methodologies you
adopt to test your hypotheses (e.g., quantitative, qualitative, or mixed methods), how you
analyze your data, how you interpret and discuss your results, which journal you choose
for submitting your manuscript, and how you handle critiques of your work. (See Standard
III.9 in Table 6 for how this is described in our Code.).
For example, unconsciously, you may, be harsher on the work of those who disagree with
your approach or your findings than you are on those who agree with you. Or you may
slant your discussion or conclusions in such a way that they are consistent with your biases
rather than with your results. We replicated an American study of attitudes towards and
accuracy of information about women held by psychiatrists. We found that, based on our
results, we could not come to the same conclusions as those come to by the authors of the
original study. Could it really be that Canadian psychiatrists were so much more liberal
and accurate than were American psychiatrists? We thought not. Sure enough, there were
no significant differences between our data and their data, but when we examined their
Discussion section we found that a content analysis revealed an overwhelming negative bias
against psychiatrists on the part of the authors of the American study, a pre-existing negative
bias not based on their results (Stark-Adamec, & Graham, 1985).
You also may reject certain approaches to research, based on misperceptions or

misinformation about those approaches. The bottom line here is that you must choose
the method that is most relevant to the provision of answers to your research questions;
furthermore, you must not let the tail wag the dog—you must not let your favourite research
methods drive the research questions that you ask. Rather, you should let your research
questions “wag” your research methods. You may choose to disregard anything that was
published more than, say, five or, at a stretch, 10 years ago, thereby missing out on some
important earlier insights that could have had a beneficial impact on your work. You may
consider that the only good articles are published in, say, American journals, thereby missing
out on important insights contained in articles published in, say, Canadian, European, or
Asian journals.
Given all these entry points for biases and unethical behaviour, how can psychologists ever
conduct research ethically? Once again, our Code comes to the rescue. A quote from the
Values Statement for Principle III is very relevant here:
Psychologists are not expected to be value-free or totally without self-interest in
conducting their activities. However, they are expected to understand how their own
experiences, attitudes, culture, beliefs, values, individual differences, specific training,
external pressures, personal needs, and historical, economic, and political context
interact with their activities, to be open and honest about the influence of such factors,
and to be as objective as possible under the circumstances.
(CPA, 2017, Principle III, Values Statement)
So self -awareness, openness, and honesty are key factors in all of a psychologist’s activities, if
we are to be conducting ourselves ethically.
REPRESENTATIVENESS
Random samples are often used, in psychology, as an indication that one has achieved
representativeness and the assumption is made that the results of the study can therefore
be generalized to everyone and her brother. But the achievement of representativeness in
psychological studies is a bit of a myth too. First and foremost, even if one has attempted
to get a true random sample, one cannot coerce people to be participants in your research;
we have absolutely no idea whether the people who did not volunteer to participate, or who
outright refused, would respond to your research manipulations or questions in the same
way as those who did participate. That is acceptable, if recognized, and if one does not over-
generalize to the populations and peoples of the world at large.
But not all of the research that you conduct needs to have samples that are representative
of the entire population. It could be that what you need is a representative (to the degree
possible) sample of a particular sub-population. This is called purposive sampling. For
example, I was interested in the stress experienced by women working in academic settings,
their coping strategies, and their perceived advantages and disadvantages of being a woman
working in academia. I was not interested in comparing the stress experienced by men in
contrast to the stress experienced by women, or the coping strategies used by women in
academia compared to the coping strategies used by women working in other settings or
unemployed women, so the populations that I sampled from were female faculty members,
female graduate students, female secretaries, and female university librarians in four regions
of Canada (Stark[-Adamec] 1995c). When invited to do ride-alongs with police officers, I
discovered that the research literature on policing, being primarily American, did not reflect
the Canadian experience. So I conducted sequential mixed methods research with police
officers in departments of varying sizes in six different police jurisdictions in Canada because
it was the Canadian experience that interested me; I had no interest in comparing the stress
levels of Canadian and American police officers as the goal was to discover the nature of the
Canadian experience (Stark, 1992). I had originally proposed research with police, fire, and
emergency medical services, but discovered, during the participant observation phases, that
I could more accurately relate to the functions and humour of police officers than I could
those of workers in the other two first responder categories. Eventually, I narrowed the
scope down to canine policing (Stark, 1996, 1998), but only after working with police officers
in other specialties. The take-home ethics message here is that it is essential that you opt
102 Ethics
to work with samples of the populations to which you intend to generalize your results,
rather than with samples of convenience merely because they are convenient. (Note that
I have been saying research with rather than research on. This reflects the fact that we
conduct research only with the co-operation and collaboration of our research participants.
Furthermore, it distances us from the pretence of complete objectivity.)
USES AND ABUSES OF STATISTICS
Since its inception as a discipline separate from philosophy in the late 19th century
(Sinclair, 2017), psychologists have amassed millions upon millions of numbers representing
data points gathered from human participants in our research endeavours. The totality of
these numbers is far too massive to wrap our heads around and to represent accurately, even
from one research study, so we often use descriptive and analytical statistics as tools for this
purpose. If we are to use statistical tools appropriately and ethically, we must heed several
caveats. First, we have converted people’s experiences, thoughts, perceptions, affects, and
behaviours to numbers—which is the only way that we can apply statistics to them—so we
must always be aware that we have removed ourselves one step from those experiences that
interest us, and that the numbers, in and of themselves, have no inherent meaning. Secondly,
when we are looking at potential differences between, for example, two samples or two
experimental conditions, we have to be mindful of the origins of statistical significance in
probability theory. Although often interpreted incorrectly, a p-value should be interpreted
as the likelihood that the results of a study were obtained by chance, assuming that the null
hypothesis is true. So, for example, if we achieve significance at the .05 level, it means that
five times out of 100 we would get the same difference, or correlation, purely by chance.
That should be a sobering thought when we are dealing with conclusions that may have
an actual impact on real people’s lives. Thirdly, we must always remember that statistical
significance is not isomorphic with psychological significance. Fourthly, we must remind
ourselves that each statistical tool has underlying assumptions (e.g., that the data will be
normally distributed) which take us one step further removed from the experiences we are
interested in. Furthermore, if the stipulated conditions for the use of the statistic are not
met, we have abused the statistic and our conclusions based on our analyses will be baseless.
This abuse is more easily arrived at since the availability of statistical packages/programmes
for laptops, tablets, and other personal devices has become more widespread. It is so easy
to have the results of statistical manipulations of your data (and keep in mind that they are
manipulations) spew out in a manner of seconds that oftentimes the underlying assumptions
are ignored. It is your ethical duty to ensure that the conclusions you draw are rooted in
a solid foundation and you can only ensure that if you examine your data in light of the
assumptions associated with the statistic you have chosen for your analysis.
I have an example of the abuse of statistics to give you. Two researchers claimed that
you could predict complex partial seizures non-invasively on the basis of a subset of their
questionnaire. They had performed a factor analysis on their data and made a big deal
of the fact that they had discovered a very large first factor and a much smaller second
factor. If accurate, their findings could have the potential of benefitting a substantial number
of patients by either ruling out complex partial seizures or ruling them in. Many were,
understandably, very excited. However, the researchers had not used any rotations while
plugging their data into a packaged statistical programme which is a necessary step,
depending on your research question and design, for making sound conclusions. The
programme will not shout at you: Hey! You forgot to rotate the factors! Or, Correlation does
not equal causation! If you do not specify a rotation, you will always get a very large first
factor accounting for a lot of the variance in your data, and a smaller second factor.
Given the potential import of the study for patients who need an accurate diagnosis, I was
fortunate to be funded to conduct a replication of the initial findings during a time when
replications were not typically funded. Demonstrating the importance and responsibility
of understanding the tools that we use as researchers, my results did not replicate those
in the first study. ,Sequelae: I presented my study (Stark-Adamec, & Adamec, 1986), very
calmly and “softly-softly”, at a conference with prominent researchers in that area in
attendance.—including the first author of the other study. My presentation was in an
enormous auditorium and, from where I stood on the stage, I could just make out the
people in the first few rows. In presenting the rationale for my study, I was politely critical
of the first study. Half-way through my presentation, the first author of the other study
stood up, looked at me directly, then dramatically stalked out of the auditorium. After I
had delivered my plenary address, a prominent epidemiologist came up to me and said: If
you can’t say something nice, don’t say anything at all! I had to laugh (to myself) as I thought:
You just plagiarized Thumper’s mummy in the Disney movie “Bambi”! It is important that we are
aware of, and attend to, our professional responsibilities! Further, we must be prepared to be
accountable for our decisions.
PSYCHOLOGY HAS “CONTROL ISSUES”
Related to statistical issues are issues of control in the design of your research. Like
objectivity and representativeness, the control that you can achieve is perhaps more illusory
than real. For instance, you cannot control the mood in which your participants come to
your research and those moods might have an effect on their responses. Say, for example,
that they are sad because they just learned that their grandmother died, or they are anxious
because they have an exam later in the week, or they are angry because they had a
disagreement with their partner that morning, or they are irritable because they are trying to
stop smoking. You have no control over these moods, and probably do not even know what
mood they are in when they come to you because you have not thought to ask them, but
these moods could mean that they are distracted and that could affect their performance.
A real-life example of a control issue is that marihuana researchers conjectured that

participants with prior experience with marihuana would have associated expectations that
could affect the effects experienced in the laboratory. Therefore, they attempted to “control
for” the effects of expectations by selecting only participants who had never ever smoked
(or otherwise ingested) marihuana before. This was a rather ludicrous attempt to deal with
the issue because, by definition, you are only a first-time user of the substance once in your
life. The results of their experiments could therefore only be generalized to first-time users,
but that did not stop them from reporting their results as if they had uncovered the “pure
and uncontaminated” effects of marihuana. It made more sense to me, if prior experience
really had an effect, to attempt to measure the expectations and to examine any potential
effects, rather than controlling for any expectancy effects—so that is what I did (Stark-Adamec,
104 Ethics
Adamec, & Pihl, 1981; Stark-Adamec, & Pihl, 1980a, 1980b). All research on marihuana
effects, up to that point, had participants smoke alone (or even had marihuana injected
into them) in a formal, sterile laboratory, and the drug and the tests were administered
by a researcher who was “friendly but distant”—conditions which in no way resembled
those in which people smoked marihuana in those days—all in the service of discovering
the uncontaminated responses to marihuana. In addition, all participants had been male
because women constituted “messy variables”. So I had participants smoke alone, in small
groups of strangers, or in small groups of friends, in a relaxed and informal environment
(with music if they wished) … and I included samples of women. All of these extra-
pharmacological variables (and others) had measurable and statistically, as well as
psychologically, significant effects (Stark-Adamec, & Pihl, 1978, 1980a, 1980b; Stark-Adamec,
et al., 1981; Stark-Adamec, Adamec, & Pihl, 1982).
FREE AND INFORMED CONSENT
It is essential, before you conduct any research with human participants, that you first gain
their informed consent; furthermore, that consent must be given to you freely. Thirteen of
the 45 Standards within the Principle of Respect for the Dignity of Persons and Peoples
applicable to non-clinical activities are relevant to issues surrounding consent to participate
in your research, so it is obvious that this is an issue of significance for psychologists and
students of psychology. These have been listed for you in Table 7.
Table 7
Principle I Respect for the Dignity of Persons and Peoples
Standards Related to Free and Informed Consent
Informed consent
I.17 Recognize that obtaining informed consent is a process that involves taking time to
establish an appropriate trusting relationship and to reach an agreement to work collabo-
ratively, and may need to be obtained more than once. …
I.18 Respect the expressed wishes of individuals to involve others (e.g., family members,
community members, community leaders) in their decisions regarding informed consent.
I.20 Obtain informed consent for all research activities that involve obtrusive observa-
tion or measures, invasion of privacy, risk of harm, or any attempt to change the behav-
iour of research participants.
I.21 If signed consent forms are required by law or desired by the psychologist, the indi-
viduals or groups giving consent, or the organization for whom the psychologist works,
establish and use signed consent forms that specify the dimensions of informed consent or
that acknowledge that such dimensions have been explained and are understood.
I.22 Accept and document non-written consent (e.g., oral, a verbal agreement, a hand-
shake or other culturally normative exchange) in situations in which signed consent forms
are not acceptable culturally or in which there are other good reasons for accepting non-
written consent.
I.23 Provide, in obtaining informed consent, as much information as reasonable individ-

uals and groups … would want to know before making a decision or consenting to the
activity. Typically, and as appropriate to the situation and context, this would include:
purpose and nature of the activity; mutual responsibilities; whether a team or other col-
laborators are involved; privacy and confidentiality limitations; risks and protections;
likely risks and benefits of the activity, including any particular risks and benefits of the
methods or communication modalities used; alternatives available; likely consequences of
non-action; the option to refuse or withdraw at any time, without prejudice; over what
period of time the consent applies; and how to rescind consent if desired.
106 Ethics
I.24 Relay the information given in obtaining informed consent in language that the indi-
viduals and groups involved understand (including providing translation into another lan-
guage, if necessary), and take whatever reasonable steps are necessary to ensure that the
information is, in fact, understood.
I.25 Provide new information in a timely manner, whoever such information becomes
available and is significant enough that it reasonably could be seen as relevant to the origi-
nal or ongoing informed consent.
I.26 Clarify the nature of multiple relationships to all concerned parties, including collat-
eral contacts, before obtaining consent, if providing services or conducting research at the
request of or for the use of a retaining or other third party. This would include, but not be
limited to clarifying: the purpose of the service or research; the role and responsibilities of
the psychologist; the reasonably anticipated use that will be made of the information col-
lected; access to records or the information contained therein; the limits of privacy and
confidentiality; and any special legal requirements or limitations. Third parties may
include schools, employers, community, or organizational leaders, third-party payers,
courts, government, police, and research funding bodies.
Freedom of consent
I.27 Take all reasonable steps to ensure that consent is not given under conditions of
coercion, undue pressure, or undue reward. (Also see Standard III.29.)
I.28 Not proceed with any research activity, if consent is given under any conditions of
coercion, undue pressure, or undue reward. (Also see Standard III.29.)
I.29 Take all reasonable steps to confirm or re-establish freedom of consent, if consent
for service is given under duress or conditions of extreme need.
I.30 Respect the moral right of individuals and groups … to discontinue participation or
service at any time, and be responsive to non-verbal indications of a desire to discontinue
if the individuals or groups involved have difficulty with verbal communicating such a
desire (e.g., young children, individuals with language disabilities or, due to culture, are
unlikely to communicate such a desire orally).
There are several issues that merit emphasis or elaboration when it comes to informed
and freely given consent. When designing your consent forms, you rightly may feel proud
of having spent years perfecting the language of psychologists and may want to show it
off on your informed consent form. However, this is one place where you should rein in
that tendency (Standard I.24). Even if you are very literate, the rule of thumb, here, is to
aim your language at a Grade 8 level of literacy (Osgood, Suci, & Tannenbaum, 1957), in
order to ensure that your participants fully comprehend what you are attempting to convey
and what, precisely, they are letting themselves in for if they consent to participation. For
instance, in the preceding sentence, you would use understand rather than comprehend, trying
rather than attempting, and communicate or tell them about rather than convey.
It is also noteworthy that not all consent need be granted in written form (Standard
I.22). For example, in the first part of my research on stress in Canadian policing, I used
participant observation methods, and was partnered to actual police officers in six different
Canadian police jurisdictions of varying size, working the same shifts and shift rotations
as they did, doing what they did, observing what they observed, being subjected to what
they were being subjected to, for over 4,000 hours on the streets, whether it was +40C or
-40C. Knowing that this sub-population would be reluctant to sign any consent forms that
would be stored anywhere—no matter how securely—I explained to each potential partner
the true purposes and methods of my research, orally, and asked their permission to be
partnered to them, but did not require them to sign any informed consent forms (this with
the blessing of the REB of my university). I always gave them my university business card
so that they could contact me down the line should they wish to withdraw their data (i.e.,
my observations) from my study; and, part way through the shift as well as at the end of the
shift, I showed them my notes (fortunately, police officers take notes regarding all calls that
they attend, so my note-taking was not an unusual or obtrusive behaviour). I showed them
my notes, in part so that they could correct any errors that I might have made, but also to
help build their trust in me.
When informed consent forms are being used, however, a copy should be given to the
participants. In this way, the participants can refer back to the goals and methods of the
research, will have the contact information of the REB should they have questions about the
research, and will have your contact information in case they need to reschedule a session
or if they want to withdraw from your study.
Note: Your participants have the right to withdraw at any point in the process—even after
they have completed their participation—and they have the right to do so without incurring
any negative consequences (Standard I.30). This may be particularly relevant in research
employing interview techniques, especially if very confidential or upsetting information
has been provided by your interviewees. Research participants may have the research
participant’s equivalent of “buyer’s remorse” and will need your contact information if they
decide to withdraw from your study. I have found it very useful, in terms of this issue but
also for other reasons, to provide interviewees with copies of their transcripts to review and
modify as they see fit (e.g., to correct inaccuracies, to add information, and to withdraw
passages if necessary) and, essentially, to approve the transcript (See also Standards I.23,I.40,
III.15, and III.23.). Providing interviewees with this opportunity can make them more likely
not to withdraw their consent; instead, they are more likely to add information and to
correct inaccuracies. After all, what you want is as full and accurate a set of responses to
your questions as possible—not whatever did or did not first come to their minds on that
particular day. One of the reasons that I instituted this policy in my lab is because I had
experienced what it feels like to have disclosed, in a research interview, information that
put me at considerable risk. At the conclusion of the interview, I asked the interviewer to
withdraw those passages and s/he refused. I told her/him that I was withdrawing my consent
to participate and s/he said that it was too late because I had already signed the consent
108 Ethics
form. I never wanted even one of my participants (or one of my students’ participants) ever
to feel as vulnerable as I had at that moment.
But informed consent forms, ensuring ongoing consent (Standard I.17), and ensuring that
consent is given freely were not common practices in the 1950s and early 1960s. Extremely
unfortunate consequences sometimes developed as a result of research conducted with
human participants who were never informed that they were participating in research (e.g.,
who thought that they were being given therapy), and whose free and informed consent
was never obtained. There was a time when the samples of convenience were patients in
psychiatric facilities and prisoners, rather than undergraduates in introductory psychology
courses. Samples of convenience are never a good idea if one wants to generalize the
results beyond the sample to the wider public. So, as the name states, they are indeed
convenient—but certainly not representative.
The importance of informed consent, and harm that can come from lack of informed
consent, can be highlighted with the following case. A series of research studies was
conducted in the early 1960s by Ewan Cameron at the Allan Memorial Institute, affiliated
with McGill University in Montreal. According to reports, the research was partially funded
by the American Central Intelligence Agency (CIA), funnelled through the Cornell Society
for the Investigation of Human Ecology (Collins, 1988; Marks, 1979). In the service of
what was called de-patterning of the brain, Cameron allegedly gave, at least some patients,
LSD in large doses and/or electroconvulsive therapy (ECT) sessions at 20-75 times the
recommended levels. This was done in an attempt to change their perceptions and to wipe
out their memories. Patients were then allegedly placed in an insulin-induced coma for
up to 65 days during which he subjected them to what he termed psychic driving 16-24
hours/day. A tape recorder was placed under their pillow and they were brainwashed by
replacing their memories with what was on the tape loops. It has been reported that one
of the purposes of this research was to find a way of replacing existing identities with
cover identities for deep-cover spies, but also to study brainwashing techniques. It had
little purpose in terms of the mental health of the patients. The patients were unwitting
participants in this research. They did not give their consent to participate in this
brainwashing experiment and were not even informed that this was research.
Although one might have argued that some so-called “mental patients” would not have
had the capacity to provide valid consent, third-party consent was not sought—their family
members were also not even informed that what their relatives were being subjected to was
CIA-sponsored research into brainwashing.
The longstanding consequences of the research were devastating to the participants and to
their families. Neither the CIA, the American government, nor the Canadian government
has admitted complicity or culpability, but some of Cameron’s victims and their affected
family members have successfully sued the Canadian government for damages. Note: The
above information was gleaned from two books (Collins, 1988; & Marks, 1979), as well as
from two Canadian Broadcasting Corporation (CBC) documentaries aired on The Fifth Estate
(1980; 1998). There is considerable information regarding these experiments, including
videotaped interviews with victims and their family members, available on the internet if
you enter “ewen cameron” and “MK Ultra” as your search terms (the latter term was the
CIA code name for the research). As with any search, be sure to evaluate the quality of the
sources that come up in your search. Cameron had been the President of the American
Psychiatric Association and of the Canadian Psychiatric Association. He was also the first
President of the World Psychiatric Association. He died in 1967.
Today, based on our Code, deception and even partial disclosure are unacceptable:
Of special concern to psychologist is the provision of incomplete disclosure when
conducting research for which informed consent is required (i.e., temporarily leading
research participants to believe that a research project has a purpose other than its
actual purpose; providing research participants with other false information). These
actions sometimes occur in research where full and accurate disclosure would likely
influence the responses of the research participants and thus invalidate the results.
Although research that uses such techniques can lead to knowledge that is beneficial,
such benefits need to be weighed against the research participant’s moral right to
self-determination and the importance of public and personal trust in psychology.
Psychologists have a serious obligation to avoid as much as possible the use of such
research procedures. They also have a serious obligation to consider the need for, the
possible consequences of, and their responsibility to correct any resulting mistrust or
other harmful effects, when incomplete disclosure or deception is used. (CPA, 2017,
Principle III. Values Statement)
Psychology has an unfortunate, but well-earned, reputation for deception, to the point
that members of the public may distrust what the research psychologist tells them about
the research in advance of their participation. For example, such mistrust was evident in
my marihuana research: Participants were told that in the first week of their participation
they would be given coltsfoot (C) to smoke and that this was to establish baselines on the
measures. They were also told that in the second week they would be given either a low dose
(L) or a high dose (H) of marihuana to smoke, and that they would then get the other level
of dose in the third week (so either CLH or CHL). All of this was absolutely true, but some
participants were so sure that I must be out to trick them that they were convinced that they
had smoked marihuana in the first week and so got a mild high on the coltsfoot—especially
if they were smoking in a group of friends (a social contagion effect).
Many years later, in the quantitative stage of my police stress research, there were a
number of items on the questionnaire that I had developed on the basis of my 4,000+ hours
of participant observation (and had checked with a representative sample of police officers to
ensure that I was using police argot rather than psychology jargon) where variations on the
wording of some questions were employed. I explained to the officers, before they started
filling out the questionnaire, that they would likely notice this, but that these were not trick
questions, that the wording differed in order to capture real differences in the situations.
Sure enough, some participants commented to me that the reason that they had taken so
long to fill out the questionnaire was because they knew that psychologists always employ
lie scales in their questionnaires so they had to keep going back to check how they had
answered the questions earlier. Experiences such as these reinforce to me that our notoriety
and society’s lack of trust in us can, and have persisted for decades and decades.
110 Ethics
Contract Research
Special consideration must be given to Standard I.26 (Table 7) if one is engaged in

contract research (e.g., drug trials, certain industrial/organisational psychology research,
programme evaluation research, Department of National Defence research), where the
research is funded by a group or organization with interest in the results and potential
conflict of interest. To whom is your greatest responsibility? To the entity paying you
or to the participants in your evaluative activities? It would be ill-advised to enter into a
contract in which you surrender your privileges of academic freedom of inquiry and of
public dissemination of the results, or your ability to conduct the research ethically in other
ways (see CPA, 2017, Standard IV.14). Should you enter into a research contract, ensure that
you have the freedom to modify the research design and that you have the freedom to
disclose your results in a publicly-accessible article or monograph. Being very used to what
is called academic freedom in academic settings, one might assume that this freedom extends
to any contract research into which you have opted. That assumption may turn out to be
incorrect.
ACADEMIC FREEDOM: WHAT IT IS AND WHAT IT IS NOT
In academia we are protected from being fired “solely on the basis that we hold and voice
dissenting, controversial, or near-psychotic views. We are protected by academic freedom, as first
articulated in the United States at the turn of the [last] century (Malloch, 1987), popularized in the
1940s (Poch, 1993), and as defined by the Canadian Association of University Teachers as the freedom
‘to teach, investigate and speculate without deference to prescribed doctrine’ .” (Stark, 1997a, p. 232).
Academic freedom is a treasured tenet and expectation in North American post-secondary

education because it is felt to be necessary for—even vital to—an unfettered pursuit of
knowledge. But it is not academic license; it is a privilege with responsibilities, not a right
to “do whatever we want and say whatever we want and write whatever we want whenever
we want” (Stark, 1997a, p. 232). So, there are limits on academic freedom. Of concern to
most academics is that these limits may be abused and become limitations (Malloch, 1987).
However, I share Cowan’s following concerns:
When academic freedom is extended without caveat … it opens up the prospect of
a range of ‘protected’ behaviors (sic) which interfere mightily with the well-being of
others, as well as their ability to carry out their own work. Simply put, there is no
academic freedom to harass. There is no academic freedom to be disruptive. … There
is no academic freedom to intimidate, there is no academic freedom to interfere with
the academic freedom of others … (Cowan, 1994, cited in Hornosty, 1995, p. 46)
In my view, there is another caveat needed, viz.: Psychologists have a duty to temper their
academic freedom with respect for the dignity of persons and peoples, responsible caring,
integrity in relationships, and responsibility to society. Sound familiar?
Students, too, have academic freedom that they may not be aware of. For example, you
must not be penalized (e.g., with low or failing marks, or public ridicule) for expressing views
that are in opposition to those of your instructor merely because they differ from those
of your instructor (as long as you have backed up your claims with evidence and sound
reasoning, of course). But, once again, your academic freedom is not academic license and
you bear the same responsibilities as do your instructors.
Thought Box 3
I submitted what I knew would be a controversial presentation to an international

association’s convention and, much to my surprise, they made me a Plenary Address
speaker and gave me one and a half hours of programme time with no other sessions
scheduled concurrently. I was one of only two Canadians at the conference and one of only
three women.
Knowing how threatening the issue was for this particular audience, I spoke into the
microphone slowly, in a soft voice, and ensured that there was no emotion displayed on
my face or in my voice. You could have heard a pin drop on the carpeted floor of the
amphitheatre throughout my presentation.
There was an official Discussant assigned to my talk. However, the founder of the
association, as soon as I stopped talking, very slowly and dramatically, descended from the
top of the amphitheatre, came up on the stage, stood directly in front of me with his back
to me, and announced to the gathered scholars: There will be no discussion of this presentation!
So much for academic freedom, thought I.
At the closing banquet that night, no one would sit with me or talk to me—with two
exceptions. When I walked, alone, up to the dessert table, across the length of the banquet
hall after everyone else had picked up their desserts, one man dramatically intercepted me
and announced to me (and to the scholarly diners): Don’t worry. We won’t hold this against your
husband! We know that HE’s a good scientist. The next day, as I was killing time on the grounds
of the conference site, waiting to leave for the airport, the only other man who would talk
to me confided to me that the Discussant, who had been sitting beside him during my
presentation, had whispered to him I’m going to DESTROY her!
The incident described in Thought Box 3 is a perfect example of the tenets of academic
freedom not being adhered to because, as I was later told, what I had presented so calmly
was threatening to them. I knew that what I was presenting would be controversial, but this
dramatic reaction came as a shock to me. Not only is this a blatant example of curtailing
academic freedom when what is presented is not what you want to hear, but it is also a prime
example of academic violence. Sequelae: All of the proceedings of the conference were to
be published as a monograph. However, I was later informed that they had decided not to
publish the presentations after all. I do not know whether I was the only one to be silenced
in that fashion or even whether they published all of the other presentations another way,
112 Ethics
but I published my presentation elsewhere. The whole scenario was so ludicrous that it was
almost laughable. Almost …
AUTHORSHIP ISSUES
Authorship of publications is a valuable commodity in academia: Faculty members need

them for proof of productivity for granting agencies and for consideration for promotion.
Students need them to begin to establish their names in the field and to give a kick-start
to their careers. The issues of who gets first authorship and who gets co-authorship or
any authorship at all are often thorny ones, but they need not be at all. I recall that one
prominent researcher was the first author on all publications arising from work in her/his
laboratory, so s/he had hundreds upon hundreds of publications, far too many for her/
him to have authored—so many that one wondered whether s/he had even had the time to
read them, let alone write them. I was told that s/he expected first authorship in exchange
for what s/he believed was the privilege of working in her/his lab. I also was told that this
practice was more common in Europe (particularly in Germany) than in North America, but
I am uncertain of the veracity of these two statements. Perhaps, if this is made clear right
from the start, one could choose whether or not it is worth it to hand over ownership of
one’s intellectual property in exchange for being able to put on one’s curriculum vitae that
one worked in this lab, but it still smacks of intellectual dishonesty to me. Some supervisors
attempt to solve this problem by discussing the authorship issue with their students at the
outset and coming to a determination as to the order of authorship at that point. However,
it may not be clear before the research is initiated just who will have contributed what by the
end of the research process, so it is best to build some flexibility into this social contract.
Does our Code provide us with any guidance with respect to these issues? Fortunately, it does
and I have reproduced some of the key relevant Standards from Principle III in Table 8.
Table 8
Authorship Credit Standards: Principle III Integrity in Relationships
Accuracy/honesty
III.2 Accurately represent their own and their colleagues’ qualifications … in all spoken,
written, or printed communications, being careful not to use descriptions or information
that could be misinterpreted …
tions, and likely or actual outcomes of their activities (including research results) in all spo-
ken, written, electronic, or printed communication. …
III.6 Ensure that their own and their colleagues’ activities, functions, contributions, and
likely or actual outcomes of their activities (including research results) are not misrepre-
sented by others, and act quickly to correct any such misrepresentation.
III.7 Take credit only for the work and ideas that they have actually done or generated,
and give credit for work done or ideas contributed by others (including students and
trainees), in proportion to their contributions.
When I was Department Head, a graduate student came to see me. S/he was very upset
because s/he had accidentally discovered that her/his MA thesis supervisor had submitted
the research that s/he had conducted for her thesis to an international convention on
another continent and s/he wanted to know whether or not this was acceptable as the faculty
member had listed her/himself as the first author and had done this without the student’s
consent or even her/his knowledge. When I asked the faculty member why s/he had
assumed first authorship on the student’s work, the faculty member stated that the person
presenting the work had to appear as the first author in the conference programme and
that s/he assumed that the student would not be able to afford to travel so far. I requested
help from the Dean of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research who decided to pay for
the student to attend the far-away conference. A correction was made to the convention’s
programme, but I do not know whether or not the work was published with appropriate
authorship.
In another instance of ethically questionable conduct, a faculty member hired graduate

students to conduct literature searches and write grant proposals and articles that s/he
then claimed ownership of. When questioned about this behaviour s/he claimed that,
because s/he had paid them for their work, they couldn’t claim authorship or even an
acknowledgement. What’s wrong with that picture?! Of course, taken to its logical extreme,
114 Ethics
this would mean that the faculty member, too, couldn’t claim authorship—given that s/he
was drawing a salary from the university.
RESPECTFUL LANGUAGE
We are exhorted to use language that is respectful of the dignity of others in several of
the Standards of our Code (see Table 9). It had long been the practice in psychology to
refer to those who loan you their hearts and minds and bodies in order for you to push
back the frontiers of knowledge as subjects or, worse yet, as Ss. You, in turn, were referred to,
often inaccurately, as experimenters or Es, even if your research methods did not include
an experiment. The abbreviations were, no doubt, appreciated by journals because space =
$$, but referring to participants as subjects is now considered demeaning and dehumanizing,
while the use of interviewees, respondents, or participants is not. There is also an aspect of
artificial distancing of the researcher from the participant in the use of the term subject, as
if one is not really dealing with a living, breathing, thinking, feeling human being, and as if
one could be more “objective” if one does not acknowledge that these people are humans
who deserve respect (Standard I.3). (Also consult discussion of objectivity, above.) You will
have noted that our Code uses the term participants throughout.
Table 9
Standards Regarding Respectful Language Use
General respect
I.1 Demonstrate appropriate respect for the knowledge, insight, experience, areas of
expertise, and cultural perspectives and values of others, including those that are different
from their own, limited only by those that seriously contravene the ethical principles of
this Code.
I.2 Not engage publicly (e.g., in public statements, presentations, research reports, with
primary clients or other contacts) in degrading comments about others, including demean-
ing jokes based on such characteristics as culture, nationality, ethnicity, colour, race, reli-
gion, sex, gender, or sexual orientation.
I.3 Strive to use language that conveys respect for the dignity of persons and people as
much as possible in all spoken, written, electronic, or printed communication.
But Standards I.1–I.3 have implications that you may not have considered—especially
as they are also relevant to anonymous course evaluations and online blog postings
(anonymous or otherwise). During the many years that I served as a department head,
during which time I had to read all of the anonymous course evaluations for each member
of my department, I was shocked by how disrespectful—even venomous—and/or irrelevant

(e.g., I HATE his motorcycle jackets or I LOVE her hair) some of the comments were (I will
forego repeating any of the disrespectful and venomous comments). Anonymity frees one
from accountability and this can lead to unethical conduct. Strangely, those making such
comments always seemed to claim that their marks in the course were 80% or above, perhaps
figuring that the comments would be dismissed if it were known that they were not doing
well in the course. I never shared these types of comments when discussing my evaluation
of the faculty member’s performance with them. However, where constructive criticism (or
praise) was levelled, I certainly made note of it in my evaluation.
I also cannot count the number of times that students have come to me in tears as a
result of online bullying, spiteful comments, or rumour-mongering by fellow students.
Remember that rumour-mongering is a form of academic violence (Stark[-Adamec], 1995a)
and that any form of violence in academia is unacceptable.
Examine the last two Standards for each Principle. In each instance, you will find them
under Extended responsibility
responsibility. Note that, although your instructors and supervisors have a
responsibility to encourage their students, employees, trainees, and supervisees to act in
accordance with our Code, youyou, in turn, bear similar obligations.
One way of demonstrating respect in your language use is to be inclusive when you can.
So, for example, you would use Chair or Chairperson rather than Chairman (or Chairwoman),
firefighter rather than fireman, police officer rather than policeman (or policewoman), but also
First Nations rather Indian, Inuit rather than Eskimo, women rather than ladies or girls when
referring to adults (and certainly rather than any of the derogatory and/or anatomical swear
words used in reference to women). After all, what does it cost any of us to show this type of
respect?
SPECIFIC ADDITIONAL ISSUES OF SIGNIFICANCE
There a number of additional issues that merit attention but that space restrictions do not
permit me to address in detail. However, I have selected a few of the very crucial ones to
which I need to alert you and have expanded on them below.
SPECIAL POPULATIONS
The contexts of cultures. The 1986 Canadian Code of Ethics for Psychologists was one of the
first codes of ethics for psychologists that:
… moved from an assumption that activities related to psychology involved
primarily only individuals and instead include multiple references to groups, families,
and communities. (It was also) one of the first national ethics codes to state that
psychologists had an ethical responsibility to be knowledgeable about and to respect
cultures and cultural expectations when working with individuals, groups, or
communities.
(Sinclair, 2011, p. 154)
This was, in part, due to:
116 Ethics
… complaints made [prior to 1982] by Canada’s indigenous peoples about the way
researchers from various disciplines had conducted themselves when carrying out
research with members of their communities. At the very least, researcher conduct
indicated a lack of knowledge about indigenous cultures; more serious, however, were
complaints about the insensitivity and lack of respect shown by researchers toward
the cultural beliefs, practices, and expectations of members of Canada’s indigenous
communities.
(Sinclair, 2011, p. 155; parenthetical information added)
Of particular relevance to treating First Nations peoples with respect are Standards I.18,
I.22, and I.30.Psychologists have had much to learn about and from First Nations cultures
and peoples. This new knowledge has contributed to a better understanding of how to treat
persons and peoples from differing cultural origins with the respect that is their due, for it
is not only First Nations cultures to which we may have been insensitive. The population of
Canadian residents is no longer of “indigenous, French, and British origin … (B)y the late 1990s,
only 55% of Canadian residents were from these backgrounds” (Sinclair, 2011, p. 156).
But it is not only with regard to the cultural origins of our research participants that we
have been insensitive. Too often, psychologists may display a kind of arrogance regarding
people’s experience, perceptions, and thoughts. So, for example, we may assume that we are
the experts on their lives, that “we know better” than they do how they feel, what they need,
how they think when, in fact, they are the experts on their own lives. This is particularly
evident in research with patients, with seniors, and with police, as well as with lower income
families. Even the lumping together of everyone over the age of 55—as if they represented
only one demographic—is disrespectful.
Vulnerable persons or peoples. We have gone over the importance of free and informed
consent, but not everyone is capable of providing consent. So an entire section of the
Standards under Respect for the Dignity of Persons and Peoples is devoted to best practices
and protections for consent procedures with vulnerable individuals and groups (Standards
I.31-36 and I.18). Oftentimes, it is necessary for you to obtain what is called third-party or
substitute consent. This would be the case if, for example, you wanted to conduct observation
of the play behaviours of children at a nursery school or the feeding procedures for patients
with advanced Alzheimer’s in a seniors’ residence. In the former instance, you would need
the permission of the nursery school supervising teacher and the head of the school, but you
would also need the free and informed consent of the parents of the children involved. In the
latter example, you would need the permissions of, at a minimum, the head of the residence,
any supervising nurses or aides, and the free and informed consent of a family member or
someone who had power of attorney for consent. However, you should also get the assent of
those who are to be observed. This assent need not be in writing, but you must be sensitive
to the withdrawal of assent that can become evident in the nonverbal behaviour of those who
are being observed as well, just as you would be sensitive to the withdrawal of consent among
those whose cultural norms might inhibit more direct expressions of the desire to put a stop
to the observation.
There is, however, a different set of vulnerable individuals who are vulnerable despite
being able, legally, to provide informed consent. These are people who are in a dependent
relationship to the researcher, e.g., students, employees, trainees (Standard, I.36). So you
have to be particularly cautious in these instances.
SUPERVISION AND TEACHING
You are likely some years away from teaching or supervising students, so you might
wonder why I have devoted a section to this topic. It is important, however, that you be
alerted to some of the (at least) 78 relevant Standards so that you will know what you have a
right to expect of your professors.
For instance, you have a right to a safe learning environment, free of harassment or
ridicule based on your sex, your sexual preference, your culture, your worldview, your
religious beliefs (or lack thereof), your political views, your race, or your disabilities, and
free of exploitation. You have a right to be evaluated fairly. You have a right to instruction
and supervision that is au courant with the latest information in the field. You have a right
to privacy and confidentiality, and must not be pressured into disclosing information about
your own experiences and feelings that you are not comfortable in sharing (Stark, 2011).
You are entitled to a degree of academic freedom. You are encouraged to speak out against
injustices, to correct misinterpretations or misperceptions of psychological constructs. You
are expected to engage in both self-reflection and self-care in order to make ethical
decisions. You are expected to work towards the better good, and to do so without harming
others.
Should you care to explore any of these issues in greater depth, you can look up the
following Standards in our Code, available online, for free at https://www.cpa.ca/docs/File/
Ethics/CPA_Code_2017_4thEd.pdf
Respect for the Dignity of Persons and Peoples: I.1-13, I.38, I.46-47;
Responsible Caring: II. 1-12, II.14, II.18-22, II.25-29, II.32-33, II.35-37, II.55-56;
Integrity in Relationships: III.4, III.5, III.11, III.28, III.30, III, 36-37;
Responsibility to Society: IV.1-5, IV.7-17, IV.20-30.
You are also invited to access our guidelines for ethical supervision in teaching, research,
practice, and administration (Pettifor, McCarron, Schoepp, Stark, & Stewart, 2010; Pettifor,
Stewart, McCarron, Schoepp, & Stark, 2011). I elaborate on one set of these issues, below.
Sexual liaisons. It is never okay for supervisors, or others in a position of power and
influence, to have an affair or sexual relationship with their subordinates. This holds
whether you are male or female. The people on whom this type of behaviour has an
impact would be, for instance, the other people in the office or the other students in the
course. They couldn’t help but wonder whether the supervisor was playing favourites,
giving unearned pay raises to the object of their affection/attention, giving higher marks to
the favoured one. And what happens to the dynamics of the work and learning atmospheres
if they break up?
More importantly, however, when there is a power differential between the two parties—as
there would inevitably be in these cases—it constitutes abuse of power and is thus unethical.
118 Ethics
The relevant Principles are II: Responsible Caring and III: Integrity in Relationships. See
Table 10 for the articulation of these Principles via the relevant Standards.
Table 10
Principles and Standards Related to Sexual Harassment,
Sexual Coercion, and Abuse of Power
II Responsible Caring:: Minimize harm.
II.29 Not encourage or engage in sexual intimacy with students, trainees, or others with
whom the psychologist has an evaluative or other relationship of direct authority. (Also
see Standard III.28.)
III Integrity in Relationships: Avoidance of conflict of interest
vice, teaching, supervision, employment, evaluation, adjudication, editorial, and peer
review activities.
III.28 Not exploit any relationship established as a psychologist to further personal, politi-
cal, or business interests at the expense of the dignity or well-being of their primary
clients, contract examinees, research participants, students, trainees, employees, or oth-
ers.
III.30 Avoid dual or multiple relationships (e.g., with primary clients, contract examinees,
research participants, employees, supervisees, students, trainees) that are not justified by
the nature of the activity, by cultural or geographic factors, or where there is a lack of rea-
sonably accessible alternatives.
III.31 Manage dual or multiple relationships or any other conflict-of-interest situation

entered into in such a way that bias, lack of objectivity, and risk of exploitation and harm
are minimized. …
It sometimes can be difficult to deal with these cases. It can be difficult for those in
subordinate positions to find a safe place to voice their concerns and they may feel
embarrassed or ashamed. Furthermore, the abuser of power may have threatened the
subordinate with reprisals if they were to lodge a complaint (I recall more than one instance
in which the abuser claimed to be very well connected globally and told the person under
their power that, if they were to lodge a complaint, s/he would make sure that the student
would never be accepted into any graduate school anywhere). Illustrating the importance
of awareness of sexual harassment, coercion and abuses of power, in one example, each
year a specific university’s sexual harassment committee received information about a
faculty member’s unacceptable conduct. Each year, the complaints were brought to the
Administration. Each year, the Administration did not act. But finally, an important and
critical change in the Administration, paired with smartphone evidence, allowed the
Administration to act. The faculty member was given their marching papers in short order.
So the problem was solved for future students at one university in Canada. Cases such
as these illustrate the responsibility Administrators have to ensure that there is no abuse
of power, and the power of individuals serving in administration to do the right thing.
However, I always worried about what it would take to ensure that this repeat offender did
not prey on students elsewhere.
BLIND FAITH IN PEER REVIEW: THE GATEKEEPERS OF SCIENCE
We have already seen how personal biases and outright ignorance can have a negative
impact on access to the funding of research (discussion of Thought Box 1) and, therefore
on the advancement of knowledge and of our understanding of persons and peoples. But
the gatekeepers of what happens to the end products of our research, i.e., the publication of
our results, have also been shown to be fallible—whether or not we are talking about open
reviews, single-blind reviews, or double-blind reviews (e.g., Hojat, Gonnella, & Caelleigh
[2003]; Peters & Ceci [1982]; Smith [2006]). I highly recommend that you access Smith’s
article on the experiments that he and others conducted with manuscripts submitted to the
British Medical Journal during his tenure as Editor there. His article is just delightful and you
can access it for free on the internet. You may also be interested in Ceci and Peters (nd)
explanation of why and how Peters and Ceci conducted their 1982 study, and the problems
that they encountered trying to publish it, not to mention the consequences to them of
their whistle-blowing (e.g., one of them was denied tenure!). The Ceci and Peters (nd) paper
is published in an open access journal, so you can access the full article for free. (See the
References list for where to access it, or use “Ceci and Peters” as your internet search terms.)
There is so much at stake in the publication game: Without publications, access to future
funding may be limited, so future advancement of our fields of knowledge would be
hampered. Then there is the “publish or perish” scene in some academic institutions where
numbers of publications may trump the quality of the work. These biases, and others, are
operative in the decision making for hiring, promotion, and the granting of tenure. This is
an area of the academic enterprise that could use a lot of guidance from the CPA Code.
Even Nobel Laureates have had seminal work in their fields rejected for publication, so if
you get a rejection notice from the journal in which you wanted to publish your exciting
findings, you have to “pick yourself up, dust yourself off, and start all over again”.
RESPONSIBILITY TO SOCIETY (PRINCIPLE IV)
We function, as psychologists and students of psychology, in a social context and we have

a social contract with the society within which we operate. In exchange for the freedom
to receive public funding (e.g., university salaries, scholarships, teaching assistantships,
120 Ethics
research grants, heated, cooled, and structurally sound buildings in which to work), in order
to be able to conduct research, to publish, to teach, and to have the freedom to learn, our
society has a right to expect something in return. In exchange for these privileges, we are
expected not to defraud the public (e.g., not to use our grant funds for purposes other than
the proposed research, and associated expenses); we are expected not to exploit others (e.g.,
research participants, students, colleagues); we are expected to hold ourselves to a higher
standard than we expect of others; we are expected to be open and honest and to treat others
with respect, we are expected to recognize and respect individual and collective differences;
we are expected to speak out against injustices and to advocate for evidence-based change in
systemic discrimination and injustice. In other words, we are expected to conduct ourselves
ethically in all that we do as psychologists and students of psychology; that is to behave in
accordance with the standards that operationalize the principles of respect for the dignity
of persons and peoples, responsible caring, integrity in relationships, and responsibility to
society. Drawing on these principles, I see a particular responsibility that I call Giving Back
and Paying Forward.
Giving back and paying forward. I believe that research participants should be
recompensed in some way that recognizes and thanks them for having loaned you their
minds and their time, as it may not be sufficient reward to know merely that they have
helped you to push back the frontiers of knowledge. Of course, it is always important
to remember that you should not go overboard in their rewards to the extent that you
are virtually coercing them to participate (Standards I.27, I.28, andIII.29). However, for
example, if you are studying the stress experienced by single mothers and their coping
strategies, you ought to pay for their babysitting expenses while they are giving you their
time, and perhaps provide them with a gift card for a grocery store.
When I was working with police canine officers, I often took action photos of them and
their dogs (e.g., at the Annual Canadian Police Canine Association [CPCA] Championship
Trials) and gave them copies. I also donated to the CPCA the action photos for inclusion in
feature articles and more formal portraits for use on the cover of their quarterly journal. I
also wrote articles for their journal, often based on interviews with “big names” in the police
dog training arena. But perhaps my most significant contribution to them was to correct
the misuse of psychological knowledge. I had observed that many police canine officers and
trainers were enamoured of the out-dated psychological construct of “drives”, a construct
that had its origins in the outmoded psychological construct of “instincts”: Is he in play drive
or prey drive? He doesn’t have a very strong ball drive. I felt that it behoved me to correct this
misuse and misunderstanding. So I documented for them the problems with this misuse
and misunderstanding and suggested alternative understandings of canine behaviour (Stark,
1996, 1998).
But it isn’t only the participants in your research who need to be recipients of your
largesse. For instance, I not only served as Department Head for what, at times, seemed
like an eternity, but I also served on every committee in the Department and many of the
University-wide committees, as well. But I am only a student. Surely you can’t mean that I should
serve on my university’s committees! But I do mean that. Instead of complaining about this,
that, and the other thing, do something constructive about it. Very often, these committees
need to hear the voice of the students whom they are established to serve and so have
allocated spaces for students. Your involvement can actually make a difference in your
learning environment. You are giving back to the university that is nurturing you. At the
same time, you are paying forward with your service so that future students will benefit.
Get involved in shaping your own future and the future of the discipline. You can also
play a part in shaping the discipline that you have chosen and are benefiting from by joining
CPA as a Student Affiliate (and later as a full Member); there is even a Section on Students in
Psychology for you.
I outlined for you, in the Introductions section of this chapter, some of the ways that
I have been involved in shaping my own future and that of the discipline. As a result, I
have been provided with some slightly strange opportunities. A Guest Editor of a special
issue of the Canadian Journal of Physics wrote an article that, although it wasn’t subjected
to peer review, was inserted into the special issue. In the article, s/he reported that s/he
had conducted “research” using “social science research methods”. On the basis of this
“research”, s/he concluded, among other outrageous claims, that the September Massacre, at
l’Ecole Polytechnique in Montreal, could be blamed on the mass murderer’s mother. Why?
Well, because she worked outside the home, of course. Because I was prominent in CPA,
SSFC, and SSHRC, and known for my feminist research, I was invited to write an article
for the Canadian Journal of Physics. In this article, I corrected the Guest Editor’s
mischaracterization of what s/he had done as having been research, in the first place, and
as having used social science research methods, in the second place—not to mention the
fact that the free and informed consent of the student interviewees was never sought. At
the behest of SSHRC, I also prepared a brief on scientific responsibility for the National
Research Council of Canada (NRC). These two events led to me being invited to chair
a plenary session on scientific responsibility at their annual convention—an event that I
would otherwise not have attended. So you never know where your work on behalf of the
discipline will take you.
Service to the public. There are many and diverse ways through which we can serve the
public that supports us. We have a responsibility to share our knowledge for the common
good. However:
In order to be responsible and accountable to society, and to contribute constructively
to its ongoing development, psychologists need to be willing to work in partnership and
collaboration with others, be self-reflective, and be open to external suggestions and
criticisms about their work and the place of the discipline in society. They need to engage
in even-tempered observation and interpretation of the effects of societal structures and
policies, and their process of change, developing the ability of psychologists to increase
the just and beneficial use of psychological knowledge and structures, and avoid their
misinterpretation or misuse.
(CPA, 2017, Principle IV, Values Statement)
News media are always looking for interpretations of events and items that will capture
the readers’ and viewers’ attention. However, you do not have to wait for them to find you.
If you have discovered something that you feel the public could benefit from knowing, you
122 Ethics
can go to them. Eventually, they will come to see you as a reliable source of trustworthy
information, and they will start coming to you (e.g., Stark-Adamec, 1991). Caveat: Make
sure that, when you are being interviewed, you take care to distinguish between facts and
opinions, theories, hypotheses, and ideas when you are commenting as a psychologist
(Standards III.10, III.18-19, III.21); and remember, as I’ve said before, not to use
psychological jargon or “psychobabble”.
But it isn’t only the media through which we can make contributions to society. We
can also contribute to society through our policy recommendations (e.g., Stark[-Adamec],
1995e) and through correction of misperceptions and misunderstandings of psychological
knowledge (Stark, 1996, 1998; Stark-Adamec, 1992a-c; Stark-Adamec, & Adamec 1986; Stark-
Adamec, & Kimball, 1982, 1984; Stark[-Adamec], 1995a, 1995d). Such contributions, however,
are always subject to the same caveats as those for our interactions with the media.
PARTING THOUGHT BOXES
In this, the concluding section of your chapter on the essence of ethics, I leave you with
five Parting Thought Boxes. For the first one, I provide you with how I dealt with the
situation. As usual, I feel that only part of the dilemma was adequately dealt with, that
someone might have been able to do more. For the remaining dilemmas, I would like you
to think about how you would deal with the situations, using what you have learned about
ethics and ethical decision making.
Thought Box 4
What would you do and why?
You feel that the research that you are conducting has, via extension of the logic for it,
potential to cause significant harm to your participants. You are conducting this research
at the behest of your employer, despite having informed her/him that her/his rationale for
the research would predict potentially adverse effects. The head of the laboratory, who is
not a psychologist, pays your salary and has directed you to conduct this research, despite
your having explained the ethical issues.
What can you do

do? You need the salary, but are conflicted about following her/his orders.
What I did in this situation. The situation described in Thought Box 4 is one that I faced
when I worked in a brain research laboratory in a hospital. In addition to the risks to patients
evident to me, there was no planned consent form (or consent process) that explained the
risks and benefits; in fact, there was no consent form at all. Furthermore, the proposed
research had not been approved by either the Hospital’s or the University’s REB. After I
explained the logic to the head of the lab, and told her/him that I could not conduct what I
considered to be unethical research for her/him, s/he left town for an extended period. That
gave me the opportunity to act.
I knew not only that I could not conduct the research that I had been ordered to conduct,
but that I could not go to the Psychology regulatory body for the province nor to CPA to
lodge a complaint, because the head of the lab was not a psychologist. So what to do?
I applied for a National Health Scholar Award and a grant to support different research
altogether … and received both. So I was no longer beholden to the head of the laboratory
for my salary. I was also obliged to conduct the research for which I had just received
funding. So I solved my ethical dilemma, but the problem remained of a head of the lab
with a very poor understanding of ethics; so my solution was incomplete. I knew that there
might possibly be revenge wreaked on me for my “insubordination”, and indeed there was,
but I had accepted responsibility for the consequences of my actions and at least I knew that
I had done the right thing for the right reasons. However, there were systemic issues that
were not addressed that might put patients at risk.
For Thought Boxes 5 through8, you are on your own. For each of these situations,
make sure that you reflect on how your own experiences and your own needs will have an
influence on your decision-making processes. Consider what you have learned from the
Standards that I have provided for you, and how they relate to the four Principles, when you
identify the issues involved. Make sure that you give thought to who would be affected by
your decisions. (See Sinclair & Pettifor, 2017, pp. 129-182, for several examples of our Code’s
ethical decision-making model in action.)
Thought Box 5
What Would You Do and Why?
You (and two others) have been asked by the Dean of a Faculty at another University
to investigate allegations of sexual misconduct in a particular Department. You will be
meeting with students in the Department individually and with faculty members
individually.
Before you can get started on your interviews, a small delegation of faculty members
arrives and tells you that you have to suspend your investigation. They claim that—if the
allegations are determined to be founded—they will be punished, so your investigation is
unethical. The logic provided is that you are a psychologist and your code of ethics prohibits
you from doing harm.
What do you do and why do you do it?

124 Ethics
Thought Box 6
What would you do and why?
Peters and Ceci (1982) conducted a famous (or some might say infamous) study on bias
in the peer review process of journals. They took 12 articles that had been published in
psychology journals written by authors from prestigious universities and resubmitted them
to the journals that had originally published them. Before they resubmitted them, they
made minor, non-substantive, modifications to the title of the articles, to the abstracts,
and introductions. But here comes the “kicker”: They changed the names of the authors
and of the prestigious institutions where they worked to fictitious author names working
at unknown institutions—unknown because they do not exist. Furthermore, they made
up institutional names that some psychologists might find somewhat “iffy” (like Tri-Valley
Center for Human Potential). Eight of the 12 articles were rejected on the grounds of “poor
quality”, only one was accepted, and only three were recognized as having been published
by the journal before. Needless to say, the journals were not best pleased that they had
been duped–played for a fool.
Peters and Ceci used deception and CPA deems that deception in research is undesirable
and should only be used under strict conditions (Standards III.23-25). Did the ends justify
the means in this instance? Is there any other way that Peters and Ceci could have found
out how the originating institution has an impact on manuscript acceptance?
In your work, if you cite a study deemed unethical, are you being unethical? Why or why
not?
On whom might there be an impact if you do or do not cite their work in your own
research on peer review?
Thought Box 7
Does your right to privacy end with your death?
Perhaps, legally
legally, it does. But does it morally
morally? Do we, for instance, have a right to examine
letters and diaries that have been archived but which clearly had been intended to be
private and confidential?
Certainly, very valuable knowledge might be gained from these archives, but does our need
to know trump the right to privacy? Why or why not?
Thought Box 8
What Do You Do and Why?
You are the Vice-President of a University. After you arrive in your office you begin to hear
a loud and continuous beat in the air. Your secretary informs you that members of a nearby
First Nations community are intentionally disrupting classes with ceremonial drumming in
the halls and that they have blockaded the entrances/exits to the university.
A short time later, a delegation of elders from the First Nation arrives at your office,
demanding an audience with you, which you gladly grant. They inform you that part of the
campus is on their sacred grounds and that classes will be disrupted and the entrances/exits
to campus will be barricaded until the property is returned to them.
What do you do and why?
PARTING ADVICE
If you find yourselves caught on the horns of an ethical dilemma, be sure to consult the
decision-making model in our Code and consult someone familiar with the Canadian Code of
Ethics for Psychologists for guidance as well. Standard II.12 reads: Engage in self-care activities
that help to avoid conditions … that could result in impaired judgement and interfere with their ability
to benefit and not harm others. So take care of yourself. And best wishes for an ethical and
enjoyable career!
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I am deeply grateful to Dr. Carole Sinclair, Chair of the CPA Committee on Ethics, for
her assistance in gathering copies of all of the articles related to ethics (including those that
I had written but lost when I relocated to Montreal) that I needed in order to complete
this chapter for you, and for her constructive comments on earlier drafts of this chapter.
In addition, she and the late Dr. Jean Pettifor have been an inspiration for me for decades
and are responsible, in large part, for my love of and for ethics and of all the thorny issues
126 Ethics
involved. I also am indebted to my sisters, Dr. Heather Stark and Mary Stark, for their
comments on earlier drafts and for their enduring and endearing support.
REFERENCES
Canadian Broadcasting Corporation: The Fifth Estate. (1980). MK Ultra: CIA mind control
program in Canada
Canadian Broadcasting Corporation: The Fifth Estate. (1998). The sleep room: CIA-funded
experiments in Montreal hospital.
Canadian Psychological Association. (2009). Ethical guidelines for supervision in psychology:
Teaching, research, practice, and administration. Ottawa, ON: Author. Also available for free
at https://cpa/ca/docs/File/Ethics/CPA_Code_2017_4thEd.pdf
Canadian Psychological Association. (2017). Canadian Code of Ethics for Psychologists, Fourth
Edition. Ottawa, ON: Author.
Ceci, S.J., & Peters, D.P. (nd). The Peters and Ceci study of journal publications.
https://thewinnower.com
Collins, A. (1988). In the Sleep Room: The Story of the CIA Brainwashing Experiments in Canada.
Toronto, ON: Lester & Orpen Dennys Ltd.
Gauthier, J. (2011). Déontologie et éthique: La pertinence pour le Québec du Code Canadién
d’éthique pour les psychologues. Canadian Psychology, 52, 169-172.
Graham, J.M., Stark-Adamec, C., & Adamec, R.E. (1984). Ideology and the interpretation of
therapists’ attitudes toward women: A liberal by any other name … Canadian Psychology,
25(2a), 198. (Abstract)
Hadjistravropoulos, T. (2011). Empirical and theory-driven investigations of the Canadian
Code of Ethics for Psychologists. Canadian Psychology, 52, 176-179.
Hojat, M., Gonnella, J.S., Caeleigh, A. S. (2003). Impartial judgement by the “gatekeepers” of
science: Fallibility and accountability in the peer review process. Advances in Health Science
Education, 8, 75-96.
Hornosty, J. (1995). A look at faculty fears and needed university policies against violence
and harassment. In C. Stark(-Adamec) (Ed.), Violence: A collective responsibility. Ottawa,
ON: Social Science Federation of Canada, pp. 31-56.
Milgram, S. (1974/2009). Obedience to Authority. NY: Harper Perennial Modern Thought.
Malloy, D.C., Hadjistravropoulos, T., Douaud, P., & Smythe, W.E. (2002). The Codes of
Ethics of the Canadian Psychological Association and the Canadian Medical Association:
Ethical orientation and functional grammar analysis. Canadian Psychology, 43, 244-253.
Nicholson, I. (2011). New technology, Old issues: Demonstrating the relevance of the
Canadian Code of Ethics for Psychologists to the ever-sharper cutting edge of technology.
Canadian Psychology, 52, 215-224.
O’Neill, P. (2011). The evolution of research ethics in Canada: Current developments.
Osgoode, C.E., Suci, G.J., & Tannenbaum, P.H. (1957). The measurement of meaning. Urbana,
ILL: University of Illinois Press.
Peters, D., & Ceci, S. (1982). Peer-review practices of psychological journals: The fate of
submitted articles, submitted again. Behavioral Brain Sciences, 5, 187-195.
Pettifor, J. (Ed.). International contributions of the Canadian Code of Ethics for
Psychologists: Voices from abroad. Canadian Psychology, 52, 230-235.
Pettifor, J., McCarron, M., Schoepp, G., Stark, C., & Stewart, D. (2010). Resource guide for
psychologists: Ethical supervision in teaching, research, practice, and administration. Ottawa, ON:
Canadian Psychological Association.
Pettifor, J., Stewart, D. McCarron, M., Schoepp, G., & Stark, C. (2011). Ethical supervision in
teaching, research, practice, and administration. Canadian Psychology, 52, 198-205.
Richard, H. (2011). La déontologie dans la context de l’exercice de la profession de
psychologue au Québec. Canadian Psychology, 52, 162-168.
Sinclair, C. (1996). A comparison of codes of professional conduct and ethics. In L.J. Bass,
S.T. DeMers, J.R.P. Ogloff, C. Peterson, Pettifor, J.L., R.P. Reaves, T. Retfalvi, N.P. Simon, C.
Sinclair, & R. Tipton. Professional Conduct and Discipline in Psychology. 53-70. Washington,
DC: American Psychological Association.
Sinclair, C. (2005). Code Comparison: The Canadian Code of Ethics for Psychologists Compared
with the APA and ASPPB Codes. Toronto: ON Author.
Sinclair, C. (2011). The evolution of the Canadian Code of Ethics over the years. Canadian
Psychology, 52(3), 152-161.
Sinclair, C. (2017). Ethics in Psychology: Recalling the past, acknowledging the present, and
looking to the future. Canadian Psychology, 58, 20-29.
Sinclair, C, & Pettifor, J. (Eds.). (2017). Companion Manual to the Canadian Code of Ethics for
Psychologists, 4th Ed. Ottawa, ON: Canadian Psychological Association.
Smith, R. (2006). Peer review: A flawed process at the heart of science and journals. Journal
of the Royal Society of Medicine, 99(4), 179-182.
Stark, C. (1996). The mythology of “drives”—Origins of the problem. The Longline, 96(2),
8-9, 12-13. Reprinted in C. Stark (1998). A dog is not a gun: Observations on canine policing,
81-90. Calgary, AB: Detselig Enterprises Ltd.
Stark, C. (1997a). Academic freedom, “political correctness”, and ethics. Canadian Psychology,
38, 232-237.
Stark, C. (1997b). Curiouser and curiouser: Blind faith in peer review. Canadian Psychology,
38(2a), 25-26. (Symposium abstract)
Stark, (1998). “Drives” do not exist—or the emperor has no clothes. The Longline, 98, 2-7.
Reprinted in C. Stark (1998). A dog is not a gun: Observations on canine policing, 91-108.
Calgary: AB: Detselig Enterprises Ltd.
Stark, C. (2000). Women and Canadian psychology: Writing our pasts and our futures.
History and Philosophy of Psychology Bulletin, 12(1), 3-10.
Stark, C. (2001). Psychological climate changes for women in academic psychology:
Forecasts, sources, and implications. Canadian Psychology, 42, 286-300.
Stark-Adamec, C. (1991). Fighting sexism in scientific research projects. Invited Editorial in
The Ottawa Citizen, June 2, 1991, Section D, 1.
Stark-Adamec, C. (1992a). Psychology with the police: Purity, parsimony, and participant
observation. Canadian Psychology, 33(2a), 325. (Abstract of Presidential Address)
Stark-Adamec, C. (1992b). Sexism in research: The limits of academic freedom. Women &
Therapy, 12(4), 103-111.
Stark-Adamec, C. (1992c). Social science and scientific responsibility. Brief prepared for the
National Research Council of Canada at the behest of the Social Sciences and Humanities
Research Council of Canada.
Stark-Adamec, C. (1993). Social science and scientific responsibility. Canadian Journal of
Physics, 71(3-4), 192-196.
128 Ethics
Stark-Adamec, C. (1994). Feminism, social science, and the environment. The WINning edge,
1(2), 7-8.
Stark(-Adamec), C. (1995a) Collaboration and responsibility. In C. Stark(-Adamec) (Ed.)
Violence: A collective responsibility. Ottawa ON: Social Science Federation of Canada,
143-150.
Stark(-Adamec), C. (1995b). Psychological violence in academia. In C. Stark(-Adamec) (Ed.)
Violence: A collective responsibility. Ottawa ON: Social Science Federation of Canada, 21-29.
Stark(-Adamec), C. (Ed.) (1995c). The Violence: A collective responsibility. Ottawa ON: Social
Science Federation of Canada.
Stark(-Adamec), C. (1995d). Violence and responsibility. In C. Stark(-Adamec) (Ed.) Violence:
A collective responsibility. Ottawa ON: Social Science Federation of Canada, 1-19.
Stark(-Adamec), C. (1995e). Women’s ways of working: Rocking the boat and the cradle in
academia—Research-based policy recommendations. Women work, and stress: Developing
mechanisms for change by bridging the gap between research and policy. Special Issue I of The
WINning edge, 2, 1-29.
Stark-Adamec, C., & Adamec, R.E. (1986). Psychological methodology vs. clinical
impressions: Different perspectives on psychopathology and seizures. In B.K. Doane
(Ed.). Patterns of limbic system dysfunction: Seizures, psychosis, dyscontrol. New York, NY:
Raven Press, 129-145.
Stark-Adamec, C., Adamec, R.E., Graham, M., Bruun-Meyer, S., Perrin, R.G., Pollock, D.,
& Livingston, K.E. (1982). Analysis of facial displays and subjective report to access
subjective state in the non-invasive detection of limbic system activation by procaine
hydrochloride. Behavioral Brain Research, 4, 77-94.
Stark-Adamec, C., Adamec, R.E., Graham, J.M., Hicks, R.C., & Bruun-Meyer, S.E. (1985).
Complexities in the complex partial seizures personality controversy. The Psychiatric
Journal of the University of Ottawa, 10, 231-236.
Stark-Adamec, C., Adamec, R.E., & Pihl, R.O. (1981). The subjective marihuana experience:
Great expectations. International Journal of the Addictions, 16, 1169-1181.
Stark-Adamec, C., Adamec, R.E., & Pihl, R.O. (1982). Experimenter effects in marihuana
research: A note of caution. Psychological Reports, 51, 203-206.
Stark-Adamec, C., Graham, J.M. (1985). Clients and therapists: Women and men.
International Journal of Women’s Studies, 8, 460-503.
Stark-Adamec, C. & Kimball, M. (1982). Science free of sexism: A guide to the conduct of non sexist
research with checklist fo r researchers, editors, granting agencies, and reviewers. Ottawa, ON:
Stark-Adamec, C. & Kimball, M. (1984). Science free of sexism: A psychologist’s guide to the
conduct of non sexist research. Canadian Psychology, 25, 23-34.
Stark(-Adamec), C., & Pettifor, J. (1995). Ethical decision making for practising social scientists:
Putting values into practice. Ottawa ON: Social Science Federation of Canada. (Monograph,
adopted by the Board of Directors of SSFC as policy, December 2, 1995)
Stark-Adamec, & Pihl, R.O. (1978). Sex differences in response to marihuana in a social
setting. Psychology of Women Quarterly, 2, 334-353.
Stark-Adamec, C., & Pihl, R.O. (1980a). Personality and non-medical use of drugs.
Psychological Reports, 46, 103-110.
Stark-Adamec, C., & Pihl, R.O. (1980b). Contributions of individual differences to marijuana
intoxication. Psychological Reports, 47, 863-869.
Tri-Council Policy Statement: Ethical Conduct for Research Involving Humans. 2nd Edition.
(2010). Ottawa ON: Author.

Stark, C. (2019). The essence of ethics for psychologists and aspiring psychologists. In M.
E. Norris (Ed.), The Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science. Kingston, ON:
eCampus Ontario. Licensed under CC BY NC 4.0. Retrieved from
https://ecampusontario.pressbooks.pub/psychologycareers/chapter/the-essence-of-
ethics-for-psychologists-and-aspiring-psychologists/
[5]
CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGICAL SCIENCE
Meredith L. Chivers, PhD, CPsych, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University, Kingston,

Ontario, Canada
Christopher Bowie, PhD, CPsych, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University, Kingston,

Ontario, Canada
Su Buchanan, PhD, CPsych, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University, Kingston, Ontario,

Canada
Tess Clifford, PhD, CPsych, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University, Kingston, Ontario,
Canada
Julie Goodman, PhD, CPsych, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University, Kingston,

Ontario, Canada
Lindy Kilik, PhD, CPsych, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University, Kingston, Ontario,
Canada
Martin Logan, PhD, CPsych, Providence Care Hospital, Kingston, Ontario
Caroline Pukall, PhD, CPsych, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University, Kingston,

Ontario, Canada
Michael C. Seto, PhD, CPsych, Royal Ottawa Health Care Group, Ottawa, Ontario Canada
Clinical psychological science is both the most sought-after and, at the same time,
probably the most misunderstood post-graduate training program in psychology. Every
year at Queen’s University, we receive approximately 150 applications for somewhere
between 5-7 positions in our Clinical Psychology Graduate Training Program. It is therefore
highly competitive, owing to the large number of applicants and relatively few positions
available in our program, and this pattern is common among clinical psychology graduate
programs. The purpose of this chapter is to educate undergraduate students about the many
facets of clinical psychology. In this chapter, we will define clinical psychology, the scope
of practice and research, discuss training paths, and provide examples of careers in clinical
130
psychology. The goal of this chapter is to educate students about clinical psychology, the
training needed to become a clinical psychologist, and provide models of how the different
facets of clinical psychology are practiced in various settings.
THE SCIENCE OF CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY
Clinical psychology is the science of human behaviour applied to real-world concerns with
mental health and well-being. Clinical psychologists are foremost scientists, bringing the
principles of the scientific method — hypothesis generation, testing, and evaluation — to
bear on concerns related to mental health. In this way, we engage in this scientific process
with the goals of improving lives and preventing human suffering. Clinical psychologists
engage in clinical practice with populations that vary by developmental stage (children,
adolescents, early, mid, and later life adults) and social contexts (individuals, couples,
families, and organizations) to address a broad array of behavioural and mental disorders
including neurodevelopmental, psychotic, mood, sexual, and personality disorders. Clinical
psychological science encompasses a wide range of activities with the common goal of
improving mental health and well-being. These activities can be divided in to at least
seven broad areas of clinical practice: research, assessment, diagnosis, prevention, treatment,
program evaluation, and consultation. Below, we provide a brief overview of each area of
clinical psychological science.
RESEARCH
Scientific research is the foundation of clinical psychology because clinical psychology

is a science. Research in clinical psychology takes as many forms as there are research
questions, from asking questions about the genetics of individuals who are prone to specific
mental difficulties, to the experiences of therapy clients seeking treatment. In the sections
that follow, we provide numerous examples of how research is integral to the development
of clinical assessment tools, diagnosis, intervention, prevention, program evaluation, and
consultation. Later in this chapter, we provide specific examples of clinical psychologists
careers, many of which prominently feature research.
ASSESSMENT AND DIAGNOSIS
The goal of psychological assessment is to evaluate the nature and scope of the
psychological difficulties that an individual, couple, or family is experiencing. The
information gathered is used to formulate a diagnosis and, in some cases, inform the best
approach to intervention. A number of methods are used to gather information, including
structured clinical interviews (e.g., the Structured Clinical Interview for the DSM or SCID;
First, Williams, Karg, & Spitzer, 2015; First, Williams, Karg, & Spitzer, 2016), symptom
checklists, and cognitive (e.g., intelligence) and neurocognitive tests. Each of these
instruments is developed through the application of the scientific method to develop the
pool of questions or tasks that the individual completes, how the results of the test or
assessment are scored, and how ranges of response are interpreted in relation to the referral
question. The most widely-used clinical assessment tools are intelligence tests, and most
commonly used are the WAIS (Weschler Adult Intelligence Scale; Weschler, 1955) and
132 Clinical Psychological Science
the WISC (Weschler Intelligence Scale for Children; Weschler, 1949). The WAIS has been
validated and adapted for use in many clinical populations, from seniors experiencing
cognitive decline, to those coping with head injury. See https://www.sciencedirect.com/
topics/neuroscience/wechsler-adult-intelligence-scale (ScienceDirect, 2018).
With the information gathered in the assessment process, clinicians then formulate a
diagnosis. If they are practising in North America, diagnosis is in accordance with the DSM
5, the fifth edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (American
Psychiatric Association, 2013). If they are practising outside North America, diagnosis is
typically in accordance with the International Classification of Diseases, 11th revision,
(ICD-11) created by the World Health Organization (see https://icd.who.int/en/; World
Health Organization, 2019). The purpose of formulating a diagnosis is to organize symptoms
into a construct that best represents the domain of psychological difficulties that the person
is experiencing. The diagnosis is helpful for communicating with other mental healthcare
providers, for guiding decisions about intervention and prevention, and for helping the
affected person make meaning of the difficulties they are experiencing. Scientific processes
inform the multiple stages of decision-making that clinicians engage in when formulating
a diagnosis, including which symptoms are considered unique features of a specific mental
disorder (e.g., that discriminate between groups), what severity of symptoms would indicate
a disorder, and the length of time that a symptom has to be present for a particular diagnosis
to be considered, among a host of other factors that come in to play when considering how
to define and develop criteria for diagnosing a mental disorder.
TREATMENT
Psychological treatments encompass a wide variety of interventions aimed at improving

symptoms, building skills, and restoring mental health and well-being. The modern practice
of psychological treatments has been driven by empirically supported interventions
originating from Behavior Therapy, with Cognitive Behavioural Therapy (CBT) receiving
the most empirical support. CBT has been well established as an effective treatment for a
number of conditions with research often led by clinical psychologists. In the last 20 years,
there has been more interest in the development of “third wave” therapies, which have roots
in CBT, including Dialectical Behavior Therapy, Acceptance and Commitment Therapy, and
Mindfulness-Based Cognitive Therapy. In clinical practice, clinical psychologists typically
use empirically supported interventions. To learn more about the scientific foundations
psychotherapy, including a review of the evidence supporting its capacity to effect change,
we recommend reading Hundley, Elliot, and Therrien’s (2013) publication on the efficacy
and effectiveness of psychological treatments, (see https://www.cpa.ca/docs/File/Practice/
TheEfficacyAndEffectivenessOfPsychologicalTreatments_web.pdf). Martin’s (2016) book on
counseling and therapy skills gives a comprehensive overview of psychotherapy skills and
the science informing their use in clinical psychology practice.
PREVENTION
Prevention of mental difficulties is among the newest skills in a clinical psychologist’s

toolbox. Mental health researchers and practitioners now recognize the benefits of
intervening before someone develops mental, cognitive, or emotional difficulty, and the
benefits of working to lessen the burdens associated with mental disorders. Prevention
efforts can be distinguished by the stage of development they target, and generally aim to
either reduce the risk of developing the disorder, or enhance factors that would protect
someone from having future difficulties. Primary prevention refers to preventing a disorder
before it occurs. For example, efforts to reduce aggression in interpersonal relationships,
as in bullying or intimate partner violence, helps reduce the likelihood of depression and
trauma that can follow being the target of these aggressive behaviours. Secondary
prevention is aimed at preventing the recurrence of a disorder after it has been diagnosed
and treated. For example, a clinical psychologist might be interested in how mindfulness
meditation helps those people who have recovered from depression maintain their gains in
treatment, and prevent recurrence of another depressive episode. Last, tertiary prevention
refers to efforts to improve the quality of life and reduce disability among those living
with a disease or disorder. Cognitive remediation programs are one example of methods of
reducing the impact of a disorder, such as schizophrenia, on the cognitive functioning of
people living with psychosis.
PROGRAM EVALUATION
Clinical psychologists are also trained in the evaluation of programs designed to assess,
treat, and prevent behavioural and mental disorders. Indeed, many clinical psychologists
who are situated primarily in academic settings engage in this form of research. In this
context, a clinical psychologist conducting program evaluation research is able to combine
applied clinical practice, that is the assessment and treatment of a clinical population,
with an intensive research process, the development of a research protocol that adequately
assesses outcomes relevant to the research question. For example, a team of clinical
psychologists may develop an intervention, for example an internet-based implementation
of a virtual therapy group, and wish to know how well that therapy group performs relative
to more conventional, in-person therapies. In this case, the research question would be:
Do the people who participate in the online version of group therapy show as much or
more improvement in their symptoms as those who participate in conventional face-to-
face therapy? Clinical psychologists would do research to develop a proposal, write a grant
application to obtain funding to do the research, develop the protocol to assess mental
difficulty symptoms before, during, and after treatment, train other mental healthcare
providers in the implementation of the treatments, supervise the group therapy treatment,
then work with a team to compile and analyze the data, and disseminate these findings
to other professionals, and work to translate this knowledge so that other clinicians and
practitioners learn about these scientifically-supported methods of helping others.
CONSULTATION
Clinical psychologists are also trained in consultation with other healthcare providers.
Consultation with other healthcare providers (e.g., physicians) is common among
practitioners of health psychology, where psychological factors, like stress, are evaluated
in relation to its impact on physical health, such as cardiovascular disease. Clinical
psychologists may also consult with other mental health (e.g., psychiatrists, social workers),
typically in the context of practice on multidisciplinary mental health or health teams,
either in hospital or clinic settings. Forensic psychologists often consult with legal and
correctional services, using data gathered in clinical assessment to inform recommendations
for sentencing, probation, or treatment of an offender. Forensic psychologists may also
engage in consultation with the courts to assess risk of violence or to determine if an
offender was “of sound mind”, that is, was not experiencing symptoms of a mental disorder,
such as a psychotic state, that would prevent them from participating in a criminal trial or
would make them not legally responsible for their offense.
I THINK I WANT TO TRAIN AS A CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGIST!
Many students attracted to the idea of being a clinical psychologist arrive at this decision
from the core value of wanting to help others. Clinical psychologists do this in a number
of ways. Some clinical psychologists help people through direct contact with those coping
with mental difficulties, as in assessment or treatment of mood disorders. Some help others
more indirectly, as in the development, evaluation, and implementation of empirically-
validated methods for assessment, treatment, and prevention. Still others contribute to
individual well-being through the execution and dissemination of foundational scientific
research that informs our understanding of the factors that underlie the development of
behavioural and mental disorders. Each of these forms of clinical practice informs the other:
foundational research conducted by clinical psychologists leads to empirically-validated
assessment and treatment efforts, which then are implemented by clinical psychologists
working directly with clients. Observations made in direct contact with clients are key to
hypothesis development regarding the assessment and treatment of mental disorders, and
often inspire further insights into better approaches to interventions that ultimately will
improve the lives of so many. In these ways, the potential scope of clinical psychology
practice is very broad.
The broadness of clinical psychology is, perhaps, among the reasons why students find
it challenging to understand what it means to become a clinical psychologist. Many who
express interest in pursuing post-graduate training in clinical psychology wish to be
psychotherapists. Although becoming a licensed clinical psychologist and exclusively
providing psychological therapy services in a private practice setting is often the desired
career destination of individuals enrolling in clinical psychology graduate programs, the
breadth of clinical psychology means that individuals have many degrees of freedom in
sculpting a career in clinical psychology that can be quite varied and unique.
Psychologists usually focus their practice in specific areas such as clinical psychology,
counselling psychology, clinical neuropsychology, school psychology, correctional/forensic
psychology, health psychology, rehabilitation psychology, or industrial/organizational
psychology. Within these areas, a clinical psychologist may work with a variety of individual
client populations such as children, adolescents, adults, or seniors, or may focus their
attention on families, couples, or organizations. They work in a range of settings including
schools, hospitals, medical clinics, industry, social service agencies, rehabilitation facilities,
correctional facilities, and universities. Many psychologists and psychological associates (see
later in this chapter for a definition of this designation) have their own private practices.
YES! EXACTLY! I WANT TO BE A THERAPIST WITH A PRIVATE PRACTICE!
Although provision of psychotherapy is among the skills that clinical psychologists

develop, providing therapy is not unique to clinical psychology. Other mental health and
health practitioners, including counsellors, occupational therapists, social workers, and
registered psychotherapists, provide psychotherapy to their clients. Students who are
primarily interested in becoming psychotherapists are encouraged to consider these other
disciplines. There is more than one training path to becoming a psychotherapist, and many
of these paths are less selective and take less time to complete than clinical psychology.
What makes clinical psychology unique from these other professions is our training in the
application of the scientific method to the assessment, treatment, and prevention of mental
disorders, and promotion of mental wellness, across a range of settings such as the direct
provision of clinical services, like assessments and treatments, to conducting research in
hospital and university settings.
HOW DO I BECOME A CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGIST?
When undergrad students come to me saying they want to get into clinical psychology,
I (Meredith Chivers) give them “The Talk”. This speech consists of informing students that
clinical psychology is not just about becoming a psychotherapist, but about becoming a
scientist who uses the scientific method to have both direct and indirect impacts on mental
health and well-being. I also tell them that clinical psychology graduate school is very
demanding — I call it Grad School Plus. Like other graduate students in psychology, they are
required to complete coursework, master’s and doctoral theses, serve as teaching or research
assistants (to make money to pay for grad school!) and then (unique to clinical psychology),
they complete about 1-2 days per week of practical clinical training under the supervision
of a broad range of licensed clinical psychologists in multiple settings. If you like having a
variety of roles in your work, are great with time management, and have energy to spare,
you will be fine! If just reading that list of demands seems daunting, think carefully about
choosing clinical psychology as your graduate program.
GRADUATE TRAINING EXPLAINED
Training in clinical psychology begins at the graduate level. Students who have
successfully completed honours undergraduate degrees majoring in psychology are eligible
to apply for graduate training in clinical psychology, and some students with more varied
undergraduate education are able to apply, though often with additional coursework to meet
base level of training. The typical training program lasts about 8 years, from start of the
Master’s to registration with the College of Psychologists: 2 years to complete a master’s level
degree (at Queen’s, it’s a Master’s of Science); 3-5 years to complete doctoral-level training
(PhD), of which one year is a clinical residency or internship in a direct practice setting such
as a hospital; and one year of clinical practice supervised by a licensed clinical psychologist
for licensure.
To complete the Master’s degree, students take foundational courses in ethics,
psychopathology, statistics, research design, assessment, and treatment, and complete a
Master’s thesis. Once these requirements are successfully completed, the student is admitted
to the PhD component of training that includes more in-depth clinical practica in
assessment and treatment, advanced courses in statistics and research design, advanced
clinical skills training, and courses tailored to specific disorders and/or populations. Students
complete a doctoral dissertation, a multi-year research program with multiple studies that
converge on a particular topic in clinical psychology. As part of their doctoral requirements,
students usually must also complete a comprehensive exam, typically a two-part process of
an oral examination of a clinical case to evaluate knowledge of assessment and treatment,
and a written portion, the scope of which varies by training program.
In the last year of PhD training, students complete a full-year clinical residency, working
full time in a clinical setting, usually a hospital or outpatient clinic. Residency is among the
quintessential experiences that reveals to people if they will be happy working in a mostly
applied clinical setting. Although practica during graduate training are great for getting a
taste of what different forms of clinical assessment and treatment are like, there’s nothing
that compares to doing the job 40 hrs (often more) a week for a year.
POST-GRADUATE TRAINING EXPLAINED
Once these training steps are completed, students receive their PhD and can finally call
themselves Doctor! But this does not mean that the Doctor is ready to nail up their shingle
and start practising. Students wishing to independently practice as a licensed psychologist
are required to complete several board exams to register with the a provincial College
of Psychologists. Some clinical psychology graduates never go on to become licensed,
particularly if they choose an academic career, although most faculty in Clinical Psychology
are required to be registered. In essence, “practice” in this sense means to provide
psychological services that are regulated by the Regulated Health Professionals Act (1991),
specifically the Psychology Act (1991). These services include communicating a diagnosis
identifying the cause of a person’s mental disorder symptoms, and the delivery of
psychotherapy in a therapeutic relationship addressing a serious disorder of thought,
cognition, mood, emotion regulation, perception or memory that may seriously impair the
individual’s judgement, insight, behaviour, communication, social functioning, or potential
for harm to others.
Registration includes two written exams. The first is the Examination for Professional
Practice in Psychology (EPPP), a general psychological knowledge exam. The second is
the Ethics and Jurisprudence exam, evaluating knowledge of the acts and professional
standards that regulate the practice of psychology in a jurisdiction. Last, students complete
an oral examination with a panel of licensed clinical psychologists. These examinations are
to ensure that registered Psychologists, that is, members of the College of Psychologists,
practise in accordance with applicable legislation, regulations, standards of conduct,
professional guidelines, and professional codes of ethics. After licensure, Psychologists are
required to complete regular self-assessments of their competency to practice. For more
information about the professional practice of psychology, including registration with the
College of Psychologists of Ontario, see http://www.cpo.on.ca (College of Psychologists of
Ontario, 2018).
ANOTHER PATH TO CLINICAL PRACTICE – PSYCHOLOGICAL ASSOCIATE.
Some individuals opt not to complete a PhD in clinical psychology, and instead finish their
academic education with a Master’s degree in clinical psychology. With a Master’s degree,
completion of four years of supervised applied psychology work, a year of supervised
clinical practice, and required registration exams, it is possible to register with the College of
Psychologists as a Psychological Associate. From the viewpoint of legislation and regulation
of the profession of psychology in Ontario, the scope of applied clinical practice for
Psychological Associates is identical to that of Psychologists because Psychological Associates
are able to conduct psychological assessments and treatment, and to formulate and
communicate a diagnosis. Because Psychological Associates do not complete a doctoral
dissertation and therefore do not receive advanced training in research methods, statistics,
and scientific knowledge translation, the practice of Psychological Associates tends to focus
primarily on more applied clinical practice than research. Note that in Ontario, only people
who complete a PhD in Clinical Psychology and register with the College of Psychologists
can use the protected title, “Psychologist”, or refer to themselves as “Dr.”. For more
information about becoming a Psychological Associate, we recommend visiting the Ontario
Association of Psychological Associates (2018) webpage, https://oapa.on.ca/. Also note that
registration requirements vary greatly by province and territory. Please see the relevant
provincial governing bodies below:
Province/Terri- Provincial Govern-

URL
tory ing Body
College of Alberta
Alberta www.cap.ab.ca
Psychologists
College of Psycholo-
British Columbia gists of British Colum- www.collegeofpsychologists.bc.ca
bia
The Psychological
Manitoba Association of Mani- www.cpmb.cs
toba
New Brunswick gists of New www.cpnb.ca
Brunswick
Newfoundland and
Newfoundland &
Labrador Psychology www.nlpsycboard.ca
Labrador
Board
Northwest Territo- Registrar of Psycholo- https://www.hss.gov.nt.ca/en/services/professional-

ries gists licensing/psychologists
Nova Scotia Board of

Nova Scotia Examiners in Psychol- www.nsbep.org
ogy
Registrar, Profes-
Nunavut https://www.gov.nu.ca/health
sional Licensing
Ontario www.cpo.on.ca
gists of Ontario
Prince Edward Island

Prince Edward
Psychologists Regis- www.peipsychology.org
Island
tration Board
Ordre des psycho-

Quebec www.ordrepsy.qc.ca
logues du Québec
Saskatchewan College
Saskatchewan www.skcp.ca
of Psychologists
Yukon Territory No association
BUT WHAT DO CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGISTS ACTUALLY DO?
There are many ways to create a vibrant career in clinical psychology. Depending on
who you want to work with and how, your career could be any combination of doing
research, conducting assessments and treatment, supervising other healthcare providers
providing clinical services, program development and evaluation, teaching undergraduate
and graduate students, consulting with community and health authorities, working with
an interprofessional team (with primary care physicians, psychiatrists, social workers,

counsellors, etc.), giving expert testimony in court proceedings, or providing academic
services to the mental health community, such as reviewing research grants and journal
articles for publication. Depending on where the clinical psychologist works, they can
choose the combination that fits best with their strengths and interests, and meets their
career goals. In the section that follows, I asked several psychologists, the majority working
as clinical psychologists, practising in the Queen’s and Kingston communities to talk about
how they became interested in clinical psychology, what their training consisted of, and how
they currently practice.
CHRISTOPHER BOWIE – ADULT PSYCHOPATHOLOGY IN A UNIVERSITY/HOSPITAL

SETTING.
I am a Professor and the Director of Clinical Training in the Department of Psychology,

and a member of the Psychiatry Department and Centre for Neuroscience Studies, at
Queen’s University in Kingston, Ontario. I also practice and do research as the Head
Psychologist at the Early Psychosis Intervention Program in Kingston. Much of my work that
originates at Queen’s is disseminated elsewhere, perhaps most often due to my additional
appointment as a Clinician Scientist at the Centre for Addiction and Mental Health in
Toronto. Most of my research interests focus on determining the causes and correlates,
and developing treatments for, cognitive deficits in mental disorders such as schizophrenia,
depression, and bipolar disorder.
I became interested in psychology during an Abnormal Psychology class with Dr. Karen
Wolford at SUNY Oswego. I was fortunate to have an opportunity to immerse myself
in psychology by joining Dr. Wolford’s lab, as well as doing research on perception with
Dr. Stephen Wurst. These early experiences provided me with an insight into the science
of psychology and how studying the science of human behaviour could have profound
implications on developing treatments and improving lives. This led to a switch from a
Business degree to Psychology, just in time to meet criteria for graduate school admissions.
I was definitely one of those students who discovered a passion for psychology late in
my undergraduate career and was lucky to have great mentors who not only trained and
inspired me, but also showed me what the life of a psychologist is like on a daily basis.
Five years later, I completed my Ph.D. at Hofstra University in New York, training with Drs.
Mark Serper and Philip Harvey. My doctoral internship at the Clinical Neuroscience Center
of Pilgrim Psychiatric Center introduced me to the integration of science and practice –
in fact the cognitive remediation treatments that we are now sharing across the globe had
their origins in my ability to test new ideas during my work on this inpatient unit with
people who had experienced very severe mental illness with few periods of high functioning
following their diagnosis. I did post-doctoral training with Dr. Barbara Cornblatt, earning
a Young Investigator Award from the National Alliance for Research in Schizophrenia and
Depression (NARSAD) to study how to treat cognitive impairments in adolescents who
showed early risk signs for schizophrenia. My first academic appointment at Mount Sinai
School of Medicine came a year later and continued to study the functional consequences
of cognitive impairment in schizophrenia before moving to Queen’s in 2008. Currently
our lab is leading multiple trials of cognitive remediation for severe mental disorders and
studying early intervention for mental illness. More recently, I have put more emphasis on
advocacy for clinical psychology and dissemination or our research. Our flagship treatment,
Action-Based Cognitive Remediation, is being used in over 50 sites worldwide, from treating
those with Bipolar Disorder in Copenhagen, Depression in New Zealand, to First-Episode
Psychosis in Georgia (Best & Bowie, 2017; Bowie, Gupta, & Holshausen, 2013; Horan &
Green, 2017). Our research group has created an online portal to share our treatment
methods, including those to treat cognitive deficits and to combat internalized stigma in
early psychosis. These methods of delivering treatment materials and staying in touch with
a community allows us to examine all of the challenges and excitement of taking clinical
treatment research from lab to clinic to community. I have also joined the board of the
Ontario Psychological Association, with an active role in addressing academic issues and
advocating for the training of the science of psychology. To read more about the science
informing cognitive treatments for psychosis, I recommend Best and Bowie (2017), Bowie,
Gupta, and Holshausen (2013), and Horan and Green (2017).
SU BUCHANAN – CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY IN A FAMILY HEALTH TEAM SETTING
When I was in my undergraduate program at the University of Manitoba, I greatly enjoyed

the Introduction to Psychology course, taught by Dr. Jim Forrest, which led me down the
path to Major in Psychology. During my undergraduate degree, I had opportunities to
volunteer with research labs. I found working directly with people to be most interesting,
rather than the data entry or the animal behavior training research. I would say that the
combination of this direct experience with children with disabilities, both physical and
mental, and the Abnormal Psychology course experience solidified my goal to become a
Clinical Psychologist. I completed a Bachelor of Arts in Psychology and Sociology, a Master
of Arts in Social Psychology, and a Ph.D. in Clinical Psychology all through the University
of Manitoba. I completed a Pre-doctoral Residency in Clinical Health Psychology at the
University of Manitoba.
For my Ph.D., I was advised by a research advisor, Dr. Gerry Sande, and a clinical advisor,
Dr. David Martin. This allowed me to continue my social-clinical research in the
sociocultural factors that influence the development of psychological well-being in children,
both boys and girls, including body image, self-esteem, and mental wellness. During my
Ph.D., I assisted in the development and subsequent delivery of four distance education
classes, team-taught Introduction to Psychology, and taught Abnormal Psychology. As Ph.D.
student I was financially supported by a SSHRC doctoral scholarship. During my Clinical
Psychology Ph.D. program, I had three children. As a result, it took me longer to complete
the Ph.D. than my original plan of five years.
Currently, I am a Clinical Psychologist working in a Family Health Team in Kingston,
Ontario. There are 26 family physicians and 8 Nurse Practitioners who can refer almost
40,000 patients, who are under their care, to my psychological services. Referrals are for
therapy, consultation, and assessment. I work within a mental health team including social
work, psychiatry, psychology, and mental health counsellors. As a team, we have agreed
to provide time-limited, solution-focused cognitive behaviour therapy. I explain to the
patients that we will be working together (collaborative therapy) to teach healthy skills for
coping with difficult situations that life brings. As a result of this brief therapy model, I will
refer people to other more specialist services in the community for additional therapy (e.g.,
Mood Disorders Clinic, Personality Disorders Clinic, etc.) and will bridge the time waiting
for the other clinic services to start. As a result, I am able to see 200 new patients per
year. I am registered with the College of Psychologists of Ontario (CPO) to see children,
adolescents, and adults, couples, families, and groups.
In addition to conducting individual therapy, I have developed, run, and evaluate group
programs in Cognitive Behaviour Therapy. I supervise a mental health counsellor’s clinical
practice as she is working to become a Psychological Associate. I hold a position as an
Adjunct Associate Professor and Clinical Supervisor with the Department of Psychology at
Queen’s University. Frequently, I give workshops and lectures in the community on a variety
of topics including mental health concerns in children, youth, and parenting concerns.
This past year, in collaboration with the Clinical Psychology Outreach Program (CPOP) and
Kingston, Frontenac and Lennox & Addington (KFLA) Public Health, I helped to run a series
of eight lunch time workshops in a local high school. We applied for a Bell Let’s Talk Grant,
as we are hoping that this initial pilot project will expand into other area high schools.
MEREDITH CHIVERS – ADULT SEXUALITY AND GENDER PSYCHOLOGY IN A UNIVERSITY

SETTING
I am a psychological scientist and clinical psychologist whose research focuses on how sex
(biological attributes) and gender (social roles and identities) influence our sexuality.
From an early age, I was fascinated by science, nature, and behaviour. All pets underwent
(humane!) behavioural experiments, including a grade 7 science project on factors
influencing maze-running behaviour in hamsters. In high school, I discovered social
sciences and decided to pursue a science degree in psychology, a program that wasn’t widely
available yet. I was fascinated by the brain, at one time wanting to be a neurosurgeon, so
neuroscience and neuropsychology became my focus. I had considered psychiatry, curious
about the application of psychological science to helping others, but discovered clinical
psychology and the potential to do both clinical work and scientific research, and science
was consistently a strong interest of mine, from biology to physics. For my undergraduate
honour’s thesis, I investigated sexual orientation variations on cognitive abilities and thus
discovered (and fell in love with) the science of sexuality. After graduating, I worked as
a research assistant in a forensic sexuality clinic, firming my decision to pursue clinical
psychology with a focus on sexuality. At that time, I envisioned a career in a teaching
hospital, applying clinical and research skills to understanding sexual difficulties.
I left Canada in 1997 to study clinical psychology at Northwestern University, and received
my PhD in 2003. Trained by scientists at the Kinsey Institute at the University of Indiana
Bloomington, I built a sexual psychophysiology lab and began a program of research on
gendered sexual response at Northwestern University, discovering that women’s and men’s
sexual responses were not two sides of the same coin. I came back to Canada to complete
my clinical residency at the Centre for Addiction and Mental Health (CAMH) in 2002/3,
completing rotations in dialectical behaviour therapy, sexuality-related aspects of forensic
psychology, and gender dysphoria. After residency, I continued my research training as
a postdoctoral fellow at the University of Toronto and CAMH, and continued my clinical
training, conducting assessments and providing treatment, doing sex therapy with a local
physician, and doing some clinical consulting. After a proposal to open a sex addiction
assessment and treatment clinic was turned down by CAMH, I came very close to taking a
full-time clinical position in forensic psychology. When I consulted my research supervisor
on this career move, he reminded me that I was always my happiest when doing the science;
it was clear that I needed to pursue an academic career. I needed to stay in Canada, however,
if I was to be able to fund my research program on sexual response; long story, but the US
government got involved in decisions about funding sexuality research in 2003 and it was
clear I couldn’t have a career in the US (see Epstein (2006), if you’re curious to read more
about the politics of doing sexuality research!).
In 2007, I received a Queen’s National Scholar Award and was recruited to Queen’s
University. After parental leave, I began my academic phase of my career in 2009. I am now
an Associate Professor and Canadian Institutes of Health Research New Investigator, leading
an exceptional team of junior researchers keen to understand how gender and sex influence
our sexual responses, sexual orientations, and sexual health. I spend most of my time doing
research, but also teach undergraduate and graduate students. I also collaborate on research
with a number of clinical research teams outside Queen’s, consult with community and
health authorities, and provide varied academic services.
My graduate training began with the intent of having an applied clinical position in a
teaching hospital, but evolved in to a full-time academic career. Although I do miss working
directly with clients doing assessment and treatment, I have learned that academia can also
have a huge impact on individual lives. My career as a predominantly research-focused
clinical psychologist conducting research on basic and applied aspects of sexuality and
gender, and working to disseminate these findings outside of academia, has had significant
influence on many aspects of people’s sexual well-being, from informing clinical assessment
and practice, to helping people understand what is “normal” about their sexuality (a question
I often receive via email). In the future, my career may include more direct clinical practice
— we’ll see! One of the best parts of being a clinical psychologist is the flexibility my training
affords me. For now, however, there’s a lot of work to be done on the basic science of
sexuality and gender so I’m content to focus my career on addressing those knowledge
gaps. To read more about the basic and clinical science I’ve conducted that informs clinical
practice, I recommend Chivers and Brotto (2017) and Chivers (2017).
TESS CLIFFORD – CHILD/ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY IN AN OUTPATIENT/UNIVERSITY

SETTING
While I cannot exactly pinpoint when I decided to become a clinical psychologist, I am

sure being raised by a parent who advocated for meaningful vocation for people with
developmental disabilities was very influential in the decision-making process. My
undergraduate education focused on psychology with a specialization in development,
especially atypical development and neurodiversity, with a minor in Health Studies, focused
on social justice issues related to mental health and disability. I was fortunate to engage in
a number of applied research activities during my last 2 years of undergraduate training,
including observing structured clinical interviews with an anxiety treatment and research
centre, and applied behaviour analysis with children with developmental disabilities. I
entered graduate training in Clinical Psychology having spent the previous year as an
instructor therapist with two young children with autism. I was passionate about issues
related to parenting children with atypical development, and focused my Master’s thesis
and Dissertation on these topics, including implementing and evaluating an online support
group for parents of children with Autism Spectrum Disorders (ASD) (at a time when
online support was transitioning from open forums to closed groups). I became passionate
about knowledge translation and finding ways to share research with the wider community,
especially participants. I was involved in several other research projects, including one that
allowed me to engage in specialized training for the diagnosis of ASD, and assess numerous
individuals with this tool, developing expertise. At the same time, I completed a number
of practicum placements in a broader range of child and adolescent psychology, including
psychological assessments and therapy. I was sparked by the detective work of assessment in
complex cases where development and mental health intersect, and pursued more advanced
training in this area of dual diagnosis during my internship, including broadening my
experience to work with adults as well.
Currently, I am a registered clinical psychologist and the director of a training clinic for
graduate students in clinical psychology that serves our community by offering services
with fees that are geared to income. I have focused the last several years on learning about
theory and best practice in supervision, and recently started teaching senior students on
this topic. I supervise almost all of the students in our graduate program at some stage of
their training, and am invigorated by their energy and knowledge, and the learning they
encourage for me on a daily basis. I am still very involved in the detective work of complex
assessment, often with children and adolescents, although I see many adults in my work as
well. I provide parenting support, and have recently become more involved in community
education related to positive parenting and emotion regulation skill development. I consult
on smaller research projects related to early diagnosis and intervention for ASD. I very
much enjoy the flexibility of my work to see a variety of presenting problems, and engage
in a number of different activities, while also serving clients who may not otherwise access
services. To learn more about evidence-based practices with people with autism spectrum
disorder, I’d recommend reading Wong et al.’s (2015) review paper. To learn more about how
mindfulness can benefit teachers and students, I recommend Meiklejohn et al. (2012) paper
on this topic.
JULIE GOODMAN – CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY IN AN EDUCATIONAL SETTING
I have only vague memories of times when my career path was not set on clinical
psychology. My father was a clinical psychologist who practiced in Ontario for more than
45 years, and I learned early on that studying psychology would give me the opportunity
to help others and to put my interest in science, math, and English to good use. I grew
up learning to look at situations with a critical eye, always looking for the evidence that
would support or refute a claim. My undergraduate education taught me about the scientific
foundations of clinical psychology and sparked an interest in research and statistics.
Following my 3rd year, I had the opportunity to spend a summer working as a research
assistant in the Pain Research Laboratory at Dalhousie University in Halifax, under the
supervision of Dr. Patrick McGrath. Dr. McGrath later became my Ph.D. supervisor, where
I spent several years examining the factors that influence how children learn about pain
from their parents, and the prevalence of painful conditions and its associated disability
among children and adolescents. I completed a pre-doctoral internship in clinical and child
health psychology at the children’s hospital in Halifax, where I had the opportunity to
learn how to help young people with chronic or severe illnesses using cognitive-behavioural
interventions. I also had the opportunity to further my skills in psychological assessment.
Since completing my formal training, I have worked in a variety of settings with children
and adolescents, including an inpatient mental health unit, outpatient mental health service,
and a children’s treatment centre serving young people with physical, developmental, or
complex neurocognitive disabilities. In all these settings, consultation with school personnel
helped to ensure that the child’s needs were supported. Currently, I am a registered clinical
psychologist working for the Algonquin and Lakeshore Catholic District School Board. My
clinical work mostly consists of assessing students with complex learning and/or mental
health concerns and identifying the remediation and support that students require. I also
conduct educational sessions and workshops for school personnel on a broad range of
topics. Through an appointment with Queen’s, I have had the opportunity to supervise
graduate students on practicum at varying stages of their training. Through all of these
experiences, I have learned that regardless of the clinical setting, psychologists who work
with children often support a child’s functioning at school, and can bridge the gaps between
education, medicine, and mental health care to ensure that they are able to fulfill one of
their primary social roles. To learn more about clinical science’s role in understanding and
helping children with typical and atypical cognitive development, I recommend reading
Pugh and McCardle’s (2009) book on how children learn to read, and the Ontario
Psychological Association’s (2018) guidelines on assessment and diagnosis of children with
learning disabilities.
LINDY KILIK – NEUROPSYCHOLOGY IN HOSPITAL, COMMUNITY, AND ACADEMIC

SETTINGS
My interest in psychology came from my curiosity about biology and human behaviour.
I wasn’t sure how these two areas might combine until taking an intro psychology course
taught by a Neuropsychologist… I was hooked! My training included a psychology/
neuroscience undergraduate degree, followed by graduate work where my coursework and
clinical placements focused on clinical psychology, rehabilitation psychology and
neuropsychology. I am registered in all three areas. My student research included the areas
of normal aging, dementia and program evaluation. I had the opportunity to be part of
different labs for these projects and work with different teams. I was a TA and also gave some
guest lectures… it was great preparation for the future.
My career has always been a combination of clinical work, clinical research and teaching.
The variety is my way of stemming boredom and protecting against burnout. My clinical
work has included working with countless clinical multidisciplinary teams, each with their
own character and focus, including stroke, ABI, dementia, spinal cord and dementia, all
in the context of, inpatient, outpatient and outreach models. Collaboration has been key
in this work. My clinical functions include neuropsychological assessment, behavioural
assessment, cognitive remediation and behavioural intervention with patients, but much is
also working with teams in implementing interventions, supporting them in their roles, and
some administrative/committee work. There is also a leadership part to play, such as in
leading behaviour rounds and developing consensus in behavioural care plans for inpatient
teams. I teach at both the Undergraduate and Graduate levels in psychology and supervise
students ranging from diploma behaviour technology students, to practicum and internship
students. I do this with great joy. My research has always had an applied focus: my clinical
practice informs my research questions; my research informs my practice, (and hopefully
that of others). My goal in research is to put something useful into the hands of clinicians,
for example, developing the “Priming/Timing/Miming” model of behavioural care planning
for inpatient dementia unit staff. Often my research has involved collaborating with other
organizations: the Ministry of Transportation – developing pamphlet materials for patients
with dementia and their families as well as for clinicians making decisions about driving and
dementia; working on a driving simulator for seniors, developing a screening tool for police
officers to use in the field when working with seniors they suspect may have a cognitive
impairment, and crisscrossing the province to train various police groups, participating in
a provincial working group on revising a Long-term-care behavioural observation tool.
Development of dementia screening tools has been a considerable part of my research –
these are aimed to measure cognitive and behavioural changes, the capacity for safe driving,
as well as caregiver stress and patient self-awareness. I also offer clinical workshops based on
my research and am often invited to speak at conferences. Opportunities have appeared all
along the way to do innovative and rewarding work. I wouldn’t have imagined all of these
ahead of time – it has been a wonderful journey so far.
MARTIN LOGAN – REHABILITATION/NEUROPSYCHOLOGY IN A HOSPITAL SETTING
My interest in the area of psychology stems from my family and personal history. Having
had family members who required the support of psychologists and mental health teams
allowed me to have a glimpse of the benefits of psychologists from an early age. My interest
in neurological functioning came from personal experiences with concussion and brain
injury and a desire to better understand rehabilitation and neuroplasticity.
I started my studies in the area of Clinical Psychology at the University of Ottawa;
however, because of my interest in “disability”, rehabilitation, and brain functioning, I
decided to complete my Ph.D. at the University of Calgary. The reason for the move was a
new program at the University of Calgary that offered the opportunity to train specifically
in the area of rehabilitation. My research there focused on resiliency following neurological
injury (congenital vs. adult onset). In addition, I was part of a national study examining
vocational opportunities for individuals with disability and identifying best practice for
vocational rehabilitation. This was incredibly rewarding and allowed me to focus my
training to working with clients with neurologically based injuries and their families.
Following the completion of my Ph.D. at the University of Calgary I enrolled in a post-
doctoral Internship at McMaster’s Hamilton Health Sciences in the area of
Neuropsychology.
My career path has led me to working with individuals with traumatic and acquired
brain injuries, developmental/intellectual disabilities, and back to individuals with acquired
brain injuries. The settings have included: hospitals and clinics, private practice, community
supported living, and community outreach. I became a member of the Ontario College of
Psychologists a year after my internship (2001) and I registered in the areas of Rehabilitation
and Neuropsychology with adults. Even though my interning included children and older
adults, I decided that my fit was more with adults. In my current role as a neuropsychologist
at Providence Care – Community Brain Injury Services (CBIS), I provide consultation to
our outreach rehabilitation team, complete neuropsychological assessments, and have a
limited counselling roster (pertaining directly to adjusting to brain injury). Through CBIS
we are conducting ongoing research into the areas of best practice for rehabilitation (Roles as
Goals) and resiliency following concussion (Post Concussion Action Group). We are closely
involved with Queen’s University where I am a clinical supervisor and adjunct member of
the Departments of Psychology and Psychiatry.
CAROLINE PUKALL – SEXUALITY RESEARCH AND SEX THERAPY IN A UNIVERSITY/

OUTPATIENT CLINIC SETTING
Since early adolescence, I knew that I wanted to work in a job that involved “helping
people”. Friends in my social circle would often ask for my advice relating to many issues,
and I did lots of research, reading, and asking questions in order to stay “on top” of the
topics. I wound up developing a reputation for being the “go to” person for advice. I really
liked this role—I enjoyed getting to know people on a deeper level. It wasn’t apparent to me
at this time that I was developing skills that would help lay the foundation for my eventual
career as an academic clinical psychologist. All of this didn’t happen right away, of course; it
took a number of years and many experiences to shape my particular career track.
By the time I completed high school, I recognized that there were many careers that
involved “helping people”, so I enrolled in an undergraduate psychology program for
exposure to the different fields within it. My plan was to stick with psychology later on if
it appealed to me, and if not, then I could use this undergraduate experience as a stepping
stone into a different field, such as medicine. During this time, I fully explored what
psychology had to offer: I volunteered at different clinical facilities (e.g., psychiatric,
medical), took a broad range of courses, and was involved in different research labs. What I
wasn’t prepared for was the compelling “pull” of research; I loved the process of developing
hypotheses, using methods to test those hypotheses, delving into different literatures,
learning new skills… and importantly, learning not only from the professor, but also from lab
members—especially the graduate students. I spent a lot of time trying to “choose” which
path would be best for me (research or clinical), and then realized that I could do both: it all
clicked for me in a sex research lab when I was working on a treatment study of women
with genital pain—a clinical research study—one that involved research and “helping people”!
I ultimately stayed in this lab for my graduate studies in a combined Masters-PhD program
in Clinical Psychology. This program was research intensive and involved extensive clinical
training and courses, which was challenging at times but also very rewarding. I ran studies,
worked with people at different levels of training, published and presented my work, took
courses, was a teaching assistant, received clinical training, and was part of a supportive,
collaborative, and productive lab environment.
Currently, I am Professor of Psychology at Queen’s University. I am the supervisor of
a dynamic lab called the Sexual Health Research Lab (SexLab) in which we study various
aspects of human sexuality, from arousal to relationships in healthy participants as well as
those with clinical conditions (e.g., genital pain, sexual dysfunction, cancer). In this lab, I
supervise trainees of all levels as well as a part-time employee (who keeps us all on track),
and I collaborate with researchers from Queen’s and beyond. I am also the Director of the
Sex Therapy Service (Queen’s Psychology Clinic) in which I train and supervise selected
graduate students in Clinical Psychology in sex and couples therapy; we see clients with
sexual, gender identity, and relationship concerns. We conduct assessments and therapy, as
well as engage in consultations with other healthcare providers in order to best serve our
clients; recently, we have started to offer therapy groups for certain sexual issues (e.g., genital
pain). In addition, I teach in-demand sexuality and clinical psychology courses, write grants
to fund our research studies, publish and present, and am involved in various committees,
journals, and organizations. Although it may seem like a lot to juggle, I absolutely would
choose to do nothing else in terms of my career. To learn more about how sex therapy helps
people with sexual difficulties, I recommend reading The Knowledge Centre for the Health
Service’s 2012 report on this topic, available here (https://www.mentalhealthcommission.ca/
sites/default/files/
KEC%252520%25255BInterim%252520Report%25255D%252520Low%252520Res_0.pdf).
MICHAEL SETO – FORENSIC PSYCHOLOGY IN A HOSPITAL SETTING
I had what I think is a very common experience, of taking intro psych as a first-year
elective in a general science course load, out of curiosity, and discovering I was fascinated by
the topics that were covered and deciding then and there to pursue a degree in psychology.
Combining my new interest in psychology and a longer standing interest in science (biology,
zoology, chemistry), I completed a B.Sc. in biological psychology at the University of British
Columbia, in my hometown of Vancouver. By third year, I was confident I wanted to pursue
graduate studies in psychology. I was originally interested in addictions and applied to a
number of programs in Ontario in 1989, though I knew my chances weren’t great because I
had had a terrible work ethic as an undergraduate (I’d describe myself as smart but lazy) and
therefore didn’t have the best grades, but I did have killer GRE scores. I was only accepted
by two Canadian programs, Queen’s and the University of Waterloo, and chose Queen’s
because it had the best reputation out West, even though I had to do an extra qualifying
year because I didn’t complete an honour’s thesis. Demonstrating the role of luck in career
paths, I had no idea that Queen’s (at the time) had a very strong clinical forensic program and
was ideally situated for that kind of program, with six federal penitentiaries within an hour
and a forensic unit at the local psychiatric hospital. My first choice advisor was on sabbatical
the year I arrived and wasn’t taking new students, so I looked at the other faculty and
decided sexual behavior was also really interesting. Howard Barbaree agreed to supervise my
honour’s thesis and then master’s thesis, both on sexual offending. When Howard left to take
over as clinical director of the forensic program at the then Clarke Institute of Psychiatry
in Toronto, my PhD supervision was taken over by Vern Quinsey (PhD topic was on risky
sexual behavior, because my interests were veering towards general sex research rather than
specifically forensic research at the time.)
Luck struck again when Howard offered me a research scientist position at the Clarke in
1994 while I was still completing my PhD. I hustled to finish collecting my data and then took
longer than I should have to finish writing my dissertation on topic of a full-time job (not
recommended). I did complete the thesis and other requirements and was registered as a
clinical and forensic psychologist in 1998. I initially spent about half my time in research and
half involved in clinical work, conducting assessments of forensic clients, offering individual
and group therapy, and supervising MA-level psychology staff. Over time, that has shifted to
almost entirely research, though I continue to be involved in some clinical supervision and
training of practicum students and interns.
A lot of people don’t know that I had tried to switch over from the clinical to experimental
stream as a PhD student because I knew I wanted to focus on research and didn’t want to
have to complete the one year internship requirement; I might have been the first student
who had ever tried to switch OUT of clinical rather than INTO clinical. I wasn’t allowed
to do so, and I am glad now because I have had a rich, varied, and I believe productive
career as a clinical and research psychologist. I stayed at the job in Toronto (as the Clarke
Institute merged with other institutions and became the Centre for Addiction and Mental
Health) from 1994 to 2008, when I moved to the Royal Ottawa Health Care Group as a
psychologist and now the forensic research director. I am cross-appointed to four different
universities – University of Toronto, Ryerson University, Carleton University, University of
Ottawa – and currently supervise three graduate students, two at Carleton and one at the
University of Ottawa. I flirted with seeking an academic position at times, with two job
offers that didn’t work out for different reasons, but I’m glad that I’ve stayed in a university-
affiliated academic hospital environment. To learn more about clinical forensic science,
I’d recommend Bonta and Andrews (2016) book, Farrington and Welsh’s (2005) review on
experimental criminology research, and Fazel, Singh, Doll, and Grand’s (2012) review on
how risk assessment predicts violent behaviour.
CONCLUSION
Clinical psychology can lead to many different career paths– not just becoming a
professor, practising as a clinical psychologist in a hospital or clinic setting, or some
combination of those two, but other paths like teaching, working in a pharmaceutical
company designing clinical trials, and supervising other healthcare professionals, just to
name a few possibilities. If you think that you might be interested in pursuing a career
in clinical psychology, get involved! Volunteer in a lab, volunteer in a clinical setting, ask
healthcare professionals what their day is filled with and what they find rewarding and
challenging. Although searching the web can be an informative start to making decisions
about a possible career in psychology, you need to be ready to work with people, and
talking to people who actually work with people is a valuable start to learning more. And
remember that learning what career you want to devote yourself to is a process, indeed,
for some, a lifelong process. We encourage you to allow yourself the time and experience
to learn what is the right balance for you, knowing that, even if you train in one aspect
of a profession, your interest can, and may change at any point in your career. With a
degree in clinical psychology, practitioners have many degrees of freedom to pursue the
range of activities that they find rewarding, that fit their talents, and help them meet their
career goals. Although training in clinical psychology is a long process, it is also one of self-
discovery that allows for numerous learning opportunities. In the end, a career in clinical
psychology is one that offers considerable flexibility to follow one’s intellectual curiosities
and passions, to engage in a variety of activities that are meaningful in the lives of many
people, and to participate in these pursuits from a grounding in science.
REFERENCES
American Psychiatric Association. (2013). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental

disorders. 5th ed. Washington, DC: Author.
American Psychiatric Association. (2018). Structured clinical interview for DSM-5.
Best, M. W., & Bowie, C. R. (2017). A review of cognitive remediation approaches for
schizophrenia: from top-down to bottom-up, brain training to psychotherapy. Expert

Review of Neurotherapeutics, 17(7), 713-723. doi:10.1080/14737175.2017.1331128
Bonta, J., & Andrews, D. A. (2016). The psychology of criminal conduct (6th ed.). New York, NY:
Routledge.
Bowie, C. R., Gupta, M., & Holshausen, K. (2013). Cognitive remediation therapy for mood
disorders: rationale, early evidence, and future directions. The Canadian Journal of
Psychiatry, 58(6), 319-325. doi:10.1177/070674371305800603
Chivers, M. L. (2017). The specificity of women’s sexual response and its relationship with
sexual orientations: A review and ten hypotheses. Archives of Sexual Behavior, 46(5),
1161–1179. doi:10.1007/s10508-016-0897-x
Chivers, M. L., & Brotto, L. B. (2017). Controversies in women’s sexual arousal and desire.
European Psychologist, 22(1), 5–26. doi:10.1027/1016-9040/a000274
College of Psychologists of Ontario, (2018). Homepage [Website]. Retrieved from
http://www.cpo.on.ca
Dodd, D. R., Sugarman, D. E., & Greenfield, S. F. (2015). Tertiary prevention. In R. L.
Cautin & S. O. Lilienfeld (Eds.) The Encyclopedia of Clinical Psychology. doi:10.1002/
9781118625392.wbecp289
Epstein, S. (2006). The new attack on sexuality research: Morality and the politics of
knowledge production. Sexual Research and Social Policy, 3(1):1-12. doi:10.1525/
srsp.2006.3.1.01.
Farrington, D. P., & Welsh, B. C. (2005). Randomized experiments in criminology: What
have we learned in the last two decades?. Journal of Experimental Criminology, 1(1), 9-38.
Fazel, S., Singh, J. P., Doll, H., & Grann, M. (2012). Use of risk assessment instruments
to predict violence and antisocial behaviour in 73 samples involving 24 827 people:
systematic review and meta-analysis. BMJ, 345, e4692. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.e4692
First, M.B., Williams, J. B., Karg, R. S., & Spitzer, R.L. (2015). Structured clinical interview for
DSM-5—Research version (SCID-5 for DSM-5, Research Version; SCID-5-RV). Arlington,
VA: American Psychiatric Association.
First, M.B., Williams, J. B., Karg, R. S., & Spitzer, R.L. (2016). Structured clinical interview
for DSM-5 disorders, clinician version (SCID-5-CV) Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric
Association.
Horan, W. P., & Green, M. F. (in press). Treatment of social cognition in schizophrenia:
Current status and future directions. Schizophrenia research. doi:10.1016/j.schres.2017.07.013
Hundley, J., Elliott, K., & Therrien, Z.(2013). The efficacy and effectiveness of psychological
treatments. Ottawa, ON: Canadian Psychological Association. Retrieved from
https://www.cpa.ca/docs/File/Practice/
TheEfficacyAndEffectivenessOfPsychologicalTreatments_web.pdf
Landmark, B. F., Almås, E., Brurberg, K. G., Fjeld, W., Haaland, W., Hammerstrøm, K.,
… Reinar, L. M. (2018). The effects of sexual therapy interventions for sexual problems
(PMID:29319959). Oslo, Norway: Knowledge Centre for the Health Services at The Norwegian
Institute of Public Health. Retrieved from https://europepmc.org/abstract/med/29319959
Martin, D. G. (2016). Counseling and Therapy Skills (4th ed.). Winnipeg, MB: Waveland Press
Inc..
Meiklejohn, J., Phillips, C., Freedman, M. L., Griffin, M. L., Biegel, G., Roach, A., … Saltzman,
A. (2012). Integrating mindfulness training into K-12 education: Fostering the resilience of
teachers and students. Mindfulness, 3(4), 291-307. doi:10.1007/s12671-012-0094-5
Ontario Association of Psychological Associates, (2018). Homepage [Website]. Retrieved

from https://oapa.on.ca/
Ontario Psychological Association. (2018). Ontario Psychological Association Guidelines for
Diagnosis and Assessment of Children, Adolescents, and Adults with Learning Disabilities:
Consensus Statement and Supporting Documents. Retrieved from http://www.psych.on.ca/
getattachment/37646d71-1469-4731-a3c6-55a458a8238f/OPA-Guidelines-for-Diagnosis-
and-Assessment-of-Learning-Disabilities-Sept-7-2018-(1)-1.pdf.aspx?ext=.pdf
Norwegian Institute of Public Health. (2012). The effects of sexual therapy interventions for sexual
problems. Retrieved from https://www.fhi.no/en/publ/2012/the-effects-of-sexual-therapy-
interventions-for-sexual-problems-/
Pugh, K., & McCardle, P. (Eds.). (2009). How children learn to read: Current issues and new
directions in the integration of cognition, neurobiology and genetics of reading and dyslexia research
and practice. New York, NY, US: Psychology Press.
Psychology Act (1991, C.18). Retrieved from the Government of Ontario website:
https://www.ontario.ca/laws/statute/91r18#BK27
Regulated Health Professionals Act (1991, C.18). Retrieved from the Government of Ontario
website: https://www.ontario.ca/laws/statute/91r18
ScienceDirect, (2018). Wechsler Adult Intelligence Scale [compilation of recent papers on
relevant WAIS topics]. Retrieved from https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/
neuroscience/wechsler-adult-intelligence-scale
Wechsler, D. (1949). Wechsler Intelligence Scale for Children. San Antonio, TX:
Psychological Corporation.
Wechsler, D. (1955). Wechsler Adult Intelligence Scale. San Antonio, TX: Psychological
Corporation.
Wong, C., Odom, S. L., Hume, K. A., Cox, A. W., Fettig, A., Kucharczyk, S. … Schultz, T.
R. (2015). Evidence-based practices for children, youth, and young adults with autism
spectrum disorder: A comprehensive review. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders,
45(7), 1951-1966. doi:10.1007/s10803-014-2351-z
World Health Organization. (2018). International statistical classification of diseases and related
health problems (11th Revision). Retrieved from https://icd.who.int/en/.

Chivers, M. L., Bowie, C., Buchanan, S., Clifford, T., Goodman, J., Kilik, L., Logan, M.,
Pukall, C., & Seto, M., C. (2019). Clinical psychological science. In M. E. Norris (Ed.), The
Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science. Kingston, ON: eCampus Ontario.
psychologycareers/chapter/clinical-psychological-science/
[6]
APPLICATIONS AND CAREERS FOR COUNSELLORS

AND COUNSELLING PSYCHOLOGISTS
William A. Borgen, Professor of Counselling Psychology, University of British Columbia
Roberta A. Neault, President of Life Strategies Ltd., Project Director with the Canadian Career
Development Foundation, Adjunct Professor of Counselling Psychology, University of British
Columbia
The purpose of this chapter is to provide an overview of the counselling profession

in Canada. Professional counselling is offered primarily by two groups in our country –
counsellors and counselling psychologists. The chapter will focus on Canadian definitions
of counselling and counselling psychology and the scope of practice in each area. Beginning
with a brief history of these specializations within psychology, this chapter will also describe
typical training and licensure requirements, research approaches, evidence of quality, and
contexts in which each are practiced.
OVERVIEW OF COUNSELLING AND COUNSELLING PSYCHOLOGY
A BRIEF HISTORY OF COUNSELLING AND COUNSELLING PSYCHOLOGY IN CANADA
The historical and ongoing confusion around terminology, titles, and scope of practice in
the broad field of “counselling” is well documented (Gazzola, 2016; Haverkamp, Robertson,
Cairns, & Bedi, 2011; Neault, Shepard, Benes, & Hopkins, 2013). In part, this is not surprising
given that formal psychological counselling is a relatively new profession, beginning to
establish itself as a profession in the mid-1960s. Some confusion around the term
“counselling” is easy to understand: the common English understanding of the verb “to
counsel” is “giving professional advice.” This common understanding is particularly ironic
given that many counsellors/psychotherapists and counselling psychologists would distance
themselves today from advice-giving, preferring to work alongside their clients in finding
solutions to the problems clients seek help with. Another source of confusion comes from
the fact that many professionals provide advice and guidance, working under the title of
“counsellor” – camp counsellors, credit counsellors, weight counsellors, counsellors at law,
151
152 Counselling
employment counsellors, program counsellors, and admissions counsellors are just a few
examples. Others may not use the title counsellor but may see “counselling” as within their
scope of practice – an athletic coach, a lawyer, a medical doctor or a mentor may provide
“counsel,” as in offering advice. Reinforcing the broad conceptualization of counselling
within the Canadian employment context, the National Occupational Classification (NOC)
system in Canada identifies 86 occupations that incorporate the word “counsellor”
(Government of Canada, 2018).
To distinguish psychological counselling from the myriad of other types of counselling,
the five provinces that have regulated counselling have used descriptors with the word
“counselling” or have used other words. For example, although in Nova Scotia, New
Brunswick, and Alberta the title “counselling therapist” has been regulated, in Quebec the
regulated title is “Conseiller / conseillère d’orientation” (or “guidance counsellor”) and, in
Ontario the regulated title is “registered psychotherapist.” Similarly, in 2009, the national
association for counsellors was renamed as the Canadian Counselling and Psychotherapy
Association (CCPA, 2018a), adding “psychotherapy.”
In Ontario, the Health Professions Regulatory Advisory Council (HPRAC) distinguished
between counselling and psychotherapy, stating, “Examples of activities that do not
constitute the controlled act of psychotherapy include counselling, coaching, crisis
management, motivational interviewing, information and knowledge transfer, and spiritual
or faith guidance.” (HPRAC, 2017, p. 4). On the other hand, CCPA (2018b) argues against such
a distinction, stating:
It is not possible to make a generally accepted distinction between counselling and

psychotherapy. There are well founded traditions which use the terms
interchangeably and others which distinguish between them. If there are differences,
then they relate more to the individual psychotherapist’s or counsellor’s training and
interests and to the setting in which they work, rather than to any intrinsic difference
in the two activities. A psychotherapist working in a hospital is likely to be more
concerned with severe psychological disorders than with the wider range of problems
about which it is appropriate to consult a counsellor.
In private practice, however, a psychotherapist is more likely to accept clients whose

need is less severe. Similarly, in private practice a counsellor’s work will overlap with
that of a psychotherapist.
Those counsellors, however, who work for voluntary agencies or in educational

settings such as schools and colleges usually concentrate more on the “everyday”
problems and difficulties of life than on the more severe psychological disorders.
Many are qualified to offer therapeutic work which in any other context would be
called psychotherapy. (pp. 4-6)
Counselling and counselling psychology have grown from roots in both counselling
psychology in the US and educational counselling in Canada (Bedi et al., 2011); this link
to education continues today as all doctoral programs in counselling psychology are in
faculties of education. As both counselling and counselling psychology have grown as
professions, much work has been done to clarify their unique identities and scope of
practice (Gazzola, 2016; Gignac & Gazzola, 2018). The following sections trace the history of
these distinct, but closely related, professions and provide the definitions currently used to
clarify who counsellors and counselling psychologists are and what they do.
Counselling and psychotherapy. CCPA is the national association in Canada that
promotes standards of practice and education for professional counsellors and
psychotherapists. Established in 1965, it began as the Canadian Guidance and Counselling
Association (CGCA), clearly indicating the close ties with education and career counselling.
In 1999, the name change to the Canadian Counselling Association (CCA) represented
movement away from its educational roots and towards a broader definition of counselling.
In 2009, the most recent name change to the Canadian Counselling and Psychotherapy
Association (CCPA) was, as described previously, intended to help further establish
“counselling” as a distinct profession within psychology and distinguishing it even more
clearly from other, non-psychological uses of the word. For a concise history of CCPA’s first
50 years, see Robertson and Borgen’s (2016) introduction to the special anniversary issue
of the Canadian Journal of Counselling and Psychotherapy. Neault et al. (2013) also provided
a concise overview of counselling in Canada in their contribution to an international
handbook, Counseling Around the World. Another informative resource for those interested
in further exploring counselling careers is the Handbook of Counselling and Psychotherapy in
Canada, co-edited by Gazzola, Buchanan, Sutherland, and Nuttgens (2016) for the CCPA.
Within the current Canadian context of counselling and psychotherapy, an increase in
statutory regulation, a greater focus on evidence-based practice, a commitment to
embracing diversity and other social justice values, and, as in all fields, a wide range of
technologies are impacting the professionalism and day-to-day practices of counsellors
(Gazzola et al., 2016). Although technology has made counselling more accessible, it has
also raised issues related to confidentiality, jurisdiction (in terms of licensing, regulation,
and access to emergency supports), and insurance coverage. Gazzola and his colleagues
also made an interesting link between emerging technologies and evidence-based practice,
recognizing that our research has not kept up with the proliferation of such emerging
technologies as virtual reality, wearable sensors, and mobile phone apps. Without such
research, counsellors (and other professionals) are, in many cases, unsure about how to
proceed. To help with this, CCPA has established a “Technology and Innovative Solutions”
chapter (CCPA, 2018c); in other countries, such as the UK, organizations have prescreened
various apps, preapproving them for client use (Gazzola et al., 2016). It is important to note
that setting standards for the regulation and licensure of counsellors is a provincial and
territorial responsibility; currently requirements vary from one region of the country to
another. In 2018, four provinces have legislation that regulate counselling or psychotherapy
and others are working towards that goal.
Counselling psychology. Prior to the recognition of Counselling Psychology as a
specialization within the Canadian Psychological Association (CPA) in 1986 (Bedi et al., 2011),
many counselling psychologists found their professional home in the Counsellor Educators
Chapter of what is now the CCPA (Bedi, Sinacore, & Christiani, 2016). That link continues
today, with many counselling psychologists holding dual registrations (i.e., as psychologists
and counsellors) and memberships in both CPA and CCPA. Those who work under the
title Counselling Psychologist are registered and licensed Psychologists with their provincial
governing body. However, counselling psychology is generally distinguished from clinical
psychology in terms of a focus on wellness (counselling) versus disability or dysfunction
(clinical). This distinction varies from one jurisdiction to the next with terminology ranging
154 Counselling
from “maladjustment” and “disability” (Alberta) to “reasonably well-adjusted people” and

“normal human functioning” (Ontario, Saskatchewan; Bedi, Klubben, & Barker, 2012, p. 130).
The practice of counselling psychologists is provincially or territorially regulated.
Beginning in the early 2000s the federal government sought to increase the national
mobility of psychologists through requiring regulatory bodies to consider applicants from
other jurisdictions, under the Agreement on Internal Trade. Sinacore and Ginsberg’s (2015)
edited book, Canadian Counselling and Counselling Psychology in the 21st Century, provides an
overview of current issues, areas of focus, and training and supervision concerns for both
counsellors and counselling psychologists within the Canadian context.
It is clear that counselling and counselling psychology have many shared elements. The
following sections will examine some of the essential elements that guide practice in both
professions.
CANADIAN DEFINITIONS OF COUNSELLING AND COUNSELLING PSYCHOLOGY
Counselling in Canada has been described as being in its adolescent years (Neault et al.,
2013); the same could be said of counselling psychology as a Canadian area of specialization.
Part of the natural growth and development of adolescents is identity formation. Indeed,
Robertson and Borgen (2016) identified that “a particular issue currently facing the field
is that of counsellor identity and professional regulation” (p. 198). Further, Gignac and
Gazzola (2018) supported this view through the examination of a specific case of counsellors’
professional identities in transition during a period of government regulation of counselling
within one Canadian province. Not surprisingly, in the adolescence of any profession,
discussions intensify about who those professionals are, how they do their work, and what
distinguishes them from others.
Counselling. Aside from clearly defining its professional identity, an additional motivation
for clearly defining the field of counselling in Canada is related to Canadian commitments to
labour mobility across our provinces and territories. Specifically, if an individual is licensed
to practice in one Canadian jurisdiction, it is important for that individual to be able to
continue his/her profession after relocating to another part of the country. Similar to earlier
efforts regarding the work of psychologists, Human Resources and Skills Development
Canada (HRSDC) funded a Project Working Group on Labour Mobility from 2008 –2010
to research, both internationally and across Canada, questions related to titles and scope
of practice in counselling. Based on the outcomes of this research, in May 2011, the CCPA
Board of Directors approved and adopted the following nationally validated definition and
scope of practice for counselling in Canada:
Counselling is a relational process based upon the ethical use of specific professional
competencies to facilitate human change. Counselling addresses wellness,
relationships, personal growth, career development, mental health, and psychological
illness or distress. The counselling process is characterized by the application of
recognized cognitive, affective, expressive, somatic, spiritual, developmental,
behavioural, learning, and systemic principles. (CCPA, 2018b, p. 10)
CCPA also commented on the counselling process and the intentions of the counsellor.
They described counselling as:
the skilled and principled use of relationship to facilitate self- knowledge, emotional
acceptance and growth and the optimal development of personal resources. The
overall aim of counsellors is to provide an opportunity for people to work towards
living more satisfyingly and resourcefully. Counselling relationships will vary
according to need but may be concerned with developmental issues, addressing and
resolving specific problems, making decisions, coping with crisis, developing personal
insights and knowledge, working through feelings of inner conflict or improving
relationships with others. (CCPA, 2018b, p.3)
Counselling psychology. Similar to counselling, and also in its adolescent phase of

development, the Counselling Psychology section of the CPA in June 2009, after 3 years
of work by the “Executive Committee for a Canadian Understanding of Counselling
Psychology” (Bedi et al., 2011), approved the following definition for counselling psychology
in Canada:
Counselling psychology is a broad specialization within professional psychology

concerned with using psychological principles to enhance and promote the positive
growth, well-being, and mental health of individuals, families, groups, and the broader
community. Counselling psychologists bring a collaborative, developmental,
multicultural, and wellness perspective to their research and practice. They work
with many types of individuals, including those experiencing distress and difficulties
associated with life events and transitions, decision making, work/career/education,
family and social relationships, and mental health and physical health concerns.
In addition to remediation, counselling psychologists engage in prevention, psycho
education and advocacy. The research and professional domain of counselling
psychology overlaps with that of other professions such as clinical psychology,
industrial/organizational psychology, and mental health counselling.
Counselling psychology adheres to an integrated set of core values: (a) counselling

psychologists view individuals as agents of their own change and regard an individual’s
pre-existing strengths and resourcefulness and the therapeutic relationship as central
mechanisms of change; (b) the counselling psychology approach to assessment,
diagnosis, and case conceptualization is holistic and client-centred; and it directs
attention to social context and culture when considering internal factors, individual
differences, and familial/systemic influences; and (c) the counselling process is
pursued with sensitivity to diverse sociocultural factors unique to each individual.
(CPA, 2018a, pp.1-2)
It is clear from these definitions the shared roots of counselling and counselling
psychology. The following section will examine some of the similarities between both
professions.
SIMILARITIES ACROSS COUNSELLING AND COUNSELLING PSYCHOLOGY
As you may have noticed, there are many important areas of overlap between counselling
and counselling psychology. Gazzola (2016) identified “an overlap in the work of counsellors,
clinical psychologists, social workers, psychiatrists, psychotherapists, and other mental
156 Counselling
health practitioners” (p. 3). Similarly, Haverkamp et al. (2011) examined the professional
identity of counsellors and counselling psychologists and identified several factors
contributing to the lack of distinction between the two groups, including inconsistent role
modelling by faculty, who may themselves identify as either a counsellor or counselling
psychologist, both, or neither. Even at a regulatory level, there is inconsistency across
provinces and territories. For example, in Alberta, counselling and clinical psychology are
combined into one area of practice whereas in Quebec counselling psychology is not
specifically named by the Ordre des Psychologues du Québec (the provincial regulating
body for psychologists in Québec).
Part of the cause for blurred boundaries between counselling and counselling psychology
is likely due to shared aspects of their historical development. Both counselling and
counselling psychology came from similar roots, in education, assessment, vocational
psychology, and the mental hygiene movement (Van Hesteren, 1971). In terms of practice,
counsellors and counselling psychologists engage in therapeutic processes and utilize a
variety of interventions in working with clients.
Many theoretical models that describe counselling and counselling psychology processes
have three general phases. The first phase emphasizes understanding the client’s perception
of their situation and the context in which they are living. This provides a basis for building
a relationship with the client that needs to be maintained and strengthened as the
counselling proceeds. The relationship creates a foundation of trust that allows the client
to begin to consider different perspectives regarding their situation. Depending on the
theoretical orientation of the counsellor or counselling psychologist, these different
perspectives may focus on emotions, cognitions, or behaviours. When the different
perspectives have been sufficiently explored clients may be ready to begin to act on their
problematic situation differently in their everyday work, family, friendship, or personal
situations (Borgen, 1981; Egan, 1975).
Theoretical orientations. Bedi, Christiani, and Cohen (2018) surveyed doctoral students
in counselling psychology about their theoretical orientations and found that an eclectic/
integrative approach was most typical as their primary theory (41.9%), with about half as
many practicing primarily from a humanistic/person-centred approach (20.9%), and the rest
primarily using such theories as cognitive-behavioural, psychodynamic, existential, systems,
emotion-focused, acceptance and commitment, solution-focused, narrative, multicultural,
and feminist. To provide a current foundation for this chapter, we reached out to counsellor
educators who serve as liaisons to the Counsellor Educators Chapter of CCPA, asking them
about the theoretical foundations of their program(s), the setting and types of related work
that their students have been offered post-graduation, work that their alumni are engaged
in 5-10 years post-graduation, and the percentage of masters students moving on to post-
doctoral studies. Regarding theoretical orientations, only 2 of the 11 universities with
counselling and counselling psychology programs responding to the survey indicated that
their programs aligned to a specific theoretical perspective (i.e., 82% were training students
to use diverse theoretical perspectives). However, despite different theoretical foundations,
according to Bedi et al. (2011) there are a number of shared values and the areas of
intervention are remarkably similar, including a focus on client strengths, diversity and
context, and client-centred assessment.
Strengths-based. As already noted, the definitions of counselling and counselling
psychology both focus on the aim to build on strengths and the capacity of individuals to
live satisfying and fulfilling lives. This is reinforced by Bedi et al. (2016) and Goodyear et al.
(2016). In his study, Goodyear and his colleagues found that the most strongly supported
value cluster by counselling psychologists “concerned focusing on clients’ strengths and
assets, attention to issues of diversity, focusing on person–environment interactions, and
maintaining a developmental focus” (p. 129).
Therapeutic alliance. The first phase of the generic counselling process that was briefly
described in an earlier section of this paper – that is paying close attention to clients and
working to understand their perspective on their situations – leads to the development of
a strong and trusting relationship between the client and the counsellor. This strong and
trusting relationship between client and counsellor is often described as the therapeutic
alliance. Several studies over a number of years have demonstrated the therapeutic alliance
as being the single most effective determinant of the counselling intervention that has
been utilized (Bedi et al., 2011; Flückiger, Del Re, Wampold, & Horvath, 2018; Horvath &
Greenberg, 1989).
Multiculturalism and social justice. Early influences on counselling have sometimes
been referred to as the three “forces”: (1) psycho-dynamic, (2) cognitive-behavioural, and
(3) existential-humanistic. More recently, multiculturalism and social justice have been
referred to as the fourth and fifth forces (Ratts & Pedersen, as cited in Gazzola et al.,
2016), indicating the widely accepted importance of these two emerging areas of attention
for counsellors and counselling psychologists. Supporting this, Gazzola and his colleagues
(2016) noted that the codes of ethics and standards of practice for both CCPA and CPA stress
the importance of incorporating diversity and social justice principles into all counselling.
Young and Lalande (2011) observed that:
the increasing diversity in the Canadian population brings a variety of distinct cultures
to Canada and the counselling profession must provide culturally appropriate services
within this context. Counselling psychologists in Canada have the opportunity to
continue to support the Canadian emphasis on equality and freedom for diverse
individuals, working toward social justice by helping the underprivileged within
society to improve their situations. (p. 249)
Although their comments were made within a counselling psychology context, they
certainly apply to counselling in general. Chapters on multicultural counselling (Arthur &
Collins, 2016) and social justice and advocacy (Audet, 2016) provide further evidence of how
seriously these topics are being treated in the current Canadian context.
Interventions. Respondents to Bedi et al.’s (2018) survey of doctoral students in
counselling psychology indicated that most of their time as counsellors (63.3%) comprised
direct counselling/psychotherapy activities, with only a few hours of their weekly time, on
average (10.7%) spent engaging in assessment activities – primarily conducting personality
and intellectual assessments. The bulk of the balance of their time was fairly evenly split
between service to their university or the profession (7.2%) and consultation (6.5%). This
survey also reported that most of the respondents’ work was with individual clients (77.7%),
with considerably less time working with groups (12%), families (6.9%), or couples (3.8%).
When asked about the purpose for their counselling interventions, most acknowledged
that it was primarily remedial or rehabilitative (58.9%), with considerably less time devoted
to developmental (24.5%) or preventative (16.6%) counselling interventions. This seems to
158 Counselling
indicate a shift from earlier areas of counselling focus; Bedi et al. (2011) cited several articles
from the 1980s and early 1990s by counsellor educators including Hiebert and Uhlemann
that highlighted more of a developmental and psychoeducational focus, concluding that
“teaching clients strategies for dealing with life challenges, or to avoid potential future
challenges, is a key role of counselling psychologists” (p. 132).
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN COUNSELLING AND COUNSELLING PSYCHOLOGY
Although there are many similarities between counselling and counselling psychology, it
is important to note that differences do exist, albeit sometimes subtle ones. Gazzola (2016)
noted that:
In the U.S. there is a clear demarcation between counselling psychology (whose home
is Division 17 of the American Psychological Association) and counsellor education
(whose national association is the American Counseling Association). In Canada,
however, the distinction between the two is not as clear-cut, even though counsellors
are likely to join the CCPA and counselling psychologists join the CPA. Most Canadian
counsellor training programs are in fact called counselling psychology and they are
housed in faculties of education. (p. 5)
The distinction between counselling and counselling psychology is further blurred by the
fact that, as already noted, in some provinces in Canada psychologists may be licensed with
a master’s degree, which is the same level of training held by most counsellors.
Given their similarities how do counsellors and counselling psychologists perceive
themselves? Summarizing a previous survey of counsellors conducted by CCPA (then CCA,
Gazzola and Smith (as cited in Gazzola, 2016) wrote,
Counsellors did perceive themselves as having a unique role in society but . . . as a

whole the professional identity of counsellors remained unclear. What they found
was that, typically, (a) counsellors in Canada described themselves as having eclectic
theoretical perspectives, privileging client-centered/humanistic . . . perspectives, (b)
just over 40% had a private practice, (c) about 39% worked in more than one setting,
(d) they tended to engage in a wide variety of professional activities and, (e) although
they were mostly unsatisfied with their income, [they] reported a high degree of career
satisfaction. (p. 4)
Supporting the distinction between counselling and counselling psychology, counselling

psychology programs typically require courses in the cognitive, affective, behavioural, and
social bases of behavior whereas this is not as common of a requirement in counselling
programs. Some counselling psychology programs also provide much more education
and training related to the assessment and diagnosis of psychopathology. When licensed
as psychologists, people with this background may also be granted permission to operate
under a reserved act to diagnose psychopathology. Most counselling psychology programs
also have a strong emphasis on understanding and conducting research. They typically
subscribe to a scientist-practitioner model of education, with the intent that clinical practice
is informed by research evidence (Bedi et al., 2011). Although there is an emphasis on
research in counselling programs that require a thesis, they “oftentimes embrace a scholar-
practitioner training model whereby master’s-level trainees become consumers of research

rather than researchers themselves” (Sinacore & Ginsberg, 2015, pp. 5-6).
EVALUATING EFFECTIVENESS IN COUNSELLING AND COUNSELLING PSYCHOLOGY
Significant work has been done to evaluate efficacy and outcomes associated with
counselling and counselling psychology. For example, Domene, Buchanan, Hiebert, and
Buhr (2015) described the breadth of recent research in Canadian counselling and
counselling psychology, citing published literature supplemented by a 2011 survey of
counsellor educators and counselling psychologists. They reported, “In order, the most
frequently endorsed research foci were in the fields of health and health counselling,
counselling process research, career counselling and development, stress and related
psychological disorders, and qualitative research methods” (p. 16).
Early writers in the area extensively examined what made counselling effective. An
influential pioneer was Dr. Carl Rogers. He suggested that in order for counselling to
be effective, the counsellor must bring genuineness, empathy, and positive regard for the
client (Rogers, 1961). As the professions of counselling and counselling psychology have
evolved, studies focusing on the importance of the therapeutic alliance between the client
and the counsellor have continued to demonstrate the importance of the counsellor in
making counselling and counselling psychology interventions effective. Research continues
to demonstrate that the strength of the therapeutic relationship is important in determining
the effectiveness of counselling and counselling psychology interventions (Flückiger et al.,
2018; Galbraith, 2018).
Another strand that has evolved in studying the effectiveness of counselling and
counselling psychology is the use of specific interventions; the terms evidence-based practice
and evidence-informed practice have come into common use (Galbraith, 2018; Goodheart,
Kazdin, & Sternberg, 2006). The American Psychological Association endorses the
following definition of evidence-based practice: “Evidence-based practice in psychology (EBPP)
is the integration of the best available research with clinical expertise in the context of
patient characteristics, culture, and preferences” (APA Presidential Task Force on Evidence-
Based Practice, 2006, p. 273). These interventions can often be characterized as helping
clients to consider different perspectives on their situations. As noted by Pare and
Sutherland (2016), considerations regarding evidence of effective practice have been guided
by the APA definition. These authors cited the Canadian definition formulated by the CPA
in 2012 which reflects a hierarchy of evidence and encourages psychologists to utilize:
the best possible evidence (evidence which is highest on hierarchy) which includes
findings that are replicated across studies and that have used methodologies that
address threats to validity (e.g., randomized controlled trials to address threats to
internal validity, naturalistic studies to address threats to external validity
[generalizability]). (p. 183)
Regarding research approaches utilized to assess the effectiveness of counselling

psychology, within the Canadian context Hiebert, Domene, and Buchanan (2011) indicated:
As counselling psychology has grown in Canada, it has established a unique identity

and set of practices that distinguish the discipline from other areas of Canadian
160 Counselling
applied psychology, as well as from counselling psychology in the United States (Bedi
et al., 2011). This is particularly evident in the research dimensions of the discipline,
which has embraced a commitment to methodological diversity that accepts both
qualitative and quantitative as legitimate strategies for generating knowledge. This
acceptance of methodological diversity, combined with engagement in research areas
reflecting the full range of psychological development and health may explain why
Canadians have contributed to the counselling psychology literature in many
substantive ways. Despite the concern . . . expressed that there has been a historical
disconnection between research and practice in the discipline (Young & Domene,
2010), recent Canadian innovations in research methods, program evaluation, and the
proposal of a local clinical scientist approach to practice have the potential to promote
a close integration of research and practice. (p. 273)
Scholars including Magnusson and Hiebert (2016) critiqued definitions such as the ones
just provided by APA and CPA as focusing too much on evaluating specific interventions
for isolated defined psychological conditions. They argue that this approach often does not
reflect the complexity of client issues that are brought to counselling and does not encourage
counsellors to become local clinical scientists who evaluate the effectiveness of their practice
on an ongoing basis.
A DIVERSE PROFESSION: COUNSELLORS AND COUNSELLING PSYCHOLOGISTS AT WORK
A common question is “what is the difference between clinical psychology and

counselling?” In Lalande and Hurley’s (2015) foreword to Canadian Counselling and Counselling
Psychology in the 21st Century, Lalande shared that “she used to joke with colleagues that she
could distinguish counselling psychologists from other psychological professionals because
of the smile lines on their faces and their openness in social interactions” (p. xi). In recent
years, several Canadian publications, as cited throughout this chapter, have helped to unpack
and explain the unique culture associated with the counselling profession.
In the survey we conducted with counsellor educators regarding employment status of
students and alumni, responses confirmed what has been previously published (Bedi et al.,
2011; Bedi et al., 2016; Sinacore & Ginsberg, 2015): counsellors and counselling psychologists
work in a wide variety of settings, supporting diverse clients who are facing many types of
life challenges. In short, counselling is not a “one-size-fits-all” profession! In the following
sections, we will introduce some of the settings, client groups, and presenting problems to
offer a flavour of the types of work that counsellors and counselling psychologists engage in.
SETTINGS
Surveys conducted in both the United States and Canada indicate that counselling
psychologists and counsellors work in an expanding range of settings. These include
independent practice, universities, hospitals/clinics, colleges, correctional facilities, public
agencies, corporations, and human services (Bedi et al., 2016; CCPA, 2018b; Haverkamp et
al., 2011). The University of Toronto at Mississauga (2005) compiled an interesting resource
on careers in counselling – although the training mentioned is exclusively in Ontario, the
other information has relevance across Canada.
There are some differences, however, between counselling psychologists and counsellors
in terms of their representation in different settings. Bedi (2016) reported that, for
counselling psychologists, treatment-oriented services comprise 45% of their time, with
developmental services accounting for just over 34% of their time, and only 20% of their time
being devoted to preventative services. Respondents indicated that, by far, most of their
time was spent with individuals; the remainder, on average, was split between couples (10%),
families (7.5%), and groups (4.8%). Although career counselling had been a cornerstone of
the field historically, in recent years less than 8% of the counselling psychologists surveyed
reported this as part of their practice and, of those few, very little of their overall time
was devoted to career counselling or vocational assessment. Also, some of the roles held
by counselling psychologists were different from those typically held by counsellors; some
counselling psychologists reported their primary role as academics (20%) and indicated
secondary roles as consultants (26.3%), teachers/instructors (23.7%), researchers (16.7%), and,
to a lesser extent, supervisors and administrators, alongside their roles as practitioners.
In response to the 2018 survey of Canadian counsellor educators conducted to inform
this chapter, although there was overlap in the types of settings and services for counsellors
and counselling psychologists, the focus for counsellors seemed to be less on treatment.
All respondents mentioned having graduates employed in school settings and most also
indicated graduates in private practice (in some cases, only after several years of supervised
experience). Many graduates were working as counsellors in not-for-profit community
agencies or directly for the government (e.g., in corrections). More than half of the
respondents reported graduates working within university / college counselling centres and
over one-third specifically mentioned addictions. Other work settings identified through
this survey included career and employment centres, mental health centres, health care (e.g.,
hospitals, clinics, and rehabilitation centres), and forensics.
CLIENT GROUPS AND PRESENTING PROBLEMS
Counsellors and counselling psychologists work with children, adolescents, and adults
across the lifespan, individually, and in family and other groups, regarding a range of
issues. Our survey of counsellor educators revealed that their counselling and counselling
psychology graduates are supporting clients with career, addictions, trauma, grief, marital,
abuse, cultural, spiritual, transition, and learning challenges. Issues related to these
problems often involve clients wanting to come to a better understanding of themselves,
and/or how they interact with those around them, in order to live more satisfying and
productive lives. As already stated, counsellors and many counselling psychologists do not
become directly involved in diagnosing psychopathology. However, they do see clients
who have been diagnosed with a psychopathology and have been treated for it, who want
assistance in moving forward with their lives in a positive way. This broad range of
involvement is reflected in the CCPA (2018c) chapters; aside from regional chapters, interest
groups include animal-assisted therapy in counselling, career counselling, counsellor
educators, creative arts in counselling, indigenous circle, spirituality in counselling, private
practitioners, school counsellors, social justice, technology and innovative solutions, and
post-secondary counsellors.
Given the diversity of settings, client groups, and presenting problems, it’s not surprising
that counsellors and counselling psychologists also use a variety of job titles; in one study
162 Counselling
reported on the “Profession” page of the CCPA (2018b) website, counsellors identified more
than 70 different titles!
CAREER PATHS FOR COUNSELLORS AND COUNSELLING PSYCHOLOGISTS
The analogy of many paths in the woods leading to the same destination is very true
for counsellors and counselling psychologists. Some people pursue a straightforward path
of education and work experience that strategically positions them for registration as a
psychologist. Others take a more meandering approach, with twists and turns over a
lifetime of employment. Depending on their geographic location in Canada, some
graduates of master’s programs in counselling or counselling psychology can become
licensed as psychologists; in other regions, graduates from the same or similar programs
could work as counsellors but would need to complete doctoral studies to become
psychologists. Some of those who complete doctoral studies move on to become counsellor
educators. The following stories from Canadian counsellors and counselling psychologists
illustrate some of the unique directions that career paths can take. All names are used with
permission.
My strongest subjects in high school were mathematics, physics, and chemistry.

Because I was a strong student I was often asked by friends to help them with those
subjects. At university I completed a BSc in mathematics, but realized that I was most
interested in work that involved people. This led me to complete a professional year
in teacher education, and to become a high school teacher of mathematics, chemistry,
and physics for 2 years. Through that experience I realized that my real interest was in
how I could effectively communicate with my students, and a colleague suggested that
I should go into counselling. I completed a master’s degree in counselling with a goal
to become a high school career counsellor. I was on leave from my school board and
the job I was given was in a city centre Kindergarten to Grade 9 school. I completed
a lot of professional development to feel more competent in that setting, and it was
there that I learned how to be a counsellor. After 3 years in that job I became aware of
gaps in my knowledge and applied for a doctoral program in counselling psychology.
When I graduated I was hired by a university into a 1-year term position, which was
converted into a full-time tenure track position that I have held ever since.
William Borgen, PhD, CCC, RPsyc
Professor of Counselling Psychology
University of British Columbia
My first awareness of the power of counselling came from my father who, as a military
Chaplain, was often called in the wee hours to support an individual or family in
crisis. Despite a vague notion that I too wanted to help people in some way, when my
high school guidance counsellor suggested that I pursue a degree in Economics based
on my marks, I blithely agreed to his plan. After a year of feeling like a fish out of
water studying Economics, I happened to see a flyer asking for volunteers at a local
drop-in centre serving folks who had a number of life challenges. Despite a complete
lack of qualification, I was hired to work there for the summer – an experience that
changed the trajectory of my career. I switched to a Psychology major and worked
there every summer as I completed my degree. After a Master’s Degree in Educational

Counselling and a post-graduate certificate focused on psychiatric rehabilitation (as it
was called at the time), I worked in community-based mental health for a number of
years. I learned more about the world and myself in those years than I was ever able to
repay, including an awareness of just how thin the veil is between those who are seen
as “successful” and those labelled “at risk” or “broken.” I also saw firsthand the impact
on health when people were given opportunities to work. Believing in the potential of
career development to contribute positively to a significant range of mental health and
life issues, I stayed connected with the Director of the Canadian Career Development
Foundation until I was finally hired. I have been there now, loving every moment of
it, since 1993 and feel enormously blessed to be working in a field that can so vitally
make a difference to individuals, communities, and our world today.
Sareena Hopkins
Executive Director, Canadian Career Development Foundation
Founding Executive Officer, Canadian Council for Career Development
I started my career in human resource (HR) management and business, as HR was

as close as I could get to working with people without having a counselling degree.
I started my undergraduate degree in Psychology as a part-time mature student and
completed it while working full-time in various HR positions. These HR positions
allowed me to deal with workers facing retirement, family, grief and loss, health,
disability, downsizing, workplace safety, and other major life transitions. I needed
more counselling skills to effectively help them, so I did an MA in Counselling
Psychology and became a Canadian Certified Counsellor (CCC). A year after obtaining
my MA, I ended my HR career and did a PhD in Counselling Psychology. Since
completing the PhD and becoming a Registered Psychologist, I have worked as a
clinician in my private practice and in a university counselling centre, as a researcher,
as an academic/Program Director for two counselling psychology master’s programs,
and as a counsellor educator teaching various counselling psychology courses and
providing clinical supervision to master’s and doctoral students.
Lee Butterfield, BA, MA, PhD, CCC, RPsych
I always knew I wanted to do something that “helped” people, so without too much
thought or research I enrolled in a nursing program after high school. Upon
completing my nursing diploma, I focused on a career as an operating nurse.
Unfortunately, this career ended quickly when I discovered I was anaphylactic to latex,
and at a time when nurses with latex allergies were not welcome in a surgical setting.
Rather than “begin again,” I felt reluctantly forced to move to the only area of nursing
with limited latex: psychiatry. To my surprise, however, this “accidental career move”
began a passion for truly listening and caring for people in the midst of mental health
struggles. I never looked back, actively pursuing a Master’s in Counselling, followed
by an interdisciplinary doctorate combining education, nursing, and counselling.
The knowledge I had gained around psychiatric illness, psychopharmacology, and
navigating our complex mental health system was indispensable to my work as a
clinical counsellor and educator of counsellors. So while the road to get here was not
164 Counselling
one I had anticipated, I love my work and I can honestly say I wouldn’t want to be
doing anything else!
Briar Schulz RN, RCC, MA, PhD
I was always interested in helping others from an early age as a peer counsellor, and
even started university in Psychology stemming from that interest. However, I had
a competing career path and joined the Royal Canadian Navy before I finished my
degree. While serving my country, and seeing the world when deployed overseas,
I realized that it was not my only passion. Although I remained with the Naval
Reserve in various leadership positions including commanding 2 warships, I returned
to school to pursue my academic studies. After realizing the need for psychological
support for military members, I decided to complete a MA in Counselling Psychology
and followed it with a PhD in the Centre for Cross Faculty Inquiry in Education
with concentrations in Counselling Psychology and Educational Theory. My research
focused on helping military members transition (including Career), and work through
trauma reactions from their service. I am currently in private practice, instruct in
various universities, and take contracts as a Clinical Counsellor in BC, and a
Provisional Psychologist in Alberta.
Michael Sorsdahl, CD, PhD (Education), R.Psyc, CCC, RCC, GCDF-i
From early childhood, I always liked “helping” and teaching; by adolescence, I was
a member of the junior teacher’s club at school and held volunteer positions as a
camp “counsellor” and director. In university, I graduated with a BEd with double
majors in psychology and special education and was hired by the Canada Employment
Centre to manage an office to support student summer employment. Before summer
ended, I was seconded to the main office as the employment “counsellor” for women
and youth. Although my intent had been to immediately pursue a master’s degree
in counselling, it was 16 years before I was able to return to school. During those
years, I worked primarily in community-based agencies facilitating workshops and
counselling the unemployed, and eventually started my own training and consulting
business. After completing my MA in Counselling Psychology, I was hired to teach
a career management course at a local university and, concurrently, my business was
contracted to provide outplacement services to displaced managers. Soon after, I
began doctoral studies in educational psychology (the closest fit at the university where
I was teaching). After graduating with a PhD, as my business was well established, I
chose not to pursue a tenure-track position; however, I’ve enjoyed consistent contracts
as a counsellor educator within several universities and also served as Associate Dean
for an MA in counselling psychology program.
Roberta Neault, PhD, CCC, CCDP, GCDFi
These stories are just a sampling of the myriad of educational and career pathways
that practicing counsellors and counselling psychologists have taken. As has been already
mentioned, a wide range of occupations claim to involve counselling; the word has come to
mean different things in different occupational contexts. In terms of how we have described
counselling in this chapter, a number of other professionals seek out counsellor training –
physicians, educators, dentists, and lawyers for example. In addition, other professionals
engage in counselling work as we have defined it; examples include psychiatric nurses and
social workers.
In terms of job opportunities in the field, Bedi et al.’s (2016) survey results indicated
that 35% of counselling psychologists who responded would be retiring within the next 5
years; it is likely that this is also the case for counsellors. As counsellors and counselling
psychologists also have many of the personal characteristics and training that are anticipated
to be in demand in the future workplace, prospects seem bright. Pearson (2017), looking
ahead to potential employment in 2030, identified counselling as one of the top 10
occupations most likely to experience increased demand; interestingly, they also listed
psychology as the second highest skill anticipated to be in demand within the United
States, so one might expect Canada to be similar. In their implications section, in an era
of increased automation and artificial intelligence, they recommended developing “skills
that are uniquely human” (Pearson, 2017, p. 8). As counselling and counselling psychology
prepare to leave their adolescence, both seem poised to become very successful adults in the
workforce of the future.
TRAINING PATHS AND LICENSING FOR COUNSELLORS AND COUNSELLING

PSYCHOLOGISTS
This is where the inherent messiness described in the history section becomes very
important. Although the title “psychologist” can only be used by regulated members of
the psychology profession (i.e., it is a reserved title), there are no restrictions on the use
of the title “counsellor.” In this section, we will distinguish between paths to becoming a
counsellor and a psychologist. However, to a certain extent, some of the distinctions are
arbitrary as an individual might begin his or her career as a counsellor and then pursue
advanced education and supervision that will lead to qualification as a psychologist. Further
complicating this are regional differences (i.e., as previously noted, in some provinces, it is
possible to register as a psychologist with a master’s degree; in others, doctoral level training
is required. However, regardless of degree, individuals who want to practice as psychologists
must successfully complete the Examination for Professional Practice in Psychology (EPPP;
PsychPrep, 2017).
Although the primary scope of this chapter is on counsellors with master’s level training
and registered psychologists (with master’s or doctoral degrees, depending on their
province), it seems also important to acknowledge the wide range of certificate, diploma,
and undergraduate degree programs that also result in a job title with “counsellor” in it, or
prepare individuals for relevant work in the field that may, in turn, lead them to further
education and eventual registration as a counsellor or counselling psychologist.
As noted in Bedi et al. (2011) both counselling psychology and counsellor education
programs in Canada are generally located in faculties of education. This fits well with the
developmental and growth-oriented perspectives of both disciplines, and in some cases both
programs are located within the same department.
166 Counselling
UNDERGRADUATE TRAINING
There have been long-standing efforts by the CPA to make doctoral level training required
for psychologists. Similarly, there have been ongoing efforts by the CCPA to require
master’s level training for counsellors. That said, there are a number of colleges as well
as other private and public educational institutions that offer certificates and diplomas
that teach counselling skills and theories. People who complete these programs can call
themselves counsellors; however, they cannot use the protected titles of “counselling
therapist” or “psychotherapist” in areas of the country that are regulated by legislation.
Even when not working in counselling-related roles, graduates of such certificate and
diploma programs, as well as those with undergraduate degrees in psychology, often use
their training to incorporate more effective communication and interpersonal skills into
their other work settings.
GRADUATE TRAINING
Master’s level training in counselling and/or counselling psychology generally prepares

graduates to work as counsellors. In most jurisdictions in Canada, training at a doctoral level
is required to prepare for work as counselling psychologists. However, there are significant
exceptions to this, as noted in the following sections.
Master’s. Applicants to master’s level programs in counselling are typically required
to have completed an undergraduate degree. Applicants most often have completed
undergraduate programs in psychology or education. In many cases, however, applicants
have chosen to change occupational fields in order to become counsellors. To accommodate
these applicants, programs typically designate a number of senior undergraduate
prerequisite courses that must be completed prior to admission. Potential applicants often
enroll in these courses following the completion of their undergraduate degrees. It is
important for potential applicants to access the program’s website and to contact program
advisors to check on prerequisite requirements.
With the support of CCPA, the Council on Accreditation of Counsellor Education
Programs (CACEP) offers accreditation to master’s level programs that meet specific
requirements. Currently master’s programs in counselling at Acadia University, Trinity
Western University, the University of British Columbia, and the University of Victoria are
accredited.
Accredited and non-accredited master’s level counselling programs are offered in Canada
by Canadian and international universities on a full-time or part-time basis; CCPA (2018d)
has a fairly comprehensive list of these graduate programs, available on its website.
Accredited programs are offered using face-to-face or blended (online and on campus)
delivery. Non-accredited programs may offer total online program delivery.
Like programs in counselling psychology, counsellor education programs comprise
research, theory, and practice components. CACEP-accredited programs must be a
minimum of 48 course credits in length (the equivalent of 16 one term courses). Current
core program requirements are: Counselling as a profession, ethical and legal issues,
counselling and consultation processes, group counselling, human development and
learning, diversity, lifestyle and career development, assessment processes, research
methods, and program evaluation. According to Bedi et al. (2012), there is often less focus
on assessment training and practical experience, “particularly as related to diagnosis,

psychopathology, and cognitive functioning” (p. 251), than in clinical psychology programs.
In addition, there are counselling practice requirements that total 500 hours. Given
the changing context in Canada regarding counsellor education, including the expanding
provincial regulation of counselling and psychotherapy practice, the increasing complexity
of client issues being brought to counsellors, the increasing range of diversity in our country,
and the need to recognize and start to effectively address indigenous issues, CCPA has
initiated a review and updating of counselling standards and processes.
In some provinces, graduates of master’s level programs may apply for registration as
a psychologist. Students with this goal in mind need to carefully compare registration
requirements with the courses and practicum/internship components of the programs that
they are considering; additional courses and/or hours of supervision may be required
beyond the requirements for becoming registered as a counsellor.
Many master’s programs are terminal – Haverkamp et al., in 2011, identified 13 master’s
programs and only 5 doctoral programs in counselling psychology, indicating that many
graduates of counselling psychology programs end their formal academic studies at the
master’s level. In our previously introduced survey of Canadian counsellor educators, most
respondents indicated that less than 10% of their master’s program graduates moved on to
doctoral studies – many reporting as few as 2% – 5% advancing to a doctoral level. One
respondent reported that about 1/3 of their students had historically moved on to doctoral
studies; however, that had recently changed due to counselling now being a regulated
profession within that province, creating more opportunities for good work for counsellors
with a master’s degree.
Doctoral. Admission requirements to doctoral programs in counselling psychology
typically involve the completion of a master’s degree in counselling or a closely related
field. In a study by Bedi et al. (2018), of the doctoral students who reported related master’s
degrees, 74.4% were specifically in counselling psychology; others had related degrees in
clinical psychology or counselling/counsellor education or had diverse educational
backgrounds that included graduate education in other areas of psychology, epidemiology,
education, communication studies, gender studies, and medicine. It is important to check
the program’s website and contact advisors within the program to identify required
prerequisite courses that need to be completed prior to admission to the program.
The University of Alberta offered the first doctoral program in counselling psychology
in Canada, beginning in 1956 (Haverkamp et al., 2011). There are currently five doctoral-
level counselling psychology training programs in Canada (McGill University, University of
Alberta, University of British Columbia, University of Calgary, and University of Toronto;
Bedi et al., 2018). All of these programs are accredited by CPA. In terms of the content
of the programs, counselling psychology programs in Canada have adopted the scientist-
practitioner approach, which means that they focus on research and theory as well as
practice. What makes them distinct from a number of other graduate level university
programs is that they require courses that teach and supervise students in clinical skill
acquisition and practice that culminates in completion of a required 1-year internship prior
to graduation. Bedi et al. (2011) also noted:
Although all CPA-accredited programs in professional psychology (i.e., counselling,

school, clinical, clinical neuropsychology) require training in the core areas of
168 Counselling
biological bases of behaviour, cognitive-affective bases of behaviour, social bases of

behaviour, individual behaviour, historical and scientific foundations of psychology,
scientific and professional ethics and standards, research design and methods,
statistics, and psychological measurement, there is between-program variation in how
curriculum requirements are addressed. Courses beyond those needed to meet
minimum accreditation requirements are at the discretion of individual programs,
and training programs have tended to differ in the degree to which they mandate
coursework associated with counselling psychology’s historical roots. (pp. 133-134)
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION
Counselling and counselling psychology are growing unique, but related, professional
identities within Canada. As described in this chapter, they share similar roots, have
significant overlap in training at the master’s level (often housed within the same faculty),
and serve clients of all ages dealing with a wide range of problems in living. Counsellors and
counselling psychologists are working with increasingly complex issues, within a shifting
Canadian context of regulation of the professions and, as discussed, rapidly emerging new
technologies that are already impacting how clients and counsellors connect and interact.
Amidst an overall focus of building cultural competencies to support a broader
conceptualization of diversity, there is also an increased awareness and mandate to inform
therapeutic approaches with Indigenous perspectives and ways of knowing (Fellner, John, &
Cottell, 2016; Stewart & Marshall, 2015).
Not surprisingly given this changing landscape, there is heightened awareness of the
importance of access to clinical supervision throughout a counsellor’s or counselling
psychologist’s professional lifespan – not just during pre-graduation practicum and
internship placements (Fitzpatrick, Cairns, & Overington, 2015; Jevne, Sawatzky, & Paré,
2004; Shepard & Martin, 2016). CCPA (2018e) has initiated certification for supervisors
(Canadian Certified Counsellor-Supervisor, CCC-S), offering relevant training, publishing
a textbook (Shepard, Martin, & Robinson, 2016), and officially changing the name of the
Counsellor Educators Chapter to include supervisors: the Counsellor Educators and
Supervisors Chapter. Further demonstrating commitment to advancing clinical
supervision, CCPA hosted the first Clinical Supervision Symposium in late 2018.
Both counselling and counselling psychology offer diverse and engaging opportunities for
work, career growth, and varied career paths. As regulation of counselling continues within
Canada, there will be more shifts in professional identity, emerging arenas of practice, a
need for ongoing professional development, and, perhaps for some, doctoral studies to
facilitate practice as a psychologist. We encourage counsellors and counselling psychologists
to find one or more professional homes in their local, national, or international associations
to support ongoing professional development, a sense of professional identity, and
opportunities to actively engage in a profession that is rapidly transforming from
adolescence into maturity.
CAREER CONSIDERATIONS FOR COUNSELLORS AND COUNSELLING PSYCHOLOGISTS
1: Look ahead. Do you want to become a counsellor or a counselling psychologist?

Although some of the steps are similar, there are some significant differences to be aware of.
These differences include, but are not limited to, different training requirements and scopes
of practice. It is up to the individual practitioner to thoroughly research educational training
options and career outcomes to choose the practice that best suits their specific career goal.
2: Consider location. In Canada, occupational regulation is a provincial jurisdiction. For
example, there are some provinces where psychologists can be certified with a master’s
degree; in other provinces a doctorate is required. Also, there are several provinces where
counselling is a regulated profession and other provinces where, although it’s not yet
regulated, professional associations offer opportunities for professional but not legislated
certification. For example, the Canadian Counselling and Psychotherapy Association offers
the Canadian Certified Counsellor designation. Regulation of professions involves legal
nuances that can change, and that individuals in these fields are responsible for
understanding and complying with. Whether you plan to become a counsellor or a
psychologist, you will need to check requirements with the regulatory colleges and/or
professional associations within the provinces that you are considering.
3: Explore graduate schools. Master’s and doctoral programs are generally most closely
aligned to the requirements of the provinces they are in, but also have similarities based
on their accreditation (e.g., Council on Accreditation of Counsellor Education Programs
[CACEP]; Canadian Psychological Association accreditation). Ensure that the graduate
program that you are considering will meet the requirements for the province(s) that you
hope to work in and the designation (i.e., counsellor or psychologist) that you hope to
achieve. You might consider connecting directly with your intended regulatory board and/
or professional association to ensure that a program satisfies their requirements prior to
attending.
4: Check prerequisites – well in advance. Each graduate program will specify pre-
requisite courses. Many doctoral programs require a master’s thesis; however, many
master’s-level counselling programs do not have a thesis component. Knowing prerequisites
in advance will help you to make decisions regarding program streams and/or elective
courses that will keep doors open for your preferred next steps. You can investigate these
requirements through using program websites, or connecting directly with the graduate
chair of that department. Programs and entrance requirements can change; it is prudent to
connect directly with your program(s) of interest regarding admission requirements rather
than to rely on past student advice.
5: Confirm admission requirements. Aside from specifying prerequisites, many graduate
programs will have other admission requirements. By exploring graduate schools early, you
can ensure that your grades, volunteer or work experience, letters of reference, and other
admission criteria meet or exceed the requirements and maximize your chances of being
selected. Again, programs and entrance requirements can change; it is prudent to connect
directly with your program(s) of interest regarding admission requirements rather than to
rely on past student advice.
6: Understand employer expectations. There will be regional differences as well as
differences related to areas of specialization and places of employment for both counsellors
and psychologists. Consider the type of work that you’d like to do when you graduate and
ensure that your course work, field training (practicum or internship) hours, supervisors’
qualifications, professional designation, and work experience work together to prepare you
well for work as a counsellor or counselling psychologist. Investigate your desired career
options and clearly identify required qualifications prior to beginning a graduate program.
170 Counselling
Ensure the graduate program that you attend meets your desired career qualification
requirements.
REFERENCES
APA Presidential Task Force on Evidence-Based Practice (2006). Evidence-based practice in

psychology. American Psychologist, 61(4), 271-285. doi: 10.1037/0003-066X.61.4.271
Arthur, N., & Collins, S. (2016). Multicultural counselling in a Canadian context. In N.
Gazzola, M. Buchanan, O. Sutherland, & S. Nuttgens (Eds.), Handbook of counselling and
psychotherapy in Canada (pp. 73-94). Ottawa, ON: CCPA.
Audet, C. (2016). Social justice and advocacy in a Canadian context. In N. Gazzola, M.
Buchanan, O. Sutherland, & S. Nuttgens (Eds.), Handbook of counselling and psychotherapy in
Canada (pp. 95-122). Ottawa, ON: CCPA.
Bedi, R. P. (2016). A descriptive examination of Canadian counselling psychology doctoral
programs. Canadian Psychology, 57, 83-91. doi: https://doi.org/10.1037/cap0000047
Bedi, R. P., Christiani, K., & Cohen, J. (2018). The future of Canadian counselling psychology:
Doctoral students. Counselling Psychology Quarterly, 31(2), 205-222. doi: 10.1080/
09515070.2016.1277977
Bedi, R. P., Haverkamp, B. E., Beatch, R., Cave, D. G., Domene, J. F., Harris, G. E., & Mikhail,
A. (2011). Counselling psychology in a Canadian context: Definition and description.
Canadian Psychology, 52, 128-138. doi: 10.1037/a0023186
Bedi, R. P., Klubben, L. M., & Barker, G. T. (2012). Counselling vs. clinical: A comparison of
psychology doctoral programs in Canada. Canadian Psychology, 53, 238-253. doi: 10.1037/
a0028558.
Bedi, R. P., Sinacore, A., & Christiani, K. D. (2016) Counselling psychology in Canada.
Counselling Psychology Quarterly, 29(2), 150-162. doi: 10.1080/09515070.2015.1128398
Borgen, W. A. (1981). Marketing counselling skills: Implications for counsellor education.
Canadian Counsellor, 15, 93-96.
Canadian Counselling and Psychotherapy Association (2018a). About us. Retrieved from
Canadian Counselling and Psychotherapy website: https://www.ccpa-accp.ca/about-us/
Canadian Counselling and Psychotherapy Association (2018b). The profession and regulation.
Retrieved from Canadian Counselling and Psychotherapy website: https://www.ccpa-
accp.ca/profession/
Canadian Counselling and Psychotherapy Association (2018c). Chapters. Retrieved from
Canadian Counselling and Psychotherapy website: https://www.ccpa-accp.ca/chapters/
Canadian Counselling and Psychotherapy Association (2018d). Canadian graduate programs.
accp.ca/students/graduate-programs/canadian-graduate-programs
Canadian Counselling and Psychotherapy Association (2018e). Supervision certification.
accp.ca/membership/supervisor-certification/
Canadian Psychological Association (2018a). Counselling psychology definition. Retrieved from
https://www.cpa.ca/aboutcpa/cpasections/counsellingpsychology/Counsellingdefinition
Domene, J. F., Buchanan, M. J., Hiebert, B., & Buhr, E. (2015). The present and future of
counselling and counselling psychology research in Canada: A call to action. In A. L.
Sinacore & F. Ginsberg (Eds.), Canadian counselling and counselling psychology in the 21st
century (pp. ix–xii). Montreal, QC, & Kingston, ON: McGill-Queen’s University Press.
Egan, G. (1975). The skilled helper. Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole.
Fellner, K., John, R., & Cottell, S. (2016). Counselling Indigenous peoples in a Canadian
context. In N. Gazzola, M. Buchanan, O. Sutherland, & S. Nuttgens (Eds.), Handbook of
counselling and psychotherapy in Canada (pp. 123-148). Ottawa, ON: CCPA.
Fitzpatrick, M., Cairns, S., & Overington, L. (2015). Training and supervision in counselling
psychology. In A. L. Sinacore & F. Ginsberg (Eds.), Canadian counselling and counselling
psychology in the 21st century (pp. ix–xii). Montreal, QC, & Kingston, ON: McGill-Queen’s
University Press.
Flückiger, C., Del Re, A. C., Wampold, B. E., & Horvath, A. O. (2018). The alliance in
adult psychotherapy: A meta-analytic synthesis. Psychotherapy. Advance online publication.
http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/pst0000172
Galbraith, V. (Ed.). (2018). Counselling psychology. New York: Routledge.
Gazzola, N. (2016). Is there a unique professional identity of counselling in Canada? In N.
Gazzola, M. Buchanan, O. Sutherland, & S. Nuttgens (Eds.), Handbook of counselling and
Gazzola, N., Buchanan, M., Sutherland, O., & Nuttgens S. (Eds.). (2016). Handbook of
counselling and psychotherapy in Canada. Ottawa, ON: CCPA.
Gignac, K., & Gazzola, N. (2018). Embracing counsellor professional identity work:
Experiential accounts of transformation and transition. Canadian Journal of Counselling and
Psychotherapy, 52(3), 205-228. Retrieved from https://cjc-rcc.ucalgary.ca/cjc/index.php/rcc/
article/view/2932
Goodheart, C. D., Kazdin, A. E., & Sternberg, R. J. (Eds.) (2006). Evidence-based psychotherapy:
where practice and research meet. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Goodyear, R. K., Lichtenberg, J. W., Hutman, H., Overland, E., Bedi, R., Christiani, K.,
& Young, C. (2016). A global portrait of counselling psychologists’ characteristics,
perspectives, and professional behaviors. Counselling Psychology Quarterly, 29(2), 115-138.
doi: 10.1080/09515070.2015.1128396
Government of Canada (2018). NOC: Quick search – results. Retrieved from
http://noc.esdc.gc.ca/English/noc/QuickSearch.aspx?ver=16&val65=counsellor
Haverkamp, B. E., Robertson, S. R., Cairns, S. L., & Bedi, R. P. (2011). Professional issues in
Canadian counselling psychology: Identity, education, and professional practice. Canadian
Psychology, 52, 256-264. doi: 10.1037/a0025214.205-222
Health Professions Regulatory Advisory Council (2017). The therapeutic relationship as the
cornerstone of the controlled act of psychotherapy (Vol. 1). Retrieved from Health Professions
Regulatory Advisory Council website: https://www.hprac.org/en/reports/resources/Final-
HPRAC-Psychotherapy-Report-Oct312017_AODA.pdf
Hiebert, B., Domene, J., & Buchanan, M. (2011). The power of multiple methods and
evidence sources: Raising the profile of Canadian Counselling psychology research.
Horvath, A. O., & Greenberg, L. S. (1989). Development and validation of the Working
Alliance Inventory. Journal of Counseling Psychology, 36(2), 223-233. doi: 10.1037/
0022-0167.36.2.223
Jevne, R., Sawatzky, D., & Paré, D. (2004). Seasons of supervision: Reflections on three
decades of supervision in counsellor education. Canadian Journal of Counselling and
172 Counselling
Psychotherapy, 38(3), 142-151. Retrieved from https://cjc-rcc.ucalgary.ca/cjc/index.php/rcc/

article/view/252
Lalande, V., & Hurley, G. (2015). Foreword. In A. L. Sinacore & F. Ginsberg (Eds.), Canadian
counselling and counselling psychology in the 21st century (pp. ix–xii). Montreal, QC, &
Kingston, ON: McGill-Queen’s University Press.
Magnusson, K., & Hiebert, B. (2016). Determining the impact of counselling interventions.
In N. Gazzola, M. Buchanan, O. Sutherland, & S. Nuttgens (Eds.), Handbook of counselling
and psychotherapy in Canada (pp. 227-246). Ottawa, ON: CCPA.
Neault, R. A., Shepard, B. C., Benes, K. E., & Hopkins, S. (2013). Counseling in Canada. In
T. H. Hohenshil, N. E. Amundson, & S. G. Niles (Eds.), Counseling around the world: An
international handbook (pp. 305-314). Alexandria, VA: American Counseling Association.
Paré, O., & Sutherland, O. (2016). Re-thinking best practices: Centring the client in
determining what works in therapy. In N. Gazzola, M. Buchanan, O. Sutherland, & S.
Nuttgens (Eds.), Handbook of counselling and psychotherapy in Canada (pp. 181-202). Ottawa,
ON: CCPA.
Pearson. (2017). Future of skills: Employment in 2030. Retrieved from Pearson website:
https://futureskills.pearson.com/research/assets/pdfs/media-pack.pdf
PsychPrep. (2017). About the EPPP. Retrieved from https://psychprep.com/about-the-eppp/
Robertson, S. E., & Borgen, W. A. (2016). Introduction to the special issue on the history
of counselling in Canada. Canadian Journal of Counselling and Psychotherapy, 50(3), 197-218.
Retrieved from https://cjc-rcc.ucalgary.ca/cjc/index.php/rcc/article/view/2900
Rogers, C. (1961). On becoming a person; a therapist’s view of psychotherapy. Boston: Houghton
Mifflin.
Shepard, B., & Martin, L. (2016). Clinical supervision in counselling and psychotherapy. In
N. Gazzola, M. Buchanan, O. Sutherland, & S. Nuttgens (Eds.), Handbook of counselling and
Shepard, B., Martin, L., & Robinson, B. (Eds.). (2016). Clinical supervision of the Canadian
counselling and psychotherapy profession. Ottawa, ON: CCPA.
Sinacore, A. L., & Ginsberg, F. (Eds.). (2015). Canadian counselling and counselling psychology in
the 21st century. Montreal, QC and Kingston, ON: McGill-Queen’s University Press.
Stewart, S. L., & Marshall, A. (2015). Counselling indigenous people in Canada. In A. L.
Sinacore & F. Ginsberg (Eds.), Canadian counselling and counselling psychology in the 21st
century (pp. 68-89). Montreal, QC, & Kingston, ON: McGill-Queen’s University Press.
University of Toronto at Mississauga (2005). Careers in counselling. Retrieved from University
of Toronto at Mississauga website: https://utm.utoronto.ca/careers/sites/files/careers/
public/shared/pdf/panel_packages/careers-in-counselling.pdf
Van Hesteren, F. N. (1971). Foundations of the guidance movement in Canada (Unpublished
doctoral dissertation). University of Alberta, Edmonton, AB.
Young, R. A., & Domene, J. F. (2010). The construction of agency in career counseling. In M.
McMahon & M. Watson (Eds.). Career counseling and constructivism: Elaboration of constructs.
Hauppage, NY: Nova Science.

Borgen, W. A., & Neault, R. A. (2019). Applications and careers for counsellors and
counselling psychologists. In M. E. Norris (Ed.), The Canadian Handbook for Careers in

applications-and-careers-for-counsellors-and-counselling-psychologists/
[7]
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
Tara K. MacDonald, PhD, Queen’s University
Valerie Wood, PhD, Queen’s University
Erica Refling, PhD, University of Waterloo
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
Social Psychology is the scientific study of how our feelings, our beliefs, and our
behaviours are affected by our social environments. Social Psychologists use scientific
methods to address issues that have profound importance for individuals and societies.
In undergraduate Social Psychology classes, students have the opportunity to learn about
diverse topics such as Interpersonal Perception, Attitudes and Persuasion, Conformity and
Compliance, Romantic Relationships, Aggression, Altruism, Prejudice, and Discrimination.
One of the central themes of Social Psychology is that we are fundamentally motivated
to be accepted by, and liked by, others, and maintain our social relationships with others
(Baumeister & Leary, 1995). Further, our sense of self is comprised not only of our own
unique traits, aptitudes and abilities, but is also based on the social groups to which we
belong at a relational (i.e., our friend groups and families) and communal level (e.g.,
institutions that we belong to, our ethnic and national identities; Tajfel, 1979). These themes
of needing to belong and social identity speak to the social nature of humans and can also
explain why individuals are so very attuned to, and affected by, their social environments.
Indeed, one of the consistently striking (and sometimes surprising) tenets of Social
Psychology is the “Power of the Situation.” For example, key findings in the literature show
that one can engineer a situation where typical, everyday citizens agree to hurt a stranger
if they are asked to do so by a perceived authority figure (Milgram, 1965; 1974); people
will remain in a room that is filling with smoke if there are others in the room who seem
unconcerned about the ostensible fire (Latané & Darley, 1968); or be willing to give what
they know to be the wrong answer on a test if others around them are giving the wrong
answer (Asch, 1955). These highly-cited and well-known findings within Social Psychology
are instructive because they demonstrate the potency of our social environment on our
174
behaviour. However, although the argument for the power of the situation is compelling,
it’s clear that not everyone reacts in the same way to these situations. For example, although
the majority of participants in the Milgram studies agree to administer electric shocks when
directed to do so by an authority, some individuals refuse to administer any shocks at
all. The variability in individuals’ responses to strong contextual demands also speaks to
the important influence of individual differences in determining our behaviour (Funder,
2008). Indeed, our reactions to social situations will vary depending on factors including
personality traits (e.g., agreeableness, extraversion), biological factors (e.g., sex, stress
reactivity), cultural factors (e.g., the country in which we were raised, our religious beliefs),
and other individual differences (e.g., self-esteem, attachment orientation). Further, in
addition to these trait differences, our thoughts, feelings, and behaviour can be powerfully
affected by the transient states such as mood, cognitive fatigue, or whether specific concepts
are cognitively activated at a specific point in time.
In this way, the interactionalist perspective of Social Psychology assesses how these specific
characteristics that we might call person variables (e.g., personality traits, individual
differences, cultural factors, biological factors, and states) interact with (that is, act together
with) situational variables to predict how we will think, feel, and behave. To illustrate,
we will provide a specific example of an interaction of this sort. In an interesting study,
Crocker, Thompson, McGraw, and Ingerman (1987) assessed whether self-esteem (a trait, or
individual difference variable) interacts with group status (a situational variable) to predict
in-group favouritism (a tendency to evaluate members of one’s own group positively, and
derogate members of an outgroup). They predicted that the effect of group status on the
tendency to derogate outgroup members would be especially pronounced for individuals
high in self-esteem, relative to those low in self-esteem. Sorority sisters at a large University
in the Unites States agreed to participate in the study. In pilot testing, different sororities
were rated as being high or low in prestige (status). Approximately half of the participants
were from sororities that were rated as low in status, and about half of the participants were
from sororities that were rated as high in status. Participants were asked to complete a series
of measures including the Rosenberg Self-Esteem Scale (Rosenberg, 1965). They were also
asked to rank “typical members” of each of six sororities (including their own sororities) on
a number of positive attributes (e.g., attractive, friendly, talented) or negative (e.g., arrogant,
boring, unintelligent). For the positive items, the authors found that sorority sisters high in
self-esteem were more likely to show ingroup favouritism (that is, assign higher scores on
the positive traits for a typical member of their own sorority, relative to typical members
of other sororities). There was no effect of group status, and no interaction between self-
esteem and group status.
For the negative items, however, a score of ingroup favouritism was derived by subtracting
the mean value of negative trait ratings for a typical member of one’s own sorority from
the mean value of the negative trait ratings for a typical member of other sororities. In
this way, the measure of ingroup favouritism for negative traits meant that participants
rated members of other sororities more negatively than they rated members of their own
sororities. Crocker and her colleagues found an interaction between self-esteem and group
status, such that among those with low self-esteem, there was no difference between those
from high or low-status sororities in terms of how much ingroup favouritism they
exhibited. Among those with high self-esteem, however, those from low-status groups were
more likely to exhibit ingroup favouritism than those from high status groups. The authors
176 Social Psychology
state that individuals high in self-esteem may be more likely than their low self-esteem
counterparts to react to threat by derogating outgroup members in an effort to maintain
their own self-esteem (which is consistent with Social Identity Theory, Tajfel & Turner,
1986).
Here, we can see that a behaviour (ingroup favouritism) is dependent on both person
variables (in this case, self-esteem, which is a trait) and situational variables (in this case,
group status). An interaction is present, such that the relationship between one variable
(group status) and the outcome (ingroup favouritism) is dependent on another variable (self-
esteem). Put another way, the results of the study show that the answer to the question “does
ingroup favouritism vary as a function of group status?” is “it depends.” It depends on self-
esteem: If one is low in self-esteem, then there is no evidence for a relationship between
group status and amount of in-group favouritism. However, if one is high in self-esteem,
then those from low status groups are more likely to exhibit in-group favouritism than those
in high-status groups (see Figure 7.1, below). This example illustrates the way that Social
Psychologists can assess research questions by testing interactions between person variables
and situational variables, thereby allowing them to understand how different factors
combine in complex ways to influence our affect, cognition, and behaviour.
Figure 7.1: Interaction: Ingroup favouritism among sorority members s a function of self-esteem and group status; negative
items (from Crocker et al., 1987)
METHODS IN SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
Social Psychologists use scientific methods to assess their hypotheses. While a complete
review of methodology within Social Psychology would be beyond the scope of this chapter,
we will introduce you to some of the primary distinctions among different methodologies
used in Social Psychology.
One of the advantages of receiving an undergraduate education in Psychology is that

students gain insight into the logic underlying research methodology. There is no “recipe”
or step-by-step manual that will allow researchers to conduct a valid study. Instead, research
methodology entails a series of decisions, and with every decision there will be some
advantages and some disadvantages associated with that decision. Learning about research
methodology helps students to understand the implications of these decisions, and how
those implications will affect the conclusions that they can draw from their studies.
Obviously, this is essential training for students who wish to go on to be scientists and
conduct their own research. We argue, however, that an education in research methodology
is important and beneficial for all students—for everyone will go on to be a consumer of
information. In our everyday lives, we seek information from science. For example, if
a family member is diagnosed with a medical condition, it is very common for people
to turn to the internet to find out more about that condition. At times, the information
can seem confusing or even contradictory. Having a solid grasp of research methodology
will help individuals to assess and evaluate scientific research, allowing them to understand
the implications of the research decisions that scientists made, which in turn provides a
basis to make an informed decision about the validity of the claims reported, and the
generalizability of the research to different contexts and populations.
Measurement
In all research, scientists need to measure the variables of interest in their study. The
measurement of some variables is relatively straightforward. For example, if one wishes to
assess how tall a person is, one would measure the person and record the person’s height
in inches or centimetres. In Social Psychology, however, many of the variables we study
are psychological constructs that are not directly observable. For example, people will likely
agree that traits such as shyness, self-esteem, and intelligence vary amongst individuals (i.e.,
some people have high self-esteem, others feel more negatively toward the self) that affect
our thoughts and behaviour. However, these constructs are not directly or readily apparent,
and so researchers must find a way to measure these variables. There are a number of ways
to do so. Very briefly, researchers can create a survey or measure to capture these traits
(e.g., in 1965 Rosenberg created a 10-item scale to measure self-esteem that is still widely
used today). In many cases, such self-report measures are appropriate to use. However,
self-report measures can be biased (i.e., people may not want to accurately report their
true beliefs, feelings, or behaviour). For example, if a researcher was interested in assessing
attitudes and toward academic integrity, and asked the question “Have you ever copied
someone else’s work on a test or assignment?” students who have cheated in this way be
reticent to admit it, either to avoid being viewed negatively by the researchers, or because
they do not want to acknowledge this negative behaviour. This is sometimes called the
“Social Desirability Bias.” Further, sometimes people may not be able to answer a self-report
question because they simply lack access to the “true” answer. For example, if a student were
asked. “What made you decide to study Psychology?” that person may be able to come up
with answers that are true in the sense that they are credible reasons that the student believes
influenced the decision, but that student may lack access to other factors that could have led
to his or her decision to study Psychology (see Nisbett & Wilson, 1977).
If researchers choose not to employ self-report measures, there are a number of tools
at their disposal. First, they can choose to directly assess behaviour, or assess a variable
that can serve as a proxy for behaviour. For example, if a researcher was interested in
assessing condom use behaviour as a dependent variable, the researcher could choose to
assess intentions to use condoms with a self-report question (e.g., “I intend to use condoms
the next time that I engage in sexual intercourse”). If the researcher was concerned about
the social desirability bias, that person could choose to employ a behavioural measure. Of
course, it would be impractical (not to mention unethical!) to assess condom use behaviour
in the lab. Instead, researchers can choose a proxy for behaviour. For example, Stone
and colleagues tested whether inducing hypocrisy (asking participants to publicly stating
reasons why condom use is important, and then prompting them to recall instances in the
past when they did not use a condom) led to greater condom use than a control condition
(who neither publicly stated reasons to use condoms or recalled instances where they did
not use condoms), a publicly stating reasons to use condoms only condition, or a recalling
instances where they did not use condoms only conditions (Stone, Aronson, Crain, Winslow,
& Fried, 1994). For their dependent measure, they assessed condom purchasing behaviour:
All participants were paid $4.00 for completing the study, and were given the opportunity to
buy condoms for 10 cents each (i.e., participants could choose to spend their earnings to buy
condoms). Specifically, 140 condoms were placed in a large glass bowl and there was a plate
with dimes in it so that students could “make change” if necessary. Importantly, participants
were left alone in the room so that they would have privacy while they purchased the
condoms. Consistent with predictions, participants in the hypocrisy condition were more
likely to purchase condoms than participants in the other three conditions (control
condition, stating reasons to use condoms condition, or recalling past instances where
condoms were not used condition). Here, condom purchasing behaviour was used as a
proxy variable for condom use behaviour.
In addition to self-report and behavioural/behavioural proxy measures, researchers can
use measures that can make inferences about participants’ cognitive processes. Many of
these tasks operate under the assumption that if a concept or construct is accessible, we will
be faster to recognize that concept, relative to when it is not primed. For example, in the
lexical decision task (Meyer & Schvaneveldt, 1971), participants are presented with words on a
computer screen (e.g., apple, fight) and non-words (e.g., lopat, gern), and are simply asked to
classify them as words or non-words by pressing keys on the keyboard. Their reaction times
to make these classifications are recorded (in milliseconds). The logic of the lexical decision
task is if participants are “primed” with a concept, they should be faster to recognize words
related to that concept than words that are unrelated to that concept. As a simple example,
if participants are thinking about aggression, they should be faster to recognize the word
“fight” than the word “apple.”
Social Psychologists can use other techniques that employ reaction time data to make
inferences about whether individuals hold positive or negative attitudes toward an attitude
object using techniques such as the Associative Priming task (APT; Fazio, Jackson, Dunton,
& Williams, 1995), the Implicit Attitudes Test (IAT: Greenwald, McGhee, & Schwartz, 1998),
and the Affect Misattribution Procedure (AMP: Payne, Cheng, Govorun, & Stewart, 2005).
The APT involves showing target images (photos or words) preceding exposure to positively
or negatively valenced words. Participants then judge if the word presented was positive or
negative. Response times are recorded, with the assumption that responses will be faster if
the image and the word were affectively congruent and slower if the target and the words
are affectively incongruent. The IAT assesses relative associations between the pairing of a
target (in this case, the partner) with positively and negatively valenced words and images,
with the logic that if individuals hold a positive attitude toward a target, response speed
should be facilitated when the target is associated with positive stimuli, and impeded when
the target is associated with negative stimuli. The AMP assesses attitudes toward a target by
briefly exposing participants to the target (photos or words) before exposure to ambiguous
stimuli (e.g., Chinese characters for non-Chinese readers). Later, participants evaluate the
ambiguous stimuli. It has been demonstrated that participants’ attitudes toward the target
will be misattributed to the ambiguous stimuli that were paired with the target, such that
ratings of these ambiguous stimuli are influenced by their evaluation of the target object.
Sometimes, Social Psychologists are interested in assessing participants’ physiological or
neurological reactions to their environment. Put briefly, such measures can be relatively
simple such as measuring heart rate or they can require laboratory analysis (e.g., assessing
salivary cortisol levels) or complex technology (e.g., neuroimaging techniques such as
electroencephalography (EEG, a technique that measures electrical activity in the brain) or
functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI, a technique that measures changes in blood
flow in the brain).
In general, Social Psychologists often use questionnaires or surveys to assess their
constructs of interest. However, the answers participants provide on these explicit, self-
report assessments are quite deliberative, and may reflect what the participant believes to be
true at a reasoned, conscious level. Further, through the filters of self-report, one’s answers
may also reflect biases. For this reason, Social Psychologists can use other measures such as
behaviour, proxies for behaviour, cognitive, or physiological measures as assessment tools.
Research Design
Although there are number of ways that one can classify research designs, we will focus
on two main types of research methodology that are used in Social Psychology: Non-
experimental and experimental research. Non-experimental research seeks to examine
whether two (or more) variables are related. Here, variables are measured, and researchers
assess the degree of relationship among the variables. For example, if two measures are
positively correlated (e.g., higher scores on one variable are associated with higher scores on
the other variable), we know that the measures covary such that as one increases, the other
increases (e.g., higher self-esteem scores are associated with higher scores of optimism). In
contrast, if two measures are negatively correlated, (e.g., higher scores on one variable are
associated with lower scores on the other variable), we know that the measures covary such
that as one increases, the other decreases (e.g., higher self-esteem scores are associated with
lower scores on a depression inventory).
It is important to recognize, however, that in a non-experimental design, a correlation
does not necessarily imply causation. Let’s consider, for example, the correlation between
playing violent video games (or violent online games) and aggression (see Anderson et al.,
2010, for a review of this literature). An example of a non-experimental study might be
to recruit a sample of children measure the frequency with which participants play violent
video games (either through self-report measures, or programs that track computer activity)
as the predictor variable, and measuring aggressive behaviour (for example, through asking
teachers or parents to complete measures of aggressive behaviour exhibited by the children)
as the outcome variable. In this type of study, both variables (violent video game playing
and aggression) are measured, and then researchers use statistics to assess the direction
(positive or negative) and the magnitude (strength) of the statistical association between
these two variables. Generally, in studies assessing violent video game playing and
aggression, researchers find a positive correlation, indicating that the more violent video
games that children play, the more likely they are to exhibit aggressive behaviour (Anderson
et al., 2010).
What does a positive correlation tell us about the nature of the relationship between
playing violent video games and aggression? It may seem that this tells us that playing
violent video games causes aggression in children. This may be true, but importantly there
are other plausible ways to interpret this relationship. It could also be true that children
who are aggressive are more likely to choose to play violent video games than those who
are less aggressive. This is another type of causal explanation, but posits that the causality
is the other direction (aggressive tendencies lead to greater violent video games). Further,
it could be a bi-directional relationship, where both types of causality are true (kids who
play violent video games become more aggressive, and kids who are aggressive are more
likely to play violent video games). Another possibility is that there is no causal relationship
between violent video games and aggression, but that both are linked to a third variable
(i.e., the relationship between playing violent video games and aggression is spurious). For
example, it could be that compared to children who are more engaged in social activities,
those who spend more time alone are more likely to play violent video games, and more
likely to engage in aggressive behaviours. If the design of the study is non-experimental
(again, this means that the variables are measured, and the researcher assesses the direction
and magnitude of the association between the variables), one cannot know whether (a)
playing violent video games causes more aggression, (b) kids with aggressive tendencies
choose to play violent video games, (c) both causal directions are true, or (d) there is no
causal relationship in either direction, but both violent video game playing and aggression
are associated with another variable. Students with an education in methodology are trained
to evaluate whether the design of a study is non-experimental, and recognize that causality
cannot necessarily be inferred.
In experimental research, the goal is typically to identify a causal relationship.
Researchers manipulate the independent variable (the presumed causal variable), while
holding everything else constant to see if it exerts a change on the dependent variable
(the outcome variable). For example, a researcher could select a sample of students from
a larger population (e.g., a group of Introductory Psychology students at a University) and
recruit them to participate in an experiment. Participants would then be assigned to an
experimental condition that allows the researcher to isolate and manipulate the independent
variable of interest (in this case, playing violent video games). In this experiment, the
researcher might choose to manipulate the independent variable by asking half of the
participants play a violent video game, and the other half of the participants to play a
non-violent video game. In an experiment, the researcher would be sure to isolate the
independent variable by manipulating only the type of video game (violent or non-violent),
while holding everything else constant (e.g., all participants would play in the same room,
be greeted by the experimenter in the same way, play the video game for the same amount
of time). To be sure that it is truly type of video game (and not anything else) that exerts a
difference in the dependent variable, the researcher needs to ensure that the only difference
between the violent video game condition and the non-violent video game condition is the
type of game played.
A second critical feature of experiments is that participants are randomly assigned to
condition. Indeed, in our hypothetical experiment, if we gave participants a choice about
which game they wished to play, it could be that those who choose to play the violent game
are more aggressive than those who choose to play the non-violent game, which would
make it impossible to tell whether playing the video game caused differences between the
groups, or the groups varied on some other dimension that caused differences between
the groups. Instead, through random assignment (where participants are randomly put in
one of the two conditions, using a random numbers generator, or some other technique
such as flipping a coin to determine which condition the participant will be assigned to),
researchers can assume that at the outset of the experiment (i.e., before the manipulation
of the independent variable, in this case the type of video game played), the two groups of
participants were comparable on all dimensions prior to the experimental manipulation (in
this case, playing a violent or non-violent video games), so any difference in the dependent
variable observed after the manipulation can be attributed to the independent variable.
That is, if we randomly assign students to condition, we can assume that they are
comparable on all aspects (including tendency toward aggression) at the start of the
experiment. Then, if we manipulate what type of video game they play (half of our sample
is randomly assigned to play violent video games, and half of our sample is randomly
assigned to play non-violent video games) and hold everything else constant, and we find
a difference in our dependent variable, then we can infer that playing violent versus non-
violent video games causes an increase in aggressiveness.
In this hypothetical study, the researchers would choose a dependent variable that would
measure aggressive behaviour. Here, researchers are faced with an interesting challenge:
They need to choose an outcome that is a valid operationalization of aggression that can be
measured in a realistic and ethical way. Researchers can use self-report measures (such as
the Conflict Tactics Scale, Straus, 1979), or scenario completion measures, where participants
read about a hypothetical situation and are asked what they would do if faced with that
scenario. These types of self-report measures are well-suited for some types of dependent
measures, but as discussed above, in the case of aggression, people may be unwilling to
say that they would respond with aggression because of the social desirability bias. Instead,
researchers may choose to engineer a social situation in the laboratory that allows for
the assessment of aggressive behaviour (for reviews see DeWall et al., 2013; McCarthy &
Elson, 2018). Social psychologists studying aggression have employed techniques including
administering (fake) electric shocks to a partner (e.g., Berkowitz & LePage, 1967; Taylor,
1967), administering blasts of loud noise to a partner (e.g., Anderson & Dill, 2000; Bushman
& Baumeister, 1998), choosing how long a partner must hold their hand in a tub of very
cold water (e.g., Pederson, Vasquez, Bartholow, Grosvenor, & Truong, 2014), choosing the
difficulty level of yoga poses a partner must hold and the amount of time in these poses
(e.g., Finkel, DeWall, Slotter, Oakten, & Foshee, 2009), choosing how much hot sauce to
put on mashed potatoes that a partner must eat (e.g., Lieberman, Solomon, Greenberg, &
McGregor, 1999; Warburton, Williams, & Cairns, 2006), or counting the number of pins
that participants stick in a doll that represents a partner (e.g., Voodoo doll task, Slotter et
al., 2012). Some of these tasks might seem far-fetched at first glance, but many have been
demonstrated to be valid and reliable measures of aggression; for example, DeWall and
colleagues (2013) conducted nine studies demonstrating that the Voodoo doll task correlates
with measures of trait aggression, self-reported history of aggression, other accepted
laboratory measures of aggressiveness such as administering louder and more prolonged
blast of noise, and is reasonably consistent over time. Thus, DeWall and colleagues have
used scientific method to demonstrate the validity of using this task to measure aggression.
To review, we have focused on how two principles of experimentation, isolation and
manipulation of an independent variable and random assignment of participants to experimental
condition, allow researchers to determine whether one variable (the independent variable)
causes a change in an outcome variable (the dependent variable). It is important to note that
finding that a variable causes a change in the dependent variable does not necessarily imply
that reverse causality is not true as well. It could be that the causal direction works in both
ways. Further, even if researchers do show that one independent variable causes a change in
the dependent variable, it is important to note that this does not imply that the independent
is the only cause of the dependent variable—there may be many potential variables that can
cause a change in the dependent variable.
We have also commented on the challenges posed to researchers as they seek to measure
constructs that cannot be directly observed, and as they attempt to manipulate variables
in the laboratory. Some variables cannot be experimentally manipulated, because it would
not be possible to manipulate the construct of interest. For example, if a researcher is
interested in assessing a trait variable such as extraversion as a predictor variable, it is not
possible to randomly assign people to be high or low in extraversion. Further, if a researcher
is interested in assessing whether the individuals with siblings are more communicative
than only children, one cannot randomly assign people to the sibling or non-sibling
conditions—we either have siblings or we don’t. In other cases, it isn’t ethical to randomly
assign people to condition; for example, there are many restrictions in place about
administering potentially harmful substances to participants (e.g., some universities do
not allow any study involving the administration of alcohol, those that do allow it have
procedures and restrictions in place to ensure that the administration is safe). When it is
impossible or unethical to manipulate an independent variable, social psychologists rely on
non-experimental research, but are careful not to draw conclusions about causality.
Students of Social Psychology often enjoy learning about the clever and creative ways
that researchers operationalize very dynamic “real-world” experiences in a way that can be
concretely and ethically manipulated in the laboratory. As just one example, psychologists
have conducted research assessing the profound ways that experiences of ostracism and
social rejection affect our mental and physical health (for reviews, see Williams, 2001;
DeWall & Bushman, 2011). Most people would agree that empirically studying the effects of
social rejection on outcomes is a worthwhile goal. However, how can Social Psychologists
manipulate rejection in a way that is (a) powerful enough to simulate the experience of
rejection in the “real world” and (b) ethical, so that participants are treated with respect
and there is no lasting harm? Researchers have developed a number of clever paradigms
to manipulate rejection, so that participants can be randomly assigned to a rejection or
non-rejection condition, allowing researchers to assess the extent to which rejection exerts
a change in the dependent variable. In one commonly employed paradigm called
“Cyberball” (Williams, Cheung, & Choi, 2000; Williams & Jarvis, 2006 ), participants are led
to believe that they are playing an online game of “catch” with two other participants who
are represented by avatars. Participants are told that when they receive the ball, they can
choose who to “throw” it to by clicking on the avatar of the intended ball recipient. In reality,
they are not actually playing with real people, but are interacting with a computer program.
In the non-rejection condition, participants receive and throw the ball approximately one-
third of the time, so they receive equal time with the ball, relative to the other two
(computer-generated) “players”. In the rejection condition, however, participants initially
receive the ball, but over time, the other two “players” start to exclude the participant from
the game, tossing the ball only to each other, thereby ignoring the participant. Interestingly,
idea of the Cyberball paradigm originated with an actual experience that the creator of the
paradigm, Kip Williams, had when he started playing Frisbee with two strangers, but then
was excluded from the game. At first glance, one might assume that any rejection that one
might experience by being excluded by two strangers during an online ball-toss game would
be so mild as to be inconsequential. However, the experience of exclusion and rejection
in the Cyberball paradigm is quite powerful, and there is evidence showing that relative
to the non-rejected Cyberball condition, those in the rejection condition exhibit outcomes
such as lower levels of self-esteem, more negative mood states, poorer performance on a
cognitive task, greater susceptibility to social influence techniques, and more aggression (for
reviews, see Gerber & Wheeler, 2009; Hartgerink, van Beest, Wicherts, & Williams, 2015).
This provides an example of a powerful, “real world” phenomenon (rejection and ostracism)
that can has been distilled to an experimental manipulation that can be readily employed
in the lab (participants can be randomly assigned to condition). Although the short-term
effects of Cyberball are impactful, it is an ethical design to use, as the participants can be
easily debriefed (informed of the purpose of the study, and any deception that occurred
during the study) and told that they were not actually being excluded.
APPLICATIONS OF SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
One of the reasons that the scientific study is so appealing and exciting is that what
students learn is so readily applicable to their own lives. Students of Social Psychology
gain insight into processes and factors affecting our thoughts, feelings, and behaviour. It
is intriguing and instructive to learn about why we systematically (and repeatedly!) make
errors in our judgments, attributions, and predictions (how many times do we
underestimate how long it will take us to complete a task such as writing an essay?) (Buehler,
Griffin, & Ross, 1994). Students can usually relate to examples of how they have been
influenced by compliance techniques (Cialdini, 2009), such as the scarcity principle, which is
when items seem more valuable when they are viewed as rare or hard to get (e.g., becoming
more interested in purchasing a product when told “Act now, they are selling out fast!”).
Further, social psychology can often provide students with theoretical frameworks that
give insight to their own social behaviours. For example, learning about adult attachment
orientations (see Hazan & Shaver, 1987; Mikulincer & Shaver, 2012) can help students to
understand their own tendencies to react in specific ways within the context of their
romantic relationships, and potentially use this increased understanding to improve their
own relationships (e.g., understanding how attachment can influence conflict behaviour
can help students recognize problematic patterns and respond more constructively when
conflict arises). Finally, there is some research assessing the effects of “enlightenment” on
future behaviour; meaning that learning about findings in Social Psychology can influence
how we react to situations in our daily lives. For example, there is evidence to suggest
that learning about the Milgram obedience study can lead to greater cognitive moral
development among university students (Sheppard & Young, 2007).
Social Psychology is also very useful in its application to society. Much of the basic
research that is conducted can have practical benefits. For example, if scientists understand
factors that predict a pattern of behaviour, and the identify the mechanisms underlying
the relationship between predictors and outcomes, this knowledge can be applied to help
encourage positive behaviours (e.g., increasing the efficacy of campaigns designed to
encourage people to vote, volunteer, recycle, or exercise) and prevent harmful behaviours
(e.g., reduce the likelihood of workplace aggression, bystander apathy, drinking and driving,
or academic dishonesty). Social Psychology can be applied to a variety of contexts including
the workplace (e.g., what variables predict employee commitment to their organization?),
the classroom (e.g., how can teachers motivate students to persevere when they face
challenges?), sports and athletics (e.g., when is a team most likely to exhibit the ‘home-field
advantage?), and the military and government (i.e., what types of leadership is most effective
in different contexts?). Again, a thorough review of all of the possible applications of social
psychology would be beyond the scope of this chapter, but we will provide you with some
illustrative examples (see also Gruman, Schneider, & Coutts, 2016; Myers, Spencer, & Jordan,
2018).
Social Psychology and Health
There are many ways that Social Psychological principles can be applied to health
behaviours. For example, understanding persuasion and social influence can be applied
to helping public health associations frame their messages so that their campaigns will be
effective in encouraging healthy behaviours. This type of “Social Marketing” expertise is
used to apply principles of persuasion and compliance in a way that will benefit individuals
and society. For example, researchers have studied individual difference and contextual
variables that influence the efficacy of framing a health behaviour in a way that emphasizes
promotion (e.g., “eating fruits and vegetables can help maintain good health”) or prevention
(e.g., eating fruits and vegetables can help prevent various types of cancers”; see Rothman &
Salovey, 1997).
Further, many widely applied theories in Health Psychology are based on core findings
in Social Psychology. For example, the Theory of Planned Behaviour (Ajzen, 1991) is a
theoretical model that can be used to predict a variety of behaviours, including health
behaviours. It states that one’s behavioural beliefs (whether we think our behaviours will
produce certain outcomes, and our evaluation of those outcomes), subjective norms
(whether we think that other will approve or disapprove of our behaviour, and our
motivation to comply with their preferences), and perceived behavioural control (whether
we think it is likely that we will be able to enact the behaviour) combine to form our
intentions. Our intentions then predict our behaviour. This theory is readily applied to
decisions to engage in a wide range of health behaviours, such as starting an exercise
program, quitting smoking, or eating a more healthy diet. The Theory of Planned
Behaviour also speaks to social influences on our decision-making, by positing that
subjective norms are one of the three primary factors that influence our intentions to engage
in behaviours.
Other researchers have applied Social Psychological principles to factors that promote
mental health. Students of Social Psychology often find it amusing when they learn about
biases, or “Positive Illusions” that individuals tend to hold about themselves (Taylor &
Brown, 1988; Taylor, 1991). Indeed, researchers have established that non-depressed
individuals make systematic errors when they make judgments about themselves. For
example, individuals tend to rate themselves more positively than most other people would
rate them (e.g., most people think that they are a better than average driver), they
overestimate the degree of control they have over their environments, and they make
unrealistically optimistic predictions about their futures (e.g., long it will take them to
complete tasks, how long their romantic relationships will endure). Taylor and her
colleagues have shown that these “illusions”—these consistent errors in judgment that we
make about ourselves and our daily lives—are correlated with greater self-esteem, well-
being, and health. In contrast, being realistic about our standing on various attributes or
our chances of success is sometimes referred to as “depressive realism” (Alloy & Abramson,
1979).
Other Social Psychologists have investigated the extent to which health is associated with
the presence of, and quality of, our close relationships. There is much evidence to support
the hypothesis that people who feel connected to others and report high levels of satisfaction
with their close relationships are likely to enjoy better mental health, better physical health,
and longer lives (House, Landis, & Umberson, 1988). Interestingly, relative to those who have
close and rewarding relationships with others, those who are lonely or isolated are more
likely to exhibit poorer self-reported health (Fees, Martin, & Poon, 1999), increased risk of
heart attack (Case, Moss, Case, McDermott, & Eberly, 1992), worse blood pressure regulation
(Uchino, Cacioppo, & Kiecolt-Glaser., 1996), poor sleep efficiency (Cacioppo et al., 2002),
worse cardiovascular functioning (Hawkley, Burleson, Berntson, & Cacioppo, 2003), and
worse immune functioning (Kiecolt-Glaser et al., 1984). As an illustrative example, Pressman
and colleagues (2005) invited 83 healthy first-year university students to participate in a
study. They completed a variety of self-report measures to assess loneliness, depression,
neuroticism, and health behaviours. They were also given a flu shot. The mechanism
behind a flu shot is that a dormant version of the virus is injected, and in response, the
immune system “kicks in” and produces antibodies, which will then be in place should a
person contract the flu virus. Individuals with more healthy immune systems produce more
antibodies in response to a vaccine than those with less optimal immune functioning. To
test immune function, participants returned to the lab 1 month and 4 months after receiving
their flu shot, and their blood was tested for flu antibodies. There was a negative correlation
between loneliness and antibodies present in the blood, such those who reported more
loneliness had fewer flu antibodies relative to those who were less lonely. Interestingly, the
correlation between loneliness and flu antibodies was still evident after controlling for the
effects of depression, health behaviours and neuroticism. Studies such as these demonstrate
the importance of social relationships for not just our mental health, but our physical health
as well. Further, social and health psychologists have worked to identify the mechanisms
underlying the association between satisfying relationships and physical health.
Social Psychology and the Legal System
Social Psychology can be readily applied to many aspects of the legal system. First,
many cases are often tried by jury. A jury is a group of citizens tasked with reviewing
evidence presented by both the prosecution and the defense team, and deciding whether
a defendant is guilty. Many times, the jurors do not initially agree on a verdict, but after
deliberation, about 95% of juries agree (Kalven & Zeisel, 1966). Social psychologists study
relevant concepts such as majority influence (a common phenomenon when a numerical
majority can persuade a numerical minority) and minority influence (a less common
phenomenon such that when specific conditions are met, a numerical minority can
persuade a numerical majority). Indeed, the classic movie “12 Angry Men” (Fonda, Justin,
Rose, & Lumet, 1957 , a movie which depicts a lone juror eventually persuading his 11
fellow jury members to reconsider their initial decision) is often shown in classes as a
demonstration of the processes underlying minority influence.
Eyewitness testimony is when people who witnessed an event describe what they
remember, and this is presented as evidence to the court. Social psychologists study
processes such as how our attitudes and expectations can influence what we notice about an
event, how we interpret an event, and what we remember about an event. There are many
factors that can cause individuals to make errors at each step in this sequence (attention,
encoding, and retrieval), and psychologists have studied factors that influence the veracity
of eyewitness testimony. Interestingly, the cues that jurors use to make decisions about
the credibility of eyewitnesses are sometimes unrelated, or even inversely related, to their
accuracy. For example, Wells and Leippe (1981) found that jurors deem witnesses who can
provide extensive details of background variables of the crime scene to be more credible
than witnesses less able to provide such descriptions. However, in reality, witnesses who can
describe background details have been found to be less accurate at identifying a perpetrator
than those who cannot recall background details.
Social Psychology and the Workplace
Social Psychology is closely related to Industrial-Organizational Psychology, which is a

field where researchers study workplace behaviour. Principles of Social Psychology can
be applied to benefit the organization (e.g., assessing factors associated with increased
productivity, efficiency, and employee commitment and loyalty) and the employees (e.g.,
assessing factors associated with workplace satisfaction, group morale, and the physical and
mental health of employees). Further, the study of personality and individual differences
can be applied to employee recruitment and personnel selection.
Many workplaces involve working collaboratively with other individuals or on teams. As
such, core topics in Social Psychology such as social influence, conformity, group decision-
making, interpersonal relationships, altruism, and aggression can all be applied to the goal
of making workplaces effective, satisfying, and safe. For example, social Psychologists have
studied topics such as Social Loafing (the tendency to work less hard on a group task
relative to the effort that is expended when people work individually; Latané, Williams, &
Harkins, 1979), Group Polarization (the tendency for groups to make decisions that are more
extreme than the individual members’ starting position; Moscovici & Zavalloni, 1969) and
Groupthink (the tendency for individuals in groups to be concerned with agreeing with the
group, instead of raising disparate opinions; Janis, 1971). Importantly, Social Psychologists
have not only studied these group processes that can potentially undermine organizational
efficiency, but they have studied ways to mitigate and prevent these processes.
Most workplaces employ leaders or managers at different levels who are responsible for
motivating their teams to work productively and achieve goals, facilitating communication
and positive relationships among group members, and provide performance feedback to
their group members. Industrial-Organizational Psychologists assess factors that make a
good leader, different leadership styles (i.e., task leadership, transactional leadership, and
transformational leadership) and the types of leadership that are most effective depending
on the context (e.g., contingency leadership; Fiedler, 1967). In the workplace, this research
can be applied to leadership training and promotion decisions.
Interestingly, some of the core theories that have been advanced in the Interpersonal
Relationships literature can be applied to the workplace. For example, the Investment
Model (Rusbult, 1980) was introduced to the literature to explain commitment to a romantic
relationship. Specifically, Rusbult posited that commitment to a relationship is determined
by three predictors: Satisfaction, Investments, and Alternatives. Satisfaction refers to the
presences of positive aspects, and the absence of negative aspects in our relationship, such
that we are more likely to stay in a relationship if we find it satisfying. This seems
straightforward, but we can all think of examples where people stay in romantic
relationships even though they do not seem satisfied. Why might this be? The other two
factors can explain why people would remain in relationships that aren’t making them
happy. Investments refers to intangible or tangible things that we have put into a
relationship that we will not recover if the relationship were to end (e.g., resources such
as money, time put into the relationship, sacrifices we have made for the sake of the
relationship). People who have invested more in their relationship are more committed.
Finally, alternative refers to what we think our life would be like without the relationship
(e.g., being single, being with a new (unknown) partner, or being in a relationship with a
specific person that we think would be a potential new partner). If people believe that their
current relationship is better than other relationships that they are likely to find (or being
single), then they are likely to stay committed to the relationship. Interestingly, these same
factors can be applied to whether we stay committed to our workplaces (Farrell & Rusbult,
1981; Oliver, 1990). When making stay or leave decisions, we consider our satisfaction with
the workplace (e.g., “do I like coming to work? Am I fulfilled by this job”), the investments
we have made (e.g., “will I lose my pension if I leave? Can I walk away from a place I
have worked for 20 years?”), and the alternatives that we have (e.g., “Can I afford to be
unemployed for a while? Will I be more fulfilled by taking this new position that has become
available?).
CAREERS IN SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
The scientific study of how our thoughts, feelings, and behaviours are influenced by
our social situations can help us understand, and relate to, others. Moreover, students
with an undergraduate degree in Psychology typically receive strong training in research
methodology and statistics, which are highly transferrable skills. Further, the study of
Psychology entails not only rigorous methodological and statistical competencies, but
higher-order conceptual and analytical skills. In particular, psychology students are taught
to evaluate findings and observations from larger theoretical frameworks, to question
underlying mechanisms for observed relationships, and identify the core underlying
principles that guide our thoughts and behaviours. In other words, students of psychology
are able to leverage a conceptual understanding of human behaviour, in addition to more
specific research-related skillsets. For these reasons, psychology students are ideal
candidates for a number of critical industry positions that require an understanding of
industry-relevant human behaviour or functioning, using sound methodologies and
analyses.
There are number of entry-level positions for students with an undergraduate degree in
Psychology. Just a few examples include research analyst, policy analyst, research or lab
assistant, and organizational development assistant/human resources advisor.
Research Analyst
A number of industry and governmental agencies (e.g., marketing, health) require research
analysts to help them conduct research relevant to their field and organizational mandate.
Analysts may either assist the research activities of more senior analysts, or may organize
and conduct their own research activities including survey development, data collection,
data analysis, report writing, and producing or delivering presentations. This may include
an assessment of the organization’s internal database, or the collection of data external to
the organization. Analysts may be asked to use their findings to make policy or program
recommendations, depending on the nature of the research, the organization, and one’s
position.
Policy Analyst
The research skills of psychology graduates can also be used to inform policy (e.g.,
education and health sectors). Policy analysts use evidence-informed research to develop
short-term and long-term policies and procedures for the relevant agency. Some of these
duties would overlap with those of a research analyst, but with the additional tasks of using
research to inform policy development, which could include training materials and guides
that support those policies.
Research or Lab Assistant
Students with an undergraduate degree in Psychology can apply their research skills by
working in a lab as a research assistant at a university, hospital, or research agency. Research
assistants typically work with graduate students and researchers by recruiting participants
for research studies, collecting data, analyzing data, and helping to summarize the research
for presentations or publications.
Organizational Development Consultant/ Human Resources Advisor
There are some positions within human resource departments that don’t require an
advanced degree, and that utilize many of the skills and competencies acquired by
undergraduates in psychology. In particular, psychology students can work as consultants
in a human resources department in industry, or within an organizational development
firm. Organizational development as a field involves the application of social psychological
principles to help improve employee and organizational performance and effectiveness.
Specifically, organizational developers help to produce change in an institution’s systems,
structures and processes, including the employees working within those systems. The
process of organizational development typically includes a diagnosis of organizational
problems and current functioning through collection and analysis of data, designing and
implementing interventions for change, and evaluating the effectiveness of those
interventions afterwards (Cummings & Worley, 2009). Human resources advisors involve
the application of research and statistical competencies in the recruitment and selection
of personnel, employee training and development, and performance assessment and
management (Boxall, Purcell, & Wright, 2007).
Polling Firms
As part of an undergraduate education in Psychology, many students learn about survey

design and test construction. This skill set can be applied to work at Polling firms (e.g.,
Gallup, Ipsos, Angus Reid), where employees plan and design surveys and test instruments,
conduct research to assess the psychometric properties of the instruments, collect data, and
then analyze and summarize the data for presentation to the client. In this way, working
at a polling firm is specific type of consulting, specializing in test and survey construction,
validation, and analysis. Similar types of jobs can also be found in Provincial and Federal
levels of Government (e.g, Statistics Canada).
Market Research
Market researchers use their research training to help companies become more
productive and profitable by making sound economic, political, and social decisions. They
monitor and forecast sales trends, and collect data about customers. For example, they may
design surveys or conduct focus group research to assess customer satisfaction, marketing
strategies, corporate branding, or factors that affect customer loyalty. They analyze these
data, summarize their findings, and prepare reports to inform businesses how to best market
their products or services.
Consulting Careers
Consultants use their skills, expertise, and knowledge to help individuals or organizations
with a specific goal. One can work for a large consulting firm as a consultant or project
manager (e.g., Bain, Accenture, Ipsos). It is also possible to specialize further to a specific
type of consulting work. There are examples of specific people who work in consulting (and
their education and career trajectories) available online via the webpage of the American
Psychological Association (www.apa.org). Specific examples of consultants include (but are
not limited to) Trial Consultant, Media Consultant. Medical Error Consultant, Market
Consultant, Executive Search Consultant, and Organizational Development Consultant.
Further Education in Social Psychology and Related Fields
Students who obtain an undergraduate degree in Psychology are eligible for a number
of training paths that would require further education. For example, students with a
background in Social Psychology can go to professional schools, such as law school or
business school.
In addition to these professions, students can also pursue graduate training in Psychology
or related disciplines. Students with an undergraduate degree in Psychology can go on
to attain a Master’s of Science (M.Sc.), Master’s of Arts (M.A.) or Doctoral degree (PhD)
in Psychology. Typically, at the graduate level, students will specialize in a specific field
or subdiscipline within Psychology (e.g., Social Psychology. Clinical Psychology,
Developmental Psychology, Cognitive Psychology, Organizational Psychology,
Neuropsychology, etc.). With a background in Psychology, it is also possible to seek graduate
training in closely related programs outside of Psychology (e.g., graduate degrees in
Education, Social Work, Counselling, Public Health, Public Policy, Epidemiology, or
Marketing).
CAREER PATHS FOR THOSE WITH MA/MSC/PHD IN SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
Academic Positions
Many students who graduate with a PhD in Social Psychology go on to work as a Faculty
member or Lecturer at Colleges or Universities. Faculty members (professors) conduct
and publish research to advance the field of social psychology, supervise graduate and
undergraduate student research activities, teach at the undergraduate and graduate levels,
and are responsible for administrative duties. Lecturers typically focus on teaching duties,
by utilizing their knowledge of research methods and social psychological principles to
teach courses at the undergraduate and graduate levels. Although many individuals with
graduate training in Social Psychology go on to work in academic positions within
Psychology Departments, others hold Faculty or Lecturer positions in other departments,
such as Business Schools, Education, Health Studies, Political Science, and Policy Studies
Research Positions Outside of Academia
Graduate training in Social Psychology can prepare students for a wide variety of research
jobs outside of universities or colleges. Some examples are described below.
Defence Scientists
Defense Scientists work for governmental agencies like the Department of National
Defence or Defence Research and Development Canada. They conduct research on the
Canadian Armed Forces including their well-being and operational effectiveness. Defence
scientists have the opportunity to address a variety of operational problems with their
research, and see the real-world impact their research has made on the lives of CAF
personnel and decision making within the Department of National Defence. The use of
theoretical frameworks, in addition to quantitative methodological and statistical
competencies, can be appealing and very relevant for this type of research, making social
psychology students desirable candidates for such positions.
Further, all of the examples of career paths described as possible trajectories for
individuals with an undergraduate education in Psychology (e.g. careers in Consulting,
Policy Analysis, Market Analysis, Polling, Research Analysis, or Organizational Behavior) are
also very good options for those with advanced degrees in Social Psychology. A graduate
degree makes it possible to apply for positions that are higher than entry-level jobs, so a
greater degree of options in these exciting career paths are available to those with a graduate
degree.
Growth Careers in Social Psychology
There is a good reason to be optimistic about the job market for students with a degree in
Social Psychology. Understanding how people are influenced by their social environments,
combined with the excellent training in research methodology and statistics, makes students
with expertise in Social Psychology attractive to a number of different types of employers,
such as those mentioned above. Further, according to the American Psychological
Association (www.apa.org), there will be career sector growth in related fields such as
program evaluation, working with older adults, the military, and the government.
REFERENCES
Ajzen, I. (1991). The theory of planned behavior. Organizational Behavior and Human Decision
Processes, 50, 179-211.
Alloy, L. B., & Abramson, L. Y. (1979). Judgment of contingency in depressed and
nondepressed students: Sadder but wiser? Journal of Experimental Psychology: General, 108,
441-485.
Anderson, C. A., & Dill, K. E. (2000). Video games and aggressive thoughts, feelings, and
behavior in the laboratory and in life. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 78,
772-790.
Anderson, C. A., Shibuya, A., Ihori, N., Swing, E. L., Bushman, B. J., Sakamoto, A., . . . Saleem,
M. (2010). Violent video game effects on aggression, empathy, and prosocial behavior in
Eastern and Western countries: A meta-analytic review. Psychological Bulletin, 136, 151-173.
Asch, S. E. (1955). Opinions and social pressure. Scientific American, 193, 31–35.
Baumeister, R. F., & Leary, M. R. (1995). The need to belong: Desire for interpersonal
attachments as a fundamental human motivation. Psychological Bulletin, 117, 497-529.
Berkowitz, L., & LePage, A. (1967). Weapons as aggression-eliciting stimuli. Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 7, 202-207.
Boxall, P. F., Purcell, J., & Wright, P. M. (2007). The Oxford handbook of human resource
management. London, UK: Oxford University Press.
Buehler, R., Griffin, D., & Ross, M. (1994). Exploring the “planning fallacy”: Why people
underestimate their task completion times. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 67,
366-381.
Bushman B. J., & Baumeister R. F. (1998). Threatened egotism, narcissism, self-esteem, and
direct and displaced aggression: Does self-love or self-hate lead to violence? Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 75, 219–229
Cacioppo, J. T., Hawkley, L. C., Bernston, G. C., Ernst, J. M., Gibbs, A. C., Stickgold, R., &
Hobson, J. A. (2002). Do lonely days invade the nights? Potential social modulation of sleep
efficiency. Psychological Science, 13, 384-387.
Case R. B., Moss A. J., Case N., McDermott M., & Eberly S. (1992). Living alone after
myocardial infarction. Impact on prognosis. Journal of the American Medical Association, 267,
515–519.
Cialdini, R. B. (2009). Influence: Science and practice. Boston, MA: Pearson Education.
Crocker, J., Thompson, L. L., McGraw, K. M., & Ingerman, C. (1987). Downward comparison,
prejudice, and evaluations of others: Effects of self-esteem and threat. Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 52, 907–916.
Cummings, T. G., & Worley, C. G. (2009) Organization development & change (9th ed.). Mason,
OH: South Western Cengage Learning.
DeWall, C. N., & Bushman, B. J. (2011). Social acceptance and rejection: The sweet and the
bitter. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 20, 256–260.
DeWall, C. N., Finkel, E. J., Lambert, N. M., Slotter, E. B., Bodenhausen, G. V., Pond, R. S., …
Fincham, F. D. (2013). The voodoo doll task: Introducing and validating a novel method
for studying aggressive inclinations. Aggressive Behavior, 39, 419-439.
Farrell, D., & Rusbult, C. E. (1981). Exchange variables as predictors of job satisfaction, job
commitment, and turnover: The impact of rewards, costs, alternatives, and investments.
Organizational Behavior and Human Performance, 28, 78-95.
Fazio, R. H., Jackson, J. R., Dunton, B. C., & Williams, C. J. (1995). Variability in automatic
activation as an unobtrusive measure of racial attitudes: A bona fide pipeline? Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 69, 1013–1027.
Fees, B. S., Martin, P., & Poon, L. W. (1999). A model of loneliness in older adults. The
Journals of Gerontology: Series B: Psychological Sciences and Social Sciences, 54, 231-239.
Fiedler, F. (1967). A theory of leadership effectiveness. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.
Finkel, E. J., DeWall, C. N., Slotter, E. B., Oaten, M., & Foshee, V. A. (2009). Self-regulatory
failure and intimate partner violence perpetration. Journal of Personality and Social
Fonda, H. (Producer), Justin, G. (Associate Producer), Rose, R. (Producer), & Lumet, S.
(Director). (1957). 12 angry men [Motion Picture]. USA: Orion-Nova Productions.
Funder, David C. (2008). Persons, Situations, and Person–Situation Interactions. In
Handbook of Personality: Theory and Research, Eds. John, Oliver P., Robins, Richard W., &
Pervin, Lawrence A. . New York: Guilford Press, 568–80.
Gerber, J., Wheeler, L. (2009). On being rejected: A meta-analysis of experimental research
on rejection. Perspectives on Psychological Science, 4, 468–488.
Greenwald, A. G., McGhee, D. E., & Schwartz, J. L. K. (1998). Measuring individual differences
in implicit cognition: The Implicit Association Test. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 74, 1464- 1480.
Gruman, J., Schneider, F., & Coutts, L. (Eds.). (2016). Applied social psychology:
Understanding and addressing social and practical problems (3rd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA:
Sage Publications.
Hartgerink, C. H., van Beest, I., Wicherts, J. M., & Williams, K. D. (2015) The ordinal effects
of ostracism: a meta-analysis of 120 cyberball studies. PLoS ONE 10:e0127002.
Hawkley, L. C., Burleson, M. H., Berntson, G. G., & Cacioppo, J. T. (2003). Loneliness in
everyday life: Cardiovascular activity, psychosocial context, and health behaviors. Journal
of Personality and Social Psychology, 85, 105-120.
Hazan, C., & Shaver, P. (1987). Romantic love conceptualized as an attachment process.
Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 52, 511-524.
House, J. S., Landis, K. R., & Umberson, D. (1988). Social relationship and health. Science, 241,
540-545.
Janis, I. L. (1971). Groupthink. Psychology Today, 5, 43-46.
Kalven, H., & Zeisel, H. (1966). The American jury. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press.
Kiecolt-Glaser, J. K., Garner, W., Speicher, C., Penn, G. M., Holliday, J., & Glaser, R. (1984).
Psychosocial modifiers of immunocompetence in medical students. Psychosomatic
Medicine, 46, 7-14.
Latané, B., & Darley, J. M. (1968). Group inhibition of bystander intervention in emergencies.
Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 10, 308–324.
Latané, B., Williams, K., & Harkins, S. (1979). Many hands make light the work: The causes
and consequences of social loafing. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 37, 822-832.
Lieberman, J. D., Solomon, S., Greenberg, J. L., & McGregor, H. A. (1999). A hot new way to
measure aggression: Hot sauce allocation. Aggressive Behavior, 25, 331-348
McCarthy, R. J., & Elson, M. (2018). A conceptual review of lab-based aggression paradigms.
Collabra: Psychology, 4, 1-12.
Meyer, D. E., & Schvaneveldt, R. W. (1971). Facilitation in recognizing pairs of words:
Evidence of a dependence between retrieval operations. Journal of Experimental Psychology,
90, 227-234.
Mikulincer, M., & Shaver, P. R. (2012). Attachment theory. In P. Van Lange, A. Kruglanski, &
E. Higgins (Eds.), Handbook of theories of social psychology. (pp. 160-180). London, UK:
SAGE Publications Ltd.
Milgram, S. (1965). Some conditions of obedience and disobedience to authority. Human
Relations, 18, 57-76.
Milgram, S. (1974). Obedience to authority: An experimental view. New York: Harper Collins.
Moscovici, S., & Zavalloni, M. (1969). The group as a polarizer of attitudes. Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 12, 125-135.
Myers, D. G., Spencer, S. J., & Jordan, C. H. (2018). Social Psychology (7th Canadian ed.). New
York, NY: McGraw-Hill.
Nisbett, R. E., & Wilson, T. D. (1977). Telling more than we can know: Verbal reports on
mental processes. Psychological Review, 84, 231-259.
Oliver, N. (1990). Rewards, investments, alternatives and organizational commitment:
Empirical and evidence and theoretical development. Journal of Occupational Psychology, 63,
19-31.
Payne, B. K., Cheng, C. M., Govorun, O., & Stewart, B. D. (2005). An inkblot for attitudes:
Affect misattribution as implicit measurement. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology,
89, 277-293.
Pederson, W. C., Vasquez, E. A., Bartholow, B. D., Grosvenor, M., & Truong, A. (2014). Are
you insulting me? Exposure to alcohol primes increases aggression following ambiguous
provocation. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 40, 1037–1049
Pressman, S. D., Cohen, S., Miller, G. E., Barkin, A., Rabin, B. S., & Treanor, J. J. (2005).
Loneliness, social network size, and immune response to influenza vaccination in college
freshman. Health Psychology, 24, 297-306.
Rosenberg, M. (1965). Society and the adolescent self-image. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University
Press.
Rothman, A. J., & Salovey, P. (1997). Shaping perceptions to motivate healthy behaviour: The
role of message framing. Psychological Bulletin, 121, 3-19.
Rusbult, C. E. (1980). Commitment and satisfaction in romantic associations: A test of the
investment model. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 16, 172-186.
Sheppard, J. P., & Young, M. (2007) The routes of moral development and the impact of
exposure to the Milgram obedience study. Journal of Business Ethics, 75, 315–333.
Slotter, E. B., Finkel, E. J., DeWall, C. N., Pond, R. S., Jr., Lambert, N. M., Bodenhausen, G.
V., & Fincham, F. D. (2012). Putting the brakes on aggression toward a romantic partner:
The inhibitory influence of relationship commitment. Journal of Personality and Social

Stone, J., Aronson, E., Crain, A. L., Winslow, M. P., & Fried, C. B. (1994). Inducing hypocrisy
as a means of encouraging young adults to use condoms. Personality and Social Psychology
Bulletin, 20, 116-128.
Straus, M. A. (1979). Measuring intrafamily conflict and violence: The Conflict Tactics (CT)
scales. Journal of Marriage and the Family, 41, 75-88.
Tajfel, H. (1979). Individuals and groups in social psychology. British Journal of Social, &
Clinical Psychology, 18, 183-190.
Tajfel, H., & Turner, J. C. (1986) The Social Identity Theory of Intergroup Behavior.
Psychology of Intergroup Relations, 5, 7-24.
Taylor, S. (1967). Aggressive behavior and physiological arousal as a function of provocation
and the tendency to inhibit aggression. Journal of Personality, 35, 297–310.
Taylor, S. E. (1991). Positive illusions: Creative self-deception and the healthy mind. New York:
Basic Books.
Taylor, S. E., & Brown, J. (1988). Illusion and well-being: A social psychological perspective
on mental health. Psychological Bulletin, 103, 193–210.
Uchino, B. N., Cacioppo, J. T., & Kiecolt-Glaser, J. K. (1996). The relationship between social
support and physiological processes: A review with emphasis on underlying mechanisms
and implications for health. Psychological Bulletin, 119, 488-531.
Warburton, W. A., Williams, K. D., & Cairns, D. R. (2006). When ostracism leads to
aggression: The moderating effects of control deprivation. Journal of Experimental Social
Psychology, 42, 213–220.
Wells, G. L., & Leippe, M. R. (1981). How do triers of fact infer the accuracy of eyewitness
identifications? Using memory for peripheral detail can be misleading. Journal of Applied
Williams, K. D. (2001). Ostracism: The power of silence. New York, NY: Guilford.
Williams, K. D., Cheung, C. K. T., & Choi, W. (2000). CyberOstracism: Effects of being
ignored over the Internet. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 79, 748-762.
Williams, K. D., & Jarvis, B. (2006). Cyberball: A program for use in research on
interpersonal ostracism and acceptance. Behavior Research Methods, 38(1), 174–180.
https://doi.org/10.3758/BF03192765
MacDonald, T. K., Wood, V., & Refling, E. (2019). Social psychology. In M. E. Norris (Ed.),
psychologycareers/chapter/social-psychology/
[8]
DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY
Valerie A. Kuhlmeier, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University
Kyla Mayne, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University
Wendy Craig, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University
1. WHAT IS DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY?
As a human progresses through life, they transition from a zygote to a crying infant, from
a babbling toddler to a curious kindergartner, from a quick-learning grade school student
to a broody adolescent, from an independence-seeking emerging adult to a mature adult,
and later, to an elderly senior. Across the lifespan, there are numerous physical, cognitive,
and social changes. The field of developmental psychology is focused on observing these
changes and elucidating their underlying mechanisms.
People with training in developmental psychology have learned how to be scientists. Like
all scientists, they know the key theories of their field, and importantly, they recognize how
those theories came to be. They can create empirical research methodologies to test new
hypotheses, and they analyze the resulting data. They know how to critically evaluate claims
and effectively communicate findings to other scientists as well as the broader community.
Depending on their chosen career and level of education, people trained in developmental
psychology may apply some or all of these skills in their work.
The specific area of interest for any one developmental psychologist may differ greatly
from the interests of other developmental psychologists. It is arguably the most
interdisciplinary of the traditional areas of psychology, as individuals may focus on
development in relation to sensation and perception, cognition, reasoning and behaving in
the social environment, personality, and brain systems. Within these topics, developmental
psychologists may focus on what we think of as normative development, as well as atypical
development.
195
196 Developmental
Because of this diversity, the questions that developmental psychologists ask can seem
disconnected from each other. Take a look at a typical introductory textbook on the topic,
and you will likely see research questions as wide-ranging as: When do infants perceive
physical depth? How do children learn the meanings of words? How does moral reasoning
change from early to later childhood? Is the development of theory of mind in humans
different from that of other species? How do bullying experiences in childhood affect
later victimization in adulthood? How do cultures differ in pedagogical practices? What is
the role of parents in the development of emotion regulation? How does gender identity
develop?
The thread that connects these diverse topics, though, is the approach that developmental
psychologists take. There is a shared interest in understanding the mechanisms of change
by examining the interactions between nature (our genetic inheritance) and nurture (the
physical and social environment). Within this framework, species-typical developmental
paths can be observed, but intriguing individual differences may also be uncovered.
Perhaps one of the best ways to picture the general context of development is by
considering Urie Bronfenbrenner’s seminal Bioecological Model (Bronfenbrenner, 1979;
Figure 1). This model considers the multi-directional impact of environmental factors on
a child’s physical, social, emotional, and cognitive development. In the model, there are
a series of nested systems, with the child (including his or her particular combination
of genes, temperament, age, health, physical appearance, etc.) at the center. The systems
interconnect, and themselves exist within the ‘chronosystem’, which considers
circumstances that change over time.
Figure 1. Bronfrenbrenner’s Bioecological Model considers the child’s environment as a nested series of interconnected
systems. [Image modified from Wikipedia: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ecological_systems_theory]
When you consider this complexity, as well as the various domains of development that
psychologists examine, it may not be surprising that the methods used by developmental
psychologists who are actively involved in research are quite varied. Some methods share
commonalities with other areas of psychology: surveys, naturalistic or structured behavior
observation, verbal interviews, genetic assays, and neuroimaging with fMRI and
electroencephalography, among others. A primary consideration within developmental
research, though, is the age-appropriateness of the methods. This is particularly evident
198 Developmental
when testing infants who are not yet speaking and have limited motor ability, but applies to
all ages to some extent.
Another consideration is how development is to be examined. For example, does the

research question pertain to whether an ability is present at a certain age? If so, researchers
might focus on one time point (e.g., 5 months of age). Alternatively, is a comparison to be
made between certain ages? In this case, researchers may use a cross-sectional approach,
comparing different groups of children of different ages, or they might create a longitudinal
design in which they follow the same children over a period of months or years. Yet another
approach is the microgenetic design, in which researchers attempt to gain an in-depth
understanding of the mechanisms of change. In a microgenetic design, the focus is on
children who are thought to be on the cusp of a particular change, and researchers make
observations during a number of sessions over a short period of time.
SECTION RECAP
People trained in developmental psychology have learned the historic and current
theories of developmental science and have a critical understanding of how to conduct and
interpret research. One individual’s specific focus may differ greatly from another’s (e.g., the
development of numerical understanding versus gender development), but they will share a
common interest in uncovering the mechanisms of change. In turn, these mechanisms are
considered within the complex interactions between nature and nurture.
In the last section of this chapter, some of the many careers and educational paths related
to developmental psychology are presented. Before getting there, though, you will see
examples of research and how it has been (and continues to be) extended and applied. These
sections are divided into two areas of developmental research: social and cognitive. The
lines separating the areas may at times seem ‘fuzzy’; for example, a researcher interested
in the development of a cognitive process will likely consider the role of the child’s social
experience (e.g., how is information being presented to the child by others?). Yet, the
divisions provide an organizational scheme for presenting important themes and research
methods within the larger field of developmental psychology.
2. SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
The earliest social experiences for humans occur soon after birth, often with the
immediate family. In typical development, for example, newborns show a marked attention
to faces and soon are able to recognize the individual faces of those around them (e.g.,
Bartrip, Morton, & de Schonen, 2001). This early interest in people is thought to start us on
a developmental path toward the complex sociality that characterizes our species.
This section will begin by considering what developmental psychologists have discovered
about social experiences during infancy and early childhood. Focus will then turn to the
development of social relationships, including the child’s own social identity. Throughout,
examples will be presented of how this knowledge has been extended and applied. The
topics and examples are, of course, limited, but the aim is to present major themes and
directions.
Figure 2. A young infant looks at a caregiver’s face.
EARLY SOCIAL EXPERIENCES
Our species has a relatively long period of vulnerability; we are born helpless and unable
to survive without a caregiver. To ensure infants’ survival, and by extension, the survival
of the species, infants and caretakers have developed a complex system of behaviours that
fosters a strong relationship and motivates adequate caregiving (Simpson & Belsky, 2008).
It was relatively recently, though, that we started to have a more complete understanding
of the necessary features of human caregiving. Observations of children who were
separated from their parents during World War II showed that these children were
emotionally disturbed, even those who were in institutions that provided good physical care
(e.g., Bowlby, 1953). What appeared to be missing, it was argued, was the opportunity to
200 Developmental
create socio-emotional bonds with caregivers. Relatedly, research by Harry Harlow in the
1950s demonstrated that infant rhesus macaque monkeys preferred to spend time in contact
with a cloth-covered apparatus than a metal wire apparatus, even though the latter provided
milk. In fact, the infant monkeys with access to a ‘cloth mother’ showed more species-
typical behaviour, exploring the world and then returning to the soft apparatus as if it were
a secure base.
Together, these findings formed the initial basis of Mary Ainsworth and John Bowlby’s
attachment theory. The ideas were expanded through studies suggesting that infants’ early
experiences with primary caregivers shape their social and emotional development.
Through the interactions with a sensitive caregiver, infants form a ‘working model of
attachment’, a mental representation or schema of positive social relationships. Without
these early experiences — or with experience with an insensitive caregiver – children’s social
development can be compromised (Please see Box 1 for more on this topic).
Since this initial research, developmental psychologists have continued to expand our
understanding of the significance of early social experiences. For example, there is evidence
for both cultural universals and cultural variations: though the importance of attachment
security appears to be universal, securely attached children in different cultures may differ
in how often they are in close physical proximity to their mothers (e.g., Posada et al.,
2013). Additionally, the research in this area has provided us with a foundation for creating
interventions to improve parent-child interactions. Developmental psychologists work with
clinical psychologists and health care professionals to design and evaluate programs that
focus on sensitive parenting behaviour. As one example, nursing professionals at Toronto
Public Health in Ontario, Canada, joined with clinical and developmental psychologists to
elaborate and evaluate the ‘Make the Connection’ parenting program. When compared
to a control group, this program was found to increase sensitive caregiving behaviour
and improve parental attitude in at-risk mothers through in-class activities that included
reflective discussion while watching video of their interactions with their infants (O’Neill,
Swigger, & Kuhlmeier, 2018).
Developmental psychologists have further applied the research on early social experiences
to questions about the impact of nonparental childcare. For many families, parents hold
jobs by necessity or choice, and children may spend time with other caregivers. A large-
scale study in the U.S.A., as well as other smaller-scale studies, suggested that when childcare
is high quality (e.g., low turnover of caregivers and a low number of children per caregiver),
children can still form secure attachments with their mothers when their mothers show
sensitivity in their time together. Further, high-quality childcare can even compensate
when children experience unresponsive parenting from their mothers (e.g., NICHD Early
Childcare Network, 1997).
BOX 1. ROMANIAN ADOPTION STUDIES
As you have just read, throughout the 1900s developmental psychologists increased our understanding
of the role of sensitive caregiving in early social development. It may come as a surprise, then, to learn that
as late as the 1980s and 1990s, many children in Romania lived in institutions with relatively little contact
with caregivers, as demanded by the political dictatorship at the time.
When the political power shifted, children were adopted by families in different countries. Across a series
of studies, the development of these children was examined, often in comparison with both Romanian and
non-Romanian children who had been adopted early in infancy (e.g., Nelson et al., 2007; Rutter, O’Connor,
& The English and Romanian Adoptees (ERA) Study Team, 2004). The studies found that Romanian children
who were adopted at an older age (e.g., 12 to 24 months and 24 to 42 months) often showed atypical
physical, social, and cognitive development as compared to children who had been adopted at a younger
age, even after years of living in a loving and supportive environment.
These findings were important for the information they provided on the significance of early social
experiences in human development and for the implications for public policy (Rutter et al., 2009). Also
notable, though, was the consideration of the ethics of the research, with consideration of the potential for
exploitation, the risk/benefit ratio, and cultural sensitivity (Zeanah et al., 2006).
Figure 3. An Institute in Romania, shown here in 1992. Used with permission from Tom Szalay.
DEVELOPMENT OF THE SELF
It may seem strange to read about the development of ‘the self’ in a section on social
development. Yet, one’s self-concept develops through interactions among all the systems
in Bronfenbrenner’s model (refer back to Figure 1), including, importantly, our interactions
with others.
202 Developmental
Early in development, an emerging sense of self can be seen when infants recognize that
they have agency and are able to control their environment (to some extent!). For example,
at 2 to 4 months of age, infants show excitement when they can cause a mobile to move via a
string attached to their kicking foot (e.g., Rovee-Collier, 1999). In the toddler years, children
come to realize that when looking in the mirror, they are looking at an image of themselves.
The sense of self continues to become more elaborate during the preschool years, and 3 to
4 year olds will describe themselves in terms of their physical features (I have brown hair)
as well as their social relationships (I have a brother). During the elementary school years,
children increasingly engage in social comparison (Other kids at school do better in math; e.g.,
Harter, 1999), and in adolescence, the importance of social acceptance by peers is strong (e.g.,
Damon & Hart, 1988).
Developmental psychologists now have amassed a rich body of research on the

development of the self, including focus on topics such as ethnic, sexual, and gender
identity. In many cases, the research aims to be cross-cultural, as identity formation is
influenced by the opportunities children and adolescents have, which are, in turn, impacted
by economic and historical status, among other factors. The research is continually being
applied with the aim of improving health and well-being (see Box 2 for an example in
relation to gender identity).
Focus has also turned to one particular element of self concept: self esteem. How we
evaluate ourselves is related to life satisfaction, and low self esteem in childhood and
adolescence is associated with negative outcomes such as substance abuse, depression, and
withdrawal from social interactions (e.g., Donnellan, Trzesnieswski, Robins, Moffitt, & Caspi,
2005). Receiving praise can typically help to increase self esteem, but developmental
psychologists have suggested that inflated praise (You are the best at drawing!) can actually
have detrimental effects for children with low self esteem. In one study, children who were
visiting a museum drew a picture and were told that it would be evaluated by a painter (there
was no actual painter, only the experimenters). Some children received inflated praise (You
made an incredibly beautiful drawing!), while others received either no praise or non-inflated
praise. Children with low self esteem who received inflated praise were less likely to take on
a new challenge than other children, suggesting that the inflated praise actually backfired,
perhaps because it set high standards that these children did not feel they could meet
(Brummelman, Thomaes, Orobio de Castro, Overbeek, & Bushman, 2014). Discussion of
this research has been valuable in educational settings, as praise in relation to participation
rather than achievement has become more common.
BOX 2. GENDER DEVELOPMENT IN TRANSGENDER YOUTH
Gender identity is typically defined as an individual’s awareness of themself as male, female, or

transgender. The term is thus different than terms such as sexual identity or sexual orientation, which
typically refer to the sense of oneself as a sexual being and one’s romantic attractions (or lack thereof).
Though there has been much research on gender development in children who identify with their natal sex,
less is known about other children.
The TransYouth Project, led by developmental psychologist Dr. Kristina Olson, examines transgender
children’s gender development. At the time of this writing, it is an ongoing longitudinal study of transgender
children from North America (ages 3 to 12 years at the start of the study), though some early findings have
been published (for a summary, see Olson & Gülgöz, 2018). These children have socially transitioned (e.g.,
they are referred to by a pronoun not traditionally used for their natal sex) and thus have significant parental
support of their gender identities. Because of this, the researchers are cautious in generalizing the findings
beyond similar samples.
The TransYouth Project is the first of its kind, researching gender development in transgender youth using
quantitative empirical methodologies. The research thus far has examined the continuity and discontinuity
of gender identity, researcher biases in assessing gender, and the implications of social support and
transitioning on well-being in transgender and gender diverse youth. One finding thus far is that socially
transitioned children’s gender development is quite similar to gender-typical peers and gender typical
siblings. There are future research directions planned too, including larger and more diverse samples with
children who have and have not socially transitioned.
PEER RELATIONSHIPS
Developmental psychologists have long claimed that relationships with peers are integral
to children’s development. The interactions with similarly-aged ‘equals’ often allows the
free exchange of ideas and criticisms, which can lead to the development of new concepts
about how the world works. Cooperation with peers helps children develop social and
emotional skills valued in the culture.
Among the different types of peer relationships, the study of friendship – and how the
concept of ‘friend’ changes during development – has provided a large body of research.
Having close, reciprocated friendships as a child is linked with positive outcomes even into
young adulthood (e.g., Bagwell, Newcomb, & Bukowski, 1998). That said, friendships with
individuals who promote dangerous or unhealthy behaviours can be costly (e.g., Simpkins,
Eccles, & Becnel, 2008).
For some children and adolescents, peer relationships can include aggression, harassment,
and violence, in person or online (i.e., cyberbullying). The consequences of being bullied
are broad and include academic difficulties, stress-related illness, loneliness, biological
changes within the brain, and suicide. By some accounts, 30% of children and adolescents in
North America are bullied occasionally, with 7-10% bullied on a daily basis. Further, 75% of
people say that they have been affected by bullying (www.PREVNet.ca).
204 Developmental
Figure 4. Social exclusion and peer rejection can impact health and well-being.
Developmental psychologists have been working with organizations to connect science

to practice and practice to science, in turn creating and evaluating programs that promote
positive relationships. For example, PREVNet (Promoting Relationships & Eliminating
Violence Network; Figure 5) is a network of 130 Canadian research scientists, 183 graduate
students, and 62 national youth-serving organizations (e.g., the Boys and Girls Club of
Canada) that began in 2006. PREVNet focuses on education, assessment, intervention, and
policy.
Initially, Canadian youth-serving organizations had few resources and opportunities to

connect with each other and engage with researchers. Organizations like PREVNet, though,
can bridge the gap between academic research, public policy and practices by connecting
university researchers with organizations and communities. Indeed, since PREVNet began
in 2006, the proportion of students in Canada who report bullying others has decreased by
62%, and the proportion of students who report both bullying others and being victimized
has dropped by 44%. This decrease is likely in part a result of the work of all members of
PREVNet and its cumulative impact across the country.
206 Developmental
Figure 5. PREVNet is a network of scientists and organizations that aims to decrease the prevalence of bullying and promote
positive relationships. The network provides resources via its website www.PREVNet.ca [Screen capture August 2019]
BOX 3. EMOTION REGULATION
In developmental psychology, the study of emotions occurs at many levels: neural responses,
physiological responses such as heart rate, the subjective feelings associated with emotions, the recognition
of others’ emotions, and the cognitive processes that can influence these different levels (e.g., Siegler et al.,
2018).
Here, we highlight one aspect of emotional development: the ability to regulate one’s emotions. Though
we have situated this ‘box’ within the social development section of this chapter, the topic actually bridges
social and cognitive development. Regulating emotions can entail cognitive processes, including inhibitory
control, reassessment of goals, and creation of new behavioural strategies. But, emotion regulation can also
occur in a more social context, such as the co-regulation that can occur with parents or peers.
Emotion regulation plays an important role in well-being, with implications for anxiety and depression.
Researchers in both developmental and clinical psychology often work together to apply research findings in
the creation of interventions. One example is the use of video games that allow children with moderate to
high levels of anxiety to practice controlling their stress. The game MindLight, created by developmentalist
Dr. Isabella Granic along with a team of researchers and game designers, lets children virtually explore a
dark mansion with a light that becomes brighter as they relax. Because the game is fun and engaging,
children get repeated experience controlling their own anxious emotions as they play. Evaluating the
effectiveness of the game is ongoing, and comparisons are being made to existing interventions including
traditional cognitive behavioural therapy (e.g., Schoneveld et al., 2016; Wols, Lichtwarck-Aschoff,
Schoneveld, & Granic, 2018).
Figure 6. A still image from the video game, MindLight. https://gemhlab.com/games/mindlight/
SECTION RECAP
This section has provided a brief summary of social development, with emphasis on early
interactions with caregivers, the development of a sense of self, and peer relationships. In
each case, examples of how research findings have been applied — in various contexts (e.g.,
education, parenting) and with various goals (e.g., public policy) — have been presented.
Underlying our social interactions, though, are cognitive processes that support our
interpretation of others’ behaviour and guide our decision-making. In the next section,
we will provide an overview of some major research areas of cognitive developmental
psychology and give examples of applications of the work.
3. COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENT
In a general sense, cognitive developmental psychologists study how our abilities to

acquire, store, and process information develop. A more specific definition of ‘cognition’,
though, is the “mental processes and activities used in perceiving, remembering, thinking,
and understanding, and the act of using these processes” (Ashcraft & Klein, 2010, p. 9).
Cognitive processes, therefore, are internal, occurring inside the brain. Because of this,
cognition is typically inferred from behavioural or neural measures during carefully
designed experiments.
This section will provide examples of research on cognitive development, noting how
208 Developmental
the findings can apply to other areas of the field of psychology as well as other disciplines
and nonacademic communities. That said, many cognitive developmental psychologists
conduct ‘basic science’, remaining agnostic with regard to any application to, for example,
health or education. Indeed, the basic science underlying any effective application or
intervention will take many years to complete, and the potential applications may only be
realized after a large body of findings have been amassed and interpreted. Knowing this, it
is important to approach the claims that specific toys or videos will make children ‘smarter’
with dose of healthy skepticism (e.g., Schellenberg & Hallam, 2005).
PERCEPTION AND EARLY COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENT
Decades of research with humans and nonhuman animals have led to the conclusion that
the wiring of a species-typical brain is, in part, a result of experiences within a species-
typical environment (e.g., voices, movement, three-dimensional objects). The brain is thus
thought to ‘expect’ certain input from the environment to fine-tune itself by strengthening
or pruning synapses. This experience-expectant plasticity has benefits (other areas may be
able to take over when localized damage occurs), but it also has costs. If the ‘expected’
environmental information is not there, then development can be compromised.
Findings from infants who are born with cataracts that obscure vision demonstrate a cost
of experience-expectant plasticity. Developmental psychologists have found that children
who have cataracts medically removed later in development have greater visual impairment
than those who have them removed earlier (see Maurer, 2017, for review). Research such
as this has led to modern practices of early removal of cataracts when surgery is possible,
with the aim of providing the infant visual system with the experiences that are important
for development.
But, how do we even know what infants see when they cannot verbally communicate
to us about their perceptions? Though there are many methodologies that capitalize on
different infant behaviours such as reaching or sucking, there has been a long history
of measuring infants’ looking behaviour. Experimental procedures using a habituation/
dishabituation design, for example, capitalize on infants’ initial interest in new things, as
well as their waning interest over time. In a typical set up, a visual stimulus (e.g., a striped
object) is placed in front of an infant repeatedly. For the first few minutes, infants spend the
majority of the time looking at the stimulus, but over time, they habituate to the stimulus
and begin to look elsewhere more and more. When this looking-away behaviour reaches
pre-determined criteria, a new stimulus is presented (e.g., a differently patterned object).
Increased looking to this new stimulus is called dishabituation, and suggests that an infant
is able to differentiate between the two stimuli. Using this type of methodology, cognitive
developmental psychologists have been able to examine early perception and cognition in
relation to objects (e.g., infants’ early sense of number, Box 4) and people.
A common methodology that is used to examine infant auditory discrimination is known

as the conditioned head-turn procedure. At the start, infants are trained that when a change
in an ongoing sound occurs, a fun toy appears to their side. When they learn this
association, they readily turn their head in the direction of the upcoming toy if they
hear the change. Using this procedure, developmental psychologists have examined how
infants discriminate among different speech sounds. For example, 7-month-old infants
growing up in English speaking households would turn their head when a speech sound
common in English changed to a speech sound common in Salish, a language from coastal
British Columbia, Canada. Intriguingly, 1-year-olds and adults with no experience with
Salish find it very difficult to differentiate these sounds (e.g., Werker & Tees, 1984). Thus,
there appears to be a time in early development in which our auditory perception allows
for this discrimination, but with increased exposure to the predominant language in our
environment, we narrow our perception. Although this may seem detrimental – and
perhaps the opposite of how we usually think about development – the narrowing and focus
may underlie the attainment of expertise.
BOX 4. NUMBER AND MATHEMATICS
What does cognitive developmental neuroscience have to do with mathematics education? A lot, actually.
Many developmental psychologists have been focusing their research on how children learn about numbers
using both behavioural and brain-imaging methods.
Young infants (and many nonhuman animals) can notice the difference between an array of, say, 8 dots
and an array of 4 dots. We are capable of estimating numerical magnitude and discriminating between
magnitudes, even at a very young age. (To try an adult version of this task in which both arrays are
presented together, quickly look at Figure 7 without explicitly counting the dots. Are there more yellow or
blue dots?)
Of interest to many researchers is the role these early representations play in the acquisition of symbolic
number, such as Arabic numerals and number words (e.g., Feigenson, Libertus, & Halberda, 2013;
Sokolowski, Fias, Ononye, & Ansari, 2017; Xenidou-Dervou, Molenaar, Ansari, van der Schoot, & van
Lieshout, 2007). Does, for example, the development of basic magnitude processing impact the
development of arithmetic skills? If so, what might this mean for mathematics education?
210 Developmental
Figure 7. Without counting, can you tell if there are more yellow or more blue dots? Humans and other animals are able to
discriminate between numerosities – like the yellow and blue dots here — using a nonsymbolic, approximate sense of quantity.
Developmental psychologists are also examining children who have severe difficulties with arithmetic
(developmental dyscalculia). For example, Dr. Daniel Ansari uses behavioural and functional neuroimaging
methods to study the causes and neural correlates of developmental dyscalculia (e.g., Bugden & Ansari,
2016). By partnering with educational psychologists, he aims to apply research findings to the classroom.
For more information about the project, see: http://www.numericalcognition.org/media.html
LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT
Developmental psychologists have a long history of studying language development,

considering important aspects such as the perception and discrimination of speech sounds
and the ways in which children learn the meanings of words. Related research focuses on
how children learn to read. The area is broad, and entire university courses can be designed
to introduce the topic. Here, we will focus specifically on the role of adults in children’s
language learning and critical periods within development.
Perhaps counter-intuitively, adults do not actively teach language as much as you may
think. Parents, for example, do not often explicitly teach grammatical rules. Instead, much
of the learning comes from exposure to language. Parents will use infant-directed speech
(higher pitch, with exaggerated intonation) when talking to an infant, and the speech
emphasizes words for objects in the environment. During these ‘conversations’, children will
also pay attention to the speaker’s focus of attention (via eye gaze, pointing, etc.) and use
these pragmatic cues to determine what object the speaker is likely labeling.
Imagine, however, if a child does not have any exposure to language. Fortunately, such a
situation is rare, but there are documented cases of abused children who were not exposed to
language with any consistency. Children who were rescued from abuse later in development
did not successfully learn language, even after living in a social and loving household.
Similar findings also come from situations in which there was no abuse, yet children were
not diagnosed with deafness and, thus, there was no exposure to sign language until later
childhood. There appears to be a critical period within the first 4-5 years of life in which
exposure to language is integral to language development.
The study of bilingual children and adults further supports the importance of a critical
period. Adults who were exposed to a second language during their first three years of life
show brain activation patterns to the second language that are similar to the patterns in
monolingual adults who are listening to their native language. Those who learn a second
language later, however, show different patterns (e.g., Weber-Fox & Neville, 1996).
But, how do children manage to learn two languages at once? A classic, but now
unsupported view was that learning more than one language would negatively impact
learning more generally. While it is the case that children learning two languages may
learn each more slowly than children exposed to only one, the developmental ‘lag’ quickly
disappears with age. These findings are important to policies around bilingual education,
suggesting that immersion programs will not hinder learning (e.g., Holobow, Genesee, &
Lambert, 1991).
UNDERSTANDING OTHERS
Many topics already covered in this chapter relate to children’s developing understanding
of the people around them. Attention to faces in early infancy, forming attachments to
parents, and perceptual systems that parse the sounds of human language all support our
ability to make sense of others’ behaviour and predict their future behaviour. The
importance of these and other social cognitive abilities can perhaps best be appreciated
when we consider how hard it is to navigate human society when the abilities are limited, as
is thought to be the case for individuals with autism spectrum disorder (Box 5).
Key to our mature understanding of others is the seemingly human-unique suite of

social cognitive skills that researchers refer to as theory of mind. Theory of mind is our
understanding that the behaviour of other people is caused by their internal mental states,
such as their intentions, desires, and beliefs. We cannot directly see others’ beliefs, but we
can infer them based on the context, past behaviour, and current behaviour. You will likely
predict, for example, that a friend will look for his book on his desk where he left it, even if
212 Developmental
you borrowed it when he was away and left it on your own desk. You know that his belief as
to the location of the book is different from your own knowledge.
This type of inference undergoes a major change in the preschool years,

and developmental psychologists have found that many social, cognitive, and
neurodevelopmental factors shape the timeline of theory of mind development. Some
studies, for example, use electroencephalography (EEG), a procedure that measures
electrical activity of the brain over time using electrodes placed on the scalp, to assess ways
in which brain maturation might be specifically related to developments in preschoolers’
theory-of-mind (e.g., Sabbagh, Bowman, Evraire, & Ito, 2009). Related research considers
the role of neurotransmitter systems (e.g., dopamine) in shaping children’s social cognitive
development (Lackner, Sabbagh, Hallinan, Liu, & Holden., 2012).
Our brains develop within our social and cultural environments, though, as you have likely
recognized throughout this chapter. Thus, theory of mind research also considers how
brain maturation interacts with relevant, everyday social experiences. For example, parents’
use of mental state talk with their young children is correlated with children’s later theory of
mind development (e.g., Ruffman, Slade, & Crowe, 2002). It is possible that mental state talk
provides them with fact-based knowledge about mental states, and it might help children to
start to take the perspective of others by using their own perspectives as a comparison.
As noted, the ability to reason about others’ mental states is integral to efficiently
navigating our social world. There are, thus, direct applications of the study of theory of
mind to the study of autism, but the applications can extend far more broadly. For example,
those studying how children learn from others (social learning) consider how children
differentiate knowledgeable from ignorant individuals (e.g., Poulin-Dubois et al, 2016), and
researchers who are characterizing the factors that encourage or discourage bullying and
prosocial behaviour consider underlying social cognitive reasoning (e.g., Dunfield &
Kuhlmeier, 2013). As a further example, clinical psychologists work with developmental
psychologists to examine the role of theory of mind in the etiology, pathology, and
phenomenology of depression in adolescents and adults (e.g., Zahavi et al., 2016).
BOX 5. AUTISM
Autism Spectrum Disorder (ASD) usually emerges in the first three years of life. It is a developmental
disorder, and as such, it is particularly important to diagnose and treat ASD early in life (though there is
currently no ‘cure’).
One characteristic of ASD is a difficulty and disinterest in engaging in social interactions. Many
researchers have suggested that this key feature of ASD has foundations in early infancy. Whereas typically
developing infants attend to faces and biological motion, infants who later are diagnosed with ASD show
deficits in attention to social stimuli (e.g., Klin, Lin, Gorrindo, Ramsay, & Jones, 2009; Osterling & Dawson,
1994). This inattention may derail subsequent experiences, leading to inattention to higher-level social
information. In this way, development is driven to more severe dysfunction, and deficits are ultimately seen
in additional domains, such as language development.
Developmental psychologists have been working for many years to find reliable predictors of ASD during
the first year of life. New findings from the study of typical cognitive development are often considered in
relation to children who are at risk of developing ASD (e.g., siblings of already-diagnosed children). Until we
have reliable predictive tests, though, diagnosis cannot occur until behavioural symptoms emerge in later
toddlerhood. Treatment is often delayed, potentially missing a developmental period in which intervention
may be particularly successful in mitigating some of the impairments seen in ASD.
Figure 8. Developmental psychologists work with clinical psychologists and

medical doctors to develop treatments that help children with ASD have
more intensive
SECTION RECAP
This chapter has thus far been divided into two areas of developmental research: social
and cognitive. As you likely noticed, the lines separating the areas are at times ‘fuzzy’,
yet there has been a tradition in developmental psychology to loosely organize around
these two areas. This is not to suggest that the work occurs in two separate silos. For
example, even research on children’s developing understanding of objects, including their
understanding about the number of objects, will also consider the social environment.
Learning about objects relies on not only on children’s perceptual development and
recognition of physical causality, but also on how they learn from knowledgeable others
about an object’s function and name. Number cognition develops within cultural systems
that have symbolic count words, artifacts such as calculators and the abacus, and
mathematics notation.
Perhaps in part due to the breadth of developmental psychology as a field, there are
214 Developmental
many relevant career paths that incorporate its theory and methodology, either directly or
indirectly. In the next section, we provide examples of these careers, as well as some of the
educational paths students can take.
4. EDUCATIONAL PATHS AND CAREERS
Most of the studies and the applications of research findings described in this chapter are
the result of projects led by developmental psychologists who have completed a doctorate
(e.g., Ph.D.) degree. The basic science underlying any novel application or intervention can
take many years to complete (indeed, basic science is often completed with no application
in mind). Along the way, though, the work is only possible through the combined work of
many individuals with many different types of educational backgrounds and job experience.
Before discussing different educational and career paths relevant to developmental

psychology, it is important to consider a distinction that will often confuse students early
in their undergraduate training: How do developmental psychologists differ from child
clinical psychologists? In fact, before reading this chapter, some students might have
reasonably, though incorrectly, thought that only clinical psychologists consider
applications of psychological research.
Developmental psychologists are interested in understanding the mechanisms of change

by examining the interactions between nature (our genetic inheritance) and nurture (the
physical and social environment). They are often interested in species-typical
developmental paths, but intriguing individual differences may also be uncovered. Clinical
psychologists tend to emphasize the individual differences, particularly those relevant to
psychological health and well-being.
Many child clinical psychologists are primarily practitioners and see clients, which
requires specialized training. Developmental psychologists typically do not have the
requisite training to be registered as this type of “Psychologist” and instead engage in
specialized research training. That said, some child clinical psychologists are scientist-
practitioners and collaborate closely with developmental psychologists in research settings.
With this distinction in place, we can now consider the educational and career paths
relevant to developmental psychology. As in most disciplines, the career opportunities will
differ based on the level of education completed, so undergraduate training is presented
separately from graduate training in this section. Also, similar to many disciplines, there are
not many ‘hard and fast rules’; remember that there are many routes possible to reach your
goals.
UNDERGRADUATE TRAINING
In North America, undergraduate degrees in psychology are not typically specialized

in a particular area like developmental psychology (it is a general degree in Psychology),
though psychology majors and other majors may choose to emphasize this coursework in
their training. Many colleges and universities have courses that cover the field in general
(Developmental Psychology) and courses that provide specific focus (Language Development,
Infancy, Social-Emotional Development, Cognitive Developmental Neuroscience).
Knowledge gained from developmental psychology courses provides good preparation

for graduate training in psychology, social work, speech-language pathology, occupational
therapy, teaching, law, and public policy, among others. Some students take developmental
psychology courses to complement their undergraduate and graduate training in education
and even computer science (e.g., educational software development). Of course, some
careers may be started without further training in graduate school – it is never too early to
start looking at job advertisements and reading the professional profiles of people who have
a career that interests you.
Resources for students can typically be found on their college or university campus,
but online resources are also available from reputable organizations. Both the Canadian
Psychological Association (CPA) and the American Psychological Association (APA) have
subsections specific to developmental psychology, for example.
GRADUATE TRAINING
Those who apply to graduate school in developmental psychology typically hold an

undergraduate degree in psychology, but it is not uncommon to have a background in
neuroscience, biology, philosophy, linguistics, or another related field. Prospective students
start their search by considering who they want to work with: Is there an individual or team
whose research you find particularly relevant to your career goals? The next consideration
is often the school itself: What resources (collaborators, funding, professional development,
etc.) does the university provide?
In many programs, graduate students earn a master’s degree before continuing on to

the Ph.D. degree. A master’s degree can prepare students well for some of the types of
graduate training described above; for example, a master’s degree could be attained before
or after law school with the goal of practicing family law. Individuals who earn a Ph.D. are
considered experts in their field and have strong research, data analytic, and critical thinking
skills that can be applied to many different settings.
Graduate training is perfect for people who enjoy discovery and problem-solving.
Perhaps an underemphasized trait, though, is having an entrepreneurial spirit that motivates
you to create the career you want. Developmental psychologists have created careers within
both the academic and nonacademic sectors, using their skills in various ways, including the
following:
RESEARCH AND TEACHING (typically with a Ph.D.)
Colleges/Universities
Government
Medical Centers
216 Developmental
APPLIED/CONSULTING (typically with a Master’s or Ph.D.)
Software Development
Online Content Curation
Marketing
Youth Service (NGO’s)
Child Welfare Agencies
Education: Curriculum & Content
Education: Children’s Museums
Science Writing
Toy Design
SECTION RECAP
Developmental psychologists are well-versed in the key theories of their field. They
can create empirical research methodologies to test new hypotheses, and they analyze the
resulting data. They know how to critically evaluate claims and effectively communicate
findings to other scientists as well as the broader community. In some cases, research
findings become relevant to the development of new programs and interventions, which
themselves must be evaluated empirically before implementation and policy change.
Depending on their chosen career and level of education, people trained in developmental
psychology may apply some or all of these skills in their work.
REFERENCES
Ashcraft, M. H., & Klein, R. (2010). Cognition. Toronto, CA: Pearson Education Canada.
Bagwell, C. L., Newcomb, A. F., & Bukowski, W. M. (1998). Preadolescent friendship and
peer rejection as predictors of adult adjustment. Child Development, 69, 140-153. doi:10.111/
j.1467-8624.1998.tb06139.x
Bartrip, J., Morton, J., & de Schonen, S. (2001). Responses to mother’s face in 3-week to
5-month-old infants. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 19, 219-232. doi: 10.1348/
026151001166047
Bowlby, J. (1953). Child care and the growth of love. M. Fry (Ed.). London, UK: Penguin Books.
Bronfenbrenner, U. (1979). The ecology of human development: Experiments by nature and design.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Brummelman, E., Thomaes, S., Orobio de Castro, B., Overbeek, G., & Bushman, B. J. (2014).
“That’s not just beautiful—that’s incredibly beautiful!”: The adverse impact of inflated
praise on children with low self-esteem. Psychological Science, 25(3), 728–735.
https://doi.org/10.1177/0956797613514251
Bugden, S., & Ansari, D. (2016) Probing the nature of deficits in the ‘Approximate Number
System’ in children with persistent developmental dyscalculia. Developmental Science, 19,
817-33.
Damon, W., & Hart, D. (1988). Self-understanding in childhood and adolescence. Cambridge, UK:
Cambridge University Press.
Donnellan, M. B., Trzesnieswski, K. H., Robins, R. W., Moffitt, T. E., & Caspi, A., (2005). Low
self-esteem is related to aggression, antisocial behavior, and delinquency. Psychological

Science, 16, 328-335. doi:10.1111/j.0956-7976.2005.01535.x
Dunfield, K. A., & Kuhlmeier, V. A. (2013). Classifying prosocial behaviour: Children’s
responses to instrumental need, emotional distress, and material desire. Child Development,
84(5), 1766-1776.
Feigenson, L., Libertus, M. E., & Halberda, J. (2013). Links between the intuitive sense of
number and formal mathematics ability. Child Development Perspectives, 7, 74-79.
Harter, S. (1999). The construction of the self: A developmental perspective. New York, NY:
Guilford Press.
Holobow, N. E., Genesee, F., & Lambert, W. E. (1991). The effectiveness of a foreign language
immersion program for children from different ethnic and social class backgrounds:
Report 2. Applied Psycholinguistics, 12, 179-198.
Klin, A., Lin, D. J., Gorrindo, P., Ramsay, G., & Jones, W. (2009). Two-year-olds with autism
orient to non-social contingencies rather than biological motion. Nature, 459(7244),
257–261.
Lackner, C. L., Sabbagh, M. A., Hallinan, E., Liu, X., & Holden, J. J. (2012). Dopamine receptor
D4 gene variation predicts preschoolers’ developing theory of mind. Developmental Science,
15, 272-280.
Maurer, D. (2017). Critical periods re-examined: Evidence from children treated for dense
cataracts. Cognitive Development, 42, 27-36.
Nelson, C. A. III, Zeanah, C. H., Fox, N. A., Marshall, P. J., Smyke, A. T., & Guthrie, D. (2007).
Cognitive recovery in socially deprived young children: The Bucharest Early Intervention
Project. Science, 318, 1937-1940.
NICHD Early Childcare Network. (1997). The effects of infant child care on infant-mother
attachment security: Results of the NICHD Study of Early Child Care. Child Development,
68, 860-879. doi:10.1111/j.1467-8624.1997.tb01976.x
O’Neill, A. C., Swigger, K., & Kuhlmeier, V. A. (2018). Make The Connection’ parenting skills
program: a controlled trial of associated improvement in maternal attitudes. Journal of
Reproductive and Infant Psychology, 36(5), 536-547. doi: 10.1080/02646838.2018.1497779
Olson, K. R., & Gülgöz, S. (2018). Early findings from the TransYouth Project: Gender
development in transgender children. Child Development Perspectives, 12(2), 93-97.
Osterling, J., & Dawson, G. (1994). Early recognition of children with autism: A study of first
birthday home videotapes. Journal of Autism and Developmental Disorders, 24, 247-257.
Posada, G, Lu, T., Trumbell, J., Trudel, M., Plata, S. J., Pena, P. P., … Lay, K-L. (2013). Is the
secure base phenomenon evident here, there, and anywhere? A cross-cultural study of
child behavior and experts’ definitions. Child Development, 84, 1896-1905.
Poulin-Dubois, D., & Brosseau-Liard, P. (2016). The developmental origins of selective social
learning. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 25(1), 60–64. doi:10.1177/
0963721415613962
Sabbagh, M. A., Bowman, L. C., Evraire, L. & Ito, J. M. (2009). Neurodevelopmental bases of
preschoolers’ theory-of-mind development. Child Development, 80, 1147-1162.
Schellenberg, E. G., & Hallam, S. (2005). Music listening and cognitive abilities in 10 and 11
year olds: The Blur effect. Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, 1060, 202–209.
Schoneveld, E. A., Malmberg, M., Lichtwarck-Aschoff, A., Verheijen, G. P., Engels, R. C., &
Granic, I. (2016). A neurofeedback video game (MindLight) to prevent anxiety in children:
218 Developmental
A randomized controlled trial. Computers in Human Behavior, 63, 321-333. doi: 10.1016/
j.chb.2016.05.005
Siegler, R., Saffran, J. R., Graham, S., Eisenberg, N., DeLoache, J., Gershoff, E., & Leaper, C.
(2018). How children develop (Canadian 5th ed.). New York, NY: Worth Publishers.
Simpkins, S. D., Eccles, J. S., & Becnel, J. N. (2008). The meditational role of adolescents’
friends in relations between activity breadth and adjustment. Developmental Psychology, 44,
1081-1094.
Simpson, J. A., & Belsky, J. (2008.). Attachment theory within a modern evolutionary
framework: Theory, research, and clinical applications. In J. Cassidy & P. R. Shaver (Eds.),
Handbook of attachment: Theory, research, and clinical applications (2nd ed., pp. 131-157). New
York, NY: Guilford.
Sokolowski, H. M., Fias, W., Ononye, C., & Ansari, D. (2017) Are numbers grounded in
a general magnitude processing system? A functional neuroimaging meta-analysis.
Neuropsychologia, 105, 50-69.
Rovee-Collier, C. (1999). The development of infant memory. Current Directions in
Psychological Science, 8, 80-85. doi: 10.1111/1467-8721.00019
Ruffman, T., Slade, L., & Crowe, E. (2002). The relation between children’s and mothers’
mental state language and theory of mind understanding. Child Development, 73, 734-751.
Rutter, M., Beckett, C., Castle, J., Kreppner, J., Stevens, S., & Sonuga-Barke, E. (2009). Policy
and practice implications form the English and Romanian Adoptees (ERA) study: Forty-five key
questions. London, UK: British Association for Adoption and Fostering.
Rutter, M., O’Connor, T. G., & The English and Romanian Adoptees (ERA) Study Team.
(2004). Are there biological programming effects for psychological development? Findings
from a study of Romanian adoptees. Developmental Psychology, 40, 81-94.
Weber-Fox, C., & Neville, H.J. (1996). Maturational constraints on functional specializations
for language processing: ERP and behavioral evidence in bilingual speakers. Journal of
Cognitive Neuroscience, 8, 231-256.
Werker, J., & Tees, R.C. (1984). Cross-language speech perception: Evidence for perceptual
reorganization during the first year of life. Infant Behavior and Development, 7, 49-73.
Wols, A., Lichtwarck-Aschoff, A., Schoneveld, E.A., & Granic, I. (2018). In-game play
behaviours during an applied video game for anxiety prevention predict successful
intervention outcomes. Journal of Psychopathology and Behavioral Assessment, 40, 655-668.
doi:10.1007/s10862-018-9684-4
Xenidou-Dervou, I., Molenaar, D., Ansari, D., van der Schoot, M., & van Lieshout, E. C. (2017)
Nonsymbolic and symbolic magnitude comparison skills as a longitudinal predictors of
mathematical achievement. Learning and Instruction, 50, 1-13.
Zahavi, A. Y., Sabbagh, M. A., Washburn, D., Mazurka, R., Bagby, R. M., … Harkness, K.
L. (2016). Serotonin and dopamine gene variation and theory of mind decoding accuracy
in major depression: A preliminary investigation. PLOSOne. doi:10.1371/
journal.pone.0150872
Zeanah, C. H., Koga, S. F., Simion, B. , Stanescu, A. , Tabacaru, C. L., Fox, N. A., … BEIP
Core Group. (2006). Ethical considerations in international research collaboration: The
Bucharest early intervention project. Infant Mental Health Journal, 27: 559-576. doi:10.1002/
imhj.20107

Kuhlmeier, V. A., Mayne, K., & Craig, W. (2019). Developmental Psychology. In M. E. Norris
(Ed.), The Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science. Kingston, ON: eCampus
Ontario. Licensed under CC BY NC 4.0. Retrieved from
https://ecampusontario.pressbooks.pub/psychologycareers/chapter/developmental/
[9]
NEUROSCIENCE AND CAREERS
John Stead, PhD, Associate Professor, Department of Neuroscience, Carleton University
Alex Wiseman, B.Sc., Department of Neuroscience, Carleton University
Kim Hellemans, PhD, Chair, Instructor III, Department of Neuroscience, Carleton University
WHAT IS NEUROSCIENCE?
Neuroscience is a highly interdisciplinary science that explores the relationship between

the nervous system, behaviour, cognition, and disease. While the study of the nervous
system harkens back to Egyptian times, modern neuroscience combines aspects of
physiology, anatomy, psychology, biology, and mathematics to explore how the nervous
system works at the cellular, molecular, cognitive, and societal level (Squire et al., 2012).
Broadly, neuroscientists are interested in understanding how cells in the brain (primarily
neurons and glia) communicate with one another, how they are organized to form circuits,
how external and internal stimuli influence these circuits, and how they might go awry in
the context of disease or trauma. Recent technological innovations in the 20th century with
regard to both molecular biological and neuroimaging techniques have led to significant
advancements in our understanding of brain function. However, despite these advances,
exactly how the brain combines external and internal signals to create a perceptual reality
remains elusive.
The last 50 years has seen a massive increase in Neuroscience research, incorporating
expertise from a wide range of scientific disciplines. To begin to understand the current state
of neuroscience, it is useful to briefly review some of the major milestones across the history
of research into the nervous system.
HISTORY OF NEUROSCIENCE: SIGNIFICANT SCHOLARLY FINDINGS
th
PRE-18 CENTURY
The study of the brain dates back through millennia (see Kandel, Schwartz, Jessell,
Siegelbaum, & Hudspeth, 2013). The earliest written record referring to the brain dates
220
from the 17th century BC, with an Ancient Egyptian medical text called the Edwin Smith
Papyrus, which describes the symptoms associated with head injuries in two patients. Early
descriptions of basic neuroanatomy have been found in Egyptian texts from the 3rd and 4th
centuries BC, including reference to the cerebrum, cerebellum and ventricles. The idea that
the brain was the physical location of the mind was suggested as early as the 5th century
BC by the Greek philosophers Alcmaeon of Croton and Hippocrates. This relationship
between brain and mind was not universally accepted however, with Aristotle (4th century
BC) believing that the brain acted to cool the blood, with intelligence instead located in
the heart. The importance of the relationship between the brain and body was highlighted
by the Roman physician Galen in the 2nd century AD, who correctly identified 7 of the 12
cranial nerves, proposing that these nerves carry fluid from the brain towards the rest of the
body. While further detailed characterization of the anatomy of the central nervous system
would take place over the next 1500 years, including the contributions in 14th century by de
Luzzi and da Vigevano, in the 15th-16th century by da Vinci, Vesalius and in the 17th century
by Willis, substantial advancements in understanding the detailed functionality of nervous
tissue would not be seen until the late 18th century.
th th
18 TO MID-19 CENTURY
Luigi Galvani (1737–1798) was an Italian physician who first discovered the link between
electricity and activity of the body. By applying static electricity to a nerve in the leg of
a dissected frog he revealed that electrical stimulation could produce contraction of the
leg muscles. These experiments represent the origin of the discipline of electrophysiology.
Demonstration that the brain and not the heart was the physical location of the ‘mind’ was
not achieved until the 19th century, in part through the work of the French physiologist
Jean Pierre Flourens (1794-1867). Working with rabbits and pigeons, Flourens lesioned areas
of the brain and found impairments in sensory and motor skills. His work however was
consistent with the prevailing view at that time that the brain was a unitary and indivisible
organ, and that specific functions were not localized to specific brain areas. This view was
ultimately challenged by explorations of linguistic deficiencies in humans. In the mid-19th
century, the French neurologist Paul Broca described a patient who has suffered stroke
resulting in specific impairments in his ability to speak, although his ability to understand
language was seemingly unaffected. Following the death of the patient, Broca undertook a
post-mortem examination and identified a specific region of the left frontal lobe that was
damaged. Further studies of a total of eight similar individuals with similar impairments
and similar patterns of damage led Broca to the conclusion that specific functions, such as
language, are associated with specific areas of the brain.
th
LATE 19 CENTURY
A few decades later, work from the Italian biologist Camillo Golgi (1843-1926) would
produce a watershed in our conceptualization of the organization of tissue in the brain. In
the 1870s, Golgi invented a procedure for staining brain tissue with silver chromate salts.
This technique, still widely used today, has the remarkable effect of completely staining a
small subset (1-5%) of neurons in the brain. There is still no clear explanation for why some
cells take up this stain while others do not. This technique was employed extensively by
222 Neuroscience
Santiago Ramón y Cajal beginning in 1887, allowing him to detail the shapes of hundreds
of individual neurons across many different parts of the brain. This led Cajal to various
conclusions including that brain tissue was a network of individual cells, with individual cells
varying dramatically in their shapes and complexities depending on their location within
the brain. Despite this morphological variability, neurons all seemed to have a cell body
to which were connected two types of process, with many branching dendrites providing
the input to the neuron, and a single axon providing the output from the neuron. These
observations were used by Cajal to strongly support the neuron doctrine, that the neuron
is the fundamental unit of signalling in nervous systems. Golgi and Cajal were awarded
the Nobel Prize in Physiology or Medicine in 1906, for their pioneering contributions to
understanding of the fine anatomy and organization of neural tissue. The legacy of these
early microscopic anatomical studies is still clearly visible in neuroscience textbooks today,
most of which still carry drawings of cells made by Golgi or Cajal, and invariably include
images of Golgi-stained cells.
In the late 19th century, Emil du Bois-Reymond, Johannes Peter Müller, and Hermann von
Helmholtz demonstrated that these neurons were electrically excitable and were therefore
likely to be the cells carrying those signals that were first identified by Galvani. Furthermore,
they found that electrically excited neurons were able to create changes in the electrical
states of other nearby neurons.
th st
20 TO EARLY 21 CENTURY
The question of exactly what caused the transmission of electrical activity from one
neuron to another was finally answered in 1921 by the German pharmacologist Otto Loewi
(1873-1961). In what has become a very famous experiment, Loewi took a frog heart which
was bathed in a saline solution and electrically stimulated it via the vagus nerve, causing the
heart to beat more slowly. He then took some of the surrounding solution and applied it to a
second heart that had not been electrically stimulated and found that this caused the second
heart to also beat more slowly. He concluded that electrical stimulation of the heart caused
the release of a chemical into solution, and this chemical by itself was sufficient to stimulate
the second heart to beat more slowly. The chemical was later identified as acetylcholine,
which was the first of many neurotransmitters that would ultimately be identified. For this
research, Loewi was awarded the Nobel Prize in Physiology or Medicine in 1936, together
with Sir Henry Dale who was able to demonstrate that the active chemical from Leowi’s
experiments was indeed acetylcholine. Subsequent work by Sherrington found that these
chemical messengers were usually released at small specialized structures called synapses,
where chemical messages allowed one neuron to either excite or inhibit another; research
for which Sherrington was awarded the Nobel in 1932.
By the 1930s, an emerging picture of the central nervous system had thus been established.
The brain was the physical location of the mind, and controlled thought, sensation and
movement. Brain tissue was composed of individual neurons each of which had an input
and an output. Information was transmitted along neurons in the form of electrical
impulses, with intercellular communication mediated by chemical messengers which we
now call neurotransmitters. The last century has built upon this foundation with
extraordinarily rapid advances in our understanding of the nervous system. Any summary
of these advances will by its nature be very incomplete. We here choose to review progress
by focusing exclusively on those neuroscientists whose research has been awarded the Nobel
Prize in Physiology or Medicine. Names and dates of Nobel prize awards are indicated in
parentheses below after “NP”. See www.nobelprize.org for all awards.
The 20th century saw enormous advances in our understanding of neuronal
communication, both in terms of how information is transmitted along an individual cell,
and also between different cells. New techniques that allowed visualization and recording
of electrical signals were developed in the 1920, and different neurons were shown to
transmit electrical signals at different speeds, depending on the thickness of the neuron (NP:
Erlanger & Gasser, 1944). These tools led to an elegant series of experiments by Hodgkin
and Huxley that elucidated the molecular basis of electrical signaling. Using the giant axon
of the squid they were able to record electrical potential across the neuronal membrane.
By manipulating the ionic solution in which the neuron was bathed, and the electrical
potential across the membrane, while recording the magnitude of current flowing across
the membrane, they developed a model of how an electrical impulse is produced and
propagated along neuronal axons, mediated by the flow of different types of charged ions
both along and through the membrane. Eccles extended these findings by describing how
electrical activity at the synapse could lead to excitation or inhibition of adjacent cells (NP:
Eccles, Hodgkin Huxley, 1963). Elucidation of the properties of individual ion channels that
underlie changes in electrical currents across neuronal membranes was finally achieved
through development of the patch-clamp technique, which allowed recording of electrical
activity across microscopically small areas of cell membranes (NP: Neher & Sakmann, 1991).
In parallel with the detailed characterization of electrical properties of neurons, other
neuroscientists were focused on understanding the basis of the chemical signals that
mediated communication between neurons at the synapse. Building upon the earlier work
of Loewi and Dale which identified acetylcholine as the first neurotransmitter, von Euler and
Axelrood described a second neurotransmitter norepinephrine, which functioned (in part)
to regulate blood pressure, and made the important observation that some antidepressants
acted by blocking the reuptake of the neurotransmitter at the synapse. Katz demonstrated
that neurotransmitters were stored in small vesicles in one neuron, with vesicles released
into the synapse following electrical stimulation, in a mechanism that required changes in
intracellular calcium signalling (NP: Katz, von Euler, Axelrod, 1970). The complex process of
vesicle release was carefully elucidated by Südhof, Rothman, Schekman (NP: 2013). Many
additional neurotransmitters were also identified by other researchers including dopamine,
the deficiency of which was associated with Parkinson’s disease, leading to novel therapies
for the disorder. Synaptic signalling was further refined with an understanding that while
some neurotransmitters result in electrical changes in target cells, others change the
chemical signalling environment of their targets, including mediating changes in synaptic
strength as a form of learning and memory (NP: Carlsson, Greengard, Kandel, 2000).
The above studies describe how signals move along neurons, and between closely adjacent
neurons. However, signals can also be transmitted across much larger distances, in some
cases by hormones that are released by the brain and that act on neuronal and non-neuronal
targets throughout the body. Guillemin and Schally identified the specific factors that were
released by the brain that cause the release of hormones from the pituitary gland at the
base of the brain. To allow the effects of such hormones to be characterized, Rosalyn Yalow
developed a technique that combined radioactive isotopes with highly specific antibodies
to track levels of such hormones in the body (NP: Guillemin, Schally, & Yalow, 1977). In
224 Neuroscience
addition to hormones released by the brain acting on non-neuronal tissue, extensive work
characterized the effect of other factors released by non-neuronal tissue on the brain. For
example, Levi-Montalcini identified nerve growth factor (NGF) – a substance isolated from
tumours in mice that would cause growth of the nervous system in chick embryos. This
formed the basis of detailed characterization of the role of various growth factors in the
development and adaptation of the nervous system (NP: Cohen & Levi-Montalcini, 1986).
Beyond understanding the functionality of individual molecules and cells of the nervous
system, other neuroscience pioneers explored various systems, including sensory systems
by which the brain receives information from the outside world, and motor systems by
which the brain acts on and interacts with the outside world. As an example of motor
systems, early work on anesthetized cats revealed that weak electrical stimulation of the
hypothalamic region of the brain could produce complex behavioural responses including
both defensive and aggressive behaviours (NP: Hess & Moniz, 1949). For sensory systems,
Nobel prizes have been awarded for the elucidation of both visual and olfactory systems.
Collectively, Granit, Hartline and Wald pioneered research that enhanced our
understanding of the operation of the retina, including characterizing chemical changes that
resulted from exposure to photons of light, the presence of different types of photosensitive
cells resulting in colour vision, and how signals received by nearby retinal cells are compared
within the retina to highlight contrasts in our visual fields (NP: Granit, Hartline, & Wald,
1967). In the following decades, Hubel and Wiesel explored how these retinal signals were
then processed by the brain, with separate processing streams focused on different aspects
of the visual input such as movement, contrast, and linear orientation (NP: Hubel & Wiesel,
1981). Research on the olfactory system was awarded the Nobel in 2004, for research
demonstrating that the rich diversity of smells that are detectable are the result of the
combined actions of hundreds of different chemical receptors called olfactory receptors,
which in turn are the product of hundreds of different olfactory receptor genes. Individual
smells are the result of the combined signalling of different odorants across a wide spectrum
of different receptors (NP: Axel & Buck, 2004).
Other advances of the last century that led to receipt of the Nobel Prize include an
understanding of functional differences between the left and right hemispheres of the brain
(NP: Sperry, 1981), characterization of prions as agents of infectious disease (NP: Blumberg &
Gajdusek, 1976; NP: Prusiner, 1997), and an understanding of how specific cells (termed place
cells and grid cells) in the hippocampus and nearby entorhinal cortex contribute to the brain
developing an internal map of the surrounding environment, and one’s location within that
environment (NP: O’Keefe, Moser, & Moser, 2014).
The above description of neuroscience advances represents the research of a small
number of exceptionally talented and celebrated neuroscientists, and of course represents
a small fraction of the research output for the discipline. For example, each year, >20,000
neuroscientists meet at the annual Society for Neuroscience conference to discuss their
recent finding and celebrate our discipline. While much of the research is not considered
directly applied, basic research can potentially lead to various societal changes, both in the
present and anticipated for the future.
BRANCHES OF NEUROSCIENCE
Modern neuroscience can be broadly organized into several major branches:

1) Cellular and Molecular neuroscience

2) Systems Neuroscience
3) Cognitive and Behavioural Neuroscience
4) Social and Translational Neuroscience.
CELLULAR AND MOLECULAR NEUROSCIENCE
Cellular and Molecular neuroscientists are focused on understanding how cells of the
nervous system express and respond to molecular signals. These scientists typically employ
techniques and concepts of molecular biology to study how the brain develops, how cells
communicate with one another, how genes and the environment might influence these
processes, and how the brain can change and adapt (“neuroplasticity”) over the course of
one’s lifetime.
SYSTEMS NEUROSCIENCE
Systems Neuroscience is a branch of neuroscience focused on understanding how

different cell groups in the nervous system work together to create circuits, or pathways that
have a functional outcome. For example, a systems neuroscientist might ask how specific
anatomical regions and/or cell groups are involved in the higher order cognitive processes
of learning and memory, or sensory functions such as vision. One branch of systems
neuroscience is neuroethology, which involves the study of non-human model organisms
to explore how certain sensory or cognitive functions exist in other species. By contrast,
neuropsychologists explore how specific neural substrates may be implicated in human
behaviour (and how damage to specific brain regions may yield unique deficits in cognition
or behaviour).
COGNITIVE NEUROSCIENCE
Cognitive neuroscience is the third major Neuroscience branch and emerged out the
fields of psychology and computer science. Cognitive neuroscientists are interested in
understanding how specific brain circuits may relate to higher order psychological functions
such as learning and memory, language, and thought. The field of cognitive neuroscience
has benefited greatly from advances in neuroimaging techniques such as functional
magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI), positron emission tomography (PET) and diffusion
tensor imaging (DTI), in addition to electroencephalography (EEG). Behavioural
neuroscientists (also known as physiological or biological psychologists) employ basic
techniques of biology and chemistry to study the function of the nervous system, with a
specific application to how cells and cell circuits relate to all aspects of behaviour. Most of
the experimental literature has employed model organisms such as rodents or non-human
primates, with more recent research using molecular biological techniques to explore how
genes and/or epigenetics may modulate behaviour.
SOCIAL AND TRANSLATIONAL NEUROSCIENCE
Social and translational neuroscience are the most recently developed fields of
226 Neuroscience
neuroscience. Social neuroscience borrows heavily from social psychology and seeks to
understand how specific brain substrates, circuits, signals, and / or genes are related to
behaviour, with an emphasis on domains of social behaviour. As humans are primarily a
social species, this field has a focus on how higher order cognitive domains such as language
and thought, as well as pathological conditions such as depression, may influence, and be
influenced by, social behaviour. Related to social neuroscience, translational neuroscience
is a field of study which translates study and knowledge of neuroscience to clinical
applications. Translational neuroscientists are interested in applying technological advances
in the field of neuroscience to address various societal needs, including novel treatments or
therapies for neurological and psychiatric disease.
METHODS IN NEUROSCIENCE
Neuroscientists working within each of the major branches would typically apply a
different set of techniques to answer questions about the brain (See Table 1 for a summary of
some of the more common techniques). For example, while neuroscientists in general may
be concerned with determining the neural basis for clinical depression, molecular-, systems-
, cognitive-, and social-neuroscientists will employ differing techniques and methods to
explore how proteins, cells, circuits, and brain regions may each be implicated in the
aetiology of the disease.
CELLULAR AND MOLECULAR NEUROSCIENCE
A molecular neuroscientist may focus heavily on the application of molecular biology to

the nervous system to answer questions regarding the pathophysiology of depression. For
instance, they might be interested in identifying key changes in gene expression that are
associated with depressive symptoms. This could be achieved by analysing expression levels
of thousands of genes in various regions of the human brain using post-mortem tissues
derived from individuals with and without depression. If the expression level of a specific
gene was consistently higher or lower in the brains of depression patients compared with
controls, that suggests that the gene may have a functional role in depression. These genetic
profiles can also give us hints as to which proteins may be increased or decreased, and in
which specific area of the brain. Furthermore, finding a biomarker that strongly correlates
with depression has high diagnostic value in research and in medicine – a biomarker is
an easily detectable molecule in our body that is correlated with, and used to predict the
presence of disease, infection, symptom, or toxic exposure. To be useful, the biomarker
must be detectable in tissues that can be easily obtained from patients (typically saliva, urine
or blood). There are extensive interactions between the central nervous system and the
periphery – our bodies can tell us numerous things about our brains. As such, a molecular
neuroscientist might be interested in searching tissues outside of the central nervous system
for candidate biomarkers for the diagnosis of depression.
A major component of molecular neuroscience involves the manipulation of genes within
model organisms (rats, mice, zebrafish) in order to understand the function of that gene,
including potential functions in the development of disease. Manipulations include
changing the amount of gene product, changing the timing or location of gene expression,
or changing the actual protein product that is generated by the gene. Molecular
neuroscientists might therefore be interested in studying one of the differentially expressed

genes identified through gene expression studies. Potential research questions might
include, “What is the importance of this gene during development?”, “If we restore this gene
back to ‘normal’ levels, what does it do to depressive-like symptoms?”, or “If we change
gene expression levels in a similar manner to those that were observed in gene expression
studies, does it induce depressive-like behaviours?”. Answering these questions requires the
genetic engineering of non-human animals, a technique which had grown in prevalence
over the last two decades as the technology becomes increasingly sophisticated, reliable and
affordable.
While genetic manipulations can alter the amount, location, or sequence of a protein,
there are other methods for manipulating protein functions within cells. Pharmacological
manipulations can include the use of competitive agonists (which activate proteins),
competitive antagonists (which inactivate proteins), and neutralizing antibodies that
interfere with the ability of specific molecules to bind to their specific receptors. Whether
by genetic-engineering, or pharmacological manipulation, molecular neuroscientists are
concerned with the molecular and cellular changes that underpin diseases. Other techniques
in the arsenal of the molecular neuroscientist include using radiolabelled tracers to visualize,
in real-time, the movement of neurotransmitter-containing vesicles down an axon. Use of
fluorescent or bioluminescent markers to visualize specific interactions between individual
molecules (the fluorescence resonance energy transfer [FRET] or bioluminescence
resonance energy transfer [BRET] techniques), such as for measuring the recruitment of
receptors to the membrane, the coupling of a ligand to its receptor, the coupling of two or
more receptors, and the change in conformation of an existing receptor. Researchers use
microdialysis to measure the concentration of a specific molecule in the synapse between
two neurons or use retrograde and anterograde tracers to determine the physical pathways
linking one neuron to another. Ultimately, cellular and molecular neuroscientists interested
in depression might employ a broad range of tools to understand how proteins and cells
are implicated in disease, and whether these changes may represent either the cause or
consequence of the disorder.
SYSTEMS NEUROSCIENCE
Questions about individual cells and molecules may also be of interest to a systems
neuroscientist, but they would typically be exploring how cells and molecules modulate
the function of brain regions, or circuits composed of multiple anatomical and functional
components. One example to illustrate the systems neuroscience approach would be to
investigate the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis, which regulates the release of
the stress hormone cortisol in humans (corticosterone in rodents) and has been heavily
implicated in the aetiology of depression. Release of the stress hormone is mediated by a
cascade of signalling factors released from various organs including the brain and regulated
in a manner that involves multiple different brain regions. As an example, a systems
neuroscientist might explore signalling interactions between the hippocampus and the
hypothalamus (the hippocampus senses levels of stress hormone and suppresses any further
release of the hormone from the hypothalamus). To that end, they may manipulate
hippocampal function in one of many possible ways (including through using a transgenic
animal model, or ablation, or by stereotaxic delivery of a drug to the hippocampus, or
228 Neuroscience
through electrical stimulation; see table 1 for details) and measure consequent changes in
hypothalamic hormone release. This could be followed by post-mortem analyses of brain
tissues by immunohistochemistry to determine whether patterns or levels of expression
of specific proteins has altered in several interconnected brain regions. In the context of
depressive disorders, any or all the above could be explored in the context of how these
manipulations also impact depressive symptoms in model organisms.
COGNITIVE AND BEHAVIOURAL NEUROSCIENCE
In the study of depression, a cognitive neuroscientist could ask questions regarding how
depression might affect activity levels of different regions of the brain, by for example
using imaging techniques to search for changes in metabolic processes of specific brain
regions between depressed patients and healthy controls. Cognitive neuroscientists heavily
rely on modern neuroimaging techniques such as functional magnetic resonance imaging
(fMRI, to measure cerebral blood flow), or positron emission tomography (PET, to measure
the metabolism of glucose within brain regions). While MRI technologies have been used
in diagnostic medicine since the 1970s, novel analysis of MRI sequences using specialized
software developed by computer scientists allows for alternative forms of MRI such as
diffusion tensor imaging (DTI) which allows high resolution mapping of the major
connections that link and allow communication between different regions of the brain.
Electroencephalography (EEG) is another technique that can be used to measure the
electrical activity of the brain. EEGs are an inexpensive means of measuring brain activity
in awake humans. A cognitive neuroscientist might use EEG to explore differences in the
patterns of electrical activity between depressed individuals and healthy controls while they
are engaged in specific cognitive tasks that are designed to assess processes such as attention,
inference, reaction time, working memory, or cognitive flexibility.
Behavioural neuroscience, wherein researchers are concerned primarily with
physiological, genetic, and developmental mechanisms of behaviour, investigates the
influence depression has on behaviour, and often involves use of animal models (such as
rodents or zebrafish). Animal models could be generated by various methods including
selective breeding for a desired trait (such as anxiety or aggression), by genetic mutation
(such as metabolic diseases), or conditioning an animal to elicit a desired behaviour (such
as social defeat paradigms and the production of a socially anxious animal). Behavioural
neuroscientists have developed a wide array of behavioural paradigms to explore different
aspects of depressive-like behaviour including measures of learned helplessness (to model
despair), sucrose preference (to model hedonic feeding), food intake, or locomotor activity.
SOCIAL AND TRANSLATIONAL NEUROSCIENCE
Social neuroscientists are fundamentally interested in how the brain mediates social
interaction; behaviours that are meaningful, elicited by one individual agency, directed
towards another individual agency, and receive a response. Most applicable to depression,
social neuroscience could explore how social behaviours such as work-place deviance
manifest in the neurological condition. Alternatively, social neuroscientists might be
interested in how specific gene polymorphisms influence individual vulnerability to
depression following exposure to bullying – both in humans or non-human animals.
Translational neuroscientists apply basic neuroscientific research relating to structure and

function of the brain in a clinical setting. For example, basic research might indicate that
cerebral stimulation has a significant positive effect on depression. A translational
neuroscientist might thus investigate the use of a transcranial magnetic stimulator (TMS)
as a viable means for brain stimulation to decrease depressive symptoms, and determine
the precise stimulation procedure (electrical frequency, duration, etc.) that generates the
best results in patients. Alternatively, translational neuroscientists might explore new
pharmaceutical drugs for the treatment of psychiatric or neurological disease, determining
appropriate dose and duration of the drug to maximize efficacy. Neurorehabilitation is
another area encompassed in translational neuroscience, wherein researchers develop, test,
and optimize sensory prostheses for the implantation into humans suffering from sensory
loss.
Animal Ethics in Neuroscience Research.
The use of animals in experimental research has always been a point of controversy.
However, the use of animals in research is highly regulated, with usage most carefully
controlled for animals with higher sentience (primates, then other mammals, then other
vertebrates and certain molluscs). As such, research that induces suffering in any capacity
(e.g., pain, adverse changes in psychological states, stress) must be stringently justified, and
will often not be approved. That is, the expected benefits from the proposed research must
outweigh the potential suffering of the animal. Governing the subjective nature of such
decision-making is an institutional animal care committee composed of both scientists
and members of the non-scientific community that decides whether or not the research
merits the use of animals. In Canada, the federal government does not have jurisdiction
to legislate animal experimentation but does exert influence through the Criminal Code of
Canada, Health of Animals Act (1990), and the Canadian Food Inspection Agency. In order
for institutions to be federally funded for animal research they must receive accreditation
from the Canadian Council on Animal Care (CCAC), which is the national peer-reviewed
organization that oversees and implements standards for animal ethics and care. Institutions
that are accredited are eligible to receive funding from federal granting agencies, such as
Natural Sciences and Engineering Research Council (NSERC) Canadian Institute for Health
Research (CIHR), and the Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council of Canada
(SSHRC). In addition, provinces in Canada have legislated their own animal-welfare
protection acts, and similarly operate provincial-level regulatory agencies similar to the
national CCAC body. Because of such system, each research project that includes the use of
animals must first have their proposal approved by their institutions committee, and such
proposals must abide by the standards set out by the CCAC.
230 Neuroscience
Table 1: Examples of common techniques in Neuroscience
Name of the tech-

Description/Purpose of the technique
nique
Imaging and Microscopy
Magnetic resonance Use of strong magnetic fields and electrical currents to visualize brain
imaging (MRI) structure in a non-invasive manner
Functional magnetic
Form of MRI that measures changes in blood flow to brain regions, from
resonance imaging
which localized brain activity can be inferred
(fMRI)
Form of MRI that reveals major pathways of communication between

Diffusion tensor MRI
regions of the brain
Computerized tomogra-
Use of X-rays to visualize brain structure in a non-invasive manner
phy (CT)
Use of X-rays and an injected iodine tracer to visualize blood vessels in

Cerebral angiogram
brain
Positron emission Use of injected radioactive tracers combined with imaging techniques to
tomography (PET) measure metabolic activity in brain
Use of external electrodes on the scalp to measure electrical activity of the

Electroencephalography
cortex
Light microscopy Visualize microscopic brain structure (i.e., neurons, glia)
Visualize microscopic brain structures that have been tagged with a fluo-
Fluorescence
rescent marker, allowing the location of specific known molecules to be
microscopy
seen
Visualize microscopic brain structures at considerably higher magnification

Electron microscopy
than is possible through light microscopy
Rodent behavioural paradigms
Rotarod Measure of coordinated movement
Vertical pole test Measure of balance
Visual cliff assay Measure of visual acuity
Morris water maze Measure of cue-associated spatial learning and memory
Radial arm maze Measure of spatial learning and memory
Novel object recogni-

Measure of non-spatial learning and memory
tion
Social approach/avoid-
Measure of social behaviours
ance
Open field test Measure of anxious behaviour

Name of the tech-

nique
Elevated plus maze Measure of anxious behaviour
Forced swim test Measure of disparity
Tail suspension assay Measure of learned helplessness
Sucrose preference test Measure of anhedonia
Surgical manipulations
Stereotaxic surgery Surgery that reproducibly targets a very specific region of the brain
Introduction of a cannula into a specific region of the brain to allow for

Cannulation
controlled delivery of drug or electrode
Continuously samples extracellular fluid from the brain allowing concentra-

Microdialysis
tion of specific molecules to be determined in real time
Removal/destruction of a specific brain region to investigate normal func-

Ablation
tion of that region
Manipulation of cells and tissues
Living cells are grown in vitro, allowing various manipulations to be tested

Cell culture
in controlled living systems
Use of electrodes placed on or in cells to manipulate and record electrical

Electrophysiology
activity, to explore factors that affect excitability of neurons
Labelled nucleic acid sequences are used to visualize the location and con-
In situ hybridization
centration of RNA molecules generated from specific genes
Labelled antibodies are used to visualize the location and concentration of

Immunohistochemistry
specific proteins in slices of tissue
Labelled antibodies are used to visualize the location and concentration of

Immunocytochemistry
specific proteins in cells
Use of chemicals that travel along cells in the same direction or opposite
Anterograde and retro-
direction compared to the flow of information, in order to determine
grade tracers
anatomical connections between cells
Molecular biology, genetics and genomics
Southern/Northern/ Semi-quantitative methods to detect specific molecules of DNA/RNA/pro-

Western blots teins
Use of an antibody to precipitate a specific protein out of solution, concen-

Immunoprecipitation trating the solution, and potentially identifying other molecules to which
the target protein binds
Enzyme-linked Detection and quantification of peptides, proteins, hormone, and antibod-

immunosorbent assay ies
232 Neuroscience
Name of the tech-

nique
Selective breeding para- Selectively breeding animals over many generations to enrich for genetic
digms variants that may underlie specific traits
Genetic modification of Model organisms have specific genes modified, inserted, or removed, in
animals order to determine the function of the gene
Viral vector-mediated Use of viruses modified to contain specific genetic sequences, in order to
gene transfer introduce gene expression changes into animal tissues
Insertion of light-sensitive receptor into membrane of neurons. Give

Optogenetics
experiment control over neuron excitation/inhibition
Genome-wide associa- Analysis of DNA variation across the genome to screen for genes that
tion studies (GWAS) associate with specific diseases or characteristics
Whole genome Sequencing of the entire genome to screen for mutations, or genetic varia-
sequencing tions that associate with specific diseases or characteristics
Modified DNA sequencing paradigm used to detect epigenetic (methyla-

Bisulphite sequencing
tion) signatures on DNA molecules
Polymerase-chain reac-
Amplification of DNA and RNA molecules
tion (PCR)
PCR-based quantification of DNA/RNA (commonly used for determining

Real-time PCR
levels of gene expression)
RNA-seq/whole tran- High-throughput sequence analysis of RNA extracted from tissues, to

scriptome sequencing determine amounts of all genes expressed in those tissues
The above techniques were often developed in the context of academic research and
remain used in that setting. However, neuroscientists use these and other techniques while
working in a range of different career paths.
NEUROSCIENCE AND CAREERS
WHAT DO NEUROSCIENTISTS DO?
Neuroscientists are scientists who are engaged in activities that seek to improve our
understanding of the nervous system and its relationship to behaviour and/or disease.
Neuroscientists who are principle investigators (and who therefore determine their own
research directions) have typically followed a training path consisting of an undergraduate
degree in Science (B.Sc.) or Arts (B.A.), usually followed by a Master’s degree, then a Ph.D.
in Neuroscience or a related discipline. For those wishing to pursue an academic career, it
is common to complete one or more post-doctoral positions, typically at an internationally
reputed laboratory. Postdoctoral positions (commonly referred to as postdocs) involve
working in the research lab of a principle investigator and leading individual research
projects. Post-doctoral fellows also typically take on supervisory responsibilities for other
members of the research lab, including graduate students. However, unlike undergraduate
or graduate studies, post-doctoral positions do not involve any course work. Instead, the
focus is on acquiring techniques and publishing research. An academic, tenure-track
appointment at a university is the typical desired outcome for people who have pursued
each step of this pathway. However, these jobs have been relatively scarce in the past decade.
In a university environment, neuroscientists may be spread across many different
academic units, and departments fully dedicated to the discipline of Neuroscience are
relatively rare in North America. For example, neuroscientists may be housed in a
department of Psychology, Biology, Pharmacology, Cognitive or Computer Science. From a
programmatic perspective, this can be challenging, as students who wish to obtain a degree
in Neuroscience often may find that their degree has no ‘home base’, and instead consists
of courses that may have a focus on neuroscience, but are housed in multiple, related units.
Further compounding this issue is that neuroscience is not commonly taught in high school
but may sometimes be included as part of a Biology curriculum. As such, many students
graduate from high school not being aware that neuroscience does exist as a discipline of
study. That said, neuroscience has been growing over the last few decades, and is becoming
more defined as a stand-alone discipline.
COMMON MISCONCEPTIONS ABOUT WHAT NEUROSCIENTISTS DO
There are several common misconceptions regarding what neuroscientists do. For
example, it is common to confuse a doctoral (PhD) degree with a medical (MD) degree.
However, neuroscientists (who have earned a PhD) are not trained to deliver therapy and
they do not treat patients with medicine (as would someone with an MD). Neurologists are
specialized medical practitioners who have earned an MD followed by residency training
in neurology. Neurologists treat individuals with neurological disorders such as stroke,
epilepsy, and Parkinson’s disease. Neurosurgeons have earned a medical degree followed by
residency training in neurosurgery; as a surgical profession, neurosurgeons would operate
on patients with any damage or trauma to their nervous systems, e.g., tumor excision.
Similarly, there are branches of psychological practice that often are confused with
neuroscience: Clinical Neuropsychologists are individuals who have earned a PhD in Clinical
Psychology, followed by, or with a specialization in neuropsychology. These individuals have
the training to do both research and clinical practice, though they do not have training in
medicine. Moreover, they are specialized to assess, diagnose, and treat patients with either
congenital or acquired brain injury. Although a fundamental understanding of how the
nervous system works is a key component of each of these above-mentioned disciplines (and
indeed, it is common for someone interested in pursuing one of these careers to complete
a Master’s in Neuroscience prior to completing an MD or Clinical Psychology PhD), it is
important to emphasize that research neuroscientists do not treat or provide therapy to
patients.
COMMON CAREERS IN NEUROSCIENCE
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREES
Students graduating with an undergraduate degree in Neuroscience will have developed

a range of technical and analytical skills, and the ability to synthesize and communicate
234 Neuroscience
research findings in an effective manner. For example, they have developed investigative
and research skills in the collection, organization, analysis and interpretation of data, use
of appropriate laboratory techniques, application of logical reasoning and critical/analytical
thinking, proficiency in computing skills, familiarity with a wide range of scientific/lab
equipment, and extensive oral and written communication skills. They are creative thinkers,
can work effectively both as individuals and as part of a team, and they have advanced
time-management skills. As with most university degree programs, neuroscience is not a
vocational program – it does not lead directly into a specific and defined career. Instead,
training received as an undergraduate provides students with an excellent foundation for a
range of possible careers.
Based on our experience over the last decade, over half of students who graduated with
an undergraduate degree in Neuroscience have secured employment in either a scientific
research setting, in health care, or are in continuing education. Common research paths for
Neuroscience graduates include coordinating clinical research trials or working as research
scientists and research technicians in the government, academia or industry. While many
graduates are therefore directly employed in a scientific environment, other students chose
to pursue graduate degrees in neuroscience or a related discipline (including psychology,
biology, biochemistry, pharmacology, ethics).
GRADUATE DEGREES
Graduate degrees can lead towards careers within academia or increase a student’s
opportunities of employment in non-academic environments. Health care professions are
very popular with Neuroscience graduates. Many students wish to pursue medicine, though
being a doctor is just one of many career options in health. Neuroscience graduates have
successfully pursued continuing education to train in a variety of professions including
psychologists, speech pathologists, occupational therapists, psychologists, medical assistants,
nurses, or polysomnographic technicians. While science, healthcare, and future education
are the main career paths pursued by neuroscience graduates, almost as many of our
graduates have followed alternative routes following graduation, including training as school
teachers, working for government funding agencies, regulatory agencies, or the civil service,
working in knowledge brokerage, law, or following careers as emergency responders (police,
ambulance, firefighters).
TAILORING DEGREES WITH MINORS
In some cases, undergraduate students who have specific career interests are able to tailor
their degrees in a manner that facilitate employment in those areas, such as obtaining
a degree in Neuroscience with a Minor in Law, or a Minor in Social Work, if these
specializations fit their individual career aspirations. In this way, an education in
Neuroscience opens the door to many possible careers, without restricting graduates to a
limited number of career options. While it impossible to predict the major growth areas in
terms of neuroscience career paths, some of the more promising areas for future expansion
are described in detail in the following section.
APPLICATIONS OF NEUROSCIENCE IN SOCIETY
MEDICAL
Over 1000 neurological and neurodegenerative diseases affect the lives of almost 100
million people in the USA alone (Gooch, Pracht, & Borenstein, 2017), and neuroscience
research has led to a diversity of therapeutic approaches to the treatment of diseases
including mood disorders, chronic pain, neurodegeneration, stroke, and addiction. Many
of these treatments are pharmacological, with widespread use of drugs including
antidepressants, anti-anxiety medication, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder
medication, etc., though non-pharmacological treatments have also been supported by
neuroscientific research, including behavioural/lifestyle modification or external brain
stimulation.
Unfortunately, many of the pharmacological interventions have been successful in only
a subset of patients, with individuals often having to try several different treatment paths
before finding one that is successful. This may be due to many disorders being commonly
diagnosed through somewhat imperfect tests, often including self-report measures. A
specific disease, defined by a collection of symptoms, may not be a unitary condition but
instead a spectrum of related disorders, which collectively have a diversity of different
potential origins and associated cellular and molecular signatures. While symptoms may
be similar across individuals, the best route for treatment may be very different. Current
research attempts to better define subsets of patients for various diseases, to facilitate more
efficient targeting of specific treatment to the individual. Understanding the specific cellular
and molecular deficits in an individual may be informative as to which molecules would be
the best targets for pharmacological treatment.
PUBLIC HEALTH: RECREATIONAL DRUGS
Outside of drug development for medical purposes, there is a need for still more
neuroscience research on recreational drugs. Use of legal means to control the misuse of
recreational drugs (i.e., the ‘war on drugs’) has been of limited success, with a growing
interest amongst some nations including Canada towards tolerance and education. We
are continually exposed to the use in society of drugs that alter brain activity including
some drugs that are common and largely accepted (e.g., nicotine, caffeine, alcohol), drugs
prescribed to patients but for which dependency develops (e.g., our current opioid crisis),
classical illegal drugs that stimulate our reward systems (e.g., cocaine, heroin) or alter
consciousness (e.g., amphetamine, MDMA), drugs used to improve performance (e.g., Ritalin
and Adderall for exam performance), or drugs that have been weaponized and used widely
(including the date-rape drugs GHB or rohypnol). An important part of any strategy to deal
with drug use and misuse is to understand the biological effects (both in the short and long
terms) of these various drugs, for which additional neuroscience research and outreach to
the community is required.
PUBLIC HEALTH: MENTAL ILLNESS
On a related topic, one of the most compelling (and difficult to measure directly)
236 Neuroscience
applications of neuroscience on public health has been the impact of increased

understanding of the role of the nervous system in psychiatric and neurological disease.
Indeed, over the last 50 years, we have made great strides in our understanding of how key
neural circuits and signals are disrupted in several disorders, including (but not limited to)
depression, anxiety, schizophrenia, substance use disorders, attention deficit hyperactivity
disorder, and dementias such as Alzheimer’s and Parkinson’s Disease, among others. These
advances have led to not only the development of pharmacotherapeutics for the treatment
of these disorders, but also, crucially, the de-stigmatization of mental health. More
specifically, when we educate the public around the role of brain (dys)function underlying
psychiatric disorders, it can lead to increased awareness and knowledge, and reduced blame
for mental illness (Corrigan & Watson, 2004).
NEUROSCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY: NEURAL INTERFACE DEVICES
In addition to pharmacological interventions, neuroscience research is likely to result in

growth in the number, efficacy and complexity of neural interface devices. Devices are being
developed that both enhance existing sensory inputs (including replacing deficiencies in
inputs) or enhance/replace motor outputs. The range of applications is diverse, from the
purely medical, to military, to recreational. Neurobionics, a rapidly advancing subfield of
neuroscience, explores bionic therapies for sensory and motor impairments.
One example of bionic therapy is for blindness, which affects millions of people
worldwide, with a subset of that population suffering from complete retinal degeneration.
Among potential treatment options is sensory substitution, wherein an inoperable sensory
organ is replaced with an artificial sensor. Most recently, cortical prostheses have taken a leap
forward, featuring arrays that are upwards of 192 electrodes in size that are moulded to the
occipital lobe of experimental subjects. Miniaturized computers connecting the electrode
plates to light-sensing glasses worn by the subject can simulate a small, but promising,
degree of vision (Maghbami, Sodagar, Lashay, Riazi-Esfahani, & Riazi-Esfahani, 2014). There
are currently several groups of researchers actively engineering and developing visual
prosthetics to better the quality of life for those suffering from blindness, Groups such as
the Artificial Retina (University of S. California, University of California), The Boston Retinal
Implant (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Massachusetts Eye and Ear Infirmary),
C-Sight (Shanghai Jiao-Tong University), Polystim (University of Montréal), Japanese
Consortium for an Artificial Retina (Osaka University), and Optoelectronic Retinal Prosthesis
(Stanford University) each demonstrate unique and successful efforts to enhance vision for
those impaired. Many of these projects combine an external visual processing source (i.e., a
camera attached to the frames of glasses), a processor that breaks down visual images into
similar bits of information that the brain uses to construct visual images, and a transducer
that turns such bits of information into patterns of activation on the microarray of
electrodes which then stimulates the visual cortex. Other prostheses exist that are also
integrating neural interfaces, such as prosthetic hands that give amputees a functional hand,
or cochlear implants that restore function back to the deaf and hearing-impaired.
NEUROSCIENCE AND THE LAW
The legal and ethical ramifications of current and future research in neuroscience are
likely to be diverse, from which a few examples will be introduced. In criminology,

identification of structural and/or functional correlates of criminal behaviour will lead
to questions of free will and determinism, and debates about the concept of criminal
responsibility. Remaining with the judicial system, neuroscientific research of memory has
clear implications for reliability and accuracy of witness testimony. Within pharmacology,
there is limited and contentious evidence to support the efficacy of current brain-enhancing
drugs (termed “nootropics”) such as Ritalin and Adderall, yet such drugs are widely used
in college campuses to improve performance. If the efficacy of these, or other drugs, was
clearly demonstrated, it may lead to the need for drug testing analogous to that employed in
competitive sport, especially in the context of examinations that are viewed as a component
of competitive entry to certain career or funding opportunities.
The last decade has seen dramatic proliferation of wearable biometric technology. Most
of our cell phones are quietly collecting information about our daily activity. Some phones
can sense when you are looking directly at the screen. Our watches may be constantly
collecting data on our heart rate, while we may be inputting data on our sleep patterns,
our meditation routines, and/or our patterns of eating and drinking, to name a few. There
are important ongoing conversations around the ownership, privacy and security of these
data. The coming decades are likely to see growth of biometric inputs to incorporate limited
neural data – data that, as with heart rate, we are often unaware of inputting to our devices.
FUTURE CONSIDERATIONS FOR THE DISCIPLINE OF NEUROSCIENCE
The discipline of neuroscience has clearly grown and thrived over the last number of
decades. Recent announcements of international, federal and local funding opportunities
related to neuroscience and brain health suggest that the study of the nervous system
and its application to several branches of society will continue to grow. For example, the
Human Brain Project, an ongoing initiative from the European Union, was the winner of
one of the largest European scientific funding competitions, with an estimated cost of $1.19
billion euros between 2013-2023. Similarly, the White House BRAIN initiative, announced
in 2013, saw an initial investment of over $100 million dollars (US) in the development
of neurotechnologies. Despite the dramatic advances in our understanding of the nervous
system over the last century, we are just starting to make sense of the enormous complexity
that underlies the structure and function of the human brain and how it underlies all
thought, behaviour and perception.
REFERENCES
Corrigan, P. W., & Watson, A. C. (2004). At Issue: Stop the stigma: Call mental illness a brain
disease. Schizophrenia Bulletin, 30(3), 477-479.
Gooch, C. L., Pracht, E., & Borenstein, A R. (2017). The burden of neurological disease in the
United States: A summary report and call to action. Annals of Neurology, 81(4), 479-484.
Kandel, E. R., Schwartz, J. H., Jessell, T. M., Siegelbaum, S. A., & Hudspeth, A. J. (Eds.). (2013).
Principles of neural science (5th ed.). New York, NY: McGraw Hill
Maghami, M. H., Sodagar, A. M., Lashay, A., Riazi-Esfahani, H., & Riazi-Esfahani, M. (2014).
Visual prostheses: The enabling technology to give sight to the blind. Journal of Ophthalmic
and Visual Research, 9(4) 494-505.
238 Neuroscience
Squire, L., Berg, D., Bloom, F. E., du Lac, S., Ghosh, A., & Spitzer, N. C. (Eds.). (2012).
Fundamental neuroscience (4th ed.). Cambridge, MA: Academic Press.
LATEST PUBLICATIONS OF NEUROBIONICS GROUPS
ARTIFICIAL RETINA
Zhou, D. D., Dorn, J. D., & Greenberg, R.J. (2013). The Argus II Retinal Prosthesis System: An
Overview. Proceedings of the IEEE International Conference on Multimedia and Expo Workshops
(ICMEW), USA, 1, 1-6. doi: 10.1109/ICMEW.2013.6618428
BOSTON IMPLANT
Kelly, S., Shire, D. B., Chen, J., Gingerich, M. D., Cogan, S. F., Drohan, W. A., … Rizzo, J. F.
(2013) Developments on the Boston 256-Channel Retinal Implant. Proceedings of the IEEE
International Conference on Multimedia and Expo Workshops (ICMEW), USA, 1, 1-6. doi: 10.1109/
ICMEW.2013.6618445
C-SIGHT
Lu, Y., Yan, Y., Chai, X., Ren, Q., Chen, Y., & Li, L. (2013). Electrical stimulation with a
penetrating optic nerve electrode array elicits visuotopic cortical responses in cats. Journal
of Neural Engineering, 10(3), 036022. https://doi.org/10.1088/1741-2560/10/3/036022
OPTOELECTRONIC RETINAL
Mathieson, K., Loudin, J., Goetz, G., Huie, P., Wang, L., Kamins, T. I., … Palanker, D. (2012).
Photovoltaic retinal prosthesis with high pixel density. Nature Photonics, 6(6), 391–397.
https://doi.org/10.1038/nphoton.2012.104
JAPANESE CONSORTIUM
Ohta, J., Noda, T., Sasagawa, K., Tokuda, T., Terasawa, Y., Kanda, H., & Fujikado, T. (2013). A
CMOS microchip-based retinal prosthetic device for large numbers of stimulation in wide
area. IEEE International Symposium on Circuits and Systems (ISCAS), 642–645. https://doi.org/
10.1109/ISCAS.2013.6571924
POLYSTIM
Mohammadi, H. M., Ghafar‐Zadeh, E., & Sawan, M. (2012). An Image Processing Approach
for Blind Mobility Facilitated Through Visual Intracortical Stimulation. Artificial Organs,
36(7), 616–628. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1525-1594.2011.01421.x

Stead, J., Wiseman, A., & Hellemans, K. (2019). Neuroscience and careers. In M. E. Norris
(Ed.), The Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science. Kingston, ON: eCampus
Ontario. Licensed under CC BY NC 4.0. Retrieved from
https://ecampusontario.pressbooks.pub/psychologycareers/chapter/neuroscience-and-
careers
[10]
INDUSTRIAL/ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
E. Kevin Kelloway, Saint Mary’s University
If you have ever held, or applied for, a job, you are already acquainted with the subject
matter of Industrial/Organizational (I/O) psychology. Since the beginning of the 20th
Century, Industrial/Organizational psychologists have been studying, and working with,
individuals and organizations on various aspects of the employment relationship. For most
of us, paid employment will be one of the defining roles of our lives – affecting both our
individual health and well-being (see Kelloway & Day, 2005; Warr, 1987) as well as the quality
of our experience in other roles such as spouse or parent (e.g., Barling, 1990). Every one of
us who works also has an employer – some individual or organization who pays for our
services and has a legitimate interest in ensuring that we work effectively and efficiently.
The Canadian Society for Industrial/Organizational Psychology (CSIOP), defines I/O
psychology as:
Industrial-Organizational Psychology is a field of both scientific research and

professional practice that aims to further the welfare of people by: understanding
the behaviour of individuals and organizations in the work place: helping individuals
pursue meaningful and enriching work; and assisting organizations in the effective
management of their human resources. (Kline, 1996, p. 206)
There are two critical aspects of this definition. First, as noted above I/O psychology is
focused on both individual (i.e., helping individuals pursue meaningful and enriching work)
and organizational (i.e., effective management of human resources) goals. Kline (1996, p.
206) suggests that I/O psychologists might be involved in:
– carrying out task analyses,
– determining the knowledge, skills, abilities and personal characteristics needed for
certain jobs
– providing recommendations on how to assess potential employees or actually
240
conducting the assessments,
– providing guidance on how to train employees,
– assessing work performance and motivate employees,
– determining group effects on work performance,
– examining communication within and commitment to the organization,
– understanding the human-machine system and the complexities of their

interactions.
– assisting in the selection and training of competent leaders,
– assisting in career assessment and career development
– assisting in changing the organization to become more effective, and
– assisting in managing relationships between employees and managers
Although the distinction is a bit arbitrary, these tasks correspond to a traditional

distinction between industrial – or personnel – psychology (e.g., task analysis, employee
selection, training) and organizational psychology (e.g., leadership, group dynamics,
organizational change) that emerged as a result of the historical development of the field (see
below). In practice, individuals may specialize in one or more areas, but training standards
adopted by both the U.S. based Society for Industrial/Organizational Psychology (SIOP) and
CSIOP ensure that I/O psychologists are trained in all of these areas.
Aside from this content focus, one of the most important aspects of the CSIOP definition
is that it defines I/O psychology as comprising both professional practice and scientific
research. This perspective is known as the scientist-practitioner model. As psychologists,
we are trained as social scientists who draw on, and contribute to, the theories and methods
of psychology. Most I/O psychologists have extensive training in scientific research and
research methodology. At the same time, many of the questions addressed in I/O
psychology (e.g., how do we hire the best employees? How do we stop workplace bullying?
How can we reduce job stress?) are immensely practical.
Individuals can choose to enact their role as scientist-practitioners in a variety of ways.
For example, I/O psychologists who work as faculty in universities may emphasize “science”
– focusing their efforts on research and publication. Those who work in Human Resource
departments or as consultants may be more attuned to the concerns of practice and less
involved with research and publication. Still others in the field, consciously adopt a
boundary spanning role attempting to engage in professional practice while continuing to
do research. However one choses to enact the role, all I/O psychologists share a common
body of knowledge that includes both science and practice.
THE HISTORY AND CONTEXT OF I/O PSYCHOLOGY
Given this scientist-practitioner perspective, it is not surprising that I/O psychology

developed as an outgrowth of two sets of influences. First, the growth of industrialization
242 Industrial/Organizational
(particularly in the U.S.), and the practical questions it gave birth to, shaped the direction
and focus of I/O psychology. Second, the development of psychology and the experimental
method inevitably contributed to, and shaped, I/O psychology.
It is not at all coincidental that the first two books in I/O psychology were entitled
Increasing Human Efficiency in Business (Scott, 1911) and Psychology and Industrial Efficiency
(Münsterberg, 1913). In the early 1900’s, economic, and social trends (Viteles, 1932) resulted
in a glorification of industrialization and progress. Any field that claimed to advance the
interests and tenets of capitalism was widely accepted. Psychology itself was undergoing
a similar revolutionary change. The growth of the experimental method and a focus on
individual differences paved the way for much of what would subsequently be called I/O
psychology. Science was increasingly seen as the answer for all problems, and the application
of the scientific method to more practical problems was only a matter of time.
One of the great early experimentalists was the German psychologist Wilhelm Wundt.
His lab was to be the starting point for most of I/O psychology. Emil Kraepelin, for example,
trained under Wundt and in his own research became interested in the study of work
performance and fatigue (1896). Wundt also trained Walter Dill Scott and Hugo
Münsterberg, two figures who are often seen as the first I/O psychologists.
After earning his PhD in the Wundt lab in 1900, Walter Dill Scott moved back to the United
States, where he became a professor at Northwestern University. He did research on a variety
of practical problems including the application of psychological principles to advertising
and personnel selection. Eventually he became the first person in North America to receive
the title of professor of applied psychology (Vinchur & Koppes, 2007).
Hugo Münsterberg was both a physician and a psychologist who trained in Wundt’s
experimental psychology lab. As a professor at Harvard University he became the most
noted promoter of applied psychology, writing more than 20 books on the topic between
1906 and 1916. His book Psychology and Industrial Efficiency (Münsterberg, 1913) is often cited
as the first text for I/O psychologists.
As Koppes and Pickren (2007) note, many other individuals at the same time were
becoming interested in problems of industry. Walter Bingham (the founder of the Carnegie
Tech applied psychology program), Arthur Kornhauser (a graduate of Carnegie Tech who
pioneered the study of job stress and mental health), Louis Leon Thurstone (a pioneer
in measurement theory and statistics but who also worked in selection and vocational
guidance), and James McKeen Cattell (the founder of The Psychological Corporation, the
first I/O consulting firm) were all interested in applying psychology to work.
America’s entry into World War I dramatically boosted interested in applying psychology
to practical problems. The American military needed to select an unprecedented number of
applicants and to place them into jobs in the most efficient way possible. Robert Yerkes, then
president of the American Psychological Association and a professor at Harvard, worked
with the military to develop a new test – Army Alpha – based on the newly developed
practice of standardized intelligence testing. An alternate version of the test – Army Beta –
was developed to accommodate recruits who could not read or write. In addition to being
the training ground for many who would become well-known I/O psychologists, the success
of the Army testing program convinced many of the value of selection tests. When military
commanders hung up their uniforms and returned to industry, they continued the practice
of selection testing in their civilian jobs.
After the war, research and practice in I/O psychology was focused on selection and
placement – this was to change with the conduct of a series of studies at the Hawthorne
Works of the Western Electric Company (Highhouse, 2007). The Western Electric Company
wanted to demonstrate that their lamps (that produced more light than did those of their
competitors) would benefit industry. They conducted a series of experiments that varied
illumination levels to see if productivity would also change. Although it is difficult to
determine the exact details of the studies (Highhouse), the researchers found that
productivity improved regardless of the change in the level of illumination. If the factory
was made brighter, productivity went up. If they made the factory darker, productivity also
went up!
One explanation of this puzzling set of results became known as the Hawthorne effect -i.e.,
do anything and it works. Simply by paying more attention to the workers, the researchers
may have inadvertently produced an increase in productivity. The existence of Hawthorne
effects continues to be debated (Adair, 1984) but the most important outcome of the
Hawthorne studies is that researchers were led to think about other aspects of the workplace
– including small group dynamics, stress and job attitudes. These new research foci became
the basis of organizational psychology and eventually would merge with industrial
psychology (i.e., selection and personnel practices) to form the field of industrial/
organizational psychology.
During World War II psychologists again were active in selection for the military, but
they also became involved in a host of other activities. The design of training and training
techniques, as well as the optimal design of workplaces and equipment, were also foci of
enquiry. Samuel Stouffer (1949) summarized much of this work in his book The American
Soldier, which included consideration of topics that would be familiar to any modern-
day organizational psychologist—job satisfaction, motivation, perceived justice, and group
cohesion.
The end of World War II again meant that many people returned to their civilian jobs
with the memory of psychological techniques and interventions that had proven successful
in dealing with many human resource issues. As industry flourished, so did I/O psychology.
In 1945, Division 14 (Industrial and Business Psychology) of the American Psychological
Association was formed, and by 1950, the field of industrial/organizational psychology was
firmly established.
The passage of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 in the United States was a major impetus to
the further development of the field. The Act prohibits discrimination in employment on a
variety of grounds and I/O psychologists were instrumental in devising means of [a] showing
that such discrimination existed and [b] developing ways to implement nondiscriminatory
practices. Around the same time, individuals began to demand more meaningful work,
and psychologists such as Frederick Herzberg argued that there was an economic logic
to the demand, suggesting that “happy workers were productive workers.” Although this
hypothesis is still being debated today (Cropanzano & Wright, 2001), it led to an explosion
of job satisfaction research. Indeed, by 1976, Locke had identified more than 5,000 empirical
articles dealing with the topic of job satisfaction.
In 1965, Kornhauser published The Mental Health of Industrial Workers, one of the first major
investigations into job stress. Subsequent research verified his findings and led the U.S.
Secretary of State to commission the widely influential report Work in America (1974). These
key studies led to the formation of the new field of occupational health psychology (Sauter
& Hurrell, 1999), in addition to leading organizational psychologists to focus on issues of job
stress.
In 1973, the APA division dealing with Industrial Psychology was renamed the Division
of Industrial and Organizational Psychology to reflect the growth of the field. In 1982
a new autonomous organization – the Society for Industrial/Organizational Psychology
(SIOP) formed. Although the APA division continues to exist, SIOP has become the major
professional association for the field with over 6000 members internationally.
I/O-EH? CANADIAN I/O PSYCHOLOGY
Although the development of I/O psychology in Canada lagged that in the United States,
it followed the same general pattern. Prior to World War II, I/O psychology in Canada
consisted of a handful of professional psychologists working in isolation (Bois, 1949). The
Canadian I/O story really begins with the formation of the Canadian Psychological
Association in 1938 – just prior to World War II. In anticipation of the war, psychologists
from the University of Toronto, Queen’s and McGill met with the government to discuss
how psychologists could contribute to the war effort. This was the beginning of a
longstanding and productive collaboration between Canadian I/O psychology and the
military (MacMillan, Stevens, & Kelloway, 2009), as well as initiating the formation of the
As in the U.S., these initial collaborations focused on the development of selection tests
for the military including a unit focused on pilot selection for the Royal Canadian Air
Force (RCAF), which operated primarily out of the University of Toronto. A second group
developed the “M” test for selection and placement of Army officers and soldiers.
Psychologists were also involved in numerous other activities related to the war effort
including the establishment of day care centres that allowed women to enter the workforce
to replace the male workers who had been called up to active service (Wright, 1974).
I/O psychology as a distinct profession in Canada has its roots in the work of Ed Webster
who joined the faculty of McGill after doing morale research during World War II (Rowe,
1990). Webster made at least three substantial contributions to the field. First, he was one of
the first to do research on the employment interview and his 1964 book Decision Making in the
Employment Interview is considered a classic in industrial psychology. Second, Webster wrote
the report of the Couchiching conference which established standards for graduate training
in psychology – these standards were widely adopted by graduate programs in Canada.
Finally, Webster was a professor who supervised his own graduate students. One of these –
Patricia (Pat) Rowe was to play a major role in Canadian I/O psychology.
After her graduation, Rowe accepted a position at the University of Waterloo, where she
founded and singlehandedly ran what is the most long-established I/O graduate program in
Canada. Rowe supervised many of the I/O psychologists practicing and teaching in Canada
today. She based the Waterloo program on a scientist-practitioner model and established
links with consulting firms and other major employers in Canada.
By the 1980s, several other graduate programs had developed, many of which were
based on the Waterloo model. Programs at the University of Calgary, University of Western
Ontario, and Queen’s University (the I/O program is now defunct) all offered graduate
programs leading to a PhD in some area of I/O psychology. Saint Mary’s University and the
University of Guelph both offered a terminal master’s degree, although both now offer PhD
programs. Other universities offer graduate education in organizational psychology under

the auspices of their programs in applied social psychology (e.g., University of Saskatchewan,
University of Windsor).
Although there are as many I/O psychologists practicing in Quebec as there are in the
other provinces of Canada, English and French I/O psychology continue to exist as the “two
solitudes” in many respects (Forest, 2007). For example, in contrast to the definition and
competency areas of I/O psychology described earlier, the Quebec association defines I/
O psychology in terms of five major areas of practice (i.e., (a) testing and evaluation, (b)
organizational development and diagnosis, (c) training and coaching, (d) career management
and reassignment and (e) employee assistance programs and psychological health (Forest).
There is growing recognition of the benefits of Anglophone and Francophone I/O
psychologists working together, yet language remains for now a formidable challenge to
collaboration (Bonaccio et al., 2013). Efforts to overcome this hurdle have been, to date,
sporadic and have not resulted in substantial agreement on ways in which the two groups of
Canadian I/O psychologists can work together.
THE DISCIPLINE TODAY
I/O psychology continues to flourish, both in Canada and internationally. It is consistently

identified as an area of employment growth with graduates having little difficulty in finding
employment either within the Human Resources department of major organizations, as
a consultant in a consulting firm or, of course, as an academic researcher working at a
university or research center. Consistent with the scientist-practitioner model that
continues to dominate the field, individuals often move back and forth between these
roles. Academics often do consulting work “on the side”. Consultants move into HR roles
or collaborate in academic research. Many consultants and HR professionals do some
teaching “on the side” and in so doing bring a practitioner perspective to the teaching of I/O
psychology.
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Although we have been using the term “psychologist” loosely, any discussion of training
requirements in I/O psychology needs to recognize some legal constraints. In most
jurisdictions of Canada, the term “psychologist” is a restricted term and refers to individuals
who have registered with their provincial board or college of psychology. With few
exceptions, the only people allowed to identify themselves as “psychologists” are those who
have gone through the registration process. Because the title is regulated provincially, these
restrictions may not apply to Federal employees and jurisdictions may make exceptions for
some cases (e.g., professors of psychology at universities).
Although people who work in I/O psychology are eligible for registration, the majority opt
not to register – seeing it as an expensive and burdensome process that is more oriented
toward clinical practice than the work performed in I/O Psychology. The Canadian Society
for Industrial/Organizational Psychology (CSIOP – the I/O section of the Canadian
Psychological Association) advocates a policy of voluntary registration – suggesting that
registration should not be mandatory for I/O psychologists but that they should be allowed
to register if they so choose.
So why is this important? In many jurisdictions registration requires the individual to

hold a PhD in psychology and if an I/O psychologist wanted to register then he/she would
have to meet that standard. If you wanted to work in I/O and wanted to register as a
psychologist, then you would be well advised to ensure that you complete your PhD and a
school that is recognized by the provincial authority as providing adequate training. The
established I/O programs in Canada (as well as some that offer I/O training in other areas
such as applied social) generally meet that standard but it is a question that any prospective
graduate student should ask. Similarly, teaching at university typically requires PhD level
training from a recognized university.
If one is not concerned with registration, then it is also possible to do a PhD in
management and still stay within the content domain of I/O psychology. Indeed, many
of the best known I/O psychologists in Canada teach in business schools rather than
psychology programs (for example Julian Barling at Queen’s University, Rick Hackett at
McMaster University, Gary Latham at the University of Toronto) and the content of these
programs overlaps significantly with programs in I/O psychology. Graduates of business
programs can teach in both business and psychology programs ( just as graduates of
psychology can also teach in business) although a business PhD would not typically be
eligible for registration as a psychologist.
Having said that, it is quite possible and, indeed common, to work in I/O with a master’s
degree. In my program (Saint Mary’s) for example, we generally find that about 50% of
our M.Sc. students will leave after completing their masters to work as a consultant or in
industry. The other 50% go on to PhD studies (some of who will also go into consulting and
industry). They work for consulting firms, research firms (e.g., market research), in human
resource departments or teaching in community colleges.
Employment in the field is generally limited to those who have graduate level training.
Indeed, many universities do not offer undergraduate courses in I/O psychology and, if
they do, there is often only one general course providing an introduction to the field.
Universities with graduate programs in the field are more likely to offer a range of courses
related to I/O (e.g., Personnel Psychology, Organizational Psychology, Occupational Health
Psychology, Organizational Development). There is a great deal of overlap between the
content of these courses and similar courses taught in a business school (e.g. Human
Resource Management, Organizational Behavior) and some universities will offer a
Certificate in Human Resource Management as part of an undergraduate degree. Although
the Certificate may not allow you to claim to be an industrial/organizational psychologist, it
often opens the door to a career in human resource management.
RESEARCH METHODS
The foundation of research and practice in I/O psychology is an interest in very practical
questions. How do we hire the best employees for a job? How do we motivate those
employees? How do we manage conflict in the workplace? How should organizational
leaders behave? To answer these questions we draw on a wide range of research methods.
Although there are certainly interesting examples of qualitative research in I/O psychology
(see for example, Scales, Kelloway & Francis, 2014; Wright & Barling, 1998), consistent
with our roots in experimental psychology, I/O researchers have focused on quantitative
methods. But because we focus on practical problems in real organizations, research and
practice in I/O psychology can be complicated by both practical and scientific concerns.
McGrath (1981) suggested that any research design should achieve three things: [a]
precision, [b] generalizability, and [c] existential realism. Precision is achieved when we can
control the variables in the study and other aspects of the research setting. Generalizability
is when the findings from a study can be assumed to apply to other populations. Can,
for example, the results of a study of undergraduates generalize to all Canadians? Finally,
existential realism is the extent to which the design uses “real” or “artificial” tasks. McGrath
goes further to suggest that these considerations form a “three horned dilemma” for
researchers. Attempts to maximize one of the three criteria inevitably come at the cost of at
least one of the other two. Central to McGrath’s argument is the notion that it is impossible
to maximize all three criteria in one study. Therefore, researchers need to use multiple
research designs to ensure that all three criteria are met.
Laboratory experiments are, in many ways, the gold standard for research in psychology.
Laboratory experiments allow considerable control over the variables and environment
and allow us to identify causal processes. Kirkpatrick and Locke (1996), for example, were
interested in whether having a charismatic leader would create higher levels of performance
than having a non-charismatic leader. To do so they recruited undergraduate students to
come into the lab and complete a complicated binder editing task. Students were given a
stack of binders filled with paper and pages of instructions (e.g. in each binder replace p.
23 with the new page provided; change the pages from the red section of the binder to
the blue section of the binder etc.). The researchers hired an actor to give participants the
instructions following a script for either charismatic (speak positively, talk about the purpose
of the task) or non-charismatic (read the instructions in a dull monotone) leadership.
The design allowed the researchers to claim with considerable confidence that charismatic
leadership did result in better performance on the task. However, one might ask whether
the design had existential realism (do employees only have one “boss” who only speaks to
them for 5 minutes? is the binder task a reasonable approximation to all kinds of work?
Similarly, there are concerns about generalizability – student participants were not
employees, and it is not clear that these results have any implications for organizations. As
Kelloway and Day (2014) note, these concerns may be overstated. The available data suggest
that study findings often do generalize beyond the lab (Locke, 1986; Mitchell, 2012) and
experiments in I/O psychology tend to generalize better than experiments in other areas of
psychology (Mitchell). Practically, however, it is difficult to convince a CEO to implement
an expensive leadership training program based on a study of 40 undergraduates putting
binders together and, as a result, lab experiments are rarely used in I/O psychology.
Field Experiments duplicate the logic of a true experimental design but attempt to do
so in a realistic setting using real employees. For example, Barling, Weber & Kelloway
(1996) conducted a field experiment in which bank managers were randomly assigned to
either a leadership training program or a no-training control condition. They conducted
employee surveys both prior to – and after the training and collected data on the financial
performance of each branch. They showed that the employees of the trained leaders were
more committed to the bank and that three of the four financial indicators increased as a
result of the training. This design attempted to maximize precision (although one cannot
possibly control for everything going on in an organization such as a large bank) while at the
same time maximizing existential realism – these were real employees and managers doing
real jobs. However, the study was conducted in only one bank and whether the results would
generalize to other banks or other industries (e.g., manufacturing, healthcare) could not be
addressed in this study. Field experiments are difficult to conduct in organizations and their
use in I/O psychology is still limited.
Correlational methods are much more widely used in I/O psychology research. For
example, a great deal of research has been directed toward answering questions about the
predictors of job performance. Researchers collect data on some hypothesized predictor
(e.g., they have employees complete standardized measures of intelligence) and then
correlate these responses with an outcomes such as annual performance ratings. This type
of study is a test of the validity of the predictor.
Organizational surveys are widely used in I/O psychology. Many companies conduct
an annual or bi-annual attitude or morale survey. The purpose of the surveys is to “take
the temperature” of the organization – assessing whether employees are generally satisfied
with their jobs and working conditions. In many organizations, executive compensation
will be tied to the survey results (e.g., executives will receive a bonus if 80% or more of
their employees are satisfied). I/O psychologists are frequently involved in the design and
analysis of these surveys.
Correlational methods maximize generalizability (because data are collected from the
actual employees of the firm) and have some degree of existential realism (because we
ask employees about their working conditions. However, surveys typically lack precision.
Although we can ensure that we are measuring the right things, we have little control
over the many factors that might influence employee responses to the surveys. Indeed,
Brief, Butcher, & Roberson, (1995) reported that employees who received a cookie while
completing an employee attitude survey reported higher levels of job satisfaction than
those who did not get a cookie! Increasingly, I/O psychologists are trying to improve
survey designs by incorporating longitudinal data analysis (Kelloway & Francis, 2013). By
examining relationships between variables over time – or how scores on the survey change
over time – we can get a clearer idea of how employee attitudes influence outcomes of
interest.
THE PRACTICE OF I/O PSYCHOLOGY
It is difficult to give a meaningful overview of how I/O psychologists work in organizations

because they assume so many roles. However, some of the main areas of practice involve
selection and assessment, executive coaching, job design and analysis and employee
wellbeing. In practice, I/O psychologists may either specialize in one of these areas or work
in several areas.
Selection and assessment
As you will recall, an early focus in I/O psychology was how to select and assign military
recruits to jobs. Selection and assessment continue to be major areas of practice within I/O
psychology with many practitioners focusing their work in this area. Typically, for example,
I/O psychologists might assess candidates for a position using a variety of psychometric
instruments (e.g., tests of cognitive ability, personality etc.) and interviews. Based on the
assessment, the psychologist might make a recommendation to the company about who to
hire – or might suggest how a given candidate would be likely to perform under different
conditions.
This intensive level of assessment is typically limited to executive or professional positions
as it is a typically a very expensive process. I/O psychologists also design selection systems
for organizations that are designed to be used for all employees. For example, many firms
use short, computer-administered tests of cognitive ability, personality and integrity as
part of their hiring process. Although I/O psychologists may not be directly involved in
administering and scoring the instruments – they have typically been involved at an earlier
stage in the process – making recommendations to the company as to what tests to use and
how to combine results.
Executive coaching
Many I/O psychologists provide executive coaching services in which they work one-
on-one with an individual to help him achieve his/her goals. Executive coaching may
begin with assessments of the individual’s abilities and preferences. It may also include
360-degree feedback in which data are collected from the clients, superiors, peers and
subordinates. These data may then provide the focus for the individual to either attempt
to correct weaknesses in performance or to build on existing strengths. As coaches, I/
O psychologists draw on their extensive knowledge of organizational and interpersonal
dynamics to help individuals to achieve their goals.
Job analysis and design
Job analysis – the systematic analysis of jobs to identify job duties and requirements is
fundamental to many areas of human resource management. Typically, job analyses serve
as the basis for performance assessments, training, selection criteria, and compensation
structures. I/O psychologists have expertise in conducting job analyses in both small and
large organizations. Although rarely undertaken as a stand-alone activity, job analysis is
typically followed by the development of a selection system, performance appraisal
instrument or some other human resource management tool.
I/O psychologists also work in the area of job design – trying to make jobs either more
efficient or more engaging for employees. Again, the process begins with a job analysis and
then the psychologist makes recommendations for restructuring tasks or providing more
feedback to individuals.
Employee Wellbeing
Stress and wellbeing are an increasingly large aspect of work in I/O psychology. Indeed, a
new subfield – occupational health psychology – has emerged reflecting widespread interest
in this area. Most individuals interested in occupational health psychology have some
affiliation or training in the broader field of I/O psychology. In Canada, there has been
increased interest in workplace wellbeing and, more specifically, in mental health in the
workplace (Kelloway, 2017). One landmark event was publication of a National Standard for
Psychological Health and Safety (CSA1003-2013). This is a voluntary standard – although
organizations are not required to follow it, an increasing number of organizations see
considerable value in implementing the standard in their workplace. The standard is based
on four general principles, requiring organizations to have a corporate commitment to

improving psychological health and safety, to have leadership commitment to the issue,
to involve employees in the identification of workplace issues and the design of workplace
programs, and to ensure the confidentiality of individuals. Assisting organizations in these
areas is a task particularly well-suited to the skill sets of I/O psychologists.
Although I have highlighted four areas of practice, this is really only scratching the
surface of what I/O psychologists do in practice. I/O psychologists also help organizations
in designing and improving team processes, designing training programs, and improving
conflict management processes. Given extensive training in research design, many I/O
psychologists provide program evaluation services – assessing whether programs or policies
in the organization are having their intended effect. Psychologists also advise organizations
on policies and procedures to prevent discrimination in hiring and promotion decisions, to
manage and prevent workplace bullying and violence and to prevent sexual harassment in
organizations. Indeed, it does not go too far to claim that I/O psychologists are involved in
virtually every aspect of organizational functioning.
ILLUSTRATIVE FINDINGS
In this section, I present some illustrative findings from the research literature in
Industrial/Organizational Psychology. In doing so, I focus on two areas that have garnered
extensive research attention and have considerable practical implications for organizations;
hiring and leadership.
HOW DO WE HIRE THE BEST PERSON FOR THE JOB?
Recall that one of the earliest applications of I/O psychology was the selection of soldiers
during World War I. This interest in selection – how we get the best person for a given job –
has remained a large part of the practice of I/O psychology and there are decades of research
focused on one or more aspects of the hiring procedure. Hiring is a complex process and is
highly regulated by labour and human rights legislation – for our purposes we will focus on
the psychological aspects of the hiring process.
To an I/O psychologist, hiring somebody is a problem of prediction. What information
can we collect now that will give us an accurate prediction of how a job candidate might
perform the job? If we have multiple candidates, then our task will be to rank order the
applicants in terms of their predicted performance and then hire the ones with the highest
predicted performance. This presumes that we know [a] what tasks and responsibilities
are involved with the job, [b] what effective performance of those tasks looks like. I/O
psychologists use a process called job analysis to identify the major duties of a job and begin
to identify the qualities and characteristics necessary for effective performance. The end
result of a job analysis is often a job description – a concise written summary of the position
and its requirements (Kelloway, Catano & Day, 2011). The job analysis will typically identify
specific skills, certifications and training required for the job – during the hiring process we
can assess whether candidates have those skills and certifications.
Perhaps the most common way to assess a candidate’s skills and certifications is with a
resume. Resumes typically describe both your education and your previous job history.
Unfortunately, Hunter and Hunter (1984) found that resumes were not very good predictors
of performance. The problem, as you might guess, is that people frequently lie or
exaggerate on their resumes.
Resumes typically are used to select the individuals who will be invited to a screening
interview. We have all participated in such interviews – interviewers typically review your
resume asking about specific jobs and often throw in vague questions (“what is your greatest
weakness as an employee?” “where do you see yourself 5 years from now?”). Recently some
companies have advocated the use of “brainteaser” questions (e.g., how would you estimate
the number of fire hydrants in San Francisco?) – claiming that they identify candidates
who are creative. Google – for many years the main proponent of such questions, has
recently concluded that they add little to the hiring process (Nilsen, 2015). This conclusion
is consistent with the academic literature that suggests that these unstructured screening
interviews do not give a very good prediction of future job performance (Wiesener &
Cronshaw, 1988).
So, what does predict performance? One way to see if someone has the skills needed to
do a job is to get them to actually do the job for you. These are called work sample tests,
or simulations – if you need to hire someone to drive a vehicle then a driving test might be
in order. If you are hiring for keyboarding skills, then a typing test might fit the bill. If you
are hiring someone to teach a university class, have them teach a class as part of the hiring
process. These work sample tests can provide a very good idea of whether or not someone
can do the job (Hunter & Hunter, 1984).
The interview can also be improved by adding structure (Wiesener & Cronshaw, 1988) as
well as by incorporating elements of a work sample test. Interviews are structured when
every candidate is asked the same questions and there is a pre-determined scoring scheme
for the answers (much like a test or an exam). We can mimic a work sample by asking
candidates about their previous performance (e.g., “Tell me about a time when you had to
deal with a difficult customer”). Asking about prior performance in similar situations in this
way is the basis of behavior descriptive interviewing ( Janz, 1982, 1989). When candidates
might not have the experience, we can ask about a hypothetical situation (Latham & Saari,
1984; Latham, Saari, Pursell, & Campion, 1980) – e.g., “Imagine you are dealing with a
customer who is angry because the product she bought is defective What would you do?”.
Both behavioral and situational interviews have been shown to be good predictors of on-the-
job-performance. Hypothetical situations can also be asked about in a paper-and-pencil test
with multiple choice answers and these “situational judgment tests” are also good predictors
of performance (Weekley & Ployhart, 2006). Typically, such tests might present more than
one correct answer and the candidates are asked to choose the “best” answer from the
provided alternatives.
Beyond the skills required for the job, researchers have also identified personal
characteristics that might predict job performance. One of the earliest and most researched
predictors is general cognitive ability – across a wide variety of occupations, general
cognitive ability positively predicts job performance – the more cognitive ability you have
the higher your job performance is likely to be (Gottfredson, 1997; Ree & Carretta, 1998).
As Kelloway et al. (2011) note, cognitive ability tests can also result in discrimination against
some groups and, therefore, their use in selection is still somewhat controversial.
Personality tests may also give useful predictors of future job performance. The “Big Five”
dimensions – conscientiousness, emotional stability (also known as neuroticism), openness
to experience, agreeableness, and extroversion – have all been found to predict job
performance (Barrick & Mount, 1991; Tett, Jackson & Rothstein, 1991) as well as other
behaviors important in organizations (Darr & Kelloway, 2016).
WHAT DO EFFECTIVE LEADERS DO?
There is no doubt that leadership is critical to organizations (Barling, Christie & Hoption,
2011). Leaders are often tasked with ensuring that organizations achieve their goals and the
way in which leaders treat employees has direct implications for attitudes and behavior
including outcomes such as job satisfaction ( Judge & Piccolo, 2004), turnover (Bycio,
Hackett, & Allen, 1995), health and safety (Mullen & Kelloway, 2011), as well as individual
(Kirkpatrick & Locke, 1996), group (Bass, Avolio, Jung, & Berson, 2003) and the
organization’s financial performance (Barling et al., 1996). It is important, then, for us to
understand what effective leadership really means.
The first approach to understanding effective leadership was based on the notion that the
1
history of the world was shaped by “great men [sic] ” (Carlyle, 1907). It was thought that we
would learn about successful leadership by reading biographies of leaders such as Alexander
the Great or Julius Caesar. Biographies of successful business leaders (e.g., Welch & Byrne,
2003) are still popular ways of learning about leadership although no longer considered a
research technique. The “great man” approach did lead to a focus on leadership traits –
relative enduring characteristics of individuals. For example, both height ( Judge & Cable,
2004) and intelligence ( Judge, Colbert & Ilies, 2004) are related to leadership as are the traits
comprising the “Big 5” model of personality (i.e., agreeableness, conscientiousness, openness
to experience, extraversion, neuroticism, Judge et al., 2002).
One of the most influential approaches to leadership emerged just after World War II in a
series of studies known as the Ohio State Studies (e.g., Kerr, Schriesheim, Murphy, & Stogdill,
1974). These researchers identified two aspects of leaders’ behaviour – “Consideration”
behaviors focused on people rather than on tasks. In contrast, “initiating structure”
comprised behaviours that were focused on the task – establishing clear guidelines and
procedures for how the work was to be done. Judge et al. (2004) found that there is good
evidence that consideration is moderately to strongly correlated with morale and employee
attitudes whereas initiating structure is associated with task and group performance.
Identifying behaviors that characterized effective leaders led to the hypothesis that leaders
should change their behaviors under different circumstances. Both Fiedler (1967) and House
(1971) proposed influential theories of what became known as situational leadership theory
that reflected this notion. There is fairly good evidence for the idea that different leader
behaviors are more effective under different circumstances (e.g. Peters, Hartke, & Pohlmann,
1985; Wofford & Liska, 1993).
Situational theories have been supplanted by what may be termed the modern theories
of leadership. Although there are several such modern theories, the most influential and
intensely researched (Barling et al., 2011; Judge & Bono, 2000) is transformational leadership
theory.
Transformational leadership (Bass, 1985; Bass & Riggio, 2006) is based on four forms of
behaviour sometimes referred to as the “four I’s” of transformational leadership. Leaders
1. Historically, a strong gender bias excluded the consideration of “great women” although a great
deal of research now speaks to the leadership effectiveness of both men and women in
organizations.
demonstrate individualized consideration when they recognize individual strengths and

weaknesses and pay attention to followers as individuals. Coaching, mentoring, and
supporting individuals are all characteristic of individualized consideration. Intellectual
stimulation involves challenging existing beliefs and encouraging employees to think for
themselves to generate solutions to long-standing problems. Adopting a questioning stance,
encouraging creativity and facilitating independent thought are all characteristics of leaders
who demonstrate intellectual stimulation. Idealized influence occurs when leaders are
concerned with what is best for followers and the organization (i.e., doing the “right” thing
rather than taking the easiest course of action). Leaders who act in this way create a
sense of shared mission and build trust and respect among their followers because they
can be counted on to go beyond self-interest to do what is right. Finally, inspirational
motivation is evidenced by leaders who set high but achievable standards and who encourage
followers to achieve more than they thought. Telling stories and using symbols are integral
to inspirational motivation, which is aimed at increasing employees’ sense of motivation and
self-efficacy.
There is a great deal of evidence supporting the effectiveness of transformational
leadership behaviours. When leaders engage in these transformational behaviors, they are
seen as more productive, elicit better performance from their followers at the individual,
team and organizational levels, and have followers who are more satisfied with their jobs
and their leaders ( Judge & Piccolo, 2004). Importantly, there is also evidence that
transformational leadership can be taught to managers (see, for example, Barling, Weber
& Kelloway, 1996; Kelloway, Barling & Helleur, 2000; Mullen & Kelloway, 2009) and that
when leaders learn and demonstrate transformational leadership, employees demonstrate
improved attitudes and performance (Barling et al., 1996; Mullen & Kelloway, 2009).
CONCLUSION
For over 100 years now I/O psychologists have been working to make organizations
more efficient while, at the same time, improving the lives of working people. Adopting
a scientist-practitioner model that values both research and working in applied settings, I/
O psychologists have focused on broad range of topics. How to hire the best employees
and how to be an effective leader are just two of the important questions asked by I/O
psychologists. New questions continually emerge (e.g., the effects of new technology on
organizational behavior, Day, Scott & Kelloway, 2010) and this is just one of the reasons
that I/O psychology is listed as one of the fastest growing professions of the decade
(Shellenbarger, 2010) and the second most attractive occupation in science (U.S. News &
World Report L.P.,2018).
REFERENCES
Barling, J. (1990). Employment stress and family functioning. Chichester, UK: John Wiley &
Sons.
Barling, J., Christie, A., & Hoption, A. (2011). Leadership. In S. Zedeck et al. (Eds.), Handbook
of industrial and organizational psychology. Washington, DC: American Psychological
Association.
Barling, J., Weber, T., & Kelloway, E. K. (1996). Effects of transformational leadership training
on attitudinal and financial outcomes: A field experiment. Journal of applied psychology,

81(6), 827.
Barrick, M. R. & Mount, M. K. (1991). The Big Five personality dimensions and job
performance: A meta-analysis. Personnel Psychology, 44,1–26
Bass, B. M. (1985). Leadership and performance beyond expectations. NY: Free Press. .
Bass, B. M., & Riggio, R. E. (2006). Transformational leadership (2nd ed.). New York, NY:
Psychology Press.
Bass, B. M., Avolio, B. J., Jung, D. I., & Berson, Y. (2003). Predicting unit performance by
assessing transformational and transactional leadership. Journal of Applied Psychology, 88,
207-218.
Bois, J. S. (1949). A progress report on industrial psychology. Canadian Journal of Psychology,
3, 105-116.
Bonaccio, S., Chiocchio, F., Forget, A., Forget, C., Foucher, R., Kelloway, E. K., & O’Neill, T. A.
(2013). Bridging divides in industrial and organisational psychology in Canada: An action-
oriented collaborative framework. Canadian Psychology/Psychologie Canadienne, 54(4), 213.
https://doi.org/10.1037/a0034544
Brief, A. P., Butcher, A. H., & Roberson, L. (1995). Cookies, disposition, and job attitudes: The
effects of positive mood-inducing events and negative affectivity on job satisfaction in a
field experiment. Organizational behavior and human decision processes, 62, 55-63
Bycio, P., Hackett, R. D., & Allen, J. S. (1995). Further assessments of Bass’s (1985)
conceptualization of transactional and transformational leadership. Journal of Applied
Carlyle, T. (1907). Heroes and hero worship. Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin.
Cropanzano, R., & Wright, T. A. (2001). When a happy worker is really a productive worker:
A review and further refinement of the happy-productive worker thesis. Consulting
Psychology Journal: Practice and Research, 53(3), 182-199.
Darr, W., & Kelloway, E. K. (2016). Sifting the Big 5: Examining the criterion related validity
of facets. Journal of Organizational Effectiveness: People and Performance, 3, 2-22.
Day, A., Scott, N., & Kelloway, E. K. (2010). Information and communication technology:
Implications for job stress and employee well-being. In P. L. Perrewé & D. C. Ganster (Eds.),
Research in Occupational Stress and Well-being (Vol. 8, pp. 317–350). https://doi.org/10.1108/
S1479-3555(2010)0000008011
Fiedler, F. (1967). A theory of leadership effectiveness. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Forest, J. (2007). I-O psychology in the French-Speaking province of Québec: An energetic
North American community. The Industrial Organizational Psychologist, 2007(April).
Retrieved from http://www.siop.org/tip/April07/1kk8thompson.aspx
Gottfredson, L. (1997) Why g matters: The complexity of everyday life. Intelligence, 24,
79–132.
Highhouse, S. (2007). Applications of organizational psychology: Learning through failure
or failure to learn. In L. L. Koppes (Ed.), Historical perspectives in industrial organizational
psychology (pp. 331-352). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum & Associates.
House, R. J. (1971). A path goal theory of leader effectiveness. Administrative Science Quarterly,
16, 321-339.
Hunter, J. E., & Hunter, R. F. (1984). Validity and utility of alternative predictors of job
performance. Psychological Bulletin, 96, 72–98.
Janz, T. (1982). Initial comparisons of patterned behavior description interviews versus

unstructured interviews. Journal of Applied Psychology, 67, 577–580.
Janz, T. (1989). The patterned behavior description interview: The best prophet of the future
is the past. In R. W. Eder & G. R. Ferris, (Eds.), The employment interview: theory, research, and
practice. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications, Inc.
Judge, T. A., & Bono, J. E. (2000). Five-factor model of personality and transformational
leadership. Journal of Applied Psychology, 85, 751-765.
Judge, T. A., & Cable, D. M. (2004). The effect of physical height on workplace success and
income: Preliminary test of a theoretical model. Journal of Applied Psychology, 89, 428-441.
Judge, T. A., & Piccolo, R. F. (2004). Transformational and transactional leadership: A meta-
analytic test of their relative validity. Journal of Applied Psychology, 89(5), 755-768.
https://doi.org/10.1037/0021-9010.89.5.755
Judge, T. A., Bono, J. E., Ilies, R., & Gerhardt, M. W. (2002). Personality and leadership: A
qualitative and quantitative review. Journal of Applied Psychology, 87(4), 765. https://doi.org/
10.1037/0021-9010.87.4.765
Judge, T. A., Colbert, A. E., & Ilies, R. (2004). Intelligence and leadership: A Quantitative
review and test of theoretical propositions. Journal of Applied Psychology, 89(3), 542-552.
https://doi.org/10.1037/0021-9010.89.3.542
Kelloway, E. K. & Day, A. L. (2005). Building healthy organizations: What we know so far.
Canadian Journal of Behavioural Science, 37, 223-236.
Kelloway, E. K. & Day. A. (2014). Research methods. In M. Peeters, J. deJonge & T. Taris (Eds.)
An Introduction to Contemporary Work Psychology. (pp. 31-60). Chichester, U. K. John Wiley
and Sons.
Kelloway, E. K. (2017). Mental health in the workplace: Towards evidence-based practice.
Canadian Psychology/psychologie canadienne, 58(1), 1-6.
Kelloway, E. K., & Francis, L. (2013). Longitudinal research and data analysis. In R. Sinclair,
M. Wang, & L. Tetrick. Research Methods in Occupational Health Psychology (pp. 374-394). New
York, NY: Routledge.
Kelloway, E. K., Barling, J., & Helleur, J. (2000). Enhancing transformational leadership:
the roles of training and feedback. Leadership and Organization Development Journal, 21(3),
145-149.
Kelloway, E. K., Catano, V. M., & Day, A. L. (2011). People and work in Canada: Industrial and
organizational psychology. Toronto, ON: Nelson.
Kerr, S., Schriesheim, C. A., Murphy, C. J., & Stogdill, R. M. (1974). Toward a contingency
theory of leadership based upon the consideration and initiating structure literature.
Organizational Behavior and Human Performance, 12, 62-82.
Kirkpatrick, S. A., & Locke, E. A. (1996). Direct and indirect effects of three core charismatic
leadership components on performance and attitudes. Journal of applied psychology, 81(1),
36.
Kline, T. J. (1996). Defining the field of Industrial-Organizational psychology. Canadian
Psychology, 37(4), 205-209.
Koppes, L. L. (Ed.). (2007). Historical perspectives in industrial and organizational psychology.
Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum & Associates
Koppes, L. L., & Pickren, W. (2007). Industrial and organizational psychology: An evolving
science and practice. In L. L. Koppes (Ed.), Historical perspectives in industrial organizational
psychology (pp. 3-36). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum & Associates.
Kornhauser, A. (1965). Mental health of the industrial worker. New York: Wiley
Kraeplin, E. (1896). A measure of mental capacity. Appleton’s Popular Science Monthly, 49,
192-229.
Latham, G. P., & Saari, L. M. (1984). Do people do what they say? Further studies on the
situational interview. Journal of Applied Psychology, 69, 569–573.
Latham, G. P., Saari, L. M., Pursell, E. D., & Campion, M. A. (1980). The situational interview.
Journal of Applied Psychology, 65, 422–427.
Locke, E. A. (1986). Generalizing from laboratory to field settings: Research findings from industrial-
organizational psychology, organizational behavior, and human resource management. Lexington
(MA): Lexington Books.
Locke, L. A. (1976). The nature and causes of job satisfaction. In M. D. Dunnette (Ed.),
Handbook of industrial and organizational psychology (1st ed., pp. 1297–1349). Chicago, IL:
Rand McNally.
MacMillan, S. K. Stevens, S. & Kelloway, E. K. (2009). History and development of
industrial/organizational psychology in the Canadian Forces Personnel Selection Branch:
1938-2008 Canadian Psychology/Psychologie canadienne, 50(4), 283-291. doi: 10.1037/
a0015973
McGrath, J. E. (1981). Dilemmatics: The study of research choices and dilemmas. American
Behavioral Scientist, 25, 179-202.
Mitchell, G. (2012). Truth or triviality: The external validity of research in the psychological
laboratory. Perspectives on Psychological Science, 7, 109-117
Mullen, J. E., & Kelloway, E. K. (2009). Safety leadership: A longitudinal study of the effects of
transformational leadership on safety outcomes. Journal of Occupational and Organizational
Mullen, J., & Kelloway, E. K. (2011). Occupational health and safety leadership. In L. Tetrick
& J. Campbell-Quick (Eds.), Handbook of occupational health psychology (2nd ed.). Washington,
DC: APA Books.
Münsterberg, H. (1913). Psychology and industrial efficiency. Boston: Houghton
Nilsen, M. (2015, April 7). Google is over those ridiculous brain teasers, but some employees didn’t get
the memo. Retrieved from https://qz.com/378228/
Peters, L. H., Hartke, D. D., & Pohlmann, J. T. (1985). Fiedler’s contingency theory of
leadership: An application of the meta-analysis procedures of Schmidt and Hunter.
Psychological Bulletin, 97, 274-285.
Ree, M. J., & Caretta, T. R. (1998). General cognitive ability and occupational performance.
In C. L. Cooper & I. T. Robertson (Eds.), International Review of Industrial and
Organizational Psychology (Vol 13, pp. 159-184). London: John Wiley and Sons
Rowe, P. M. (1990). Edward C. Webster (1909-1989). Canadian Psychology/Psychologie
canadienne, 31(2), 180-181. doi: 10.1037/h0084599
Sauter, S. L, & Hurrell, J. J., Jr. (1999). Occupational health psychology: origins, content, and
direction. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 30(2), 117-122
Scales, A., Kelloway, E. K., & Francis, L. (2014). Over the line: Managers’ experience of a
labour strike. Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences/Revue Canadienne des Sciences de
l’Administration, 31(3), 175-186.
Scott, W. D. (1911). Increasing human efficiency in business. New York: MacMillan.
Shellenbarger, S. (2010, May 26). What will be the hot jobs of 2018? The Wall Street Journal.
Retrieved from https://www. wsj.com/articles/

SB10001424052748704026204575266342935418962
Stouffer, S. A. (1949). The America Soldier: Vol 1 Adjustment during Army life. Princeton, NJ:
Princeton University Press.
Tett, R. P., Jackson, D. N., & Rothstein, M. (1991). Personality measures as predictors of job
performance: A meta-analytic review. Personnel Psychology, 44, 703–742.
U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare. (1974). Work in America. Cambridge, MA:
MIT Press.
U.S. News & World Report L.P. (2018) Industrial Organizational Psychologist: An Overview
[ Job ranking]. Retrieved from https://money.usnews.com/careers/best-jobs/industrial-
psychologist
Vinchur, A. J., & Koppes, L. L. (2007). Early contributors to the science and practice of
industrial psychology. In L. L. Koppes (Ed.), Historical perspectives in industrial and
organizational psychology (pp. 37-58). Mahwah, NJ, US: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates
Publishers.
Viteles, M. S. (1932). Industrial psychology. New York: Norton
Warr, P. B. (1987). Work, unemployment and mental health. Oxford, UK: Oxford University
Press.
Webster, E. C. (1964) Decision-making in the employment interview. Montreal: McGill University
Industrial Relations Center.
Weekley, J., & Ployhart, R. (Eds.). (2006). Situational judgment tests: theory, measurement, and
application. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Welch, J., & Byrne, J. A. (2003). Jack: Straight from the gut. New York, NY: Grand Central
Publishing,
Wiesner, W. H., & Cronshaw, S. R. (1988). A meta-analytic investigation of the impact of
interview format and degree of structure on the validity of the employment interview.
Journal of Occupational Psychology, 61, 275–290.
Wofford, J. C., & Liska, L. Z. (1993). Path-goal theories of leadership: A meta-analysis. Journal
of Management, 19, 857-876.
Wright, B., & Barling, J. (1998). “The executioners’ song”: listening to downsizers reflect on
their experiences. Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences/Revue Canadienne des Sciences
de l’Administration, 15(4), 339-354.
Wright, G. (1974). The political economy of new deal spending: An econometric analysis. The
Review of Economics and Statistics, 56(1), 30-38. doi:10.2307/1927524

Kelloway, E. K. (2019). Industrial/organizational psychology. In M. E. Norris (Ed.), The
Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science. Kingston, ON: eCampus Ontario.
psychologycareers/chapter/industrial-organizational-psychology/
[11]
PSYCHOLOGY AND THE LAW IN CANADA
Steven M. Smith, PhD, Saint Mary’s University
Marguerite Ternes, PhD, Saint Mary’s University
Skye Stephens, PhD, R. Psych, Saint Mary’s University
Katelynn Carter-Rogers, MSc, Saint Mary’s University
PSYCHOLOGY AND THE LAW IN CANADA
Russell Williams was a model member of the Canadian military. Joining the Canadian
Forces in 1987, he quickly became a respected pilot and officer at postings, such as CFB
Portage la Prairie, CFB Shearwater, and in Ottawa. Posted to CFB Trenton in 2004, he
became base commander in 2009. On January 28, 2010, 27-year-old Jessica Lloyd was
reported missing from an area near the base. Police, while investigating, noticed distinctive
tire tracks in the snow. A police officer canvassing the area for witnesses noticed similar
tracks on Williams’ SUV. On February 7th, 2010, Williams was interrogated by police and
confessed to Lloyd’s murder. He ultimately described more than 80 crimes, including break-
ins, thefts, sexual assaults, and another murder. Williams’ crimes followed an escalation from
fetish burglaries, to sexual assault to sexual homicide. Williams painstakingly documented
his actions, with photos, copies of newspapers reports of the crimes, and items he had stolen
from his victims. He was sentenced to two concurrent life sentences without the possibility
of parole for 25 years. Interested readers are encouraged to consult Brankley, Goodwill, and
Reale (2014) for a more in-depth psychological perspective on the case.
THE INTERSECTION OF PSYCHOLOGY AND THE LAW
Russell Williams’ crimes and their aftermath left a lasting impression on many people –
how could such a respected individual, with all the success he had enjoyed, be driven to
commit these crimes, and then be able to cover them up for so long? Was there any evidence
258
that linked Williams to earlier cases, or did he really display no evidence of violence prior to
his officially documented offences? Why would someone keep such detailed records of their
crimes? How was it that his sexually violent behaviours stayed hidden for so long? This case
illustrates some of the many ways in which psychology and the legal system interact. These
are just some of the issues that psychologists and psychological researchers deal with when
psychology and the legal system interact.
DEFINITIONS & HISTORY
Forensic psychology (and the field of psychology and the law, more broadly) can be
defined as the application of psychological theory, research, methods, and practice to the
legal system. In many ways, forensic psychology is not a new field. Discussions of the link
between psychology and the legal system goes back to the 1800s. The first documented
consideration of psychological issues and the law dates back to Hugo Münsterberg’s 1908
book On the Witness Stand. He touched on many topics, including crime detection, eyewitness
testimony, false confessions, and even how to prevent crime. He urged the courts to make
use of the burgeoning field of experimental psychological research to improve the accuracy
of legal decisions. Münsterberg got a lot right, but in many ways, he was ahead of his time.
The research was not yet where it needed to be to effect change within the legal system.
Indeed, his work was widely criticized (e.g., Wigmore, 1909; 1940) and research in the area
was quiet for approximately 50 years.
The 1950s and 1960s saw a resurgence in the field, and the role of psychology in the legal
system became a serious area of academic research. Clinicians, researchers and academics
began to be sought as experts in court, and this increased throughout the 1970s and 1980s.
These psychologists and academics covered many topics, including basic issues in legal
process, impacts on memory and decision-making, and clinical issues such as corrections,
insanity defenses, and the role of mental illness as a mediator in criminal behaviour. Since
the 1990s, the integration of psychology and law has become more defined; it is common
now for courts and law enforcement to look to experts to help develop policy and process
(see Roesch, Zapf, Hart & Connolly, 2013, for a review).
LICENSURE
A large proportion of forensic psychologists are licensed psychologists. Licensure in

Canada is provincially regulated (https://www.cpa.ca/accreditation/
PTlicensingrequirements/), however, each province’s rules are consistent with the Canadian
Psychological Association (CPA) standards (e.g., CPA, 2012). CPA has suggested that all
licensed psychologists have a PhD. In addition to an appropriate degree, trainees need to
have completed 2-6 years of supervised clinical practice and must pass a comprehensive
standardized test (currently the Examination for Professional Practice in Psychology, or
EPPP). Some provinces have additional requirements (e.g., in Ontario you complete a
jurisprudence exam).
A FEW WORDS ON ETHICS
Regardless of whether they are licensed, psychologists are bound by a code of ethics
260 Psychology and the Law in Canada
for their research and practice. For clinicians, all professional behaviour must follow
provincially mandated ethical guidelines, which are based on international standards (see
CPA, 2017). Violation of these ethical guidelines can lead to censure, loss of professional
privileges, and even loss of employment. Psychologists must work within their scope of
practice (i.e., work only within their area of expertise), avoid multiple roles (e.g., cannot
treat a family member or someone with whom they have a close personal relationship), and
must maintain confidentiality and security of privileged information (CPA). There are also
additional guidelines that influence the work of forensic psychologists, such as the forensic
speciality guidelines (American Psychological Association, 2013).
Psychological researchers also have the requirement that their research abide by the
Tri-Council Ethical Guidelines (see http://www.pre.ethics.gc.ca/eng/education/tutorial-
didacticiel/). These guidelines mandate that researchers ensure participants give informed
consent, that they be truthful in their interactions with those participants, use deception
only if necessary, protect people from harm, maintain confidentiality, and debrief their
participants. All professionals are themselves responsible for ensuring that they have
comprehensive knowledge of their respective boundaries of practice.
Now that we have covered the basics of forensic psychology, how it came to be, and
who works in the area, we will delve into some specific topics within the field, and how
professionals work in these areas. We will explore forensic assessment in criminal and civil
domains, correctional psychology, police psychology, police investigations, and the role of
psychology in legal decision making.
FORENSIC ASSESSMENT IN CRIMINAL AND CIVIL DOMAINS
Forensic assessment is a highly specialized form of psychological assessment (see Clinical

Psychology Chapter for further information on psychological assessment) that involves
sharing an informed opinion on a legal issue. Forensic assessments differ from typical
psychological assessments in several ways, with arguably the most important distinction
being the nature of the referral question. Forensic assessments are narrowly focused on
specific legal matters and are most useful to parties to a legal proceeding or legal decision
makers who must consider several factors when rendering a legal decision (e.g., considering
how a person’s past behaviour might impact future behaviour). In the following section, we
will briefly review some of the more commonly requested assessments in criminal and civil
contexts with a specific focus on the Canadian context.
CRIMINAL DOMAINS
There are several different types of forensic assessments that can be useful to parties in the
Criminal Justice System. In these assessments, forensic psychologists will use a wide variety
of general and more specialized forensic assessment tools (Heilbrun et al., 2003; Heilbrun &
Brooks Holliday, 2013). In the current section, we briefly review forensic mental health and
risk assessment.
Forensic mental health assessments are conducted by professionals who provide clinical
assessment information to legal decision makers or litigants (Heilbrun, 2001). Two
commonly ordered forensic mental assessments are fitness to stand trial, and not criminally
responsible on account of a mental disorder (NCRMD). According to the Canadian Criminal
Code (1985) for someone to be fit to stand trial they must be able to understand the court
process, the consequences of the court proceedings, and communicate with their lawyer.
For NCRMD, the first question that must be answered is whether the accused has a mental
health disorder and, if present, if it impaired their ability to appreciate the nature of their
acts or to know that their acts were wrong (Canadian Criminal Code). Given that these
assessments often involve questions about mental health, when psychologists are involved,
they fall under the purview of Clinical-Forensic Psychology.
Forensic psychologists can be involved in fitness and NCRMD assessments, which are
often conducted by a multidisciplinary team. The role of the psychologist in these
assessments varies (e.g., providing psychological testing, providing a second opinion on
the ultimate legal issue) depending on where the assessment takes place. A recent position
paper released by the Canadian Psychological Association has advocated for psychologists
to be explicitly identified in the Criminal Code as being able to perform these assessments
independently, as psychiatry often takes the lead role on these assessments (see Hessen
Kayfitz et al., 2017 for further information).
Another major role of forensic psychologists is risk assessment. Risk assessment is a
comprehensive information gathering process that involves the identification of risk factors,
the synthesis of information into a determination about risk to reoffend (recidivism),
recommendations about evidence-based approaches to manage risk, and communication
about this information to the referral source (Mills, Kroner, & Morgan, 2011). Risk
assessment has evolved in large part due to the work of psychologists (many of whom are
Canadian) from being a relatively unstructured and imprecise method to a highly structured
process in which assessors use specialized risk assessment tools to help them reach informed
decisions about risk to reoffend (e.g., Mills et al.,).
Best practice in risk assessment involves the inclusion of static (generally historical and
unchangeable, such as criminal history) and dynamic (changeable factors, such as substance
use) risk factors, as dynamic risk factors add incrementally to the predictive validity of static
risk factors (e.g., Wilson, Desmarais, Nicholls, Hart, & Brink, 2013). Dynamic risk factors
also represent important targets for risk management, as they are modifiable, whereas
static risk factors are not. More recently, there has been a movement to include protective
factors (factors that decrease the likelihood of recidivism) in risk assessment (e.g., Structured
Assessment of Protective Factors for Violence Risk; de Vogel, de Ruter, Bouman, & De Vries
Robbe, 2009). Despite this development, there is disagreement about the conceptualization
of a protective factor and their value in risk assessment (e.g., some have argued that a
protective factor is just the inverse of a risk factor; e.g., Harris & Rice, 2015). Some research
has shown that when protective factors are incorporated into violence risk assessment that
they add to the predictive validity of traditional risk assessment tools (e.g., de Vries Robbe,
de Vogel, & de Spa, 2011).
Forensic mental health and risk assessments can occur with special populations (e.g.,
youth, offenders with intellectual disabilities). One special population is young offenders (in
Canada these are youth between the ages of 12 and 17) and separate legislation has been
developed to address criminal justice proceedings with youth (Youth Criminal Justice Act,
2003). A medical or psychological report can be ordered at various times during these
proceedings if there are questions about the presence or a mental disorder, the person
has repeatedly been found guilty, or the youth has committed a serious violent offence
(YCJA). As a result, forensic psychologists are often involved in conducting a comprehensive

assessment that involves a mental health and risk assessment.
Importantly there are also specialized sentencing options for youth. Eligibility for these
sentencing options could hinge, in part, on the results of a forensic assessment. For example,
a specialized sentencing option for youth is Intensive Rehabilitative and Conditional
Supervision (IRCS). An IRCS sentence allows the youth to first receive intensive therapeutic
support while in custody and then be released under conditional supervision. There are
different eligibility criteria for an IRCS sentence, including the presence of a mental disorder
and the presence of a treatment plan that could reduce risk (YCJA, 2003).
CIVIL DOMAINS
Traditionally forensic assessment has been focused on criminal law, but there is a
compelling case for the utility of forensic psychology in civil litigation (Greene, 2003;
Morgan & Palk, 2013). In civil matters, there are several legal issues where forensic
psychologists can offer an opinion that would assist the courts, such as psychological injury,
professional malpractice, wrongful termination, and parental capacity. Forensic
psychologists can be retained by either side in civil proceedings. For example, they can
be retained by the plaintiff to examine the impact of an event on the plaintiff or hired by
the defense to evaluate the claims of the plaintiff or a report submitted by another expert
(Gottlieb & Coleman, 2012). Given the number of contributions forensic psychologists can
make to these proceedings, the involvement of forensic psychologists in civil litigation has
increased over time (Greene, 2009).
One example of civil litigation where a forensic assessment can be useful is personal
injury assessment (this term includes psychological injuries). According to Ackerman (2010),
civil litigation on personal injury involves the determination of damages that stem from
an injury and a determination of who is liable for those damages. Forensic psychologists
are often involved in the determination of damages, though there are occasions where they
will assist with determination of liability, particularly when the cases involve liability on the
part of a medical professional. Although there are many challenges to civil litigation cases
involving psychological injuries (see Vallano, 2013 for a review), forensic psychologists may
be particularly useful in assisting the courts to understand the psychological injury that is
the focus of the proceedings, its cause, the influence of pre-existing psychological injuries,
and the likely prognosis. Forensic psychologists can also contribute specialized testing that
not only assesses for the presence of mental health disorders, but also considers the impact
of response style (e.g., is the person exaggerating reported psychological symptoms) on the
results of the assessment.
Forensic assessments can also be useful in family law, for example in custody disputes.
Forensic psychologists who conduct custody assessments should have competency in a wide
variety of areas including, but not limited to, an understanding of the research literature on
divorce and child custody, an understanding of developmental and family psychology, and
knowledge of the family court system (Gindes, 1995). Psychologists may fulfill different roles
in these proceedings and these assessments address a myriad of complex issues, such as child
abuse and domestic violence allegations, the presence of mental illness, and issues specific to
child development (Gottlieb & Coleman, 2012). Child custody evaluations are a contentious
area of practice, as psychologists who conduct these types of assessments are subject to a
high number of ethics complaints (Bow, Gottlieb, Siegel, & Noble, 2010).
CAREER PATHS
For students who are interested in pursuing a career that involves forensic assessment
there are several settings where these assessments might be conducted, such as hospitals,
correctional institutions, youth facilities, private practice, or police agencies. Given the
diverse settings in which forensic assessors are employed, it would be expected that the job
requirements would differ depending on the setting (e.g., whether one needs to be a licenced
psychologist).
It is important to note that in many jurisdictions forensic assessment closely intersects
with other disciplines, such as Developmental Psychology, Clinical Psychology, or
Counselling Psychology. For example, since many of the forensic assessments involve
broader clinical issues (e.g., NCRMD assessments), practicing forensic psychologists are
often required to be registered with their local regulatory bodies in the areas of Clinical
or Counselling Psychology as well as Forensic Psychology. For those interested in pursuing
a career path in forensic assessment, it is recommended that they investigate graduate
schools where faculty can provide forensic research training and where there are also ample
opportunities for forensic placements.
CORRECTIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
Psychology can be applied to correctional settings in multiple ways, including assessment,

crisis intervention, staff training, administrative consulting, and group and individual
therapy with individuals involved in the criminal justice system. A correctional psychologist
is a specialized clinical psychologist who conducts psychological assessments and provides
psychological treatment in jails, prisons, and other correctional settings; see the Clinical
Psychology Chapter for further information on psychological assessment and treatment.
Psychologists play a key role in Canadian corrections, with the Correctional Service of
Canada (CSC) being the largest single employer of psychologists in Canada (CSC, 2014a).
The following section will review non-clinical applications of psychology to correctional
contexts, focusing on Canada’s correctional systems.
CORRECTIONS IN CANADA
With a mandate to keep the public safe, the corrections system is responsible for
supervising individuals who have been arrested, charged with, or convicted of a criminal
offence. Canada’s federal correctional system (i.e., CSC) has jurisdiction over adult offenders
sentenced to two years or longer, while provincial or territorial correctional systems have
jurisdiction over adult offenders serving custodial sentences that are less than two years,
individuals who are being held while awaiting trial or sentencing (remand), offenders serving
community sentences (e.g., probation), and youth offenders. Sentencing decisions are made
by judges to achieve the goals of deterrence, denunciation, separation of the offender
from society, rehabilitation, reparation for harm done to victims or the community, and
to promote a sense of responsibility in offenders. Psychologists have played an important
role in determining whether current sentencing practices in Canada achieve the goals of
deterrence and rehabilitation (Motiuk & Serin, 2001). Through this research, forensic
psychologists have influenced correctional policies.
OFFENDER MANAGEMENT
Forensic psychologists have also affected correctional policy through their contributions
to offender management and treatment and Canadian researchers have led the way in
establishing principles related to effective correctional intervention. The Risk-Need-
Responsivity (RNR) model was developed to serve as a guideline for assessing and treating
offenders (Andrews & Bonta, 2010; Bonta & Andrews, 2017). These guidelines suggest that
correctional programming should match the risk and needs of the offenders, and the mode
and style of the program should match the learning style (e.g., factors, behaviours, and
attitudes that facilitate learning) and abilities of the offender (Bonta & Andrews). Specifically,
higher risk offenders require higher intensity programming, which generally means
increased program hours. Additionally, targeting an offender’s specific criminogenic needs
(e.g., pro-criminal attitudes, substance abuse) reduces recidivism (Andrews & Bonta). Finally,
RNR’s responsivity principle suggests that cognitive social learning methods be used to
influence behaviour, specifically cognitive-behavioural interventions that consider the
offenders’ strengths, learning style, personality, and motivation (Bonta & Andrews). It is not
uncommon for offenders to have low levels of verbal ability, low levels of personal insight,
and low willingness to engage in treatment work. Effective programming for offenders
often includes a very active style of delivery, with a predominance of role-play and other
interactive exercises to increase responsivity. Much of correctional programming worldwide
is based on RNR principles (e.g., Matthews, Feagans, & Kohl, 2015; Ternes, Doherty, &
Matheson, 2014).
Adherence to the RNR model has led to a number of opportunities for practitioners to
apply psychology to the correctional system. For example, to determine which correctional
programs an offender should be placed in, it is necessary to assess his or her criminogenic
needs. In CSC, all offenders undergo needs assessment within 90 days of admission. Needs
assessments are conducted by parole officers using the Dynamic Factors Identification and
Analysis-Revised (DFIA-R), which assesses for needs in the areas of employment/education,
marital/family, associates, substance abuse, community, personal/emotional, and attitude
(Stewart et al., 2017). Results of these assessments are used for case management, for profiling
offenders, and for predicting risk. Risk assessment (reviewed above) is relevant at various
points in the criminal justice process to help with correctional decision-making. For
example, results of risk assessment are considered pre-trial, at sentencing, for custody
classification, for parole hearings, and pre-release.
One of the goals of incarceration is to rehabilitate offenders to prepare them to reintegrate
into the community upon release. This goal is generally accomplished through correctional
programming. Effective correctional programs typically follow the RNR principles by
matching the offenders’ needs and risk (Bonta & Andrews, 2017; Smith, Gendreau, & Swartz,
2009). Programs that target multiple criminogenic needs seem to be the most effective
since most offenders have several criminogenic needs (Gendreau, French, & Taylor, 2002).
In line with this, CSC currently offers the Integrated Correctional Program Model to meet
various criminogenic needs (Motiuk, 2016). This model uses cognitive-behavioral and social
learning-based approaches to help offenders change their attitudes, beliefs, and behaviours
(CSC, 2014b).
Community Supervision
Most offenders are supervised in the community through bail, probation, or parole.
Probation is a provincial sentence served by the offender in the community. Parole is a
conditional release from federal prison intended to facilitate an offender’s reintegration into
the community. While on probation or parole, offenders are required to abide by certain
terms and restrictions, such as mandatory treatment, under the supervision of a probation
officer or parole officer. Violation of these terms may result in imprisonment or new charges
(for probation) or return to custody (for parole).
PAROLE DECISIONS
In Canada, generally, an offender must serve the first third of their sentence, or the first
seven years, whichever is less, before being eligible for parole (Parole Board Canada, 2018a).
Parole decisions are usually made after a public, formal hearing where the members of
the parole board question the offender and his or her parole officer. When determining
whether to grant parole, the parole board considers the risk the offender might present
to the community upon release based on factors such as criminal history, risk assessment
measures, psychological reports, information from victims, information indicating evidence
of change and insight into criminal behavior, program participation, and the feasibility of
the offender’s release plans (Parole Board Canada, 2018b). To assist parole board members
in making their parole decisions and to increase the likelihood that they consider the most
relevant factors, forensic psychologists have developed a tool that acts as a framework for
making these decisions (Gobeil & Serin, 2010). The framework lists factors that are relevant
to release decisions and provides a basic scoring mechanism that suggests how the factors
should be considered in the overall assessment of risk. Using this framework results in fewer
release decision errors than traditional parole decision making (Serin et al., 2016; Yesberg,
Scanlan, & Polaschek, 2014).
ISSUES IN CORRECTIONS
Segregation
Over the past several years, specific issues have become known in corrections that have
highlighted the importance of psychology in this context. For example, the media has
focused much attention on the issue of placing offenders with mental illness in solitary
confinement. This issue gained public notoriety when 19-year-old Ashley Smith died by
suicide alone in a segregation cell in Grand Valley Institution for women in Kitchener,
Ontario, while officers looked on via video monitors (Office of the Correctional Investigator,
2014). During her incarceration, Ms. Smith had been moved between institutions 17 times
and had spent her entire time in federal custody (almost one year) in segregation. She had
also been the subject of 150 security incidents. Although Ms. Smith’s mental health needs
were well-documented, she had never been provided with a comprehensive mental health
assessment or treatment plan.
This tragic incident led researchers and policymakers to look closely at the consequences
of segregation. Although research has not provided conclusive evidence that segregation
results in negative mental health consequences (Glancy & Murray, 2006; Morgan et al., 2016;
O’Keefe et al., 2013), it has been suggested that longer periods of segregation (i.e., more
than 14 days) might be harmful due to mental deterioration (Arrigo & Bullock, 2008; U.S.
National Research Council, 2014). This has led to changes in policy related to administrative
segregation. For example, CSC now prohibits administrative segregation for inmates with
serious mental illness or those actively engaging in self-harm (CSC, 2017). Recently, the
Ontario Superior Court and the British Columbia Supreme Court ruled that indefinite
solitary confinement in Canadian prisons is unconstitutional (British Columbia Civil
Liberties Association v. Canada, 2018; Corporation of the Canadian Civil Liberties
Association v. Her Majesty the Queen, 2017). Several correctional psychologists, experts in
segregation, provided expert evidence in these hearings. With the Canadian government
appealing these decisions (Paperny, 2018) and similar lawsuits ongoing in other Canadian
jurisdictions (McMillan, 2018), it is clear that research and policy modifications will be
ongoing. The input of psychology will be imperative in these efforts.
Correctional staff stress
The extreme stress that correctional staff workers experience on the job has also recently
been highlighted in the media. Correctional officers deal with a multitude of stressors on
the job, with the most severe stressor probably being daily contact with potentially volatile
inmates. An investigative report conducted by CBC found that one in twenty employees at
federal penitentiaries had been diagnosed with stress injuries (MacIvor, 2017), and the Union
of Canadian Correctional Officers (UCCO) has suggested that most correctional officers
experience psychological distress, which they directly attribute to their work (UCCO, 2016).
This is in line with Canadian research that has found high rates of mental illness among
first responders, with paramedics, Royal Canadian Mounted Police (RCMP), and correctional
workers being the most affected (Carleton et al., 2017). These findings highlight the need
for improved training for new recruits, better support systems for correctional workers,
increased psychological services for those who have experienced trauma, and more research
into the issues surrounding trauma symptoms in correctional staff. Again, psychology can
make an important contribution to these issues (Lambert & Hogan, 2018).
CAREER PATHS
For students interested in pursuing a career that applies psychology to correctional

settings, there are many options, both in and outside of the prison environment. Some
of these careers require advanced graduate school training, while others do not. For those
interested in working in the correctional environment directly with incarcerated offenders,
there are opportunities to work as correctional psychologists or social workers, which would
require graduate-level degrees in clinical or counselling psychology for the former position
and a degree in social work for the latter position. Other institutional jobs where an
undergraduate degree in psychology would be considered an asset include correctional
officer, primary worker, parole officer, correctional program officer, and social program
officer. Those working in these roles are responsible for helping offenders with their
correctional plan and encouraging them along the path to successful reintegration. For
more information on employment opportunities within corrections, CSC has provided
information on its website (http://www.csc-scc.gc.ca/careers/index-eng.shtml).
For those interested in working in corrections, but not in an institution, there are
opportunities to work as a correctional psychologist, probation officer, or parole officer in
the community. There are also opportunities at CSC’s national and regional headquarters
for staff trainers. For those interested in directly influencing correctional policy, there are
research and policy positions within provincial departments of justice, within Canada’s
Department of Public Safety, and within the Office of the Correctional Investigator. CSC’s
national headquarters has many opportunities for those interested in researching or
implementing public policy, including opportunities in the mental health branch, the public
health branch, the research branch, the program evaluation branch, the women offenders
branch, and correctional operations and programs. Generally, for these positions, an
undergraduate degree in the social sciences would be required and a graduate degree in
psychology would be considered an asset, although higher-level positions may require
advanced degrees.
POLICE PSYCHOLOGY
Psychology can play a significant role in many aspects of police work, including the
selection of recruits, law enforcement officer training, and the evaluation of police
performance. Ultimately, psychology can contribute to improving law enforcement
procedures. This section will outline some of the ways in which psychology can support
policing in Canada.
POLICING IN CANADA
Law enforcement in Canada is structured under the three levels of government: federal,
provincial, and municipal. The Royal Canadian Mounted Police (RCMP) enforce federal
laws and serve as the police force for all provinces and territories, except for Ontario and
Quebec. Although some municipalities have their own police departments, many smaller
municipalities contract their policing out to the provincial governments and the RCMP.
In 2017, there were almost 70,000 law enforcement officers in Canada and almost 30,000
civilians employed with police forces in Canada (Conor, 2018). With a mandate that includes
preventing and investigating crime, maintaining peace and order, and enforcing laws,
policing is an important and challenging job, and a job where psychology can contribute.
POLICE SELECTION
Police work is demanding, stressful, and potentially dangerous and there are likely certain
individual characteristics that are compatible with being a good police officer. Through
police selection, we can increase the chances that those accepted for a police position have
the highest potential for success. Selection practices are covered more comprehensively
in the Industrial/Organizational chapter of this volume. The present section focuses
specifically on issues related to police selection.
Through decades of research, psychology researchers have explored the individual traits
most important to policing. Early efforts at police selection focused on assessing applicants’
intelligence (Terman, 1917), using personality tests to predict police performance (Humm
& Humm, 1950), and psychiatric screening (Reiser, 1982). Although these factors are still
considered important in police selection, more recent selection practices are more
formalized and extensive, and usually include a formal selection interview, along with
background checks, medical exams, drug tests, polygraph tests, situational tests, and tests
of personality, cognitive ability, and physical agility (Cochrane, Tett, & Vandecreek, 2003).
The RCMP uses tests specifically designed for police selection, including the RCMP’s Police
Aptitude Test and the Six Factor Personality Questionnaire (RCMP, 2016). Overall, the
knowledge, skills, and abilities determined to be essential for policing include honesty,
reliability, sensitivity to others, good communication skills, high motivation, problem
solving skills, and being a team player (Sanders, 2003). While the selection process is usually
administered by police personnel, psychologists have played an important role in designing
selection instruments and evaluating the selection process.
Evaluations of the selection process have examined how accurately various selection tools
(e.g., interview, cognitive ability tests, personality tests) predict job performance. Results
have been mixed, with interviews and most personality tests showing low predictive validity,
although the Inwald Personality Inventory, which was developed to be used with law
enforcement, appears to be more predictive of police performance (e.g., Aamodt, 2004;
Cortina, Goldstein, Payne, Davison, & Gilliland, 2000). Moreover, cognitive ability tests are
predictive of performance at the police academy but are less effective at predicting on-the-
job performance (Aamodt). It is clear that more research in this area would be helpful in
improving selection practices.
POLICE TRAINING
Police departments generally offer training to their new recruits and provide training to all
officers on a yearly basis. Training covers a wide range of topics, including defensive tactics,
investigations, use of force, the criminal code, and the psychology of criminal behaviour.
Training is generally offered at specialized colleges, such as the Canadian Police College
or the Justice Institute of British Columbia but may also be offered at traditional post-
secondary institutions. For example, Memorial University in Newfoundland offers a
Diploma in Police Studies, which is intended for any students with an interest in policing
or criminal justice, for police officers with educational and training needs, and also fulfills
the post-secondary educational qualification for admission to the Royal Newfoundland
Constabulary’s police cadet program (Memorial University, 2018).
Training is often delivered by police officers who have become experts in the relevant
topic through training or experience. Academics may also work as trainers for certain topics,
such as responding to individuals with mental illness (Morrissey, Fagan, & Cocozza, 2009)
or negotiating with terrorists or hostage takers (e.g., Augustin & Fagan, 2011). Psychologists
may also design the curriculum for training police officers. For example, in recognition that
policing may be affected by racial bias, the training program “Fair and Impartial Policing”
was developed, based on social psychology principles, to help police officers become aware
of their unconscious biases and how they may affect police work (Fridell, 2016).
Psychologists may also work with the police to evaluate a training program to determine
whether it is consistent with police responsibilities or to determine whether it had the
intended impact. For example, to assess the impact of investigative interview training,
Cederborg, Alm, da Silva Nises, and Lamb (2012) evaluated the post-training interviews of
criminal investigators. They found that the interviews improved after training, suggesting
that the training was effective.
POLICE STRESS
Similar to working in a correctional environment (mentioned above) policing is

considered one of the most stressful occupations (Carleton et al., 2017). In addition to
the danger associated with police work, research suggests that police officers have much
difficulty balancing their work and home life (Duxbury & Higgins, 2012). The increased
stress is associated with poorer work performance, poorer physical health, and poorer
mental health.
Most police agencies now recognize the negative consequences of the stressful police work
environment and have set up programs to prevent and reduce stress among police officers.
These programs tend to be secondary interventions, focused on improving individual
responses to stress, and include informal support networks, physical fitness programs,
relaxation training, professional counselling services, and debriefing after critical events
(Patterson, Chung, & Swan, 2014). These types of interventions show limited effectiveness
in reducing stress symptoms but are more feasible for use within law enforcement
organizations than primary interventions, which require organizational change to prevent
stressful conditions from occurring. It is clear that improvements can be made in training
for new recruits, as well as better support systems and increased psychological services for
police officers who are experiencing stress. More research into ways to reduce police officer
stress and developing more effective stress reduction methods would help guide police
agencies in providing these interventions. Psychologists can work with law enforcement to
address these issues.
CRIMINAL OR PSYCHOLOGICAL PROFILING
Criminal profiling is sometimes used by police forces to aid their investigations. Criminal
profiling involves constructing a description of the perpetrator of a crime based on
characteristics of the crime scene, statements from victims and witnesses, autopsy and
other relevant reports, and knowledge of criminal behaviour (Doan & Snook, 2008; Snook,
Eastwood, Gendreau, Goggin, & Cullen, 2007). This description can be used to develop a
strategy to apprehend the unknown criminal and, if applicable, to link a series of similar
crimes.
Despite the high level of interest in criminal profiling, there are few criminal profiler
positions in North America. Those who work in these positions do not usually have graduate
training in psychology; rather they have advanced through the ranks of law enforcement
or have received advanced training specific to criminal profiling. Overall, there is little
empirical support for the usefulness of criminal profiling to criminal investigations, with
critics maintaining that it relies on a weak standard of proof. Indeed, Snook et al.’s (2007)
review and meta-analysis concluded that trained expert criminal profilers were no better
than laypeople at constructing criminal profiles, and that research needs to show that it is
reliably precise before considering it a scientific technique that is useful to policing. Despite
these criticisms, there is a concerted effort among researchers to conduct quality research
on offender profiling and improve its application (e.g., Goodwill et al., 2013).
Psychological profiling may provide a larger contribution to legal investigations through
psychological autopsies. Psychological autopsies, an examination of a deceased person’s
mental state prior to his or her death, are relevant in determining a decedent’s testamentary
capacity, in evaluating a claim of self-defence, and in determining whether a death was
homicide, suicide, or accidental (La Fon, 2008; Ogloff & Otto, 1993). For example, an
insurance company might be interested in determining whether a car crash was an accident
or suicide. Because these autopsies are based on psychological theory, police officers and
others in the legal system may call on psychologists and other mental health practitioners to
conduct these investigations.
CAREER PATHS
A background in psychology would be beneficial to anyone interested in becoming a

police officer. Students interested in applying their psychological education to law
enforcement may also find civilian opportunities with the RCMP or other police
organizations. For example, the RCMP hires civilians to work in criminal intelligence and
wellness and safety. For these types of jobs, an undergraduate degree in psychology would
likely be considered an asset.
A graduate degree in psychology (or another social science) would likely be required for
developing training curriculum or assessments to be used for personnel selection. Similarly,
evaluations of police training or other police practices would likely be conducted by
someone with a graduate degree in the social sciences. Those involved in this kind of work
are often affiliated with an academic institution but may work directly for the police force.
Law enforcement agencies may also request assistance from those with advanced,
graduate-level training on issues related to police procedures and investigations. For
example, police agencies may consult with psychologists for duties related to negotiating
with hostage takers or crime prevention initiatives. More information regarding police
investigations is provided in the following section.
Finally, there are many research opportunities with police agencies. The RCMP and many
smaller police agencies have research divisions. These research divisions, often composed of
both civilians and police officers, conduct research to aid police operations. The Canadian
Society of Evidence Based Policing brings together police practitioners, academic
researchers, and public policy makers to conduct and share high-quality research to advance
policing in Canada. This inter-disciplinary society holds workshops and shares research, and
is open to academic researchers, including students, who are engaged in policing-related
research and activities (http://www.can-sebp.net).
EYEWITNESSES, INTERROGATIONS, AND CONFESSIONS
On the 23rd of December, 1981, Tom Sophonow, then 29, was arriving back to his home
town of Winnipeg from the west coast, where he was living. His plan was to visit his
daughter, but when his ex-wife refused to allow it, he instead got his brakes fixed at a
Canadian Tire and bought some Christmas stockings to give away to kids at a local hospital.
Nearby, in a donut shop in St. Boniface, a 16-year-old counter server was murdered,
presumably during a robbery. The crime was a major news story, and pressure to find the
killer was intense. Several witnesses came forward, and police identified Sophonow as the
prime suspect. After an intense interrogation where Sophonow was told his fingerprints were
at the scene (a lie) and five witnesses had identified him (another lie) he confessed to the
crime (though he later recanted this confession).
Sophonow was depicted in the press dressed as the perpetrator (i.e., in a cowboy hat, with
a “Fu Manchu” moustache), creating conditions for a biased line-up procedure. After seeing
the media coverage, witnesses identified Sophonow as the killer. Jailhouse informants later
testified that he confessed to the murder while in jail (he had not; but one informant was
rewarded by having 26 fraud charges against him dropped).
It took three trials and four years in prison before Sophonow was ultimately exonerated. In
an inquiry after the third trial, it was determined that the police had used deeply flawed (but
perfectly legal) procedures that had biased the process against Sophonow and had created a
situation where a perfectly innocent man could be convicted of murder.
THE RELIABILITY OF EYEWITNESS TESTIMONY
As the Sophonow case demonstrated, eyewitnesses make mistakes. It is not clear what
proportion of identifications are errors, but we do have some evidence that can give us a
sense of the situation. In the US, the Innocence Project (innocenceproject.org) has resulted
in the exoneration of over 400 people convicted of crimes that we now know, due to DNA
evidence, they did not commit. In over 70% of those cases, the individual was convicted,
in part, due to the testimony of a mistaken eyewitness (Time, 2017). We also know that in
staged crimes, eyewitness error rates are often 50% or more (e.g., Bornstein & Zickafoose,
1999; Smith, Lindsay, & Pryke, 2000; Smith, Lindsay, Pryke, & Dysart, 2001). Importantly,
incorrect eyewitnesses are typically just as confident as incorrect eyewitnesses, and confident
eyewitnesses are convincing witnesses in court (e.g., Wells, Memon, & Penrod, 2006).
But why do eyewitnesses make errors? There is often a perception in the general public
that our memory is a “wax tablet” and that events are etched upon that tablet and can be
retrieved, intact, at a later time. However, this is simply not the case – our memories are
malleable – they change over time. We construct our memories based partly on what we
actually saw, but also based on what we expected to see, our attitudes, our beliefs, and our
biases. We also know that stress and emotional arousal have an impact on our ability to
process incoming information into memory (e.g., Morgan et al., 2004).
THE ROLE OF POLICE INTERVIEWS
New information, acquired after an event, can also change memories. In a series of
classic studies, Elizabeth Loftus (e.g., Loftus et al, 1978) demonstrated that asking misleading
questions, or providing misleading or incorrect information, led to errors. For example, the
wording used when questioning witnesses (e.g., “saw the ‘Yield’ sign” when in fact they saw
a “Stop” sign) changed how they reported what they saw; importantly, it also changed their
actual memory for the event.
It is vital that police officers are well versed in how to effectively interview witnesses
without providing new information or asking leading questions. For example, when
interviewing witnesses after a reported armed robbery, it would be better to ask “What did
you see?” rather than “Did you see the man with the gun?” It is exactly this principle that
has led to the development of the Cognitive Interview (Fisher & Geiselman, 1992) which has
been demonstrated to be an effective technique to increase correct recall for events without
introducing errors or extraneous information (Köhnken, Milne, Memon & Bull, 1999).
The Cognitive Interview allows witnesses to give an uninterrupted description of what
they saw, incorporating probing question to jog memory (e.g., “was there anything unusual
about his appearance?”). The Cognitive Interview procedure also specifies to interview
witnesses alone so that the recollections of other witnesses do not influence the witness’
responses.
POLICE LINEUP PROCEDURES
As noted in the Sophonow case, police used flawed lineup procedures that resulted in
his false identification. Psychology researchers have been interested in how to reduce the
likelihood of error in eyewitness identification for almost 50 years. Researchers have
identified two main factors for consideration in the construction of a fair lineup procedure:
a) the construction of the lineup itself, and b) the instructions given to eyewitnesses.
Although not always implemented, best practice is clear (see Yarmey, 2003; Wells et al.,
2006) – witnesses should be shown photos one at a time (i.e., sequentially) and not all at
once (i.e., simultaneously). There should always be at least six photos shown to eyewitnesses,
and witnesses should not know how many they are going to see. In the photoset, there
should only be one suspect, with the other photos containing “foils” (individuals known to
be innocent). The person conducting the lineup should not be the investigator working on
the case, in order to reduce the chance of bias. Consciously or unconsciously, if the person
sitting with the witness knows who the suspect is, they give verbal or non-verbal cues as to
who should be selected as the criminal (Yarmey).
Further, photos (mug shots) should be selected based on the description the witness gave
of the criminal, and not how similar in appearance the photos are to the suspect. The person
constructing the lineup must be careful to ensure that there are no cues either in the photos
or the setting of identification that increase the likelihood of one photo being selected over
the others (e.g., lighting differences, clothing cues, unique physical or facial features, tattoos).
Finally, witnesses need to be instructed that the criminal may not be in the lineup. When all
of these factors are combined, errors can be reduced by as much as half (Wells et al., 2006).
This is important, because once an error is made, it is almost impossible to diagnose (Smith
et al., 2000; 2001).
Demonstrating the failure to apply best practice, in Sophonow’s case, he was asked at
one point in the investigation to put on a cowboy hat, similar to the one the witnesses had
described, and his photo was taken. That photo was then shown to witnesses who identified
him as the criminal (though they were likely just identifying his hat and moustache). Next, he
was placed in a police lineup and was identified again by the eyewitnesses. Eyewitnesses were
thus seeing him for a second time, and again selected the man they had recently identified
rather than the criminal that they had seen at the scene of the crime.
CONFESSION EVIDENCE
You will recall (from above) that among the Innocence Project cases, about 70% of the time
the wrongful conviction involved a mistaken eyewitness. However, it is also true that in about
a quarter of those cases – where we know the suspect was actually innocent – they also confessed
to the crime. This is simply shocking to the average person – how can an innocent person
confess to a crime they did not commit? The answer is illustrated by the Sophonow case.
Under Canadian law, although suspects have the right to consult a lawyer, they do not have
the right to have one present during questioning (e.g., Patry, Connors, Adams-Quackenbush,
& Smith, 2017). In addition, police are trained in tactics to pressure suspects into confessing.
Known as the “Reid Technique” (e.g., Kassin, Appleby, & Perillo, 2010) this 9-step process
focuses on core issues of befriending the suspect, minimization of the severity of their
crimes, and eventually breaking them down to confess to the crime. The Reid technique
claims up to a 90% success rate ( John E. Reid & Associates, Inc., 2014) when performed
correctly. There is evidence that the technique and its principles will increase confessions
from guilty suspects. The problem is that it also increases confessions from innocent
suspects, and indeed, there is evidence that innocent suspects may be particularly
susceptible to its procedures (Kassin et al, 2010a). This is particularly true for suspects
who are under the influence of drugs or alcohol, have developmental or mental health
issues, or are adolescents. The psychological pressure on people being questioned is intense,
and as humans, we tend to focus on short term outcomes rather than longer term ones
(Kassin, et al., 2010a). In these cases, the short-term goal (getting out of the unpleasant
interrogation situation) outweighs the long-term consequence (confessing to a crime you
did not commit). However, most people do not understand the power of the underlying
psychological processes, thus this is one situation where psychological researchers can
provide important insight to the public and the legal system.
CAREER PATHS
Given the breadth of areas where psychology and the law intersect in the areas of police
investigations, there are perhaps not surprisingly, several opportunities for careers in this
area. Many psychological researchers provide expert witness testimony. As noted in the
first section of the chapter, experts can provide briefs or reports to triers of fact, or to
one side or another during a trial. Although expert witness testimony is relatively rare in
Canada (as compared to the US, where it is quite common), psychological researchers can
and do provide expert testimony on topics such as eyewitness identification and confession
evidence. Typically, the people who are consulted as experts in these areas are academics
and researchers.
THE ROLE AND COMPOSITION OF JURIES
Under Canadian law, the accused has the right to trial. Certain crimes are judge only
(where maximum punishment is less than 5 years in prison), whereas others may be by
judge and jury (e.g., when the maximum punishment is more than 5 years) but many lawyers
choose not to have juries. Thus, in Canada, juries are typically not required and are relatively
rare in criminal cases (Vidmar & Schuller, 2011).
Jury selection is under the jurisdiction of both federal and provincial law. In Canada,
the number of jurors on a jury varies from as low as 6-8 for civil cases and up to 12 in
criminal cases. Alternate jurors are sometimes selected in the event that a juror has to recuse
themselves for any reason (this is more typical in long trials). Juries provide verdicts, but do
not give advice on sentences except in very rare circumstances. Anyone who is over 18 or 19
(depending on the jurisdiction), who does not work in the legal profession, and who does not
have a criminal record, may be called to serve on a jury. Different provinces have different
restrictions (e.g., in New Brunswick medical practitioners are not eligible to serve on juries)
but typically the eligibility requirements are minimal.
The next step in jury selection is voir dire which is the questioning of jurors to establish
suitability. Potential jurors are disallowed for hardship or partiality reasons (e.g., they know
of the crime, have made a decision on guilt, know someone involved). This is where the
opposing attorneys have the opportunity to influence the composition of the jury. There are
two types of challenges the Crown (prosecution) or defense can use: Peremptory challenges –
where they can dismiss jurors without providing a reason; and Challenge for cause – where
counsels can ask jurors specific questions to establish suitability. As we will discuss below, it
is at this time that trial consultants can play a significant role in the outcome of trials.
The study of juries emerged directly out of research on group dynamics. Early work (e.g.,
Kalven & Zeisel, 1966) showed that two thirds of juries do not initially agree on a verdict, but
by the end of their work 95% of juries come to consensus, in that they unanimously agree
on a verdict. Although 90% of jury decisions will agree with the original tendency of the jury
(i.e., the initial vote) there is a significant amount of discussion and persuasion that occurs in
that context before a final verdict is reached.
PRE-TRIAL PUBLICITY
There are many factors that can influence a jury. One that has received a great deal of
attention, and which is considered by the courts regularly, is pretrial publicity. The basic idea
is that media exposure to information about the case can reduce impartiality. For example,
the Robert Pickton trial in 2006 (a serial murderer in BC, charged with the murder of 20
women; though he may be responsible for dozens more) came after years of publicity about
the crimes, and more than 4 years of pre-trial (post arrest) publicity. More than 600 potential
jurors were called to establish a jury.
In cases such as these, courts have the option to invoke publication bans, limiting what
the press can publish about the case; however, in making these decisions, the court must
balance the right of the accused to a fair trial (which publicity may undermine) and freedom
of the press (which is a fundamental right under the Charter). There are also clear practical
limits to bans – Canadian courts have no jurisdiction on foreign publications, and in an age
of the internet, there are no limits as to where Canadians can get their news. If someone is
determined to find out about a high-profile case, they will. The courts also have the ability
to enact a change of venue, which can move the court to a new jurisdiction which would
(presumably) allow for a more unbiased pool of potential jurors.
PHYSICAL ATTRACTIVENESS OF THE DEFENDANT
The “what is beautiful is good” stereotype is a well understood social psychological

phenomena. Whether we like it or not, attractive people get more dates, are more successful,
get better jobs, are liked more, and make more money (see e.g., Myers, Jordan, Smith &
Spencer, 2018, for a review). Research has also suggested that this extends to the courtroom.
For example, Wiseman (1998) conducted a large study presenting evidence of a purported
burglary case to BBC Television viewers and asked them to call in with a verdict.
Interestingly, he was able to vary the attractiveness of the criminal the viewers saw. Of the
64,000 people who called in to give a verdict, those that saw an attractive photo voted for
conviction 31% of the time. The less attractive defendant was convicted 41% of the time.
THE JUDGE’S INSTRUCTIONS
In a typical criminal trial, jurors receive two types of instructions: 1) instructions regarding
the law; and 2) instructions regarding potential verdicts. Given the fact that jurors, by
definition, are not legal professionals, both types of instructions are reasonable and
necessary for the jury. Unfortunately, to ensure accuracy and to protect verdicts from
appeals due to error, judges often use very technical legal jargon that most jurors (at best)
struggle to understand (e.g., Daftary-Kapur, et al., 2010). Judges regularly instruct jurors
to disregard pieces of evidence that have been presented at trial (Fleming, Wegener &
Petty, 1999; Steblay, Hosch, Culhane, & McWethy, 2006). Although jurors indicate they will
disregard the information, and may even believe they can, they do not, and the inadmissible
information can result in biased verdicts.
CAREER PATHS
Given the importance of juries in legal proceedings, it is not surprising that there is a role
of trial consultants in this area. Indeed, there is a significant industry for jury consulting,
particularly in the US and in civil cases, where there is a potential monetary outcome.
Academics and researchers have been using juries to understand group decision making for
some time, and this is why these researchers can provide important insights into the process.
It is the job of the jury consultant to understand what factors (attitudes, beliefs, socio-
economic factors) can help a jury reach the verdict that is preferred by their client. The
consultant, once they understand the context of the case and the desired makeup for the
jury, can help the crown or defense use their peremptory challenges and challenges for cause
to shape the jury in a way that creates the most favourable outcome potential for their client.
CONCLUSION
As you can see from the preceding sections, psychology and the law interface in many
ways. These interfaces are broad ranging and provide opportunities for academics,
consultants, and clinical psychologists to engage. Most of these professionals have advanced
degrees, and many need to have provincially governed certifications, but there are
opportunities for influence at multiple levels. Perhaps more importantly, the legal
community increasingly understands the value of collaborating with trained professionals in
the psychology field to improve and enhance the outcomes of the justice system in Canada.
REFERENCES
Aamodt, M. G. (2004). Research in law enforcement selection. Boca Raton, FL: Brown Walker
Press.
Ackerman, M. J. (2010). Essentials of personal injury assessment. In M. J. Ackerman (Ed.),

Essentials of forensic psychological assessment (2nd ed., pp. 66-84). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley &
Sons.
American Psychological Association (2013). Specialty guidelines for forensic psychology.
Retrieved from APA website: https://www.apa.org/pubs/journals/features/forensic-
psychology.pdf
Andrews, D. A., & Bonta, J. (2010). Rehabilitating criminal justice policy and practice.
Psychology, Public Policy, and Law, 16, 39-55.
Arrigo, B. A., & Bullock, J. L. (2008). The psychological effects of solitary confinement on
prisoners in supermax units: Reviewing what we know and recommending what should
change. International Journal of Offender Therapy and Comparative Criminology, 52(6),
622-640.
Augustin, D., & Fagan, T. J. (2011). Roles for mental health professionals in critical law
enforcement incidents: An overview. Psychological Services, 8(3), 166-177.
Bonta, J., & Andrews, D. A. (2017). The Psychology of Criminal Conduct (6th ed.). New York, NY:
Routledge.
Bornstein, B.H., & Zickafoose, D.J. (1999). “I know I know it, I know I saw it”: The stability
of the confidence-accuracy relationship across domains. Journal of Experimental Psychology:
Applied, 5, 76-88.
Bow, J. N., Gottlieb, M. C., Siegel, J. C., & Noble, G. S. (2010). Licencing board complaints
in child custody practice. Journal of Forensic Psychology Practice, 10, 403-418. doi: 10.1080/
15228932.2010.489851.
Brankley, A. E., Goodwill, A. M., & Reale, K. (2014). Escalation from fetish burglaries to
sexual violence: A retrospective case study of Former Col., D. Russell Williams. Journal of
Investigative Psychology and Offender Profiling, 11, 115-135. doi: 10.1002/jip.1406.
British Columbia Civil Liberties Association v. Canada (Attorney General), 2018 BCSC 62.
Canadian: Criminal Code, C-46 R.S.C. § 745 (1985).
Canadian Psychological Association (2012). Canadian Psychological Association (CPA) position
on the entry to practice for professional psychology in Canada. Retrieved from CPA website:
https://www.cpa.ca/docs/File/Practice/EntryPracticeProfPsychologyCanada2012.pdf
Canadian Psychological Association (2017). Canadian code of ethics for Psychologists (4th ed.).
Ottawa, ON: Author. Retrieved from CPA website: https://www.cpa.ca/docs/File/Ethics/
CPA_Code_2017_4thEd.pdf
Carleton, R. N., Afifi, T. O., Turner, S., Taillieu, T., Duranceau, S., LeBouthillier, D. M., …
Asmundson, G. J. (2017). Mental disorder symptoms among public safety personnel in
Canada. Canadian Journal of Psychiatry, 63(1), 54-64.
Cederborg, A-C., Alm, C., da Silva Nises, D. L., & Lamb, M. E. (2012). Investigative
interviewing of alleged child abuse victims: An evaluation of a new training programme
for investigative interviewers. Police Practice and Research: An International Journal, 14(3),
242-254.
Cochrane, R. E., Tett, R. P., & Vandecreek, L. (2003). Psychological testing and the selection
of police officers: A national survey. Criminal Justice and Behavior, 30, 511-537.
Conor, P. (2018). Police Resources in Canada, 2017. Ottawa, ON: Statistics Canada, Juristat.
Corporation of the Canadian Civil Liberties Association v. Her Majesty the Queen, 2017
ONSC 7491.
Correctional Service Canada (2014a, August 8). Psychologists and Assistant Psychologists.
Retrieved from http://www.csc-scc.gc.ca/careers/003001-1302-eng.shtml
Correctional Service Canada (2014b, October 31). Integrated Correctional Program Model.
Retrieved from http://www.csc-scc.gc.ca/correctional-process/002001-2011-eng.shtml
Correctional Service Canada (2017). Commissioner’s Directive 709: Administrative Segregation.
Ottawa, ON: Author.
Cortina, J. M., Goldstein, N. B., Payne, S. C., Davison, H. K., & Gilliland, S. W. (2000).
The incremental validity of interview scores over and above cognitive ability and
conscientiousness scores. Personnel Psychology, 53, 325-351.
Criminal Code, R.S.C., C-46 (1985). Retrieved from http://laws.justice.gc.ca/en/C-46/
index.html
Daftary-Kapur, T., Dumas, R., & Penrod, S. D. (2010). Jury decision making biases and
methods to counter them. Legal and Criminological Psychology, 15, 133-154.
de Vires Robbe, M., de Vogel, V., & de Spa, E. (2011). Protective factors for violence risk in
forensic psychiatric patients: A retrospective validation study of the SAPROF. International
Journal of Forensic Mental Health, 10, 178-186. doi:10.1080/14999013.2011.60232
de Vogel, V., de Ruiter, C., Bouman, Y., & de Vries Robbe, M. (2009). SAPROF: Guidelines
for the assessment of protective factors for violence risk. English Version. Utrecht, Netherlands:
Forum Educatief.
Doan, B., & Snook, B. (2008). A failure to find empirical support for the homology
assumption in criminal profiling. Journal of Police and Criminal Psychology, 23(2), 61-70.
Duxbury, L., & Higgins, C. (2012). Caring for and about those who serve: Work-life conflict
and employee well-being within Canada’s police departments. Retrieved from
https://sprott.carleton.ca/wp-content/files/Duxbury-Higgins-Police2012_fullreport.pdf.
Fisher, R. P., & Geiselman, R. E. (1992). Memory enhancing techniques for investigative
interviewing: The cognitive interview. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas.
Fleming, M. A., Wegener, D. T., & Petty, R. E. (1999). Procedural and legal motivations
to correct for perceived judicial biases. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 35(2),
186-203.
Fridell, L. (2016, August 1). Can better training solve cop’s implicit biases? Democracy: A
Journal of Ideas. Retrieved from: https://democracyjournal.org/arguments/can-better-
training-solve-cops-implicit-biases/
Gendreau, P., French, S., & Taylor, A. (2002). What works (what doesn’t) revised 2002: The
principles of effective correctional treatment (Unpublished manuscript). University of New
Brunswick, Saint John, New Brunswick, Canada.
Gindes, M. (1995). Competence and training in child custody evaluations. American Journal of
Family Therapy, 23, 273-280.
Glancy, G. D., & Murray, E. L. (2006). The psychiatric aspects of solitary confinement. Victims
& Offenders, 1(4), 361-368.
Gobeil, R., & Serin, R. C. (2010). Parole decision-making: Contributions from research. In
J. Brown & E. Campbell (Eds.), Cambridge Handbook of Forensic Psychology (pp. 251-258).
Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.
Goodwill, A. M., Stephens, S., Oziel, S., Sharma, S., Allen, J., Bowes, N., & Lehmann (2013).
Advancement of criminal profiling methods in faceted multidimensional analysis. Journal
of Investigative Psychology and Offender Profiling, 10, 71-95. doi: 10.1002/jip.1388
Gottlieb, M. C., & Coleman, A. (2012). Ethical challenges in forensic psychology practice. In
A. J. Knapp (Ed.), APA handbook of ethics in psychology: Practice, teaching, and research (Vol. 2,
pp. 91- 123). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Greene, E. (2003). Psychology in civil litigation: An overview and introduction to the special
issue. Law and Human Behaviour, 27, 1-4.
Greene, E. (2009). Psychological issues in civil trials. In. J. D. Lieberman and D. A. Krauss
(Eds.), Jury psychology: Social aspects of trial (pp. 203-226). New York, NY: Routledge.
Harris, G. T., & Rice, M. E. (2015). Progress in violence risk assessment and communication:
Hypothesis versus evidence. Behavioral Sciences and the Law, 33, 128-145. doi:10.1002/
bsi.2157
Heilbrun, K. (2001). Principles of forensic mental assessment. New York, NY: Kluwer Academic/
Plenum Press.
Heilbrun, K., & Brooks Holliday, S. (2013). Psychological assessment in forensic contexts.
In K. F. Geisinger (Ed.), APA Handbook of testing and assessment in psychology: Testing and
assessment in clinical and counseling psychology (Vol. 2, pp. 271-284). Washington, DC:
American Psychological Association.
Heilbrun, K., Marczyk, G. R., DeMatteo, D., Zilmer, E. A., Harris, J., & Jennings, T. (2003).
Principles of forensic mental health assessment: Implications for neuropsychological
assessment in forensic contexts. Assessment, 10, 329-343. doi: 10.1177/1073191103258591.
Hessen Kayfitz, J., Cooper, B. S., Guy, L. S., Haag, A. M., Hill, D., Kolton, D. J. C., Pomichalek,
M., . . ., Watt, M. C. (2017). Fitness to stand trial and criminal responsibility assessments in
Canada: Improving access to qualified mental health professionals. A position paper of the Canadian
Psychological Association. Retrieved from CPA website: https://www.cpa.ca/docs/File/
Position/
Fitness%20to%20Stand%20Trial%20and%20Criminal%20Responsibility%20Assessments%2
0in%20Canada.pdf
Humm, D. G., & Humm, K. A. (1950). Humm-Wadsworth temperament scale appraisals
compared with criteria of job success in the Los Angeles Police Department. The Journal of
Kalven, H., & Zeisel, H. (1966). The American Jury. Boston, MA: Little Brown & Company.
Kassin, S. M., Drizin, S. A., Grisso, T., Gudjonsson, G. H., Leo, R. A., & Redlich, A. D. (2010a).
Police-induced confessions: Risk factors and recommendations. Law and Human Behavior,
34, 3–38.
Kassin, S. M., Appleby, S. C., & Perillo, J. T. (2010b). Interviewing suspects: Practice, science,
and future directions. Legal and Criminological Psychology, 15, 39–55.
Köhnken, G., Milne, R., Memon, A., & Bull, R. (1999). The Cognitive Interview: A Meta-
Analysis. Psychology Crime & Law, 5, 3-27.
La Fon, D. S. (2008). The psychological autopsy. In B. E. Turvey (Ed.), Criminal profiling: An
introduction to behavioral evidence analysis (3rd ed., pp. 419-429). San Diego, CA: Elsevier
Academic Press.
Lambert, E., & Hogan, N. L. (2018). Correctional Staff: The Issue of Job Stress. In M. Ternes, P.
Magaletta, & M. Patry (Eds.) The Practice of Correctional Psychology (pp. 259-281). New York,
NY: Springer.
Loftus, E. F., Miller, D. G., & Burns, H. J. (1978). Semantic integration of verbal information
into a visual memory. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Human Learning and Memory, 4(1),
19-31.
MacIvor, A. (2017, May 11). Number of prison workers suffering from PTSD much higher
than official stats, union says. CBC News. Retrieved from https://www.cbc.ca/news/canada/
nova-scotia/canada-prisons-corrections-ptsd-first-responders-coverage-1.2735583
Matthews, H. A., Feagans, D., & Kohl, R. (2015). Massachusetts Department of Correction three-
year recidivism study: A descriptive analysis of the January-July 2011 releases and correctional
recovery academy participation. Concord, MA: Massachusetts Department of Correction
Strategic Planning & Research.
McMillan, A. (2018, June 21). Alberta government slapped with class-action lawsuit over
prisoner confinement practice. CBC News. Retrieved from https://www.cbc.ca/news/
canada/edmonton/class-action-lawsuit-administrative-confinement-1.4717540
Memorial University (2018, April 8). Diploma in Police Studies. Retrieved from
https://www.mun.ca/hss/programs/undergraduate/diplomas/police/
Mills, J. F., Kroner, D. G., & Morgan, R. D. (2011). Clinician’s guide to violence risk assessment.
New York, NY: The Guilford Press.
Morgan, C.A. , Hazlett, G. A., Doran, A. P., Garrett, S., Hoyt, G. B., Thomas, P. L., … Southwick,
S. M. (2004). Accuracy of eyewitness memory for persons encountered during exposure
to highly intense stress. International Journal of Law and Psychiatry, 27, 265-279.
Morgan, R. D., Gendreau, P., Smith, P., Gray, A. L., Labrecque, R. M., MacLean, N. … Mills, J.
F. (2016). Quantitative Syntheses of the Effects of Administrative Segregation on Inmates’
Well-Being. Psychology, Public Policy, and Law, 22(4), 439-461.
Morgan, S., & Palk, G. (2013). Pragmatism and precision: Psychology in the service of civil
litigation. Australian Psychologist, 48, 41-46. doi: 10.1111/j.1742-9544-2012.00075.x
Morrissey, J. P., Fagan, J. A., & Cocozza, J. J. (2009). New models of collaboration between
criminal justice and mental health systems. American Journal of Psychiatry, 166, 1211-1214.
Motiuk, L. (2016). Performance outcomes in the delivery of the Integrated Correctional Program
Model (ICPM) to federal offenders (RIB-16-01). Ottawa, ON: Correctional Service Canada.
Motiuk, L. L., & Serin, R. C. (2001). Compendium 2000 on effective correctional programming.
Ottawa, ON: Correctional Service Canada.
Munsterberg, H (1908). On the Witness Stand. Garden City, NY: Doubleday.
Myers, D., Jordan, C., Smith, S.M., & Spencer, S (2018). Social Psychology (7th Canadian ed.).
Whitby, ON: McGraw Hill.
O’Keefe, M. L., Klebe, K. J., Metzner, J., Dvoskin, J., Fellner, J., & Stucker, A. (2013). A
longitudinal study of administrative segregation. Journal of the American Academy of
Psychiatry and Law, 41(1), 49-60.
Office of the Correctional Investigator (2014). A Preventable Death. Ottawa, ON: Author.
Ogloff, J., & Otto, R. (1993). Psychological autopsy: Clinical and legal perspectives. St. Louis
Law Review, 37, 607-646.
Paperny, A. M. (2018, June 21). Rights groups fight Canada government’s defense of solitary
confinement. Reuters. Retrieved from https://www.reuters.com/article/us-canada-prison-
solitary/rights-groups-fight-canada-governments-defense-of-solitary-confinement-
idUSKBN1JH3CF
Parole Board Canada (2018a). History of Parole in Canada. Retrieved from
https://www.canada.ca/en/parole-board/corporate/history-of-parole-in-canada.html#p7
Parole Board Canada (2018b). Decision-making policy manual for board members. Ottawa, ON:
Author.
Patry, M., Connors, C., Adams-Quackenbush, N., & Smith, S. M. (2017) When both sides are
mistaken: Layperson and legal professionals’ misconceptions of Canadian suspects’ legal
rights upon arrest. Journal of Police and Criminal Psychology, 32(1), 56–65. https://doi.org/
10.1007/s11896-016-9198-5
Patterson, G. T., Chung, I. W., & Swan, P. W. (2014). Stress management interventions for
police officers and recruits: A meta-analysis. Journal of Experimental Criminology, 10(4),
487-513.
John E. Reid & Associates, Inc. (2014) Legal Updates Spring 2014. Retrieved from
http://www.reid.com/spring2014update.html
Reiser, M. (1982). Police Psychology: Collected Papers. Los Angeles, CA: LEHI.
Roesch, R., Zapf, P. A., Hart, S. D., & Connolly, D. (2013). Forensic psychology and the law
(Canadian ed.). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Royal Canadian Mounted Police (2016). RCMP Entrance Exam. Retrieved from
http://www.rcmp-grc.gc.ca/en/rcmp-entrance-exam.
Sanders, B. A. (2003). Maybe there’s no such thing as a “good cop”: Organizational challenges
in selecting quality officers. Policing: An International Journal of Police Strategies and
Management, 31, 313-328.
Serin, R. C., Gobeil, R., Lloyd, C. D., Chadwick, N., Wardrop, K., & Hanby, L. (2016). Using
dynamic risk to enhance conditional release decisions in prisoners to improve their
outcomes. Behavioral Sciences & the Law, 34, 321-336.
Smith, P., Gendreau, P., & Swartz, K. (2009). Validating the principles of effective
intervention: A systematic review of the contributions of meta-analysis in the field of
corrections. Victims and Offenders, 4, 148-169.
Smith, S. M., Lindsay, R. C., & Pryke, S. (2000). Postdictors of eyewitness errors: Can false
identifications be diagnosed? Journal of Applied Psychology, 85, 542-550.
Smith, S. M., Lindsay, R. C., Pryke, S., & Dysart, J. (2001). Postdictors of eyewitness errors:
Can false identifications be diagnosed in the cross-race situation? Psychology, Public Policy,
and Law, 5, 153-169.
Snook, B., Eastwood, J., Gendreau, P., Goggin, C., & Cullen, R. M. (2007). Taking stock of
criminal profiling: A narrative review and meta-analysis. Criminal Justice and Behavior,
34(4), 437-453.
Steblay, N., Hosch, H. M., Culhane, S. E., & McWethy, A. (2006). The impact on juror verdicts
of judicial instruction to disregard inadmissible evidence: A meta-analysis. Law and Human
Behavior, 30(4), 469-492.
Stewart, L., Wardrop, K., Wilton, G., Thompson, J., Derkzen, D., & Motiuk, L. (2017).
Reliability and validity of the Dynamic Factors Identification and Analysis – Revised (Research
Report R-395). Ottawa, Ontario: Correctional Service of Canada.
Terman, L. M. (1917). A trial of mental and pedagogical tests in a civil service examination for
policemen and firemen. Journal of Applied Psychology, 1, 17-29.
Ternes, M., Doherty, S., & Matheson, F.I. (2014). An examination of the effectiveness of the
national substance abuse program moderate intensity (NSAP-M) on institutional adjustment and
post-release outcomes (R-291). Ottawa, ON: Correctional Service of Canada.
Time (2017). Innocent: The fight against wrongful convictions. Time Magazine Special Edition:
Commemorating 25 Years of the Innocence Project. New York, NY: Time, Inc.
Union of Canadian Correctional Officers. (2016). Operational stress injury and Post-Traumatic
Stress Disorder among public safety officers and first responders. Presented to The Standing
Committee on Public Safety and National Security, Ottawa, ON.
Vallano, J. P., (2013). Psychological injuries and legal decision making in civil cases: What
we know and what we do not know. Psychological Injury and Law, 6, 99-112. doi:10.1007/
s12207-013-9153-z
Vidmar, N., & Schuller, R. (2011). The Canadian criminal jury. Chicago-Kent Law Review,
Forthcoming.
U.S. National Research Council. (2014). The Growth of Incarceration in the United States:
Exploring Causes and Consequences. Washington, DC: The National Academies Press.
Wells, G.L., Memon, A., & Penrod, S.D. (2006). Eyewitness evidence: Improving its probative
value. Psychological Science in the Public Interest, 7, 45-75.
Wigmore, J.H. (1909). Professor Munsterberg and the psychology of evidence. Illinois Law
Review, 3, 399-345.
Wigmore, J.H. (1940). Evidence (3rd ed.). Boston, MA: Little, Brown.
Wilson, C. M., Desmarais, S. L., Nicholls, T. L., Hart, S. D., & Brink, J. (2013). Predictive
validity of dynamic factors: Assessing violence risk in forensic psychiatrist inpatients. Law
and Human Behavior, 37, 377-388. doi: 10.1037/lhb00000025
Wiseman, R. (1998). Participatory science and the mass media. Free Inquiry, 18, 56-57.
Yarmey, A.D. (2003). Eyewitness identification: Guidelines and recommendations for
identification procedures in the United States and Canada. Canadian Psychology, 44, 181-189.
Yesberg, J. A., Scanlan, J. M., & Polaschek, D. L. (2014). Women on parole: Do they need their
own DRAOR? Practice: The New Zealand Corrections Journal, 2, 20-25.
Youth Criminal Justice Act, 1, 2003.

Smith, S. M., Ternes, M., Stephens, S., & Carter-Rogers, K. (2019). Psychology and the
law in Canada. In M. E. Norris (Ed.), The Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological
Science. Kingston, ON: eCampus Ontario. Licensed under CC BY NC 4.0. Retrieved from
https://ecampusontario.pressbooks.pub/psychologycareers/chapter/psychology-and-the-
law-in-canada/
[12]
SPORT PSYCHOLOGY
Lori Dithurbide, School of Health and Human Performance, Dalhousie University
Poppy DesClouds, School of Human Kinetics, University of Ottawa
Kylie McNeill, School of Human Kinetics, University of Ottawa
Natalie Durand-Bush, School of Human Kinetics, University of Ottawa
Christina DeRoo, School of Health and Human Performance, Dalhousie University
Sommer Christie, Faculty of Kinesiology, University of Calgary
OVERVIEW
Sport and exercise psychology is the scientific study and application of human behaviour
in the sport and exercise contexts (Gill & Williams, 2008). Sport and exercise psychology is
often studied with one of two objectives in mind: 1) to understand the psychological impact
on human performance and 2) to understand how sport and exercise participation impacts
an individual’s psychological development and health (Weinberg & Gould, 2015). Exploring
psychology from this framework has allowed for many significant discoveries including
the development of theories and models which aim to account for the effects of variables
including stress and exercise on outcomes including health and performance.
There are many careers related to sport and exercise psychology. Perhaps the most
common career identified by students is “sport psychologist.” In Canada, professionals
working in the field of sport and exercise psychology providing direct services to athletes
and teams work under the title of Mental Performance Consultant (MPC). Although
overlapping in some regards, MPCs and clinical psychologists have different scopes of
professional practice.
This chapter will provide a brief overview of common methods and significant findings
in foundational aspects of sport and exercise psychology. It will also explore more recent
developments within the field of sport and exercise psychology, as well career paths, scopes
of practice, and educational training paths for professionals working in this field.
282
INTRODUCTION TO SPORT AND EXERCISE PSYCHOLOGY
Sport and exercise psychology is a relatively young scholarly discipline in comparison to

other areas of study in psychology: it has its beginnings in the latter part of the 19th century
when Norman Triplett (1898) wanted to understand why athletes sometimes performed
better in groups than when alone (Weinberg & Gould, 2015). Since that time, the field has
grown tremendously. For the purpose of this chapter, we will focus primarily on the ‘sport’
aspect of psychology while acknowledging that the ‘exercise’ aspect is highly related but
can also be considered a separate field of study. There are now evidence-based graduate
programs throughout Canada, the United States of America, and across the globe. There are
also multiple national and international societies and organizations supporting the research
and practice of sport and exercise psychology (e.g., Canadian Society for Psychomotor
Learning and Sport Psychology; International Society of Sport Psychology) as well as
national and international applied certification bodies either established or in development
(e.g., Canadian Sport Psychology Association; Association of Applied Sport Psychology).
Such growth in research and practice demonstrates that there is demand for knowledge and
service in these areas of expertise.
Particularly in the context of sport performance, increased media attention along with the
recognition and acceptance of sport psychology as a performance-enhancing tool has led to
increased numbers of athletes, coaches, and sport organizations seeking out MPCs for their
expertise and services. For example, MPCs are now commonly found practicing in sports
such as golf. More recently, sport psychology has become integrated into sports including
American football. For example, the Seattle Seahawks of the National Football League (NFL)
have employed Dr. Michael Gervais, a clinical psychologist known for his work in sport and
performance psychology. Indeed, he was a part of their team staff during their Super Bowl
winning season of 2013.
Demand for the integration of sport psychology into the sport environment is evident as
professional development opportunities are now often included in both coach and support
staff training. For example, the Canada’s National Coaching Certification Program (NCCP)
includes modules on sport and performance psychology. Sport medical professionals
including athletic therapists, sport medical physicians, nutritionists, physiotherapists, and
sport chiropractors can also often take sport psychology courses as requirements or electives
during their training. Both MPCs and related sports professionals serve an integral part of
integrated support teams (ISTs) in the Canadian amateur sport system. ISTs include coaches,
MPCs, strength and conditioning specialists, nutritionists, and medical staff, among other
experts whose purpose is to help support and provide resources for athletes and coaches.
An MPC can also have a unique role within the IST. Like the other professionals, they
support the athletes and coaches through education and skill development (mental skills in
this case). However, their training also enables them to assist and provide expertise in the
functioning of the IST itself, helping bring professionals from differing disciplines together
by enhancing communication and team dynamics. Additionally, they can support other
professionals in their work by providing guidance on topics such as the psychology of injury
rehabilitation, and coach-athlete management.
In recent years, increased conversations and visibility surrounding mental health and
athletes has increased awareness of the field of sport and exercise psychology in areas that
go beyond sport performance. Importantly, research has examined the link between sport
284 Sport
and exercise participation and their relationship to mental health, and the impact of physical
activity on the prevention and treatment of mental health challenges and conditions (see
Schinke, Stambulova, Si, & Moore, 2017). In addition to research, well-recognized and
successful athletes such as Clara Hughes, Michael Phelps, and DeMar DeRozen have openly
discussed their challenges with mental health. This has created an opportunity for athletes
to express and discuss their own mental health experiences. Although clinical mental health
issues are often beyond the scope of practice amongst most MPCs (detailed in the section
titled Applications of Sport and Exercise Psychology below), it remains an important topic
of research, discussion, and practice for those interested in the field of sport and exercise
psychology. Demonstrating the importance of sport and mental health, the Canadian Centre
for Mental Health and Sport, a not-for-profit organization was developed to support the
mental health and performance of competitive and high-performing athletes and coaches
in Canada (https://www.ccmhs-ccsms.ca/).
SIGNIFICANT RESEARCH FINDINGS
Although there is a myth that sport psychology is only applicable to elite sport performers,
research and applications from this field have far-reaching impact. For example, there
is significant recent research exploring the psychological impact of early specialization
in youth sport. Research demonstrates that young children will not benefit from early
sport specialization in the majority of sports, and may have a greater risk of overuse
injury and burnout from concentrated participation (e.g. LaPrade, et al., 2016). Research in
sport and exercise psychology has also demonstrated positive benefits of sport and physical
activity participation in adults. For example, military veterans with a disability have shown
to have a greater sense of independence and choice when engaging in quality physical
activity experiences (Shirazipour et al., 2017). Perhaps gaining more mainstream attention,
research has importantly demonstrated that sport-related concussions may be associated
with increased risk of mood disturbances and depression (Covassin, Elbin, Beidler, LaFevor,
& Kontos, 2017). Consequently, it is important to recognize that the study of sport
psychology is relevant to many contexts and setting beyond the competitive field of play.
Further demonstrating the widespread applicability of sport and exercise psychology,
there is a substantial body of evidence to support the notion that physical activity (including
sport participation) can both help prevent and treat some forms of mental health challenges
and illness. For example, a systematic review conducted by Mammen and Faulkner (2013)
found a significant, inverse relationship between physical activity at baseline and depression
at follow-up in 25 of 30 longitudinal studies. Furthermore, their results suggested that any
level of physical activity might help prevent depression. Moreover, an earlier and well-
cited longitudinal study by Camacho, Roberts, Lazarus, Kaplan, and Cohen (1991) found a
relationship between inactivity and the incidence of depression over the course of almost 20
years.
Recently, more attention has been focused on the impact of physical activity, including
sport participation, on the treatment of mental health challenges such as depression and
anxiety. Rebar and colleagues (2013) conducted a meta-meta-analysis examining the effect
of physical activity on depression and anxiety in a non-clinical population. They found
that across eight meta-analyses, physical activity had a moderate effect on the treatment
of depression such that physical activity reduced depression, and a small effect on the
treatment of anxiety such that physical activity reduced anxiety. Using a clinical population,
Rosenbaum and colleagues (Rosenbaum, Tiedemann, Sherrington, Curtis, & Ward, 2014)
conducted a systematic review of studies using physical activity interventions. They found
that physical activity reduced symptoms of depression in people with mental illness, and
also found a reduction of symptoms associated with schizophrenia and improvements in
other physical health markers in people diagnosed with schizophrenia.
More recently, White and colleagues (2017) examined the impact of domain-specific
physical activity on mental health. That is, does the context in which one performs a
physical activity (e.g., leisure versus work-related physical activity) have an impact on one’s
mental health. Using a meta-analytic approach, they found that leisure-time physical
activity and transport physical activity both had a positive relationship with mental health.
They also found that leisure-time physical activity and participation in school sport had an
inverse relationship with mental ill-health (the greater the participation, the lower levels of
ill-health). However, work-related physical activity had a positive relationship with mental
ill-health: if an individual’s main sources of physical activity was performed at the work
place, it may have a negative impact on one’s mental health.
In the following sections, common frameworks and approaches to research in sport and
exercise psychology are reviewed.
COMMON FRAMEWORKS FOR RESEARCH IN SPORT PSYCHOLOGY
Weinberg and Gould (2015) state that the ultimate goal of psychological skills training
is self-regulation. They define self-regulation as the ability to work toward your goals by
monitoring and managing your thoughts, feeling, and behaviours. They also describe
psychological skills training as the systematic and consistent practice of mental skills for
the purpose of enhancing performance, increasing pleasure and satisfaction in sport
participation (Weinberg & Gould, 2015, p. 248), thus leading to greater abilities in self-
regulation. The field of sport psychology has examined and shown support for a number
of basic psychological skills to enhance performance and overall satisfaction. The following
section briefly describes these skills, and some significant findings that support the
implementation of these skills.
Goal setting
Goal setting is one of the most commonly used strategies across the behavioural sciences
(Bar-Eli, Tenenbaum, Pie, Btesh, & Almog, 2007). Goal setting is commonly used to improve
motivation, focus, and thus performance. Generally, goal setting in sport typically involves
helping athletes to identify and set defined goals (i.e., outcome, performance, and process
goals), and to identify and set goals for varying contexts (i.e., practice and competition goals)
appropriate to the athlete’s performance expectations. Effective goal setting involves setting
both long term (e.g., this year) and short term (e.g., today or this week) goals, and also
includes goal setting evaluation (e.g., did I achieve my goals?).
Overall, goal setting has shown to be an effective technique for increasing the likelihood of
achieving one’s goal (Kyllo & Landers, 1995). Research examining the relationship between
various types of goals and performance across a variety of contexts generally indicates that
goals associated with moderate to high levels of difficulty are linked to better performances
286 Sport
(see Weinberg, 2000, 2004 for reviews). Goal setting also seems to be most effective on
simple tasks rather than those that are very complex (Burton, 1989).
Stress/arousal management
A significant amount of research in sport psychology has theorized about and examined
the impact of arousal on sport performance. Arousal is the combination of physiological
and psychological activation that ranges from deep sleep to intense excitement (Weinberg &
Gould, 2015). A variety of theories and models attempt to account for the impact of specific
physiological and cognitive states/traits on performance. Such states and traits include
stress, anxiety, and excitement. For the purpose and scope of this chapter, we will refer to
one’s level of arousal or activation.
Many theories and models have been developed to explain the relationship between
arousal and performance, and to discuss them all in sufficient detail for accuracy would be
beyond the scope of this chapter. Instead, to provide broad conceptual overview, we discuss
those theories and models that have received significant attention in the field, and we will
focus on the broad concept of arousal/activation rather than the specific state(s) or trait(s).
One of the first theories proposed to account for the relationship between arousal and
performance was drive theory (Spence & Spence, 1966). This theory describes the
relationship between arousal and performance in a positive linear fashion where a greater
level of arousal leads to a greater level of performance. Although drive theory may be
suitable for some tasks (e.g., power lifting), most sport psychology researchers were
dissatisfied with its ability to predict most performances across a variety of tasks. The field
thus turned to the inverted-U hypothesis that posits that both low and high levels of arousal
elicit poor performances, and a moderate level of arousal results in optimal performance
levels (Landers & Arent, 2010).
Figure 12.1. The inverted-U hypothesis posits that arousal increases, so too does performance. However, once arousal
reaches a certain limit, performance is expected to decrease. Very high and very low levels of arousal are associated with
poor performance, whereas moderate levels of arousal are associated with optimal performance.
Although a more inclusive model, the inverted-U hypothesis lacks the ability to account
for individual differences, and differences across sport or tasks. That is, moderate levels of
arousal may be optimal for hockey, but perhaps not for archery or sprinting. This challenge
of accounting for individual and situational variations lead to Hanin’s (1997) model of
individualized zones of optimal functioning (IZOF). Simply stated, this model posits that
each individual has their own zone of optimal functioning where anxiety levels can vary
from one individual to another. Outside of this zone, athletes perform poorly. Hanin’s IZOF
model was unique in that an athlete’s ‘zone’ did not have to be at a moderate level of arousal
for optimal performance to occur. For example, Athlete 1’s optimal zone could be at a
high level of arousal, where Athlete 2 would be a low-moderate level of arousal. Hanin also
suggested that the optimal arousal level was not simply a point on a scale, but more of a zone
or bandwidth. This model has been supported in the research with regards to its relationship
with performance. However, it is criticized for having a lack of theoretical support. That is,
answering why the IZOF model is supported (Gould & Tuffey, 1996).
Through understanding how arousal impacts one’s performance, MPCs can educate and
support athletes in managing arousal and stress levels so that the athletes can achieve
optimal performance in a variety of circumstances. In order to achieve this, MPCs first assist
the athlete to become aware of their levels of arousal and activation during training and
performance (Weinberg & Gould, 2015). MPCs have a number of techniques to assist with
arousal management. These techniques are often categorized into either physiological arousal
or anxiety reduction techniques, and cognitive arousal or anxiety reduction techniques.
Physiological techniques for arousal and stress management include, but are not limited
288 Sport
to, breath control, progressive muscles relaxation, and biofeedback. Cognitive techniques
for arousal and stress management include, but are not limited to, relaxation response and
desensitization (Weinberg & Gould, 2015). There can be some overlap in the techniques
whereby engaging in physiological techniques may also impact one’s level of cognitive
arousal. For example, when an individual engages in breathing exercise aimed at managing
physiological arousal, it can also have a positive impact on an individual’s cognitive arousal.
Research conclusively supports that arousal and stress management can result in better
performance. In particular, Rumbold, Fletcher, and Daniels (2012) conducted a review of 64
intervention studies where the goal was to reduce stress and increase performance. They
found that 81% of the studies showed improvement in stress management, and 77% of the
studies found improvements in performance. It also seemed that multimodal approaches
(using more than just one strategy) were more effective than single modalities.
Imagery
In our work as MPCs, we often hear from athletes that imagery, also referred to as
visualization, is a tool they often use. As a spectator, you may have observed athletes engaged
in imagery, or you, yourself, may use imagery as a tool for enhancing performance (or using
day dreaming as a distraction!). The premise of imagery is the creation of an image in our
minds, either by recalling actual events, or by constructing our own images of events we
hope, or want to avoid, happening. The term imagery is often preferred to visualization as
it is not restricted to simply one sense, as would suggest the term visualization. Imagery can
include, in addition to vision, one’s auditory sense (the sounds of the crowd), one’s sense
of smell (the smell of chlorine at the swimming pool), one’s sense of touch (the feel of the
ball in your hands), one’s kinaesthetic sense (the feeling of one’s limbs while executing a
dive from the platform), and even one’s sense of taste (the salty taste of sweat while running
long distances). Imagery is also a tool that can be used to rehearse performances mentally,
whether the goal is learning a new routine (learning a new gymnastics floor routine), or
helping to manage emotions in a high-pressure situation (imaging a large crowd at the
championship game).
Research examining the effectiveness of imagery can be complex, particularly because it
is not possible to actually see what the athlete is imaging. However, some case studies have
shown that the use of imagery enhances performance and other psychological variables
such as confidence and the ability to cope with anxiety (Evans, Jones, & Mullen, 2004; Post,
Muncie, & Simpson, 2012).
Confidence
Research has indicated that confidence is the most consistent factor for differentiating
between the most and least successful athletes ( Jones & Hardy, 1990). In sport psychology,
self-confidence is defined as the belief that you can successfully perform a behaviour
(Weinberg & Gould, 2015). Vealey and Chase (2008) further describe sport self-confidence
as a social cognitive construct. They differentiate between state self-confidence (e.g., how
confident you feel today, before a particular competition) and trait self-confidence (e.g., how
you generally feel in the day-to-day), and suggest that sport self-confidence can be viewed
more as a trait than a state, depending on the context. Closely related to sport confidence
as defined by Vealey and Chase (2008) is the concept of self-efficacy. Bandura (1997) defines
self-efficacy as the perception of an individual’s ability to successfully perform a task. Thus,

one could consider self-efficacy to be situation specific self-confidence. For the purpose and
scope of this chapter, we will combine these constructs in discussing relevant research.
Confidence has been shown to impact other sport-related psychological factors. For
example, confidence can impact how an athlete interprets their level of anxiety. Specifically,
when an athlete is high in confidence, they are more likely to interpret anxiety as facilitative,
as compared to when an athlete is low in confidence ( Jones & Swain, 1995). Confidence
has also been shown to influence perceptions of effort: athletes high in confidence, when
compared to athletes low in confidence, tend to perceive that they expend less effort on a
particular task (Hutchinson, Sherman, Martinovic, & Tenenbaum, 2008). Most importantly,
confidence has also been shown to influence performance: athletes higher in confidence
tend to perform better than those lower in confidence (Feltz, 1984; Moritz, Feltz, Fahrbach,
& Mack, 2000). Because confidence can be considered as more of a psychological trait or a
modifiable state depending on the context (as opposed to a skill), MPCs will often use tools
such as goal setting and imagery in training over time to enhance self-confidence, and thus
impact performance.
Focus
The ability to focus—to ignore distractions, and pay attention to relevant cues at the
correct time, is one of the most important skills an athlete can possess. Perhaps even as
a student, you have had difficulty focusing on the task at hand while being distracted by
your electronic devices, the environment around you, or even your own thoughts. In sport
psychology, we use the terms focus, concentration, attention, and managing distractions
interchangeably as they all refer to the same skill of being able to direct our attention to the
appropriate cue at the appropriate time.
Individuals may often report that they have trouble paying attention, or concentrating.
However, the reality is that we are always paying attention to something. If we find ourselves
distracted or having difficulty focusing, it usually means we are not focusing on the
appropriate cues. Nideffer (1976) and colleagues (Nideffer & Segal, 2001) described
attentional focus along two dimensions: width (i.e., broad or narrow) and direction (i.e.,
external or internal). A broad attentional focus would be beneficial when an athlete has to be
aware of and react to many changing cues in his or her environment. A narrow attentional
focus would be helpful when an athlete must only focus on one or two cues, such as a target
or finish line. An external focus of attention refers to attention focused on an external cue
such as an object in the environment. Lastly, an internal focus of attention refers to attention
focused inwardly such as one’s own thoughts and feelings.
290 Sport
Figure 12.2. Four types of attentional focus and relevant examples
To assess an individual’s attentional style (i.e., a person’s typical attentional disposition),

Nideffer (1976) developed the Test of Attentional and Interpersonal Style (TAIS). Some
research has supported the idea that focused attention is most beneficial when it is directed
externally as compared to internally. Indeed, Wulf’s (2013) review found that an external
focus of attention was more beneficial across a number of tasks including speed, endurance,
and accuracy types of tasks than an internal focus of attention. Ways to train and improve
concentration skills include using simulations, pre-determined cues, establishing good
habits, routines, and competition plans, and overlearning skills (Weinberg & Gould, 2015).
Team Dynamics
A significant number of sports are not played alone – athletes often compete as a member
of a team. Even in individual sports such as athletics, athletes may compete as an individual
but are members of a larger team all competing for points, in addition to individual medals.
The study of groups, or teams, has been a popular area of research in sport psychology
just as it has been in related fields such as organizational psychology and social psychology.
These disciplines indeed share many theories and models in their study of group
performance.
There are a variety of approaches to group dynamic research in sport, but areas that have
received significant attention, both in research and practice, are cohesion and collective
efficacy. Cohesion in sport has been defined as a dynamic process in which a team has a
tendency to stick together and stay united in pursuit of its goal and/or for the satisfaction
of its members (Carron & Eys, 2012). Widmeyer, Brawley, and Carron (1985) developed
the Group Environment Questionnaire to measure cohesion in sport and in doing so
conceptualized group cohesion into two major categories: group integration (i.e., perception
of the group as a unit) and individual attraction to the group (i.e., a member’s personal
attraction to the group or team). Further, each of these categories can then be divided into
either task or social aspects leading to a four-factor model of group cohesion. A meta-
analytic review including 46 studies examining the relationship between group cohesion
and performance in sport found a moderate to large effect size such that increased group
cohesion is associated with increased performance outcomes (Carron, Colman, Wheeler, &
Stevens, 2002).
Collective efficacy is a “group’s shared belief in its conjoint capability to organize and
execute the courses of action required to produce given levels of attainment” (Bandura,
1997, p.477). Essentially, collective efficacy reflects a team’s level of confidence. Research has
demonstrated that collective efficacy has a positive impact on team performance and that
prior team performance can also have an impact on collective efficacy (Feltz & Lirgg, 1998;
Myers, Feltz, & Short, 2004; Myers, Payment, Feltz, 2004).
CONTEMPORARY METHODS AND DEVELOPMENTS
Mindfulness
Have you ever noticed yourself getting distracted during a task and then felt feelings of
upset like anger, guilt, or frustration because you got distracted? This type of experience
is a common one. While thoughts and events can distract a person from their point of
focus (studying, communicating, performing a known skill), the evaluations or judgements
that follow the distraction can become even more distracting. Researchers have theorized
that these evaluations and judgements can lead to lowered performance in sport because
of a focus on task-irrelevant thoughts (Gardner & Moore, 2004; Kaufman, Glass & Arnkoff,
2009). They highlight the importance of bringing the focus of attention back to what is most
important now: your task.
The practice of mindfulness can help in moments of distraction, improving performance
in daily tasks and athletic pursuits alike. Some may think of being mindful as simply having
a calm demeanour in stressful situations, but it is much more than this. Being mindful
involves being present with one’s circumstances intentionally and without judgment (Kabat-
Zinn, 1994). Despite the simplicity of the mindfulness concept, its practice can be
challenging. For those who do learn to be more mindful, the rewards can be numerous,
including the potential to improve sleep and focus (MacDonald, Oprescu, & Kean, 2018),
reduce stress (Lundqvist, Ståhl, Kenttä, & Thulin, 2018; Vidic, St. Martin, & Oxhandler, 2018),
and improve performance (Zhang et al., 2016).
Originally popularized in North America by Jon Kabat-Zinn (1994), mindfulness is defined
as “paying attention in a particular way: on purpose, in the present moment, and
nonjudgmentally” (p. 4). This definition is based on Kabat-Zinn’s personal study of
Buddhism, but he maintains that mindfulness based interventions need not promote or
necessitate the practice of Buddhism, although some may find this helpful (Kabat-Zinn,
2017). Early research on the benefits of mindfulness began mostly outside of sport, looking
at the use of a mindfulness practice alongside traditional medical treatments (Kabat-Zinn,
1982). An approach to facilitate mindfulness, known as Mindfulness Based Stress Reduction
(MBSR), was developed with a primary goal to help relieve the suffering and stress of
patients not fully responding to traditional medical treatment. A goal of MBSR was to
create a model for other hospitals to implement with patients. The reach of MBSR has
now gone beyond hospitals, and variations of MBSR have been incorporated into the areas
of education, business, military, and sport (Kabat-Zinn, 2017). MBSR is an eight-week
intervention that attempts to cultivate a greater ability to notice a patient’s inner and outer
world (Kabat-Zinn, 1990; Santorelli, 1999). Sport-focused approaches to mindfulness have
largely been adapted from this model.
Mindfulness as an approach to improving sport performance is a relatively recent
development in the field of sport psychology compared to more traditional psychological
skills interventions. While Kabat-Zinn, Beall and Rippe described the first known use of
mindfulness with athletes in 1985, the 1990s showed little uptake in the use of mindfulness
292 Sport
in sport. Beyond the early 2000s, however, research and use of mindfulness-based
interventions in sport have grown substantially. Evidence now exists that supports a
moderate improvement in sport performance for those athletes employing mindfulness
techniques, and this is especially true in sport tasks based on precision (Bühlmayer, Birrer,
Röthlin, Faude, & Donath, 2017).
Mindfulness to enhance performance and well-being has been taught to athletes through
two main interventions: Mindfulness-Acceptance-Commitment therapy (MAC; Gardner &
Moore, 2012) and Mindful Sport Performance Enhancement (MSPE; Kaufman, Glass &
Arnkoff, 2009). Currently more robust evidence exists for the ability of MAC to improve
performance, but research on MSPE is in its infancy.
Mindfulness-Acceptance-Commitment therapy (MAC)
The MAC intervention was developed by Gardner and Moore (2004) and is influenced by
Kabat-Zinn’s definition of mindfulness (1994), combined with acceptance and commitment
therapy approaches used in counselling psychology (Hayes, Strosahl, & Wilson, 1999). In
MAC, mindful awareness is accompanied with acceptance of the current experience as it
is, and commitment to value or goal driven behaviour (versus emotion-driven behaviour).
The commitment component of the MAC approach requires a prior knowledge and
understanding of the athlete’s values and goals, and of the behaviours that help their
performance. Thus, self-awareness and knowledge of their sport is required in order to make
full use of this approach in performance improvement.
In their rationale for the use of mindfulness to improve sport performance, Gardner
and Moore (2004) acknowledged that although improvement can be detected in use of
a mental skill (e.g., imagery, positive self-talk), most mental skills used in interventions
with athletes show inconsistent results regarding performance improvement. They argued
that this might be because of inaccurate assumptions regarding what leads to excellent
performance. Traditional mental skills training focuses on control of internal states by
managing thoughts, images and emotions (Gardner & Moore, 2004; Moore, 2009). Moore
argues that these control-based techniques are built on the assumption that there is an “ideal
state” that leads to excellent performance, and that an athlete must experience that ideal
state in order to perform their best. Anecdotally, many athletes know this to be incorrect, at
least some of the time, as many athletes can think of a time that they performed well while
experiencing a host of negative emotions and sensations. Gardner and Moore (2012) argue
that a mindful approach to sport performance is effective for maintaining or improving
performance by increasing the proportion of thoughts or present-moment observations
that are applicable to the task at hand.
There are seven modules in the MAC intervention that are completed in order, and a
coach or leader must ensure athlete comprehension of each module before continuing
(Gardner & Moore, 2007). Because of this focus on mastery of content, the length of the
MAC intervention can vary, but it will last at least seven weeks.
Mindful Sport Performance Enhancement (MSPE)
In contrast to MAC, the MSPE approach focuses less on values and value-driven
behaviour, and more on the progressive practice of non-reactive attentional control
(Kaufman, Glass, & Pineau, 2018). MSPE uses the terms concentration, letting go, relaxation,
harmony and rhythm, and forming key associations (finding personal cues that bring you back
into the moment) to describe the focus of the approach. The progression of practice begins
with quiet settings and watching the breath or scanning the body. Over the course of
the intervention, athletes are encouraged to practice these skills at home and log their
experiences for later discussion. An acronym used to integrate mindfulness into life outside
of sport and the training sessions is STOP: stop, take a few breaths, observe, and proceed
(Kaufman et al., 2018).
Mindfulness in sport takes a different approach to performance improvement when
compared to traditional mental skills training. That being said, it can be used in conjunction
with traditional mental skills as described earlier in this chapter. There is evidence of
improvement in athlete performance, mental health and well-being through the application
of positive self-talk, imagery, goal setting, relaxation or activation. As with any mental,
physical or social skill, proper and consistent practice is key to improvement and ease of use.
NEUROFEEDBACK AND BIOFEEDBACK TRAINING FOR OPTIMIZING SPORT PERFORMANCE
Psychophysiology is defined as “the scientific study of the interrelationships of physiological

and cognitive processes” (Schwartz & Olson, 2003, p. 5) and two types of
psychophysiological interventions utilized in sport include neurofeedback training (NFT)
and biofeedback training (BFT). The training process involves the measurement of
physiological or neurological activity that is then fed back to the athlete in real time in
the form of audio or visual cues that enable the athlete to develop greater self-awareness
and ability to voluntarily regulate physiological and neurological processes (Blumenstein &
Hung, 2016; Schwartz & Andrasik, 2017).
Biofeedback training (BFT)
BFT equipment measures and feeds back physiological information associated with the
stress response (e.g., heart rate, respiration rate and depth, heart rate variability, peripheral
body temperature, and electrodermal activity) and has been identified as “one of the most
powerful techniques for facilitating learning of arousal-regulation” (Bar-Eli, Dreshman,
Blumenstein, & Weinstein, 2002, p. 568). Fundamentally, when the sympathetic nervous
system is activated, the body responds physiologically by increasing respiration rate, heart
rate, electrodermal activity, and muscle tension, and by decreasing peripheral body
temperature, in order to prepare the body to ‘fight or flee’ the stressful situation (e.g., Filaire,
Alix, Ferrand, & Verger, 2009). During BFT athletes observe their physiological data on the
computer screen and train the ability to actively alter the various responses. For example,
if under stress an athlete may tense his or her muscles, he or she would be encouraged to
observe the tension level and attempt to lower it.
Neurofeedback training (NFT)
NFT also known as electroencephalography (EEG) biofeedback, involves the measurement

of cortical activity (Schwartz & Andrasik, 2017). During NFT, electrodes are placed at specific
locations on the surface of the scalp and measure minute electrical signals, which appear
in five major frequencies: delta, theta, alpha, beta, and gamma (Cacioppo, Tassinary, &
Berntson, 2016). For a comprehensive review on the relationship between cortical frequency
294 Sport
and sport see Cheron et al. (2016). During NFT, relevant components of the athlete’s EEG
are extracted and fed back in the form of audio and/or visual cues that indicate when
they have met the predetermined threshold (Vernon, 2005). This feedback loop (generally
considered operant conditioning) allows athletes to see their brainwaves visually, and based
on reward contingent feedback, gives them the ability to progressively alter their brainwaves
(Hammond, 2011; Schwartz & Andrasik, 2017). For example, sensorimotor rhythm (SMR)
– a specific frequency within the low beta range that is correlated with alert but calm
mental state (Thompson & Thompson, 2015) – has been shown to enhance golf putting
performance in golfers (Cheng et al., 2015).
In sum, BFT/NFT helps athletes to learn how to effectively self-regulate physiological
arousal and focus in the competitive environment. BFT and NFT have been shown to reduce
anxiety (Gevirtz, 2007), improve attention (Gruzelier, Egner, & Vernon, 2006), develop self-
efficacy (Davis & Sime, 2005), and ultimately enhance performance (e.g., Blumenstein &
Hung, 2016; Mirifar, Beckmann, & Ehrlenspiel, 2017; Morgan & Mora, 2017; Xiang, Hou,
Liao, Liao, & Hu, 2018)
APPLICATIONS OF SPORT AND EXERCISE PSYCHOLOGY
Sport psychology is a relatively new and rapidly expanding field. As a result, several
graduate training pathways and career options have become available to those wishing to
work in this area. There have traditionally been two streams within the discipline of sport
psychology: research and professional practice. Although each is associated with different
training paths (Fitzpatrick, Monda, & Butters Wooding, 2016), there is considerable
crossover between research and professional practice, as both undeniably inform one
another. This has unsurprisingly led to calls for more interdisciplinary training (see Careers
section below; Wylleman, Harwood, Elbe, Reints, & De Caluwé, 2009). This section of the
chapter will address both research and professional practice streams, and highlight career
and graduate training opportunities available in Canada.
THE PROFESSION OF SPORT PSYCHOLOGY IN CANADA
To provide some context, it is valuable to first situate the profession of sport psychology
in Canada. From a professional practice standpoint, sport psychology and more specifically,
mental performance consulting, is overseen by the Canadian Sport Psychology Association
(CSPA). The CSPA was developed in 2006 by Drs. Natalie Durand-Bush, Penny Werthner,
and Tom Patrick, based on the initial Canadian Mental Training Registry (CMTR)
established by Dr. Terry Orlick. The CSPA specifies education and training requirements
to provide mental performance consulting services in Canada, and recognizes professionals
who possess minimum competencies to work in this field. Notably, individuals must have
(a) a Master’s degree in sport psychology or related field, (b) demonstrated understanding of
foundational disciplines such as human kinetics/kinesiology, psychology, and counselling,
(c) extensive consulting experience and hands-on experience in sport, and (d) favourable
supervisor and client evaluations (CSPA, 2018; https://www.cspa-acps.com/about).
The CSPA offers professional, student, and academic membership, and provides
mentoring and supervision opportunities for students and young professionals aspiring to
become professional members. It is noteworthy that within its professional membership, the
CSPA distinguishes between mental performance consultants and registered psychologists.

According to the CSPA (2018, p. 2):
Mental Performance Consultants (MPCs) are extensively trained in the area of sport
sciences and have acquired fundamental knowledge in psychology and counselling
through university undergraduate and graduate coursework. MPCs provide individual
or group consultations geared towards improving sport performance and well-being
related issues. They do not diagnose or treat mental health issues. Psychologists
working in the area of sport are extensively trained in clinical or counselling
psychology and have acquired fundamental sport science knowledge through
university undergraduate and graduate coursework. They provide individual or group
consultations geared towards improving sport performance and diagnose and treat
a range of mental health issues such as addictions, eating disorders, depression, and
anxiety.
All in all, the CSPA is an important reference for those interested in pursuing a career
and completing requisite training in the field of sport psychology in Canada. The Canadian
Psychological Association also provides information for psychologists wishing to add sport
and exercise as an area of practice (Canadian Psychological Association, 2018), however this
information is limited.
SPORT PSYCHOLOGY CAREERS AND TRAINING PATHWAYS IN CANADA
In order to provide a comprehensive description of career and graduate training

opportunities to work in the field of sport psychology in Canada, the profiles of current
professional members of the CSPA were examined to identify their credentials, educational
and training background, and professional roles and affiliations. This data also served to
identify alternative career paths outside of traditional professional practice and research.
Furthermore, building from Durand-Bush and McNeill’s (2016) chapter on the history of
sport psychology in Canada, graduate training programs within Canada’s 97 publicly funded
universities (Universities Canada, 2018) were also examined to locate any new education and
training opportunities for students pursuing graduate studies in this field. These programs
were limited to those in which students can specialize in sport psychology within a
kinesiology, human kinetics, or physical activity/education department. Finally, literature
related to sport psychology career paths and graduate training in Canada was reviewed.
Given the lack of information specific to the Canadian context, literature targeting the
United States and Europe was considered.
CAREER PATHWAYS
Careers in sport psychology typically involve two streams: research and/or professional
practice (i.e., mental performance consulting). While some professionals train and work
exclusively in one stream, many pursue both. For instance, a review of the public profiles
of CSPA professional members illustrates that several of them perform both scholarly and
applied work, and actively engage in this dual role. This reinforces the research-practice
orientation of the field of sport psychology in Canada (Schinke & McGannon, 2014).
296 Sport
Research-focused careers
In terms of research-focused careers, a prominent option for those who have completed a
doctoral degree in sport psychology is an academic position in a post-secondary institution
(e.g., Assistant Professor) in Canada or abroad (Fitzpatrick et al., 2016). Such positions can
be held in research-intensive universities where there is an expectation for scholarship and
supervision of undergraduate and graduate students, or in teaching-intensive universities
where teaching and student mentorship are prioritized. A typical academic position in
a research-intensive university in Canada involves teaching (e.g., lecturing, supervising
students), research (e.g., securing grants, preparing peer-reviewed publications), and service
(e.g., serving on committees, performing administrative tasks; Gravestock & Gregor
Greenleaf, 2008). Generally, work expectation of a tenure-track professor in most Ontario
universities is, “40% time/effort allocation to teaching, 40% to research, and 20% to service”
( Jonker & Hicks, 2014, p. 7).
There are also research-oriented careers outside of academia. Such positions can be found
within the sport domain to conduct research and program evaluation for organizations such
as the Coaching Association of Canada and the Canadian Olympic Committee. Outside
of sport, positions have been offered within the government (e.g., Department of National
Defense) and healthcare (e.g., Canadian Medical Association) sector to investigate, for
example, resilience and well-being in military personnel and physicians.
Careers in professional practice
There are two types of careers related to professional practice in sport and exercise
psychology, depending on practitioners’ education and training. As highlighted by the CSPA,
practitioners can work as an MPC or a licensed mental health professional (e.g., registered
psychologist, certified psychotherapist, or counsellor) in the context of sport. It is important
to note that in Canada, there is no official title of “sport psychologist” either with the
Canadian Psychological Association or the CSPA. The correct title for those who are licensed
to work as a psychologist in their respective province or territory is registered psychologist
(R. Psych.; Wall, 2016). Both types of practitioners can become professional members of the
CSPA and/or AASP (Association of Applied Sport Psychology—a comparable organization to
CSPA in the USA). Specific course work and supervised practice is a requirement no matter
the educational background of the professional (see Training section, below). Moreover,
as the CSPA and AASP plan to unify their procedures and certification standards within
coming years, it is likely that Canadian and American practitioners will be able to follow
similar certification procedures and adopt the credential of “Certified Mental Performance
Consultant” or “CMPC ®” (Association for Applied Sport Psychology, 2018; Schinke et al.,
2018).
The MPC role is that which most students have in mind when working towards
professional practice in the field of sport psychology. The goals of a MPC are to teach, guide,
and support individuals in their practice and development of psychosocial skills for optimal
performance, day-to-day living, and well-being. In order to clearly define the role of sport
psychology practitioners, AASP conducted a Job Task Analysis and identified:
[Six] 6 domains of practice (e.g., Goals, Outcome, and Planning), 21 tasks/discrete

work activities (e.g., identify personal and systematic resources and barriers related
to the achievement of goals and desired outcomes), and 38 underlying knowledge

statements (e.g., intervention research and its application) related to the competent
and effective practice of certification-level professionals in sport psychology” (AASP
Interim Certification Council, 2017).
In particular, effective MPCs work in an interdisciplinary fashion and can provide services
to a range of performers in diverse contexts in order to address specific sport/performance
issues as well as more general well-being affecting daily functioning in life.
Those pursuing careers as registered psychologists, counsellors, or psychotherapists may
choose to apply their work specifically in the context of sport and complete additional
training in sport sciences to fully understand and navigate the competitive sport
environment. They may also seek the designation of MPC within the CPSA, provided they
meet the registration criteria (see Training section below). While these practitioners may
consult on sport performance concerns, they can also focus on diagnosis and treatment of
clinical symptoms and mental disorders such as addictions, eating disorders, and depression.
Although there are distinctions between the career paths of MPCs and registered
psychologists, the need for collaboration between these two types of practitioners has been
emphasized by the CSPA and CPA (Canadian Psychological Association, 2018) in order
to more comprehensively tend to the needs of athletes. The new Canadian Centre for
Mental Health and Sport (CCMHS, 2018) has as its mandate to provide interdisciplinary
services for competitive and high-performance athletes and coaches experiencing mental
health challenges and mental illness. The collaborative sport-specialized mental health care
team indeed includes MPCs, registered psychologists, psychotherapists, counsellors, and
psychiatrists. Having all of these important practitioners working in unison to determine
athletes and coaches’ needs and mental health care plans while respecting their performance
goals and sport culture will arguably lead to better experiences and outcomes.
A career as a sport psychology practitioner (e.g., MPC, MPC-CCC, MPC-R. Psych.) is
dynamic and multifaceted. Given the developing nature of the field of sport psychology,
many professionals take on a mixture of full- and part-time contracts with sport
organizations, teams, and individual clients, as well as multi-roles that combine
administrative duties with mental performance consulting. Practitioners endeavouring to
develop and sustain a private practice can benefit from additional know-how in business
management, finance, and marketing. Unfortunately, these are topics that still require
attention in most graduate training programs (Wylleman et al., 2009).
Practitioners also work in various related, but non-sport-specific fields to provide mental
performance consulting in domains such as healthcare, education, and the workplace. Some
adopt multiple roles by combining academic and leadership/management positions with
their own sport psychology practice. For example, individuals have concurrently worked as
an MPC, registered counsellor, adjunct professor, and sport centre director.
Other career options for those who have studied sport psychology include sport-related
roles (e.g., High Performance Advisors) within organizations such as Own the Podium and
the Canadian Paralympic Committee. Moreover, training in this field is highly relevant for
intervention, consultation, and program development in professions pertaining to health,
education, and high-risk management (e.g., military, fire fighter, police, paramedic).
Examples of such careers include (a) counselling within Canadian university student services
centers to support students’ academic success, (b) providing mental performance services
298 Sport
within the Canadian Special Operations Forces Command to enhance the morale, welfare,
and operational readiness of military personnel, and (c) providing resilience training in
hospitals to help children and families cope with cancer.
EDUCATIONAL PATHS AND TRAINING
Although research and professional practice career paths in sport psychology intersect,
the training requirements to successfully pursue these careers tend to be more distinctly
delineated. One study showed that graduate students in this area often feel that they cannot
gain the “best of both worlds” by completing a single educational program and thus have to
make an explicit choice between pursuing an academic research position and professional
practice (Fitzpatrick et al., 2016). As such, those who wish to combine both aspects in
their work may need to seek additional training opportunities outside of their program
requirements. That said, some graduate programs in Canada provide the opportunity for
students to combine research training with applied consulting work and supervision, such
as the Master of Human Kinetics (MHK) program offered at Laurentian University (i.e.,
includes an optional internship course as part of the thesis-based, research program).
Training for research
Research careers related to sport psychology, whether in post-secondary institutions or

outside of academia (e.g., in the public sector) typically require graduate research training
acquired in thesis-based Master’s (e.g., MA, MSc) and/or doctoral (i.e., PhD) degrees. For
students who pursue non-thesis-based Master’s degrees (see Professional practice section
below), additional coursework (e.g., in research methods) and research experience can
prepare them for research careers. Faculty members in Canadian universities normally hold
a doctoral degree in their field of study; however, given the competitive nature of the field,
it is not uncommon to pursue post-doctoral training (e.g., a post-doctoral fellowship) to
obtain an academic position. Those who conduct research outside of higher education (e.g.,
in industry or the public sector) often acquire the research competencies necessary for their
roles by completing a Master’s degree, although a doctoral degree may be required for more
senior research positions (e.g., Research Associates).
Canada has a history of vibrant scholarship in sport psychology, and over the past few
decades, there has been a proliferation of high quality graduate programs in the field
(Durand-Bush & McNeill, 2016). Therefore, many opportunities exist for students who wish
to acquire research training in sport psychology. According to Durand-Bush and McNeill,
approximately 25% of Canadian public universities offer graduate programs in which one
can specialize in sport psychology. These programs are housed within sport science
departments (i.e., kinesiology, human kinetics, physical activity/education) and offer
students the possibility to study psychological aspects of sport with faculty members who
conduct research in sport psychology. A graduate degree in psychology (e.g., experimental,
clinical, counselling) with a research focus on sport is another pathway to an academic or
research career in the field, however, coursework and training in sport psychology tends to
be limited in psychology programs (Stewart, 2017).
Overall, as the discipline continues to grow, and as recent doctoral graduates enter faculty
positions, so too do the research training opportunities for students in Canada. In addition
to the 24 programs listed by Durand-Bush and McNeill (2016), students can also specialize in
sport psychology research in graduate programs at Nipissing University (MSc, MEd, PhD),
Lakehead University (MSc), Dalhousie University (MSc, PhD), University of Lethbridge (MA,
MSc), and the University of Prince Edward Island (MSc). Given the diversification of the
field of sport psychology and its interdisciplinary nature, research within graduate programs
may focus on a variety of topics, depending on the interests of thesis supervisors. Examples
include psychological skills training, life skill development, concussion management, injury
rehabilitation, mental health and well-being, motivation and emotion, leadership and group
dynamics, and physical activity promotion. These topics could be researched within
different contexts in (e.g., youth, elite, disability sport) and outside of sport (e.g., business,
performing arts, military, medicine).
While pursuing thesis-based graduate degrees, students can expect some coursework
related to sport psychology, but given the interdisciplinary nature of these programs, they
may also complete coursework within the broader field of sport sciences. Importantly,
these programs involve completing a Master’s thesis or doctoral dissertation, in which
students conduct novel research in order to make new contributions to the sport psychology
literature. Master’s degrees generally require two years of full-time study, while doctoral
degrees typically span four years or more. However, students are encouraged to consult the
specific requirements of the programs in which they are interested and should take note of
the additional research training that may be required to achieve their career goals.
Training for professional practice
In comparison to Canadian research-oriented sport psychology programs, graduate

programs preparing students for professional practice are limited (Durand-Bush & McNeill,
2016). That said, some programs geared toward applied careers in the field do exist. Two
programs offer students the opportunity to gain both applied experience and research
skills in the field, without the requirement of a traditional Master’s thesis. The University
of British Columbia offers a course-based (i.e., without a thesis) Master of Kinesiology
degree. This one-year program provides training in different areas of study (i.e., Socio-
Managerial, Natural/Physical Science, Behavioral Science, and Coaching Science), with the
most popular being the Coaching Science stream (Durand-Bush & McNeill). Students are
required to complete coursework, a research paper, and have the option to carry out an
additional directed field study. Another unique course-based program is the Master of
Human Kinetics in Applied Human Performance (Internship Option) at the University of
Windsor. Over the course of 16 to 24 months, students complete coursework and a 360-hour
Kinesiology internship, as well as a research project. This internship program option is
meant to provide students with both field-work and research experience, and students are
required to complete a research project in order to receive credit for their applied internship
work.
For those wishing to pursue a career as a sport psychology practitioner, graduate training
will depend on their desired scope of practice (e.g., MPC, Certified Counsellor, Registered
Psychologist). Students should examine the professional membership requirements of the
CSPA, CPA, and/or Canadian Counselling and Psychotherapy Association (CCPA) to help
guide their training pathway. The general criteria for CSPA professional membership
includes a Master’s degree in sport psychology (or a related field), coursework in sport
300 Sport
psychology, sport sciences, counselling, and psychology, a 400-hour supervised internship,

and favourable evaluations from supervisors and clients from sport and related settings.
A review of CSPA professional membership profiles revealed that many members have
extensive competitive sport experience as an athlete or coach (e.g., at varsity, national,
and/or Olympic level) and/or as a sport professional (e.g., kinesiologists, athletic trainer).
Competencies and experience in sport are requirements for professional membership with
the CSPA (CSPA, 2018), as well as for certification with AASP in the USA (AASP, 2018).
Presently, the Master’s of Human Kinetics at the University of Ottawa is the only
professional graduate program in Canada geared toward preparing students to meet CSPA
professional membership requirements. In this four-semester, course-based Master’s
program, students complete coursework in counselling, sport and exercise psychology
theory, mental skills training and quality of life, professional ethics, and analysis and
enhancement of consulting interventions. They may also complete courses in research
methods, statistics, organizational behaviour, and sport law, as well as engage in a semester-
based directed study if they desire research experience. Their coursework is complemented
by an extensive 400-hour supervised internship in sport, physical activity, health, education,
business, and/or performing arts contexts. Students who complete thesis-based graduate
degrees in sport psychology can, nonetheless, achieve professional membership with CSPA
by seeking out supervised practical experiences and additional coursework outside of their
academic program.
Individuals who wish to work in the field of sport psychology as registered psychologists
or related vocations such as registered counsellors or psychotherapists should refer to
the specific requirements for licensure within their respective province or territory. It is
important to note that formal opportunities to study sport psychology within clinical/
counselling psychology departments is limited (Stewart, 2017). However, some professors
who are professional members of the CSPA have academic appointments within psychology
departments (e.g., Simon Fraser University, University of Regina, University of Manitoba).
There are also professors conducting research in the field of sport psychology within
programs that offer clinical psychology training in Canada (e.g., University of Ottawa,
Université du Québec à Montréal). Thus, while these programs do not offer specialization in
sport psychology, students could potentially pursue a doctoral degree in clinical psychology
(e.g., PhD, PsyD) while conducting research on topics in sport psychology (e.g., motivation,
coping, passion in sport).
Programs housed in psychology departments have coursework that is focused on
psychology, and these programs tend not to have courses in sport science. Thus, in order
to learn about the field of sport psychology, it is likely that students would need to seek out
additional courses in sport sciences and sport psychology outside of their department (Wall,
2016). This is particularly important for those wishing to become professional members
with CSPA or obtain CMPC© certification through AASP, as coursework in sport psychology
and sport sciences is a requirement for professional membership. Additionally, students
would need to find field placements that meet both clinical psychology and sport criteria
in order to develop competencies specific to sport performance that satisfy CSPA or AASP
requirements. Thus, while students who pursue graduate studies in psychology programs
can go on to pursue careers in applied sport psychology, this trajectory involves completing
additional coursework and clinical work related to sport outside of their department. This
reinforces the notion that students from all training pathways need to take a self-directed
approach to develop the necessary competencies to work as a professional sport psychology

practitioner (Wall).
CONCLUDING REMARKS
In summary, there are several careers and training paths available to those wishing to
specialize and work in the field of sport psychology in Canada. Both research and
professional practice are meaningful endeavours to pursue and a combination of these two
options is often an ideal choice for those seeking to play multiple roles. Canada is home to
several diversified sport psychology graduate programs directed by world-leading scholars
and practitioners. Students can therefore find an educational program that meets their
personal needs and interests. They equally have the option to complete additional training
to meet the requirements of research and/or professional practice organizations that will
open doors for future employment.
REFERENCES
AASP Interim Certification Council. (2017, August 23). CMPC credential and mark rationale.
Retrieved from https://appliedsportpsych.org/certification/certification-program-
updates/cmpc-credential-and-mark-rationale/
Association for Applied Sport Psychology (2018). Certification. Retrieved from
https://appliedsportpsych.org/certification/
Bandura, A. (1997). Self-efficacy: The exercise of control. New York, NY: Freeman.
Bar-Eli, M., Dreshman, R., Blumenstein, B., & Weinstein, Y. (2002). The effect of mental
training with biofeedback on the performance of young swimmers. Applied Psychology: An
International Review, 51, 567–581. doi: 10.1111/1464-0597.00108
Bar-Eli, M., Tenenbaum, G., Pie, J. S., Btesh, Y., & Almog, A. (2007). Effect of goal difficulty,
goal specificity, and duration of practice time intervals on muscular endurance
performance. In D. Smith & M. Bar-Eli (Eds.), Essential readings in sport and exercise
psychology (pp. 305-313). Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics.
Blumenstein, B., & Hung, T. M. (2016). Biofeedback in sport. In R. J. Schinke, K. R.
McGannon, & B. Smith (Eds.), Routledge international handbook of sport psychology (pp.
429–438). New York, NY: Routledge.
Bühlmayer, L., Birrer, D., Röthlin, P., Faude, O., & Donath, L. (2017). Effects of mindfulness
practice on performance-relevant parameters and performance outcomes in sports: A
meta-analytical review. Sports Medicine, 47(11), 2309-2321. doi: 10.1007/s40279-017-0752-9
Burton, D. (1989). The impact of goal specificity and task complexity on basketball skill
development. The Sport Psychologist, 3, 34-47. doi:10.1123/tsp.3.1.34
CCMHS. (2018). About Us. Retrieved from https://www.ccmhs-ccsms.ca/
Cacioppo, J. T., Tassinary, L. G., & Berntson, G. G. (2016). Handbook of psychophysiology
(4th ed.). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Camacho, T. C., Robert, R. E., Lazarus, N. B., Kaplan, G. A., & Cohen, R. D. (1991). Physical
activity and depression: Evidence from the Alameda county study. American Journal of
Epidemiology, 134, 220-231.
Canadian Psychological Association. (2018). Sport and exercise section: Sport psychology training.
Retrieved from https://cpa.ca/sections/sportandexercise/training/
302 Sport
Carron, A. V., Colman, M., Wheeler, J., & Stevens, D. (2002). Cohesion and performance
in sport: A meta-analysis. Journal of Sport and Exercise Psychology, 24, 168-188. doi: 10.1123/
jsep.24.2.168
Carron, A. V., & Eys, M. (2012). Group dynamics in sport (4th ed.). Morgantown, WV: Fitness
Information Technology.
Cheng, M.-Y., Huang, C.-J., Chang, Y.-K., Koester, D., Schack, T., & Hung, T.-M. (2015).
Sensorimotor rhythm neurofeedback enhances golf putting performance. Journal of Sport
and Exercise Psychology, 37(6), 626–636. doi: 10.1123/jsep.2015-0166
Cheron, G., Petit, G., Cheron, J., Leroy, A., Cebolla, A., Cevallos, C., … Clarinval, A. M. (2016).
Brain oscillations in sport: Toward EEG biomarkers of performance. Frontiers in Psychology,
7, 1–25. doi: 10.3389/fpsyg.2016.00246
Covassin, T., Elbin, R. J., Beidler, E., LaFevor, M., & Kontos, A. P. (2017). A review of
psychological issues that may be associated with a sport-related concussion in youth and
collegiate athletes. Sport, Exercise, and Performance Psychology, 6(3), 220-229. doi:10.1037/
spy0000105
CSPA. (2018). Resources. Retrieved from https://docs.wixstatic.com/ugd/
2a9225_edc9a54674934f89896fd9445099fb2f.pdf
Davis, P. A., & Sime, W. E. (2005). Toward a psychophysiology of performance: Sport
psychology principles dealing with anxiety. International Journal of Stress Management, 12,
363–378. doi: 10.1037/1072-5245.12.4.363
Davis, P., Sime, W. E., & Robertson, J. (2007). Sport psychophysiology and peak performance
applications of stress management. In P. M. Lehrer, W. E. Sime, & R. L. Woolfolk (Eds.),
Principles and Practice of Stress Management (3rd ed., pp. 615–637). New York: Guilford Press.
Durand-Bush, N., & McNeill, K. (2016). [Sport psychology in] Canada. In R. J. Schinke, K. R.
McGannon, & B. Smith (Eds.), The Routledge international handbook of sport psychology (pp.
65-80). Oxfordshire, UK: Routledge.
Evans, L., Jones, L., & Mullen, R. (2004). An imagery intervention during the competitive
season with an elite rugby union player. The Sport Psychologist, 18, 252-271. doi:10.1123/
tsp.18.3.252
Feltz, D. L. (1984). Self-efficacy as a cognitive mediator of athletic performance. In W. F.
Straub & J. M. Williams (Eds.), Cognitive sport psychology (pp. 191-198). Lansing, NY: Sport
Science Associates.
Feltz, D. L., & Lirgg, C. D. (1998). Perceived team and player efficacy in hockey. Journal of
Applied Psychology, 83, 557-564. doi: 10.1037/0021-9010.83.4.557
Filaire, E., Alix, D., Ferrand, C., & Verger, M. (2009). Psychophysiological stress in tennis
players during the first single match of a tournament. Psychoneuroendocrinology, 34, 150–157.
doi: 10.1016/j.psyneuen.2008.08.022
Fitzpatrick, S. J., Monda, S. J., & Butters Wooding, C. (2016). Great expectations: Career
planning and training experiences of graduate students in sport and exercise psychology.
Journal of Applied Sport Psychology, 28, 14-27. doi: 10.1080/10413200.2015.1052891
Gardner, F. L., & Moore, Z. E. (2004). A mindfulness-acceptance-commitment-based
approach to athletic performance enhancement: Theoretical considerations. Behavior
Therapy, 35(4), 707-723. doi:10.1016/S0005-7894(04)80016-9
Gardner, F. L., & Moore, Z. E. (2007). The psychology of enhancing human performance: The
mindfulness-acceptance-commitment (MAC) approach. New York: Springer Publishing.
Gardner, F. L., & Moore, Z. E. (2012). Mindfulness and acceptance models in sport
psychology: A decade of basic and applied scientific advancements. Canadian Psychology,

53(4), 309-318. doi: 10.1037/a0030220
Gevirtz, R. N. (2007). Psychophysiological perspectives on stress-related and anxiety
disorders. In P. M. Lehrer, R. L. Woolfolk, & W. E. Sime (Eds.), Principles and practice of stress
management (3rd ed., pp. 209-226). New York: Guilford Press.
Gill, D., & Williams, L. (2008). Psychological dynamics of sport and exercise (3rd ed.).
Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics.
Gould, D., & Tuffey, S. (1996). Zones of optimal functioning research: A review and critique.
Anxiety, Stress, and Coping, 9, 53-68. doi:10.1080/10615809608249392
Gravestock, P., & Gregor Greenleaf, E. (2008). Overview of tenure and promotion policies
across Canada. Report prepared for Mount Royal College (now Mount Royal University).
Retrieved from https://www2.viu.ca/integratedplanning/documents/
Overviewof TPPoliciesinCanada.pdf
Gruzelier, J., Egner, T., & Vernon, D. (2006). Validating the efficacy of neurofeedback for
optimising performance. In N. Christa, & K. Wofgang (Eds.), Progress in Brain Research (Vol.
159, pp. 421–431). Amsterdam, The Netherlands: Elsevier.
Hammond, D. C. (2011). What is neurofeedback: An update. Journal of Neurotherapy, 15,
305-336. doi:10.108010874208.2011.623090
Hanin, Y. L. (1997). Emotions and athletic performance: Individual zones of optimal
functioning. European Yearbook of Sport Psychology, 1, 29-72.
Hatfield, B. D., & Hillman, C. H. (2001). The psychophysiology of sport: A mechanistic
understanding of the psychology of superior performance. In R. N. Singer, H. A.
Hausenblas, & C. M. Janelle (Eds.), Handbook of sport psychology (2nd ed., pp. 362-386). New
York: John Wiley.
Hayes, S. C., Strosahl, K., & Wilson, K. G. (1999). Acceptance and commitment therapy: An
experiential approach to behavior change. New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Hutchinson, J., Sherman, T., Martinovic, N., & Tenenbaum, G. (2008). The effect of
manipulated self-efficacy on perceived sustained effort. Journal of Applied Sport Psychology,
20, 457-472. doi:10.1080/10413200802351151
Jones, G. & Hardy, L. (1990). Stress in sport: Experiences of some elite performers. In G.
Jones & L. Hardy (Eds.), Stress and performance in sport (pp. 247-277). Chichester, UK: Wiley.
Jones, G., & Swain, A. (1995). Predisposition to experience debilitative and facilitative
anxiety in elite and non-elite performers. The Sport Psychologist, 9, 201-211. doi:10.1123/
tsp.0.2.201
Jonker, L., & Hicks, M. (2014). Teaching loads and research outputs of Ontario university faculty
members: Implications for productivity and differentiation. Toronto, ON: Higher Education
Quality Council of Ontario.
Kabat-Zinn, J. (1982). An outpatient program in behavioral medicine for chronic pain
patients based on the practice of mindfulness meditation: Theoretical considerations
and preliminary results. General Hospital Psychiatry, 4, 33-47. doi: 10.1016/
0163-8343(82)90026-3
Kabat-Zinn, J. (1990). Full catastrophe living: Using the wisdom of your body and mind to face stress,
pain, and illness. New York, NY: Delacorte.
Kabat-Zinn, J. (1994). Wherever you go, there you are: Mindfulness meditation in everyday life. New
York, NY: Hyperion.
Kabat-Zinn, J. (2017). Too early to tell: The potential impact and challenges—ethical and
304 Sport
otherwise—inherent in the mainstreaming of dharma in an increasingly dystopian world.

Mindfulness, 8, 1125-1135. doi: 10.1007/s12671-017-0758-2
Kaufman, K. A., Glass, C. R., & Arnkoff, D. B. (2009). Evaluation of mindful sport
performance enhancement (MSPE): A new approach to promote flow in athletes. Journal
of Clinical Sport Psychology, 3(4), 334-356. doi: 10.1123/jcsp.3.4.334
Kaufman, K. A., Glass, C. R., & Pineau, T. R. (2018). Mindful sport performance enhancement:
Mental training for athletes and coaches. Washington, DC: American Psychological
Association. doi:10.1037/0000048-000
Kyllo, L. B., & Landers, D. M. (1995). Goal setting in sport and exercise: A research synthesis
to resolve the controversy. Journal of Sport and Exercise Psychology, 17, 117-137. doi:10.1123/
jsep.17.2.117
Landers, D. M., & Arent, S. M. (2010). Arousal-performance relationship. In J.M. Williams
(Ed.), Applied sport psychology: Personal growth to peak performance (6th ed., pp. 221-246).
Dubuque, IA: McGraw-Hill.
LaPrade, R. F., Agel, J., Baker, J., Brenner, J. S., Cordasco, F. A., Côté, J., … Provencher, M. T.
(2016). AOSSM early sport specialization consensus statement. Orthopaedic Journal of Sports
Medicine, 4(4). doi:10.1177/2325967116644241
Lundqvist, C., Ståhl, L., Kenttä, G., & Thulin, U. (2018). Evaluation of a mindfulness
intervention for Paralympic leaders prior to the Paralympic Games. International Journal
of Sports Science & Coaching, 13(1), 62-71. doi: 10.1177/1747954117746495
MacDonald, L. A., Oprescu, F., & Kean, B. M. (2018). An evaluation of the effects of
mindfulness training from the perspectives of wheelchair basketball players. Psychology of
Sport & Exercise, 37, 188-195. doi: 10.1016/j.psychsport.2017.11.013
Mammen, G., & Faulkner, G. (2013). Physical activity and the prevention of depression:
A systematic review of prospective studies. American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 45,
649-657. doi: 10.1016/j.amepre.2013.08.001
Mirifar, A., Beckmann, J., & Ehrlenspiel, F. (2017). Neurofeedback as supplementary training
for optimizing athletes’ performance: A systematic review with implications for future
research. Neuroscience & Biobehavioral Reviews, 75, 419–432. doi: 10.1016/
j.neubiorev.2017.02.005
Moore, Z. E. (2009). Theoretical and empirical developments of the mindfulness-
acceptance- commitment (MAC) approach to performance enhancement. Journal of
Clinical Sport Psychology, 3(4), 291-302. doi: 10.1123/jcsp.3.4.291
Morgan, S. J., & Mora, J. A. M. (2017). Effect of heart rate variability biofeedback on sport
performance, a systematic review. Applied Psychophysiology and Biofeedback, 42(3), 235-245.
doi: 10.1007/s10484-017-9364-2
Moritz, S. E., Feltz, D. L., Fahrback, K., & Mack, D. (2000). The relation of self-efficacy
measures to sport performance: A meta-analytic review. Research Quarterly for Exercise and
Sport, 71, 280-294. doi:10.1080/02701367.2000.10608908
Myers, N. D., Feltz, D. L., & Short, S. E. (2004). Collective efficacy and team performance:
A longitudinal study of collegiate football teams. Group Dynamics: Theory, Research, and
Practice, 8, 126-138. doi: 10.1037/1089-2699.8.2.126
Myers, N. D., Payment, C. A., & Feltz, D. L. (2004). Reciprocal relationships between
collective efficacy and team performance in women’s ice hockey. Group Dynamics: Theory,
Research, and Practice, 8, 182-195. doi: 10.1037/1089-2699.8.3.182
Nideffer, R. M. (1976). Test of attentional and interpersonal style. Journal of Personality and
Social Psychology, 34, 394-404. doi: 10.1037/0022-3514.34.3.394
Nideffer, R. M., & Segal, M. (2001). Concentration and attention control training. In J.M.
Williams (Ed.), Applied sport psychology: Personal growth to peak performance (4th ed., pp.
312-332). Mountain View, CA: Mayfield.
Post, P., Muncie, S., & Simpson, D. (2012). The effects of imagery-training on swimming
performance: An applied investigation. Journal of Applied Sport Psychology, 24, 323-337.
doi:10.1080/10413200.2011.643442
Rebar, A. L., Stanton, R., Geard, D., Short, C., Duncan, M. J., & Vandelanotte, C. (2015).
A meta-meta-analysis of the effect of physical activity on depression and anxiety in
non-clinical adult populations. Health Psychology Review, 9(3), 1-78. doi:10.1080/
17437199.2015.1022901
Rosenbaum, S., Tiedemann, A., Sherrington, C., Curtis, J., & Ward, P. B. (2014). Physical
activity interventions for people with mental illness: A systematic review and meta-
analysis. The Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 75(9), 964. doi:10.4088/JCP.13r08765
Rumbold, J., Fletcher, D., & Daniels, K. (2012). A systematic review of stress management
interventions with sport performers. Sport, Exercise, and Performance Psychology, 1, 173-193.
doi:10.1037/a0026628
Santorelli, S. (1999). Heal thy self: Lessons on mindfulness in medicine. New York, NY: Bell Tower.
Schinke, R. J., & McGannon, K. R. (2014). The changing landscape of sport psychology
service in Canada. In J. G. Cremades & L. S. Tashman (Eds.), Becoming a sport, exercise,
and performance psychology professional: A global perspective (pp. 210-216). New York, NY:
Psychology Press.
Schinke, R. J., Si, G., Zhang, L., Elbe, A-M., Watson, J., Harwood, C., & Terry, P. C. (2018).
Joint position stand of the ISSP, FEPSAC, ASPASP, and AASP on professional accreditation.
Psychology of Sport and Exercise, 38, 107-115. doi: 10.1016/j.psychsport.2018.06.005
Schinke, R. J., Stambulova, N. B., Si, G., & Moore, Z. (2017). International society of sport
psychology position stand: Athletes’ mental health, performance, and development.
International Journal of Sport and Exercise Psychology. doi:10.1080/1612197X.2017.1295557
Schwartz, M. S., & Andrasik, F. (2017). Biofeedback: A practitioner’s guide: Guilford
Publications.
Schwartz, M. S., & Olson, R. P. (2003). A historical perspective on the field of biofeedback
and applied psychophysiology. In M. S. Schwartz & F. Andrasik (Eds.), Biofeedback: A
practitioner’s guide (3rd ed., pp. 3–19). New York, NY: Guilford Press.
Shirazipour, C. H., Evans, M. B., Caddick, N., Smith, B., Aiken, A. B., Martin Ginis, K. A.,
& Latimer-Cheung, A. E. (2017). Quality participation experiences in the physical activity
domain: Perspectives of veterans with a physical disability. Psychology of Sport and Exercise,
29, 40-50. doi:10.1016/j.psychsport.2016.11.007
Spence, J. T., & Spence, K. W. (1966). The motivational components of manifest anxiety:
Drive and drive stimuli. In C. D. Spielberger (Ed.), Anxiety and behaviour (pp. 291-326). New
York, NY: Academic Press.
Stewart, S. (2017, Fall/Winter). Perspectives article: Off the beaten path: A plea for sanctioned
sport psychology training in psychology departments. Perseverance, 2017(4), 21-22.
Retrieved from https://www.cpa.ca/docs/File/Sections/SportEx/
Perseverance%20CPA%20Issue%204%20December%202017_web.pdf
Thompson, M., & Thompson, L. (2015). The neurofeedback book: An introduction to basic concepts
306 Sport
in applied psychophysiology (2nd ed.). Oakbrook Terrace, IL: Association for Applied
Psychophysiology and Biofeedback.
Triplett, N. (1898). The dynamogenic factors in pacemaking and competition. American
Journal of Psychology, 9, 507-552. doi:10.2307/1412188
Universities Canada. (2018). Member Universities. Retrieved from https://www.univcan.ca/
universities/member-universities/
Vealey, R., & Chase, M. (2008). Self-confidence in sport: Conceptual and research advances.
In T. Horn (Ed.), Advances in sport psychology (3rd ed., pp. 65-97). Champaign, IL: Human
Kinetics.
Vernon, D. J. (2005). Can neurofeedback training enhance performance? An evaluation of
the evidence with implications for future research. Applied Psychophysiology and Biofeedback,
30, 347–364. doi: 10.1007/s10484-005-8421-4
Vidic, Z., St. Martin, M., & Oxhandler, R. (2018). Mindfulness meditation intervention with
male collegiate soccer players: Effect on stress and various aspects of life. The Sport Journal.
Retrieved from http://thesportjournal.org/article/mindfulness-meditation-intervention-
with-male-collegiate-soccer-players-effect-on-stress-and-various-aspects-of-life/
Wall, J. (2016, May). Practice spotlight: Graduate training pathways in sport psychology.
Perseverance, 2016(1), 7-8. Retrieved from https://www.cpa.ca/docs/File/Sections/SportEx/
Perseverance%20CPA%20Issue%201%20May%202016_web.pdf
Weinberg, R. S. (2000). Goal setting in sport and exercise: How research can inform practice.
In B. A. Carlsson, U. Johnson, & F. Wettertrand (Eds.), Sport psychology conference in the new
millennium (pp. 76-84). Sweden: Halmstead University.
Weinberg, R. S. (2004). Goal setting practices for coaches and athletes. In T. Morris & J.
Summers (Eds.), Sport psychology: Theory, applications, and issues (pp. 278-293). Queensland,
Australia: Wiley.
Weinberg, R. S., & Gould, D. (2015). Foundations of sport and exercise psychology (6th ed.).
Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics.
Werthner, P., Christie, S., & Dupee, M. (2013). Neurofeedback and biofeedback training with
Olympic athletes. NeuroConnections, 2013(Summer), 32–37.
White, R. L., Babic, M. J., Parker, P. D., Lubans, D. R., Astell-Burt, T., & Lonsdale, C. (2017).
Domain-specific physical activity and mental health: A meta-analysis. American Journal of
Preventive Medicine, 52, 653-666. doi: 10.1016/j.amepre.2016.12.008
Widmeyer, W. N., Brawley, L. R., & Carron, A. V. (1985). The measurement of cohesion in sport
teams: The group environment questionnaire. London, ON: Sports Dynamics.
Wulf, G. (2013). Attentional focus and motor learning: A review of 15 years. International
Review of Sport and Exercise Psychology, 6, 77-104. doi: 10.1080/1750984X.2012.723728
Wylleman, P., Harwood, C. G., Elbe, A-M., Reints, A., & De Caluwé, D. (2009). A perspective
on education and professional development in applied sport psychology. Psychology of
Sport and Exercise, 10, 435-446. doi: 10.1016/j.psychsport.2009.03.008
Xiang, M-Q., Hou, X-H., Liao, B-G., Liao, J-W., & Hu, M. (2018). The effect of neurofeedback
training for sport performance in athletes: A meta-analysis. Psychology of Sport and Exercise,
36, 114–122. doi: 10.1016/j.psychsport.2018.02.004
Zhang, C., Si, G., Duan, Y., Lyu, Y., Keatley, D. A., & Chan, D. C. (2016). The effects of
mindfulness training on beginners’ skill acquisition in dart throwing: a randomized
controlled trial. Psychology of Sport and Exercise, 22. 279-285. doi: 10.1016/
j.psychsport.2015.09.005

Dithurbide, L., DesClouds, P., McNeill, K., Durand-Bush, N., DeRoo, C., & Christie, S. (2019).
Sport psychology. In M. E. Norris (Ed.), The Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological
Science. Kingston, ON: eCampus Ontario. Licensed under CC BY NC 4.0. Retrieved from
https://ecampusontario.pressbooks.pub/psychologycareers/chapter/sport-psychology/
[13]
ENVIRONMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY
Cheuk F. Ng, Athabasca University, Athabasca, AB
Robert Gifford, University of Victoria, Victoria, BC
Jennifer A. Veitch, National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa, ON
Lindsay J. McCunn, Vancouver Island University, Nanaimo, BC
INTRODUCTION
Have you ever wondered whether playing music while you study helps you to focus? Why
some people bicycle, recycle, or turn down the heat in winter – while others do not? Do
people become more aggressive when it’s hot outside? Would playing in a park, as opposed
to a paved playground, help children with ADHD focus their attention better? These are
examples of questions that environmental psychologists answer.
OVERVIEW OF ENVIRONMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY
Environmental psychology is the study of how we, as individuals and as part of groups,
interact with our physical settings — how we experience and change the environment, and
how our behaviour and experiences are changed by the environment. In environmental
psychology, environment includes both natural and built settings, such as parks, natural
landscape, homes, workplaces, and public spaces. Environments can vary in scale from the
immediate space surrounding us to the room, the building, the neighbourhood, the city, the
wilderness, or the globe.
In most fields of psychology, behaviour seems to be considered as occurring in a vacuum.
The physical environment is often treated in research as mere “noise,” something to be
controlled for in studies. Environmental psychology embraces the physical world in which
we experience life. Environmental psychologists consider any human activity to be situated
along three dimensions at the same time: the person (e.g., age, gender, personality, culture),
the place (e.g., home, classroom, workplace, park, nature), and the psychological process of
interest (e.g., socializing, working, learning, playing, exploring). Change over time can be
308
an important dimension as well. Behaviours in a particular physical environment can be

influenced by social-psychological contextual factors such as the presence of others or one’s
role in the group, and these are also part of environmental psychology (Gifford, 2014).
Environmental psychology is a relatively new field — about 60 years old now – that
has grown rapidly in response to the degradation of the natural environment and the
need to design buildings that better meet the needs of their users. Like most areas of
psychology, environmental psychology has a theoretical side as well as an applied side.
Some environmental psychologists focus their efforts on developing knowledge, whereas
others work as consultants to answer practical questions; a few aim to make their work serve
immediate, practical goals as well as to contribute knowledge for others to build on (Stokes,
1997).
The goal of environmental psychologists who focus mainly on research is to understand
individuals’ transactions with their environments. They study fundamental psychological
processes as they relate to the physical environment, including environmental perception,
spatial cognition, appraisals of environments, and personality, child development, and social
interaction as they relate to the environment. They ask: How do humans mentally represent
their spatial surroundings? What are some common attitudes toward energy consumption?
Which physical variables affect learning in the classroom?
At a broader level, environmental psychologists examine how transactions with our work,
home, and natural environments are related to our satisfaction and productivity, well-being,
and mental health. For example, do crowded cities contribute to depression? Does better
lighting on sidewalks encourage people to go out at night? Does indoor air quality associate
with better performance at the office? How is climate change affecting mental health (Gifford
& Gifford, 2016)?
In the long run, many environmental psychologists aim to use the knowledge generated
by their research to influence built and natural environments in positive and constructive
ways. This can be done by contributing to government policies or programs that help to
promote sustainable behaviour. It could also be done through influencing the architecture
and construction industries by informing design guidelines or by offering recommendations
to city planners about how to encourage place-making and create urban spaces that are
psychosocially healthy.
Other environmental psychologists work as consultants with goals to solve a practical
problem brought to them by someone with a need to solve that problem. Such issues are
likely to be local, specific, and pressing. When a client is less interested in the theoretical
aspects of the problem, then effective, quick, and evidence-based action is called for. For
example, when city officials are interested in establishing a food recycling program, their
main concern could be to increase the number of people who participate in their program.
They expect the environmental psychologist they hire to know the theories and the body of
research well in order to translate this knowledge into practical recommendations that will
result in more food recycling in the city.
The work of an environmental psychologist is interdisciplinary in nature. Depending
on the area of focus, the successful researcher-practitioner will know something about
architecture, organizational behaviour, health, natural resources management, and other
related disciplines. Knowing how to work with other specialists is important, as is
understanding the needs of users (or potential users) of the setting that is being planned,
constructed, or renovated. Often, projects involving environmental psychology will be
310 Environmental
important to community leaders, volunteers, and policy-makers who may use research
findings to formulate or change government regulations and guidelines. In short,
environmental psychologists:
• Seek to improve our stewardship of natural resources and help mitigate climate change,
including how best to adapt to it;
• Understand how to increase the habitability of the built environment;
• Study everyday settings in relation to human attitudes, emotions, and behaviours;
• Recognize that we actively cope with, and shape, environments; we do not passively
respond to environmental forces; and,
• Work in conjunction with other disciplines.
A BIT OF HISTORY
Psychologists have conducted research on the built environment since the 1920s. In the
earliest studies (as cited in Gifford, 2014), researchers investigated the effects of noise and
heat on work performance, classroom seating on student grades, and lighting on work
performance in the infamous Hawthorne studies — studies you might have heard about in
some of your courses.
The modern intellectual roots of environmental psychology can be traced back to the
middle of the 20th century. Egon Brunswik (1943) argued that psychologists should focus
on an organism’s environment as much as the organism itself. Like Brunswik, Kurt Lewin
(1946) viewed the environment as an essential influence on behaviour. He also emphasized
that research should be driven by real-world problems and applied to solve real-world
social problems. Roger Barker (1968) developed the concept of behaviour settings: small
ecological units, such as the corner store and the high school basketball game. Barker
observed remarkable consistency in the pattern of activity for occupants in a given role in
relation to the physical-spatial aspect of the behaviour setting.
The 1950s experienced an increase in research in “architectural psychology,” which
focused on human interactions with the built environment. The primary goal of these
studies was to improve human well-being and satisfaction by designing or altering built
environments. A key example is the redesign of parts of a large, fortress-like mental hospital,
as they were called in the 1950s. A team consisting of a psychiatrist, a psychologist, and an
architect carefully considered the particular needs and behaviours of the patients in the re-
design of the hospital at Weyburn, Saskatchewan (Osmond, 1957). This project might have
been the very first time in which environmental psychology was consciously applied to the
design of a building, and we will revisit this project below.
The 1960s saw rapid growth in environmental psychology. In a time of increased societal
awareness and concern about the health of the natural world, researchers began to study
environmental issues such as how human activity negatively influences the biophysical
environment and how human-caused problems (e.g., noise and pollution) affect human
health and well-being. These topics soon became an essential part of what environmental
psychologists do.
In the late 1960s, environmental psychology became a named, distinct field (e.g.,
Proshansky, Ittelson, & Rivlin, 1970). Today, the field encompasses the study of
environmental and architectural concerns. Environmental psychologists around the world
tend to focus on research areas of specific concern to their country or region. Most large
national and international psychology organizations have a section or division that is
devoted to environmental psychology.
CURRENT ENVIRONMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY RESEARCH TOPICS
Based on the authors’ experience as editors and editorial board members of journals in
the field, and upon our knowledge of our own and colleagues’ work, here is a list of current
topics that environmental psychologists study:
• Ecological consequences of human actions
• Sustainability and climate change
• Psychological aspects of resource management
• Psychological and behavioural aspects of people and nature
• Place attachment and place identity
• Environmental risks and hazards: perception, behaviour, and management
• Personal and group-based perceptions and evaluations of buildings, and natural
landscapes
• Design and evaluation of workplaces, schools, homes, public buildings, and public
spaces
• Cognitive mapping, spatial cognition, and wayfinding
• Leisure and tourism behaviour in relation to their physical settings
• Stress related to physical settings
• Social space: crowding, privacy, territoriality, personal space
The interests of environmental psychologists continue to reflect the environment we live
in, building upon the past and adapting to new conditions (e.g., the creation of virtual reality
expands the notion of “environment”). The 21st century is an era of digital communication
and artificial intelligence as well as of ecological threats (e.g., Stokols, 2018). How do advances
in new technologies change our experiences and relationships with our physical
environment? Is the workplace or the school still a relevant conception of place when people
can work, learn, shop, sight-see places around the world, or consult with a therapist, from
just about any physical setting? How will we perceive, think, and behave in virtual reality,
augmented reality, and “smart” buildings and cities? These will be the subjects of inquiry for
environmental psychology in the near future.
RESEARCH METHODS
Environmental psychologists use both quantitative and qualitative approaches, choosing

one that best fits the research question, or using multiple methods if resources allow. Many
of the methods are commonly used in psychology and, thus, are introduced in most
undergraduate research methods textbooks. Other techniques are specific to research in
environmental psychology. The environmental psychologist’s job is to know which methods
312 Environmental
of gathering information will yield quality answers to the questions at hand, and to use these
methods well.
Research methods and techniques commonly used in environmental psychology include:
• Self-reports, such as questionnaire surveys, attitude and other rating scales, and
interviews
• Experiments conducted in a laboratory
• Field studies and quasi-experiments conducted in everyday physical settings
• Analyses of archival data, such as census data, police crime reports, park visitors logs
• Naturalistic observation and recording of behaviours in an unobtrusive and systematic
manner
• Physiological measurements (e.g., cortisol level, skin conductance to measure stress
level)
• Case studies of particular places
• Content analyses of documents and messages (e.g., media reports)
Some techniques used specifically (or more often) in environmental psychology are:
• Behaviour mapping (i.e., keeping a visual record of people’s behaviours in a space; for
example, where visitors are distributed in an art gallery at a particular time)
• Cognitive mapping (i.e., drawing an individual’s mental representation of a place in a
sketch map)
• Analyses of physical traces, including accretion (i.e., the deposit of material, such as
litter) and erosion (i.e., the selective wear of material, such as floor tiles)
• Environmental simulations, ranging from static photos to videos, physical mock-ups,
computer-generated images, to computer games and virtual reality applications. These
simulations are particularly useful for studying the responses of future users to
environments that are yet to be built.
• Needs assessment (architectural programming, before the project is built) and post-
occupancy evaluation (did the building design work as planned?)
Each of these methods and techniques has strengths and weaknesses. In most cases,
using multiple methods and techniques that complement one another in order to gain a
comprehensive picture of the person-environment transaction under study is the wisest
approach. As in any research involving human participants, the researcher has the
responsibility to address any ethical concerns and to weigh the potential social benefits
against the social costs of the research. Two advanced guides to research methods and
techniques used in environmental psychology research are the books written by Zeisel
(2006) and edited by Gifford (2016).
SOME SIGNIFICANT RESEARCH STUDIES IN ENVIRONMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY
Several pioneers of environmental psychology have focused on our use of social space.
The early work of Robert Sommer (e.g., his book Personal Space: The Behavioral Basis of Design,
1969) emphasized our need to keep particular, varying interpersonal distances (personal
space) when we interact with different sorts of others, in different sorts of situations. He
also examined the negative consequences that follow when others invade that space. In his
book The Environment and Social Behavior: Privacy, Personal Space, Territoriality, and Crowding
(1975), Irwin Altman described how we use our personal space, the territories we claim and
maintain, and environmental and other means to maintain control over our interactions
with other people (i.e., privacy). These concepts and principles have been influential to user-
centred design.
Recall the mental hospital redesign project described earlier in the section about the
history of environmental psychology. Based on the idea developed from that project, Robert
Sommer formulated the concept of social design (Sommer, 1983). This approach to
architectural design involves (a) working with people who use, or will use, the building
rather than for them, (b) involving these people who will use the building in planning and
management of the spaces around them, and (c) educating them to use the environment
wisely and creatively to achieve a harmonious balance between the social, physical, and
natural environments.
The key benefit of this approach is serving the needs of the building occupants or potential
users first. Architects often view their designs differently from laypersons (Gifford, Hine,
Muller-Clemm, & Shaw, 2000), and the paying client (e.g., a school board) often does not
communicate with those who occupy or will use the building (e.g., teachers and students).
Social design emphasizes building users as active agents in the design process.
Post-occupancy evaluations are then conducted to provide feedback to the architects and
the paying client as to the effectiveness of the design. In the end, architects and paying clients
could benefit as well by avoiding mistakes that would be costly to remedy over the building’s
life (Reizenstein, 1982). However, some resistance to this approach occurs because of the
extra effort of involving users and occupants, unrealistic expectations about the effectiveness
of social design, and conflict among principal players. Those who take the longer-term view
of the building’s effects on employees for many years argue that these initial costs and efforts
are well worth making (Brill, Margulis, Konar, & BOSTI Associates, 1984).
Significant contributions have been made to our understanding of what it is like to be
living and working in extreme environments, including at both the Arctic and the Antarctic
regions (Suedfeld, 1991). People in such environments experience not only extremely hostile
physical conditions, but also psychological feelings of isolation and confinement with others
in close quarters. Difficulty with communication and interpersonal conflicts may occur,
depending on the duration of stay. Preventive measures to minimize these problems might
include selecting through vigorous physiological and psychological testing, capsule design,
and countering boredom. Individuals who can do the required tasks, are emotionally stable,
and are “sociable introverts” may be most suitable.
Capsule designs that incorporate color and variety, and some means for personalization
and privacy, can help to reduce psychological stress. Individuals use different methods
to fill unstructured time, injecting novelty into and reducing monotony in their lives in
the capsule environment; some focus on the capsule or its surrounding environment (e.g.,
sunrise), whereas others focus on re-creations of their far away home (e.g., a birthday party)
(Suedfeld & Steel, 2000). These research findings have spurred an interest in investigating
the possibilities for human habitation in space and other planets, and environmental
psychology has contributed to such endeavours (Gifford & Lacombe, 2006; Suedfeld &
Steel, 2000).
For a long time, the study of climate change was the territory of the natural sciences.
314 Environmental
However, in the last decade or so, social scientists have been successful to an increasing
extent in convincing natural scientists and the public that they can play an important
role in helping solve the problem. Both human solutions and technological solutions are
necessary. After all, it is primarily human activities that have devastated much of our natural
environment and as a result, it is our duty and responsibility to mitigate that impact through
our individual and collective actions. Several environmental psychologists (Swim et al., 2011)
served on the American Psychological Association’s Task Force on Climate Change, which
compiled a report to guide future actions.
Robert Gifford (2011) has identified almost 40 psychological barriers that limit climate
change mitigation and adaptation which he calls the “Dragons of Inaction.” These dragon
“species” fall into several “genera,” such as (a) Change Unnecessary, (b) Conflicting Goals and
Aspirations, (c) Interpersonal Relations, (d) Lacking Knowledge, (e) Tokenism, (f) Limited
Cognition, (g) Government and Industry, and (h) Discredence (Lacroix, Gifford, & Chen,
2019). Understanding which barriers are strongest for which sorts of people is the basis for
crafting interventions that will help people overcome their barriers.
HOW ENVIRONMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY MAKES A DIFFERENCE
Environmental psychologists help to improve the world in a variety of ways. Sometimes

this impact is dramatic. Other times, it is more subtle. In this section, we celebrate a few of
the ways in which environmental psychology has changed the world for the better.
PROMOTING SUSTAINABILITY
One of the most important challenges that environmental psychology is helping to

overcome is to apply psychological knowledge to help preserve the natural environment.
Many threats to environmental sustainability are caused by human behaviour, and so
targeting human behaviour that has harmful effects is paramount for protecting nature and
natural resources.
Among other activities, environmental psychologists identify behaviours that can and
should be changed to improve environmental quality, determine which factors affect these
behaviours, and develop and evaluate interventions to change them.
Most people have some concern for the environment, and this concern stems in part
from egoistic, altruistic, and biospheric environmental values (e.g., Schultz, 2001). Knowing
what individuals value helps environmental psychologists develop intervention policies:
If a person or group’s primary concern is egoistic, for example, interventions can be
implemented that emphasize the personal benefits of caring for the environment, such
as lower electricity bills. Some people hold hedonic values, favouring their immediate
experiences (Steg, Perlaviciute, van der Werff, & Lurvink, 2014): For such individuals,
interventions that focus on their own improved comfort or enjoyment might be most
effective.
To add to the challenge, many individuals rebound from their pro-environmental
behaviours. For example, people who reduce energy consumption in one area sometimes
compensate by increasing consumption in another (Otto, Kaiser, & Arnold, 2014).
Environmental psychologists seek not only to alter behaviour, but to ensure that this altered
behaviour leads to real and lasting results. Studying how, and how much, rebound occurs is
an area of active research with important policy implications (Santarius & Soland, 2018).
These are just a few ways in which environmental psychology intersects with conservation
research and environmental policy change. Consider reading the reviews by Steg and Vlek
(2009) for an in-depth review about how to encourage pro-environmental behaviour, or
the chapter by Gifford (2002) that describes many ways that environmental psychology has
already made a difference in the world.
ENVIRONMENTAL IDENTITY AND NATURE
How individuals think about themselves can be an important predictor of pro-

environmental behaviour. Those who identify as pro-environmental tend to engage in more
pro-environmental behaviours (Whitmarsh & O’Neill, 2010). Environmental psychologists
use this knowledge to help influence pro-environmental actions, such as using marketing
strategies that encourage greener identity.
Emotional connection to the natural world is also an important predictor of well-being
and ecological behaviour (Nisbet, Zelenski, & Murphy, 2009). By helping people develop
bonds with nature, environmental psychologists promote sustainable behaviour and overall
well-being.
RESTORATIVE ENVIRONMENTS
Another key point of interest in environmental psychology is the effects of natural settings
on people. A growing number of environmental psychologists specialize in restorative
environments, places that help people recover from day-to-day psychological overload.
Nature walks, for example, can lead to stress reduction, improved attention, and decreased
anger (Hartig, Evans, Jamner, Davis, & Gärling, 2003). Similarly, children whose homes
feature nearby nature show fewer ill-effects from stressful life events (Wells & Evans, 2003).
This research reveals the importance of preserving accessible green areas, and has
implications for how we structure cities and homes.
PLACE ATTACHMENT
Place attachment is the bond between a person and a place. It is a complex reciprocal
association involving cognition, affect, and behaviour (Lewicka, 2011; Scannell & Gifford,
2010). The bond can exist at very small scales (e.g., one’s own room) through to
neighbourhoods, parks, cities, regions, nations, and the globe.
With the rise of globalization and mobility, place attachment has become of particular
interest as person-place bonds have become increasingly tenuous. This, in turn, can
influence the perceived safety and pleasantness of an environment, and can lead to people
being less protective of these places. Because of this, and because place attachment is
associated with environmental risk perception, place attachment is important for
understanding pro-environmental behaviour.
Place attachment can be a means of influencing behaviour in positive ways, for example
by encouraging the use of public spaces such as national parks. Place attachment is also
relevant for disaster psychology, and has been used to help understand and mitigate the
316 Environmental
grief experienced by those forced to relocate or, indeed, why people sometimes stay in a
dangerous place when, rationally speaking, they should leave (e.g., Billig, 2006).
WAYFINDING
Knowledge of how people find their way in the built and natural environment has a wide
range of applications. For example, psychologists have used this research to help catch
criminals (Canter & Larkin, 1993) and locate persons lost in urban areas and the wilderness
(Heth & Cornell, 1998; Cornell & Hill, 2006). It has also been used to discover ways to more
quickly evacuate dangerous areas, such as a burning hotel (Kobes et al., 2009) or a smoky
railway tunnel (Cosma, Ronchi, & Nilsson, 2016). Wayfinding research has also helped to
develop head-mounted displays that can aid firefighter navigation in emergencies (Wilson &
Wright, 2009).
ENHANCING BUILDING DESIGN
Environmental psychology first started making its mark in the world of architecture. For
decades, environmental psychologists have been working to improve buildings by focusing
on the human dimensions of building design. Here are a few examples of how
environmental psychologists have improved the lives of users in several types of built
settings.
Offices
Offices have been a popular setting for environmental psychologists to study because
many people work in them and because they are comparatively accessible sites for field
research that are relatively easy to simulate in a laboratory setting (Sundstrom, 1987; Veitch,
2012). Organizations probably benefit from paying greater attention to the behavioural
effects of workplace conditions on employees because the costs of employees make up
approximately 80% of workplace expenses, whereas the building and its operation consume
approximately 8% (e.g., Brill et al., 1984). Poorly designed environments can trigger ill effects
such as excess fatigue and psychological distress (Evans, Becker, Zahn, Bilotta, & Keesee,
2012). Conversely, for example, greater well-being in the form of satisfaction with one’s
performance, and fewer physical symptoms at the end of the workday, have been associated
with working under lighting conditions that one appraises as comfortable (Veitch, Newsham,
Boyce, & Jones, 2008).
Long-term care centres
Environment-behaviour researchers (who encompass people with professional training in

a variety of related social sciences, architecture and design, whose interests overlap) have
played a role in the planning and evaluations of long-term care facilities for elderly residents
with Alzheimer’s disease.
For example, in five home-like residential care facilities in Canada and the US,
environmental gerontologist Milke, Beck, Danes, and Leask (2009) observed that the activity
patterns did not conform to the architects’ expectations. Residents in each house did not
form a “household” as the architects had thought but, instead, small groups gathered for
eating and other activities based on naturally formed friendships and other factors.
Demonstrating how unexpected “other” factors can influence use of space, the central
common area between houses in one facility where the residents had lower- level
functioning was used for meal-serving because the staff wanted to keep an eye on the
residents.
In another assisted living treatment residence, the facility was designed to ensure that
residents were safe from wandering and that they could function on their own and maintain
their sense of self through the incorporation of familiar images, events, and sensory stimuli
(Zeisel, 2006).
Health care facilities
Environmental psychologists have conducted research to evaluate the physical design

of health care facilities, including hospitals and the doctor’s office, in order to improve
the health care experiences of patients. The physical surroundings of these settings can
include any space from the parking lot, to the layout of exam rooms, to waiting rooms and
furnishings. Some research in this area has explored the effects of positive distractions in the
doctor’s office (Devlin, 2014). In a multi-site study of five hospital units, the more favorable
the design features in a hospital room, the less stress patients reported experiencing after
surgery. The physical environment of a hospital room can provide the patient with greater
sense of control (e.g., adjustable temperature), facilitating social support (e.g., chair for
visitor), and providing distractions (e.g., TV; Andrade, Devlin, Pereira, & Lima, 2017).
Alternative floor numbering systems (floors below ground numbered as “Sub 1” and “Sub
2” rather than simply Floors 1 and 2) can make hospitals easier to navigate for patients and
visitors (Carpman, Grant, & Simmons, 1983). In smaller healthcare settings, the impression
given by a doctor’s waiting room matters. College students and seniors rated the quality
of care provided by a doctor as higher when the waiting room was nicely furnished, well-
lighted, warm in appearance, and containing artwork than when the waiting room was dark
and cold in appearance, had outdated furnishings, and contained no artwork or poor-quality
reproductions (Arneill & Devlin, 2002).
Classrooms and learning spaces
Researchers have conducted research in learning spaces in educational settings. Sommer

and Olsen (1980) designed a “soft classroom” by adding semicircular, cushion-covered bench
seating, adjustable lighting, carpeting, and fabric wall decorations to a university classroom.
The addition of these features significantly increased student participation. Interestingly,
the soft classroom continued to facilitate increased student engagement even after 17 years
despite wear-and-tear on the furnishings (Wong, Sommer, & Cook, 1992).
Researchers have also examined how acoustics affect students using informal learning
spaces in universities. In one study, students perceived that spaces with lower background
sound levels (e.g., from ventilation systems), higher people-generated sound levels, and
more reverberation (which presumably provides greater conversational privacy) were more
suitable for engaging in such activities as small-group discussions and socializing than other
spaces (Scannell, Hodgson, Jorge, & Gifford, 2016).
Teachers are also affected by the physical environment in schools. For example, changing
318 Environmental
a traditional library design toward a more social and technologically-focused “learning

commons” model can affect the perceptions and behaviours of teachers using these spaces
in secondary schools (McCunn & Gifford, 2015).
Daycare centres and playgrounds
Preschoolers and school children spend much time in daycare centres and playgrounds.
The design, layout, and the type of ground surface, in open areas of a daycare can influence
the physical activity level of preschoolers. Hard surfaces and curvy pathways are conducive
to such physical activities as running and playing with wheeled toys. By contrast, soft,
sand-covered ground surfaces in playgrounds inhibit higher levels of physical activities
(Cosco, Moore, & Islam, 2010). As noted by Cosco et al., this has important implications
for playground design. Ground coverings are often chosen for safety, but it could be that
associated levels of physical activity should also be considered when selecting a ground
covering.
The design of playgrounds can influence not only the development of motor skills, but
also the social and emotional skills of school children. Because different children use
different parts of a playground for different activities, and at different times, a good
playground should have a wide variety of equipment, open areas, and play structures
(Ledingham, 1998). The design of playground equipment can also facilitate different types
of play. When outdoor playground equipment has enclosed spaces,, nodes and connector
spaces, and stage-type spaces, preschool children tend to engage in fantasy play. When
children are able to use loose parts to construct their own spaces (constructive play), they
are more likely to engage in dramatic play (e.g., “play house”) as well (Maxwell, Mitchell, &
Evans, 2008).
Galleries and museums
Stephen Bitgood has studied visitors’ behaviours in exhibition centres (museums, science
centres, and zoos) extensively. Which types of exhibits (e.g., interactive, text-based) do
visitors pay attention to, and for how long? How do visitors circulate among the exhibits?
Based on his findings, Bitgood has offered practical advice to museum professionals about
how to increase the impact of exhibits on the visiting public (e.g., by increasing readability
of exhibition texts), how to arrange exhibits in a way that lessens visitor crowding and
maximizes circulation, and how to assess whether changes to exhibits influence patterns of
visitor behaviour (Bitgood, 2011).
Retail environments
Why do we keep going back to a particular store? Mehrabian and Russell (1974) proposed
that the relations between aspects of a physical environment (e.g., the décor, music played in
a store) and behavioural responses (e.g., approach versus avoidance tendencies) are mediated
through three emotional states: pleasure, arousal, and, to some extent, dominance. Their
model caught the attention of marketing researchers and has been applied extensively to the
study of store atmospherics in retail environments (e.g., Michon, Chebat, & Turley, 2005).
Correctional environments
For thirty years, Richard Wener has researched jail and prison environments, beginning
with evaluations of new jails created by the US Bureau of Prisons. The novel design involving
decentralizing management of functional living units of smaller groups of inmates was
intended to provide a non-traditional and safe environment for pre-trial inmates. Interviews
with staff and inmate populations, the relative absence of weapons, and increased interaction
between staff and inmates point to the success of this design.
In his environmental and contextual model, Wener (2012) described the ways in which the
environment influences the chance of violence occurring in correctional settings. The non-
institutional design of the living units (e.g., colour, lighting, furnishings) can affect inmates’
mood and communicate the expectation of no vandalism. Reducing crowding, isolation, and
noise helps to lower stress, tension, and the chance of aggressive behavior occurring. Easier
access to important resources (e.g., toilet paper, TV lounge, telephones) reduces competition
that may lead to aggression.
The openness of the design, the presence of staff, and consistent staff-inmate contact
increase the chance that any assaults will be noticed and attended to by staff. All of these
factors help to communicate the expectation of non-violence within the correctional setting.
Wener’s book The Environmental Psychology of Prisons and Jails (2012) serves as a guide to
best practices for professionals in the fields of architecture and design, social work and
psychology, and criminal justice and criminology.
Cities
Modern planners and city officials are often keen to understand why people use urban
spaces in particular ways so that public dollars can be used wisely. Environmental
psychologists have emphasized that city and community planning should be approached
from psychological and public health perspectives, citing extensive evidence that the
physical environment, and its organization, influence attitudes, health, and well-being on
large and small scales (McCunn & Gifford, 2014; Wells, Evans, & Yang, 2010). For example,
noise has well-understood effects on cardiovascular health and on children’s reading
acquisition, and this evidence should be taken into account when planning the locations of
hospitals and schools in relation to roads with heavy traffic and railways.
Environmental psychology can also improve the habitability of buildings and enhance
urban neighbourhoods and parks. One classic example is the application of cognitive
mapping principles to the urban design of Ciudad Guyana, a planned Venezuelan city that
was created to centrally amalgamate several existing small towns (Appleyard, 1976). More
recently, McCunn and Gifford (2017) found associations between feeling a sense of place
in urban settings and the various navigational strategies that city dwellers use to find their
way around their town. When recalling settings for which they felt a strong sense of place,
participants recalled cognitive paths through those settings more readily.
POLICY-MAKING
Environmental psychology researchers add to our understanding of people-environment

relations; much of what they learn has practical applications. Sometimes this occurs by
studying a specific building, examples of which are in the “Careers” section below. Often, it
320 Environmental
is at the level of policy where the field can have a broader influence on society. For example,
since the 1970s, environmental psychology has had an influence on US energy policy (Stern
& Gardner, 1981) with both empirical and review papers contributing to public debate about
how best to promote energy conservation measures.
Energy and environmental decision-making continue to be a focus of efforts to make
public servants, politicians, and the public aware that by applying psychological knowledge,
we can design programs that are more likely to achieve their stated goals (e.g., Weber, 2013).
In rare instances, environmental psychologists quickly and directly influence government
policy, as in the case of Christine Kormos’ (2016) work on incentives for the acceptance of
plug-in electric vehicles, which influenced government policy in British Columbia.
Another level at which psychologists can have influence is one that builds guidelines,
standards, and regulations. The need for updated systems and guides to help the designers
and operators of buildings to make good decisions has come along with the modern
emphasis on energy efficiency. In North America, the most common of these sustainable
building certifications is the Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED)
system, in which points are awarded for using environmentally-friendly materials,
environmental quality systems, and other design features (U.S. Green Buildings Council,
2018). Such buildings are labeled according to the performance level achieved (Certified,
Silver, Gold, or Platinum).
Although the system is intended also to achieve interior environments that have
comfortable temperatures, reduced levels of air pollutants, and access to daylight,
environmental psychologists have shown that the evidence that occupants experience these
environments as being better is mixed. Newsham et al. (2013) found that occupants in green
buildings (which had been certified on one or another rating scheme) reported higher levels
of overall environmental satisfaction, satisfaction with temperature, more positive moods,
and higher levels of night-time sleep quality than did occupants of matched conventional
buildings. However, McCunn & Gifford, (2012) evaluated buildings on an objective scale
of green attributes and found no correlation between green attributes and employee
engagement – and a negative correlation between general office impressions and green
building attributes. Certification systems are complex sets of criteria, and each building has
a unique combination of features leading to their certification. This can make it challenging
to identify the connection between overall certification levels and multi-factorial outcomes
like satisfaction.
Researchers who study these processes influence the LEED point system either indirectly,
with their publications or conference presentations, or directly, by serving on volunteer
committees that write the program requirements. Working directly on these committees
can result in the programs explicitly including the environmental features that research
shows to be best for occupants. These approaches have the potential to positively influence
many buildings in many places.
CAREERS
Graduates of post-secondary environmental psychology programs work in different

settings. Some possibilities include joining an established environment-behaviour
consulting firm, starting one’s own firm, joining a research institute or organization, a
government department or agency that deals with regional, city, or building planning,
a non-governmental, non-profit, or international organization in some research capacity,

becoming a facilities manager for an organization and, of course, teaching and researching
as a professor.
Compared to some other applied subfields of psychology, such as clinical psychology, the
number of positions is small. However, the number of environmental psychology graduates
is also small. Because environmental psychology is still a relatively new discipline, finding
a job and establishing a career depends more on one’s ability and initiative. The good
news is that employers, and the public, are becoming more aware of the contributions
from environmental psychologists. Although some job advertisements explicitly request an
“environmental psychologist,” many positions open to environmental psychologists have
other titles, such as facility planner, design programmer, or design researcher, and so on.
RESEARCH POSITIONS IN GOVERNMENT AND OTHER AGENCIES
The National Research Council of Canada is a federal government research and

development agency devoted to work that addresses government priorities, supports
business innovation, and adds to scientific knowledge. Its Construction Research Centre
is devoted to studying the built environment, primarily from an engineering perspective.
However, it has several environmental psychologists who study how the built environment
influences us. Chapter author Jennifer Veitch has spent her professional career at the NRC.
Current NRC environmental psychology research topics include evacuation from
emergency situations, how to use energy-efficient technologies in buildings to improve well-
being, and risk perception of indoor air quality hazards. The research is funded by a mixture
of funding from other government departments (federal, provincial and municipal),
contracts with business, and internal NRC sources. The results are reported to the funders,
published in journals, presented at conferences, and built into recommendations,
guidelines, standards and codes by participation in these decision-making processes.
ARCHITECTURAL AND SUSTAINABILITY CONSULTING
In recent years, some architects and design professionals have advocated the use of
evidence-based design. They strive to consider the best evidence from research and practice
and include the client, and in some cases social scientists, in making critical decisions about
each project (Hamilton & Watkins, 2009). Design professionals of health care facilities are
particularly keen on this idea. Enterprising individuals might find a career path by joining
such firms.
Even more enterprising individuals run their own consultancy companies. For example,
for many years, Ben Barkow has offered consultancy services akin to what Robert Sommer
called ‘social design’ through his firm in Toronto, Ontario. His team identifies and
communicates the needs of users to architects, designers, and developers before
construction, to ensure that a facility is suitable for its occupants and their purposes. Their
services have been used for new or high-tech workspaces, public facilities (e.g., stadiums,
concert halls, and parks), retail spaces, and many others.
On the sustainability side, Doug McKenzie-Mohr actively consults on fostering improved
management of natural resources through his community-based social marketing firm.
322 Environmental
Among his offerings are seminars that train individuals and organizations to use the
principles of applied psychology to increase sustainability.
Of course, one might choose to combine an academic career with one as a consultant.
Chapter author Robert Gifford has done this with his firm. Another author of this chapter,
Lindsay McCunn, also began working for an architectural programming firm during her
graduate studies in environmental psychology. She started her own firm soon after
becoming a professor of psychology at a university.
As noted in the introduction, projects that call for an environmental psychologist are
sometimes less theoretical and more practical and immediate. Depending on the project,
and what the data will be used for, the environmental psychologist decides whether to use
her expertise as a consultant to analyze data and provide recommendations through the firm
or to take the work further as a scholar and contribute to academic journals with a more
empirical approach.
For example, if an architecture firm asks for help to complete a post-occupancy evaluation
on buildings it has designed, but no data exists from before construction to statistically
compare how people think about or use the spaces after they have been built, that would
be a consulting project intended to determine how the building performs in the eyes of its
occupants. If meaningful comparison data exist, it might also be possible to take a more
scholarly approach from which to develop generalizable knowledge. Both career options
contribute to the body of knowledge in environmental psychology, but differ in the kinds of
relationships formed among team members, communities, and organizations, as well as the
ways in which a project’s results are communicated.
EDUCATION AND TRAINING
As with all forms of applied psychology, undergraduate and graduate training are
necessary to become an environmental psychologist. At the undergraduate level, a course
in environmental psychology is very desirable. The name of the course might vary slightly:
The obvious name is Environmental Psychology, but it might be called Environmental
Problems or Psychology for Design, or something similar. Instructors’ backgrounds and
interests will influence how much emphasis they place on spatial cognition, human factors,
social psychology, behaviour modification, and so on. However, one need not be overly
concerned if one’s college or university does not offer such a course because most graduate
program supervisors are aware that students are often unable to take an undergraduate
environmental psychology course. In any case, consider taking related courses such as urban
geography, environmental sociology, introductory architecture, urban planning, human
ecology, organizational behaviour, engineering, or environmental studies. Often, new
graduate students take the environmental psychology course in their new school.
For graduate school, you will need good-to-excellent grades for entry into competitive
psychology programs (and you must meet various other requirements, such as the Graduate
Record Exam, depending on the school). Examine each school’s website for program
requirements and resources and consider the interests of individual professors to find the
best match with your own interests. Check out the environmental psychology brochure at
https://tinyurl.com/BookletEP for a list of prominent environmental psychology professors
and their research interests.
You also need to decide what sort of program suits your interests. A few graduate schools
offer full programs in environmental psychology; that is, an entire set of prescribed courses,
including several faculty members who specialize in environmental psychology or closely
related disciplines, and classes with at least several other students. Many other graduate
schools have only one or two faculty members who specialize in environmental psychology.
In these schools, you and your supervisor design the “program” (courses to take, projects to
complete, etc.) to suit your interests and needs. The few other graduate students with your
interests are likely to be at different stages of their degree programs.
Both types of programs have their relative advantages. In a full program, one has the
opportunity to gain from the expertise of several professors and numerous like-minded
students. The individualized program offers more personalized education and may be the
only way to study with that certain professor who was recommended to you, or whose work
you admire.
Whether you enter a full or an individualized program, you will be in class for less
time per week than in your undergraduate years, but you will do much more reading and
research on your own. You will have a supervisor and a committee of two or three other
faculty members who will officially monitor your progress. You will do major original pieces
of research under the committee’s guidance: these are the Master’s thesis and, later, if things
go well, a doctoral dissertation. You will also be encouraged to undertake additional research
projects, either together with your advisors or on your own, and to submit this work for
publication or presentation. This added experience will augment your skills and make you
a more attractive job candidate, even for applied positions, because it demonstrates the
breadth of your knowledge.
The oldest established environmental psychology program is at the Graduate Center of
the City University of New York, dating from 1968. Some of the top full programs around
the world include Colorado State University (USA), University of Surrey (UK), University
of Groningen (the Netherlands), Lund University (Sweden) and University of Victoria
(Individualized program).
Psychology departments that offer programs with some environmental psychology
content include the departments of psychology at Carleton University, Vancouver Island
University, and the University of Utah. A few architecture departments offer programs with
an environment-behaviour focus: Université Laval in Québec, and University of California
(Berkeley) and Georgia Institute of Technology in the United States. The Design and
Environmental Analysis group at Cornell University is a prominent interdisciplinary
graduate program. For a full list of programmes around the world, see the Resources section
at the end of this chapter.
To prepare yourself for a non-academic career, try to gain relevant experience. If you
can, take a work term as a co-op or summer student in a non-academic setting to learn
first-hand about your career options. You might find opportunities to conduct an applied
project or two in collaboration with officials at various levels of government, architecture
and engineering firms, municipal urban planning departments, housing authorities, or non-
profit organizations that focus on environmental issues.
These relationships offer opportunities to hone your skills in presenting to a general
audience, writing a proposal for government officials, and working with researchers and
specialists from multiple disciplines. Another strategy is to search out opportunities to sit
on committees to get a sense of your local government’s leadership structure and get to
know “who’s who” in your area. Finally, strong skills in social scientific writing, research
324 Environmental
design, and statistics are important. Very likely, you will not work with colleagues with whom
you can consult on these matters when you are the only environmental psychologist in an
organization or on a project team.
CONCLUSION
Environmental psychology is a small field within the larger discipline of psychology, but
its scope is broad and includes some of the most important problems that challenge humans
in our time. If your career goal is to work with others to make a positive difference in the
world, this may be the field for you. Indeed, there is no shortage of topics and problems that
await your attention. As a recent major review of the field was titled, environmental psychology
matters (Gifford, 2014).
ADDITIONAL RESOURCES
Suggested Readings
Clayton, S. D. (Ed.) (2012). The Oxford handbook of environmental and conservation psychology.
New York: Oxford.
Gifford, R. (2014). Environmental psychology: Principles and practice (5th ed.). Colville WA:
Optimal Books.
Gifford, R. (2014). Environmental psychology matters. Annual Review of Psychology, 65,
541-580.
Gifford, R. (Ed.) (2016). Research methods in environmental psychology. Wiley-Blackwell.
Sommer, R. (1983). Social design: Creating buildings with people in mind. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice Hall.
Steg, L., & de Groot, J. I. M. (Eds.) (2019). Environmental psychology: An introduction (2nd ed.).
New York: Wiley.
SCHOLARLY JOURNALS
• The Journal of Environmental Psychology (the major journal in the field):

http://www.journals.elsevier.com/journal-of-environmental-psychology
• Environment and Behavior: http://journals.sagepub.com/home/eab
GRADUATE PROGRAMS
• Graduate Programs in Environmental and Conservation Psychology. (2017). Retrieved

April 15, 2018, from http://www.apadivisions.org/division-34/about/resources/
graduate-programs.aspx
CAREER RESOURCES AND OVERVIEWS
• https://tinyurl.com/BookletEP
• https://www.environmentalscience.org/career/environmental-psychologist (US)
• https://careersinpsychology.org/degree/environmental-psychology/
• http://www.eco.ca/career-profiles/environmental-psychologist/
PROFESSIONAL ORGANIZATIONS
• International Association of Applied Psychology (IAAP), Division of Environmental

Psychology (Global) https://iaapsy.org/divisions/division4/
• International Association for People-Environment Studies (IAPS) www.iaps-
association.org
• American Psychological Association (APA) Division 34: Environmental, Population and
Conservation Psychology www.apadivisions.org/division-34/
• Environmental Design Research Association (EDRA) www.edra.org
• Fachgruppe Umweltpsychologie (DGPS) (Germany) http://fachgruppe-
umweltpsychologie.de/
• Association pour la Recherche en Psychologie Environmentale (ARPENV) (France)
http://arpenv.weebly.com/
• Canadian Psychological Association, Section on Environmental Psychology (CPA)
www.cpa.ca/aboutcpa/cpasections/environmentalpsychology/
• Man-Environment Relations Association (MERA) ( Japan) www.mera-web.jp
• The Environmental Psychologists Global Census: A list of around 1000 researchers who
identify partly or wholly as environmental psychologists. Check out their location and
interests at http://web.uvic.ca/~epcensus/page1.html
REFERENCES
Altman, I. (1975). The environment and social behaviour: Privacy, personal space, territoriality, and
crowding. Monterey, CA: Brooks Cole.
Andrade, C. C., Devlin, A. S., Pereira, C.R., & Lima, M. L. (2017). Do the hospital rooms
make a difference for patients’ stress? A multilevel analysis of the role of perceived control,
positive distraction, and social support. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 53, 63-72.
Appleyard, D. (1976). Planning a pluralistic city. Cambridge, MA: Massachusetts Institute of
Technology Press.
Arneill, A. B., & Devlin, A. S. (2002). Perceived quality of care: The influence of the waiting
room environment. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 22(4), 345-360.
Barker, R. G. (1968). Ecological psychology: Concepts and methods for studying the environment of
human behaviour. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
Billig, M., (2006). Is my home me castle? Place attachment, risk perception, and religious
faith. Environment and Behavior, 38, 248-265.
Bitgood, S. (2011). Social design in museums: The psychology of visitor studies. Edinburgh, UK:
MuseumsEtc.
Brill, M., Margulis, S. T., Konar, E., & BOSTI Associates (Eds.). (1984). Using office design to
increase productivity. Buffalo, NY: Workplace Design and Productivity.
Brunswick, E. (1943). Organismic achievement and environmental probability. Psychological
Review, 50, 255-272.
326 Environmental
Canter, D., & Larkin, P. (1993). The environmental range of serial rapists. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 13, 63–70.
Carpman, J. R., Grant, M. A., & Simmons, D. A. (1983). Wayfinding in the hospital
environment: The impact of various floor numbering alternatives. Journal of Environmental
Systems, 13, 353–364.
Cornell, E., H., & Hill, K. A. (2006). The problem of lost children. In C. Spencer & M. Blades
(Eds.), Children and their environments: Learning, using and designing spaces (pp. 26-41). New
York, NY: Cambridge University Press.
Cosco, N. G., Moore, R. C., & Islam, M. Z. (2010). Behaviour mapping: A method for linking
preschool physical activity and outdoor design. Medicine & Science in Sports & Exercise, 42,
513-519.
Cosma, G., Ronchi, E., & Nilsson, D. (2016). Way-finding lighting systems for rail tunnel
evacuation: A virtual reality experiment with Oculus Rift®. Journal of Transportation Safety
& Security, 8(1), 101–117. https://doi.org/10.1080/19439962.2015.1046621.
Devlin, A. S. (2014). Transforming the doctor’s office: Principles from evidence-based design. New
York, NY: Routledge.
Evans, G. W., Becker, F. D., Zahn, A., Bilotta, E., & Keesee, A. M. (2012). Capturing the
ecology of workplace stress with cumulative risk assessment. Environment and Behaviour,
44(1), 136-154.
Gifford, E., & Gifford, R. (2016). The largely unacknowledged impact of climate change on
mental health. Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists, 72, 292-297.
Gifford, R. (2002). Making a difference: Some ways that environmental psychology has made
a difference. In R. Bechtel & A. Churchman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental psychology (2nd
ed., pp. 323-334). New York, NY: Wiley.
Gifford, R. (2011). The dragons of inaction: Psychological barriers that limit climate change
mitigation and adaptation. American Psychologist, 66, 290-302.
Gifford, R. (2014). Environmental psychology matters. Annual Review of Psychology, 65,
541-579.
Gifford, R. (Ed.). (2016). Research methods for environmental psychology. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley-
Blackwell.
Gifford, R., Hine, D. W., Muller-Clemm, W., & Shaw, K. T. (2000). Decoding modern
architecture: Understanding the aesthetic differences of architects and laypersons.
Environment and Behavior, 32, 163-187.
Gifford, R., & Lacombe, C. (2006). The habitability of spacecraft: Assessments of a virtual reality
simulation of the ISS across cultural, personality, and individual differences. Unpublished report
for the Canadian Space Agency, Longueuil, QC.
Hamilton, D., & Watkins, D. (2009). Evidence-based design for multiple building types. New York,
NY: Wiley.
Hartig, T., Evans, G. W., Jamner, L. D., Davis, D. S., & Gärling, T. (2003). Tracking restoration
in natural and urban field settings. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23, 109–123.
https://doi.org/10.1016/S0272-4944(02)00109-3
Heth, C. D., & Cornell, E. H. (1998). Characteristics of travel by persons lost in Albertan
wilderness areas. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 18, 223–235.
Kobes, M., Helsloot, I., de Vries, B., Post, J. G., Oberijé, N., & Groenewegen, K. (2009). Way
finding during fire evacuation; an analysis of unannounced fire drills in a hotel at night.
Building and Environment, 45, 537–548.
Kormos, C. (2016). Personal, interpersonal, and contextual influences on consumer preferences for
plug-in electric vehicles: A mixed-methods and interdisciplinary approach. (Doctoral dissertation,
University of Victoria, Victoria, BC). Retrieved from
https://dspace.library.uvic.ca//handle/1828/7247
Lacroix, K., Gifford, R., & Chen, A. (2019). Developing and validating the Dragons of Inaction
Psychological Barriers (DIPB) scale. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 63, 9–18.
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jenvp.2019.03.001
Ledingham, J. E. (1998). How playgrounds affect children’s behaviour. Canadian Journal of
Research in Early Childhood Education, 6, 353-356.
Lewicka, M. (2011). Place attachment: How far have we come in the last 40 years? Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 31, 207–230.
Lewin, K. (1946). Behavior and development as a function of the total situation. In L.
Carmichael (Ed.), Manual of child psychology (pp. 791-844). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons
Inc. http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/10756-016
Maxwell, L.E., Mitchell, M.R., & Evans, G.W. (2008). Effects of play equipment and loose
parts on preschool children’s outdoor play behaviour: An observational study and design
intervention. Children, Youth and Environment, 18, 36-63.
McCunn, L. J., & Gifford, R. (2012). Do green offices affect employee engagement and
environmental attitudes? Architectural Science Review, 55, 128-134.
McCunn, L. J., & Gifford, R. (2014). Interrelations between sense of place, organizational
commitment, and green neighborhoods. Cities, 41, 20-29.
McCunn, L. J., & Gifford, R. (2015). Teachers’ reactions to learning commons in secondary
schools. Journal of Library Administration, 55, 435-358. https://doi.org/10.1080/
01930826.2015.1054760
McCunn, L. J., & Gifford, R. (2017). Spatial navigation and place imageability in sense of
place. Cities, 74, 208-218.
Mehrabian, A., & Russell, J. A. (1974). An approach to environmental psychology. Cambridge, MA:
MIT Press.
Michon, R., Chebat, J-C., & Turley, L. W. (2005). Mall atmospherics: The interaction effects
of the mall environment on shopping behaviour. Journal of Business Research, 58, 576-583.
Milke, D. L., Beck, C. H., Danes, S., & Leask, J. (2009). Behaviour mapping of residents’
activity in five residential style care centres for elderly persons diagnosed with dementia:
Small differences in sites can affect behaviours. Journal of Housing for the Elderly, 23,
335-367.
Newsham, G. R., Birt, B. J., Arsenault, C. D., Thompson, A. J. L., Veitch, J. A., Mancini, S., …
Burns, G. J. (2013). Do ‘green’ buildings have better indoor environments? New evidence.
Building Research & Information, 41, 415-434.
Nisbet, E. K., Zelenski, J. M., & Murphy, S. A. (2009). The nature relatedness scale: Linking
individuals’ connection with nature to environmental concern and behavior. Environment
and Behavior, 41, 715-740. https://doi.org/10.1177/0013916508318748
Osmond, H. (1957). Function as the basis of psychiatric ward design. Psychiatric Services, 8(4),
23-30. https://doi.org/10.1176/ps.8.4.23
Otto, S., Kaiser, F. G., & Arnold, O. (2014). The critical challenge of climate change for
psychology: Preventing rebound and promoting more individual irrationality. European
Psychologist, 19, 96–106.
328 Environmental
Proshansky, H. M., Ittelson, W. H., & Rivlin, L. G. (Eds.). (1970). Environmental psychology: Man
and his physical setting. New York: Holt, Rinehart, & Winston.
Reizenstein, J. E. (1982). Hospital design and human behavior: A review of the recent
literature. In A. Baum & J. E. Singer (Eds.), Advances in environmental psychology: Vol. 4,
Environmental health. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Santarius, T., & Soland, M. (2018). How technological efficiency improvements change
consumer preferences: Towards a psychological theory of rebound effects. Ecological
Economics, 146, 414-424.
Scannell, L., & Gifford, R. (2010). Defining place attachment: A tripartite organizing
framework. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 1–10. https://doi.org/10.1016/
j.jenvp.2009.09.006
Scannell, L., Hodgson, M., Jorge, G. M., & Gifford, R. (2016). The role of acoustics in the
perceived suitability of, and well-being in, informal learning spaces. Environment &
Behaviour, 48, 769-795.
Schultz, W. P. (2001). The structure of environmental concern: concern for self, other
people, and the biosphere. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 21, 327–339. https://doi.org/
10.1006/jevp.2001.0227
Sommer, R. (1969). Personal space: The behavioural basis of design. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall.
Sommer, R. (1983). Social design. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Sommer, R., & Olsen, H. (1980). The soft classroom. Environment and Behaviour, 12, 3–16.
Steg, L., Perlaviciute, G., van der Werff, E., & Lurvink, J. (2014). The significance of hedonic
values for environmentally relevant attitudes, preferences, and actions. Environment and
Behaviour, 46, 163-192. https://doi.org/10.1177/0013916512454730
Steg, L., & Vlek, C. (2009). Encouraging pro-environmental behaviour: An integrative review
and research agenda. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 29, 309–317. https://doi.org/
10.1016/j.jenvp.2008.10.004
Stern, P. C., & Gardner, G. T. (1981). Psychological research and energy policy. American
Psychologist, 36, 329-342.
Stokes, D. E. (1997). Pasteur’s quadrant – Basic science and technological innovation. Washington,
DC: Brookings Institution Press.
Stokols, D. (2018). Social ecology in the Digital Age: Solving complex problems in a globalized world.
Cambridge, MA: Academic Press.
Suedfeld, P. (1991). Polar psychology: An overview. Environment and Behaviour, 23, 653-665.
Suedfeld, P., & Steel, G. D. (2000). The environmental psychology of capsule habitats. Annual
Review of Psychology, 51, 227-253.
Sundstrom, E. (1987). Work environments: Offices and factories. In D. Stokols & I. Altman
(Eds.), Handbook of Environmental Psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 733-782). New York, NY: Wiley.
Swim, J. K., Stern, P. C., Doherty, T., Clayton, S., Reser, J. P., Weber, E. U., … Howard, G. S.
(2011). Psychology’s contributions to understanding and addressing global climate change
mitigation and adaptation. American Psychologist, 66, 241-250.
U.S. Green Buildings Council (USGBC). (2018). How LEED rating systems are developed.
Retrieved from https://www.usgbc.org/articles/how-leed-rating-systems-are-developed
Veitch, J. A. (2012). Work environments. In S. D. Clayton (Ed.), The Oxford Handbook of
Environmental and Conservation Psychology (pp. 248-275). Oxford, UK: Oxford.
Veitch, J. A., Newsham, G. R., Boyce, P. R., & Jones, C. C. (2008). Lighting appraisal, well-
being, and performance in open-plan offices: A linked mechanisms approach. Lighting

Research and Technology, 40, 133-151.
Weber, E. U. (2013). Doing the right thing willingly using the insights of behavioral decision
research for better environmental decisions. In E. Shafir (Ed.), The Behavioral foundations of
public policy (pp. 380-397). Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
Wells, N. M., & Evans, G. W. (2003). Nearby nature: A buffer of life stress among rural
children. Environment and Behavior, 35, 311-330.
Wells, N. M., Evans, G. W., & Yang, Y. (2010). Environments and health: Planning decisions
as public-health decisions. Journal of Architectural and Planning Research, 27, 124-143.
Wener, R. E. (2012). The environmental psychology of prisons and jails: Creating humane spaces in
secure settings. New York, NY: Cambridge.
Whitmarsh, L., & O’Neill, S. (2010). Green identity, green living? The role of pro-
environmental self-identity in determining consistency across diverse pro-environmental
behaviours. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 305–314. https://doi.org/10.1016/
j.jenvp.2010.01.003
Wilson, J., & Wright, P. (2009). Head-mounted display efficacy study to aid first responder
indoor navigation. Proceedings of the Institution of Mechanical Engineers, Part C: Journal of
Mechanical Engineering Science, 23, 675–688. https://doi.org/10.1243/09544062JMES1213
Wong, C. Y., Sommer, R., & Cook, R. (1992). The soft classroom 17 years later. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 12, 337-343.
Zeisel, J. (2006). Inquiry by design: Environment/behaviour/neuroscience in architecture, interiors,
landscapes, and planning (Revised ed.). New York, NY: W. W. Norton.

Ng, C. F., Gifford, R., Veitch, J. A., & McCunn, L. J. (2019). Environmental psychology. In
M. E. Norris (Ed.), The Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science. Kingston,
ON: eCampus Ontario. Licensed under CC BY NC 4.0. Retrieved from
https://ecampusontario.pressbooks.pub/psychologycareers/chapter/environmental-
psychology/
[14]
APPLICATIONS AND CAREERS IN COMMUNITY

PSYCHOLOGY: PRACTICING IN SETTINGS, SYSTEMS,
AND COMMUNITIES TO BUILD WELL-BEING AND
PROMOTE SOCIAL JUSTICE
Liesette Brunson, Ph.D., Associate Professor, Département de psychologie, Université du

Québec à Montréal
Alexis Gilmer, M.A., Doctoral Candidate, School Of Public Health And Health Systems,
University of Waterloo and Department of Psychology, Wilfrid Laurier University
Colleen Loomis, Associate Professor, Balsillie School of International Affairs and Wilfrid
Laurier University
Community psychology (CP) bases its action on the recognition that individuals’
development, psychological functioning, and mental health are profoundly affected by their
physical, social, cultural, political, and economic contexts (Hakim, 2010, Jason & O’Brien,
2018; McMahon, Jimenez, Bond, Wolfe, & Ratcliffe, 2015; Wolff, 2014). This chapter presents
CP applications and careers in two sections. The first section provides an overview of
important areas of intervention and practice in CP, starting with a brief history of the
field, an introduction to its typical research methods, and highlights of significant scholarly
findings. The second section presents a model of CP practice and describes career and
training opportunities in CP.
1
INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNITY PSYCHOLOGY
WHAT IS COMMUNITY PSYCHOLOGY?
CP is concerned with individuals and their immediate interpersonal context and links
1. We thank Tom Wolff, Elizabeth Thomas and Cynthia Moore for their comments on early
drafts of this chapter.
330
their well-being to broader social structures and dynamics (Arcidiacono 2017; Moane, 2003).
Rooted in a scientific and empirical approach to understanding the world, CP uses the
research process as well as scientific knowledge and intervention strategies to create social
change and improve well‐being at the individual, organizational, and community levels
(Neigher, Ratcliffe, Wolff, Elias, & Hakim, 2011). CP draws attention to the importance of
diversity, inclusion, and economic and social equity and highlights the power of preventing
problems as well as treating them ( Julian, 2006; Wolff et al., 2017). CP contributes to
psychology in general by proposing a critical analysis of the social context that affects human
well-being and highlighting the importance of working in partnership with the people
most affected by social problems. Community psychologists analyse and intervene at the
interface between individual and social factors, focus on complexity and systems, and hold
prevention, advocacy, social justice, and systems change as core concerns (Arcidiacono, 2017;
Dzidic, Breen & Bishop, 2013; Evans, Duckett, Lawthorn, & Kivell, 2017; Prilletensky, 1997;
Rappaport, 1981).
Although the emphasis on social contexts is not unique to the discipline, CP is ultimately
concerned about the effects of social context on human well-being, development and
functioning, rather than on describing social and cultural systems for their own sake. CP
is also distinguished by theoretical frameworks that emphasize aspects often neglected in
more individualized approaches to human problems ( Jason, Stevens, Ram, Miller, Beasley,
& Gleason, 2016; Stein, 2007), such as ecological analysis (Bronfenbrenner, 1979; Hawe, 2017;
Kelly, 1986; Neal, 2016), historical-material analysis (Montero, Sonn, & Burton, 2017), and
social determinants of health (Montero, 2012). Certain values-based frames of analysis also
tend to characterise the field and nourish its practice (Evans et al., 2017; Montero et al., 2017;
Rappaport, 1981; Wolff et al., 2017). Diverse as they are, these theoretical and value-based
frames of analysis provide conceptual tools for understanding social actors, their activities
and positionality, and the patterns and determinants of constraints and opportunities that
surround them and shape their possibilities.
Thus, the distinctive nature of CP is probably best characterised in terms of its unique
constellation of principles, goals and values, frames of analysis, and methods for change.
While the particular constellation and composition of these elements varies across
countries and cultures (Francescato & Zani, 2013; Lykes, Terreblanche, & Hamber, 2013;
Wolfe, Scott & Jimenez, 2013), community psychologists globally are unified by the goal of
promoting well-being by working at the interface between people and their social contexts.
A BRIEF HISTORY OF COMMUNITY PSYCHOLOGY
CP emerged as a discipline across the globe throughout the mid-1900s, largely in response
to political turmoil, skepticism regarding the dominant views of psychology, movements
for social change, and a transformation of the mental health care system in many countries
(Nelson, Lavoie, & Mitchell, 2007). Though in some countries CP is still relatively emergent,
other regions have seen immense growth and development in the field since the 1970s
(Reich, Riemer, Prilleltensky, & Montero, 2007).
In Canada, events that led to the emergence of CP include the community health
movement, alternatives to institutionalization, and a focus on prevention (Nelson, et al.,
2007). Though the birth of the field of CP is often linked to the 1965 Swampscott Conference
in the U.S., Pols (2000) links the birth of Canadian CP to the mid-1920s and Edward Bott,
332 Community
the first chair of the psychology department at the University of Toronto, who with William
Line and colleagues developed school- and community-based prevention projects (Nelson,
Ochocka, Janzen, Trainor, Goering, & Lomoteyet al., 2007). Line was the first to use the term
community psychology while discussing primary prevention in the 1951 Royal Commission
Report (Babarik, 1979). In the 1970s and 1980s, CP programs were established in several
Canadian universities. Wilfrid Laurier University and the Université du Québec à Montréal
started the first Canadian masters and doctoral programs, respectively, and the University of
Manitoba assembled a national CP network, which led to the creation of the CP section of
the Canadian Psychological Association in 1982 (Nelson, et al., 2007). In that same year, the
Canadian Journal of Community Mental Health was created and allowed for interdisciplinary
communication and cooperation concerning the promotion of community mental health
(Walsh-Bowers, 1998). In the early 2000s, doctoral programs were developed at Laval
University and Wilfrid Laurier University, further expanding the field in the academic realm
(Aubry, Sylvestre, & Ecker, 2010). A wide range of focus areas is studied within CP, with
recent social issues within the Canadian context demanding attention, such as the increasing
demand for mental health services, integration for newcomers to Canada, housing security,
and the social dismissal of Indigenous peoples (Nelson & Aubry, 2010).
METHODS IN COMMUNITY PSYCHOLOGY
Research methods in CP are both similar to and different from other fields such as social,
clinical, and developmental psychology. Research is conducted using quasi-experimental,
correlational, qualitative and longitudinal studies with interviews, self- or other surveys,
reports, and observations. CP also uses case study, ethnographic, and phenomenological
methods typical of disciplines such as sociology, economics, political science, and public
health. Given that psychology students are typically introduced to the analysis of
quantitative data early in their studies, many CP instructors emphasise qualitative and
mixed methods in order to prepare students for the varied research approaches that are
used to accomplish the twin goals of action and research. To conduct action-oriented
research, additional methods include program evaluation, assets and needs assessment,
and community-based participatory action research (CBPAR). CBPAR, for example, is a
collaborative approach to research that involves community members directly affected by
the problem being studied in all phases of a research project, from the definition of the
initial research questions to the analysis of data, development of recommendations and
diffusion of results. CBPAR begins from the concerns expressed by a particular community
and uses research to support changes desired by the community (Burns, Cook, & Schweidler,
2011). These change-oriented research strategies realize the call by Martín-Baró for
psychology research to reveal what “needs to be done” (1994, p. 6) by researching the
process of change. Although there are many ways to examine change, the key to community
research is to investigate how a community-driven effort impacts what that community has
decided needs to be changed.
The choice of appropriate methods to be used in CP depends on the research questions
and the researcher’s knowledge of many methods as well as personal values. As Campbell
(2010) pointed out, when methods drive the research process, the questions must fit within
the boundaries of what the method can address. However, when the research questions
drive the research process, methods can be selected, modified or combined based on their
ability to provide answers. Community psychologists need to be well-informed about

various methodological options in order to avoid letting the method drive the question.
Campbell concludes by reminding us, “By letting our research questions develop without
the constraints of methods, and by allowing our values to have a voice in the research
process, we can figure out what is right – for a given context” (Campbell, pp. 308-310).
A critical part of community research is developing the ability to communicate in multiple
ways to different audiences to stimulate change. Methods for sharing research findings
include oral presentations to research participants and professionals at conferences,
publications in academic journals, reporting in policy briefs, workshops, interactive
websites, and other interactive methods of knowledge exchange. Researchers have also
developed and tested a method for evaluating the impact of knowledge mobilisation efforts
(e.g., Hayward, Loomis, Nelson, Pancer, & Peters, 2011; Worton, Loomis, Pancer, Nelson, &
Peters, 2017).
SIGNIFICANT SCHOLARLY FINDINGS
CP has contributed a number of significant findings to psychology and social science

knowledge and practice; a comprehensive overview is available in Bond, Serrano-Garcia,
Keys, and Shinn (2017a, 2017b). Here we highlight CP’s contributions to two significant
research and practice movements: the community mental health movement and the current
focus on prevention and health promotion.
Community mental health.
Until the mid-1900s, many individuals with mental illnesses were confined to psychiatric
hospitals that were typically ineffective, dehumanizing, and unsanitary (Nelson, Kloos, &
Ornelas, 2014). The deinstitutionalization movement within Canada began in the 1960s,
resulting from limited funding for psychiatric hospitals as well as growing pressure for
human rights and effective treatment within the community (Nelson, 2006). This
movement led to many previously institutionalized individuals being released into the
community even though few services were available to support individuals through this
transition (Nelson, et al., 2014). Many of these individuals faced additional stressors upon
release from psychiatric institutions, including unemployment, homelessness, poverty,
discrimination, social isolation and a lack of psychosocial support, thus illustrating how
mental illness often occurred in combination with other social issues not necessarily
addressed by typical psychiatric treatment (Nelson, Kloos, & Ornelas).
Deinstitutionalization forced a shift in focus from the institutional-medical model to a
community treatment approach. This shift resulted in the emergence of alternatives to
psychiatric hospitalization (e.g., assertive community treatment, supportive housing, healing
lodges, case management) and alternative types and views of support, such as consumer/
survivor initiatives, and self-help groups (Nelson, Lord, & Ochoka, 2001).
This drastic change in mental health reform created a movement towards community
mental health. Community mental health aligns with core CP values in examining the
social, economic, and cultural factors influencing and maintaining mental illness (Fortin-
Pellerin, Pouliot-Lapointe, Thibodeau, & Gagne, 2007). Community psychologists have
continued to work in community settings to improve well-being and mental health among
334 Community
populations since the overhaul of psychiatric institutions in the mid-1900s. For example,
Canada was the first country to hold a self-help conference (Lavoie, Borkman, & Gidron,
1992). Just over a decade later, a longitudinal participatory action research evaluation of
consumer-run self-help organizations found significant reductions of symptom distress,
and significant improvements in quality of life, community integration, and employment
among members of the self-help organizations compared to non-members (Nelson,
Ochocka, et al., 2007).
Extensive research supports the adoption of the Pathways to Housing First (HF) model in
the At Home/Chez Soi demonstration project as one of the most remarkable and effective
community mental health initiatives in Canada (Tsemberis, 1999; Tsemberis, Gulcur, &
Nakae, 2004) . For individuals with a mental health diagnosis who are experiencing
homelessness, At Home provides housing first and treatment second, rather than the inverse
order that was ineffective in improving well-being (Aubry et al., 2016). The HF model
involves providing choice over housing options, allowing a sense of agency and
independence to participants, who are often referred to as consumers rather than clients
to emphasise their agentic role in relation to their housing transitions (Nelson, Stefancic,
et al., 2014). Individuals with serious mental illnesses experience unstable housing at a
more prevailing rate than those without mental illness; thus, neighbourhood and housing
environments are particularly important for this sample of the population (Kloos & Shah,
2009). Promising findings have emerged from evaluations of At Home/Chez Soi, including
longer times spent in stable housing and higher ratings of quality of housing among
individuals assigned to HF compared to participants in the treatment-as-usual condition,
who had access to existing housing and support services within their communities (Aubry
et al., 2016). Additionally, participants in the HF condition reported a higher quality of
life and were assessed as having better community functioning than the treatment-as-usual
condition (Aubry et al.). Further, participants receiving HF with previous criminal activity
have shown a more significant reduction in new criminal offences post-intervention in
comparison to those in the treatment as usual condition (Somers, Rezansoff, Moniruzzaman,
Palepu, & Patterson, 2013).
Prevention and promotion.
CP has contributed significantly to highlighting the importance of prevention and health

promotion as a complement to treatment. Caplan (1961) highlighted three types of
prevention. Primary (universal) prevention targets entire populations to lower the rates
of new cases of disorders; secondary (selective) prevention targets populations at risk of
developing a disease or disorder, and tertiary (indicated) prevention targets populations who
already have a disorder and focuses on lowering the intensity or duration of the disorder.
Dramatic increases in prevention awareness and efforts have taken place since the 1960s
(Dalton, Elias, & Wandersman, 2007). Although prevention infuses and informs a number
of disciplines, many authors highlight the contributions of early community psychologists
to applying public health approaches to physical health to promoting the importance of a
prevention focus in mental health.
One prevention program in Canada is Better Beginnings, Better Futures (BBBF), a research
demonstration project for children and their families in disadvantaged communities. BBBF
was initiated by the Ontario provincial government to address the limitations of other early
childhood programming including a narrow focus on the child with little to no regard for
the impact of familial and community contexts (Gottlieb & Russell, 1989). BBBF engages
residents in the creation and implementation of programs to address specific community
needs to achieve three overarching goals: the promotion of well-being and healthy child
development, the prevention of developmental problems, and the promotion of
community development (Gottlieb & Russell). Evaluation research has shown significant
changes in children, families, and communities. For example, at grade 12, youth who
participated in BBBF had higher average grades, a higher proportion of involvement in
regular exercise, and a lower proportion of special education service use, and lower rates
of criminal behaviours than the comparison communities (Peters, et al., 2010). At the
community level, significant improvements were seen in parental involvement in
neighbourhood activities, greater use of both health and social services within the
community, a strong sense of community involvement, neighbourhood satisfaction, and
neighbourhood cohesion within the BBBF intervention group (Pancer, Nelson, Hasford, &
Loomis, 2012), and greater neighbourhood attachment (Hasford, Loomis, Nelson, & Pancer,
2013). Cost-savings analysis indicated a return of $2.50 CDN for every $1.00 CDN the
provincial government invested, mostly due to decreased use of special education services,
social assistance, and disability support programming (Peters, et al., 2016).
Another significant prevention program involved the emergence of the first safer injection
facility (SIF) in North America, Insite, located in Vancouver, BC (Kerr, MacPherson, & Wood,
2008). SIFs allow space for injection drug users to use pre-obtained illicit drugs in the
presence of healthcare staff who may intervene in the case of overdose (Kerr et al.). Insite
opened in September 2003, mainly in response to the HIV epidemic and increasing rates
of overdose appearing in the downtown east side of Vancouver (Kerr et al.). In response to
community concerns regarding the risk of increased drug activity and drug-related crime
upon the opening of Insite, Wood, Tyndall, Lai, Montanero, and Kerr (2006) conducted a
study. They examined crime rates the year before the opening of the SIF compared to the
year post-opening and found no significant increases in drug trafficking, assault, or robbery
and a significant decrease in cases of vehicle break-ins and theft. SIFs are an example of a
successful prevention effort at the tertiary level, in that they are aimed at decreasing the risk
of infection and overdose associated with injection drug use. Since 2016, SIFs have been
approved in Alberta, British Columbia, Ontario, and Quebec (Government of Canada, 2018).
CAREERS IN COMMUNITY PSYCHOLOGY: ACTIVITIES, JOB TITLES & TRAINING
A MODEL OF CP PRACTICE: CORE WORK ACTIVITIES AND COMMON CP CHANGE

STRATEGIES
Recent years have seen a lively discussion about the particular expertise and professional
identity of community psychologists. CP practice has been described in many ways, such
as: (1) the goals that community psychologists seek to achieve; (2) the values, principles and
frames of analysis that typify the field; (3) the settings where community psychologists can
find work; (4) the skills, competencies and techniques typify CP practice; and (5) the personal
characteristics, beliefs and attitudes that individuals bring to their practice (Arcidiacono,
2017; Julian, 2006; Kelly, 1971; Society for Community Research and Action [SCRA], 2012).
Following Ramos (2007) and Lavoie & Brunson (2010), and inspired by a framework
336 Community
developed by Foucher and Leduc (2008), this chapter presents a model of CP practice
centered around six core work activities that community psychologists might participate in
across diverse settings, as well as diverse change strategies that they might use as they conduct
these activities (Figure 1). An activity-based approach seems consistent with CP’s emphasis
on settings and roles (Hawe, 2017; Seidman, 1988) and complements other descriptions of
practice in CP and other fields (Leach, 2008; Reeves, Fox, & Hodges, 2009). We stress that
these activities are not exclusive to CP and that the contribution of other professions, as
well as individuals and groups involved in change initiatives, should be recognized (Akhurst,
Kagan, Lawthorn, & Richards, 2016; Dzidic et al., 2013; Lavoie & Brunson, 2010). However,
community psychologists offer novel contributions to this work with their unique set of
training and skills, frames of analysis, and focus on ecological and systems factors. We
present this model of CP practice by first discussing the six proposed core CP work activities
and provide a brief overview of several typical CP change strategies (Table 1).
Figure 1: A Model of CP Practice: Core CP Work Activities and Common CP Change Strategies (Adapted from Lavoie, F., &
Brunson, L.,. La pratique de la psychologie communautaire. Canadian Psychology/Psychologie Canadienne, 51(2), 96–105,
2010, published by the American Psychological Association. Adapted with permission. APA is not responsible for the accuracy
of this translation.)
CORE CP WORK ACTIVITIES
Evaluate the Impact of Intervention Programs and Services.
A primary work activity for many community psychologists is to evaluate intervention

programs, services, and systems change efforts. The goal of these activities is to collect
information about the intervention’s intended and unintended effects; the processes by
which those effects are achieved; and possible avenues for improving the intervention.
Evaluation makes programs more accountable to stakeholders and funders and assists
decision-makers as they consider whether to maintain, expand or eliminate a program
338 Community
(Cook, 2014; Wolfe, et al., 2017). It can also be considered a strategy for effecting social
change and promoting social justice (Cook), with the goal of creating a more equitable, fair
and just distribution of resources, opportunities, and privileges within society.
Evaluation objectives can be varied and are often broadly categorized in terms of outcome
evaluations and process evaluations. The notion of outcome evaluation is probably most
familiar. This involves documenting the impact of an intervention in relation to its stated
objectives. Established, evidence-based programs may not always be successful in new
contexts or populations, so outcome evaluations help to determine local impact. Process
evaluation determines whether program components are actually being implemented as
planned and if not, what barriers such as time or resource constraints might be getting in the
way. Process evaluation can also address a program’s fit with its local context, for example
examining whether the program is actually diverting resources from other important
activities, whether it duplicates existing efforts, and whether it can be sustainable over time
(Wolfe, et al., 2017).
Community psychologists can play an important role in evaluation by carrying out
assessments in consultation with relevant stakeholders, providing training that enables
actors to appropriate techniques and the evaluation culture, and by developing the tools that
facilitate evaluation work. An integrated and sustained CP approach to program evaluation
over time might include conceptualizing the program’s theory of change; planning activities
and program components that have the best chance to produce desired changes; developing
and executing a systematic plan to implement and support the program at multiple levels;
ensuring the program fits local culture and context; evaluating whether the activities achieve
their desired effects, and finding ways to ensure the sustainability of the program over time
(Wolfe, et al., 2017). A CP approach to evaluation will also often include an analysis of benefits
at a systems or community level, above and beyond the effects of individual change (Hawe,
1994).
Develop, Implement and Manage Intervention Programs.
Community psychologists are often called upon to develop, implement and manage
intervention programs, especially those with prevention and health promotion goals (SCRA,
2012), and also programs for re-adaptation, crisis and trauma response, human resource
capacity building, and the implementation of coordinated systems of care (Cook & Kilmer,
2012; Lavoie & Brunson, 2010; van de Hoef, Sundar, Austin, & Dostaler, 2011).
To find an appropriate intervention program, it is sometimes more efficient to identify
an existing program and assess potential fit with the particular setting’s goals and resources.
In other cases, it is more appropriate to develop a program suited to the particular needs
and goals of the setting and compatible with existing resources, structures and practice. For
both existing and locally-developed programs, ensuring the continued success of a program
over time involves supervisory, management, and human resources activities, as well as
financial management, marketing and strategic planning (McMahon & Wolfe, 2017; SCRA,
2012). Implementing programs in a sustainable way in any local context involves issues of
fidelity to core program elements and fit and adaptation to the local context (Castro, Barrera,
& Martinez, 2004). It is vital to ensure a supportive organisational and community context
and organisational support for the program at multiple levels (Blanchet-Cohen & Brunson,
2010) and creating the conditions and processes that ensure that effective programs continue
to operate successfully and even expand their reach (Cook, 2014).
Community psychologists can organize a collaborative approach among multiple
community actors to identify stakeholder goals and assemble a meaningful and coherent
package of intervention activities. The dual role of community psychologists both as
researchers and as stakeholders make it possible to consider multiple perspectives and
values, identify models, distill the evidence base, and systematize the choice of objectives
and activities. Their training in developmental psychology also prepares them to consider
issues related to age (Lavoie & Brunson, 2010).
Build Capacity at Organizational and Community Levels.
CP practitioners frequently participate in organisational and community capacity

building activities aimed at developing links among citizens and organisations,
strengthening networks and communication, and aligning efforts and resources to
accomplish common goals (Wolff, 2010; Wolff et al., 2017). Some essential components
of this capacity-building process include the ability to identify and convene diverse
stakeholders; facilitate mutual trust; promote collaborative decision-making with authentic
buy-in from all stakeholders; and to work together to act in ways that surpass what an
individual actor would be able to do alone (Aspen Institute, 1996; Wolff).
At the organisational level, capacity building enhances the capacity of an organization
to attain its goals by introducing or improving organizational tools, policies, and processes
(SCRA, 2012). This work may involve helping an organisation to develop an organizational
vision, mission, and strategic plan; aligning stakeholders, resources, and organizational
processes around these priorities; building a communications strategy; promoting
organisational learning; or putting mechanisms in place to monitor efforts and results (Hawe
et al., 2000; Norton, McCleroy, Burdine, Felix, & Dorsey, 2002).
At the community level, capacity building fosters collaborative relationships and concrete
action among community members, groups, and organizations (SCRA, 2012). It may
involve helping community actors to define a shared vision and engaging, energizing and
mobilizing individuals and groups around an issue of shared importance (SCRA).
Grassroots community organizing involves working collaboratively with community
members to gain the power to improve the conditions affecting their community (SCRA;
Speer & Hughey, 1995). Community coalition building creates networks of organizational
and resident stakeholders who work together across organizational boundaries to address
a common issue (Allen, 2005; Foster-Fishman, Berkowitz, Lounsbury, Jacobson, & Allen,
2001; Francescato & Zani, 2017; Wolff et al., 2017).
Many other professions and disciplines recognize the importance of secure networks,
social capital and collaborative relationships. Community psychologists participate in and
foster these efforts, bringing among other things an awareness of social justice and equity
and the importance of involving people who are directly affected by the conditions being
addressed as well as those with relatively less power and voice (Rappaport, 1981; Wolff et
al., 2017). Community psychologists are particularly attuned to identifying and mobilising
existing strengths that exist, but which may be under-recognized or underutilised in the
community (Kelly, 1971). They are also knowledgeable about relevant research and practice
that may be taking place elsewhere and can suggest ideas that have been successful elsewhere
340 Community
(Dagenais, 2006; Lavoie & Brunson, 2010). A particular contribution of CP is the ability
to use participation processes , such as participatory action research, participatory arts
and theater, community forums, Delphi techniques, and small and large group facilitation
techniques, to promote co-construction of knowledge and a positive climate for change
efforts.
Analyse a Problematic Situation, System, or Practice.
The work of community psychologists sometimes involves making sense of an ambiguous

and problematic situation in order to identify the problem better, create a shared and
coherent understanding of the situation, and explore possible solutions. As Caplan & Nelson
(1973) pointed out many years ago, what is done about a problem depends on how it is
defined. If failure to obtain mental health care, for example, is defined in terms of individual
characteristics and problems, such as lack of information or insufficient motivation, then
person change intervention options are most logical and change efforts would likely focus
on public awareness campaigns to diffuse information or increasing individuals’ awareness
of the importance of care. If explanations are situation focused, for example, if lack of
access was attributed to a lack of providers, high treatment costs, duplication of effort, and
competition for resources and recognition, then system change in the form of mobile clinics
working with community organisations to offer low-cost care or coordinated efforts to create
interorganizational links would be a more logical solution (e.g., Lundburg, Ignatio, & Ramos,
2011; Wolff, 2014).
The analysis of a problem, a situation, a milieu, or practices consists of taking a critical,
analytical and contextualized look at a social issue or a social object such as a community
program, organization or institution. It may involve naming and documenting a little-
known problem and raising awareness about its existence. It might involve documenting
and exploring different viewpoints held by various stakeholders involved in the situation
( Juras, Mackin, Curtis, & Foster-Fishman, 1997). It could involve taking on the role of
“critical friend,” whereas a participant in the setting, the community psychologist tactfully
confronts ways of thinking or acting that serve to maintain the status quo (Evans, Brown, de
Schutter, & McGee, 2008). It helps to reveal how a group conceives a particular situation
and suggests levers for change that might be created by introducing new mental models of
the situation (Christens, Hanlin, & Speer, 2007).
Develop, Analyse and Advocate for Public Policy.
Community psychologists can be involved in efforts to influence public policy (Maton,

2016; Phillips, 2000). This type of work seeks to create change at the societal level by
targeting the policies that govern its institutions and how they operate, the distribution of
resources, and the structure of existing programs and services.
Community psychologists can play several public policy roles. They may provide
research-based information on social problems and their possible solutions or work to raise
awareness of an issue so that it becomes part of the political agenda. They can conduct
policy analysis, examining the various policy options that are available and determining
their actual or potential impact concerning a set of policy goals. They might participate in
policy advocacy to influence decision-making processes and advocate for specific policies
(Bouchard, 2001, 2010; McMahon & Wolfe, 2017; van de Hoef et al., 2011). Community
psychologists can collaborate within a community to encourage citizen participation in

policy-making or strengthen the capacity of institutional leaders to reach out to and listen
to their constituents (Brunson & Boileau, 2008; Chavis, 1993). Community psychologists
might work directly in the political system as a political attaché or policy staff (Phillips,
2000; van de Hoef et al., 2011), or even hold a position as an elected official or as a ministry-
level decision-maker (Bouchard, 2001, 2011; Starnes, 2004).
Becoming involved in politics and the political process is not always easy or comfortable
for psychologists, in part because of the contested nature of the political process (Bernier &
Clavier, 2011; Fafard, 2015; Phillips, 2000). The distinction between providing information
as a researcher versus acting as a lobbyist or political activist can be challenging to manage
(Bouchard, 2001; Francescato & Zani, 2017). Even when persuasive arguments are based on
a solid research base, it can be difficult to accept that scientific knowledge is only one element
among many in a political decision-making process (Bernier & Clavier; Bouchard; Fafard).
Although few CP training programs provide training on the process of public governance
(Phillips, 2000), community psychologists bring to this field a broad knowledge of topics
of interest to social policy planners (citizen participation, the influence of social networks,
exclusion, etc.) and a broad ecological analysis of phenomena, including exo and
macrosystem factors. They are skilled at building and sustaining working relationships and
effective communication with a variety of stakeholders, and can apply these skills with
policy makers, elected officials, governmental staff, and community leaders (SCRA, 2012).
Accompany and Participate in Social and Political Action.
CP typically works with disempowered groups in contexts that are constructed

economically, politically and historically and proposes structural and contextualized
understanding of these social situations. When these groups encounter social and economic
interests that differ from their own, the work inevitably enters into the realm of politics and
social action (Burton, Kagan & Duckett, 2012). Social action, defined as efforts to address
inequities of power and privilege between an oppressed group and society at large, is an
option for challenging these existing power relations in society (Le Bossé & Dufort, 2001;
Lykes et al., 2003; Moane, 2003; Rothman & Tropman, 1987).
Community psychologists may engage in explicitly political commitment as experts with
particular knowledge of the evidence base and the risks and harms involved in a particular
situation. They might work with community groups to organize a protest movement,
participate in a collective advocacy process, or conduct a grassroots community organizing
with a rights-based focus. They can help to maintain positive group dynamics, a valuable
contribution for small groups engaged in difficult campaigns (Burton, et al., 2012).
Taking a stand on social issues requires engaging in value debates and taking on political
issues. As with policy analysis and advocacy, there can be tensions between acting as a
practitioner/professional versus as a political activist (Lavoie & Brunson, 2010; Francescato
& Zani, 2017). Some resolution of this dilemma can be found when community
psychologists are also able to identify with a social movement as part of their civic and
personal identity and to recognize their own and others’ rights to act as fully enfranchised
members of civil society (Burton, et al., 2012; Dzidic et al., 2013).
342 Community
COMMON CP CHANGE STRATEGIES
Community psychologists use diverse strategies to promote change across different

activities and settings. Table 2 briefly highlights a number of change strategies typical to CP
practice that have been discussed in detail elsewhere (Bond et al., 2017b; Francescato & Zani,
2017; Lavoie & Brunson, 2010). Other strategies can certainly be added depending on the
area of specialization.
Table 1. Common CP Change Strategies
Strategy Type Description
Conscientisation Creates a group process in which social relations and collective action lead to
greater awareness of the social and political structures that limit and distribute
power in society, and the possibility for change (Franscescato & Zani, 2017; Mon-
tero 2012; Montero et al., 2017).
Alternative set- Seeks to move completely out of the current system and create a new resource,
tings challenging the established order instead of trying to change an existing service.
Some examples include mutual aid groups, cooperatives, social economy enter-
prises, counterspaces (Case & Hunter, 2012; Cherniss & Deegan, 2000;
Francescato & Zani 2017).
Knowledge Aims to reduce the gap between science and practice by involving practitioners
mobilisation and clients in creating knowledge and applying it in a particular context (Dagenais,
2006; Worton et al., 2017).
Applied Allows stakeholders to identify solutions to problems by gathering information,

research developing and testing hypotheses, crafting change processes adapted to a partic-
ular context, and evaluating their impact in that specific context (Juras et al., 1997;
van de Hoef et al., 2011).
Participation Seeks to understand and improve fair and diverse participation in work and life
settings. Participatory action research promotes social change and quality of life
for oppressed and exploited communities (Creswell, Hanson, Clark Plano, &
Morales, 2007; SCRA, 2012).
Community Aims to educate members of the community and promote healthy behaviour
education change related to using social marketing and public awareness campaigns (SCRA,
2012; Gagné, Lachance, Thomas, Brunson, & Clément, 2014).
Consultation Builds a collaborative process aimed at identifying and solving problems and iden-
tifying useful data and resources, takes place within the context of a specific man-
date given by a group, organisation or community. In CP, consultation is envisaged
as a tool for development and empowerment that often takes place in complex
systems involving many stakeholders (Laprise & Payette, 2001, Meyers, 2002).
Training, coach- Develops individual and groups’ abilities to work more effectively towards their
ing, mentoring goals and is especially effective when individual capacity building is supported by
tools and processes that provide continuing support. Training in such skills as
reflective practice or evaluation can be a crucial component in capacity building
efforts (Lavoie & Brunson, 2010; SCRA, 2012).
JOB SETTINGS AND TITLES
As McMahon and colleagues (2015) have aptly pointed out, few job ads announce that
they are looking for a community psychologist to fill the position! However, the training
and experience that community psychologists acquire through academic programs and
work experience typically equip them well to be employed in a wide variety of settings.
Given its interdisciplinary focus and collaborative traditions, CP graduates often contribute
their skills, knowledge and expertise to a specific problem area. This in fact creates a
dilemma for the field: While other disciplines such as public health and social work have
reserved job titles and a clear job market, Canadian CP does not currently have this level
of infrastructure in place. Thus, unlike other fields that draw people into institutional
structures that reinforce their professional identity, the “peculiar success” of CP has created
centripetal forces which tend to limit graduates’ opportunities to identify with the field on
an everyday level in their professional work (Neigher et al., 2011; Snowden, 1987). In this
way, CP may be a victim of its success in promoting collaborative, interdisciplinary and
power-sharing approaches to solving social problems and preparing its graduates for a wide
variety of careers. It can therefore be difficult to highlight the variety of contributions of
community psychologists.
Despite this dilemma, graduates of CP programs can be found working in many types of
settings, including academic settings, philanthropic organisations and private foundations,
health and human service agencies, municipal, regional, provincial and federal
governments; medical centers, public health settings, comprehensive community initiatives,
self-help groups, prevention organizations, community mental health centers, nonprofits,
schools, community-based organizations, advocacy groups, religious institutions, and
neighborhood groups. They work in organisations offering applied research, consultation
and evaluation services, and community development, architectural, planning, and
environmental firms. They may also be found in corporations or as researchers in
community organizations, universities, think tanks, or government agencies (McMahon &
Wolfe, 2017; Neigher et al., 2011; Wolff, 2014).
Community psychologists are well prepared to promote mental health and community
well-being in a variety of roles. Some relevant job titles might include (Hakim, 2010;
McMahon & Wolfe, 2017; Viola et al., 2017):
• community mental health worker
• grassroots organizer
• community development specialist or urban planner
• program or project director
• grant writer
• trainer
• director of a nonprofit or community-based organization
• research/evaluation consultant
• coordinator for a community coalition
• policy analyst
344 Community
• governmental administrative staff or political attaché

• executive staff of a nonprofit or for-profit organization.
Interestingly, Franscescato and Zani (2017) describe how community psychologists in Italy
were successful in advocating for and implementing positions of territorial community
psychologists, who are mandated to conduct regional analyses to assess strengths and
problems and analyse and coordinate the local network of institutions, associations and
groups. For compelling descriptions of diverse career paths of individual community
psychologists, see Bouchard, 2010; Chavis, 1993; van de Hoef et al., 2011; Wolff, 2014).
TRAINING IN COMMUNITY PSYCHOLOGY
At the undergraduate level, though there is no formal training in CP within Canada,

there are numerous undergraduate courses on the topic offered at institutions across the
country (see Table 2). Training in CP at the undergraduate and graduate levels is often
pursued through supervision by professors with CP expertise who identify as community
psychologists without necessarily being affiliated with a formal CP program. Indeed, formal
graduate programs in CP are currently only available in three Canadian universities. Two
stand-alone CP graduate programs are offered at Wilfrid Laurier University and at the
Université du Québec à Montréal, and a clinical psychology program with a specialisation
in CP is offered at the University of Ottawa. Specific postdoctoral training in CP is not
yet offered within Canada, though many fellowships are available within the United States,
including at Penn State University, Stanford Medical Center and Veterans Affairs, and the
Center for AIDS Intervention Research in Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
Those who have been in the position of interviewing and accepting students into CP
graduate programs have provided insights into the application process. Importantly, as CP
is an action-oriented field, CP supervisors look for practical field experience in addition
to research experience. Another essential component for applicants includes an
understanding of CP and what makes each student passionate about it. For example, a
student may see the value of a CP program in applying multiple levels of analysis to
their topic of interest. A simple and accessible way to learn more about CP is to explore
the free online resource The Community Toolbox (Center for Community Health and
Development, 2019).
In considering graduate school in CP, it is also useful to note that a PhD in CP is not
required to be active in the field. Community psychologists fill many different roles, and
CP-specific training is not required for many of these positions. Individuals working in CP
related positions hold varying degree levels, including undergraduate and master’s as well as
doctoral degrees.
Table 2: Academic Training in Community Psychology
Level Degree Type Institution
Undergraduate
– Wilfrid Laurier University
– University of Windsor
– Cape Breton University
– McGill University
– University of New Brunswick
– Thompson Rivers University
– UQAM
– Saint Mary’s University
Master’s
Master of Arts in Community Psychol-

Wilfrid Laurier University
ogy
Master of Public Policy and Administra-

Adler University
tion in Social Change
Doctoral
PhD in Community Psychology Wilfrid Laurier University
UQAM
PhD in Experimental Psychology –

University of Ottawa
Social/Community
Other
Undergraduate Practicum Carleton University
CONCLUSION
Community psychologists share many of the values, concepts and change strategies of
other community-focused specialties, such as applied sociology, social work, community
economic development, public health, applied anthropology, and prevention science.
However, CP adds a particular constellation of perspectives on community change and
intervention compared to other disciplines. CP practice is, among other things,
fundamentally rooted in an empirical approach, using research not only to describe social
problems but as a lever for change. CP is rooted in psychology and uses psychological and
psychosocial knowledge to promote social change. Community psychologists often adopt a
critical and analytical approach to environments and systems through the use of concepts
346 Community
such as social regularities, person-environment fit, and ecological analysis. They hold a
tolerance for ambiguity and the ability to legitimize multiple points of view. They seek
out individual and group strengths and strive to identify levers for change that are already
present in the situation. Community psychologists move beyond analysis towards action, by
establishing a climate of mobilization and synergy and by promoting concrete possibilities
for change (Laprise & Payette, 2001). These features of CP contribute to the wide variety of
applications and careers that community psychologists can pursue.
REFERENCES
Akhurst, J., Kagan, C., Lawthorn, R., & Richards, M. (2016). Community psychology practice
competencies: perspectives from the UK. Global Journal of Community Psychology Practice,
7(4), 1-16.
Allen, N. E. (2005). A multi‐level analysis of community coordinating councils. American
Journal of Community Psychology, 35(1-2), 49-63. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10464-005-1889-5
Arcidiacono, C. (2017). The community psychologist as a reflective plumber. Global Journal
of Community Psychology Practice, 8(1), 1–16.
Aspen Institute (1996). Measuring community capacity building: A workbook in progress for rural
communities. Washington, DC: Author.
Aubry, T., Goering, P., Veldhuizen, S., Adair, C. E., Bourque, J., Distasio, J., … Tsemberis,
S. (2016). A multiple-city RCT of housing first with assertive community treatment for
homeless Canadians with serious mental illness. Psychiatric Services, 67(3), 275-281.
https://doi.org/10.1176/appi.ps.201400587
Aubry, T., Sylvestre, J., & Ecker, J. (2010). Community psychology training in Canada in the
new millennium. Canadian Psychology, 51(2), 89-95. http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/a0018134
Babarik, P. (1979). The buried Canadian roots of community psychology. Journal of
Community Psychology, 7, 362–367. https://doi.org/10.1002/1520-6629(197910)7:4<362::AID-
JCOP2290070416>3.0.CO;2-X
Bernier, N. F., & Clavier, C. (2011). Public health policy research: making the case for a
political science approach. Health promotion international, 26(1), 109-116. doi: 10.1093/
heapro/daq079
Blanchet-Cohen, N., & Brunson, L. (2014). Creating settings for youth empowerment and
leadership: An ecological perspective. Child & Youth Services, 35(3), 216-236. https://doi.org/
10.1080/0145935X.2014.938735
Bond,. I. E. Serrano-García, C. B. Keys, C. & Shinn, M. (2017a). APA handbook of community
psychology: Vol. 1. Theoretical foundations, core concepts, and emerging challenges. Washington,
Bond,. I. E. Serrano-García, C. B. Keys, C. & Shinn, M. (2017b). APA Handbook of Community
psychology: Vol. 2. Methods for community research and action for diverse groups and issues .
Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Bouchard, C. (2001). Inspirer, soutenir et rénover les politiques sociales. In F. Dufort & J.
Guay (Eds.), Agir au cœur des communautés. La psychologie communautaire et le changement social
(pp. 343-368). Saint-Nicolas, QC: Les Presses de l’Université Laval.
Bouchard, C. (2010). Construire un monde plus viable : plaidoyer pour une psychologie de
l’engagement civique. Congrès de l’Ordre des psychologues du Québec, Québec, Québec :
October 30, 2010.
Bouchard, C. (2011). 1. De Skinner à Bronfenbrenner ou de l’utopie à l’engagement: parcours

d’un psychologue communautaire. In T. Saias (Ed.), Introduction à la psychologie
communautaire (pp. 1-11). Paris, FR: Dunod.
Bronfenbrenner, U. (1979). The ecology of human development: Experiments by nature and design.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Brunson, L. & Boileau, G. (2008). La voix des parents : Préparation d’un portrait de la communauté
par, pour et avec les parents — Guide du processus. Guide d’animation présenté à Québec
Enfants, Montréal, Québec (86 pp.).
Burns, J. C., Cooke, D. Y., & Schweidler, C. (2011). A short guide to community based
participatory action research. Los Angeles, CA: Advancement Project. Retrieved from
https://hc-v6-static.s3.amazonaws.com/media/resources/tmp/cbpar.pdf
Burton, M., Kagan, C., & Duckett, P. (2012). Making the psychological political–challenges
for community psychology. Global Journal of Community Psychology Practice, 3(4), 1-11.
Campbell, R. (2010). Commentary: What’s the ‘right’ method in community research. In G.
Nelson & I. Prilleltensky (Eds.), Community psychology: In pursuit of liberation and well-being
(2nd ed., pp. 308-310). London, UK: MacMillan.
Caplan, G. (1961). Prevention of mental disorders in children: Initial explorations. New York, NY:
Basic Books.
Caplan, N., & Nelson, S. D. (1973). On being useful: The nature and consequences of
psychological research on social problems. American Psychologist, 28(3), 199. doi: 10.1037/
h0034433
Case, A. D., & Hunter, C. D. (2012). Counterspaces: A unit of analysis for understanding the
role of settings in marginalized individuals’ adaptive responses to oppression. American
Journal of Community Psychology, 50(1-2), 257-270.
Castro, F. G., Barrera, M., & Martinez, C. R. (2004). The cultural adaptation of prevention
interventions: Resolving tensions between fidelity and fit. Prevention Science, 5(1), 41-45.
https://doi.org/10.1023/B:PREV.0000013980.12412.cd
Center for Community Health and Development (2019). The community toolbox [resource].
Retrieved from https://ctb.ku.edu/en
Chavis, D. M. (1993). A future for community psychology practice. American Journal of
Community Psychology, 21(2), 171–183. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF00941620
Cherniss, C., & Deegan, G. (2000). The creation of alternative settings. In J. Rappaport & E.
Seidman (Eds.), Handbook of Community Psychology (pp. 359 –378). New York, NY: Plenum
Press.
Christens, B. D., Hanlin, C. E., & Speer, P. W. (2007). Getting the social organism thinking:
Strategy for systems change. American Journal of Community Psychology, 39(3-4), 229-238.
doi: 10.1007/s10464-007-9119-y
Cook, J. R. (2014). Using evaluation to effect social change. American Journal of Evaluation,
36(1), 107–117. https://doi.org/10.1177/1098214014558504
Cook, J. R., & Kilmer, R. P. (2012). Systems of care: New partnerships for community
psychology. American Journal of Community Psychology, 49(3-4), 393-403. doi: 10.1007/
s10464-012-9516-8.
Creswell, J. W., Hanson, W. E., Clark Plano, V. L., & Morales, A. (2007). Qualitative research
designs: Selection and implementation. The Counseling Psychologist, 35(2), 236-264.
Dagenais, C. (2006). Vers une utilisation accrue des résultats de la recherche par les
348 Community
intervenants sociaux. Quels modèles de transfert de connaissance privilégier? Les Sciences

de l’Éducation pour l’Ère nouvelle, 3, 23-35. doi: 10.3917/lsdle.393.0023
Dalton, J. H., Elias, M. J., & Wandersman, A. (2007). Community psychology: Linking individuals
and communities (2nd ed.). Belmont, CA: Thomson Wadsworth.
Dzidic, P., Breen, L. J. & Bishop, B. J. (2013). Are our competencies revealing our weaknesses?
A critique of community psychology practice competencies. Global Journal of Community
Psychology Practice, 4(4), 1–10.
Evans, S. D., Brown, N., deSchutter, J., & McGee, S. (2008, mai). The role of the « critical friend
» in the community-university partnership. Communication présentée au 4ième Colloque de
psychologie communautaire Québec-Ontario, Montréal, Québec.
Evans, S. D. Duckett, P., Lawthorn, R., & Kivell, N. (2017). Positioning the critical in
community psychology. In M. A. Bond,. I. E. Serrano-García, C. B. Keys, & M. Shinn (2017).
APA Handbook of Community Psychology: Vol. 1. Theoretical Foundations, Core Concepts, and
Emerging Challenges. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Fafard, P. (2015). Beyond the usual suspects: Using political science to enhance public health
policy making. Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 69(11), 1129-1132.
http://doi.org/10.1136/jech-2014-204608
Fortin-Pellerin, L., Pouliot-Lapointe, J., Thibodeau, C., & Gagne, M-H. (2007). The Canadian
journal of community mental health from 1982 to 2006: A content analysis. Canadian
Journal of Community Mental Health, 26(1), 23-45. https://doi.org/10.7870/cjcmh-2007-0005
Foster-Fishman, P. G., Berkowitz, S. L., Lounsbury, D. W., Jacobson, S., & Allen, N. A.
(2001). Building collaborative capacity in community coalitions: A review and integrative
framework. American Journal of Community Psychology, 29(2), 241-261. https://doi.org/
10.1023/A:1010378613583
Foucher, R., & Leduc, F. (2008). Domaines de pratique et compétences professionnelles des
psychologues du travail et des organisations (2e éd.). Montréal, QC: Éditions Nouvelles.
Francescato, D., & Zani, B. (2013). Community psychology practice competencies in
undergraduate and graduate programs in Italy. Global Journal of Community Psychology
Practice, 4(4), 1–12. https://doi.org/10.7728/0404201303
Francescato, D., & Zani, B. (2017). Strengthening community psychology in Europe through
increasing professional competencies for the new Territorial Community Psychologists.
Global Journal of Community Psychology Practice, 8(1), 1–14.
Gagné, M. H., Lachance, V., Thomas, F., Brunson, L., & Clément, M. È. (2014). Prévenir
la maltraitance envers les enfants au moyen du marketing social. Canadian Journal of
Community Mental Health, 33(2), 85-107.
Gottlieb, B. H., & Russell, C. C. (1989). Better beginnings, better futures: Primary prevention
in Ontario. Canadian Journal of Mental Health, 8(2), 151-152.
Government of Canada (2018). Supervised consumption sites: status of applications. Retrieved
from https://www.canada.ca/en/health-canada/services/substance-abuse/supervised-
consumption-sites/status-application.html#app
Hasford, J., Loomis, C., Nelson, G., & Pancer, S. M. (2013). Youth narratives on community
involvement and sense of community and their relation to participation in an early
childhood development program. Youth & Society. Advance online publication.
http://doi.org/10.1177/0044118X13506447
Hawe, P. (1994). Capturing the meaning of “community” in community intervention
evaluation: Some contributions from community psychology. Health Promotion

International, 9, 199 –210.
Hawe, P. (2017). The contribution of social ecological thinking to community psychology:
Origins, practice, and research. In M. A. Bond,. I. E. Serrano-García, C. B. Keys, & M. Shinn
(2017). APA Handbook of Community Psychology: Vol. 1. Theoretical Foundations, Core Concepts,
and Emerging Challenges. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Hawe, P., King, L., Noort, M., Jordens, C., Gifford, S., & Lloyd, B. (2000). Indicators to help with
capacity building in health promotion. Sidney, AU: Australian Centre for Health Promotion,
Health Promotion International, NSW Health Department.
Hayward, K., Loomis, C., Nelson, G., Pancer, M., & Peters, R. DeV. (2011). A toolkit for building
better beginnings and better futures. Kingston, ON: Better Beginnings, Better Futures
Research Coordination Unit.
Jason, L. A. & O’Brien, J. (2018). What is unique to our field? The Community Psychologist, 51(3).
Jason, L. A., Stevens, E., Ram, D. Miller, S. A., Beasley, C. R., & Gleason, K., (2016). Theories
in the field of community psychology. Global Journal of Community Psychology Practice, 7(2),
1-27.
Julian, D. (2006). Defining community psychology practice: Meeting the needs and realizing
the dreams of the community. The Community Psychologist, 39(4), 66-69.
Juras, J. L., Mackin, J. R., Curtis, S. E., & Foster-Fishman, P. G. (1997). Key concepts of
community psychology: Implications for consulting in educational and human service
settings. Journal of Educational and Psychological Consultation, 8, 111-133. https://doi.org/
10.1207/s1532768xjepc0802_2
Kelly, J. G. (1971). Qualities for the community psychologist. American Psychologist, 26(10),
897-903. http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/h0032231
Kelly, J. G. (1986). Context and process: An ecological view of the interdependence of practice
and research. American Journal of Community Psychology, 14(6), 581-589. https://doi.org/
10.1007/BF00931335
Kerr, T., MacPherson, D., & Wood, E. (2008). Establishing North America’s first safer
injection facility: lessons from the Vancouver experience. In A. Stevens (Ed.). Crossing
frontiers: International developments in the treatment of drug dependence. Brighton, UK: Pavilion
Publishing.
Kloos, B., & Shah, S. (2009). A social ecological approach to investigating relationships
between housing and adaptive functioning for persons with serious mental illness.
American Journal of Community Psychology, 44, 316-326. https://doi.org/10.1007/
s10464-009-9277-1
Laprise, R., & Payette, M. (2001). Le choix d’un modèle de consultation selon une perspective
communautaire. In F. Dufort & J. Guay (Eds.), Agir au cœur des communautés. La psychologie
communautaire et le changement social (pp. 187-214). Saint-Nicolas, QC: Les Presses de
l’Université Laval.
Lavoie, F., & Brunson, L. (2010). La pratique de la psychologie communautaire. Canadian
Psychology/Psychologie Canadienne, 51(2), 96–105. https://doi.org/10.1037/a0018085
Lavoie, F., Borkman, T., & Gidron, B. (Eds.). (1994). Self-help and mutual aid groups:
International and multicultural perspectives. New York, NY: Haworth Press.
Le Bossé, Y., & Dufort F. (2001). Le pouvoir d’agir (empowerment) des personnes & des
communautés : Une autre façon d’intervenir. In F. Dufort & J. Guay (Eds.), Agir au coeur
350 Community
des communautés : La psychologie communautaire et le changement social (pp. 75-116). Sainte-Foy,

QC: Presses de l’Université Laval.
Leach, D. C. (2008). Competencies: from deconstruction to reconstruction and back again,
lessons learned. American Journal of Public Health, 98(9), 1562–1564. https://doi.org/10.2105/
AJPH.2007.125302
Lundburg, K., Ignacio, C. R., & Ramos, C. M. (2011). The mobile care health project:
Providing dental care in rural Hawai’i communities. Global Journal of Community Psychology
Practice, 1(3), 32-36.
Lykes, M. B., TerreBlanche, M., & Hamber, B. (2003). Narrating survival and change in
Guatemala and South Africa: The politics of representation and a liberatory community
psychology. American Journal of Community Psychology, 31(1/2), 79-90.
Martín-Baró, I. (1994). Writings for a Liberation Psychology. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press.
Maton, K. I. (2016). Influencing social policy: Applied psychology serving the public interest. Oxford,
UK: Oxford University Press.
McMahon, S. D., & Wolfe, S. M. (2017). Career opportunities for community psychologists.
APA handbook of community psychology, 2 Methods for community research and action for diverse
groups and issues, 645–659.
McMahon, S. D., Jimenez, T. R., Bond, M. A., Wolfe, S. M., & Ratcliffe, A. W. (2015).
Community psychology education and practice careers in the 21st century. In V. C. Scott
& S. M. Wolfe (Eds.), Community psychology: Foundations for practice (pp. 379–409). London,
UK: SAGE Publications, Ltd.
Meyers, A. B. (2002). Developing nonthreatening expertise: Thoughts on consultation
training from the perspective of a new faculty member. Journal of Educational and
Psychological Consultation, 13, 55– 67.
Moane, G. (2003). Bridging the personal and the political : Practices for a liberation
psychology. American Journal of Community Psychology, 31(1-2), 91-101.
Montero, M. (2012). From complexity and social justice to consciousness: Ideas that have
build a community psychology. Global Journal of Community Psychology Practice, 3(1), 1–13.
Montero, M., Sonn, C., & Burton, M. (2017). Community psychology and liberation
psychology : A creative synergy for an ethical and transformative praxis. In M. A. Bond,. I.
E. Serrano-García, C. B. Keys, & M. Shinn (Eds.), APA Handbook of Community Psychology: Vol.
1. Theoretical Foundations, Core Concepts, and Emerging Challenges (pp. 149-167). Washington,
Neal, J. W. (2016). Phenomenon of interest, framework, or theory? Building better
explanations in Community Psychology. Global Journal of Community Psychology Practice,
7(2), 1-6.
Neigher, W. D., Ratcliffe, A. W., Wolff, T., Elias, M., & Hakim, S. M. (2011). A value proposition
for community psychology. Global Journal of Community Psychology Practice, 2(3), 1–21.
Nelson, G. (2006). Mental health policy in Canada. In A. Westhues (Ed.), Canadian social
policy: Issues and perspectives (4th ed., pp. 245- 266). Waterloo, ON: Wilfrid Laurier
University Press.
Nelson, G., & Aubry, T. (2010). Introduction to community psychology in Canada: past,
present, and future. Canadian Psychology 51(2), 77-78. http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/a0019740
Nelson, G., Kloos, B., & Ornelas, J. (2014). Transformative change in community mental
health. In G. Nelson, B. Kloos, & J. Ornelas (Eds.), Community psychology and community
mental health: Towards transformative change. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press
Nelson, G., Lavoie, F., & Mitchell, T. (2007). The history and theories of community
psychology in Canada. In S. M. Reich, M. Riemer, I. Prilleltensky, & M. Montero (Eds.),
International Community Psychology (pp. 13–36). New York, NY: Springer US
Nelson, G., Lord, J., & Ochoka, J. (2001). Shifting the paradigm in community mental health:
towards empowerment and community. Toronto, ON: University of Toronto Press. Retrieved
from http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3138/9781442679900
Nelson, G., Ochocka, J., Janzen, R., Trainor, J., Goering, P., & Lomotey, J. (2007). A
longitudinal study of mental health consumer/survivor initiatives: Part V—Outcomes
at three-year follow-up. Journal of Community Psychology, 35, 655–665. https://doi.org/
10.1002/jcop.20171
Nelson, G., Stefancic, A., Rae, J., Townley, G., Tsembers, S., Macnaughton, E., … Georging,
P. (2014). Early implementation evaluation of a multi-site housing first intervention for
homeless people with mental illness: a mixed methods approach. Evaluation and Program
Planning, 43, 16-26. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.evalprogplan.2013.10.004
Norton, B., McLeroy, K., Burdine, J., Felix, R., & Dorsey, A. (2002). Community capacity:
Concept, theory, and methods. In D. R. DiClemente, R. Crosby, & M. Kegler (Eds.),
Emerging theories in health promotion practice and research (pp. 194-227). San Francisco, CA:
Jossey-Bass.
Pancer, S. M., Nelson, G., Hasford, J., & Loomis, C. (2012). The Better Beginnings, Better
Futures project: Long-term parent, family, and community outcomes of a universal,
comprehensive, community-based prevention approach for primary school children and
their families. Journal of Community & Applied Social Psychology, 23, 187-205. https://doi.org/
10.1002/casp.2110
Peters, R. DeV., Nelson, G., Petrunka, K., Pancer, S. M., Loomis, C., Hasford, J., … Van Andel,
A. (2010). Investing in our future: Highlights of Better Beginnings research findings at grade 12.
Kingston, ON: Better Beginnings Research Coordination Unit, Queen’s University.
Peters, R. DeV., Petrunka, K., Kahn, S., Howell-Moneta, A., Nelson, G., Pancer, S. M., &
Loomis, C. (2016). Cost-savings analysis of the Better Beginnings, Better Futures
community-based project for young children and their families: A 10-Year Follow-up.
Prevention Science, 17(2), 237–247. doi: 10.1007/s11121-015-0595-2
Phillips. D. A. (2000). Social policy and community psychology. In J. Rappaport & E.
Seidman (Eds.), Handbook of community psychology (pp. 397-419). New York, NY: Plenum.
Pols, H. (2000). Between the laboratory, the school, and the community: The psychology
of human development, Toronto, 1916-1956. Canadian Journal of Community Mental Health,
19(2), 13-30. https://doi.org/10.7870/cjcmh-2000-0013
Prilleltensky, I. (1997). Values, assumptions, and practices: Assessing the moral implications
of psychological discourse and action. American Psychologist, 52(5), 517-535.
Ramos, C. M. (2007). A conceptual framework for community psychology practice. The
Community Psychologist, 40(4), 53–54.
Rappaport, J. (1981). In praise of paradox: A social policy of empowerment over prevention.
American Journal of Community Psychology, 9(1), 1-25.
Reeves, S., Fox, A., & Hodges, B. D. (2009). The competency movement in the health
professions: Ensuring consistent standards or reproducing conventional domains of
352 Community
practice? Advances in Health Sciences Education : Theory and Practice, 14(4), 451–453.
https://doi.org/10.1007/s10459-009-9166-2
Reich, S. M., Riemer, M., Prilleltensky, I., & Montero, M. (2007). International Community
Psychology. New York, NY: Springer US
Rothman, J., & Tropman E. (1987). Models of community organizations and macro practice
perspectives: Their mixing and phasing. In F. Cox, J. Erlich, J. Rothman, & J. Tropman,
(Eds), Strategies of community organization: Macro practice (4th ed.) (pp. 3-26). Itasca, Illinois:
F.E. Peacock Publishers, Inc.
Seidman, E. (1988). Back to the future, community psychology: Unfolding a theory of social
intervention. American Journal of Community Psychology, 16(1), 3-24.
Snowden, L. R. (1987). The peculiar successes of community psychology: Service delivery to
ethnic minorities and the poor. American Journal of Community Psychology, 15(5), 575-586.
Society for Community Research and Action (2012). Competencies for community
psychology practice: Draft August 15, 2012. The Community Psychologist, 45(4), 7–14.
Somers, J. M., Rezansoff, S. N., Moniruzzaman, A., Palepu, A., & Patterson, M. (2013).
Housing first reduces re-offending among formerly homeless adults with mental
disorders: Results of a randomized controlled trial. PLOS ONE, 8(9), 1-8. https://doi.org/
10.1371/journal.pone.0072946
Speer, P. W., & Hughey, J. (1995). Community organizing: An ecological route to
empowerment and power. American Journal of Community Psychology, 23(5), 729-748.
Starnes, D. M. (2004). Community psychologists — get in the arena! American Journal of
Community Psychology, 33(1-2), 3-6.
Stein, C. H. (2007). Commentary – Competencies and toolboxes or lessons learned along
the journey? The nature of graduate education in community psychology. The Community
Psychologist, 40(2), 101-102.
Tsemberis, S. (1999). From streets to homes: An innovative approach to supported housing
for homeless adults with psychiatric disabilities. Journal of Community Psychology, 27,
225-241. https://doi.org/10.1002/(SICI)1520-6629(199903)27:2<225::AID-
JCOP9>3.0.CO;2-Y
Tsemberis, S., Gulcur, L., & Nakae, M. (2004). Housing first, consumer choice, and harm
reduction for homeless individuals with a dual diagnosis. American Journal of Public Health,
94(4), 651–656. https://doi.org/10.2105/AJPH.94.4.651
van de Hoef, S., Sundar, P., Austin, S., & Dostaler, T. (2011). And then what? Four community
psychologists reflect on their careers ten years after graduation. Global Journal of Community
Psychology Practice, 2(2), 1–8.
Viola, J. J., Glantsman, O., Williams, A., & Stevension, C. (2017). Answers to all your questions
about careers in community psychology. In J. J. Viola & O. Glantsman (Eds.), Diverse Careers
in Community Psychology. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press. https://doi.org/10.1093/
acprof:oso/9780190457938.001.0001
Walsh-Bowers, R. (1998). Community psychology in the Canadian psychological family.
Canadian Psychology/Psychologie Canadienne, 39(4), 280-287.
Wolfe, S. M., Scott, V. C., & Jimenez, T. R. (2013). Community psychology practice
competencies: A global perspective. Global Journal of Community Psychology Practice, 4(4),
1–9.
Wolff, T. (2010). The power of collaborative solutions: Six principles and effective tools for building
healthy communities. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Wolff, T. (2014). Community psychology practice: Expanding the impact of psychology’s

work. The American Psychologist, 69(8), 803–813. doi: 10.1037/a0037426
Wolff, T., Minkler, M., Wolfe, S. W., Berkowitz, B., Bowen, L., Butterfoss, F. D., … Lee, K. S.
(2017). Collaborating for equity and justice: Moving beyond collective impact. Nonprofit
Quarterly, 9, 42-53.
Wood, E., Tyndall, M. W., Lai, C., Montanero, J. S., & Kerr, T. (2006). Impact of a medically
supervised safer injecting facility on drug dealing and other drug-related crime. Substance
Abuse Treatment, Prevention, and Policy 1, 13. https://doi.org/10.1186/1747-597X-1-13
Worton, K., Loomis, C., Pancer, M., Nelson, G., & Peters. R. (2017). Evidence to impact: A
community knowledge mobilization evaluation framework. Gateways International Journal,
10, 121–142. https://doi.org/10.5130/ijcre.v10i1.5202

Brunson, L., Gilmer, A., & Loomis, C. (2019). Applications and careers in community
psychology: Practicing in settings, systems, and communities to build well- being and
promote social justice. In M. E. Norris (Ed.), The Canadian Handbook for Careers in
applications-and-careers-in-community-psychology/
[15]
PSYCHOLOGY IN THE MILITARY
Damian O’Keefe
Samantha Urban
1
Wendy Darr
INTRODUCTION
Applied psychology was first practiced in the Canadian Armed Forces (CAF) over 80 years
ago when a group of Canadian psychologists met to discuss how they could contribute to
the Second World War effort (see Anderson, 1991; Lamerson, 2002; Prociuk, 1988). What the
Canadian military needed most at the time was an efficient way to select volunteers for the
many occupations in the armed services. Psychologists have been involved in the selection
of military personnel ever since (see McMillan, Stevens, & Kelloway, 2009), though applied
psychology has expanded to a lot of other areas and has influenced many programs and
policies in the CAF and the Department of National Defence.
This chapter provides an overview of psychology in the CAF and National Defence from
three perspectives. In the first section, we look at social science from the perspective of
career opportunities in defence. The three main careers in psychology are CAF personnel
selection officers (PSOs), defence scientists, and clinical psychologists. In the second section,
we look at the many kinds of applied personnel research that take place in the CAF and
National Defence, and in the third we look at opportunities for education in applied military
2
psychology.
1. All three authors played a lead role in the compilation of this chapter, and are indebted to all
those who contributed to this chapter (acknowledged in footnotes to each respective section;
see list of contributors at the end of the chapter), including Waylon Dean for his review of the
initial chapter drafts.
2. For a more in-depth overview of military psychology, please see Kennedy and Zillmer (2006),
Laurence and Matthews (2012), and Gal and Mangelsdorff (1992).
354
SOCIAL SCIENCE CAREERS IN THE CANADIAN ARMED FORCES AND NATIONAL DEFENCE
3
Personnel selection officers (PSOs) are military officers who apply behavioural science
in areas such as ethics, recruiting, retention, selection, leadership, performance appraisal,
family and personal mental health and well-being research, and in other human resource
domains (CAF, 2019).
Entry-level PSOs typically have an undergraduate degree in psychology when they join
the CAF, and following completion of basic and occupation-specific military training, spend
the first part of their careers working one-on-one with CAF members from recruitment
through release from the military. PSOs conduct suitability screening for over 100 CAF
occupations at recruiting centres with civilian applicants. The CAF has many internal
programs that allow its members to pursue new careers, so members often change
occupations. Junior PSOs assess the suitability of those interested in switching occupations
by examining their aptitudes, personality traits, and work relationships (person–job fit)
through psychometric tests and structured interviews, after which they write suitability
reports. As part of this process, PSOs counsel CAF members on how to reach their career
goals, explaining the educational programs or technical certifications they will need to work
in specific fields.
PSOs provide a host of services to help retiring CAF members transition from military to
civilian life. This can involve administering and interpreting a number of vocational interest
inventories, going through a structured set of sessions to help members figure out their post-
military careers or educational plans, conducting different types of transition workshops
(e.g., resume writing, job search techniques), and providing them with other information
they need to prepare themselves for returning to civilian life.
As PSOs progress in their careers, opportunities expand both professionally and
academically. They become eligible for subsidized full-time education up to a doctorate in
psychology. The CAF prefers that PSOs complete an industrial/organizational psychology
program, given the emphasis on personnel selection. Once they have a master’s degree,
PSOs are normally employed to conduct applied research in three broad areas: personnel
selection, personnel and family support, and operational and organizational dynamics.
Regardless of the type of research PSOs conduct, the work is dynamic and PSOs have
a chance to travel across Canada to the CAF’s many wings and bases and to travel
internationally to collaborate with other military organizations. PSOs are also encouraged
to develop research skills through conferences and workshops.
This strong research background and wealth of experience allows PSOs to do different
jobs, such as teaching applied military psychology at the Royal Military College of Canada,
conducting research, providing personnel selection guidance and advice to senior staff, and
developing and maintaining personnel selection policy.
Defence scientists are not members of the military but civilian public servants employed
by National Defence. Defence scientists have a broad range of academic backgrounds and
work across various science domains, but those engaged in personnel research typically
have graduate degrees in various specializations in psychology (e.g., cognitive psychology,
industrial/organizational psychology, social psychology) or in sociology.
In the personnel research domain, defence scientists work alongside PSOs, to address
people-related challenges; conducting independent and collaborative applied research for
3. Lieutenant Colonel Rob Morrow contributed to this section of the chapter.

356 Psychology in the Military
their CAF and National Defence clients using a range of research methods (e.g., surveys,
focus groups) and analytical techniques (e.g., qualitative thematic analysis, structural
equation modeling). In addition to preparing internal reports and conducting oral
presentations, defence scientists publish their research findings externally in books,
conferences, and peer-reviewed journals, and they act as internal and external peer-
reviewers of work in their research domains (e.g., ethics, family support, selection).
Most defence scientists’ work is client-driven, but they can propose new research and
analysis capabilities, and they are encouraged to collaborate with academia, industry, and
other government departments (e.g., Veterans Affairs Canada) to realize their ideas. As
defence scientists progress through their careers, they can join international collaborations,
which are critical to ensuring the most current scientific research is being used to conduct
military personnel research in Canada and to benchmark Canadian findings against similar
research in allied nations. Some of these international collaborators include The Technical
Cooperation Program, the NATO Human Factors and Medicine Research Task Groups, the
International Military Testing Association, and the European Research Group on Military
and Society.
Unlike most job classifications in the Canadian Public Service, the DS group is incumbent
oriented. Advancement, following initial recruitment is based on merit and occurs within
the context of the incumbent’s own position. The seven facets of state of professional
development include: knowledge and expertise, personal interactions and communication,
creativity, productivity, impact, recognition, and responsibility. Advancement requires an
assessment of state of professional development, which is then compared with professional
development indicators that define each of seven characteristics at each of the DS levels.
They chart their progress through an annual professional development plan, which can
include participating in conferences, methods and analysis courses, and military
familiarization exercises (e.g., visiting a base or spending time on a Royal Canadian Navy
ship). Some defence scientists have had opportunities to voluntarily to deploy on overseas
missions (e.g., Afghanistan), upon invitation by military allies, to present their work as
subject matter experts in their field.
Being a defence scientist is a rewarding experience that provides graduates in psychology
(and other disciplines) with the opportunity to learn and develop new skills, travel to
interesting places, and make a difference in the lives of the men and women who serve their
country.
4
Clinical psychologists in the CAF are not members of the military but civilians employed
as public servants or contracted by National Defence. They typically have a master’s or
doctorate with a specialization in adult clinical psychology, though a few have degrees in
counselling psychology. These psychologists work in military health care clinics and certain
specialized units such as those with the Canadian Special Operations Forces Command
(CANSOFCOM). The vast majority of psychologists work in the 31 military health care
clinics located across Canada, which include seven Operational Trauma and Stress Support
Centres and provide mental health services very similar to what is delivered in hospitals.
The CAF has a comprehensive mental health program for ill and injured members and
psychologists work on multidisciplinary teams with psychiatrists, social workers, mental
health nurses, addiction counsellors, chaplains, physicians, physician assistants and nurse
practitioners. Psychologists assess CAF members in order to identify mental health
4. Dr. Susan Dowler and Dr. Sylvie Bourgeois contributed to this section of the chapter.
treatment needs. They do this by administering psychometric tests, conducting clinical

interviews and, if warranted, making mental health diagnoses and treatment
recommendations. Then they provide the psychological treatment interventions, all of
which are guided by evidence-based best practices. Most of the time, the psychologists work
with patients one-on-one but sometimes they deliver psychological interventions in a group
format. Occasionally, they work with patients’ families as well. Regardless of how services
are delivered, psychologists are always involved in the constant evaluation of their treatment
interventions through the use of outcome measurement practices.
The most common mental disorders that psychologists treat are depressive disorders,
anxiety disorders, trauma- and stressor-related disorders (e.g., Posttraumatic Stress
Disorder), and substance use disorders. In addition to these core duties, psychologists in
military health care clinics may also participate in mental health research and they often sit
on local, national, or international psychology working groups and committees.
Some clinical psychologists work in specialized units, such as the Canadian Special
Operations Forces Command. These psychologists have responsibilities both in mental
health and operational psychology. As subject matter experts in operational psychology,
they conduct suitability and risk assessments of military members applying to these units,
and provide recommendations to leadership as part of the selection process for high-risk
duties. They also advise military leadership on psychological risk and mitigation strategies
related to high-risk training, operations and initiatives, and on the psycho-social factors that
affect members’ psychological health, morale, and retention. In direct support of the mental
health of members, they develop and deliver educational programs for psychological health
and wellbeing and provide psychological intervention to members, including crisis
intervention, diagnostic assessment and psychotherapy. Special operations psychologists
are active in international psychology working groups and committees, and they collaborate
with other operational psychologists from allied nations on professional practice issues and
advances. They are also often asked to travel to perform their duties, sometimes on short
notice.
APPLIED PERSONNEL RESEARCH IN THE CANADIAN ARMED FORCES AND NATIONAL

DEFENCE
5
Two scientific organizations in National Defence and the CAF, Defence Research and
Development Canada and Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis,
conduct social science research as part of the Personnel Readiness Program, which supports
the CAF’s operational and strategic initiatives. These organizations provide senior leaders in
National Defence and the CAF with timely scientific evidence grounded in an understanding
of the defence context.
Research for the Personnel Readiness Program comprises a number of broad domains:
recruitment, selection, training, career management, retention, and attrition; personnel and
family support and quality of life for military members and their families; employment
equity and diversity; and psychological health and operational and organizational dynamics,
including ethics, military leadership, and organizational effectiveness. Teams of defence
scientists and PSOs work on new and ongoing projects within these domains. Most of the
data come from surveys of serving military personnel. In each of the following subsections,
5. Lieutenant Colonel Rob Morrow contributed to this section of the chapter.

we highlight examples of research by defence scientists and PSOs for the Personnel
Readiness Program. We describe the challenge for the CAF and National Defence, how
defence scientists and PSOs apply their social science knowledge to address the challenge,
and the impact of these efforts on members and the organization.
6
MEASURING PSYCHOSOCIAL READINESS AND RESILIENCE
The challenge.
Psychosocial hazards in the workplace can threaten employees’ mental health and well-
being, leading to absenteeism, turnover, and lower job performance. The CAF and National
Defence have undertaken a number of initiatives to create and maintain a healthy
workplace, but an effective tool to measure psychological hazards in the workplace has been
needed for some time.
Applying social science.
The Canadian government enacted the National Standard for Psychological Health and Safety
in the Workplace in 2013, which identifies 13 workplace resilience and risk factors that
contribute to psychological health and safety at work. The list includes psychological and
social support, organizational culture, clear leadership and expectations, civility and respect,
psychological competencies and requirements, growth and development, recognition and
reward, involvement and influence, workload management, engagement, work–life balance,
and psychological protection and physical safety (from violence, bullying, and harassment).
Using the standard as a guide, Ivey, Blanc, Michaud, and Dobreva-Martinova (2018) applied a
job-demands resources framework to the 13 factors, and then set out to find validated scales
in the academic literature to measure each factor. The result was a comprehensive survey
battery called the Unit Morale Profile, Version 2.0, which was adapted to create the Defence
Workplace Well-Being Survey. The survey was administered, in the spring of 2018, to a
large sample of National Defence employees and CAF members to assess the psychosocial
workplace.
The impact.
Data are still being analyzed by the research team, but the results will (a) establish a
baseline for psychological health and safety in Defence, and (b) they will identify key
risk and resilience factors that affect well-being, which in turn will inform organizational
interventions. Moreover, the cutting edge techniques used have positioned DND as an
international leader in the assessment of workplace well-being.
6. Lieutenant Colonel Cindy Suurd Ralph contributed to this section of the chapter.
CLIENT-REPORTED MENTAL HEALTH MONITORING IN CANADIAN ARMED FORCES HEALTH

7
CLINICS
The challenge.
In routine outcome measurement, mental health care providers use patient-report tools
to monitor outcomes and adapt treatments to patients’ needs. Inviting patients to complete
questionnaires increases their involvement and provides data about treatment targets, tracks
progress, and helps address gaps in service. In a range of clinical settings, routine outcome
measurement has been linked with patient and provider satisfaction and improved mental
health outcomes, such as reduced symptom profiles and enhanced quality of life (Krägeloh,
Czuba, Billington, Kersten, & Siegert, 2015; Scott & Lewis, 2015; Steinfeld, Franklin, Mercer,
Fraynt, & Simon, 2016).
In light of this research, Veterans Affairs Canada created the Client-Reported Outcomes
Monitoring Information System (CROMIS; Canadian Armed Forces and Veterans Affairs
Canada, 2017). CROMIS was implemented in phases at CAF health clinics across Canada
in 2018 to support the use of measurement-based care with CAF members. CROMIS uses
information technology to administer and interpret the brief Outcome Questionnaire
(Lambert, 2007), which captures client feedback to improve their mental health outcomes.
Nonetheless, research has shown that several factors, such as provider attitudes (e.g.,
cost, time), and lack of training and staff engagement, can influence the implementation
and adoption of evidence-based practices (McHugh & Barlow, 2012; Steinfeld et al., 2015).
In particular, aspects of organizational culture and organizational readiness for change
have been linked with barriers to implementation which limits achievements towards
measurement-based care (Williams, Glisson, Hemmelgarn, & Green, 2017).
National Defence researchers’ objective was to identify key barriers and facilitators of CAF
health clinic providers’ use of CROMIS. In response, they adapted and administered the
Organizational Readiness to Change Assessment tool, a 77-item questionnaire that assesses
the following key organizational determinants of readiness for implementing evidence-
based practice (i.e., CROMIS): the strength of the evidence base for the practice, the quality
of the organizational context to support the practice, and the organizational capacity to
support the practice (Helfrich, Li, Sharp, & Sales, 2009). The tool was administered to over
200 mental health care providers across 20 CAF health clinics.
The impact.
The findings have had important implications for mental health care in the CAF.
Compared with the general population, CAF Regular Force members have higher rates of
depression and generalized anxiety disorder (Pearson, Zamorski, & Janz, 2014). Combined
with evidence that there are gaps in achieving expected outcomes in routine mental health
care and in detecting deteriorating symptoms (Fortney et al., 2016), the CAF needs to engage
clients in improving their care and to change the way mental health services are delivered.
In particular, helping clinicians implement standardized outcome measures and abide by
7. Dr. Eva Guerin and Dr. Jennifer Lee contributed to this section of the chapter.
specific clinical practice guidelines will help achieve more tailored patient care, provide
just-in-time recommendations for both clients and clinicians, and improve outcomes for
CAF members (Canadian Armed Forces and Veterans Affairs Canada, 2017; Harding, Rush,
Arbuckle, Trivedi, & Pincus, 2011).
8
PROMOTING AN ETHICAL AND RESPECTFUL MILITARY CULTURE
The challenge.
In 2014, media coverage suggested that the incidence of sexual misconduct in the CAF
was much higher than reported in CAF research (Davis, 2015). As a result, the Chief of
the Defence Staff commissioned an external review, which identified numerous cultural
practices and processes contributing to sexual harassment and sexual misconduct in the
CAF (Deschamps, 2015). The external review led the Chief of the Defence Staff to initiate
Operation HONOUR, the strategy to eliminate inappropriate sexual behaviour in the CAF
(National Defence and the Canadian Armed Forces, 2015). Canada’s defence policy, Strong,
Secure, Engaged, also called for institutionalized culture change to promote a culture of
leadership, respect, and honour that reflects high standards of ethical conduct (National
Defence and the Canadian Armed Forces, 2017).
National Defence researchers developed a comprehensive research plan to better

understand the culture and leadership dynamics contributing to inappropriate sex- and
gender-based behaviour in the CAF (Davis, 2015, 2016). Incorporating quantitative and
qualitative methodologies, the research plan contained the following objectives, which drew
on recommendations from the external review (Deschamps, 2015) and a later report by the
Office of the Auditor General of Canada (OAG, 2018):
• Measuring the incidence of sexual misconduct in the CAF. The CAF contracted Statistics
Canada to develop, administer, and analyze a survey to measure three forms of
inappropriate sexual behaviour in the CAF: sexual assault (experienced), sexual
harassment (witnessed or experienced), and discrimination based on sex, sexual
orientation, or gender identity (witnessed or experienced). Knowledge of directives and
programs related to sexual misconduct and perceptions of CAF responses to sexual
misconduct were also examined. The survey was administered in 2016 and 2018, with
another administration anticipated in 2021. Results from the survey are currently used
to inform CAF policies, procedures, and programs aimed at addressing sexual
misconduct in the CAF.
• Victim support. Using qualitative interviews, the goal of this project is to understand the
experiences of serving and retired military members seeking support after being
affected by inappropriate sexual behaviour in the CAF. Recently completed, the results
will help identify existing gaps and challenges in seeking support, and improve
training, programs, and policies aimed at supporting those affected by inappropriate
sexual behaviour (Deschamps, 2015; OAG, 2018).
8. Dr. Krystal Hachey, Dr. Karen Davis, Dr. Deanna Messervey, Dr. Manon LeBlanc, and Dr. Stacey
Silins contributed to this section of the chapter.
• Bystander behaviour. Using qualitative interviews, focus groups, and surveys, the goal is
to understand psychological, social, and organizational factors that affect military
members’ responses to incidents of inappropriate sex- and gender-based misconduct.
Results will help inform bystander training and organizational cultural practices and
assumptions that discourage reporting (Deschamps, 2015; Davis, 2015).
• Socialization. Using qualitative interviews and focus groups, the goal is to understand the
impact of gender-related values and conduct on socialization during entry-level and
post-entry level training, and within military units and deployed operational units. The
results are currently being applied to help identify informal cultural learning that
shapes assumptions and behaviours during socialization (Davis, 2015).
• Leadership dynamics. Using qualitative interviews and focus groups, the goal is to
understand challenges and barriers faced at and across different levels of leadership. As
various phases of analyses are completed, the results contribute to an understanding of
how different levels of leadership respond to sexual misconduct (Davis, 2015).
• Measuring and monitoring culture change (OAG, 2018). By examining current literature
and ways to measure culture change, the goal was to identify the antecedents and
impacts of sexual misconduct and other types of unethical behaviour in the CAF
workplace climate and across dimensions of the culture. This work resulted in the
development of a strategy to measure and monitor culture change in the CAF (Davis &
Squires, under review), which will integrate a range of research initiatives across the
Personnel Readiness Program.
In tandem with this research, the Defence Ethics Research Program supports National
Defence and the CAF by examining the causes of unethical behaviour, ethical risk factors
and outcomes in the organization, and evidence-based approaches to minimizing ethical
risk. Drawing on social and organizational psychology, Director General Military Personnel
Research and Analysis uses a variety of methods to answer research questions related to
these issues. These methods include surveys and experimental research (Blanc, Warner,
Ivey, & Messervey, 2018; Messervey & Davis, 2016; Messervey & Peach, 2014; Messervey &
Squires, 2014; O’Keefe, Messervey, & Squires, 2018; O’Keefe, Peach, & Messervey, 2019).
The impact.
The research discussed above is integral to broader initiatives that support an ethical and
respectful military culture, contributing to the Sexual Misconduct Response Centre and the
CAF Strategic Response Team on Sexual Misconduct. This research additionally supports
policy and prevention strategies, cultural change, and a more effective response to incidents
of sexual misconduct. Ethics research by Director General Military Personnel Research and
Analysis has also influenced ethics training and education internally (e.g., Defence Ethics
Programme, Canadian Army Ethics Programme) and externally (e.g., Australian Defence
Force, Carleton University, the United Kingdom’s Ministry of Defence, the United States
Army War College).
9
ASTRONAUT SELECTION
The challenge.
The Canadian Space Agency (CSA) was about to launch a nation-wide recruitment
campaign in 2016, with the aim of selecting two new astronaut recruits. CSA asked National
Defence for its selection and fitness expertise to evaluate astronaut candidates. With 3,772
Canadians applying for just two positions, it was critical that the selection system be
standardized, objective, and defendable.
In developing a selection system, defence researchers first reviewed the previous job
analysis from CSA’s 2008 campaign. With long-range missions to Mars fast approaching
and Chris Hadfield’s explosive impact on social media, the job of an astronaut had changed
enough to warrant an updated job analysis.
Selection experts conducted a focus group with current and retired astronauts to discuss
the typical outputs and tasks of an astronaut, including the knowledge, skills, abilities and
other attributes (KSAOs), as well as the physical requirements of the job (Klammer & Collins,
2016). Several researchers then grouped the KSAOs into 17 competencies. Given the large
number of competencies required and the selection process’s high visibility on social media,
the system had to be flexible enough to assess multiple behavioural and physical attributes
across a large number of applicants within a short time.
Defence researchers decided to use the assessment centre methodology, a process which
includes the development and use of a variety of different tools (e.g., roleplay exercises,
structured interviews) to assess attributes linked to successful performance in a particular
job or role (Thornton & Rupp, 2006). In a typical assessment centre, candidates perform a
variety of job-related exercises designed to simulate realistic situations faced by individuals
working in the occupation (e.g., astronauts).
CSA reviewed all applications and selected 1,000 applicants for online testing, further
reducing the number of applicants to the 100 who completed a medical screening.
Simultaneously, National Defence selection experts developed definitions for each of the
17 competencies, along with behavioural anchored rating scales and exercises to assess
the competencies. Two separate and complementary assessment centres were created
(Klammer, Collins, Gagnon, & Walsh, 2018; Collins, Klammer, Gagnon, & Walsh, 2018).
Seventy-two applicants who passed the medical screening were first invited to St. Jean,
Quebec, where trained assessors observed the applicants in a variety of team exercises,
physical fitness tests, and objective measures, such as a working memory test. Those who
were successful (n = 32) went on to complete the second assessment centre, located in
Halifax, Nova Scotia, where they underwent additional assessment which included
leadership assessments and exercises with high fidelity to induce stress. Each candidate
was presented to a selection board who decided on which applicants continued on in the
selection process.
In both assessment centres, candidates received several realistic job previews—including
9. Major Lenora Collins contributed to this section of the chapter.

a session with a current serving astronaut—to give them a picture of the commitment
required to become a Canadian astronaut.
The impact.
Following the two assessment centres, CSA conducted a further selection session on
robotics, media assessments, in-depth medicals, and a final selection interview, which
resulted in the selection of Dr. Jennifer Sidey-Gibbons and Joshua Kutryk.
10
JOINT TASK FORCE NORTH
The challenge.
Members of the CAF are relocated from one base to another throughout their careers.
Called “postings,” the number and frequency of relocations depend on the member’s
occupation and rank. One posting is to Joint Task Force North ( JTFN) in Yellowknife,
Northwest Territories. Because JTFN is classified as an isolated posting, members have to
undergo screening before being posted to this location. Despite this, personnel arriving at
JTFN were not prepared for the realities of life in a northern environment, resulting in
increased work stress, financial hardship, marital and family problems, and mental health
issues. The Joint Task Force leadership was concerned that the unique challenges of living
and working in the north were not well known to personnel posted to JTFN and that the
unique stressors were not well understood by the personnel who conducted the screenings.
Researchers suggested developing a realistic living conditions preview, an extension of the

realistic job preview (Ebel-Lam & MacArthur, 2015), which would show the unique living
conditions of the north as well as the realities of working in a highly operational unit.
Focus groups with military members, National Defence employees, and military spouses
were used to collect key themes about the living conditions at JTFN and the challenges and
opportunities that come with a posting to Yellowknife.
The impact.
This research resulted in an education tool that provides military members with an
honest view of the challenges and benefits of a posting to JTFN in Yellowknife. The tool
provides a candid overview of postings in this location as well as advice from current Team
North personnel on how incoming members can increase their chances of adjusting to
(and thriving in) their new working and living conditions. Although subsequent research
has not been conducted to assess the impact of the realistic preview, anecdotal evidence
from support staff in this location indicates that there have been fewer issues with personnel
adjustment and unmet expectations since this resource was implemented.
10. Major Lenora Collins and Dr. Anna Ebel-Lam contributed to this section of the chapter.
11
PROJECT HORIZON: EARLY CAREER RETENTION IN THE CANADIAN ARMED FORCES
The challenge.
The effectiveness of any military depends on its success in recruiting individuals to a

variety of occupations. Thus, the retention of military personnel during the early career
period has been a long-standing interest of the CAF’s. The current personnel retention
strategy focuses on addressing job dissatisfiers and creating a positive work environment
to foster long-term commitment and retention of CAF members. This is typically done
through the development of personnel programs and policies that promote quality of
life, job satisfaction, and employee recognition (Chief of Military Personnel, 2009).
Psychological research into factors influencing personnel commitment and retention
informs these programs and policies.
One particular research initiative, called Project Horizon, focused on early career
retention (i.e., retention within the first few years of enrollment in the military). Following
a review of various research methods (e.g., Day, Bourgeois, & Catano, 2012), researchers
proposed using a longitudinal panel research design, which involves repeated measurements
of constructs and factors using surveys administered at various points in members’ careers
to assess changes in attitudes over time and to investigate factors that cause such changes
(Goldenberg, 2012; Laplante, Otis, & Goldenberg, 2016).
Project Horizon assessed factors relevant to predicting attrition and retention, such as
psychological conditions (e.g., anxiety, depression), dispositional factors, such as the Big
Five personality factors, as well as traits such as hardiness and positive and negative affect,
social factors (e.g., organizational support, social support, supervisor support), and members’
expectations (e.g., perceived fit, psychological contract). Other factors related to prior
exposure to, or familiarity with, the military were also studied. Several outcome measures
were used as indicators of retention and attrition, including newcomer adjustment, job
satisfaction, organizational commitment, and turnover intentions.
Longitudinal tracking was done through a series of surveys administered to all CAF
recruits who started the basic training course over a period of two years (three years in the
case of officer cadets). Between September 2014 and July 2018, surveys were administered at
the beginning of the basic training course, at the end of basic training, three months after
basic training, and six months after that—thus covering the entire first year of a recruit’s life
in the CAF. Planning is underway for the next phase of data collection (when participants
reach five years of service).
Although data from the various phases and from auxiliary data sources (e.g., selection
measures, attrition data) are currently in the process of being linked to each other, cross-
sectional data (from within each phase) have been analyzed and have provided some insights
into the factors affecting retention. For example, morale (e.g., level of motivation, drive
and enthusiasm during training) and intentions to stay in the CAF were most strongly
related to person–organization fit (i.e., a recruit’s perceptions of the fit between their own
values and the CAF’s), a calling work orientation (i.e., the extent to which recruits’ work is
11. Dr. Joelle Laplante contributed to this section of the chapter.

integral to their lives and identity), and the extent to which recruits felt they were given
sufficient information and support on the first day of their basic training (Laplante et al.,
2016). Six months later, the variables most strongly associated with morale, organizational
commitment, and intentions to stay in the CAF were person–job fit, the meaningfulness
of work, and work–life balance (i.e., the extent to which recruits were able to balance the
demands of training and their personal life; Goldenberg, Laplante, Otis, & Pearce, 2019).
The impact.
Findings like these not only help us understand recruits’ intentions to stay in the CAF,
but they have also informed the CAF’s personnel retention strategy and the programs and
policies that affect retention.
USING BEHAVIOURAL INSIGHTS IN PERSONNEL RESEARCH
The challenge.
Behavioural insights is a multidisciplinary approach that draws on psychology,

behavioural economics, and social marketing to influence positive behavioural change and
policy implementation at the grassroots level (see Ariely, 2008; Kahneman, 2011; Thaler &
Sunstein, 2008). The challenge for the CAF and National Defence was to make the most of
this research to effect positive changes in the organization.
In August 2017, Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis established a
behavioural insights team, the Personnel Research in Action (PRiA) team, with a mandate
to translate behavioural insights into policy and practice to influence behaviour toward
positive ends. The key functions of PRiA are as follows: develop and maintain expertise
in behavioural economics, program assessment, science–policy integration, and iterative
design methods; bring together stakeholders from research, policy, and practice to design,
implement, assess, measure, and quantify the cost–benefit behavioural economics
interventions; and develop networks or clusters with other government departments,
academia, industry, and allied research organizations to apply behavioural insights to CAF
and National Defence issues.
The impact.
Among PRiA’s first initiatives was to help strengthen the CAF’s recruitment process. PRiA
developed a series of email messages—called “nudges,” which influence decision making
without constraining freedom of choice—to encourage applicants to remain in the
recruitment process (Gooch & Kemp, 2018; O’Keefe, Gooch, & Kemp 2018a; O’Keefe, Gooch,
& Kemp, 2018b). A second contribution to the recruiting process was the Practice Canadian
Forces Aptitude Test, which was made available to prospective CAF recruits (Kemp, 2018;
Kemp & Gooch, 2019). The practice test simulates the conditions and questions on the
official Canadian Forces Aptitude Test, so prospects can experience a realistic version of the
official test before taking it at a recruiting centre. The purpose of the practice test is to lessen
test-takers’ anxiety, to build their confidence, and to encourage test-takers to continue with
the recruiting process.
Other initiatives supported by PRiA include encouraging self-declaration among visible
minority applicants to ensure that the CAF is representative of the Canadian population;
encouraging CAF members to attend their annual fitness test; and encouraging retiring
members to use all available resources as part of their career transition from military to
civilian life.
12
ADVANCING PERSONNEL RESEARCH WITH MULTIPLE DISCIPLINARY APPROACHES
With the increasing complexity of defence and security issues, researchers from various
disciplines are being called upon to take more robust theoretical approaches and methods to
advance the military research that informs policies, programs, and senior leaders’ decision
making.
Interdisciplinary, multidisciplinary, and transdisciplinary approaches provide a more
holistic understanding of problems and capability gaps. An interdisciplinary approach
synthesizes different methods and theoretical approaches across disciplines to solve a
particular problem. A multidisciplinary approach uses different disciplines to examine a
particular problem but provides potential solutions through the respective disciplines. A
transdisciplinary approach considers multiple disciplines in identifying optimal and holistic
solutions to a given problem but also takes into consideration stakeholder and community
perspectives. By incorporating multiple disciplinary approaches, researchers are able to
generate additional knowledge, skills, abilities, and expertise to advance evidenced-based
solutions to research problems.
It is important for researchers to examine the merits of working in collaborative teams and
settings composed of people who come from various disciplines (e.g., clinical psychologists,
psychological scientists, sociologists, economists, engineers, computer scientists, and
physicists) to better address research problems. In the military context, multiple disciplinary
approaches help researchers to advance their knowledge, skills, and capacity in addressing
complex research problems. Multiple disciplinary approaches lead to better integration
of knowledge, skills, and expertise, and can further provide a more holistic approach to
understanding organizational, national, and international priorities impacting defence and
security.
EDUCATION IN APPLIED MILITARY PSYCHOLOGY

13
THE ROYAL MILITARY COLLEGE OF CANADA
The Royal Military College of Canada (RMC), established in 1876, is widely recognized
as a “university with a difference.” Most universities in Canada operate within provincially
established guidelines, but RMC, as a federal university, receives funding and control via the
federal government of Canada. Undergraduate students attending RMC become members
of the Canadian Armed Forces (CAF) prior to commencing studies and their job for the
next 4 – 5 years is to be a student. This means that their education is free and the students
12. Dr. Barbara Waruszynski contributed to this section of the chapter.

13. Dr. Allister MacIntyre and Dr. Danielle Charbonneau contributed to this section of the chapter.
receive a salary while in attendance. These students represent the future leadership of the
CAF and, upon completing their degrees; the graduates receive a Queen’s commission as
officers in the CAF. A broad range of degree options in the Arts, Sciences and Engineering
are available, with the understanding that the degree choice must compatible with the CAF
occupation they have been assigned. The focus at RMC is on more than simply academics.
In order to graduate, students must achieve acceptable standards in the “Four Pillars.”
These four distinct pillars include academics, fitness, military/leadership and bilingualism
(Canada’s two official languages, English and French). In addition to the undergraduate
program, which educates students for careers in the CAF, RMC offers university courses
to hundreds of military and civilian members of the Department of National Defence by
distance through its Division of Continuing Studies. Finally, at the graduate level, RMC
offers Masters and PhD programs in Arts, Sciences and Engineering. Some of these
programs are open to non-government civilian applicants. Graduates of RMC possess
unique abilities and capabilities and universally occupy positions of responsibility and
leadership throughout Canada and the world.
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREES IN PSYCHOLOGY
The undergraduate program in psychology at the Royal Military College of Canada meets
the needs of those enrolled in a Bachelor of Arts Honours Psychology or a Bachelor of
Arts Psychology degree (RMC, 2018). The program offers a mix of foundational courses
in psychology and required courses in leadership, ethics, and military professionalism that
focus on the military workplace and military operations. Courses in the program examine
topics in military psychology, personnel psychology, leadership and ethics, as well as basic
experimental psychology. Optional courses include group dynamics, counselling, cross-
cultural psychology, and persuasion and influence. As much as possible, the psychology
professors use military examples to illustrate the principles discussed in courses.
ACADEMIC POSITIONS AT THE ROYAL MILITARY COLLEGE OF CANADA
With respect to academic positions, the Department of Military Psychology and

Leadership at the Royal Military College of Canada has eight civilian psychologists with
doctorates. These positions are similar to those in civilian universities in that they entail
teaching, conducting research, and holding some administrative positions. For about 15
years, psychology faculty members at the Royal Military College of Canada have also
provided 360 degree leadership assessments to experienced military personnel taking the
year-long Joint Command and Security Program, and National Security Program. The
confidential assessments, which are conducted for developmental purposes, have
participants complete a self-report questionnaire on their leadership behaviours and habits,
and then provide the names of subordinates, peers, and supervisors to evaluate them on
the same questionnaire. Individual reports are prepared and sent to participants about one
or two weeks before a coaching session. Coaches are either faculty members at the Royal
Military College of Canada or CAF veterans with a minimum of a master’s degree and an
appropriate set of skills and experience. Coaching focuses on the areas in which participants
or their raters have identified as areas for improvement. At the end of the coaching session,
there is a course requirement for participants to prepare and submit a developmental plan
to their coach.
CONCLUSION
Applied psychology in the CAF has evolved significantly from its early days during the
Second World War when it focused on personnel selection. As this chapter shows,
psychology now plays a variety of roles, such as clinical and counselling support, applied
research, and the CAF now provides teaching opportunities. We hope that this chapter has
piqued the interest of aspiring psychologists to consider a career helping the brave people
who serve Canada!
REFERENCES
Anderson, W. F. (1991). Personnel Selection Branch: 1941–1966. In Special Anniversary Issue

of The PSO Forum, 12(1), 10–16. Kingston, ON: Department of National Defence.
Ariely, D. (2008). Predictably irrational: The hidden forces that shape our decisions. Toronto, ON:
Harper-Collins.
Blanc, J.-R., Warner, C. H., Ivey, G. W., & Messervey, D. L. (2018). Association between
unethical battlefield conduct and mental health: Implications for leaders and ethical risk
assessments. Psychology of Violence, 8(2), 250–258.
Canadian Armed Forces. (2019). Personnel Selection Officer. Retrieved from https://forces.ca/
en/career/personnel-selection-officer/
Canadian Armed Forces and Veterans Affairs Canada. (2017). CAF-VAC Joint Suicide Prevention
Strategy. Retrieved from: http://publications.gc.ca/collections/collection_2017/mdn-dnd/
D2-392-2017-1-eng.pdf
Chief of Military Personnel. (2009). Military Personnel Retention Strategy (Technical Report
5000-1). Ottawa, ON: Department of National Defence.
Collins, L. A., Klammer, J. D., Gagnon, P., & Walsh, E. S. (2018). Astronaut assessment centre
2 (AAC 2) (Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis, Scientific Report,
DRDC-RDDC-2018-R192). Defence Research and Development Canada, Ottawa, ON.
Davis, K. D. (2015). DGMPRA response to external review into sexual misconduct and sexual
harassment in the Canadian Armed Forces: Draft research plan (Director General Military
Personnel Research and Analysis Scientific Letter DRDC-RDDC-2015L219). Ottawa, ON:
Defence Research and Development Canada.
Davis, K. D. (2016, October). Culture, sexual harassment, and sexual misconduct in the Canadian
Armed Forces: Research response to the external review into sexual misconduct and sexual
harassment in the Canadian Armed Forces. Paper presented at the Inter-University Seminar
on Armed Forces & Society, Ottawa, Canada.
Davis, K. D., & Squires, E. C. (under review). Culture shift and sexual misconduct:
Measurement and monitoring strategy (Director General Military Personnel Research and
Analysis Scientific Report). Ottawa, ON: Defence Research and Development Canada.
Day, A., Bourgeois, D., & Catano, V. (2012). Longitudinal personnel survey research in military
organizations: Review and methodological considerations (Director General Military Personnel
Research and Analysis Contract Report DRDC-RDDC2012-013). Ottawa, ON: Defence
Research and Development Canada.
Deschamps, M. (2015). External review into sexual misconduct and sexual harassment in the
Canadian Armed Forces. Retrieved from https://www.canada.ca/content/dam/dnd-mdn/
migration/assets/FORCES_Internet/docs/en/caf-community-support-services-
harassment/era-final-report-april-20-2015-eng.pdf
Ebel-Lam, A., & MacArthur, M. (2015). Developing a realistic living conditions preview (RLCP)
for Joint Task Force North (JTFN): An overview of the challenges and opportunities inherent
in CAF postings to Yellowknife, NWT (Director General Military Personnel Research and
Analysis Scientific Report DRDC-RDDC2015-R247). Ottawa, ON: Defence Research and
Development Canada.
Fortney, J. C., Unützer, J., Wrenn, G., Pyne, J. M., Smith, G. R., Schoenbaum, M., & Harbin, H.
T. (2016). A tipping point for measurement-based care. Psychiatric Services, 68(2), 179–188.
Gal, R., & Mangelsdorff, A. D. (Eds.). (1992). Handbook of military psychology. New York, NY:
Wiley.
Goldenberg, I. (2012). The CAF Retention Survey: Methodological refinements in preparation for the
2012 administration (Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis Technical
Memorandum 2012-007). Ottawa, ON: Defence Research and Development Canada.
Goldenberg, I., Laplante, J., Otis, N., & Pearce, S. (2019). Three months after basic training:
Project Horizon Phase 3 descriptive, qualitative, and correlational results (Director General
Military Personnel Research and Analysis Scientific Report DRDC-RDDC-2019-R002).
Ottawa, ON: Defence Research and Development Canada.
Gooch, S. & Kemp, C. (2018). Results of a messaging study to encourage CAF prospects to continue
with the application process. Nudge 03: File Closed – No Further Contact (Director General
Military Personnel Research and Analysis Scientific Letter DRDC-RDDC-2018-L234).
Ottawa, ON: Defence Research and Development Canada.
Harding, K. J., Rush, A. J., Arbuckle, M., Trivedi, M. H., & Pincus, H. A. (2011). Measurement-
based care in psychiatric practice: A policy framework for implementation. Journal of
Clinical Psychiatry, 72, 1136–1143.
Helfrich, C. D., Li, Y. F., Sharp, N. D., & Sales, A. E. (2009). Organizational readiness to change
assessment (ORCA): Development of an instrument based on the Promoting Action on
Research in Health Services (PARIHS) framework. Implementation Science, 4(1), 38.
Ivey, G. W., Blanc, J. R, Michaud, K., & Dobreva-Martinova, T. (2018). A measure and
model of psychological health and safety in the workplace that reflects Canada’s National
Standard. Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences, 35, 509–522. doi: 10.1002/cjas.1500
Kahneman, D. (2011). Thinking, fast and slow. London, UK: Allen Lane.
Kemp, C. (2018). Automated test assembly for constructing parallel forms of the Canadian Forces
Aptitude Test (Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis Scientific Report
R18-0625-00426). Ottawa, ON: Defence Research and Development Canada.
Kemp, C., & Gooch S. (2019). The construction and online implementation of the PCFAT: A
realistic practice version of the Canadian Armed Forces Aptitude Test (Director General Military
Personnel Research and Analysis Scientific Letter DRDC-RDDC-2019-L086). Ottawa, ON:
Kennedy, C. H., & Zillmer, E. A. (Eds.). (2006). Military psychology: Clinical and operational
applications. New York, NY: Guilford.
Klammer, J. D., & Collins, L. A. (2016). Canadian astronaut job analysis update (Director General
Military Personnel Research and Analysis, Scientific Letter, DRDC-RDDC-2016-L145).
Defence Research and Development Canada, Ottawa, ON.Klammer, J. D., Collins, L. A.,
Gagnon, P., & Walsh, E. S. (2018). Astronaut assessment centre 1 (AAC 1) (Director General
Military Personnel Research and Analysis, Scientific Report, DRDC-RDDC-2018-R191).
Defence Research and Development Canada, Ottawa, ON.
Krägeloh, C. U., Czuba, K. J., Billington, D. R., Kersten, P., & Siegert, R. J. (2015). Using
feedback from patient-reported outcome measures in mental health services: A scoping
study and typology. Psychiatric Services, 66(3), 224–241.
Lambert, M. (2007). Presidential address: What we have learned from a decade of research
aimed at improving psychotherapy outcomes in routine care. Psychotherapy Research, 17(1),
1–14.
Lamerson, D. D. (2002). Psychology in the Canadian Forces. Canadian Journal of Behavioural
Science, 34(2), 71–74.
Laplante, J., Otis, N., & Goldenberg, I. (2016). Project Horizon: Early career longitudinal retention
study – Research design (Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis
Scientific Report DRDC-RDDC-2016-R010). Ottawa, ON: Defence Research and
Development Canada.
Laurence, J. H., & Matthews, M. D. (Eds.). (2012). Handbook of military psychology. Oxford
Handbooks online. doi: 10.1093/oxfordhb/9780195399325.013.0011
McHugh, R. K., & Barlow, D. (2012). Dissemination and implementation of evidence-based
psychological intentions. New York, NY: Oxford U. P.
McMillan, S. K., Stevens, S., & Kelloway, E. K. (2009). History and development of industrial/
organizational psychology in the Canadian Forces Personnel Selection Branch:
1938–2009. Canadian Psychology, 50(4), 283–291.
Messervey, D. L., & Davis, K. (2016). Mitigating the ethical risk of sexual misconduct in
organizations. In S. Belanger & D. Lagace-Roy (Eds.), Military operations and the mind: War
ethics and soldiers’ well-being (pp. 209–232). Montreal, QC: McGill-Queen’s U. P.
Messervey, D. L., & Peach, J. (2014). Battlefield ethics: What influences ethical behaviour on
operations? In G. Ivey, K. Sudom, W. Dean, & M. Tremblay (Eds.), The human dimensions
of operations: A personnel research perspective (pp. 83–101). Kingston, ON: Canadian Defence
Academy Press.
Messervey, D. L., & Squires, E. C. (2014). An evidence-based approach to understanding
how leaders can foster ethical behaviour. In D. Lindsay & D. Woycheshin (Eds.), Adaptive
leadership in the military context: International perspectives (pp. 61–80). Kingston, ON:
Canadian Defence Academy Press.
National Defence and the Canadian Armed Forces. (2015). CDS Op Order – Op HONOUR.
Retrieved from https://www.canada.ca/content/dam/dnd-mdn/migration/assets/
FORCES_Internet/docs/en/caf-community-support-services-harassment/cds-op-order-
op-honour.pdf
National Defence and the Canadian Armed Forces. (2017). Strong, secure, engaged: Canada’s
defence policy. Retrieved from http://dgpaapp.forces.gc.ca/en/canada-defence-policy/docs/
canada-defence-policy-report.pdf
O’Keefe, D. F., Gooch, S., & Kemp, C. (2018a). Results of a CAF messaging study to encourage
applicants to consider priority occupations. Nudge 01: File Closed – No SIP (Director General
Military Personnel Research and Analysis Scientific Letter 2018-L374). Ottawa, ON:
O’Keefe, D. F., Gooch, S., & Kemp, C. (2018b). Results of a CAF messaging study to encourage
CAF prospects to continue with the application process. Nudge 02: File Closed NFC (Director
General Military Personnel Research and Analysis Scientific Letter 2018-L373). Ottawa,
ON: Defence Research and Development Canada.
O’Keefe, D. F., Messervey, D., & Squires, E. C. (2018). Promoting ethical and prosocial
behavior: The combined effect of ethical leadership and coworker ethicality. Ethics &
Behavior, 28(3), 235–260. doi: 10.1080/10508422.2017.1365607
O’Keefe, D. F., Peach, J., & Messervey, D. (2019). The combined effect of ethical leadership,
moral identity, and organizational identification on workplace behavior. Journal of
Leadership Studies, 13(1), 20–35.
Office of the Auditor General of Canada (2018). Report 5 – Inappropriate Sexual Behaviour
in the Canadian Armed Forces. Retrieved from http://www.oag-bvg.gc.ca/internet/English/
parl_oag_201811_05_e_43203.html#hd2e.
Pearson, C., Zamorski, M., & Janz, T. (2014). Mental health of the Canadian Armed Forces.
Ottawa, ON: Statistics Canada.
Prociuk, T. J. (1988). Applied psychology in the Canadian Forces: An overview of current
research. Canadian Psychology, 29, 94–102.
Royal Military College of Canada. (2018). Undergraduate calendar. Retrieved from
https://www.rmc-cmr.ca/en/registrars-office/psychology-undergraduate-programme
Scott, K., & Lewis, C. C. (2015). Using measurement-based care to enhance any treatment.
Cognitive and Behavioral Practice, 22(1), 49–59.
Steinfeld, B., Franklin, A., Mercer, B., Fraynt, R., & Simon, G. (2016). Progress monitoring in
an integrated health care system: Tracking behavioral health vital signs. Administration and
Policy in Mental Health, 43, 369–378. doi:10.1007/s10488-015-0648-7
Steinfeld, B., Scott, J., Vilander, G., Marx, L., Quirk, M., Lindberg, J., & Koerner, K. (2015).
The role of lean process improvement in implementation of evidence-based practices in
behavioral health care. Journal of Behavioral Health Services and Research, 42(4), 504–518.
Thaler, R. H., & Sunstein, C. R. (2008). Nudge: Improving decisions about health, wealth, and
happiness. New York, NY: Penguin.
Thornton, G. C., III, & Rupp, D. E. (2006). Assessment centers in human resources management:
Strategies for prediction, diagnosis, and development. New York, NY: Psychology Press.
Williams, N. J., Glisson, C., Hemmelgarn, A., & Green, P. (2017). Mechanisms of change in the
ARC organizational strategy: Increasing mental health clinicians’ EBP adoption through
improved organizational culture and capacity. Administration and Policy in Mental Health
and Mental Health Services Research, 44(2), 269–283.

O’Keefe, D., Urban, S., & Darr, W. (2019). Psychology in the Military. In M. E. Norris (Ed.),
psychologycareers/chapter/psychology-in-the-military/
CONTRIBUTORS
The following individuals, in alphabetical order, contributed to this book chapter:

Dr. Sylvie Bourgeois, Canadian Special Operations Forces Command
Dr. Danielle Charbonneau, Royal Military College of Canada
Major Lenora Collins, Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis
Dr. Karen Davis, Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis
Dr. Susan Dowler, Canadian Armed Health Services
Dr. Anna Ebel-Lam, Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis
Dr. Eva Guerin, Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis
Dr. Krystal Hachey, Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis
Dr. Joelle Laplante, Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis
Dr. Manon LeBlanc, Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis
Dr. Jennifer Lee, Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis
Dr. Allister MacIntyre, Royal Military College of Canada
Dr. Deanna Messervey, Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis
Lieutenant Colonel Rob Morrow, Director General Military Personnel Research and
Analysis
Dr. Stacey Silins, Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis
Lieutenant Colonel Cindy Suurd Ralph, Director General Military Personnel Research and
Analysis
Dr. Barbara Waruszynski, Director General Military Personnel Research and Analysis

The Canadian Handbook For Careers in Psychological Science 1575306945

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Canadian Handbook For Careers in Psychological Science 1575306945

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Canadian Handbook For Careers in Psychological Science 1575306945

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Canadian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science

THE CANADIAN HANDBOOK FOR

1. An Introduction to Careers in the Psychological Sciences 1

2. Introduction to Career Development 22

3. Research Methods in the Psychological Sciences 52

4. The Essence of Ethics for Psychologists and Aspiring Psychologists 82

5. Clinical Psychological Science 130

6. Applications and Careers for Counsellors and Counselling Psychologists 151

7. Social Psychology 174

8. Developmental Psychology 195

9. Neuroscience and Careers 220

10. Industrial/Organizational Psychology 240

11. Psychology and the Law in Canada 258

12. Sport Psychology 282

13. Environmental Psychology 308

15. Psychology in the Military 354

Evidence-based psychology programs all explicitly include content related to these

Please reference this chapter as

Image source: https://binged.it/2rbC44b

AN INTRODUCTION TO CAREERS IN THE

Meghan E. Norris, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University

Tyson W. Baker, Department of Psychology, Queen’s University

WELCOME TO PSYCHOLOGICAL SCIENCE

Welcome to the world of psychological science–I’m so thrilled to share the world of

WHAT IS PSYCHOLOGICAL SCIENCE?

WHAT DO EMPLOYERS WANT

According to a survey of employers conducted by the National Association of Colleges and

Goal 1: Knowledge Base in Psychology

Goal 2: Scientific Inquiry and Critical Thinking

Goal 3: Ethical and Social Responsibility in a Diverse World

Goal 5: Professional Development

PSYCHOLOGY AND THE SCIENTIFIC METHOD

CAREERS IN PSYCHOLOGICAL SCIENCE

An undergraduate degree in psychological science is effective preparation for many types

in psychological science would design an experiment to test the effects of Treatment X to

IDENTIFYING POSSIBLE PATHWAYS

The Broad Search Strategy

Step 2: Identifying Common Requirements: Do you notice any common requirements

The Targeted Search Strategy

COMMON PROFESSIONAL SKILLS, KNOWLEDGE, AND ETIQUETTE BEHAVIOURS

SEARCHING FOR EVIDENCE

In psychological science, our gold standard for evidence is peer-reviewed scholarly

Where to find peer-reviewed articles

Changes Happening in Peer-Reviewed Research

varies significantly across professional bodies. To give an example, in some professional

1. What exactly is it that I need help with?

Dear [Ms. CEO],

Thanks for your time!

With kind regards,

Dear [Dr. Lastname],

Thanks for your time!

With kind regards,

Sometimes an uncomfortable task, you will undoubtedly have to leave a voicemail at

Asking for letters of reference/experience

General information to help set the context:

1. The nature of the programs you are applying to

2. An overview of the submission process

Specific information to help write a strong letter:

4. Volunteer and work experience (both academic and non-academic)